All Specs - P34 PDF

MIVIDA Development Office Park
Parcel 34 Specifications
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- ARCH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,

concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication,

bending, and placement.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified

professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Material certificates.
G. Material test reports.
H. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete products.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel.
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in

the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete,"

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
Parcel 34 1 of 1243
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: with power float.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
1. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I zinc coated

after fabrication and bending.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in
place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same

type, brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II Type III Type V
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to
alkali in cement.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum

aggregate size.
D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be

compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble
chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use
calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
Parcel 34 2 of 1243
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C

494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured

for application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

Class B, dissipating.
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

Class B, non-dissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not
interfere with bonding of floor covering.
G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM

C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content
of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C

1315, Type 1, Class A.
1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content
of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated

cellulosic fiber.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on
the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI
301.
Parcel 34 3 of 1243
B. Cementitious Materials: With written permission of the Engineer, use fly ash,
pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to
reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by
not less than 40 percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or admixture in concrete,

as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high
temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be
watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below
0.50.
D. Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 105 lb/cu. ft., plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft.
as determined by ASTM C 567.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for
nominal maximum aggregate size greater than 3/8 inch.
5. Air Content: 7 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for
nominal maximum aggregate size 3/8 inch or less.
6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
7. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at
manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.
2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete

according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is
above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34 4 of 1243
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that
might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,

alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing

reinforcement.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not

impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a
depth equal to at least one fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool
marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints
into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler

strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
Parcel 34 5 of 1243
E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to

manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and

embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such

thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened
enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed
continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according

to ACI 301.
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material

with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other
projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if

area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high
spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is
left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate
concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and
restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and
appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and
ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
Parcel 34 6 of 1243
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces

if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h
before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but
before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following
methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven
days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with
sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes
or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray
or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing

compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method
recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless
manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding
of floor covering used on Project.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs

indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy
rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours
later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by

Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to
Architect's approval.
3.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing and Inspecting: SRP will self-perform field tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION 033000
Parcel 34 7 of 1243
Division 03 - Concrete – STR- Section 03 00 00 -Concrete- General
1 Part 1: General
1.01 Description
A. Related Sections:
1. General Requirements: Division 1
B. Definitions:
1. Concrete work: Cast-in-place structural concrete for use in buildings, paving, and
appurtenances. Specific aspects of concrete work are specified in other sections:
a. Testing: Section 03 00 01.
b. Formwork: Section 03 10 00.
c. Reinforcement: Section 03 20 00.
d. Cast in-place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
e. Precast Structural Concrete: Section 03 40 00.
g. Architectural Precast Concrete: Section 03 41 00
2. Approved or permitted: Approved or permitted by Engineer.
3. Exposed construction: Exposed to view.
4. Exposed to public view: Situated so that it can be seen from eye level from a
public location after completion of building. A public location is accessible to persons not
responsible for operation or maintenance.
5. Normal weight concrete: Concrete for which density is not a controlling attribute,
made with aggregates of types covered by ASTM C33, usually having unit weights in
range of 2160 to 2560 kg/cu m.
6. Required: Required by Contract Documents.
7. Submitted: Submitted to the Engineer for review.
C. The provisions of these specifications govern wherever applicable to conditions

and types of work that occur on particular job except as otherwise provided in Contract
Documents. In case of conflicting requirements, Contract Documents govern.
1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not allow construction loads to exceed superimposed load which member, with
necessary supplemental support, is capable of carrying safely and without damage.
Amount, method of distributing and proposed supplemental support of loads during
construction is responsibility of Contractor.
B. American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford Station, Detroit, Michigan

48219:
1. SP-15-89: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building (ACI Field Reference
Manual)
2. 116R-90: Cement and Concrete Terminology (Report of Committee 116), 1990
3. SP-21: Epoxies with Concrete
Parcel 34 8 of 1243
4. ACI 211.1-89 : Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,

Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
5. ACI 212.3R-89: Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
6. ACI 214-77: Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength (1983) Test
Results of Concrete
7. ACI 302.1R-89: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
8. ACI 304-73: Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, (1983) Transporting,
and Placing Concrete
9. ACI 304.2R-71: Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods - Committee (R 1982)
Report, 1982, Committee 304
10. ACI 308-81: Standard Practice for Curing Concrete (R 1986)
11. ACI 309 R 87: Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete
12. ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
13. 503 R-89: Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete
C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 933 N. Plum Grove Road, Schaumburg, IL

60195: "Placing Reinforcing Bars," 1983.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34 9 of 1243
Section 03 00 01 – Concrete Testing Evaluation
1 Part 1: General
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related sections:
1. General requirements: Division 1.
2. General requirements for concrete work: Section 03 00 00.
B. Test concrete materials and inspect operations as work progresses. Failure to

detect defective work or material shall not prevent later rejection when such defect is
discovered nor shall it obligate Engineer for final acceptance.
C. Payment for testing:
1. Pay for testing services required in paragraph "Responsibilities and Duties of

Contractor".
2. Routine testing of concrete furnished to job site for compliance with Contract
Documents will be performed entirely by Contractor at his expense. Routine testing
consists of tests for compressive strength, slump, air, temperature and unit weight. Three
sets of three cylinders each shall be cast for every 75 m3 concrete or fraction thereof for
each mixture design placed in one day; one near the start of the pour, the second around
middle of the pour and the third near end of the pour. Three cylinders (one from each
set) shall be tested at 7 days; three cylinders (one from each set) at 28 days, and
remaining three kept reserved for 90 days strength or as required for future use.
3. In case of deficient concrete strength, contractor shall perform, at his expenses,

structural analysis core tests and load test, etc. per Specification 03 00 01-Part 3.
Parcel 34 10 of 1243
A. Standards:
1. Egyptian code for design of concrete 203 latest edition
2. ASTM-C31: Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in Field.
3. ASTM-C42: Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
4. ASTM-E329: Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and

Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction.
B. Contractor's testing agency:
1. Qualifications: Acceptable to Engineer, and meet requirements of ASTM-E329.
2. Authority: Agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax,
enlarge or release any requirement of Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept
portion of Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Project information:
1. Contractor's testing agency qualifications.
2. Production sample test reports (when required): Include same data as for mix
designs.
3. Reports of Contractor-optional tests.
4. Test reports on in-place testing, if such testing is performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR
A. Provide necessary testing services for qualification of proposed materials and

establishment of mix designs. Services performed by Contractor's testing agency.
B. Submit concrete materials and concrete mix designs proposed for use. Include
results of testing performed to qualify materials and to establish mix designs. Place no
concrete until Contractor has received approval in writing. See submittals paragraph.
C. Use of testing service shall in no way relieve Contractor of responsibility to furnish

materials and construction in full compliance with Contract Documents.
3.02 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST

RESULTS
A. Evaluate test results for standard molded and cured test cubbes separately for
each concrete mix design. For evaluation of potential strength and uniformity, each mix
design shall be represented by at least five tests.
B. Strength level of concrete will be considered acceptable so long as averages of

sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified strength (fcu)
and no individual strength test result falls below specified strength (fcu) by more than 35
MPa. Each test is the average of 2 cubes taken from same sample of concrete.
3.03 TESTING CONCRETE IN PLACE
A. When compressive strength tests show potential strength deficiency of in-place

concrete, testing of concrete in place may be required as an aid in evaluating actual
strength. If required, Contractor shall pay for concrete tests and engineering time and
analysis required to evaluate actual in-place concrete strength made necessary by
deficient strength cube tests.
B. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device: Such

tests shall be used to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure as an
aid for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests, unless properly calibrated and correlated
with other test data, will not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection.
C. Core tests: Obtain and test largest practical diameter cores (50 mm minimum), in
accord with ASTM-C42. If concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air
dry cores at temperature 16 to 26 deg C, and relative humidity less than 60 percent for 7
days before test. Test dry. If concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet
under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning.
1. Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in
place that is considered potentially deficient in strength. Location will be determined by
the Engineer. If, before testing, one or more of cores shows evidence of having been
damaged subsequent to or during removal from structure, replace it.
2. Concrete in area represented by a core test will be considered acceptable if

average strength of cores is equal to at least 85 percent of, and if no single core is less
than 75 percent of, specified strength (fcu).
3. Fill core holes with low slump patching compound per Section 03 31 01.
3.04 ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. General:
1. Completed concrete work which conforms to applicable requirements of Contract

Documents will be accepted without qualification.
2. Concrete work which fails to conform to one or more requirements of Contract

Documents is rejected and will not be accepted until remedied in accordance with 3.04 B,
3.04 C, and 3.04 D.
3. Contractor shall pay costs incurred in providing remedial work necessary to

change rejected work to accepted work. Remedial work includes, but is not necessarily
limited to, applicable repairs, replacement, reinforcement, engineering, and testing as
denoted in following paragraphs.
B. Dimensional tolerances:
1. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than permitted by

tolerances are potentially deficient in strength and subject to provisions of Paragraph
3.04 D.
2. Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than permitted by tolerances

will be rejected if strength or finish of structure is not acceptable, or function is adversely
affected or interference with other construction results. Otherwise members will be
accepted. If surfaces are rejected, and removal of excess material is permitted, repair of
surfaces in an approved manner will constitute acceptance. If surfaces are rejected, and
removal of excess material is not permitted, replacement of member(s) in an approved
manner will constitute acceptance.
3. Concrete member(s) cast in wrong location will be rejected if strength or finish is

not acceptable, function is adversely affected or they interfere with other construction.
Otherwise, member(s) will be accepted. If they are rejected, replacement of member(s) in
an approved manner and in conformance with Contract Documents will constitute
acceptance.
4. Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding limits of tolerances and which

are exposed to view will be rejected. Repair of surfaces or replacement of member(s) in
an approved manner and in conformance with Contract Documents will constitute
acceptance.
C. Finish:
1. Slabs:
a. Finished slabs exceeding tolerance limits of Section 03 31 01 will be rejected if

finish is not acceptable and function is adversely affected. If rejected, repair of finished
surfaces or replacement of slab in an approved manner and in conformance with
Contract Documents will constitute acceptance.
b. Repair may involve removing high spots with a terrazzo grinder, filling low spots
with a patching compound, or other remedial measures as permitted.
2. Formed surfaces:
a. Concrete exposed to view with defects which adversely affect appearance of

specified finish will be rejected. Repair of surface defects in conformance with Section
033102 will constitute acceptance.
b. Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective finish.
D. Strength of structure:
1. Strength of structure in place will be considered potentially deficient and will be

rejected if it fails to comply with requirements which control strength of structure,
including but not necessarily limited to following:
a. Deficient concrete strength based on compressive strength tests.
b. Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position, or arrangement at variance with

requirements on reinforcement.
c. Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as

to reduce strength.
d. Curing less than that specified, likely to result in deficient concrete strength.
e. Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of temperature during early

stages of hardening and strength development.
f. Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents or premature removal of formwork

likely to result in deficient strength.
g. Substandard workmanship likely to result in deficient strength.
2. When strength of structure is considered potentially deficient and is rejected, it will

not be accepted until one of following remedies is completed. Remedy used by
Contractor shall be approved.
a. Confirmation of safety of structure by structural analysis.
b. Core tests per 3.03 C. Performed only when concrete strength is potentially
deficient, and when safety of structure is not confirmed by structural analysis. Do not use
if impractical to obtain or not feasible, or will damage structure.
c. Confirmation of safety of structure by load tests performed and evaluated in

accordance with ACI 318. Do not use if impractical to perform or not feasible.
d. Replacement of structure deficient in strength.
e. Subject to functional feasibility and Owner's approval, structure deficient in

strength may be reinforced with supplement supports as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Formwork
1 Part 1: General
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Definition(s):
1. Formwork: Total system of support for freshly placed concrete including mold or
sheathing which contacts concrete as well as supporting members, hardware, and
necessary bracing.
B. Related sections:
C. Use forms, wherever necessary, to confine concrete and shape it to required

dimensions. Use forms of sufficient strength to withstand pressure resulting from
placement and vibration of concrete, with sufficient rigidity to maintain specified
tolerances.
D. See concrete finish requirements in Section 03 31 01.
A. Design, engineering, and construction of formwork is responsibility of Contractor.
1. Design, engineer, and construct formwork for applicable gravity and lateral loads
and pressures as well as other design considerations or applicable requirements of legal
local building code.
2. Develop shoring and reshoring pattern and sequence so as not to exceed safe
structural capacity of supporting structural systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS (See Division 1)
A. Shop drawings: As applicable or requested by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Form facing materials: As indicated under description of finishes required.
B. Form accessories, partially or wholly embedded in concrete, such as ties and

hangers: Shall be of a commercially manufactured type. Do not use not fabricated wire.
Use form ties constructed so ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing
appreciable spalling of concrete faces. After ends or end fasteners of form ties have
been removed, embedded portion of ties shall terminate not less than 2 diameters or
twice minimum dimension of tie from formed faces of concrete to be permanently
exposed to view, but in no case less than 19 mm. When formed face of concrete is not to
be permanently exposed to view, form ties may be cut off flush with formed surfaces
except where exposed to earth or weather (even if protected by membranes, coatings, or
other similar systems).
C. Steel form deck shall be fabricated from steel sheet conforming to ASTM A446,
Grade E, with galvanized coating class G60. Provide deck with minimum structural
properties as indicated. Where not indicated, design in conformance with Steel Deck
Institute Specifications and Commentaries for Non-Composite Steel Form Deck, except
as otherwise specified or indicated. Deflection of deck units under the load of wet
concrete shall not exceed 1/240 of the clear span. Fabricate deck to provide minimum of
3 spans continuous wherever practical. Provide minimum 50 mm end laps centered over
supports, and side laps of one-half corrugation. Provide minimum 38 mm bearing of deck
on supports.
2.02 FABRICATION OF FORMS
A. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent loss of cement fines. Place chamfer strips
in outside corners of forms to produce 45 degree beveled corners on permanently
exposed surfaces. Interior corners on such surfaces and edges of formed joints will not
require beveling.
B. To maintain specified finish tolerances, camber formwork to compensate for

anticipated formwork deflections prior to hardening of concrete.
C. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts and
take up settlement during concrete placing operation. Securely brace forms against
lateral deflection.
D. Provide temporary openings at base of column and wall forms and at other points
where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is
placed. Locate temporary openings at inconspicuous locations in surfaces exposed to
view.
E. At construction joints, contact surface of form sheathing for flush surfaces

exposed to view or to receive a protective coating system shall overlap hardened
concrete in previous placement minimum 25 mm. Hold forms against hardened concrete
to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joint and to maintain a true surface.
F. Construct wood forms for wall openings to facilitate loosening, if necessary, to

counteract swelling.
G. Fasten wedges (used for final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement) in
position after final check.
H. Anchor formwork to shores or other supporting surfaces or members so upward or

lateral movement of any part of formwork system is prevented during concrete
placement.
I. Provide runways for moving equipment with struts or legs, supported directly on
formwork or structural member without resting on reinforcing steel.
J. Provide chamfer at corners of all beams, walls, and columns unless otherwise
indicated.
2.03 TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed:

Tolerances non-cumulative. Most restrictive tolerance governs. Tolerance limits noted
are maximum deviations (plus or minus) on each side of intended line.
1. Deviation from plumb:

a. In lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in arrises:
(1) In any length: 1 in 500 but not less than 3 mm.
(2) In any story: 10 mm.
(3) Maximum for entire length: 19 mm.
b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other conspicuous vertical
lines:
(2) In any story: 5 mm.
2. Deviation from level or from grades specified:
a. In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arrises, measured before removal of
supporting shores:
(2) In any bay: 9 mm.
b. In exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous

horizontal lines:
(1) In any length: 1 in 1000, but not less than 3 mm.
(2) In any bay: 6 mm.
3. Deviations from true plane of concrete surface exposed to view caused by bulging
of form facing material between supports:
a. 5 mm or l/300 of span between supports whichever is smaller.
4. Deviation from established position in plan of linear building lines, columns, walls:
a. In any length: 1 in 500, but not less than 3 mm.
b. In any bay: 12 mm.
c. Maximum for entire length: 19 mm.
5. Deviation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: 6
mm.
6. Deviation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of

slabs and walls:
a. Minus: 6 mm.
b. Plus: 12 mm.
7. Footings:
a. Deviations in dimensions in plan:
(1) Minus: 12 mm.
(2) Plus: 50 mm.
b. Misplacement or eccentricity:
(1) 2 percent of footing width in direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm.
c. Thickness:
(1) Decrease in specified thickness: 5 percent.
(2) Increase in specified thickness: No limit (except that which may interfere with
other construction).
8. Deviation in steps:
a. In flight of stairs:
(1) Rise: 3 mm.
(2) Tread: 6 mm.
b. In consecutive steps:
(1) Rise: 1.5 mm.
(2) Tread: 3 mm.
B. Use following additional or modified tolerances for cast-in-place concrete when

architectural precast concrete units are to be used.
1. Deviation of bearing surface elevation from indicated elevation for footings,

caisson caps and pile caps:
a. Maximum: Plus or minus 12 mm.
2. Deviation in plan and elevation from lines parallel to indicated linear building lines:
a. Adjacent members less than 6 m apart: 1 IN 500, but not less than 3 mm.
b. Adjacent members 6 m or more apart: 12 mm.
3. Anchor bolts for precast concrete unit connections:
a. Deviation from indicated location in plan: 6 mm.
b. Deviation from indicated location in elevation: 12 mm.
c. Projection: Minus 6 mm; plus 12 mm.
d. Plumbness: 1.5 mm.
4. Maximum deviation for entire length from established position in plan of linear
building lines, columns, walls: 12 mm.
C. Tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of vertical

reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded items, except where specifically noted otherwise.
D. Establish and maintain in undisturbed condition and until final completion and
acceptance of project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for reference
purposes to check tolerances.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Clean form surfaces and embedded materials of mortar, grout and foreign material
before concrete is placed.
B. Unless otherwise specified or approved, treat surfaces of forms as follows:
1. Before placing of reinforcing steel or concrete, cover surfaces of forms with

coating material that will effectively prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond with
concrete, and not stain concrete. A field applied form release agent or sealer or factory
applied non-absorptive liner may be used.
2. Do not allow excess form coating material to stand in puddles in forms nor in
contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed.
C. Contractor shall use 1-inch chamfers for all vertical and horizontal corners of all
types of forms unless a pre-approval is obtained from the Engineer in writing in advance.
3.02 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Remove the forms accordingly: (in compliance with ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork
for Concrete)
Walls & Columns 12 Hours.
Pan joist forms:
760mm wide or less 3 days.
More than 760 mm 4 days
Arch Centers 14 days.
Joist, Beam or Girder soffits:
Less than 3M clear span between structural supports 7 days.
3 to 6M clear span between structural supports 14 days.
More than 6M clear span between structural supports 21 days.
Slabs:
Less than 3M clear span between structural supports 4 days.
3 to 6M clear span between structural supports 7 days.
More than 6M clear span between structural supports 10 days.
When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at early age, remove forms as
soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations.
B. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has

attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Perform needed repairs or treatment
required on such sloping surfaces at once, followed by specified curing.
C. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished
without damage to concrete.
D. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting
weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to
resist damage from removal.
E. Where no reshoring is planned, leave forms and shoring used to support weight of
concrete in beams, slabs and other concrete members in place until concrete has
attained its specified strength. Where reshoring is planned, supporting formwork may be
removed when concrete has reached 80 percent of specified strength, provided
reshoring is installed immediately.
F. When shores and other vertical supports are arranged so non-load-carrying form-
facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing shores and supports,
facing material may be removed at earlier age as permitted.
G. Except for steel form deck, remove all formwork unless specifically indicated to
remain in place.
3.03 RESHORING
A. When reshoring is permitted or required, plan operations in advance. While

reshoring is underway, allow no live load on new construction.
B. During reshoring do not subject concrete in beam, slab, column or other structural
member to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted by
Engineer for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. Place reshores as soon
as practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of
working day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without
overstressing construction. Leave reshores in place until:
1. Tests representative of concrete being supported have reached specified strength.
2. In-place concrete is at least 21 days old.
3. Loads imposed by construction operations do not exceed design loads.
C. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete leave original
supporting shores in place or reshore. Reshoring system shall have capacity sufficient to
resist anticipated loads and equal to at least one half of capacity of shoring system
above. Locate reshores directly under shore position above unless otherwise permitted.
D. In multi-story buildings extend reshoring over sufficient number of stories to

distribute weight of newly placed concrete, forms, and construction live loads in such a
manner that capacity of floors as determined by design load and developed concrete
strength at time of stripping and reshoring is not exceeded.
3.04 REMOVAL STRENGTH
A. When removal of formwork or reshoring is based on concrete reaching specified

strength, concrete shall be presumed to have reached this strength when either of
following conditions has been met.
1. When test cylinders, field cured along with concrete they represent, have reached
specified strength.
2. When concrete has been cured as specified for same length of time as age at test
date of laboratory-cured cylinders which reached specified strength. Determine length of
time concrete has been cured in structure by cumulative number of days or fractions
thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of air in contact with
concrete is above 10 degC and concrete has been damp or sealed from evaporation and
loss of moisture.
3.05 STEEL FORM DECK
A. Install form deck in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Steel

Deck Institute Specifications and Commentaries.
1. Place deck with ribs perpendicular to supports and secure with plug welds to each
support using welding washers supplied by manufacturer. Place sheets with edges up,
and end lapped a minimum of 50 mm. Center the end laps over the supports and nest
the side lap one-half corrugation. Minimum bearing shall be 38 mm unless otherwise
shown. Weld to supporting steel immediately after alignment along end laps and over
each intermediate support, with welds located at each side lap plus one intermediate
weld near center of sheet (3 welds per sheet) for sheets of up to 770 mm wide coverage
measured center to center of side laps. Use 2 equally spaced intermediate welds (4
welds per sheet) for sheets of over 770 mm coverage. For deck spans over 1.5m, fasten
side laps at midspan or maximum 900 O.C.
2. Concrete placement: To prevent concrete leakage at side laps, concrete shall be

placed in the opposite direction to which sheets were erected so that top sheet at lap
receives placement of concrete first. Care shall be exercised during pouring operations
not to allow heavy concentrated loads or equipment to be placed on the steel forms.
When buggies are used to deliver the concrete, runways shall be planked to avoid local
damage to the metal form deck.
END OF SECTION
Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcement
1 Part 1: General
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Related sections:
B. Testing of reinforcing steel welding shall be performed by Owner's testing agency

at Owner's expense.
A. Standards:
1. ASTM-A82: Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM-A185: Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ASTM-A615: Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

(Grade 60) High Tensile FY = 414 MPa
4. ASTM-A663: Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties.
5. ASTM-A675: Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical

properties.
6. ASTM-A706: Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
7. ACI 315: Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete

Structures.
8. ACI-301, Chapter 5.
8. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing

Steel.
9. SSA 2: Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete.
10. SSA 224: Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete. For welded wire fabric
(high tensile) FY = 420 MPa
11. ASTM A775 Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
12. ASTM A416, Grade 250 or 270 for tendon strands for pre-stressed concrete.
B. Initial test for reinforcing bar welding shall be paid by Owner. Retests due to failed
initial tests shall be paid by Contractor.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings showing size, number, spacing, dimensions and locations of

reinforcing steel and accessories, in sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing
without reference to Contract drawings.
2. Details of concrete reinforcement and accessories not shown on Contract

Documents shall be in accord with related Egyptian code
B. Product data:
1. Certification that reinforcing to be welded conforms to ASTM-A706 or ASTM-A615

Grade 40 whichever applicable.
2. Certification that epoxy-coated reinforcing bars conform to ASTM A775.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing - General: Grade 60, conforming to ASTM-A615 or High Tensile

conforming to SSA 2. Mill Certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer.
B. Reinforcing - Welded: Reinforcing 22 mm and larger to be welded shall conform to

ASTM-A706. Reinforcing 20 mm and smaller to be welded shall conform to ASTM-A615,
Grade 40.
C. Welded wire fabric: Conform to ASTM-A185 or SSA 224 and to wire size and
spacing of smooth wire indicated on drawings.
D. Smooth dowel bars for construction joints: Conform to ASTM-A663 or ASTM-

A675, Grade 60. Where indicated, provide a metal dowel cap at one end of dowel to
permit longitudinal movement of dowel within concrete section. Provide for movement
which equals joint width plus 12 mm.
E. Wire for column spiral and helix: Smooth wire conforming to ASTM-A82 and
fabricated in accordance with ACI 318 requirements for spirals, except that pitch of helix
shall be indicated.
F. Epoxy coating and material for field repair of damaged areas shall conform to
ASTM A775.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall meet following requirements for
fabricating tolerances:
1. Sheared length: Plus/minus 25 mm.
2. Depth of truss bars: Plus 0, minus 12 mm.
3. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties, and spirals: Plus/minus 12 mm.
4. Other bends: Plus/minus 25 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WELDING
A. Perform welding of reinforcing steel in conformance with AWS D1.4.
B. Use E70XX electrodes.
C. Each welder shall place an approved identifying mark near each completed weld.
D. Cut out welds determined to be defective and re-weld and retest at Contractor's
expense.
3.02 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide minimum concrete covering for reinforcement as follows unless otherwise

indicated:
1. Any face of concrete against earth, including any face protected with waterproof
membranes, bitumastic coatings, working slabs, etc.: 65mm for column ties 75mm for all
other bars.
2. Formed surfaces exposed to weather: 50 mm.
3. Interior surfaces: 40 mm for beams, girders, and columns; 20 mm for slabs, walls
and joists.
B. Place bars to following tolerances:
1. Clear distance to formed surfaces: Plus/minus 6 mm.
2. Minimum spacing between bars: Minus 6 mm.
3. Top bars in slabs and beams:
a. Members 200 mm deep or less: Plus/minus 6 mm.
b. Members between 200 mm and 600 mm deep: Plus/minus 12 mm.
c. Members more than 600 mm deep: Plus/minus 25 mm.
4. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within 50 mm.
5. Lengthwise of members: Plus/minus 50 mm.
C. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing

steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars were moved more than one bar diameter or
enough to exceed above tolerances, resulting arrangement of bars subject to approval.
D. Assure that reinforcement, at time concrete is placed, is free of materials that may
adversely affect or reduce bond. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of
both will be accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided
dimensions and weights, including heights of deformations, of a cleaned sample is not
less than required by applicable ASTM.
E. Support reinforcement and fasten together to prevent displacement by

construction loads or placing of concrete beyond tolerances indicated. On ground,
provide supporting concrete blocks or other approved method. Over formwork, use
concrete, metal, plastic or other approved bar chairs and spacers. Where concrete
surface will be exposed to weather, or exposed to an exterior environment, or exposed to
earth (even if protected from earth by membranes coatings, or other similar systems) in
finished structure, furnish accessories within 12 mm of concrete surface of non-corrosive
material or protect against corrosion.
F. Overlap welded wire fabric, wherever successive mats or rolls are continuous, in
such a way that overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is
not less than 50 mm. Extend fabric across supporting beams and walls and to within 100
mm of concrete edges. Do not extend through contraction joints. Adequately support

during placing of concrete to ensure its proper position in slab by methods of paragraph
E above.
G. Where shown on drawings, offset vertical bars in columns at least one bar
diameter at lapped splices. To ensure proper placement, furnish templates for column
vertical bars and dowels.
H. Splices not specifically indicated shall be subject to approval.
I. Unless permitted by the Engineer, do not bend reinforcement after embedding in

hardened concrete.
J. Unless permitted by Architect/Engineer, do not tack weld reinforcing.
K. Epoxy-coated reinforcing bars: Equipment for handling epoxy-coated bars shall

have protected contact areas. Bundles of coated bars shall be lifted at multiple pick-up
points to minimize bar-to-bar abrasion from sags in the bundles. Coated bars or bundles
of coated bars shall not be dropped or dragged. Coated bars shall be stored on
protective cribbing. Fading of the color of the coating shall not be cause for rejection of
epoxy-coated reinforcing bars.
L. Repair all visible damage to epoxy coating on portion of bars extending out of first
concrete placement, and of first 75 mm of embedded portion. Apply repair material in
strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Maintain coating throughout
construction.
END OF SECTION
Division 03 - Concrete Requirements
Section 03 30 00 –Cast-in-Place Concrete
1 Part 1: General
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
A. Establishing general criteria for materials and mixes of cast-in-place concrete as

indicated on Drawings.
B. Cast-in-place concrete including slab on grade as indicated on Drawings and as

specified herein.
C. Expansion and contraction joints and water stops for cast-in-place concrete works.
1.2. REFERENCES
A. Egyptian codes and standards
ECP 203 Design of reinforced concrete structures
ECP203/3 Testing of concrete.
ECP 902/7 concrete and reinforced concrete specifications.
B. ACI - American Concrete Institute
ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction Material
ACI 211 Recommended Practice for Selecting Normal and Heavyweight Concrete
ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compression Test Results of

Field Concrete
ACI 301 Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 302 Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete
ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 308 Curing Concrete
ACI 309 Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual
C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM C 31 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field
ASTM C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C 42 Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete
ASTM C 88 Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium sulphate or

Magnesium Sulphate
ASTM C 123 Test Method for Lightweight Pieces in Aggregates
ASTM C 138 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of
Concrete
ASTM C 142 Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
ASTM C 143 Test Method for Slump of Portland cement Concrete
ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C 156 Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials
ASTM C 171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric
Method
ASTM C 231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method
ASTM C 260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete
ASTM C 494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 535 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C 618 Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as
a Mineral Admixture in Portland cement Concrete
ASTM C 685 Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous
Mixing
ASTM C 881 Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding System for Concrete
ASTM D 75 Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM D 1190 Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type
ASTM D 1191Methods of Testing Concrete Joint Sealers
ASTM D 1751Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM E 11 Specification for Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
ASTM E 96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
ASTM E 154 Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under
Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed Drawings and Shop Drawings.
B. Design Analysis and Calculations: Where provision of design is specified in

Contract Documents.
C. Product's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications with application and

installation instructions for proprietary materials and items including fusion bonded epoxy
coated reinforcing bars, admixtures, bonding agents, water stops, joint systems,
chemical floor hardeners, coal tar epoxy paint, poly-vinyl-chloride liner, polyethylene
vapor barrier and dry shake finish materials.
D. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise may be

requested by the Engineer, including names, sources and description as required.
E. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit copies of laboratory test reports for concrete
materials and mix design tests or other certificates for concrete.
F. Material Certificates: Material certificates shall be signed by material manufacturer

and the Contractor, certifying that each material item meets or exceeds the specified
requirements.
G. Grout to be exposed to or in contact with soil and/or groundwater, substantiating

suitability for specified environmental conditions.
H. Concrete mix design.
I. Placement Schedule: Prepare a placement schedule and submit to the Engineer

for review prior to start of concrete placement operations.
J. Methods of furnishing and delivering concrete in hot weather.
1.4. TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Cement: Upon delivery at site of work, store cement separately in dry,

weathertight, properly ventilated structures, with adequate provision for prevention of
absorption of moisture.
B. Aggregates: Store aggregates in a manner to assure good drainage, to preclude

inclusion of foreign matter, and to preserve the gradation. Protect fine aggregate from
wind-caused segregation.
C. Admixtures: Store admixtures at temperatures and under conditions

recommended by the manufacturer. Protect each type of admixtures from contamination
and intermingling with other materials as well as other admixtures.
D. Water: Store and transport in a manner to prevent heating of water.
E. Coal Tar Epoxy Paint: Packaging, labeling, delivering, and storing shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations.
F. Polyethylene Vapor Barrier: Protect vapor barrier from exposure to sunlight and
according to the manufacturer's published instructions.
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Samples and Testing: Perform tests specified herein by an independent testing

laboratory meeting the requirements of ASTM E 329 and approved by the Engineer.
Provide testing and laboratory services at no cost to the Owner.
B. Cement: Submit certified copies of laboratory test reports furnished by cement

manufacturer for each lot of cement including test data, results and certification using
sampling and testing procedures that are in conformance with the Contract Documents.
Sampled cement shall be tested as required by the Engineer. No cement shall be used
until test results are satisfactory. Cement that has been stored for more than four months
after being tested shall be retested before use. Cement found unsatisfactory under test
shall be immediately removed from site.
C. Aggregates: Conform to ASTM D 75. Use no aggregates until the Engineer

approves test results.
D. Water: Potable complying with SASO 701 or ASTM C 94 or in conformance with

the requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Admixtures: Sampling and testing of admixtures used in concrete mix shall be in

accordance with ASTM C 494. No admixture shall be used until test results are
satisfactory.
F. Slump: Conform to SASO 379 or ASTM C 143 and shall be performed in field
under the Engineer's supervision.
G. Certificates of material properties and compliance with specified requirements

may be submitted in lieu of testing, when acceptable to the Engineer. Certificate of
compliance must be signed by the material producer and the Contractor.
H. Workmanship:
1. Repair concrete work not conforming to the specified requirements, including

strength, tolerances and finishes.
2. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Engineer at no cost to Owner.
When the results of strength tests of specimens shows failure to meet the specification
requirements or where there is other evidence that quality of concrete is below
requirements, core boring tests shall be made in conformance with ASTM C 42 and ACI
318.
If deficient, a structural analysis shall be made followed by a load test, where applicable
at no cost to Owner. Evaluation of results shall conform to ACI 318, Chapter 4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland cement: Types indicated herein shall comply with ASTM C 150 or SASO
143. Content of tricalcium aluminate (C3A) shall not exceed 12% in Type I cement.
1. Concrete Work below Ground Floor and up to Ground Floor Level: Provide
concrete using Type I cement
2. Concrete Work above Ground Floor Level: Provide concrete using ASTM C 150
Type I cement.
3. Use only one brand of cement for each required type throughout the project,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
4. Cement acceptance: Based on manufacturer's mill certificate certifying that

furnished cement conforms to physical and chemical requirements of SASO 142 or
ASTM C 150. The Engineer reserves the right, however, to sample and conduct such
tests on cement as deemed necessary for compliance with Specification.
B. Water: Water for washing aggregate, mixing and curing concrete shall be potable
complying with SASO 701 or ASTM C 94 and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid,
salt, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances.
C. Aggregates: SASO 378 or ASTM C 33 and as specified herein:
1. Supply aggregates from a source approved by the Engineer and capable of

supplying a sufficient quantity for the entire contract.
2. Maximum aggregate size:
a. For Suspended Slabs, Beams, Girders, Walls and Columns: 20 mm maximum.
b. For Footings, Thickened Slabs, and Slab on Grade: 40 mm maximum.
D. Fine Aggregates:
1. Fine aggregates: Natural sand or manufactured sand or a combination of the two

with a composition of clean, hard, durable spherical or cubical particles.
2. Limit the salt content of fine aggregate so as not to exceed limitations set out in
Table 1 - TOTAL ALLOWABLE SALTS CONTENT.
TABLE 1 - TOTAL ALLOWABLE SALTS CONTENT
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE PERCENTAGE
BY MASS
IN FINE
AGGREGATE
BY WEIGHT
OF FINE
AGGREGATE IN COARSE
AGGREGATE
BY WEIGHT
OF COARSE
AGGREGATE
TOTAL BY
WEIGHT OF
CEMENT
Chlorides (NaCl) 0.06 0.05 0.13
Sulphates (SO3) 0.04 0.50 4.00

Shaded areas include maximum percentage of salts in cement, water, and

in other mix constituents of concrete.
3. Limit deleterious substances in fine aggregate to the amounts shown in Table 2 -

ALLOWABLE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES IN FINE AGGREGATE.
TABLE 2 - ALLOWABLE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES
IN FINE AGGREGATE
ITEM MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
PERCENTAGE BY MASS
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles 3
Material Fiber less than 75 micron, No. 200 sieve 3
Lightweight Particles (determined in accordance with ASTM C 123)
0.50
Total of deleterious materials shall not exceed 3 percent of the weight of aggregate.
4. Grading of fine aggregate shall be within the limits shown in Table 4 - GRADING
LIMITS OF COMBINED FINE AGGREGATE MIX FOR CONCRETE.
E. Coarse Aggregates:
1. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone or

a combination of the two, and shall be composed of clean, hard, uncoated particles.
2. Salt content of coarse aggregate shall not exceed the limitations as set out above
in Table 1 - TOTAL ALLOWABLE SALTS CONTENT.
3. Deleterious substances shall be limited in the coarse aggregate to the amounts

shown below in Table 3 - ALLOWABLE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES IN COARSE
AGGREGATE.
TABLE 3 - ALLOWABLE DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES
IN COARSE AGGREGATE
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE PERCENT BY MASS
TYPE OR
LOCATION CLAY LUMPS
& FRIABLE MATERIAL FINER THAN 75 ABRASION LOSS
OF CONCRETE PARTICLES (%) MICRON** (%) 500
REVS. 100/500
REVS.
Slab subject to traffic abrasion, floors, sidewalks & pavements
1.00
1.00
35
0.25
Other classes of concrete 3.00 2.00 40 0.28
** ASTM Sieve No. 200
4. Coarse aggregate grading shall be set within the limits shown in Table 4 -
GRADING LIMITS OF COMBINED FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATE MIX FOR
CONCRETE.
TABLE 4 - GRADING LIMITS OF COMBINED FINE AND
COARSE AGGREGATE MIX FOR CONCRETE
ASTM SIEVE (mm) Percentage Passing (by Mass)
Grading A Grading B
50
38.1
19
9.5
4.75
2.36
1.18
0.16
0.30
0.15
75 micron 100
90 - 100
65 - 85
35 - 60
25 - 45
22 - 40
18 - 38
15 - 33
6 - 17
0-6
0-2 -
100
90 - 100
55 - 70
35 - 55
30 - 45
25 - 42
22 - 38
10 - 20
0-8
0-2
2.2. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Concrete Admixtures:
1. Use admixtures complying with ASTM C 494 Types A, B, D, F or G provided that

they are included in mix design and subject to the Engineer's approval. Admixtures
containing calcium chloride ions or other ions producing deleterious effect shall not be
permitted.
2. Compatibility of admixtures with the brand of cement being used shall be

determined by testing samples at temperatures at which materials will be used and over
a period of time representative of the proposed mixing and delivery period. Test shall
demonstrate that the admixture used shall not cause either short or long term
deficiencies in the quality and durability of the concrete.
B. Joint Materials and Bearing Pads:
1. Preformed Joint Filler Strips: Provide bituminous fiber joint filler strips
manufactured from asphalt-saturated cellulosic fibers and compounded into
compressible non-extruding board conforming to ASTM D 1751, thickness and width as
shown on Drawings. Joint filler shall be preformed expansion joint filler board
recommended for joints in concrete, masonry and paving.
2. Joint Sealing Compound: Two-component polyurethane elastomeric compound

complying with the requirements of Section 07900 - SEALANTS unless indicated
otherwise.
3. Where required, provide Neoprene bearing pads of durometer hardness: Grade

60.
C. Water-stops:
1. Flat, dumbbell or center bulb type water-stops shall be of high quality poly-vinyl-
chloride granules. PVC water-stops size shall be as recommended by manufacturer for
the intended application, unless otherwise shown on Drawings, with minimum 10 mm
thickness and not less than 150 mm width. Only butt joints may be made on site using
manufacturer's equipment and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Junction pieces must be factory made by manufacturer. PVC water-stops shall have a
100 percent solids content, 13.7 MN/m tensile strength and 285 percent elongation at
break with a minimum tear resistance 75 kN/m. Waterstops shall have excellent
resistance to sewage, dilute acids and alkalis. Materials shall comply with the
requirements of CRD-C 572 or equivalent.
D. Vapor Barrier:
1. Polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4397, minimum 200 microns thick

having a vapor permeance rating not exceeding 0.063 perms, and shall be laid with 300
mm overlapping.
E. Bonding Agents:
1. Chemical Bonding Agent: Film-forming, freeze-thaw resistant compound suitable

for brush or spray application.
2. Epoxy-Resin Bonding Agent: A two-component, mineral filled, epoxy-polysulphide

polymer.
F. Concrete Curing Materials:
1. Absorptive Cover: Conform to AASHTO M 182, Class 3; burlap cloth made from
jute or kenaf and with a minimum density of 290 gm/m².
2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Provide one of the following in compliance with ASTM

C 171:
a. Waterproof paper.
b. Polyethylene film.
c. White burlap-polyethylene sheet.
3. Liquid Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM C 309, Type 1. Material for use on
slabs to which topping is to be bonded shall be a degrading type which shall not inhibit
the bond between topping and slab. When non-pigmented compound is used, it shall
contain a fugitive dye. Aqueous solution of sodium silicate with non-acid penetrating
agent, reacting chemically with free lime in concrete to form a hard, non-dusting surface.
G. Floor Finish Material:
1. Chemical Floor Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of

magnesium flourosilicate and zinc flourosilicate combined with a wetting agent,
containing not less than 240 g of flourosilicate per liter. Apply to exposed concrete slabs,
not indicated or scheduled to receive subsequent finishes.
2.3. CLASSES OF CONCRETE
A. Water-cement ratios listed in the following table are maximums; cement contents
and compressive strengths are minimums. There shall be no increase in water-cement
ratio or reduction in cement content based upon attainment of compressive strengths
higher than those specified.
CLASSES OF CONCRETE 20 30 35
28-DAYS COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST CYLINDER (N/mm2) 20 30 35
MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT - 100 mm SLUMP (Kg/m3) 250 360 400
MAXIMUM FREE WATER CEMENT RATIO (BY WEIGHT) 0.55 0.43 0.43
2.4. MIX DESIGN
A. If the fine aggregate conforms to SASO 378 or ASTM C 33, the mix design shall
be in accordance with ACI 301. If the fine aggregate does not conform to SASO 378 or
ASTM C 33, the mix design shall be based upon trial mixes. Trial mixes shall be
proportioned under the supervision of the Engineer. Mix design shall be initiated within
two months after award of Contract and shall include at least the following:
1. For each specified cement content and the maximum water-cement ratio, develop
curves comparing slump to percentage of fine aggregate ratios. Select fine to coarse
aggregate ratios to produce mixtures ranging from excess fine aggregate to excess
coarse aggregate with insufficient mortar to fill the voids. Optimum fine to coarse
aggregate ratio shall be the one at which the higher slumps are produced for the
specified water-cement ratio. Record and plot the combined aggregate gradations to
reflect limits of acceptable and unacceptable combinations of ingredients. Further testing
shall be done at fine to coarse aggregate ratios that will produce adequate workability for
the construction for which the mixture is being used while maintaining the lowest possible
water-cement ratio.
2. Develop curves of water-cement ratio versus compressive strength for at least five
water-cement ratios.
3. Develop curves comparing compressive strength data from at least five different
cement contents ranging from 20 MPa to 30 MPa 28-days cylinder strength for each
optimum aggregate ratio and the aggregate ratio judged most workable for general
casting.
4. For the mixes judged appropriate for construction, prepare strength gain curves
for 3, 5, 7, 14, 28, and 56-day strengths.
5. Provide cement chemical and physical test results for different types of cement
used.
6. For each trial batch, record the following:
a. Weight and absolute volumes of proposed mixtures. Express aggregate weights

in saturated-surface-dry condition.
b. Slump.
c. Individual aggregate gradations and calculated mixture combined aggregate

grading.
d. Temperatures.
e. Wet and dry densities.
f. Aggregate moisture contents.
g. Water-cement ratio corrected for aggregate absorption.
h. Test specimen curing procedures.
i. Compressive strength at each age.
7. Slump Limits:
a. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement
as follows:
1) Sloping Surfaces: 75 mm maximum slump.
2) Reinforced Foundation Systems: 50 mm minimum, and 75 mm maximum slump.
3) Other Concrete: 100 mm maximum slump.
b. Slump of concrete with super-plasticizer shall not exceed 250 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE
A. Concrete may be mixed at batch plants or it may be transit mixed as specified

herein. Batch plants must comply with the requirement of ACI 304, with sufficient
capacity to produce concrete of the qualities specified in quantities required to meet
construction schedules. Plant facilities are subject to testing, laboratory inspection as well
as approval by the Engineer. Quantities by weight of concrete ingredients, measured
separately for each batch with date, time, and mix number shall be recorded.
B. Truck Mixers: When a truck mixer is used to complete mixing of central plant
batched materials, water shall be added at mixing speed before completion of mixing.
Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. Each truck shall carry a ticket stamped by
time clock to show date and time the loading of each truck was completed. Trucks shall
meet the requirements specified in ACI 304.
C. Job site mixing will not be permitted.
D. Ready-Mix Concrete:
1. Comply with the requirements of SASO 1068 or ASTM C 94, as specified herein,
provided the quantity, rate of delivery and unrestricted progress of work permitted, in
accordance with placement schedule. During hot weather, and/or under conditions
contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C
94 may be required, as specified below. Proposed changes in mixing procedures other
than herein specified, must be accepted by the Engineer before implementation.
3.2. CONCRETE PRE-PLACEMENT INSPECTION

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation,

reinforcing steel, and securely install all required inserts, anchors, sleeves, conduits and
other items specified under other sections to be embedded or cast-in.
B. Where concrete is placed on ground or sub-course, the foundation upon which

concrete is placed shall be clean, damp, and free from standing or running water. Prior
to placing concrete, the earth foundation shall have been satisfactorily compacted and all
subgrades approved by the Engineer prior to placing concrete.
C. Soil at bottom of foundation systems are subject to testing for soil bearing value by
the testing laboratory, as directed by the Engineer. Place concrete immediately after
approval of foundation excavations.
D. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement
of forms and reinforcing steel.
E. Polyethylene vapor barrier shall be placed between concrete blinding and

concrete footing leaving extra width on both sides which shall then be tucked up to wrap
the concrete footing after the form removal.
3.3. CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General: Place concrete in compliance with the practices and recommendations of

ACI 301 and ACI 304 and as specified herein:
1. Deliver concrete from central plant to the place of final deposit in a continuous
manner and without segregation or loss of ingredients. Suspend placing when the sun,
heat, wind, or lack of facilities prevent proper finishing and curing of the concrete. Place
concrete in the forms or excavation as close as possible in final position, in uniform,
approximately horizontal layers, not over 600 mm deep unless otherwise directed.
Do not drop concrete freely for more than 1.5 m, nor allow it to drop freely through
congested re-baring areas which could cause segregation.
This drop distance may be increased by the Engineer at his discretion where it can be
shown by Contractor that a greater drop will not result in segregation. Tremies or other
approved means shall be employed to eliminate segregation. Conduits and pipes shall
not be embedded in concrete unless specifically indicated or specified. Do not place
concrete in any form until forms have been inspected by the Engineer and permission
has been given to proceed.
2. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not
meet the required quality control limits or which has been contaminated by foreign
materials. Do not use retempered concrete. Remove rejected concrete from the project
site and dispose of it off site at no extra cost to Owner.
B. Transportation Time Internal:
1. Concrete mixed in central plant and transported by non-agitating equipment shall

be placed in the forms within 30 minutes. Concrete transported in truck mixers or truck
agitators shall be delivered to the site and placed in the forms within 60 minutes. This
time limitation may be increased by the Engineer at his discretion when additional super-
plasticizer is added to the concrete mix so as to retard the initial set for greater periods.
In no case will additional water be added to the mix (tempering) after the concrete leaves
the batching plant.
C. Conveying Concrete:
1. Concrete may be conveyed by chute, conveyor, or pump if so approved by the

Engineer. Aluminum chutes or pipelines shall not be used for conveying concrete.
Approvals will not be given for chutes or conveyors requiring changes in the concrete
design mix for desired operation. Conveying equipment shall be cleaned when not in
use.
2. Chutes and Conveyors: Chutes shall be rounded in cross section, rigid in

construction, protected from overflow and slopes not exceeding one vertical to three
horizontal. Conveyors shall be designed to operate assuring uniform flow of concrete
without segregation of ingredients, loss of mortar, or change in slump.
3. Pumps: Placing concrete by pumping methods shall conform with ACI 301
Chapter 8. Operate and maintain pumps so that a continuous stream of concrete is
delivered into the forms without air pockets, segregation, or change in slump exceeding 5
cm. Use pumps which can pump mixes as designed. Mixes shall not be adjusted to
accommodate smaller pumps.
D. Placing Concrete into Forms:
1. Deposit concrete in the forms for horizontal slabs in horizontal layers not deeper
than 60 mm unless additional thickness is permitted by the Engineer, and in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place
each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
2. Consolidate concrete placed in forms with mechanical vibrating equipment

supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete in accordance with the recommended practices of ACI 309, to
suit the type of concrete and project conditions. Vibration of forms and reinforcements
will not be permitted.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness
of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the layer of concrete and at least
150 mm into the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary
to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing segregation of the mix.
4. In order to allow for shrinkage or settlement, at least 2 hours shall elapse after
placing concrete in walls, columns or stems of deep T-beams before depositing concrete
in girders, beams and slabs supported thereof, unless otherwise specified or shown on
the plans.
5. Place concrete in girders, slabs and shallow T-beam construction in one

continuous operation for each span, unless otherwise detailed. Deposit concrete
uniformly for the full length of the span then bring up evenly in horizontal layers.
6. Place concrete in columns in one continuous operation to the bottom of the

deepest super structure member framed over the column.
7. No concrete shall be placed in the super-structure until the column forms have
been stripped sufficiently to determine the character of the concrete in the columns.
Loads of superstructure shall not be allowed to come upon abutments, piers brackets
and column bents until they have been in place at least 7 days, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
8. Maximum vertical drop in placing concrete shall not exceed 1.5 m.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs:
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits
of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
2. Maintain reinforcing steel in the proper position continuously during concrete

placement operations.
3. Consolidate concrete during placing operations using mechanical vibrating

equipment, so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other
embedded items and into corners.
4. Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs, and against
bulkheads of slabs on ground, as specified for formed concrete structures. Consolidate
concrete in the remainder of slabs by vibrating bridge screed, roller pipe screed, or other
acceptable methods. Limit the time of vibrating consolidation to prevent bringing an
excess of fine aggregate to the surface.
5. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on
plastic surfaces. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to finishing operations.
F. Bonding:
1. Roughen surfaces of set concrete at all joints, except where bonding is obtained
by use of a concrete bonding agent, and clean surfaces of laitance, coatings, loose
particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces in a manner to expose bonded
aggregate uniformly and do not leave laitance, loose particles of aggregate, or damaged
concrete at the surface.
2. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to new concrete that has set but is not fully
cured, as follows:
a. At joints between footings and walls or columns, and between walls or columns
and beams or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless otherwise specified herein,
dampen, but do not saturate, roughen and clean surface of set concrete immediately
before placing fresh concrete.
b. At joints in exposed work: At vertical joints in walls; at joints in girders, beams,

supported slabs and other structural members; and at joints designed to contain liquids,
dampen, but do not saturate, the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete and
apply a liberal coating of neat cement grout.
c. Use cement grout consisting of equal parts Portland cement and fine aggregate by
weight and not more than 24 liters of water per sack of cement. Apply with a stiff broom
or brush to a minimum thickness of 2 mm. Deposit fresh concrete before cement grout
has attained its initial set.
d. In lieu of neat cement grout, bonding may be a commercial bonding agent. Apply
to cleaned concrete surfaces in accordance with the printed instruction of the bonding
material manufacturer.
e. Prepare for bonding of fresh concrete to fully-cured hardened concrete by using

an epoxy-resin bonding agent as follows:
1) Handle and store epoxy-resin adhesive binder in compliance with the

manufacturer's printed instructions, including safety precautions.
2) Mix the epoxy-resin adhesive binder in the proportions recommended by the

manufacturer, carefully following directions for safety of personnel.
3) Before depositing fresh concrete, thoroughly roughen and clean hardened

concrete surfaces and coat with epoxy-resin grout not less than 2 mm thick. Place fresh
concrete while the epoxy-resin material is still tacky, without removing the in-place grout
coat, and as directed by the epoxy-resin manufacturer.
H. Hot Weather Placing:
1. Unless otherwise approved, concreting shall be considered Hot Weather

Concreting, as defined by ACI 305, and shall be in accordance with the recommended
practice of ACI 305. Ample water supply, hoses, and foggers shall be available at all
concrete placements.
2. At the time of placement, the temperature of the concrete shall not exceed 32 C.
Concrete exceeding the specified temperature shall be rejected and dumped at a
designated disposal area.
3. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of

placement below 32 C. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to
control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to
the total amount of mixing water. Ice shall be completely melted prior to completion of
mixing of concrete.
4. Reinforcing steel and forms shall be protected from direct sunrays and shall be
cooled with water immediately before concrete placing so that the concrete temperature
specified can be maintained.
5. The temperature of the concrete shall be determined immediately before

placement.
6. Provide means to limit the temperature rise of mass concrete to reduce

undesirable thermal stresses and cracking. Such means shall include limitation of rate of
placement, placement of concrete during cool weather, precooling concrete ingredients,
artificial cooling, or other approved methods.
3.4. JOINTS
A. Construction Joints:
1. Clean surface of concrete construction joints and remove laitance.
2. Immediately before new concrete is placed, wet construction joints and remove
standing water.
3. Locate construction joints in floors within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams
and girders. Joints in girders shall be offset a minimum distance of two times the width of
intersecting beams.
4. Place beams, girders and haunches monolithically as a part of a slab system,

unless otherwise required.
5. Beams, girders or slabs supported by columns or walls shall not be cast or

erected until concrete in the vertical support members is no longer plastic.
6. Locate and install construction joints so as not to impair strength and appearance
of the structure, as acceptable to the Engineer. Locate construction joints, if required, as
follows:
a. In walls, at top of footings; at top of slabs on ground, at top and bottom of door
and window openings or as required to conform to the architectural details and as
directed by the Engineer; and at the underside of the deepest beam or girder framing into
wall.
b. In columns, at the top of footing and at the underside of the deepest beam or
girder framing into the column.
c. Place wall construction joints at 18 m maximum, and wall control joints at 6 m

maximum.
B. Expansion Joints:
1. Provide expansion joints to permit both horizontal and vertical differential

movements. Place expansion joints at locations shown on the Drawings.
2. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete (except

dowels in floors bonded only on one side of joints) shall not be permitted.
3. Place premoulded joint filler at locations shown on Drawings, follow manufacturer

installation details.
C. Waterstops:
1. Provide waterstops in construction joints. Install waterstops to form a continuous

diaphragm in joint. Make provisions to support and protect waterstops during progress of
work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions. Protect waterstop material from damage where it protrudes from any joints.
D. Isolation Joint in Slab-on-Grade:
1. Provide isolation joints in slab-on-grade at points of contact between slabs and

vertical surfaces and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Control Joints in Slab-on-Grade:
1. Provide control joints in slab-on-grade to form panels or pattern. Use inserts, 6

mm wide by 1/5 to 1/4 of slab depth or 1/10 to 1/8 of slab depth with bottom crack
inducer. Joints may be saw cut or crack inducers may be used in conjunction with
sawing.
2. Form control joints by inserting a premolded hardboard or fiberboard strip into the
fresh concrete until the top surface of the strip is flush with slab surface. After concrete
curing for at least 7 days, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. Apply joint
sealant material in the manner recommended by the manufacturer.
3.5. FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough Form Finish:
1. As-cast rough form finish is permitted for formed concrete surfaces that are to be
concealed in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Smooth Form Finish:
1. Provide as-cast smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces that are to be
exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the
concrete, or a covering material bonded to the concrete such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, painting, or other similar system.
2. Produce smooth form finish by selecting form material to impart a smooth, hard,
uniform texture and arranging them orderly and symmetrical with a minimum of seams.
Repair and patch defective areas with all fins or other projections completely removed
and smoothed.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces:
1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching the
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue the final surface treatment of formed surfaces
uniformly across the adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6. MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Finished floor and roof slab surfaces shall be true plane surfaces with no deviation
in excess of 3 mm when tested with a 3 m straightedge. Surfaces shall be pitched to
drain.
1. Steel Trowelled (Hand) Finish: Slabs shall be screeded and floated with
straightedges to bring the surface to the required finish level with no coarse aggregate
visible. Concrete while still green but sufficiently hardened to bear a man's weight without
deep imprint, shall be wood floated to a true, even plane. Floor surfaces, after the
surface moisture has disappeared, shall be steel trawled to a smooth, even, dense finish
free from blemishes including trowel marks. Steel trowelled finish shall be provided for
resilient flooring, thin-set ceramic tile, carpeting, where liquid waterproofing is to be
applied, and where no other finish is specified.
2. Power Machine Finish: In lieu of hand finishing, an approved power finishing

machine may be used. The preparation of surfaces for finishing by machine shall be in
general as herein before specified for hand finishing. Finished surfaces shall be free of
machine marks, ridges, or other blemishes.
3. Rough Slab Finish: Tamp concrete to force aggregates away from surface, then
screed with a straightedge to produce a uniform surface. Rough slab finish surfaces shall
be provided for ceramic tile except thin-set installation, quarry tile, floor toppings,
insulation, built-up roofing, travertine, precast pavers with waterproof membrane, or

terrazzo.
4. Broom Finish: Concrete shall be screeded and floated to the required finish level
with no coarse aggregate visible. While concrete is still green, steel or wood trowel to an
even, smooth finish and then broom with a fiber bristle brush in a direction transverse to
that of the main traffic. Broom finish surfaces shall be provided for driveways and ramps
and all exterior slabs, and walks not otherwise shown or specified. Finishing shall
comply with the requirements of ACI 345, Chapter 10.
3.7. CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive hot
temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the
period of time necessary for hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the
concrete.
2. Start curing procedures as soon as free moisture has disappeared from concrete
surface. Continue curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures.
Avoid rapid drying at the end of final curing period.
B. Curing Methods:
1. Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, or by moisture-retaining cover curing,

by membrane curing, or by combination thereof, as specified below:
a. For curing, use only water that is free of impurities which could etch or discolor
exposed, natural concrete surfaces.
b. Provide moisture curing by any of the following:
1) Keeping the surface of the concrete continuously wet by covering it with water.
2) Continuous water-fog spray.
3) Covering the concrete surface with the specified absorptive cover, thoroughly
saturating the cover with water, and keeping the absorptive cover continuously wet.
Place absorptive cover so as to provide coverage of the concrete surfaces and edges,
with a 100 mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:
a. Cover the concrete surfaces with the specified moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in the widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 76
mm and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during the curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide liquid curing-hardening compound as follows:
a. Apply to horizontal surfaces when concrete is dry to touch by means of power

spray, or hair broom in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
b. Apply to vertical surfaces immediately after forms are stripped and where form
coating other than oils have been used, in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
C. Curing Formed Surfaces:
1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including the undersides of girders, beams,

supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with the forms in place for the
full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by
methods specified above, as applicable.
D. Curing Unformed Surfaces:
1. Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat
surfaces by moist curing, whenever possible.
2. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified by any of the methods
specified above, as applicable.
3. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining

cover, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.
E. Temperature of Concrete during Curing:
1. When the atmospheric temperature is 26 degrees C. and above or during other

climatic conditions which will cause too rapid drying of the concrete, make arrangements
before the start of concrete placing for the installation of wind breaks or moisture-
retaining covering. Protect the concrete continuously for the concrete curing method.
Provide hot weather protection complying with the requirements of ACI 305.
2. Maintain concrete temperature as uniformly as possible, and protect from rapid

atmospheric temperature changes. Avoid temperature changes in concrete which exceed
2 degrees C in any one hour and 10 degrees C in any 24-hour period.
F. Protection for Mechanical Injury:
1. During the curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical

disturbances, including load stresses, heavy shock, excessive vibration, and from
damage caused by rain or flowing water. Protect all finished concrete surfaces from
damage by subsequent construction operations.
3.8. SETTING OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Miscellaneous materials in connection with concrete construction shall, where

practicable, be placed and secured in position when the concrete is placed. These
materials include but are not limited to:
1. Anchors and anchor bolts.
2. Frames or edging.
3. Hanger, inserts and metal ties.
4. Door bucks.
5. Pipe supports and pipes passing through walls.
6. Pipe sleeves, conduits and drains.
7. Flashing reglets.
8. Masonry dovetail anchor slots.
B. Anchor bolts for machines shall be set to templates.
1. Bolts shall be plumbed carefully.
2. Location and elevation checked with instrument.
3. Held in position rigidly to prevent displacement while concrete is being placed.
C. Place embedded items prior to concreting.
D. Position embedded items accurately and provide supports against displacement.
E. Aluminum shall not be embedded in concrete except where aluminum is protected

from direct contact with the concrete.
3.9. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and
bond beams. Maintain the accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete
placement.
B. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for the passage of
work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after the work of other trades
is in place. Mix place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place
construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to
complete the work.
C. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete
is still green and steel-trowelling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
D. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct
elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing
the machines and equipment.
3.10. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas:

1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of
forms, but only when directed by the Engineer.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 12 mm diameter, and holes left by
tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case, to a depth of less than 25 mm.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing the cement
mortar, thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat area to be patched with
neat cement grout. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to
the Engineer.
3. For exposed to public view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard
Portland cement so that when dry, the patching mortar will match the color of the
surrounding concrete. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and
color match before proceeding with the patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off
slightly higher than the surrounding surface.
4. Fill holes extending through concrete by means of a plunger-type gun or other

suitable device from the least exposed face, using a flush stop held at the exposed face
to ensure complete filling.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1. Repair exposed-to-view formed concrete surfaces, where possible, that contain

defects which adversely affect the appearance of the finish. Remove and replace the
concrete having defective surfaces if the defects cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
2. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, and holes left by the rods and bolts; fins and other
projections on the surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed
by cleaning.
3. Repair concealed formed concrete surfaces, when possible, that contain defects
that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove
and replace the concrete having defective surfaces.
At watertight structures, cracks shall be repaired using flexible grout injection

(polyurethane or approved equal).
Surface defects include cracks and surface deficiencies which penetrates to

reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections, honeycomb, rock pockets,
holes left by tie rods and bolts and spalls.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify
surface plane to the tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and
high areas as herein specified.
2. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to

smoothness, using a template having the required slope. Correct high and low areas as
specified herein.
3. Repair finish unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect the
durability of the concrete. Surface defects, as such, including crazing, cracks which
penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless
of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable
conditions.
4. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after the concrete has cured
sufficiently so that repairs can be made without damage to adjacent areas.
5. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of

surface finishing operations by cutting out the low areas and replacing with fresh
concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the
Engineer.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 25
mm diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas
to sound concrete with clean, square cuts, and expose reinforcing steel with at least 19
mm clearance all around. Dampen all concrete surfaces in contact with patching
concrete and brush with a neat cement grout coating, or use concrete bonding agent.
7. Place patching concrete before grout takes its initial set. Mix patching concrete of
the same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as the original adjacent
concrete. Place, compact and finish as required to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
8. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 25 mm in diameter by the
dry-pack method. Groove the top of cracks, and cut out holes to sound concrete and
clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen all cleaned concrete surfaces and brush
with a neat grout coating. Place dry pack before the cement grout takes its initial set. Mix
dry pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a
No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched
areas continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
9. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to the acceptance of
the Engineer.
3.11. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency

approved by Engineer to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during
concrete placement according to requirements specified herein.
B. Quality Control Testing During Construction:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Conform to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: Conform to SASO 379 or ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at
point of placement and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
5oC.and below and when 30oC and above, and one test for each set of compressive
strength test specimen.
4. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/ASTM C 31; cast and cure one set of 6
standard cylinders for each 20 m3 or fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in any
one day or for each 100 m2 of surface area placed; 2 specimens tested after 7 days, 3
specimens tested after 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
required. Additional test specimens may be cast for construction progress control and
form stripping.
a. When the strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion

laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
5. Testing laboratory shall report test results in writing to the Engineer, and Ready-
Mix supplier on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests
shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name
of Contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing
service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive

breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
C. Additional Tests:
1. The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not been
attained in the structure, as directed by the Engineer. The testing service shall conduct
tests to determine the strength and characteristics of the in-place concrete by
compression tests on cured cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by load testing
specified in ACI 318, or other acceptable non-destructive testing methods, as directed.
D. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests:
1. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump
outside the specified values.
2. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 3.4 MPa.
a. Strength tests of specimen cured under field conditions may be required by the
Engineer to check the adequacy of curing and protecting of the concrete placed.
Specimens shall be molded by field quality control laboratory at the same time and from
the same samples as the laboratory-cured specimens.
b. Provide improved means and procedures for protecting concrete when the 28-day
compressive strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders.
c. When laboratory-cured cylinder strengths are higher than the minimum required
compressive strength, field-cured cylinder strengths need not exceed the minimum
required compressive strength by more than 3.4 MPa even though criterion is not met.
d. If individual test of laboratory-cured specimens produce strengths more than 3.4

MPa below the required minimum compressive strength, or if tests of field-cured
cylinders indicate the deficiencies in protection and curing, provide additional measures
to assure that the load-bearing capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. If the
likelihood of low-strength concrete is confirmed and computations indicate the load-
bearing capacity may have been significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area
in question may be required.
e. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified,
the concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and
subject to correction at no extra cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Division 07 - Insulation Requirements
Section 07115 – Bituminous Damp-Proofing
1 Part 1: General
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hot-applied, cold-applied (cut-back), and cold-applied

(emulsified) asphalt damp-proofing applied to the following surfaces:
1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete and masonry foundation walls.
2. Back side of concrete and masonry retaining walls, below grade.
3. Exterior face of concrete and masonry indicated to receive stone veneer

assemblies and dimension stone cladding.
4. Exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls.
5. Interior face of exterior concrete and masonry walls, above grade.
B. Related Section is Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for

waterproofing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including data substantiating
that materials comply with requirements for each damp-proofing material specified.
Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage
or thickness, and protection course.
B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers, and to comply

with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
C. Record/As-Built Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record/As-Built Drawings

of completed work products, in accordance with the requirements of the Specification as
indicated in Division 1.
A. Quality System: Comply with ISO 9001/9002 Quality System as a minimum.

Incorporate all the standard procedures supplied by the Engineer and the Employer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary damp-proofing materials and primers through

one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain primary damp-proofing materials and

primers from one source and by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials
only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials and as per the Engineer’s
approval.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with damp-proofing only after substrate constructions curing

and penetrating works have been completed.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit asphalt damp-proofing to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of damp-proofing in

enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until damp-proofing has thoroughly cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMP-PROOFING
A. Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in-wall uses other than exterior face
of inner wythe of cavity walls, provide damp-proofing material warranted by manufacturer
to be substantially odor-free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions.
B. Hot-Applied Asphalt Damp-proofing: ASTM D 449, Type I.
C. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back (Solvent-Based) Asphalt Damp-proofing:
1. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I.
2. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I.
D. Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Damp-proofing:
1. Trowel Coats: Mineral colloid asphalt emulation fibrated with selected fibers and
produced in a light trowel consistency, conforming to ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
2. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: This is an asphalt base, clay emulsion with fibers
specifically formulated to offer a tight film that combines both excellent strength and
resistance to water. It conforms to ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
3. Brush and Spray Coats: This is an asphalt base, clay non-fibered, clay emulsion
under normal use it resists flow and sag. It conforms to ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with
water as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
D. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: Premolded, 3 mm thick, multi-ply,

semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between
layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film.
E. Protection Course, Polystyrene Type: Fan-folded, rigid, extruded-polystyrene

board insulation; nominal thickness not less than 5 mm.
F. Protection Course, Roll-Roofing Type: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying

with ASTM D 224, Type II.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with the Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Begin damp-proofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating

work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces

from being stained, spotted, or coated with damp-proofing. Prevent damp-proofing
materials from entering and clogging weepholes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal
joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime materials
manufacturer.
C. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by

prime materials manufacturer even though not shown.
D. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime
materials manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints.
E. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping, as recommended by

prime materials manufacturer, to precede application of damp-proofing. Comply with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Pay particular attention to requirements at building
expansion joints, if any.
F. If recommended by prime materials manufacturer, prime substrate in accordance

with manufacturer’s application instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent

requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory
performance of damp-proofing.
1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve

coverages indicated.
2. Allow each coat of damp-proofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent

coats.
B. Apply damp-proofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall
faces building interior or occupied space whether indicated or not.
1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and
down a minimum of 150 mm over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 300 mm onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto
surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by
embedding a 200 mm wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of damp-
proofing. Damp-proofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats
required.
C. Apply damp-proofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of

inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls.
1. Lap damp-proofing at least 6 mm onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer

ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe.
2. Extend damp-proofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs
that interrupt inner wythe, and lap damp-proofing at least 6 mm onto shelf angles
supporting veneer.
D. Apply damp-proofing to provide continuous plane of protection on interior face of

above grade, exterior concrete and masonry walls unless walls are indicated to receive
direct application of paint.
1. Continue damp-proofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar

joints at intersection temporarily open or by delaying construction of intersecting walls
until damp-proofing is applied.
E. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as “reinforced”

install lapped course of glass fabric in first coat of damp-proofing compound before it
thickens.
F. Contractor's Options: Provide hot-applied, cold-applied (cut-back) or cold-applied

(emulsified) asphalt damp-proofing, as specified in subsequent articles for substrates
indicated, within the following limitations:
1. Use hot-applied asphalt damp-proofing only on exterior, below-grade surfaces of

building and back sides of retaining walls.
2. Use cold-applied, cut-back asphalt damp-proofing only on exterior surfaces of

building and exterior face of inner wythe of cavity walls.
3. Use cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt damp-proofing on surfaces other than below-

grade exterior surfaces and any surface indicated to receive damp-proofing.
3.4 HOT-APPLIED ASPHALT DAMP-PROOFING
A. Do not apply hot asphalt when substrate condition causes foaming.
B. Prime masonry and other porous substrates.
C. Apply a uniform coat of hot asphalt by mopping or spraying at not less than 98 kg
or 1 L/sq. m, thickness of not less than 0.8 mm.
D. Apply a second coat to below-grade foundation walls as specified above. Apply

double thickness of second coat where first application has failed to produce a smooth,
shiny, impervious coat.
3.5 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMP-PROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply two

brush or spray coats at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for
second coat, or one trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray
coats at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, or
primer and one trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
C. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and one trowel coat at not
less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less
than 0.5 L/sq. m.
E. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat
at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m.
F. On Concrete Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone

Cladding: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
G. On Masonry Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone

Cladding: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
H. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or
spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
3.6 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMP-PROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply two

brush or spray coats at not less than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for
second coat, one fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or one trowel
coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.
B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and two brush or spray
coats at not less than 0.6 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, primer
and one fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 1.2 L/sq. m, or primer and one
trowel coat at not less than 2 L/sq. m.
C. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less
than 0.5 L/sq. m.
D. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat
at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m.
E. On Concrete Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone

Cladding: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
F. On Masonry Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies and Dimension Stone

Cladding: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
G. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or
spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
H. On Interior Face of Exterior Concrete Walls: Where above grade and indicated to
be furred and finished, apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
I. On Interior Face of Single-Wythe Exterior Masonry Walls: Where above grade

and indicated to be furred and finished, apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not
less than 0.4 L/sq. m.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior, below grade damp-proofing membrane from damage until backfill
is completed. Remove overspray and spilt materials from surfaces not intended to
receive damp-proofing.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE
A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured damp-

proofing. Comply with damp-proofing material manufacturer's written recommendations
for attaching protection course. Support protection course with spot application of trowel-
grade mastic where not otherwise indicated.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Remove damp-proofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive damp-

proofing.
Division 31– Earthwork RequirementsSection
31 00 00– Earthwork
1 Part 1: General
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavation, filling, and compacting as well as site grading as shown on Drawings

and as specified herein.
1.2. REFERENCES
A. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM D 422 Particle Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D 698 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-
Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-inch (305-mm) Drop
ASTM D 1556 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method
ASTM D 1557 Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate

Mixtures Using 10 lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) Drop
ASTM D 2167 Density and Unit Weight of Soil-in-Place by the Rubber

Balloon Method
ASTM D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil,

Rock and Soil Aggregate Mixtures
ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils For Engineering Purposes
ASTM D 2937 Density of Soil in Place by the Drive Cylinder

Method
ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of

Soils
ASTM D 4253 Maximum Index Density of Soils Using Vibratory

Table
ASTM E 548 Standard Guide for General Criteria Used for

Evaluating Laboratory
B. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
AASHTO M 145 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures For Highway

Construction Purposes
AASHTO M 147 Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate Sub-base, Base and
Surface Courses
AASHTO T 180 Moisture Density Relations of soils using a 10 lb (4.54 kg) Rammer
and an 18 inch (457 mm) Drop
AASHTO T 191 Test Method for In-Place Density of Compacted Base Courses
Containing Large Sizes of Coarse Aggregate
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports (Excavating, Filling and Grading):
1. Submit copies of the following reports:
a. Test reports on soil material conforming to the requirements specified under

Quality Assurance.
b. Field density test reports.
c. One optimum moisture density relationship curve for each type of soil to be used
for fill or backfill.
B. Excavations over 1.5 m in depth will be sheeted and shored. Submit drawings and
calculations for the design of the sheeting and shoring.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable

requirements of Uniform Building Code (UBC) and other governing authorities, codes
and standards having jurisdiction.
B. Testing Services: Employ a qualified independent testing laboratory approved by

the Engineer to perform tests specified herein during earthwork operations as well as the
additional tests performed to determine the quality of work, if requested by the Engineer
at no extra cost. Perform each test in conformance with the following:
- Compaction Curve: Conform to ASTM D 1557
- Liquid Limit: Conform to ASTM D 4318
- Plastic Limit: Conform to ASTM D 4318
- In-Situ Moisture Content: Conform to ASTM D 2216
- Particle-Size Analysis: Conform to ASTM D 422
- Soil Classification: Conform to ASTM D 2487
C. Quality Testing Compliances: Based on reports of the testing and inspection, if the
subgrade, fill, or backfill does not meet the specified requirements these materials shall
be considered defective and shall be rejected. Excavate rejected materials and provide
new acceptable materials replacing the rejected materials and re-compact the new
materials as specified. Retest the re-compacted materials and repeat the procedure as
necessary until the specified compaction is obtained.
D. Recommendations of Report for Geo-Technical Studies for the Project shall be

followed.
1.5. JOB CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as

representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil bore holes. It should
be expressly understood that the Engineer would not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience
of Contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by
Contractor at no cost to Owner.
B. Noise and Dust Control: Utilize reasonable and necessary means to abate dust,
dirt rising, and undue noise. Perform necessary sprinkling and wetting of construction
site to prevent dust from spreading.
C. Existing Utilities:
1. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in

place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations.
2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered

during excavation; consult the corresponding utility company for directions. Cooperate
with the Engineer and utility companies in keeping the respective services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the authorized utility company.
D. Use of Explosives:
1. The use of explosives shall not be permitted.
E. Protection of Persons and Property:
1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning
lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by the authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from

damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other
hazards created by earthwork operations.
F. Existing Conditions: Prior to commencing work at site, verify agreement of existing

conditions with indicated conditions. Notify the Engineer in writing of discrepancies found.
Start of work without notification constitutes acceptance of conditions, with no extra cost.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. SOIL MATERIALS
A. Backfill and Fill Materials:
1. Suitable Materials:
a. Materials classified according to ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, SM, SW and SP,
or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 75 mm in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
b. Roadways: Materials conforming to AASHTO M 145 Class A 1, A 2 or A 3.
2. Unsuitable Materials:
a. Materials conforming to ASTM D 2487 class CH, CL, MH, PT, OH and OL, or a
combination of these group symbols.
b. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent
of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
3. Fill materials shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 75 mm in any dimension,
debris, waste, organic material and other deleterious matter. The fine content (silt and
clay size particles passing US # 200 sieve which is equivalent to a particle diameter of 75
micron) should be less than 15 % by weight. Fill materials shall have a grading with
100% passing the 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) sieve. Follow the recommendations of Report for
Geo-Technical Studies.
B. Acceptable Topsoil: Acceptable topsoil includes selectively excavated topsoil

material that is representative of local soils that produce heavy growths of crops, grass,
or other vegetation, and is reasonably free from underlying subsoil, clay lumps, weeds,
litter, brush, matted roots, toxic substances, or any material harmful to plant growth or
which would hinder grading, planting, or maintenance operations. Topsoil shall not
contain more than 5 percent by volume of stones or other such objects larger than 25
mm in any dimension for field-seeded areas and 12 mm in any dimension for lawn
seeded areas.
C. Borrow Material: Where suitable materials are not available in sufficient quantities
from required excavations, approved materials shall be obtained from approved sources
outside the limits of project at the Contractor's expense. Borrow material shall comply
with the requirements specified for Backfill and Fill Materials. Borrow material shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval based on the test reports performed as described
herein.
D. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or

uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent
passing a 38-mm sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. Thickness
of drainage layer shall be as shown on drawings.
E. Sub-Base Materials: AASHTO M 147 Grade B or MOC Grade B, naturally or

artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, and
natural or crushed sand.
2.2. EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Excavated materials shall not be used for fill under structures and pavements,
unless indicated otherwise in Geotechnical Report. Follow the recommendations of
Report for Geo-Technical Studies. Excavated materials may be used for general fill after
removing oversize stones, unless indicated otherwise in Geotechnical Report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXCAVATION
A. Excavate materials of whatever nature encountered to the lines and grades as

shown. Excavation includes removal and disposal of obstructions on ground surface,
underground structures and other materials encountered.
B. Unauthorized Excavation: Consists of the removal of materials beyond indicated

subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Engineer.
Unauthorized excavation shall be at the Contractor's expense.
1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation

by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation
bottom without altering required top elevation.
2. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for

authorized excavations unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
C. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade

elevations, the Engineer will make an inspection of conditions.
1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required subgrade

elevations, carry excavations deeper 300 mm and replace the excavated material with
specified sub base materials and as directed by the Engineer.
2. In areas of unsuitable material where over excavating to 300 mm does not remove
the unsuitable bearing material, excavate down as required and construct a working
platform using specified sub base materials for 300 mm in depth then use rock-fill
material. Bring backfill to 300 mm below the finished subgrade shown on Drawings in
layers not exceeding 200 mm in depth. Continue backfilling to subgrade elevation or to
final elevation using specified backfill material as shown on Drawings.
D. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with the following:
1. Slopes of cuts in natural; 1:1
2. Slopes of compacted fill; 1-1/2:1
3. Slopes of un-compacted fill; 2:1
Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability
of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
E. Shoring and Bracing: Designing, providing and maintaining the suitable shoring
and bracing system that will support the loads imposed shall be the Contractor's
responsibility. Proposed shoring and bracing system shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer. Provide materials for shoring and bracing in good serviceable condition.
1. Provide shoring system adequately anchored and braced to resist earth and
hydroscopic pressures.
2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with safe
operating procedures.
3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations. Carry down shoring and bracing as
excavation progresses.
F. Dewatering: Provide adequate dewatering system in order to prevent surface

water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding
Project site and the surrounding area:
1. Designing, providing and maintaining comprehensive dewatering system

throughout excavation and backfilling works. Proposed dewatering system shall be
subject to approval of the Engineer. However, such approval shall not relieve Contractor
from his responsibility towards the dewatering system. In case, Contractor's proposed
dewatering system fails or does not perform efficiently, Contractor shall immediately
replace the system at no extra cost to Owner.
2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent

softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps,
suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to
convey water away from excavations. Dewatering system shall run 24 hours a day during
excavation and backfilling works. Contractor shall provide standby power generators for
running the dewatering system, non-stop, in case of power failures.
3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run off
areas, and eventually transport the water off site. Comply with the requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction regarding the safe disposal of water removed from
excavations and rain water. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other
diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as
temporary drainage ditches.
G. Material Storage: Stockpile suitable excavated material until required for backfill or
fill. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Dispose off excess
soil material and waste materials.
H. Excavation for Structures:
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance plus or minus 50

mm and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing
and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services and other construction as well
as for inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of
excavation. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive
concrete.
I. Excavation for Trenches: Conform to the requirements of Section 31 23 33 -

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING.
3.2. BACKFILL AND FILL
A. General: Place soil material in layers to the required subgrade elevations, for each
area classification listed below, using materials as specified above.
1. General Fill: Use satisfactory borrow material.
2. Under Structures: Use satisfactory borrow material.
3. Under Grassed Areas: Use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
4. Under Walkways and Pavements: Use subbase material, satisfactory excavated

or borrows material, or a combination.
5. Under Steps: Use subbase material.
6. Under Building Slabs: Use drainage fill material.
7. Under Equipment: Use subbase materials where required over rock bearing
surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. Shape excavation bottom to fit
bottom 90 degrees of cylinder.
8. Trenches for Piping and Conduits: Conform to the requirements of Section 31 23

33 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING.
H. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until the completion of
the following:
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp-

proofing, water proofing and perimeter insulation.
2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities have

been performed and recorded.
3. Removal of concrete formwork.

4. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
3.3. PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil

materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement
of fills. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so
that fill material will bond with existing surface to depth of 300 mm and compact to
required depth as directed by the Engineer.
B. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 200 mm in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 100 mm in loose
depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers.
C. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide

optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry
density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill
material on surfaces that are muddy.
D. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to
required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement
of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping, or conduit to
approximately same elevation in each lift.
E. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density

specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted
areas or lifts as directed by the Engineer if soil density tests indicate inadequate
compaction.
F. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs and steps, and pavements, compact top 300 mm
of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum density.
2. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact top 150 mm of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum density.
3. Under walkways, compact top 150 mm of subgrade and each layer of backfill/fill
material at 95 percent maximum density.
4. General Fill: Compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum
density.
G. Moisture control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture

conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of
soil material. Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from
appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Moisture content
shall be kept within 2 percent above or below the optimum as determined by ASTM D
1557, Method-D.
H. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, heavy equipment for spreading and
compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to a wall less than a distance equal to
the height of the backfill above the top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted
in layers not more than 150 mm in compacted thickness with power driven hand tamper
suitable for material being compacted.
I. Testing of Fill and Backfill: Frequency of field density tests in accordance with
ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) shall be as follows:
1. One test per 30 m² of underground pipe trench.
2. One test per 100 m² per lift under foundations.
3. One test per 200 m² per lift under paved areas.
4. The laboratory tests ASTM D 698 shall be carried out once for every 5 field
density tests.
J. Tolerance:
1. Pavements and Walks: Shape surfaces of areas under pavement and walks to
line, grade cross section with finish surface not more than 20 mm above or below the
required subgrade elevation.
2. Under Building Slabs: Provide final grades within a tolerance of 12 mm when

tested in a 3 m straight edge.
3. Foundations: Finish surfaces on which footing shall be placed to within 25 mm or

below the required grades.
4. Landscaped Areas and Rough Grading: Finish all areas to within 50 mm above or
below the elevations, grades and cross sections shown.
3.4. BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Placing: Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform

thickness, conforming to the indicated cross section and thickness. Maintain optimum
moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. When a
compacted drainage course is indicated to be 150 mm thick or less, place material in a
single layer. Where thickness of drainage course is indicated to be more than 150 mm,
place material in equal layers, not more than 150 mm or less than 75 mm thick for each
layer when compacted.
3.5. PREPARATION FOR PAVEMENTS
A. Sub Grade Preparation:
1. After completion of stripping or excavation operations, as applicable, scarify and

compact the natural sub-grade to lines, slopes and levels as shown on the Drawings.
2. The top 300 mm of sub grade shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95

percent. Density shall be measured in field in accordance with AASHTO T 191 and in the
laboratory shall be determined according to AASHTO T 180.
B. Granular Sub-Base:
1. General: For granular sub-base; before placing and spreading operations are
started, verify that the sub grade has been approved and satisfactorily maintained and
that it is to levels and of the material specified. Ruts or soft yielding areas shall be filled
and compacted to the required density.
2. Placing and Compaction: Sub base material shall be spread on the finished sub
grade in uniform layer without segregation, to such loose depth that when compacted,
the layer will have a thickness of maximum 200 mm. Material shall be mixed with blade
graders or other equipment until a uniform mixture is obtained. Aggregate shall be within
the specified moisture content limits when compacting is started. Variations shall be
corrected prior to or during compacting by sprinkling or by aeration. The layer shall be
compacted by rolling with a 3 wheel power roller weighing 8 to 10 tons or an approved
pneumatic roller. Alternate blading and rolling shall be performed until obtaining smooth,
even and uniformly compacted finished top course.
C. Compacting shall not be less than 100 percent of maximum dry density in place
for access roads and 95 percent minimum for parking areas. Density shall be measured
in field according to AASHTO T 191 and in laboratory shall be determined in accordance
with AASHTO T 180. The C.B.R. value of the granular sub base course after compacting
shall be more than 50 percent.
D. Testing Surface: Sub base shall be true to established grade. Thickness shall not
be more or less than 10 mm from that required for the layer being constructed. Surface
shall not vary more than 10 mm in 3 m from true profile and cross section. Thickness of
the granular sub base shall be measured at intervals as directed by the Engineer.
Measurements shall be taken at various points through holes not less than 75 mm in
diameter.
3.6. MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas:
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris
and provide temporary drainage as required.
2. Repair and re establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified
tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are

disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface,
reshape and compact to required moisture and density prior to further construction.
Remove saturated or softened soil as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 034900 - GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDS
A. This section covers the work of G.R.C. architectural glass fiber
reinforced concrete for the facades and interior decorative cornices and
units as indicated on Drawings and required by the Contract.
Extent of G.R.C. molded architecture ornamentation is shown on Drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and
sealant backings.
Division 09 Section: Painting
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s detailed technical data for
fabrication, installation, embedded hardware, fastenings, integrated
stainless steel support framing, accessories maintenance and test results
and certificate of compliances for materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location, fabrication,
installation and the formation steps, dimensions details, erection and
assemblies of each type of G.R.C precast unit not fully described by
product Drawings, templates and instruction for installation of
anchorage devices and attachment to other units of work.
1. Submit design calculation for typical panel and connections including
loads used in design and stresses from wind, thermal movement or
other influences.
C. Samples: Submit for each unit samples representatives of finished
exposed surfaces showing typical range of color texture and of
appropriate thickness.
1. Sample size: 600mm length and of actual thickness.
A. Manufacturer’s and Erector’s Qualifications: firm with a demonstrated
capability to produce grc panels of quality and scope required for this
job and involved in grc product for at least five (5) years.
Erector must have at least three (3) years successfully experience in erection of
G.R.C. units or architectural concrete panels similar to units required for this
project.
PART 1 - The Contractor has to employ experienced workman having
profound experience with Architectural ornamentation and who
successfully accomplished ornamentation work identical to those required
by this Contract.
The Engineer reserves the right to exclude any workman incorporated in the
Architectural ornamentation work who substantiates no fitness for such delicate
item.
PART 2 - Damaged units shall be rejected and shall be replaced at the
Contractor expense.
B. Mockup: After samples are accepted for color and texture, construct
mock-ups of a similar panel to those indicated on Drawings to
demonstrate aesthetic effects meeting design requirements showing
execution, installation, anchorage and finishes.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in
order to avoid excessive stress and damage.
Care shall be taken not to deface exposed surfaces or chip protruding, round or
inner edges.
Lift or support units only at points indicated on erection shop drawings.
Store units inside, under cover in shaded aerated area, keep them dry and
protected against direct sun light, damage from weather and contact with soil,
staining and physical damage.
Neatly stock units flat to prevent sagging.
Place non staining resilient spacer of even thickness between units.
1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY

The Contractor warrants and agrees to repair or replace items that fails in material
or workmanship within a period of 5 years from the Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
Provide form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood or other acceptable
materials that are non reactive with concrete and shall produce required
surface finishes.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide G.R.C. consisting of the following materials:
A. Portland Cement: For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure,
use same brand, type and source of supply throughout G.R.C.
production, all cements shall comply to ASTM C 150.

B. Sand: Washed and dried silica or other acceptable materials with
successful use in G.R.C. production, comply with ASTM C 33 and all
passing through Sieve No. 16. Aggregates of maximum size 10 mm can
be used.
C. Water: Must be clean potable water free from sediment, organic
impurities, contaminated oils, salts and any other substances that may
be harmful to cement or steel.
D. Admixture: Shall comply to ASTM C 494 and do not use admixture that
contains more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
E. Coloring Agent: Must be ultraviolet and alkali resistant, high temperature
stable, harmless to concrete set, or strength. Color shall be selected by
Engineer.
F. Glass Fiber: Known as CEM-FIL must be specially designed for
compatibility with aggressive alkaline environment of Portland cement
based composites, acid resistant and of diameter 0.5 mm to 2 mm.
G. Anchors: The Contractor shall provide sufficient anchorage devices,
fasteners, bolts, nuts, washers, steel plates or stainless steel framing
system necessary for installation of units. with capacity to sustain
without failure a load equal to five (5) times to that of GRC units.
H. Stainless Steel Framing: For large openings and where indicated
provide stainless steel framing in location to receive GRC units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting
performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 FORMATION OF MOLDS

PART 3 - Molds shall be formed to produce ornaments of dimensions and
thicknesses identical to those indicated on shop drawings.
PART 4 - Formation of molds dimensions shall account for commencing the
modeling of the ornament just at the outer surface of wall after applying
finishing coats.
Surfaces of produced ornaments in contact to walls or concrete slabs shall be neat,
leveled and of sharp edges.
3.3 MIXING
I. The typical mix formulation shall be sand, cement rated to 0.5:1 and a
water cement ratio preferable less than 0.35. It is essential to keep the
water: Cement ratio as low as possible with maintaining workability of
the mix, hence admixtures are used. Chopper glass-fibers up to 5% by
weight of mix, can be incorporated into the mix, but typical fiber content
is around 4%. The fiber length is normally 12 mm to 25 mm long,
coloring agent must not exceed 10% of cement weight.
J. Vibrate mix after pouring into form to enable the slurry to flow and
removes trapped air.
3.4 CURING
Great attention to curing conditions is to be ensured; units shall be kept moist
immediately after manufacture and during curing period either by storing units in a
humidity chamber or total immersion in water, for a minimum period of seven (7)
days.
3.5 INSPECTION
The Engineer shall inspect completed parts in the workshop for compliance with
Specification and Architectural requirements. No part shall be installed prior to the
inspection and approval of the Engineer.
Surfaces shall be free from honeycombing and any defects arising from faulty
form work or other causes.
3.6 HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING

The units shall include suitable lifting points.
The lifting points shall be positioned in such a way to make them unseen when the
units are erected.
Care shall be taken when handling and transporting casted ornaments not to
deface exposed surfaces or chip protruding, rounds or inner edges. Any portion
marred during handling or transporting shall be rejected and substituted by a neat
one with no compensation paid to the Contractor.
3.7 INSTALLATION
Ornaments shall be installed sturdily to concrete masonry walls or concrete
elements or steel frames carrying or suspending them.
Sufficient fixing points shall be provided to fully and rigidly support the units and to
resist the wind loading.
Provide temporary supports and bracing to maintain in position, and alignments
the units until they shall be permanently connected.
The Contractor shall arrange and plan his work in such a way that minimizes
perforating concrete masonry walls. Perforation of ornaments carrying elements
shall not be permitted unless otherwise there is no other technique for robust
installation.
Ornaments shall be installed in direct contact with walls and slabs. Anchors,
stirrups and ties projecting off their sides shall be inserted through the elements of
the structure carrying or suspending them, and shall be cemented into them by
cement sand mortar of 350 kg ordinary Portland cement to 1 m 3 sand. Addition of
gypsum to the mix is entirely prohibited. Only accelerating admixtures can be
added to the mix after the prior written permission and approval of the Engineer.
Do not release fastening of the installed ornaments until cementing mortar has
set.
Parts composing one (1) ornament shall be installed leveled, matched and flushed
to produce a neat pleasant sight. Joints shall be solidly filled to full thickness with
mortar of one (1) part white cement to two (2) parts of sand. Color of mortar shall
match color of ornaments and all matching that of the existing building.
Installation of the ornaments shall precede the finishing coat of areas in vicinity of
them.
3.8 JOINT TREATMENT
Provide joint treatment material complying with the recommendation of the
Manufacturer of units and joint treatment materials. Use factory-packaged, job
mixed, chemical hardening powder products.3.9 cleaning
Do all final cleaning which may be necessary, surfaces required to be cleaned
after installation shall be cleaned using fiber brushes, soap and clear water from a
hose. Do not use acid. Flush copiously and repeat washing until the surfaces are
clean.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that GRC units’
assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the same time of Substantial
Completion.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
A. This section covers the work of unit masonry assemblies as required by the
Contract and including the following:
1. Concrete Masonry Units.
2. Mortar and Grout.

3. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories.
Extent of each type and size of concrete masonry units is indicated on Drawings.

A. The following sections include requirements which relate to this section
Division 03 Section” Cast-in-place Concrete”
Division 05 Section” Metal Fabrications”
Division 07 Section” Joint Sealants”
Division 09 Section” Plastering”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division-1 Specification Sections for the approval of the Engineer:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory and other manufactured products, including certifications that each
type complies with specified requirements. Submit also product data for
proposed admixture.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings including full details of masonry works for different
assemblies and flashings, masonry reinforcement, joints, horizontal joint
reinforcement, joints with steel columns, openings, lintels and other details as the
Engineer may require.
C. Samples: Submit for approval by Engineer three samples of each type of
masonry unit and accessory, before delivery to the site.
1. Identify all samples with project number, date, Contractor's name,
and description of the sample, i.e., manufacturer's name, product
name and type.
2. After approval, samples will be retained on site for use as
standard of acceptance until completion of Contract.
3. Materials built into the Work shall match approved samples.
D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating
compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type
designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following:
Masonry units: Include material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances.
For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to
ASTM C 67.

A. Reference Standards: Concrete masonry work shall be performed in strict
accordance with the stipulations of the latest edition of the Egyptian Standard
Specifications (E.S.S) No. 1292, as referenced to throughout this section, or other
equivalent international standards and Sound Practice.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain masonry units from a recognized
local manufacturer of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the
ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single
manufacturer for each product required.
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each
cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete
masonry unit type indicated, per Egyptian Standard Specifications (E.S.S.) No.
1292, ASTM C 140
E. Field Constructed Mock-ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample

wall panels representative of completed masonry work required for project with
respect to qualities of appearance, materials and construction. Locate mock-ups
on Site in locations indicated by the Engineer. Retain mock-ups during
construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. Build mock-ups for
each type of unit masonry assembly in size approximately 2 m long by 1.6 m high
by full thickness using materials indicated for the completed work.
- Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.

A. Cement: Shall be delivered in sealed bags bearing the manufacturer's name and
shall be stored in piles not more than ten bags high in perfectly dry weatherproof
sheds clear from the ground on planks or other damp-proofing supports. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp. Cement shall comply with
requirements of Division 3 “Cast in place concrete “
B. Sand: Sand and crushed stones or aggregate shall consist of natural materials
and shall comply with requirements of Division 3 “ Cast in place concrete “and
shall be stored in separate stockpiles and shall be free from all foreign materials
which may become mixed with them.
C. Masonry Units: Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If
units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with
waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are
dry.
Care shall be taken to protect edges and corners of masonry units or special units
from breakage or damage through storage or handling.
D. Masonry Accessories: Store masonry accessories, and all metal items, in dray
area to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: All masonry units shall be identical to approved samples, hard, sound,
durable, and clean, of sharp edges, right angles, accurate and uniform dimensions
and homogenous, plane surfaces free from chipping, cracking, inflorescence and
foreign matters.
1. Hollow (non-load bearing) Concrete masonry units shall conform to the
requirements E.S 1292
a. Average compressive Strength : 5 N/ mm2
b. Average Absorption : 6 %
c. Density: shall not be less than 1150 kg/m3 and shall not exceed
1350 kg/m3.
2. Solid Concrete masonry units shall conform to the requirements E.S1392
a. Average compressive Strength: 7 N/ mm2
b. Average Absorption: 7 %
c. Density: shall not be less than 1850 kg/m3
B. Size and Shapes:
1. Size: Manufactured to the dimensions indicated on drawings
2. Tolerances: The permissible deviation in each dimension shall be within
1% but shall not exceed ± 3 mm.
3. Special Shapes: Provide where required for corners, jambs, sash, control
joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. Provide square-edged
units for outside corners.
2.2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, as indicated on drawings and
complying with requirements below.
Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with
requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.3 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors as required and specified in subsequent
paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with the followings, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/
A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,
Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Anchors and Ties: To bond masonry walls to concrete structure, provide straps, and
bars fabricated from not less than galvanized sheet 1.5 mm thick after fabrication,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 MORTAR
A. Mortar Materials: Ingredients for mortar shall be measured in proper clean gauge
boxes.
1. Cement: with requirements of Division 3 “Cast in place concrete “
2. Aggregate: with requirements of Division 3 “Cast in place concrete “
3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
4. Water: Clean and potable.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Cement-sand, lime-free mortar. Approved liquid-type

admixtures may be added to the mix to substitute the effect of lime. Compressive
strength shall be 5±1 N/mm2. Bending strength shall be 1 N/mm2 minimum.
Cement-sand mix shall be 1:3-4, by volume.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine conditions, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit
masonry.
Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installation.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated
applicable to each type of installation included in Project.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Build all partitions and composite masonry construction to the respective
full thickness and height shown on Drawings, using units of nominal thickness
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades.
Provide not less than 200 mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings and between adjacent chases and recesses, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry.
D. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction

immediately adjacent to the opening.
E. Cut concrete masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with
clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown
and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible.
F. Use solid concrete bricks or fill hollow cores of blocks with grout and vibrate with
proper sized vibrator the following:
1. Solid blocks for assemblies below grade, wet areas, first three courses of walls
and partitions, boundary of opening and steel columns and walls receive
mechanically fixed stone cladding.
2. Partitions or walls to heights indicated on Drawings where sanitary fixtures.
3. At opening jambs.
4. 3 courses of concrete units (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated.
G. All concrete blocks shall be well soaked with water before use, allow units to
absorb water so they are damp but not wet.
H. All blocks shall be well buttered with mortar before being laid and all joints shall
be thoroughly flushed up as the work proceeds.
I. Blocks laid per day shall not exceed 1.2 m in height.
J. The top of walls left off shall be wetted before work is recommenced.
K. Exposed surface of concrete masonry work which shall be left without plastering
shall have a fair face smooth and clean, consisting of selected blocks jointed with
a neatly weathered or flush joint.
L. Walls to be plastered shall have the horizontal joints raked out to a depth of 12
mm to form a key.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with construction tolerances of ES -Code of Practice for Use of Masonry.
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs,
reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more
than 6 mm in 6 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 6 mm in 6 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
3. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 6 mm in 3 m, nor 12 mm maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 3 mm, with a maximum thickness limited to 12 mm. Do not vary from
bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 3 mm.
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than
plus or minus 3 mm. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint
thickness by more than 3 mm.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY

A. Walls shall be thoroughly bonded. Lay walls in advance for accurate spacing of
surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings,
movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half size
units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
B. Units shall be laid on solid beds of mortar; vertical joints between units shall be
solid filled.
C. Blocks shall be well soaked before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be
wetted before work is recommenced. All blocks shall be well buttered with mortar
before being laid and all joints shall be thoroughly flushed up as the work
proceeds.
D. Line pegs shall be removed as the work progresses, resulting holes filled and
tooled before mortar has set.
E. Masonry units shall be set out with a storey rod so that coursing lines up at steel
shelf angles, sills, heads of windows and doors with full courses.
F. Walls shall be kept level at all times. Carry up walls in a uniform manner; no part
being raised more than 1000 mm above any adjacent unbuilt course, and no area
of walling higher than 600 mm, above any course which is not fully set. Angles
and reveals shall be kept true, square and plumb. Broken walls must be laid up
with a lead.
G. Walls shall be constructed as true planes and when tested with a 3000 mm straight
edge placer anywhere on the wall in any direction shall be true to place within 3
mm and plumb within 6 mm. Un-satisfactory work shall be removed and replaced.
H. Intersecting concrete block walls shall be tied together in a masonry bond.
I. Provide special units at jambs, heads, sills, corners and bonding blocks as
required.
J. Units shall be accurately cut and fitted at heads of windows, window stools, heads
of doors and other openings as necessary to accommodate the hollow metal door
frames, window frames, window stools, etc.
K. Masonry units shall be laid free of smears, mortar slicks, stains, cracked, broken
edges and corners and other defects detrimental to the finished appearance. If
any chipped or broken units are discovered in the finished wall, Engineer will
require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional
cost to the Contract.
L. Extend masonry partitions, unless shown otherwise, to within 20 mm of underside
of structure. Fill the 20 mm gap with insulation under 25% compressions, so
placed that space is left each side of the finished wall to accept joint sealant.
M. Corners shall be bounded by overlapping units and shall be solid grouted.
N. Vertical joints in alternate courses shall be plumb and in line.
O. Partitions shall be bonded to main walls by toothing every third course to a depth
of not less than 100 mm.

P. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Q. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise
indicated.
R. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or
grout into core.
S. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout (600 mm) under bearing
plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
T. Bond Pattern: Lay masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, in
accordance with the best constructional practice lay in one-half unit running bond
with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
U. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back a distance of unit length or 200 mm in
each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units
lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior
to laying fresh masonry.
V. Curing: All walls and partitions shall be properly cured by sprinkling water twice a
day for a period of not less than five (5) days after completion of laying the course.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Beddings: Lay concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and
foundation walls and in all courses of piers, and columns and where adjacent to
cells or cavities to be filled with mortar. For starting courses on footings where cells
are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
B. Joints: If not otherwise indicated, lay masonry walls with 10 mm joints. Maintain
joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be
covered by other materials.
1. Walls to be plastered shall have joints raked out to a depth of 12 mm to form a
key.
2. For joints to be pointed, tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer
larger than joint thickness, raked joints shall not be more than 12 mm deep.
3. Remove concrete masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh
mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been
set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units clean off mortar and
reset in fresh mortar.
3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK
A. Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Anchor masonry to structural members
where masonry abuts or faces such members with flexible anchors to comply with
the following:
1. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.7 LINTELS
A. Provide minimum bearing, at each jamb, of 100 mm for openings less than 1.5 m
wide and of 200 mm for wider openings.
B. Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry lintels where indicated and where openings of
not more than 300 mm for brick units and 600 mm for block units shown without
structural steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Use specially formed "U"-shaped lintel units for formed-in-place lintels with
reinforcing bars and stirrups placed as shown on approved shop drawings and
filled with grout of consistency required to completely fill space between
reinforcement and masonry unit.
D. Provide temporary support for formed in place masonry units lintels.
E. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels. Thoroughly cure
precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-
place lintels until cured.
A. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, reinforcement for concrete lintels shall
consist of four 16 mm diameter bars and 6 mm diameter stirrups at 200 mm
intervals.
3.8 REPAIR AND POINTING

A. Repair: Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken,
stained or otherwise damaged.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep
holes and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners,
openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance.
C. Cleaning: Sweep and clean surfaces with a dry brush to remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
SECTION 055133 - METAL LADDERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Parcel 34 100 of 1243
A. Galvanized steel fixed vertical ladders.

A. Section 05550 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous metal supports.
B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Roof framing and support.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A14.3: Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements.
B. OSHA 1910.27: Fixed Ladders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data : Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,
including :
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings for Ladders:
1. Plan and section of ladder installation.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for
installation.
B. Store products until installation inside under cover. If stored outside, under a
tarp or suitable cover. Moisture can stain the galvanized steel under prolonged
exposure.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Limited Warranty: Five years against defective material and workmanship,
covering parts only, no labor or freight. Defective parts, if deemed so by the
manufacturer, will be replaced at no charge, freight excluded, upon inspection
at manufacturer's plant which warrants same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GALVANIZED STEEL FIXED VERTICAL LADDER

A. Galvanized steel Fixed Vertical Ladder and Components: Ladder, floor
mounting brackets.
1. Performance Standard: Units designed and manufactured to meet or

exceed ANSI A14.3 and OSHA 1910.27.
B. Components:
1. Ladder Stringer: AA C3 x .13 6005-T5 galvanized steel channel. Pitch: 90

degrees.
2. Ladder Tread: 40 mm diameter round 6005-T5 Galvanized steel custom
extrusion with non-slip exterior surfacing – ASCEND Rung
Parcel 34 101 of 1243

3. Ladder Mounting Bracket: Formed brackets of 3/8” 3003 series Galvanized

steel for 6 ” standoff. Consult ASCEND for other options.
4. Finishes:
a. Standard: Mill finish on Galvanized steel ladder components.
b. Optional Finishes
1. Powder Coated
2. Anodized
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Ladder components to be fabricated for field assembly or as specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect
of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
B. Examine materials upon arrival at site. Notify the carrier and manufacturer of
any damage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
Parcel 34 102 of 1243

A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings handrails.
2. Stainless Steel pipe and tube railings handrails.
3. Steel guard rails.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
2. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of (0.89 kN) applied horizontally on an area of

(0.093 sq. m).
b. Uniform load of (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally.
c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): (67 deg C), ambient; (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion

by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34 103 of 1243

A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments

to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include

structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color,

texture, or design.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a
single approved manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
1.6 MOCKUPS
A. Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
B. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically
approved by Architect in writing.
C. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction

contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made

without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating
railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established
dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
Parcel 34 104 of 1243
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed
walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy
structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material
and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Steel and Iron
1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed)
2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
3. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
D. Stainless Steel: Use stainless steel type 304 for interior spaces and 316 for
external areas
1. Pipe and tubing: ASTM A 269 Type 304 or Type 316.
2. Bar: ASTM A 276 Type 304 or Type 316.
3. Fittings: ASTM A 276/ A 479 Type 304 or Type 316.
4. Cables: MIL‐W‐87161, Type II, Composition B 3/16” diameter or as required
(Type 316) 1 X 19 strand.

Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as required for
color match, strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to other construction: Select
fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for
anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and
capable of withstanding design loads.
B. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25
for electrodeposited zinc coating.
C. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type,
grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to
other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
D. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Provide concealed fasteners
Parcel 34 105 of 1243
for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work,
E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not
less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Mechanical Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting
members with railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners
and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to
produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. Fabricate splice joints for field
connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this is manufacturer's standard
splicing method. Do not use field welding, unless specifically permitted in this
section.
D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges to a radius of approximately (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
H. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, use
fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at
fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
Parcel 34 106 of 1243

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so

no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
J. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce

uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section
of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise
indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is
(6 mm) or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work,
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads
imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and
at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details
indicated.
2.6 FINISHES AND GENERAL

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are not acceptable. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A.Galvanized Railings:
Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
Parcel 34 107 of 1243

Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.

Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless
indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off
smooth.
C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners,
sleeves, and other ferrous components.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate
process.
E. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated.
Delete subparagraph below if galvanized railings are shop primed.
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
F. Powder-Coat Finish Galvanized Metal: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized
metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt,
oil, flux, and other foreign matter.
2. Treat prepared metal with zinc-phosphate pretreatment, rinse,
and seal surfaces.
3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder
coating with cured-film thickness not less than 0.04 mm.
4. Color: Match Architect's sample as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set
railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of (1 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations
from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed
(5 mm in 3 m).
Parcel 34 108 of 1243

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces that will be in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of
bituminous paint.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting

joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners

where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-
place construction.
F. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not
farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint
internal sleeve extending (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal
sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within (150 mm) of post.
3.2 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Form or core-drill holes not less than (125 mm) deep and (20 mm) larger
than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material,
insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink,
nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post
after placing anchoring material.
C. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and
leave (3-mm) buildup, sloped away from post.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with

temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove
protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no
evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in
the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide
new units.
Parcel 34 109 of 1243

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
A. Inserts, sleeves and anchors
B. Steel hatch doors
C. Wire mesh, opening sides and top covers
D. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on Drawings

Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and
other items indicated to be built into unit masonry.
Division 09 Section "Painting" for field-applied finishes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Section for the approval of the Engineer:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and
installation instructions for products used in miscellaneous metal
fabrications including paint products and grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of
metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide
templates for anchor and bolt installation by others.
Where materials or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements
for design loadings, include structural computations, material properties and other
information needed for structural analysis.
Submit fabrication drawings for the Engineer's approval prior to the manufacture of
any of the required items.
C. Samples: Submit 2 sets of representative samples of material and
finished products, tread wearing surfaces, railing components and as
may be requested by the Engineer.
Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
D. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet
certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
E. Qualifications: Submit quality certificates for firms, persons and
welders to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include list of
Parcel 34 110 of 1243

completed projects with project name and addresses, name of

engineers and and other information.
F. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and
personnel.

A. Performance Requirements: Structural Performance of for aluminum
ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for
thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections,
and other detrimental effects.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing
metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this project with sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the work.
D. Welders Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
the Egyptian Standards.
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
Protect formed metal fabrications from corrosion, deformation and other damage
during delivery, storage and handling.
Store metal fabrications off ground, protected with a waterproof covering and
ventilation to avoid condensation.
Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other
construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into
concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of
Parcel 34 111 of 1243

another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for

installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the
completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without
blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
1. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 2 mm.
2. Take in consideration that maximum deflection of any member shall
not exceed 1/360 of the span under specified live load.
3. All steel work for Ship stairs shall be constructed in mild steel or
high tensile steel (ST 52) where indicated and mild steel shall be
heavily galvanized after manufacture except where otherwise
specified
4. Steel Strips shall comply to ES No. 1111.
5. Steel Sections shall comply to ES No. 1810.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786 M rolled from plate
complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283M, Grade C or D.
C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another
weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Welded Type.
E. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010.
F. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, Class 200),
unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.
G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without
failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
H. Threaded or wedge type: galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers,
and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
I. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS
specifications for metal alloy welded.
J. Ferrous Metals
Parcel 34 112 of 1243

1. Cold Rolled: Cold rolled steel sheets of thickness from 0.2 to 3 mm and
width larger than 600 mm shall comply with ES No. 1110 Part 1 First
Group surface Quality (A).
2. Hot Rolled
a. Steel strips and sheets of thickness from 0.8 mm to 8 mm and
width from 10 mm to 2000 mm shall comply to ES No. 1170.
b. Steel sections ES No. 1059 rounded bars.
c. ES No. 1058 un rounded bars.
d. ES No. 1060 Part 1 equal angles, Part 2 unequal angles
e. ES No. 1061 Beams.
3. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ES No. 1201, hot-dip galvanized, Code
No. 610 for sheets thickness to 2 mm and width not larger than
1000 mm.
4. Steel Pipe: ES No. 350, Electrically welded longitudinally, type and
grade (if applicable) as selected by fabricator and as required for design
loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; light weight, unless
5. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same
type, material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise
indicated
6. Wall Framing: Galvanized C-shaped steel stubs of web depth
indicated with lipped flanges and complying with:
a. Steel thickness:1.0 mm
b. Flange width: 35 mm
c. Web: punched (to be field punched as required)
7. Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry
provide with welded steel anchors 32 mm wide by 6 mm thick and
200 mm long at 600 mm intervals.
8. Furnish inserts if units shall be installed after concrete or masonry is
executed.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing
welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. 2Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-
Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt
emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
Parcel 34 113 of 1243

2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Use fasteners made of same basic metal as fastened metal.
Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required.
1. Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5, for interior use and where built into exterior walls.
Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563
(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22M.
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.2M.
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material
indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal
to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
J. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Internally threaded tubular expansion
anchors and machine bolts, carbon steel components zinc plated
K. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as
needed.
1. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not
more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum load conditions
are applied.
L. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed
stainless- steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers;
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy
Group 2 (A4).
M. Veneer Ties: Gasketed steel screw and wire tie system designed for
anchorage to steel stud framing; screw barrel sized for thickness of
sheathing and continuous insulation in air space[; ASTM (A82M); steel
wire ASTM A580; Type 304 stainless-steel wire diameter
Parcel 34 114 of 1243

2.5 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-
corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide
grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications.
B Ordinary Grout: Ordinary Portland Cement according to ES 373and natural sand
to ES 1108 mixed at a ratio of 1 part cement to 2½ parts sand by volume, with
minimum water required for mixing, placement and hydration, shall be used for
interior and exterior applications.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible
to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 2 mm, unless
otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth
and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of
welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal
fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive
finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
Parcel 34 115 of 1243

1. Temperature Change (Range): 40 deg C, ambient; 60 deg C,

material surfaces.
I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges.
J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints; flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type
indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or
bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
L. Comply with details indicated on Drawings or approved shop drawings.
2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE

Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers,
dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and
supporting woodwork and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other
structures.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron
washers for heads and nuts, which bear on wood structural connections;
elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
2.8 ALUMINUM GRILLES.
A. Extruded aluminum stripes of box sections fixed horizontally on
steel posts to form roof’s screen in shapes, height and length indicated
on drawings
1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, 6063-T5.Aluminum, plate and sheet:
ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 6063-T6.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Structural grade aluminum of
same finish as grille.
C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting metal components and
for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are
unavoidable. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed
fasteners.
2.9 WIRE MESH SPECIALTIES
A. Wire Mesh covers: Galvanized steel, zinc coating according to American
standards (ASTMA.123-89).
B. Provide wire mesh sides and top covers for duct opening, of dimensions and
locations as shown. Unless otherwise shown provide 25x75mm diamond mesh,
3x2.7 mm wire, and not less than 4.56kg/m, secured into standard channel frame
and intermediate crossbars. Provide doors of same construction as partition with
a lock panel, locking mechanism, lockset and other finish hardware as required.
2.10 ALUMINUM SCREENS
Parcel 34 116 of 1243

A. Manufactured from extruded aluminum sections of not less than 1.6 mm thick.
Total aluminum panel thickness shall not exceed 75 mm.
B. Sections and Shapes: Extruded geometrical aluminum patterns and shapes
C. Aluminum Finish: As selected by the Engineer and as specified in this section
D. Assembly Clips: Aluminum or plastic clips of same width of sections and shapes
E. Frame: Extruded aluminum sections
F. Sub-frames: aluminum
G. Fabrication: Aluminum panels shall be formed by collecting shapes and sections
in a doweled system or with clips as specified. Dimensions of panels shall be as
indicated on approved shop drawings. Panels shall be sized so as to attain an
integer number through each frame
H. Assembly: Panels shall be assembled to aluminum frame using aluminum
screws. Screens shall be installed at locations designated on Drawings to the
sub-frames using aluminum screws of sufficient length spaced at 500 mm,
maximum
2.11 INSULATED ROOF HATCH COVER

A. The roof hatch shall be single leaf, pre-assembled from the manufacturer.
B. Performance characteristics: Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum
live load of 150kg/m2 with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span.
C. The cover shall be controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and
closing.
D. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature.
E. Entire hatch shall be weathertight with fully welded corner joints on cover and
curb.
F. Hatch Cover: Shall be 1mm galvanized steel with radius corners for safety and
shall be fully welded at the corners for watertight construction. Cover shall have a
rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal
when compressed to the top surface of the curb.
G. Hardware: Heavy hinges shall be provided. Cover shall be equipped with a
handles and interior lock
A. The latch strike shall be a welded component bolted to the curb assembly.
2.12 STEEL SHIP LADDERS

A. Roof’s Steel Ladders: Galvanized steel parts conforming to ASTM A 525,
Designation G-90, including rungs, brackets, railings and fasteners.
B. Design stringers and rungs to carry a uniform live load of 150 kg/m2 and a moving
concentrated load of 100kg (loads not to act simultaneously).
Parcel 34 117 of 1243

C. Fabricate and install ladders for locations shown on drawings with dimensions,
shape, details and anchorage as approved shop drawings and approved by the
Engineer.
D. Rungs shall be 25 mm diameter galvanized steel tubes as indicated and spaced at
300 mm on centers, as shown on Drawings. Provide 50 mm diameter galvanized
steel continuous side railing that is anchored to wall with expansion bolts and
galvanized steel brackets, as shown on Drawings. Provide non-slip surface on top
of each rung as recommended by manufacturer approved by the Engineer.
E. The ladder shall be vertical or inclined towards the surface to which it is fixed at an
angle not exceeding 15 from the vertical.
F. Ladders exceeding 3 meters in height shall be provided with safety cage
constructed of 3 vertical plates supported by flat hoops with a diameter as
indicated on drawings. Provide hoop at top and bottom of cage, intermediate
hoops shall be at 700 mm center conforming to details shown on Drawings.
2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL
A Comply with requirements of Division 9, Section “Painting” for applying of finishes
indicated on drawings. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
1. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with
applicable standard listed below:
a. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
b. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
2. Preparation for Shop Priming: prepare uncoated ferrous-metal

surfaces to comply with requirements specified in Division 9,
Section “Painting”.
a. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,
except those with galvanized finished and those to be embedded
in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Field-Applied Finishes: Type of finish is to be as indicated on
Drawings or specified. Comply with requirements of Division 9,
Section "Painting" for type of finish indicated.
C EXTERIOR ALUMINUM SURFACE FINISH.
Electrostatically applied thermosetting Kynar flouropolymer resin coating with
inhibitive flash primer over chromate conversion coating. Meet or exceed AAMA
2605 standards. Submit color samples for approval, color to be selected by
Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Parcel 34 118 of 1243

3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication,
where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking
field measurements before fabrication may delay work.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions and directions for installation of anchorages such as concrete inserts,
sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors which are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to the Site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and
fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place
construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry
inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other
connectors.
B. Setting Bearing And Leveling Plates: Clean concrete and masonry
bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve
bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
C. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts.
After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten
anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off
flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
D. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations
where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, in
exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no
voids remain.
F. Miscellaneous Framing And Supports: Install framing and supports to
comply with requirements of items being supported, including
manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop
Drawings.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building
structure.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns.
Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or
with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and
grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"
Article. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are
installed and leveled.
Parcel 34 119 of 1243

3.3 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PLACEMENT

Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines
and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
3.4 FIELD WELDING

Comply with the following requirements:
- Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
- Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
- Remove welding flux immediately.
- At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches that of adjacent surface.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed
areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
SECTION 071613 - MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
Parcel 34 120 of 1243


The work of spray applied membrane systems to protect parking roofs at land
scape areas cement mortar waterproofing as indicated in the Drawings and
specified herein and include:
1. Polymer-modified, cement-based waterproofing

A. The following sections include requirements which relate to this section:
Division 03 Section: Cast-in-Place Concrete
Division 04 Section: Unit Masonry
Division 07 Section: Joint Sealants
Division 09 Section: Plastering
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Modified cement waterproofing shall be performed in strict accordance with the
Specifications, Drawings and the stipulations of the Egyptian Standard
Specifications (ES) latest edition, the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM), or other international standards as noted below.
1. Egyptian Standards and Specifications
ES No.
373 Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid-Hardening)
1108 Sand for Building Mortars
1109 Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources
2. American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM No.
C 109 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
C 321 Test Method for Bond Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars
C 348 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
D 4259 Practice for Abrading Concrete
3. Corps of Engineers
CE-CRO-C48Test Methods for Water Permeability of Concrete
B. In the event of conflict between various codes and standards the most stringent
conditions shall apply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and
Parcel 34 121 of 1243
Division-1 Specification Sections:

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified with surface preparation and
application instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and details of waterproofing preparation and
application. Show expansion joint details and waterproofing application at
obstructions and penetrations.

Applicator Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has completed modified
cement waterproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this project and whose work has resulted in application with a record of successful
in-service performance.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts,
drains, and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been
completed. Proceed only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including
honeycombs, voids, and cracks have been repaired to provide a sound substrate
free of forming materials, including reveal inserts.
Concrete surfaces and mortar have to be cured for not less than 28 days.
Application to be carried out earlier than 12 hours after surface has been wet.
B. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is
maintained at 4°C or above but less than 32°C during work and cure period and
space is well ventilated and kept free of water.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified herein shall not deprive Employer of
other rights Employer may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties made by
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor agreeing to repair or
replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to maintain
watertight conditions within a specified warranty period. Warranty includes
responsibility for removing and replacing other work that conceals modified cement
waterproofing.
C. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Cementitious Material: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
2. Water: Clean, potable.
Parcel 34 122 of 1243
2.2 Polymer Modified Cementitious, Durable, Waterproof Coating

A. Master Seal 521 or Equal: Composed of specially selected cements, silica sand
and reactive fillers supplied in powder form together with a liquid component of
blended SBR copolymers and wetting agents
1. Density: 2000kg/m3.
2. Coverage: 0.75-0.9kg/m²/coat, depending on the substrate roughness.
(Minimum 2 coats are required).
3. Areas of Applications: Wet areas, Toilets and likes.
Elastomeric, Cement-Based Waterproof Coating
A. Master Seal 595 or Equal Composed of two-component, containing a blend of
Portland cements, selected silica, micro-fibres and modifying agents mixed to a
slurry consistency with the acrylic polymer emulsion to to give an elastomeric
flexible membrane
1. Density: 1750 kg/m3.
2. Coverage: 0.75- 1kg/m²/coat, depending on the substrate roughness.
(Minimum 2 coats are required).
3. Fiber mesh : Use fabric in strip form over joints and cracks or as
reinforcement for the whole application
4. Areas of Applications
2.3 Master Seal 541 ACRYLIC MODIFIED or Equal CEMENTITIOUS COATING
A. Composed of two-component specially selected cements, silica sand and reactive
fillers, supplied in powder form together with a liquid component of blended acrylic
copolymers and wetting agents
2. Coverage: 1kg/m²/coat (Minimum 2 coats are required). Apply the second

coat at right angles to the first coat
3. Toxicity: Non-toxic
4. Fiber mesh : Use fabric in strip form over joints and cracks or as
reinforcement for the whole application
5. Areas of Applications
- As a waterproof lining for water retaining structures like water tanks, pools
and reservoirs.
2.6 Master Seal 550 Acrylic Reinforced, Cement-Based, Flexible Waterproof Coating
A. Composed of specially selected cements, silica sand and reactive fillers supplied
in powder form together with a liquid component of blended acrylic copolymers
and wetting agents, Mesh is embedded in the first coat when it is still wet.
2. Coverage: 1kg/m²/coat (Minimum 2 coats are required).
Parcel 34 123 of 1243
3. Toxicity: Non-toxic
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine walls, floors, and other surfaces where waterproofing is to be applied for
compliance with requirements for surface preparation, cleaning, and other
conditions affecting water proofing performance.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Application of waterproofing indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
Employed materials shall be less than 3 months old.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Protect other work from fallout or overspray from modified cement
waterproofing during application. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying
operation, to prevent polluting the air, and to ensure adequate ambient
temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Stop active water leaks according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written
instructions.
C. Schedule Cleaning and surface preparation so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning and preparation process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
D. Surface Preparation Concrete Cementitious Surface Masonry: Comply with
waterproofing manufacturer’s instructions to ensure that waterproofing bonds to
concrete surfaces. Clean surfaces by using one or a combination of procedures
as needed to effectively remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter,
grease, oils, curing compounds, and form-release agents.
E. Prepare concrete masonry unit surfaces by etching with 10% muriatic
(hydrochloric) acid solution or abrade surface by wire brushing.
F. If acid etching is used, remove acid residue by thoroughly flushing surface with
potable water.
G. If wire brushing is used, remove dust and loose particles.
H. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer’s written instructions, unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Brush, broom or spray the mix onto the pre-dampened, prepared surface,
brushing well into the surface. Strike off with the brush or broom in one direction
Parcel 34 124 of 1243
for a neat appearance. Care must be taken not to spread the material too thinly.
When the material begins to drag or “ball”, do not add more liquid, but dampen the
surface again.
C. Mix waterproofing components according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written
instructions.
D. Protect all adjacent surfaces. Dampen wall surface with water before applying
waterproofing.
E. Apply waterproofing coating evenly and fill voids and pores of substrate with
waterproofing slurry. Keep tools clean and free from build-up.
F. Apply the number of coats at the rates recommended by the manufacturer for
each coat.
G. Embed mesh in the first coat when it is still wet
H. Mist-cure waterproofing for two to three days immediately after application as
recommended by the manufacturer.
I. Wet-cure waterproofing when temperatures are above 29°C, relative humidity is
below 30%, wind speed exceeds 24 km/h, or waterproofing is exposed to direct
sunlight for 72 hours after placement.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Surfaces indicated as to be trowelled smooth shall be finished with a steel trowel
to a smooth surface, free of trowel marks.
B. Surfaces indicated to receive plaster shall be scratched in the two directions to

provide a key for the plastering.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic on unprotected surfaces.
B. Protect applied modified cement waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather
exposure, and water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition
for not less than seven days by covering with impervious sheeting or by other
curing procedures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
Parcel 34 125 of 1243

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
PART 7 - This section covers all roofing and deck insulation work as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
PART 8 -
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for roof drains.
PART 9 - 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

General: Install a free draining, watertight membrane roofing system including up
stands, flashings and coverings, with compatible components, that will not permit
the passage of liquid water and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced
movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
Roofing system is to be without patches as far as practicable. If patches are
unavoidable, obtain Engineer's written approval and comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and limitations as to the number, location and size of patches.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one
another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by
roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit specifications, installation instructions and
general recommendations from manufacturers of roofing insulation
system materials, for types of roofing required. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Samples: Submit 500 mm square samples of materials, include end-lap
seam, and extruded polystyrene. Submit samples of tiles, metal flashing,
and sealant.
C. Shop Drawing: Submit complete shop drawings showing roof
configuration, slopes and sheet layout, details at perimeter, and special
conditions.
A Guarantee: The Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee that all work performed
under this section are free from defects in material and workmanship, and shall
withstand thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure.
The Contractor shall, upon notice by the Employer, immediately make good any
defects in materials or workmanship, or both, within the ten (10) years after the final
Parcel 34 126 of 1243
handing over of the project period covered by the guarantee, all at no cost to the
Employer.
B Certificates of Compliance: The Contractor shall provide all certificates required
for demonstrating proof of compliance of materials with specification requirements,
including mill certificates.
C Contractors Experience: Unless specifically named, the Contractor shall furnish
materials and equipment of the type and size specified which has demonstrated
successful operation, and are in regular use.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING MATERIALS

All approved roofing materials shall be on the project Site before roofing work is
begun.
Only approved roofing materials may be brought to, or stored on Site.
Materials shall be delivered to the Site in the manufacturer's unbroken labeled
packages.
Stack insulation boards flat and off the ground.
Materials temporarily stored on the roof shall be distributed so as to stay within the
live-load limits of the roof construction.
1.7 TESTING
All materials used shall comply with the requirements given in the relevant
specifications when tested in accordance with the methods indicated.
The Contractor shall perform all such tests at his own expense. All sampling and
testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory.
1.8 PROTECTIONS
Oils and solvents which attack tile foam or extruded polystyrene must not be
allowed to come into contact with it.
Care must be taken that absorbent materials are not exposed to the weather during
construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
All materials used in the work shall be the best of their kind and shall conform to
the specifications.
A. Concrete Roof Screed: shall be according to division 03 Section “ light
weight insulating concrete”
B. Thermal Insulation: Shall be a rigid cellular thermal insulation board of
extruded polystyrene, stable material, ship lapped edge, unaffected by
acids, alkalis, alcohol and sea water. It shall not rot nor be prone to
attack by rodents. It shall withstand high temperatures of up to 90C,
and must be dimensionally stable up to 70C.
Parcel 34 127 of 1243

1. The extruded polystyrene rigid foam shall be fairly dense to

withstand foot traffic and handling during construction.
2. The density of the extruded polystyrene shall not be less than 32
kg/m3 and the sprayed one not less than 40 kg/m2.
3. The extruded polystyrene shall be non-porous, permeable to water

vapor, resist decay, ageing and water, and have low water vapor
transmission characteristics.
4. Extruded polystyrene shall be tested to determine the water
absorption at a period of 7 days, it shall be less than 0.3% in
volume.
5. Compressive stress at 10% compression for 32 kg/m 3 foamed
density shall be 3.0 kg/cm2.
6. Extruded polystyrene shall be trimmed and cut to shape with simple
tools, knife, metal saw or hot wire when exceptionally smooth cut
surfaces for exact fits are required.
7. Cants shall be cement mortar or wooden strip
2.3 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE

The Contractor shall provide all certificates required for demonstrating proof of
compliance of materials with specification requirements, including mill certificates.
2.4 TESTING
All materials used shall comply with the requirements given in the relevant
specifications when tested in accordance with the methods indicated.
The Contractor shall perform all such tests at his own expense. All sampling and
testing shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF DECK
Before roofing application is begun, the roofing contractor shall inspect the
concrete roof deck carefully.
Installation of metal fittings and similar work affecting the roofing shall be finished
before work begins.
All cracks, breaks, holes, sharp projections, or other unusual irregularities in the
surface shall be remedied before roofing work is begun.
Surface must be clean, dry, free from grease, loose material, excessive dust and
foreign material, which would interfere with the roofing application. Roof decks
shall be properly graded to all outlets. Deck must be swept free of dust and it
must be reasonably smooth.
3.2 THERMAL INSULATION
Parcel 34 128 of 1243

A. Extruded Polystyrene Sheets: The extruded polystyrene sheets shall

be applied directly on the membrane without adhesives.
B. A Roofing Filter Fabric shall be laid over the thermal insulation where
indicated on Drawings. The fabric shall be protected from
contamination by surface run-off.
3.7 SEALANTS
Sealants shall be placed in position as shown on Drawings and as directed by
Engineer.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to
Engineer.
Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Cleaning and protection shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
Oil and solvent, which attack polystyrene, must not be allowed to come into
contact with it.
Care must be taken that insulation materials are not exposed to the weather
during construction.
SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
PART 10 - GENERAL
10.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS

Section.
10.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal composite material wall panels.
Parcel 34 129 of 1243

10.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite

material panel Installer, metal composite material panel system
manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects metal composite material panels,
including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of
materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel
installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including
alignment between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations,
openings, and condition of other construction that affect metal
composite material panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates,
and tests and inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel
assembly during and after installation.
8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions
required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.
10.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions

of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include installation layouts of metal composite material

panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles,
corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings,
closures, and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and
anchorage, at a scale of not less than (1:10).
Parcel 34 130 of 1243

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel
indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving

color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
1. Metal Composite Material Panels: (300 mm) long by actual

panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal
composite material panel accessories. Standard color
samples will be submitted.
10.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports Certifications: For each product, tests performed by a

qualified testing agency.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
10.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in

maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
1. Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly including

corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories.
2. Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of mockup of
metal composite material panel assembly, testing for water
penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of

deviations from the Contract Documents contained in
Parcel 34 131 of 1243
mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such

deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups
may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured

items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material
panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets,

covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal
composite material panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of
water. Do not store metal composite material panels in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during

installation.
E. Natural Metal Composite Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent

fingerprints and soiling of surface.
10.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be
performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty
requirements.
10.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work,
flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leak-
proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
10.10 WARRANTY
Parcel 34 132 of 1243

A. Special Warranty: Wall Panel System Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal composite
material panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial

Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal composite material panels
that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not

limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare
metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of shipment from
PART 11 - PRODUCTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems

capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing
according to ASTM E 330:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the
perimeter span and L/60 center of panel.
B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested
according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
Parcel 34 133 of 1243

C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No uncontrolled water penetration

when tested according to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): (67 deg C), ambient; (100

deg C), material surfaces.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings (When required): Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing
agency.
11.2 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -

assembled, metal composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal
facings that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into
profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly
components, and accessories required for weathertight system.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Composite Wall Panels by one of the
approved manufacturer as the following:
B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch- (0.50-mm-)

thick, powder coated aluminum sheet facings.
1. Panel Thickness: (5mm).
2. Exterior Finish Color: As indicated on drawing and approved

sample.
C. Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum and or

material compatible with panel facing. Attachment Assembly shall be Panel Wall
System Manufacturer's standard Clip, Sub-girt and spline Track support and
Rain screen.
Parcel 34 134 of 1243

A. Miscellaneous Metal Sub framing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed,

metallic-coated steel sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized)
coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150)
aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide
manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal
composite material panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight

panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match
material and finish of metal composite material panels unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal
composite material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide
finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills,
jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits,
reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent
metal composite material panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads.

Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite
material panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide
EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of

type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal
composite material panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in
writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
11.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories
at the factory, by panel wall system manufacturer's standard procedures and
processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Fabricate metal composite material wall panel joints that provide a weathertight
seal and that minimize noise from movements.
C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with
manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without

excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are
Parcel 34 135 of 1243

true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.
Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional
strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving
seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be
seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in
metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA
standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible.
Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories
exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material
as accessory being anchored or from compatible,
noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal

Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less
than thickness of metal being secured.
11.5 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved
Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x
(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish:
conversion coatings; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer,
fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat
and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride
resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
PART 12 - EXECUTION
Parcel 34 136 of 1243

12.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel
supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels,

studs, and other structural panel support members and
anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal composite material wall panel
manufacturer.
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are
supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within
flatness tolerances required by metal composite material wall
panel manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over

sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water
penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal

composite material panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to
seam locations of metal composite material panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
12.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous

panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal
composite material panel manufacturer's written recommendations.
12.3 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's

written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal
composite material panels and other components of the Work securely in place,
with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.

2. Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings.
Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-
resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal composite
material panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
Parcel 34 137 of 1243

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal

alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger
panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind
rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around
openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners

for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or
galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive

substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal
composite material panel manufacturer.
D. Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support

metal composite material wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall
system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels,
panel clips, and anchor channels.
1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-

to-dissimilar-material joinery, and panel-system joint seals.
E. Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations,

spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve
performance requirements specified.
1. Wet Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent
metal composite material wall panels with sealant backing and sealant.
Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
2. Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent
metal composite material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket
system.
F. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with
fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of
wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners.
1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant
backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to
requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Parcel 34 138 of 1243

2. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite

material wall panels with manufacturer's standard gaskets.
G. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building

and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate
installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel

assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types
indicated by metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not
indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal composite
material panel manufacturer.
H. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's

written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line
and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are
permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks
and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates
and to result in waterproof performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing
and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of (3 m) with no joints
allowed within (605 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped
expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less
than (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
12.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units
within installed tolerance of (6 mm in 6 m), non-accumulative, on level, plumb,
and location lines as indicated, and within (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of
alignment of matching profiles.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency approved by

Owner to perform field tests and inspections.
B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by

Engineer for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
Parcel 34 139 of 1243

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to test and inspect completed metal composite material wall panel installation,
including accessories.
D. Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not
pass test and inspections as specified in AAMA 2605.
E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal

composite material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in
manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal composite
material panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage
channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
END OF SECTION 074213.23
SECTION 074216 - DECORATIVE INSULATION TRIM SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
Parcel 34 140 of 1243

1.1 SECTION INCLUDE

A. This section includes the high performance EPS decorative Cornice
and molding. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing
expanded polystyrene foam, referred to in this specification as EPS in
accordance with the details for external facades shown in drawings and
for the followings:
1. Window surrounds and sills
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: For recursively units, submit samples representatives of
finished exposed surfaces showing typical range of color texture and of
appropriate thickness.
1. Sample size: 600mm length and of actual thickness.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product;
manufacturer-specific installation instructions for EPS system, including
preparation instructions and recommendations, and storage and
handling requirements and recommendations. Technical information for
each of the products required and proposed to be used including the
following:
1. Metal Framing Anchors
2. Construction Adhesives

A. Reference Standard: The latest edition of the referenced American
Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) publication shall govern.
ASTM Designation
C 165 Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulation
C 203 Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation
C 303 Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block an Board-
Type Thermal Insulation
C 390 Practice for Sampling and Acceptance of Thermal Insulation lots
D 1621 Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
D 1622 Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics
D 1623 Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
C 2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to
Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
D 6817 Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam
D 7557 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be experienced in performing
work of this section and shall specialize in installation of work similar to
Parcel 34 141 of 1243
that required for this project. All work shall be performed in accordance
with the manufacturer's installation manuals, and in accordance with
manufacturer's panel layout drawings when supplied.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of EPS trims from one
source from a single manufacturer.
D. Mockup: After samples are accepted for color and texture, construct
mock-ups of a similar panel to those indicated on Drawings to
demonstrate aesthetic effects meeting design requirements showing
execution, installation, anchorage and finishes.

A. Delivery: Deliver materials from EPS manufacturer with identification
labels or markings intact.
B. Storage: shall be fully supported using wood stickers, placed in level
storage, and prevented from contact with the ground.
C. Protection: Product shall remain in the manufacturer's protective wrap
until needed for installation. Unused panels will be rewrapped and/or
covered with a suitable covering that will prevent exposure to rain,
water, sunlight, dirt, mud, and any foreign matter that may affect EPS
performance.
D. ubsequent Construction: Coordinate installation of subsequent
construction to avoid exposure of SIPs to rain, snow, high moisture,
and ultraviolet light and as recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS: Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Foam

A. EPS cornice and trim shall be of an approved variety and quality
suitable for the purpose for which it is used.
B. EPS cornice and trim shall be sound, straight, or curved well-seasoned,
thoroughly dry and free from all defects.
C. EPS cornice finishing as indicated in drawings.
2.2 FIXING MATERIALS

A. Connectors shall be galvanized steel or a urethane adhesive.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Shall be grade-marked as indicated and of thoroughly seasoned stock
and with 15 to 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B. Provide four (4) sides dressed lumber unless otherwise indicated.
Parcel 34 142 of 1243

C. For lumber furnish pieces with grade stamp applied to ends or back of each
piece.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
C. The surface of the substrate and the surface of the moldings shall be
clean, dry, and free of grease, paint, oil or any foreign material.
D. The surface of the substrate shall be level, plane and true, being (3mm)
within (1.2m).
E. Dry fit and /or cut on site the molding as per the architectural drawings
and existing structure.
3.1 INSTALATION
A. Any parts where the width is more than 2/3 the height, mechanical
attachment is required.
B. All joints must be tied together using approved reinforcing mesh with a
2" overlap onto each part embedded into approved base coat as per
manufacturer’s instructions. Butting parts together and/or "spline"
detailing joints is strictly prohibited.
C. Apply adhesive to the back of the molding. Approved glue to join the
moldings.
D. If skinning occurs on the adhesive, scrape off and replace it with fresh
adhesive before installing the molding.
E. Press the molding into place. Use temporary mechanical fasteners to
secure molding while the adhesive cures.
F. Remove excess adhesive (if any) along the molding before curing.
G. Apply caulking at the joint between the molding and the substrate, and
between the joined moldings.
H. Allow the material to cure.
I. When joining two pieces, at the junction, leave a gap of not exceeding
¼ (6mm). Cover all joints with caulking
J. Install a minimum of 2 connectors for each 1.25m or as shown on
approved shop drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
K. Press firmly into the rigid foam until the connector is flush with the
surface.
Parcel 34 143 of 1243
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including

those specified by reference to this Section:
Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry
Joints between different materials
Joints between metal panels
Perimeter joints between materials and frame of doors and windows
Tile control and expansion joints
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors and counters
Other joints as indicated on Drawings

Provide joint sealants that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract Specifications

Sections:
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of

strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for
each product exposed to view.
a. Install joint sealants in 13 mm wide joints formed between two 150 mm

long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces
adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are
suitable for the use indicated.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons to demonstrate their

capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Engineers and
Employers and other information specified.
Parcel 34 144 of 1243

E. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint

preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates.
F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer

indicating the following:
a. Materials forming joints substrates and joint-sealant backing have been

tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
b. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and

substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating

sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of
current product formulations.
A. Reference standards: work in this section shall be performed in strict

accordance with the stipulations of the SASO - Saudi Arabian Standard
Organization latest edition, the specifications of the American Society of
Testing and methods (ASTM), or other equivalent international
standards and sound practice.
1. American society for testing and methods ASTM no
C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
C 1193 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
C 1311 Specification for Solvent Release Sealant
C 1330 Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backings for Use with Cold
Liquid Applied Sealants
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in
installing joint sealants similar in material, design and extent to those
indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant
installation with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source-Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one
source from a single manufacturer.
D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint
sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials
that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming
and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain
rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will
exist during installation.
Parcel 34 145 of 1243
3. Submit not fewer than (5) five pieces of each type of material, including
joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals and
miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent
delaying the Works.
5. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written
instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially
formulated primers.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric
sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the
Engineer
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
3. Each type of elastomeric or non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate
indicated
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
G. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
1. Install joint sealants in 1500 mm long joints using same materials and methods
for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed
Works. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.
2. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
approximately 50 mm long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end.
Place a mark 25 mm from crosscut end of 50 mm piece.
3. Use fingers to grasp 50 mm piece of sealant between crosscut end and 25
mm mark; pull firmly at a 90 degrees angle or more in direction of side
cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to
the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive
capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement
capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
4. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate
separately. Do this by extending cut along side, checking adhesion to
opposite side and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
5. Reports whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to
adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance
used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail
adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
H. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as

Parcel 34 146 of 1243
follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Deliver materials to project Site in original unopened containers or bundles with

labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration
date, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions
to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low
temperatures, contaminants or other causes.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint
sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside
limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint
sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant
manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint
sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are
removed from joint substrate.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special Warranties shall not deprive the Employer
of the rights he may have under provisions of the Contract Documents
and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by installer
agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
1. Special Warranties exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric
joint sealants from the following:
2. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant
exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for
sealant elongation and compression caused by structural
settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
3. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding
Parcel 34 147 of 1243
design specifications.
4. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools or other outside
agents.
5. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt
or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings and other related

materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
a. Use only the selected type of sealant throughout the work.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by the Engineer from
manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.
C. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other

requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing
sealant, including those for type, grade, class and uses.
a. Provide products with the capacity to withstand the specified
percentage change in the joint width at the time of installation and
remain in compliance of ASTM C920.
D. Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where
elastomeric sealants shall be immersed continuously in water, provide
products that have been tested for initial six-week immersion period
and additional four-week immersion periods, and have not failed in
adhesion or cohesion when tested with substrates indicated for Project.
E. Stain-Test Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to
be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide product that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained
porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
2.2 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS

Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Include semi-elastomeric
sealants in which the base polymer is butyl or acrylic. Can be used when
movement is limited to 7½ % and joint is not clean.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

Provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant that
can reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and opening in
building.
Parcel 34 148 of 1243
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of materials and type that are
nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and
other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, closed-cell material with
a surface skin and of size and density to control sealant depth and
otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
a. Filler diameter shall be 25% greater than joint width before
installation.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Use neoprene, butyl, EPDM or

silicone tubing, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of
remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus -32°C. Provide
products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a
secondary seal, to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape
recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from
adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back
of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide
self-adhesive tape where applicable.

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where
required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily
residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint
substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint
substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with
joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
2.6 PREFORMED SEALANTS

Provide standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated open-cell foam sealant
manufactured from high density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying,
water-repellent agent, factory produced in compressed sizes in roll or stick form to
fit widths indicated. Density 145 to 160 kg/m3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Parcel 34 149 of 1243
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before
installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's
instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates, including dust, paints (except
for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion
and compatibility), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
and water and surface dirt.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast
cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to
produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond
with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above
cleaning operations by blowing out joints with compressed air. Porous
joint surfaces include but shall not be limited to the following:
a. Concrete
b. Masonry
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tiles
d. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3. Clean non-porous surfaces with chemical cleaners that do not stain,

harm substrate or leave residue. Non-porous surfaces include
the following:
a. Metal
b. Glass
c. Glazed surface of ceramic tiles
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint
sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant
manufacturer's instructions. Confine primers to areas to joint-sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of
sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently
stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required
to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's installation
instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more
Parcel 34 150 of 1243
stringent requirements apply.

B. Installation: Install sealant backings of type indicated to support
sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-
sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before
sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
4. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings
are not used between sealant and back of joints.
5. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following
and at the same time backings are installed:
a. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates
b. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration
c. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability
C. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and
before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to
requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide flush or concave or recessed joint configuration, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
4. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled
joints.

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint
substrates as follows:
1. Perform (1) one tests for the first 15 m of joint length for each type of
elastomeric sealant and joint substrate or two tests per each floor per
elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants as per Clause 1.6.
3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint
configuration. Record results in a field adhesion test log.Inspect tested
joints and report on the following:
Parcel 34 151 of 1243

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed

to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids.
c. Whether sealants dimensions and configurations comply with
specified requirements.
B. Record test results log. Include dates when sealants were installed,
names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations.
Whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations,
sealant fill, sealant configuration and sealant dimensions.
C. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following
same procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original
surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant.
D. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements,
will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing. Retest failed applications until test
results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Caulk the following areas with silicone sealant with high anti-fungicide,
mildew resistant; taking into consideration that silicone sealant cannot
be painted over.
1. Joints between water-closet and floor
2. Around cutouts in countertops
3. Junction between walls and countertop
4. Junction between walls and backsplash
5. Around fixtures and drain openings passing through
6. Junction between ceramic tiles and door frame
7. Perimeter of urinals and rimless sinks
B. High modulus sealant shall be used when tensile strength is more than
510 kPa or where joint movement is limited to ± 25% or less.
C. Medium modulus sealant shall be used when tensile strength is
between 310 and 510 kPa or where joint movement capabilities attain ±
50%.
D. Low modulus sealant shall be used when tensile strength is less than
310 kPa or joint movement shall be extended to 100% or compressed
down to 50% of the original joint width.
3.6 CLEANING
Clean off excess sealants or sealants smears adjacent to joints as the work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by
Parcel 34 152 of 1243
manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.7 PROTECTION
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
Parcel 34 153 of 1243

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel doors and frames.
2. Door hardware.
B. Related Sections:
Division 08 Section "Hardware."
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent
stated. Where differences exist between codes and standards, the one
affording the greatest protection shall apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one
at the time of commencement of the Work.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of
applicable regulatory requirements.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process
C. HMMA 861: Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames.
D. Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract

Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following:
1. ANSI A123.1 "Nomenclature for Steel Doors and Frames".
2. ANSI/SDI "SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames".
3. DHI "Recommended Locations for Finish Hardware".
4. NFPA No. 80 "Fire Doors and Windows".
5. NFPA No. 101 "Codes for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and
Structures".
SUBMITTALS
D. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
E. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation

instructions.
Parcel 34 154 of 1243

F. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, dimensions, fire rating, door
type, core, reinforcement, finish, hardware locations, cutout locations, frame
profiles, details, metal gage, anchorage details, and finish.
G. Schedule: Schedule of doors and frames, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings. Indicate frame and door types.
H. Samples:
1. Frame corner, (300 by 300 mm).
2. Door, with glass and glazing stops, (300 by 300 mm).
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
I. Deliver, store and handle steel doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage
and deterioration.
J. Storage: As directed by Engineer and as manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Doors: 44mm thick, full flush continuously welded edge seams with no visible
seams on faces or vertical edges, steel stiffened core.
1. Exterior Doors: ASTM A653 hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, 16 gage
(0.0538 inches minimum) unless otherwise noted.
2. Interior Doors: 18 gage sheet steel (0.0428 inches minimum) unless
otherwise noted.
3. Stile And Rail Doors: 16 gage sheet steel unless noted otherwise, formed
into rectangular tubes with integral formed stop, continuously welded to
form a rigid tubular frame, welds ground smooth and flush.
B. Frames:
1. Exterior Frames: Welded type.
2. Interior Frames: Welded type.
3. Gage: Minimum 16 gage (1.3mm) for openings (1.2 m) in width or less; 14
gage (1.6mm) for openings greater than (1.2 m) in width.
4. Door Silencers: Resilient type, fitted in drilled holes, removable for
replacement.
5. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 22 gage, welded in place; provide where
frames may be grouted.
C. Hinges: Shall be from steel not less than 2.5 mm thick, fitted with a removable pin
of not less 6 mm diameter, hinges shall be zinc coated after manufacture. The
leaves for screwing to the door shall have 4 countersunk holes.
D. Heat Retarding Filler: Mineral wool or other inorganic insulating noncombustible

non-settling material, vermin proof and complying with labeling requirements.
Parcel 34 155 of 1243

E. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard or custom units for supports,

anchors, inserts and fasteners. Hot dip galvanized units for shall comply with
ASTM A153, Class B.
2.2 Fabrication
A. Fabricate doors and frames complying with following gages and SDI standards:
DOOR WIDTH DOOR FACE FRAME

SHEET
945 or less 1. mm 1.6 mm
Over 945 mm and 1.6 mm 1.9 mm

up to 1220 mm
Door over 1220 mm 2mm 2.5 mm
B. Hardware Preparation: Reinforce and prepare doors and frames to receive

hardware furnished under Division 08 Section "Hardware".
1. Minimum Gages for Hardware Reinforcing Plates: Provide in accordance
with approved shop drawings, hinge and pivot reinforcements shall be 7
gage minimum.
2. Locations for Reinforcing Hardware: Comply with Division 08 Section
"Hardware".
C. Frames:
1. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type
frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform
finish.
2. Knocked Down Frames: Accurately form and miter interlocking joints of
knocked down frames to maintain hairline alignment of parts when field
assembled.
3. Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames wider than 4’-0” with two 12 gage
minimum formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames.
4. Door Silencers:
Prepare frames for silencers.
Provide 3 silencers on strike jamb of single door frames and 3 silencers
each strike jamb of double door frames with removable mullions. Provide 2
silencers on head of double door frames without removable mullions. Omit
silencers at gaskets.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide per manufacturer shop drawings. Weld floor jamb
anchors in place.
D. Finish: Comply with requirements of Division 09 Section "Painting" - for primer,

including application and compatibility with specified finishes.
1. Interior Units: Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
Parcel 34 156 of 1243
2. Exterior Units: Hot-dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM A623.

Surface treat after galvanizing, and apply one coat of primer.
3. Primer: Rust-inhibitive, baked, smooth finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate door and frame, fabrication and installation with Division 08

Section "Hardware".
B. Coordinate setting of steel frames and anchor placement with wall

construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

instructions.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage,
installation and construction.
1. Paste filler repair is not permitted.
2. Touch up scratched paint surfaces after installation.
C. Protection: Protect metal surfaces after installation. At Substantial Completion,

doors and frames shall be without indication of use, deterioration, or damage.
SECTION 081116 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL

Section.
Parcel 34 157 of 1243


A. Section 07 92 00 - Joints Sealants.
B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
C. Division 26 – Wiring and conduit for electronic hardware.
REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
- AAMA 609/610, Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished
Aluminum.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
- ASTM E330, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
2. ASTM E2074 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,
Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door
Assemblies.
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
2. NFPA 251: Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building
Construction and Materials.
3. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design frames and doors to:
1. Accommodate expansion and contraction within service temperature range of -
5˚ to 89˚C.
2. Limit deflection of mullions to maximum 1/175th of clear span when tested to
ASTM E330 under wind load of 1.2Kpa.
3. Movement within system.
4. Movement between system and perimeter framing components or substrate.
B. Fire rated doors as indicated types. Fire rating minutes as indicated for each type.
C. Certification: Doors shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2010, NFPA 252,
UBC 7-4, UL 9, UL263, CAN4-S106.
D. Testing Laboratory: Fire tests shall be conducted by an approved independent
testing laboratory, similar to Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
E. Size glass thickness and glass unit dimensions and types to limits in accordance
with CAN/CGSB-12.20.
Parcel 34 158 of 1243

F. Provide continuous air barrier and vapour retarder through door system. Primarily
in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit one 300 x 300 mm corner sample of each type door and frame.
B. Submit sample showing glazing detail, reinforcement, finish and location of
manufacturer's nameplates.
C. Frame sample to show glazing stop, door stop, jointing detail & finish.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Indicate materials and profiles and provide full-size, scaled details of components
for each type of door and frame Indicate:
1. Interior trim and exterior junctions with adjacent construction.
2. Junctions between combination units.
3. Elevations of units.
4. Core thicknesses of components.
5. Type and location of exposed finishes, method of anchorage, number of
anchors, supports, reinforcement, and accessories.
6. Location of caulking.
7. Each type of door system including location.
8. Arrangement of hardware and required clearances.
F. Submit catalogue details for each type of door and frame illustrating profiles,
dimensions and methods of assembly.
G. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data
sheets.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1. Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of aluminum finishes
for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout
Submittals.
WARRANTY
1. Provide a written warranty for work of this section from manufacturer for failure
due to defective materials and from contractor for failure due to defective
workmanship for ten (10) years respectively from the date of Substantial
Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1. Apply temporary protective coating to finished surfaces. Remove coating after
erection. Do not use coatings that will become hard to remove or leave
residue.
Parcel 34 159 of 1243
2. Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Aluminum extrusions: Aluminum Association alloy AA6063-T5.
1. Steel reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, grade 300 W.
2. Fasteners: stainless steel, finished to match adjacent material.
3. Weather-strip: mohair metal backed wool pile.
4. Door bumpers: black neoprene.
5. Door bottom seal: adjustable door seal of extruded aluminum frame and vinyl
weather seal, surface mounted with drip cap, closed ends.
6. Provide low expanding, single component polyurethane foam sealant installed
at head and jamb perimeter of door frame for sealing to building air barrier,
vapour retarder and door frame. Foam sealant width to be adequate to
provide required air tightness and vapour diffusion control to building air barrier
and vapour retarder foam interior.
7. Isolation coating: alkali resistant epoxy resin solution.
8. Glass in exterior and interior doors: as indicated on drawing for each type.
9. Sealants: Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants, colour as selected by Engineer.
10. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate doors units with an integral concealed
low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and doors
members exposed on the interior, in a manner that eliminates direct
metal-to-metal contact.
- Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3
years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance
and condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and
security of glass retention.
11. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware
bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.
ALUMINUM DOORS
A. Construct doors of porthole extrusions with minimum wall thickness of 1.8mm.
B. Door stiles, top rail, bottom rail and side’s rail: widths and size as indicated on
approved shop drawings.
C. Reinforce mechanically-joined corners of doors to produce sturdy door unit.
D. Glazing stops: interlocking snap-in type for dry glazing. Exterior stops:
tamperproof type.
E. Hardware: as indicated on drawings and as per Section manufacturer standard.
Parcel 34 160 of 1243

ALUMINUM FRAMES
A. Construct frames of aluminum extrusions with minimum wall thickness of 1.8mm.
B. Centre rails and base for sidelights: same material as doors.
C. Frame members as approved shop drawings, for applied stops.
FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM FRAMING
A. Frame construction: Integral structure and glazing stops from extruded and
thermally broken aluminum profiles. Filled internally with cement composite
material.
B. Assembly: Frame corners assembled by means of crimped and bonded miter

joints.
C. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke, and heat
transfer from either side. Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening
shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have the manufacturer's standard powder
coated finish 60 - 80 micron thick unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Color
shall be as selected and approved by the Engineer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
FABRICATION
A. Doors and framing to be by same manufacturer.
B. Fabricate doors and frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as shown.
C. Fit joints tightly and secure mechanically.
D. Conceal fastenings.
E. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors, frames and reinforcements to receive
hardware using templates provided under Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
F. Isolate aluminum from direct contact with dissimilar metals, concrete and
masonry.
Parcel 34 161 of 1243

PART 3 EXECUTION
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation
instructions and data sheets.
INSTALLATION
A. Set frames plumb, square, level at correct elevation in alignment with adjacent
work.
B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Adjust operable parts for correct function.
D. Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure that structural loads are not
transmitted to frames.
GLAZING
A. Glaze aluminum doors and frames in accordance with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
CAULKING
A. Seal joints to provide weathertight seal at outside and air, vapour seal at inside.
B. Apply sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Conceal
sealant within the aluminum work except where exposed use is permitted by
Owner’s Representative.
CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning of aluminum components in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and
accumulated environmental dirt.
C. Clean aluminum with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner.
D. Remove traces of primer, caulking, epoxy and filler materials; clean doors and
frames.
E. Clean glass and glazing materials with approved non-abrasive cleaner.
F. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment barriers.
PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
B. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by aluminum door and frame
installation.
Parcel 34 162 of 1243

SECTION 081400 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Semi solid-core doors with wood veneer, faces.

2. Hollow-core doors with wood veneer, faces.
3. Hardwood door’s frame
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section " Rough Carpentry: Installation and requirements for

rough door frame opening"
2. Division 09 Section "Painting".
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of cladding and edge
construction and trim for openings, door hardware sets and accessories
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size and elevation of each door; construction
details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent
Parcel 34 163 of 1243
3. Indicate dimensions and wood type

4. Locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
5. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
6. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
7. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
8. Indicate glass panel and frame.
C. Samples for Verification:

Corner sections of doors, approximately 200 by 250 mm, with door faces and
edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer
and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for
factory-finished doors.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood doors through one source from a single
approved manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated."
C. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project
indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
D. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in

plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop
Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
Parcel 34 164 of 1243

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer,

Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors
that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist)
more than 6.4 mm in a 1067-by-2134-mm section, or show telegraphing of core
construction in face veneers exceeding 0.25 mm in a 75-mm span.
1 Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required
due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
2 Warranty shall be in effect five (5) years of time starting from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Top and Bottom Edge Bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from defects
which will be visible when finished as specified herein.
B. Core and Blocking:
1. Semisolid core: Manufacturer's standard designed for semi
core purpose intended.
2. Hollow core: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 1:2
solid to hollow parts.
C. Side Edge Bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from defects which will
be visible when finished as specified herein
1. Wood for side edge bands shall matching face veneers for natural finish
doors.
D. Sub face: Minimum 6mm thick, properly dried plywood.
E. Face Veneer for Natural Finish: Standard thickness (0.5-0.6mm), thoroughly

dried conforming to CS35, Premium Grade. Match faces of doors in pairs and
end match transoms. Face veneer shall be tape less spliced with grain running
vertically, belt and polish sanded, of the following species:
1. Veneer: As indicated on drawings to match Engineer's sample.
G. Type I Adhesive: CS35, Type I (fully waterproof bond).
H. Primer: Alkyd type primer sealer as standard with door manufacturer.
I. Moldings: Hardwood to match door veneer.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
Parcel 34 165 of 1243

A. Semi solid core wood skeleton inside, MDF boards for door leaf both sides
B. Thickness of Doors: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, thickness of wood
doors shall be 45 mm.
C. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces
2. Species and Cut: hardwood with oak veneer as specified on drawings
D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
2.3 Door Frames

A. Door frame material shall be solid wood same type of door wood face and as
indicated on drawings.
B. Door frames shall be constructed in accordance with detailed Drawings. All frames
shall have full width rabbet and dado joints. Joints shall be securely made.
C. Where indicated on Drawings, frames shall have continuous grooves to house
neoprene gaskets according to details.
D. The back of frames shall be primed with two coats of priming before installation.
2.4 Architraves
A. Shall be machine-formed to dimensions and shape shown on Drawings and
constructed of same type of door wood face.
2.5 Beads and Quarter Rounds

A. Beads and quarter rounds shall be machine-formed constructed of same type of
wood of the associated door and frame.
B. Architraves, beads and quarter rounds shall be in unjointed length between angles
and end of runs.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated on drawings.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware
to comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, and
hardware templates.
F. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable
requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
Louvers: Factory installs louvers in prepared openings.
Parcel 34 166 of 1243

2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including
cutouts, with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of
finish as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting".
2.8 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard AWI's "Architectural Woodwork

Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory finishing.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.
Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.
Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI
System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
B. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
C. Reject doors with defects.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section “Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
D. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and
bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by
manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal
cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 3.2 mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 3.2 mm from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 6.4 mm from
bottom of door to top of threshold
E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is

Parcel 34 167 of 1243
required at Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
SECTION 084126 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes the Aluminum and glass entrances and shop fronts
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following:
1. Plans, elevations, and sections.
2. Details of fittings and glazing.
C. Hardware quantities, locations, and installation requirements.
D. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
F. Metal Finishes: 300 mm long sections of patch fittings, rails, and other items.
G. Glass: 300 mm square, showing exposed-edge finish.
H Engineering Calculations: include structural computations, material properties, and
other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by
the structural engineer who was responsible for their preparation.
Calculation and shop drawings to be submitted simultaneously.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction
Parcel 34 168 of 1243

contiguous with all-glass systems by field measurements before fabrication and

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating all-glass systems without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.5 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample

submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical all-glass system as shown on Drawings.

2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to
requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
- Glass defects as specified and defined in Division 8, Section “Glazing”.
- Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
- Failure of operating components to function normally.
B. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Taking Over to the Employer.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. General Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of the
following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
B. Structural Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and area wind loads.
C. Deflection Limits: Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to 1/175 of clear
span or 19 mm, whichever is smaller.
E Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following
Parcel 34 169 of 1243
ambient and surface temperature changes.

F Temperature Change (Range): 40 deg C, ambient; 60 deg C, material surfaces.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. GLASS: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated

surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for surface and edge compression
per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
Class 1: Clear monolithic. Thickness: 12 mm) Refer to Drawings and
requirements as specified in Division 8 Section “Glazing”
B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 666, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Heavy-duty hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended
by manufacturer for all-glass entrances indicated. For exposed parts, match fitting
metal and finish.
B. Fitting Configuration: Manual-Swinging, and sliding as indicated in drawings for
each type
C. Patch Fittings: Stainless-steel.
D. Patch size to fit hardware.
E. Finish: No. 8 mirror like reflective.
F. Locations: As indicated.
G. Accessory Fittings: Match patch fitting and rail metal and finish as per manufacturer
standard
a. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.
H. Push-Pull Set: As selected from manufacturer's full range
I. Weather Stripping: Pile type; replaceable without removing all-glass entrance doors
from pivots.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails, and
accessories before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to
glass after tempering.
B. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process and fabricate so, when
installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
C. Cutting and punching of glass shall precede tempering
D. Factory assembles components and factory install hardware to greatest extent
possible.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Stainless-Steel Finishes:
Parcel 34 170 of 1243

1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend
into finish.
2. Finishes: Directional Satin Finish: No. 4, or as indicated on drawing, and as
approved sample.
PART3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of work.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's
B. Set units level and plumb.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate
indicated.
Adjust doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact
points and weather stripping.
Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces
3.4 PROTECTION
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and installer that ensure all-glass systems are without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Compassion.
Parcel 34 171 of 1243

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Powder coat Aluminum Windows.
B. Powder coat Fire rated Aluminum Windows.
C. The extent of each type of aluminum window unit (including operations) is shown
on the drawings.
A. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed in exterior perimeter
joints around sliding aluminum-frame
Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements

A. Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions of the following standards,
except as otherwise shown or specified.
1. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. 302.9 Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows.
b. 603.7 Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented
Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum.
c. 1502.6 Voluntary Standards and Tests of Thermal Performance of
Residential Insulating Windows and Sliding Glass Doors.
2. Aluminum Association (AA): Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials.
2. ASTM E2010 Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Window Assemblies.
3. ASTM E 283-04, Test Method for Determining Rate of Airflow Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences
Across the Specimen.
4. ASTM E 330-02, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
5. ASTM E 331-00, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

2. NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.
Parcel 34 172 of 1243

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions shall
be submitted for approval.
B. shall show elevations of units, full-size sections, thicknesses, fastening, methods
of installation and anchorage, size and spacing of anchors, method of glazing,
locations of operating hardware, mullion details, method and material for weather
stripping, method of attaching screens, details of installation, connections with
other work and window schedules showing locations of each window unit.
C. Certificates of Compliance: Submit certificates of compliance stating that the prime
windows conform to the specified requirements. Quality certification labels affixed
to windows in accordance with AAMA 302.9 for prime windows are acceptable in
lieu of certificates.
1.5 STORAGE
A. Windows shall be stored above ground and under weathertight coverings or
enclosures.
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Protective Coating or Covering: Prior to shipment from the factory, finished
surfaces of aluminum shall receive a protective coating or covering. Coating or
covering shall not chip, peel, or flake due to temperature or weather and shall
protect against discoloration and surface damage from transportation, storage,
and construction activities. Coating or covering shall be readily removable without
affecting the finish.
B. Covering shall be either adhesive paper, waterproof tape or strippable plastic.
Coating applied to aluminum shall be two sprayed-on coats of clear, water-white,
non-yellowing, methacrylate lacquer to a total minimum thickness of 10 microns;
maximum thickness 20 microns.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Extrusions of bars, rods and tubes: 6063-T6 alloy conforming to ASTM B221.
B. Sheets and plates: 5005-H14 alloy conforming to ASTM B 209.
C. Window frames and sashes shall be manufacturer standard systems of extrusions
not less than 1.8 mm thick.
D. FIRE-RATED ALUMINUM FRAMING
1. Frame construction: Integral structure and glazing stops from extruded and
thermally broken aluminum profiles. Filled internally with cement composite
material.
Parcel 34 173 of 1243

2. Assembly: Frame corners assembled by means of crimped and bonded miter

joints.
3. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke, and heat
transfer from either side. Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening
shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.
E. Fasteners: Aluminum, or non-magnetic stainless steel, or a non-corrosive
material, compatible with the aluminum components and warranted by
manufacturer.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of
hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal.
2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer standard high-strength aluminum
units where feasible; otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized
complying with ASTM A 386.
G. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel
conforming to ASTM A 386.
H. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC – Paint
12, compounded for 20 mil thickness per coat.
I. Sealants: Aluminum frames shall be sealed using a sealant of a type conforming
to Section 07900 - SEALANTS, and a color matching with the aluminum profiles.
J. Glass: Conform to Section 08800 - GLAZING. Type of glazing shall be as shown
on the Drawings.
K. Weather stripping: For horizontal sliding or double-wing window units provide
sliding type woven pile weather stripping of polypropylene or nylon pile and resin-
impregnated backing fabric, and aluminum backing strip complying with AAMA
701.2. For other types of windows provide compression-type
1. weather stripping, compressible molded expanded EPDM or neoprene
2. Weather stripping gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 509.
L. Glazing Gasket: Manufacturer's standard vinyl glazing gasket.
M. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or Snap-on glazing stops, coordinated with
glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish glazing stops to match
window units.
N. Hardware: Provide manufacturers standard hardware fabricated from aluminum or
stainless steel compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform and
function as intended. For fire resistance windows Provide hardware with low
conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame
or vent sash.
B. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate fire resistance window units with an
integral concealed low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior
materials and window members exposed on the interior, in a manner that
eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
Parcel 34 174 of 1243
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years,
has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and
condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of
glass retention.
3. Weep holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating
water to the exterior.
2.2 WINDOWS
A. General: Shapes shown are representations of design, function and required
profile. Dimensions shown are minimum.
2.4 FINISHES
Powder Coated Finish: 80 micron thick. Color shall be approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for the
installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the
work.
B. Set units, plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Anchor securely in place. Where aluminum surfaces are in contact with or
fastened to dissimilar materials, except stainless steel or zinc, the aluminum
surface shall be protected from dissimilar materials. Surfaces in contact with
sealant after installation shall not be coated with any type of protective material.
C. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at
weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
D. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to
avoid damage of the protective coating. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving
parts.
E. Provide protective treatment and other precautions required through the
remainder of the construction period, to ensure that window units will be without
damage or deterioration at the time of acceptance.
F. Remove protection when requested by the Engineer for inspection of finishes, and
replace.
G. Remove mortar and other deleterious material from surfaces of aluminum
immediately.
H. Remove protection when no longer required.
Parcel 34 175 of 1243

SECTION 087100 - HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment and services for all finish
hardware, as indicated, in accordance with provisions of the Contract
Documents.
2. Completely co-ordinate with work of other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, provide and install

supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to, or necessary for, a sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Related work:
1. Section 081400 Wood Doors.
1.4 PRODUCT, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Tag or package each item with identification related to hardware schedule. Include
installation instructions.
C. Control items before and after installation so that completion will not be delayed by
hardware losses.
D. Protect finishes by temporary coverings as required.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Co-ordinate installation with finishing operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Hardware: As provide by Client
B. Fasteners:
1. Manufacture hardware to conform to templates.
2. Generally, prepare for Phillips oval head machine screw installation.
3. Exposed screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of

other work, to match finish of other work as closely as possible.
Parcel 34 176 of 1243
4. Use full thread to head wood screws on wood doors to apply butts.
5. Provide concealed fasteners unless through bolted.
6. through bolt closers on labeled doors with hex nuts and bolts.
7. Provide non-corrosive fasteners.
2.2 OPERATION - KEYING
A. Establish keying with the Owner.
C. Provide Four (4) keys for each lock or cylinder.
D. Four (4) master keys and key in groups as directed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with hardware manufacturer's installation instructions,

supervised or inspected by the Owner.
B. Fit hardware before final door finishing. Permanently install hardware after
finishing operations are complete.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to ensure proper operation or
function.
1. Lubricate moving parts with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.
2. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricate to operate smoothly.
B. When hardware is installed more than one month prior to final acceptance or
occupancy, during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, make a final check
and adjustment of all hardware items.
1. Clean and lubricate as necessary to assure proper function and finish.
2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for operation of heating and

ventilating equipment.
Parcel 34 177 of 1243

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDS
This section covers the work of glass and glazing as required by the Contract for
the following applications:
1. Windows
2. Doors
"Glazing" includes glass installation and materials wet or dry used to install glass.
Extent of each type of glass and glazing work is indicated on Drawings and in
Finishing Tables.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and
specification sections for the approval of the Engineer:
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and
fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance
instructions.
B. Samples for Verification Purposes: 300 mm square samples of each type and
color of glass indicated and 300 mm long samples of each color required for each
type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample
between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color.
C. Certificates: Certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and
glazing materials furnished for project where tested for adhesion to glass and
glazing channel substrates and compatibility with other materials. Provide testing
for:
D. Different type of glass
E. Glazing sealants
F. Glazing gaskets
Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the latest
edition of the specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) or other approved International Standard and Sound Practice.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM No.
C 509 Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing
Materials
Parcel 34 178 of 1243
C 864 Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting

Blocks, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
C 1048 Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass - HS, FT Coated and
Uncoated glass
C 1172 Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
D 412 Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion - Adhesion to Flexible
Substrates.
A. System Performance: Provide glass and glazing that has been produced,
fabricated and installed without defective manufacture, fabrication and installation.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide materials from one source for each type of
glass and glazing product and accessories indicated and installation method
indicated..
C. Safety Glass Standards: Where safety glass is indicated on Drawings, provide
types of products which comply with testing requirements. Provide safety glass
permanently marked with certification label.
D. Delivery, Storage and Handling: Protect glass and glazing materials during
delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as
required to prevent edge damage to glass and damage to glass and glazing
materials from effects of moisture including condensation, temperature changes,
direct exposure to sun or other causes.
For insulating-glass units comply with manufacturer's recommendation for venting
and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and
substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing
material manufacturer or when channel substrates are wet due to rain,
condensation or other causes. Install glazing sealants only when ambient and
substrates temperatures are above 15C.
1.6 WARRANTY
Without depriving the Employer of any rights under provision of the Contract. A
special warranty shall be agreed from glass manufacturer to furnish replacement
to all glass that deteriorate from normal use within the period indicated below:
Coated glass or insulating glass: 10 years from date of substantial completion
Laminated Glass: 5 years from date of substantial completion
Factory sealed double glazed units are guaranteed against leakage, malfunction
and other defects under normal usage for a period of ten (10) years form date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Parcel 34 179 of 1243

A Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and

wind and impact load without failure. Including loss or glass breakage attributable
to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication and installation; failure of
sealants and gaskets to remain water tight and airtight, deterioration of glazing
materials or other defects in construction.
1. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimal and are for detailing
only. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thickness
indicated but not less than thickness in strengths required to meet or exceed
the following:
2. Wind Loads: Determine wind loads applicable to project in minute per second
at 10.0 m above grade.
3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges provide
thickness required that limits enter deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50
times the short side length or 25 mm whichever is less.
4. Minimum glass thickness for exterior glass lites: Not less than 6 mm.
5. Thermal Movement: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movement
resulting from maximum change in ambient and surface temperature acting on
glass framing members and glazing components.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glass shall be top quality, without any manufacturing defects and shall be one of
the products approved by the Engineer.
B. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated with edge
clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass
manufacturer.
Provide thickness indicated and if not as recommended by glass manufacturer for
limiting pane sizes and the application indicated.
C. Cutting and Shaping of Glass: Do not cut glass on site. Clean cut or flat-grind
edges, with square edges with slight kerf exposed edge, grind smooth and polish,
finish edges to prevent breakage under thermal stresses.
D. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
E. Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply
with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on
testing according to NFPA 257.
2.3 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C
1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality,
Parcel 34 180 of 1243
and if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern.
B. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass, kind HS (heat

strengthened) and kind FT (fully tempered), complying with the requirements of
ASTM C 1048, including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type,
quality, class, and if applicable, form, finish, and pattern.
C. Laminated Glass: Two panes of annealed glass bonded with an interlayer material
for use in building glazing, all complying with the requirements of ASTM C 1172.
D. Body Tinted Float Glass: Solar control glass, floated, transparent glass in which
the whole body is tinted with a solar reflective metallic oxide coating by the
pyrolytic or sputter coating process and shall be flat, heat absorbing and light
reducing glass. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, tinted glass shall be 6
mm thick. The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer test
reports of the percentage of visible light transmittance and shading coefficient for
thickness and colors indicated. Body tinted glass shall conform to the
requirements of BS No. 952.
1. Tinted float glass shall be HS heat strengthened where needed.
E. Rolled Plate Glass (Patterned Glass): Rolled translucent patterned one side of
which has a definite pattern (geometric). Thickness shall be as indicated on
Drawings.
F. Heat Treated (Float - Glass): Shall be with surface compression not less than 60
MPa. The area of the largest crack free fragments (dicing fracture/ fragments) shall not
be more than 6.5 cm.
1. All tempered glass shall be tempered glass by horizontal process (tempering
done in a horizontal furnace) to avoid distorted images and with roll-wave
distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed. Unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings, fully tempered glass in the project shall have a
thickness not less than 6 mm.
2. All tempered glass shall be heat soaked to approximately 650 º C to remove
all residue and to prevent sudden failure.
3. The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer the result of
impact test including the size and number of fragments of the tested pane that
shall be submitted too.
G. Laminated Glass (Plastic Interlayer - Safety Glass): Shall be two lites of glass and
interlayers material clear or colored with (PVB Polyvinyl Butyral) or cured resin with
thickness indicated but not less than 0.8 mm with proven record of no tendency to
bubble or discolor, The two lites of glass shall be of different thickness to avoid
simultaneous resonance, and the two lites shall be acoustically isolated from the
frame.
H. Insulating Glass (Double Glazing): Preassembled units consisting of two lites of
glass sealed together separated by a dehydrated air space in between with a
perimeter metal spacer containing a primary seal desiccant that absorbs and
maintains a dry interspace and a secondary seal. Unless otherwise indicated on
Parcel 34 181 of 1243
Drawings, the two lite shall be of tempered glass (safety glass) and shall be of
different thickness to avoid simultaneous resonance and they shall be isolated
from the frame.
1. Air-space shall be defined by the Contractor to achieve the required
performance.
2. The perimeter metal spacer shall be manufacturer standard spacer, made of
aluminum, galvanized steel, stainless steel or can be color coated according to
requirements.
I. Reflective Glass: Shall be float-glass coated with some kind of treatment to
prevent read-through.
J. High Performance Glass: Provide high performance glass with low/low shading
coefficient, according to the required criteria as mentioned.
K. Wire anti-fire glass: Add a wire mesh to the organic rubber pieces or inorganic
slurries in the middle of two layers of glass. The application of wire mesh to
improve the overall impact strength of anti-fire glass.
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS AND TAPES

A. Compatibility: Select sealants and tapes with proven compatibility with one
another, and with other surfaces contacted and materials into contact including
glass products, seals of insulating glass, glazing channels, in the installation and
under service conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing and field
experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or if not indicated, as
selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant: Shall be non-acid-curing, liquid applied, chemically
curing, sealant of tensile stress of not less than 3 kg/cm2 nor more than 5 kg/cm2
at 100% elongation.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Shall be dense elastomeric compression seal gaskets molded
or extruded of neoprene complying with ASTM C 864 or other materials and of
profile and hardness to maintain weathertight seal.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials in size and shape complying with glazing and with
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks and Spacers: Elastomeric material as required for compatibility
with glazing sealants, the shore A durometer hardness for setting blocks shall be
80 to 90 and as recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application
indicated to maintain glass lites in place of installation.
D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric blocks as required for compatibility with glazing
sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement of glass.
E. Glazing Beads: Aluminum or metal beads shall be supplied with aluminum or
Parcel 34 182 of 1243
metal windows and doors and shall be spring or screwed according to design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of
minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing between
joints of joinery or glass framing. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
Cleaning of Channels: Clean glazing channels and other framing members to
receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to
substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are
indicated for use.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with recommendations of manufacturers, of glass or sealants,
gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements
are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.
Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for
necessary bit on glass, minimum edge and face clearances and adequate sealant
thicknesses with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at
time of installation.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling
block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact
glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do
not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one
horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are
located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with
edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass
and impairs performance and appearance.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as
determined by pre-construction sealant-substrate testing.
Provide edge blocking where needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideway
in glazing channel.
B. Glazing to Wood with Beads: The rebated shall be previously treated with one
coat of priming paint and the bedding putty or sealant inserted. The glass shall be
embedded securely in place and screwed to beads.
Parcel 34 183 of 1243

C. Glazing without Putty or Sealant: Where specified, wash leather ribbon velvent,
felt or similar materials shall be used in place of putty for glazing in conjunction
with beads. The material shall be fitted so that it covers all parts of the glass
which shall be covered by the rebate and beads.
3.4 GLAZING
Except for panels of less than 0.25 m2 (500 x 500 mm if square) install setting
blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width, never less
than 30 mm from each corner of the glass. Set blocks in thin course of sealant.
Provide spacers inside and outside face opposite each other. Install of correct
size and at spacing to preserve required face clearances.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks.
Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
"wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize
size sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure
that gasket cannot "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A Protection: Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation
by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass.
Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove non-permanent labels
and clean surfaces.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances
do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method
recommended by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or
damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes,
accidents and vandalism.
B Cleaning: Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date
scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion
in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
Parcel 34 184 of 1243

SECTION - 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This section covers the work of plastering as required by the Contract.
1. Portland cement plaster
2. Metal lath
Extent of each type of plaster work is indicated on Drawings and in Finishing
Tables.

Section 042200 Concrete Unit Masonry
Section 079200 Joint Sealants

Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the Egyptian
code of practice and specifications latest edition or other international standards
and codes of practice.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Materials list and manufacturer's data including test
results and certificates of compliance.
B. Samples: Representative samples of all materials and color chart.
1. One meter square panels as samples for each type of plaster finish.
C. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing location of different kinds of
plaster, materials or textures, relation with different surfaces, finishing
and plaster joints.

A. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels for each type of finish
and application required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size as directed by
Engineer.
2. Erect mockups 1200 by 1200 mm by full thickness using materials, including
lath, support system, and control joints, indicated for final work.
3. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer’s approval of mockups before start of plaster work.
Parcel 34 185 of 1243
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition

as a standard for judging the completed Portland cement plaster Work.
a. When directed, remove mockups from Project site.
1.6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Metals accessories shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter
and shall be protected from corrosion.
B. Cementitious materials shall be stored in their original, unbroken packages or
containers in a weather-tight and dry place, until ready for installation.
C. Immediately upon receipt at the Site, cement shall be stored in dry, weather-tight
properly ventilated structures.
D. Sand shall be piled in a manner that shall provide good drainage and prevent
intermixing with foreign matter and damage from construction traffic and other
causes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The contractor shall ensure that supplies of materials are sufficient to give
consistent and uniform color to surface finishes which are not to be painted.
B. Cement: shall be a gray standard brand of ordinary Portland cement
C. Sand: Shall be natural siliceous sands from approved pits conforming to ES hard,
durable, clean and free from adherent coating such as clay and from any appreciable
amount of clay in pellet form. It shall not contain harmful materials such as iron pyrites,
salts, coals or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, flaky
or elongated particles in such a form or in sufficient quantity to affect adversely the
hardening, strength, durability or appearance of any material in contact with it. The
various sizes of particles of which sand is composed shall be uniformly distributed
throughout the mass and shall be graded within the following limits except as otherwise
indicated
1. For finish coat of cement plaster, use sand passing No. l2 sieve.
2. For floated finish coat use sand passing No. 16 sieve.
3. For troweled finish coat use sand passing No. 20 sieve.
D. Lime Putty: Shall be Factory-Prepared lime.
E. Factory-Prepared Stucco Portland Cement Finish Coats: Add water only; comply
with finish coat manufacturer's directions.
F. Water: Shall be drinking water or water of chemical composition acceptable for
drinking, except for bacteriological limits and shall be clean water free from oil,
salt, acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter.
G. Color Pigments: Shall be of an approved manufacturer, lime proof, non fading and
complying with BS 1014.
Parcel 34 186 of 1243
2.2 PLASTER ACCESSORIES

A. Galvanized steel lathing shall conform to the material provisions of ASTM C 841
and ANSI A42.3.
B. Strip Reinforcement: Smooth edge strips of expanded metal lath fabricated from
galvanized steel sheet, with uncoated steel painted after fabrication.
C. Control Joints: Prefabricated, galvanized steel one-or two-piece type as required.
Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints.
D. Expanded Metal Lath: Galvanized steel diamond mesh complying with ASTM C 847
and shall have a minimum weight of 1.85 kg/m².
E. External Metal Corner Beads: Fabricated from galvanized sheet angle bead with
45mm mesh wing up to 2400mm from ground floor level.
F. Coordinate the locations and depth of accessories with the thickness and number of
plaster coats required in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
as directed by the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: The whole of the work shall be executed in a neat
workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any work
rejected through non-compliance with the specification shall be
removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall commence work when instructed and shall clear all
unused materials and plaster waste from Site when the work is
complete.
B. Surfaces of masonry walls or concrete shall be well cleaned by wire
brush, joints on masonry shall be raked out at least 15 mm.
C. All surfaces then shall be thoroughly wetted with water before spatter-
dash is applied.
D. Spatter-dash after application shall be sprayed with water for a period of 5
days.
E. Dots and bands shall be used to produce plaster surfaces level and true.
Dots shall be plumb of 50 x 100 mm dimension and thickness as required
but not less than 15 mm and shall be made of gypsum at intervals not
exceeding 2.0 m in horizontal and vertical directions, to cover the entire
surface to be plastered.
F. Dots shall be also at intersection of ceiling with walls and corners.
G. Bands shall extend in a horizontal or vertical direction between dots
and be formed of the same mortar as that of the coat applied. The side
of the bands shall be left rough to bond with plaster.
H. Plaster base coat shall be applied between bands to cover the entire
work surface.
Parcel 34 187 of 1243
I. Dots shall be removed and the resulting voids shall be filled with plaster
and finished as adjacent surfaces.
J. All faces shall be true and flat and angles shall be straight, level, and
plumb.
K. Surface of undercoats shall be well scratched horizontally to provide a
key for finishing coats and left to cure. Surfaces indicated as floated
shall be finished with a wood or felt float to a flat surface free from
trowel marks.
L. Surfaces indicated as trowelled smooth shall be finished with a steel
trowel to a smooth surface free from trowel marks.
M. Plaster shall be flat with opening's frames.
3.4 CONTROL JOINTS LOCATIONS

A. Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations
complying with the following criteria and approved by Engineer.
1. Where an expansion or control joint occurs in surface of construction directly
behind plaster membrane.
2. For Portland Cement Plaster: Where, in surfaces of external walls, areas
within control joints exceed, respectively, the following measurements:
a. 5400 mm in either direction or 13 sq. m.
3.5 MEASURING PLASTER MIX

Ingredients of the plaster mix shall be proportioned and measured by means of
calibrated clean boxes or containers or manufacturer’s packages so that the
quantities can be readily and accurately checked.
3.6 MIXING
A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply

with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of
plaster manufacturer.
B. The mixing shall continue for such time as shall ensure uniform distribution of
materials and uniform color and consistency.
C. The quantity of water used shall be carefully controlled. Do not use excessive
water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
D. Do not re temper or use re tempered plaster and all plaster which has begun to
stiffen shall be discarded.
E. No material shall be allowed to remain overnight in the mixers or mixing boxes.
Tools and implements used in mixing or transporting plaster shall be thoroughly
cleaned after each use, and kept clean and free from previous mixes.
Parcel 34 188 of 1243

3.7 CURING
All plaster coats made of mortar containing cement shall be kept in a constant
moistened condition by being sprayed as often as required for five (5) days.
3.8 DRYING
Protect plaster from too rapid drying and provide air circulation when drying is too
slow.
For exterior plastering the Contractor shall provide a protective covering with
tarpaulins or canvas rolls which must be hung so that it is clear of the finished
surface. Any defects caused by inadequate protection shall be remedied at the
Contractor's expense.
2.9 COMPOSITION AND APPLICATION OF PLASTER

A. All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water and free water
allowed to disappear before plaster is applied.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated by the Engineer, plaster coat shall be two-
layer work, except for ceiling. Each coat shall be applied to each wall and ceiling
surface in one continuous operation and shall be applied at full thickness down to
floor level.
The mix of each successive layer or coat must never be richer in cement than the
mix used for the coat to which it is applied.
Two coats having the same mix properties can only be applied successively if the
second coat is thinner than the first.
The type and mix of plaster shall be for each location as indicated on Drawings
and on finishing table. Adjust mix proportions below within limits to attain
workability.
B. Interior Plastering for Walls
1. Spatter-dash (Tartasha): Shall be done by forcibly throwing on wet
mix of Portland cement and coarse sand in the proportion of 450 kg
cement to 1 m3 sand and shall be kept wet with a fine water spray
until set and shall be allowed to harden before the next coat is
applied.
2. Base Coat 1st Layer: Shall be applied to a thickness of l5 mm
(including dash coat) unless otherwise mentioned. The surface
shall be brought to true planes with all angles and corners to a right
angle with rod and darby, well scored, combed or cross-scratched in
two directions to prepare a good mechanical key for the following
coat.
As soon as base coat has setup enough to carry two coats, the second coat
shall be applied to the depth required.
When plastering is applied in one coat the scratching shall be omitted.
Parcel 34 189 of 1243
Base coat mix shall be 1 m3 sand to 250 kg ordinary cement

3. Finishing Layer (Float Coat): Shall be 5 mm thick of same
proportions of 1 layer and shall be applied as soon as 1 layer has
set firmly bonded to the background and can carry the second
layers brought to a true even plane. Steel trowel to uniformly
smooth surfaces or wood float as directed, except where other finish
is required.
C. Interior Plastering for Ceiling: Spatter-dash coat and one 15 mm thick
coat as specified above
D. Exterior Plastering
1. Spatter-dash: Shall be done as Clause B above.
2. Base Coat: Shall be 15 mm thick and proportioned as follows:
a. 300 kg ordinary Portland cement 1 m3 sand
b. Lime may be added as required.
c. Base coat shall be finished as per Clause B above.
3. Finishing Coat: Shall be either:
Proportioned as base course applied by hand and the finish shall be smooth,
done by either steel trowelling, wood floating, or by sponge to give a smooth
texture (to be ready for exterior paint application), or shall be proportioned as
follows:
White cement
Marble or stone powder
Lime
Colored finish coat plastering shall be colored by the addition of coloring
agents and pigments to the engineer approval.
Finish shall be smooth or rough texture or pebble-dash (sprayed finish) as required.
Smooth rendering shall be done by either steel trowelling or wood floating.
Textured rendering shall be done by using special tools, cork, carpet float
hacks and blades or the edge of steel trowels.
Pebble dash (sprayed finish) shall be applied with an approved machine hand
operated or mechanically operated to give a honeycomb finish of even texture
and thickness. The sprayed finish shall be applied in an approved number of
separated coats allowing time for drying between coats.
Application in one continuous spraying operation to obtain a thick layer shall
not be permitted.
E. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 3 mm in 3000 mm from a true
plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3000 mm
straightedge placed at any location on surface.
Parcel 34 190 of 1243

3.10 CEMENT-SAND PLASTER - SKIRTINGS AND BASES

Shall be a mix of l m3 sand to 350 kg cement for undercoat and finishing coat.
Except where otherwise noted, cement plaster finish shall be floated to a uniform
medium sand rough finished texture. Where smooth cement plaster is
designated, use steel trowel and a cement slurry to uniformly smooth surfaces.
Cement-sand plaster shall be used for skirting’s and bases, or as indicated in
Drawings.
3.11 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

Prior to start painting operations, damaged portions of plaster shall be repaired.
Patching and repairing shall be neatly and accurately done and shall match the finish
of the adjoining work. Where plaster surfaces are marred, discolored, stained or
otherwise damaged, patching and repairing shall be carried to the limits as
determined and where necessary, the finish coat shall be removed and be replaced
with new acceptable work. Patching, repairing and joining work shall be neatly done.
Cut out broken or damaged portions of plaster and repair with new work. Cut out
cracks not less than 2.5 mm wide and plaster full and smooth. Moisten edge of patch
area before new plaster is applied. Match plaster patches to adjacent existing work
that is to remain.
3.12 CLEANING
Upon completion of plastering work, sweep and clean floors throughout, including
ledges or other surfaces carrying plaster droppings.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDE
A. This Section covers the work of gypsum board construction and
includes the following:
1. Gypsum board ceilings.
2. Gypsum ceilings tiles.
3. Metal Framing and Support Systems.
Extent of each type of gypsum board assemblies required is indicated on
Drawings.
Parcel 34 191 of 1243


1. Section 055800 Metal Fabrications
2. Section 092400 Portland cement plaster
3. Section 099110 Painting
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data from manufacturers for each type of product specified
including installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings showing locations and complete installations of controls
and expansion joints and including plans, sections, details of
components and attachments to other units of work.
C. Samples in triplicate 50 x 50 cm of all gypsum board in each
manufacturer's texture including tape, studs, etc.
D. Samples from ceiling suspension system accessories for tiles and
board gypsum ceilings (500 mm long of steel studs, hat-shaped furring
etc.)
E. Material Test: Reports from qualified testing laboratory indicating test
results relative to compliance of gypsum board with specified
requirement.
1.4 REFERENCES STANDERS

A. Gypsum board sheeting shall be performed in strict accordance
with the specifications, Drawings and the stipulations of the
Egyptian Code of Practice (CP), and Specifications (ES) and the
specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) as noted below:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM No.
C 79 Specifications for Gypsum Sheating Board
C 645 Non-Loadbearing Steel Studs, Runners etc.. for Screw Application of
Gypsum Board
C 646 Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Studs
C 754 Installation of Steel Framing to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum
Wallboard
C 840 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board

A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and
construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire
resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing
Parcel 34 192 of 1243
laboratory acceptable to Engineer.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and
related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer.
C. Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single
manufacturer.
D. Mock-ups: Construct a mock-ups of at least 9.0 m2 in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes, qualities of materials and
execution.
E. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place unit of Work.

A. Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and
finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum
board manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For adhesive attachment and finishing
of gypsum board maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 10C
in the structure at least for 48 hours prior to, during and following the
application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for
drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts, sunlight, and hot weather
to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS
A. Direct hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and
cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting
network.
B. Refer to metal studs, runners and furring which serve as a base to
receive gypsum board, steel framing shall be light gage, non-
loadbearing complying with ASTM C 645, manufactured from cold-
rolled sheet with a minimum thickness of 0.8 mm before application of
protective coating.
C. Studs, runners, etc., shall have a protective coating to prevent
corrosion in normal use.
D. Steel Studs and Runners: U shape, with flange edges of studs bent
back 90C and doubled over to form 10 mm wide minimum lip (return)
minimum width of flanges shall be 35 mm and complying with minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal.
E. Furring Channels: 20 mm deep adjustable, fabricated from cold rolled
steel corrosion resistant-steel sheet, of 0.5 mm minimum thickness of
base (uncoated) metal and 12 mm wide flange.
F. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion
Parcel 34 193 of 1243
resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel

framing and furring members complying with the recommendations of
gypsum boards manufacturers for applications indicated.
G. Use screw to fasten gypsum board to steel members, they shall be
straight, neatly formed free of defects and deformations.
H. Wire Hangers: Zinc-coating, soft temper 4.0 mm diameter.
2.2 ANCHORS IN CONCRETE
A. Anchors shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with
holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and with capability to sustain
without failure a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling
construction.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD

A. Regular Gypsum Board: Provide gypsum board which comply with ASTM
C 79, in maximum length available to minimize end to end joints. Free from
any cracks and imperfections with edge and ends straight and solid, square
or V-tongue and groove gypsum board must be one of the types indicated
on Drawings:
1. Regular
2. Type X (special-fire resistant) shall be a gypsum sheet that provides at least
one (1) hour fire resistance rating for board 16 mm thick
3. Width not less than 1.20 m
4. Edges shall be tapered a featured for prefilling.
5. Texture shall be as approved by the Engineer
6. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated on
Drawings or if not otherwise indicated, in 13 mm to comply with
ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated.
The permissible variations in the nominal thickness shall not exceed
+ 0.8 mm.
B. Gypsum tiles: Shall be 600 mm by 600 mm with square edge detail, or
shiplap bevel edge details and rabbeted joints or as directed by
Engineer.
C. Perforated surface: textures and patterns shall match appearance
characteristics indicated on Drawings. Plain tiles can also be used in
conjunction with perforated tiles as selected by the Engineer.
D. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: Water resistant gypsum board for
use in bath and shower area, or as a base for application of ceramic
tiles shall be in accordance with the requirements when tested
according to ASTM C 473.
E. Gypsum board shall consist of a non combustible gypsum core without
fiber or with not more than 15% by weight of fiber surfaced with water
resistant paper firmly bonded to the core.
Parcel 34 194 of 1243
F. Gypsum shall be according to the following:
Water Resistance: Average of three (3) specimens shall not be more than the
following after two (2) hours immersion:
Water Absorption Surface Absorption
5% by weight 1.6 gm
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Edge trim, control joint shall comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed from protective coated metal, plastic or metal combined with
paper. Metal shall be from stainless steel sheet, or aluminum or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes: Edge trim shapes shall be as indicated on Drawings or required by
Engineer.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with
recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint
treatment materials for the application indicated.
B. Joint Tape: Perforated, cross laminated, tapered edge shall be of
reinforced paper or special tape with compatible joint compound as
recommended by the manufacturer of gypsum board.
C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-
hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. Use
formulation recommended for this purpose that shall develop greatest
bond strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint
compounds applied over it.
Ready-mixed, factory mixed product for all-purpose compound formulated for
embedding tape, for first coat over fasteners and finishing compound and shall be
compatible with the tape and the substrate.

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum boards construction which
comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer
of the gypsum board.
B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating
gypsum boards to steel framing.
C. Gypsum Board Screws: Steel self-drilling and self-tapping screw specially
designed for the screw application of gypsum board to steel framing and
complying with ASTM C 646.
D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
Parcel 34 195 of 1243

nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior

concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish concrete inserts, anchors and other devices indicated, to other
trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination
with other construction.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers form building structural members.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING GENERAL

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install hangers plumb and free
from contact with other object within ceiling plenum.
B. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset
resulting horizontal forces by bracing.
C. Install supplementary suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads.
D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying to inserts, eye screws or
other fasteners that are secure and appropriate to substrate. Install cross
bracing.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacing

indicated.
1. Wire Hangers: Shall be at 1200 mm o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (runners):1200 o.c.
3. Furring Channels: 400 mm o.c.
4. Wire tie furring members to main runners of other structural
supports.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components furring member
so that fastening surface and the grid suspension members are level. Do
not vary more than 3 mm measured both lengthwise and transversely
between parallel members.
3.3 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Locate exposed
end-butt joints as far from center of ceilings as possible and stagger not
less than 600 mm in alternate courses of board.
B. Install ceiling boards across framing in manner which minimizes the
number of end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible.
C. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install
Parcel 34 196 of 1243
imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light

contact at edges and ends with not more than 1.5 mm open space
between boards. Do not force into place.
D. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, or provide intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking behind end joints. Position
boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges
and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not
place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
E. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided
for additional support at openings and cutouts.
F. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
G. Fasten with corrosion resistant screw. Space screws or fasteners a
maximum of 200 mm.
3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions),
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges and damaged areas, if
any, using setting-type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards.
D. Finish interior gypsum board by applying the following joint compounds
in three (3) coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand
between coats and after last coat:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound
2. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint compound
3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound
E. Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels, apply primer only to
surfaces are clean, dry and smooth.
F. Painting of gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in
Division-9, Section 099100 "Painting".
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a suitable manner
which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or
deterioration at time of substantial completion.
Parcel 34 197 of 1243

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILES
PART GENERAL
A. This section covers the ceramic and porcelain floor and glazed wall work as
indicated on Drawings and required by the Contract and shall include the following
items:
1. Ceramic tiles
2. Mosaic tiles
Extent of ceramic tiles is indicated on the Drawings and finishing tables.
1.2 RELATED SECTION

A. The following sections include requirements which relate to this section:
1. 07920 Joint Sealants
2. 09220 Plastering
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Materials list and manufacturer's data for each type of tile,
mortar, grout or other product specified.
Installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Including complete installation details and layout plans,
location of expansion, control joints in the tile substrates. Show tile floor
patterns, wall design and locations
C. Samples: In triplicate of all tiles mounted on a tempered hardwood panel 600
x 600 mm and grouted to approved color, special pieces and fittings in each
manufacturer's color, texture and pattern available. Include samples of
accessories involving color selection.
Grout samples showing the full range of color available.
D. Test Reports: Material test report from qualified testing laboratory indicating
test results relative to compliance of tile, tile setting and grouting products with
requirements indicated and ES.

A. Reference Standards: Ceramic work shall be performed in strict accordance
with the corresponding Egyptian Standard Specifications (ES) as noted herein
below or other equivalent International Standards and Sound Practice.
1. Egyptian Standard Specifications
ES No.
Parcel 34 198 of 1243
261 Expanded Metal (Steel) for General Purposes

270 Ceramic Tiles
271 Glazed Wall Tiles
292 Standard Method for Testing Ceramic and Glazed Ceramic Tiles
(Parts 1,2 and 3)
293 Testing of Ceramic Tiles
373 Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid-Hardening)
1031 White Portland Cement
1108 Sand for Building Mortars
2. American Standard Institute
ANSI No.
A 118.3 Specifications for Chemical Resistant Water Cleanable Tile
Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable
A 118.5 Specifications for Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts
Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive
A 118.8 Specification for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar Grout
Supply all porcelain tiles in compliance with the American National
Standards Institute Specification ANSI A137.1 for ceramic tile.
B. Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade type, composition and variety
of tile from a single source.
C. Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a
uniform quality from one manufacturer for adhesive, grout and admixture
components, and from one source for each aggregate.
D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has successfully
completed tile installations similar in material and extent to that indicated for
work.
E. Field constructed Mock-Ups: Before installing tiles, erect mock-ups for each
form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials
and execution.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

The Contractor shall deliver ceramic tile materials to the Site in the
manufacturer's unopened original containers and shall store them in a shaded
protected locations. Adhesive, cement, packaged materials for mortar and
grout shall be furnished in bags displaying the manufacturer's trademark and
indicating type of material. Materials for mortar and grout shall be dry and free
of lumps and shall be stored above ground in weathertight locations.
Sand shall be stored and handled in such a manner as to prevent intermixing
Parcel 34 199 of 1243
with foreign matter.
1.6 PROTECTION
Maintain temperature at 30C or more in tiled areas during installation and for 5
days after completion.
Provide tile protection whenever required. Material likely to stain or deface tile
shall not be used. Close grouted tile floors to traffic completely for 24 hours
after installation; thereafter, permit traffic on ceramic tile floors after 4 days and
only over protective covering of cardboard or equivalent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Shall be first grade as specified in the drawings and finishing table
and shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications of the
country of origin. Tiles shall be square edge, flat, vitrified plain clay tiles, or fully
vitrified, true to shape, flat, free from flaws, cracks or crazing and keyed on the
reverse side and from a manufacturer approved by Engineer. The glazed
surface shall show no objectionable surface blemishes or defects when
examined.
B. Thickness and facial dimensions: shall be as indicated on Drawings or in
Finishing Tables. Colors, surface textures, patterns and other appearance
characteristics shall be selected by the Engineer if not indicated on Drawings.
C. The following marks shall be legibly and indelibly impressed on the unglazed
back of each tile, and tile fittings:
1. The name of the manufacturer and identifying mark
2. The name of the country where the tile is made
2.2 GLAZED WALL TILES
A. Wall tiles shall be units with impervious glazed finish surfaced fused to a non-
vitreous body
B. Water absorption shall not exceed 18%. Finish shall be high gloss or matte
glaze surface shininess as required and with square edge.
C. Minimum thickness shall be 6 mm. Glazed tiles shall conform to ES No. 271.
Glazed wall tiles shall be for vertical and non traffic horizontal surfaces.
2.3 CERAMIC FLOOR TILES (UNGLAZED)

A. Floor tiles shall be semi-vitreous formed by the dust pressed method. Tiles are
made of refined natural clay composition or refined and blended ceramic
powders kiln fired above red heat to a temperature of 1000 to 1300C and, if
required, with abrasive content for slip resistance.
B. Water absorption shall not exceed 6%. Tiles shall be uniform in composition
Parcel 34 200 of 1243

consistent throughout their thicknesses because they are homogenous in

composition they shall be of excellent wearing qualities such that theris no
significant change in appearance under reasonable amount of wear.
C. Minimum thickness shall be 8 mm. Ceramic floor tiles shall conform to ES No.
270.
D. For (Glazed Tiles): colors and glazed finish shall be fused to top surface of the
tile body maximum thickness shall be 8.0 mm. Shall have lower coefficient of
friction than unglazed tiles. Ceramic wall tiles shall conform to ES No. 271.
2.4 SPECIAL PIECES

A. Provide Special units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply
with following requirements.
1. External and internal corners bull-nose shape
2. Tapered transition tile, with shape assigned to effect transition between
thickness of tile and adjoining finishes of different thicknesses
3. Curved units for transition from wall to horizontal floor
2.5 CERAMIC SKIRTING

Units are prepared in the same way as ceramic tiles, but must also have one top
surface and bull-nose glazed. Units shall be of the same color and length of the
adjoining floor tikes, and the height shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.6 MORTAR
A. Mortar shall be cement and sand in accordance with ES added in accurate
proportions.
1. Sand: Shall be clean and sharp, properly graded for the purpose and
containing not more than 3% by weight of clay, loam, silt or other
deleterious matter. Sand shall conform to ES No. 1108.
2. Cement: For mortar beds and backing shall be a standard brand of
Portland cement conforming with ES No. 373.
3. Water: Only potable water or water whose composition is acceptable for
drinking except in respect to bacteriological requirements shall be used for
mixing mortar.
2.8 GROUT AND POINTING

A. Cement Sand: Shall be white or colored cement mixed with water to a creamy
consistency.
B. Latex Portland Cement Grout: Shall be the mixture of the above grout with a
latex additive added in a concentrate or dilute form at the site, or a factory
prepared dry mix combining cement with aggregate and polymer additive to
Parcel 34 201 of 1243
which only water is added at the sites.

Latex-based mortar grouting shall be used for the kitchens and where specified.
Care must be taken as latex-portland cement grout is very difficult to remove
from the exposed tile-face.
2.9 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants of
base polymer and characteristics that comply with requirements of Section
07920 "Joint Sealants". Shall be used for expansion and control joints in tile
work.
Provide colors of exposed sealant to match colors of grouting tile adjoining
sealed joints.
2.10 TRIM UNITS
A. Provide trim units to match adjoining flat tile and the requirements indicated in
Drawings or requested by Engineer, and shall comply with the size and
coursing of adjoining flat tile.
B. Trim: According to availability, provide matching trim shapes such as bullnose
corners, cove base and borders when specified.
1. Bordering Edge Trim: Listelly profile, smoothly rounded to protect the
borders of tiling, sections shall be in aluminum or PVC according to color
and Engineer instructions, with integral provision for anchorage to mortar
bed or substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Prior to setting tiles, inspect surfaces and arrange for the satisfactory correction
of defects. Grounds, bucks, outlet and receptacle boxes, rough plumbing and
other fixtures and fittings, shall be in place and trenches, chases or other
openings in floors and walls shall be properly closed.
Substrates for setting tiles shall be firm, dry, clean and free from oil or waxy
films or curing compounds.
Remove coating, curing compounds and other substances incompatible with
tile setting material by using a concrete grinder, or polishing machine equipped
with a heavy duty brush.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Work shall be set in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's
recommendations except where in conflict with this section. Work shall be
carefully laid out, providing symmetry about center lines of the space or areas
and adjust to minimize tile cutting, avoiding small, unsightly cuts. Use of thin
cuts and pieces, chipped, spelled or otherwise disfigured tiles, will not be
allowed. Unless otherwise required tile heights of walls may finish one-half
Parcel 34 202 of 1243
course above or below indicated heights to avoid cutting of tile. Dampen wall
surface with clean water and apply a spatter dash coat composed of one part
cement to one and one-half parts sand. Spatter dash coat shall be applied at
least 16 hours prior to setting tiles. Immediately before applying the mortar
setting beds on wall surfaces, the underlying scratch coats or spatter dash
coats shall be moistened with clean water to prevent it absorbing water from
the bedding coat. Each tile shall be buttered evenly with mortar and tapered
firmly into position so that the bed is solid throughout.
Joints shall be even and not more than 3 mm wide, they shall be continuous
both horizontally and vertically.
For joints grouted with epoxy joints shall not be less than 6 mm.
Any necessary adjustment of tiles shall be made within 10 minutes of fixing,

and tiles shall be cleaned off after not less than two hours.
3.3 SETTING BEDS

A. With Mortar: The mortar for setting beds shall be composed of one part Portland
cement to five parts sand with sufficient mixing water. The mortar shall be spread
to true even planes, at proper thickness for the finish, using screed strips. No
more setting mortar shall be spread than can be covered with tile before the
mortar reaches its initial set. Should more mortar be spread than can thus be
covered, the unfinished portion of the setting bed shall be cut back to a clean
beveled edge and removed. Setting beds of thickness more than 50 mm or over
membrane waterproofing shall have wire reinforcement with edges lapped at least
50 mm. Beds that have partially hardened shall not be retempered.
3.4 SETTING OF TILE

Mortar set non-vitreous tile shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least
one hour prior to setting and shall be applied to setting beds while damp, but
without free water on the back of tile. Tile shall be accurately set, firmly pressed
and beaten into full mortar beds with flush, well fitted joints in true planes, graded
or leveled and neatly cut and fitted closely against abutting work. Intersections
and returns shall be accurately formed, and cuts rubbed smooth with fine stone.
Edges of tiles to be set at protruding corners shall be quirk metered. Cut edges
shall be set against fixtures or other tile with at least a 1 mm joint and shall fit
sufficiently close to plumbing. For electric fixtures, outlets, pipes and other
projecting elements for coverage of joints use special plates, escutcheons and
collars. The splitting of tile, except where no alternative is possible, will not be
allowed.
Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint width layout tile work and
center tile in both directions in each space or on each wall.
Floor tile shall be set true to straight edge. Tile floors shall finish flush with the
gratings, stainers and drains.
Parcel 34 203 of 1243
Extend tile work into recess and under and behind equipment and fixtures to
form a complete covering without interruption.
3.5 GROUTING
Joints shall be grouted up not less than 24 hours fixing tiles.
Ensure that joints are 6 mm deep (or the depth of the tile) and are free of dust
and debris.
Thoroughly wash out wall and floor tile joints and saturate with clean water
before grouting. Grout joints after setting beds are dry according to location
with epoxy based grouting or with neat cement grout white or colored grouting
cement mixed with water to a creamy consistency and thoroughly forced into
joints to fill entire depth.
Joints shall be grouted up solidly without voids, filled to full thickness of tile and
finished flush and neat with face of tile.
Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from faces of tiles.
When coved skirtings are not provided between floor and walls matching silicon
sealant shall be in the joint when using cement grouting, and epoxy compounds
when epoxy grouting is used.
3.6 EXPANSION JOINTS
Locate expansion joints, and other sealant-filled joints, including: control,
contraction and isolation joints where indicated, during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrate.
In large tiled areas provide 6 mm width control joint at a maximum of 4.5 m in
each direction and at the perimeters walls.
Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with Section 07920 "Joint Sealants".
3.7 CURING
Water shall not be allowed on new tilling until bedding and grouting have
completely set.
Tiled surfaces shall be kept moist for a period of five (5)days to adequately cure
the cement mortar.
3.8 CLEANING
After grouting has sufficiently set or hardened, tile surfaces shall be cleaned
using a stiff fiber brush, soap powder and clean water. Traces of cement
epoxy, or dust accumulations and foreign matter shall be completely removed.
Unglazed tiles may be cleaned with an acid solution consisting of ten percent of
muriatic acid and ninety percent water and rinsed with clean water. Where acid
solution is used, exposed hardware and plumbing trim shall be covered with a
coating of vaseline to protect the metal from the acid and its fumes. Following
Parcel 34 204 of 1243
cleaning, the vaseline coatings shall be removed. Do not use wire brushes or
acid solution to clean glazed tile.
Clean-up of all masking materials, equipment and debris from work area is the
responsibility of the Contractor.
3.9 PROTECTION
Provide tile protection wherever required, material likely to stain or deface tile
shall not be used. Completely close grouted tile floors to traffic for 24 hours
after installation. Thereafter permit traffic on ceramic tile floors only over
protective covering of cardboard or equivalent.
SECTION 095426 - WOOD CEILING REFLECTOR
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Wood ceiling tiles or plank and installation components as indicated on drawings.
1.2 Related Sections
A. Division 23 – Mechanical Diffusers, vents and other mechanical items
B. Division 26 – Electrical lights and other ceiling mounted electrical items
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the

Reverberation Room Method.
B. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
C. ASTM C 635 – Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings
D. ASTM C 636 – Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
E. ASTM E 1264 – Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34 205 of 1243

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each
type of ceiling tile required.
B. Certifications: Certified test reports showing compliance with performance
requirements specified.
C. Samples: Submit three (3) full size samples of each panel type required.
D. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings, including details, for all ceilings.
Coordinate ceiling tile layout, installation and suspension system components with
construction elements that penetrate tile ceilings or are supported by them. Show
overall layout with dimensions and details for penetrations and intersections with
other materials or building components.

A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide wood ceiling tiles or plank from a
single manufacturer.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Class A as tested by an independent
accredited testing facility. Tests: ASTM E84. Flame spread: 25 or less. Smoke
developed: 450 or less.
C. Coordination of Work: Installing contractor shall organize and conduct a

preinstallation humidity and other construction elements attaching, penetrating or
concealed above wood ceiling tiles.
D. Wood ceiling tiles or plank to be manufactured from no less than 75 percent
recycled, postindustrial material by weight.

A. Store products in a clean, cool dry place out of direct sunlight.
B. Store products in a space where the ambient temperature and humidity conditions
are being maintained at the levels indicated for the project when occupied for its
intended use.
C. Handle products carefully to avoid chipping edges or damage.

A. Do not install wood ceiling tiles or plank until space is enclosed and weather
proofed, wet work is completely dry, work above ceilings is complete and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for the
project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Permit tiles to reach room temperature 15-25 degrees C and stabilized moisture
content of 25% to 55% RH for at least 72 hours before installation per AWI
standards.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s written product warranty per Section Closeout Procedures
Parcel 34 206 of 1243

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD CEILING REFLECTOR

A. Core: Manufacturer’s color matched medium density fiberboard with solid color
throughout
B. Surface texture: (Smooth) wood.
C. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard 100% water-borne, low VOC (less than .3 lbs.
D. per gallon) UV cured finish with UV blockers. Manufacturers’ (standard) (custom)
color as chosen by Architect.
E. Color: Custom to match Architect’s sample
F. Thickness: 19mm total thickness.
G. Size and patterns: As approved shop drawing.
H. Edge: Square if not otherwise indicated
I. Frame: Metal ribs pre-curved to radius as required, welded metal D-rings for
suspension cables
J. Flame resistance: Class A per ASTM E84.
K. Noise reduction Coefficient: (Note to specifier- NRC varies with perforation size,
pattern and type of backing material.
L. Suspension System: Cables and components as per manufacture instructions.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect installation area and conditions under which work is to be performed for
compliance with all manufacturers’ environmental requirements. All wet work in
the installation area must be complete, cured and dry prior to installation. Work
above ceilings shall be complete, inspected and accepted before ceiling work
begins. Do not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations for installation of
ceiling tiles and industry standards.
B. Coordinate the exact size, location and sequencing of penetrations of ceiling
reflectors by all building components.
Parcel 34 207 of 1243

C. Lay out ceiling pattern per approved shop drawings. Where not otherwise
indicated, lay out tile so margins on opposite sides of rooms are equal or greater
than ½ tile width.
D. Where ceilings of different heights abut, install acoustical material matching ceiling
at vertical surface of ceiling break match ceiling.
A. Clean soiled surfaces of ceiling tiles per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Remove and replace damaged or discolored material and material that cannot be
properly cleaned.
C. Adjust tiles after installation so that surfaces are aligned, flush and level with gaps
between units consistent in width and straight.
Parcel 34 208 of 1243

SECTION 096345 – STONE WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stone work.
1. Stone flooring and bases.
2. Countertop
3. Wall cladding.
4. Column cladding.
5. Interior trim including window stools, base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of stone,
stonework accessory, and other manufactured products required.
1. Include submittal of stone sealer manufacturer’s recommended methods
for application of impregnator and surface protection coatings based on
testing of project specific stone flooring materials.
2. Include submittal of stone sealer manufacturer’s recommended methods
for application of impregnator and surface protection coatings based on
testing of project specific stone countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit cutting and setting drawings indicating sizes,
dimensions, sections and profiles of stone units, arrangement and provisions for
jointing, supporting, anchoring and bonding stonework; and other details showing
relationships with, attachment to, and reception of, related work.
1. Include dimensions and profiles of stone units.
2. Show locations and details of joints.
3. Show locations and details of anchors.
4. Include elevations and details of graphics and carvings.
5. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer.
6. Show the extent of each type of movement joint. Show widths,
details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in substrates receiving stone and finished stone surfaces.
C Samples: Samples: Submit samples for each stone type required, exhibiting the
full range of color characteristics expected.
1. Submit a minimum of 2 each, 300 x 300mm in size, in each color and finish
specified.
Parcel 34 209 of 1243

2. In the case of more variegated stones, color photos shall be submitted in

addition to the number of samples to show the full range of color and markings
to be expected.
D Graphics and Carvings: Electronic files for drawings of graphics and carving work
will be provided by the Engineer.
1. Submit sets of (300-mm) square samples for each color, grade, finish, type and
specie of stone consisting of units not less than full face size indicated for each
stone thickness. Include 3 or more units in each set of samples showing the full
range of appearance characteristics to be expected in completed Work.
2. Stone delivered to the jobsite, or installed, and which does not fall within the
accepted sample range, may be Subject to removal and replacement with stone
that falls within the accepted sample range at no cost to the Owner.
a. Include sealer treatment on one half of exposed stone face for

each sample submitted.
3. Submit one (300-mm) long sample of each stone divider and transition strip.
4. Submit (300-mm) long grout Samples for each color grout to be used to
grout each type, composition, color, and finish of stone.
5. Adhesively Joined Shapes: Submit three (3) samples of stone
countertop to apron sections bonded together with specified adhesive for
each specie and finish of stone and consisting of units not less than 12-inch
(300-mm) long x full size profile shown on the drawings. No fabrication of
assembly shall be permitted until approval of sample is obtained.
C. Floor Stone Testing Results: Submit test reports from qualified independent,
Los Angeles City Approved testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test
results relative to compliance of stone flooring with requirements specified
for slip resistance.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions for each type of product
specified.
E. Product Certificates: Submit manufacturers certifications for each type of
grout and bonding material being provided are suitable for the intended use
and meet or exceed the referenced standards and the requirements of this
specification.

A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For stone flooring installed on walkway surfaces,
provide finished stone flooring installation with the following values as determined
by testing the specified stone per ASTM C 1028, under a wet and a dry condition.
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
Parcel 34 210 of 1243


A. Single Source Responsibility for Stone: Obtain each stone from a single source
with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties, including the capacity to cut and finish material without
delaying the progress of the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Sub contract the stonework to one firm with a minimum of 10 years
successful experience in conventional set stonework comparable to that
shown and specified, in not less than 3 projects of similar scope to the
satisfaction of Engineer
C. Stone Installation
1. The stonework includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
a. All preparation for stonework, including but not limited to,
submittals, site erection, and sample installations as specified herein.
b. Interior direct cladding to architectural woodwork and partitions,
interior stone flooring, stone thresholds, and countertops.
c. All anchors, supports, inserts and fasteners for the above,
fabrication and installation of same.
d. All sealants and joint fillers in conjunction with the above.
2. The connection system as shown is suggested for the stone installation.
Final connection design is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
D. Floor Stone Testing: Test project specific stone flooring materials (each specie
and finish) to verify the dilution rates, visual and physical performance of the
impregnator and stone protection coats. Test for slip resistance in accordance
with ASTM C1028 and report the static coefficient of friction for each stone specie
and finish.

A. Deliver materials to project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent their deterioration
or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion,
breakage, chipping, or other causes.
1. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars.
2. Lift with wide-belt type slings where possible; do not use wire rope or ropes
containing tar or other substances which might cause staining.
3. Place and stack skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent
breakage or cracking of stones.
4. Protect stone on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining, waterproof
membrane, but allow air to circulate around stones.
5. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location.
Parcel 34 211 of 1243

A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by the mortar and grout

manufacturer, but not less than (10 deg C) or more than (32 deg C), in spaces
during stone setting. After installation maintain temperatures within range
recommended by the mortar and grout manufacturer.
B. Close spaces to traffic during stone flooring installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after stone flooring installation.
D. Shade all stone, materials and the work area from direct sunlight during the
installation as needed to prevent rapid evaporation caused by excessive heat or
wind.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION COORDINATION

A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to the start of interior stonework, a meeting
shall be held at the project site to review installation procedures and
coordination with other Work. The meeting shall include the interior stone
subcontractor, Contractor, Architect, membrane installer (if any), and
representatives of other trades affected by the Work.
B. Coordinate all aspects of the stonework with contiguous Work and provide
components at the proper time and sequence to avoid delays in the Work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE, GENERAL

A. Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated applicable
to each type of material required.
B. Provide matched blocks from a single quarry for each type, specie, color and
quality of stone required. Extract blocks from a single bed of quarry stratum,
especially reserved for Project, unless stones from randomly selected blocks
are acceptable to Architect for aesthetic effect.
C. Visual Performance Criteria: All portions of stonework shall be furnished
complying with the following criteria, all as reviewed and accepted by the
Architect through sample submissions, sample installations, and thereafter on-site
observations:
1. Color Range: Matching Architect’s samples; uniform with no discernible
variations between pieces in any contiguous area.
2. Finishing Technique:
a. Polished Finish: Uniform highly reflective mirror gloss finish with the full
color and crystal structure of the stone visible through the finish.
Evidence of swirl shall not be permitted.
b. Honed Finish: Uniform throughout. Evidence of swirl shall not be permitted.
c. Thermal (Flamed) Finish: Uniform textured finish produced by the
application of a high temperature flame to the stone surface with all
Parcel 34 212 of 1243
panels processed horizontally (parallel) to grade unless otherwise

accepted by the Engineer on the shop drawings. Evidence of channeling
shall not be permitted.
2.2 STONE TYPES

A. General: Comply with ASTM C503 for marble, ASTM C615 for granite,
ASTM C568 for limestone, ASTM C629 for slate.
B. Stone shall be sound, durable, and free of imperfections such as spalls, cracks,
starts, seams, pits, stain producing minerals, and other defects that will impair
its strength, durability and appearance.
C. All material shall be subject to culling as required to match the preselected
control samples prior to acquisition and thereafter through all stages of fabrication
prior to delivery.
2.3 SPECIES, FINISHES, AND SUPPLIERS: PROVIDE STONE MATCHING THE
APPROVED SAMPLES WHICH have been selected from the product lines,
suppliers, and quarries. STONE BASE AND TRIM
A. Wall Base:
1. Nominal Thickness: (20 mm)
2. Top-Edge Detail: Straight, slightly eased at corner
3. Ends: Butt ends into casings
B. Profiled Trim:
1. Profile: Match [profiles indicated on Drawings].
2. Joints: [1/16-inch- wide grouted joints]
2.4 STONE GRAPHICS AND CARVING
A. Carve and cut graphics and carvings according to Shop Drawings. Use skilled
stone carvers experienced in the successful performance of work similar to that
indicated.
B. Abrasively etch graphics and carvings according to Shop Drawings.
C. Laser etch graphics and carvings according to Shop Drawings.
2.5 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: For each type of stone installation, obtain compatible
formulations of setting and grouting materials containing latex or latex additives
from a single manufacturer, and as recommended by their manufacturer for the
application indicated.
B. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A and as
specified below:
1. Latex Additive: Manufacturer’s standard styrene-butadiene-rubber
2. Bond Coats: For setting white and light colored stone use non-staining
white, low alkali containing, Portland cement in the mortar that will not show
Parcel 34 213 of 1243
through the stone body.

C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Polymer Type: Dry, re-dispersible latex/polymer powder form,
prepackaged with other dry ingredients and which contain dyes that have
a proven track record of not leaching into natural stone. Use sanded grout
at joints (3 mm) wide or greater, use un-sanded grout at joints (3 mm)
wide or less and wherever polished stone surfaces are to be grouted.
2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standards to match
stone being grouted.
D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive for Setting Countertops, ANSI A118.3,
E. Water for Cleaning and Mixing Spotting Plaster: Clean, non-alkaline and potable.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Sealants:
1. For Countertops: ‘'Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant’
2. Floor Joints: ‘Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant for Paving Applications’,
B. Floor Cleaner: Provide stone cleaners of proper formulation for stone types,
finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone supplier. Use
cleaning agents which do not contain caustic or harsh fillers that will damage
stone or stone finishes.
C. Countertop Sealer: Provide stone sealing materials as per section joint
sealant.
1. Prepare countertop surfaces to receive sealer in accordance with the
countertop sealer manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply sealers and
surface protection coatings in accordance with the countertop sealer
manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Divider and Transition Strips: Stainless steel shapes and flat bar trims
fabricated from ASTM A666 (for flat bar) and ASTM A276 (for shapes) Type 304
stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated, depth as required to suit conditions
shown and having an integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or
substrate, unless otherwise indicated. Provide NAAMM #4 satin finish at
exposed top edge in the long direction, furnish in longest lengths available.
2.7 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS

A. General: Provide anchors and attachments of type and size required to
support stonework and fabricated from the following metals for conditions and
anchors as indicated below.
1. Expansion Anchors: Stainless steel, Type 304. Type, size and load
capacity as required to support loading of 4 times the loads imposed by
stone cladding system. Do not use lead shield expansion bolts or cinch
anchors.
2. Anchor Tiebacks: Type 304 stainless steel dowels, cramps, straps, discs
Parcel 34 214 of 1243

and rods in standard commercial tempers and hardness as required to

sustain imposed loads and in no case less than 3/16 inch (4.5 mm) thick,
complying with ASTM A666.
3. Shims: Plastic of the required joint thickness and of the size required to
support the stonework.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate interior stonework in sizes and shapes required to comply
with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Unless otherwise shown, provide square edges typically, with quirk
mitered outside corners at stone to stone joints, to the extent indicated.
B. Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit and finish stonework to shapes, profiles and
dimensions shown on Drawings and/or final shop and setting drawings. Make
exposed surfaces straight, sharp, true and continuous at joints within the
tolerances specified.
1. Stone Sizes: As indicated.
2. Stone Thicknesses: As indicated for each item but not less than
a. 20mm for flooring
b. 20mmWall Cladding & 40mm mechanical fixation cladding
c. 40/20mm for stairs’ treads and riser.
3. Fabrication Tolerances:
a. Size and Squareness:
- Unit Thickness of 20mm to 40 -mm: +/- (3 mm in 2440 mm).
- Unit Thickness of Greater than (40-mm): +/- (6 mm in 2440 mm).
4. Cut all joints and edges square and at right angles to face, and with backs
parallel to face. Cut kerfs, reveals, and rustications as shown. Make
arrises straight, sharp, true, and continuous at joints.
C. Fabricate stone thresholds in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to
provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.
D. Stone Countertops:
1. Under counter Lavatories: Make cutouts for under-counter lavatories in shop
using template or pattern furnished by lavatory manufacturer. Form
cutouts to smooth, even curves with edges at right angles to top. Ease
juncture of cutout edges with tops, and finish edges to match tops.
2. Counter-Mounted Sinks: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting
openings for counter-mounted sinks. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes
at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.
3. All stone countertop aprons shall be adhesively joined to the countertops
using epoxy adhesive. Maximum adhesive joint width shall be limited to
1/16-inch (1.5-mm)
Parcel 34 215 of 1243

a. Prior to cleaning, lightly abrade stone surfaces to be bonded.

b. Cleaning: Stone shall be dry and clean from grease, oil, dirt, water,
and loose particles.
c. Precondition stone to be joined with adhesive to a temperature which is
within the temperature range recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer for assembling and curing the adhesive.
d. Mix adhesive in parts by weight, or parts by volume, in strict accordance
with the adhesive manufacturer’s instructions.
e. Stone countertops shall be assembled and cured, within the temperature
range, and under the humidity conditions, recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer. Apply adhesive, and brace, or use jigging, to maintain
proper alignment of joined stone pieces until adhesive hardens. Remove
adhesive from the stone faces which are to remain exposed in the finished
Work.
f. Assembled countertops shall not be moved until the adhesive has
cured to ensure the absence of joint slippage.
g. Apply bracing to the assembled countertops to ensure that the
assembled countertops are free of torsional stress during transportation,
handling and storage.
E. Carefully inspect finished stones at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements relative to qualities of appearance, material and fabrication;
replace defective stones with stones that do comply.
2.9 SPOTTING, MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water.
B. Mortars and Grouts: Mix mortars and grouts to comply with the requirements
of referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions
including those for accurate proportioning of materials and liquid latex
additive content; mix materials with type of equipment, selection of speeds, in
proper containers, for time periods, and other procedure needed to produce
mortars and grouts of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics for application specified or indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. Prior to the installation of stone, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the
project site to review the material selections, substrate preparations, installation
procedures, coordination with other trades, special details and conditions,
standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The
meeting shall include the Owner, Architect, the Contractor, stone installer, stone
and setting material manufacturer's representatives, and representatives of other
trades or subcontractors affected by the installation.
3.2 EXAMINATION
Parcel 34 216 of 1243
A. Examine substrates and areas where the stonework will be installed, with Installer
present.
1. Verify that substrates for setting stone flooring are sound and free of
voids, bug holes, rock pockets, honeycombs, and protrusions; and which
are dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind stone
units has been completed before installing stone.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in the existing floor substrates are
coordinated with stone floor joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint
locations in consultation with Architect.
4. Do not commence installation of flooring materials until floor substrate is
within the following tolerances in all directions. If substrate is not within
tolerance, level the substrate using a method and a product(s) that is
compatible with and acceptable to the setting materials manufacturer.
a. Subfloor surfaces to receive Medium Set Setting Beds: +/- (3 mm in
3.05 m) non-cumulative.
b. Subfloor Surfaces to Receive Thickset Setting Beds: +/- (6.35 mm in
3.05 m) non-cumulative.
c. No valleys or ridges greater than (3 mm).
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Grind or scarify concrete substrates to remove existing floor adhesive and
mortar residues (if any), laitance, films, sealing and curing compounds if they
are determined to be present on the substrate.
B. Blending: Color blend stone flooring units at Project site before installing.
1. Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of
the site (i.e. corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each
other, etc.).
3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Stonework shall be installed by skilled mechanics. Employ skilled stone fitters
at the site to do necessary field cutting as stones are set.
1. Use power saws with diamond tipped blades to cut stone. Cut lines
straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
B. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop
Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated
or necessary to secure stonework in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports,
and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with uniform
joints of (3-mm), unless greater widths are indicated, and with edges and faces
aligned. Do not install stone units which are warped, curled, cracked, chipped,
or broken, discolored or not properly finished.
Parcel 34 217 of 1243
C. Extend stonework into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures
to form a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting
pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone
without marring visible surfaces. Fit stone closely to electrical outlets, piping,
fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap stone.
Where cut edges will be visible after installation, finish to match factory-
fabricated edges.
E. Lay stone in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining stone units on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out
stonework and center stone fields in both directions in each space beginning at
thresholds. Lay out stonework and center stone fields in both directions on
each wall area. Adjust to minimize cutting.
F. Divider and Transition Strips: Install divider and transition strips at locations
indicated and where exposed edge of stone flooring meets carpet or other
flooring which finishes flush with top of stone flooring units.
G. Movement (Contraction, Control, Expansion, and Isolation Joints) Joints:
Locate sealant filled movement joints where recommended by the
manufacturer of mortar and grout materials, and as accepted by the Engineer.
Form movement joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of
setting materials, mortar beds, and stone. Do not saw-cut joints after installing
stone.
1. Spacing Guidelines:
a. Where stone plane abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls,
dissimilar floors, curbs, columns, pipes, ceilings, and where changes
occur in backing materials, but not at drain strainers.
b. In the joint between stone units making up the inside corner of planes.
c. All contraction, control, expansion, isolation, seismic and cold joints in
the horizontal structure and vertical surfaces shall continue through the
stone surfaces, but not through membranes.
d. Vertical and Horizontal Joints Widths: Widths for the stone shall be the
same as the grout joint but not less than (3-mm) or the width of the
control, expansion, seismic, joint whichever is greater.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Tolerances: Set stone to comply with the following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: +/- (3 mm in 3.05 m).
2. Variation from Level: +/- (3 mm in 3.05 m).
3.6 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Thin set Stone Tile over Concrete Slabs: Install in accordance with the
mortar manufacturer's recommendations and requirements indicated below for
Parcel 34 218 of 1243
ANSI setting bed methods and grout ANSI installation methods and grout types.
1. Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5
a. With a trowel, having notches sized as recommended by the mortar
manufacturer, comb the surface of the mortar with the notched side of
the trowel removing excess mortar. Spread only as much mortar as
can be covered in the time limits established by the mortar
manufacturers recommendations.
b. Wipe the back of each stone tile, with a damp sponge, to remove all
dust or dirt immediately before applying mortar to stone tiles.
c. Immediately after wiping stone tile backs, but prior to placing stone tile,
the mortar shall be troweled to back of stone tile for 100% coverage to
thickness of not less than (1.5-mm).
d. Place stone tiles onto mortar bed, maintaining (3-mm) wide joints, and
true accurate pattern as shown. Exercise care to quickly remove spillage
from faces of stone tile units using water damp sponges. Rake out
joints to depth required to receive grout as stone tile units are set.
e. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic on stone tiled floors for period of time as
recommended by the mortar manufacturer.
2. Grout Installation: Do not begin grouting stone units until they are firmly set
and, in no case, in less than 48 hours after they have been installed.
Remove spacers, if any, prior to grouting. Comply with Latex-Portland
Cement: ANSI A108.10. Fill joints flush with the stone unit surface. Do not
permit mortar to show through grouted joints. Provide hard finished grout,
which is uniform in color, smooth, and without voids, pinholes, or low spots.
Tool surfaces with shallow concave profile.
3.7 STONE TILE WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the mortar manufacturer's recommendations and
requirements indicated below for ANSI setting bed methods and related to types
of construction, and grout ANSI installation methods and grout types. Where
recommendations and methods conflict, the manufacturer's recommendations
shall apply. Exercise care to quickly remove spillage from faces of stone using
damp sponges. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout as stone units
are set.
1. Latex Portland Cement Mortar Installation (using specified Latex
Portland Cement mortar material): ANSI A108.5.
2. Grout Installation: Do not begin grouting stone units until they are firmly set
and, in no case, in less than 48 hours after they have been installed. Remove
spacers, if any, prior to grouting. Comply with Latex-Portland Cement: ANSI
A108.10. Fill joints flush with the stone unit surface. Do not permit mortar to
show through grouted joints. Provide hard finished grout, which is uniform in
color, smooth, and without voids, pinholes, or low spots. Tool surfaces with
shallow concave profile.
Parcel 34 219 of 1243

3.8 NSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Uncrate countertops and adhere, or fasten, to substrates where indicated.
1. Install countertops over plywood underlayment with full spread of water-
cleanable epoxy adhesive unless otherwise indicated to be mechanically
fastened.
B. Erect countertops level and true with joints, if any, uniform in width and
accurately aligned. Do not install units which are cracked, chipped, discolored.
1. Make-up plumbing connections located in countertops in accordance with
Division 22 work.
C. Grout joints, except joints shown to receive sealants, full and flush with
grouts as specified herein. Tool joints uniformly, without voids, pinholes,
or low spots, and slightly concave. Remove all grout spillage immediately.
Cure grout as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF STONE CLADDING

A. Set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at anchors and spaced
not more than 18 inches apart across back of unit, but provide not less than 1
setting spot per 2 sq. ft., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use Portland cement mortar for setting spots where stone is applied to inside
face of exterior walls.
B. Anchors: Provide a minimum of 4 anchors per panel up to 12 sq. ft. in face area,
plus a minimum of 2 additional anchors for each additional 8 sq. ft. C. Grout joints
after setting.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF STONE TRIM

A. Stone Trim: Set stone window stools on wood or metal framing or wood blocking
in a full bed of adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to
allow for grouting.
B. Stone Trim: Adhere units to plywood backing with full spread of water-cleanable
epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for
grouting.
C. Grout joints after setting.
3.11 CLEANING, SEALING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Upon completion of placement and grouting remove Latex-Portland
Cement grout residue and haze from stone as soon as possible
1. Flooring:
a. Curing: Before applying stone impregnator and stone soap allow the setting
bed and grout materials to cure a minimum of 21 days.
b. Floor Preparation: Clean substrates of substances that could impair
penetration and bond of the stone impregnator to stone using cleaning
solutions, dilution rates, and dwell times as recommended by the stone
Parcel 34 220 of 1243
impregnator manufacturer. Apply cleaning solutions using low speed (175

rpm) floor cleaning machine suitable for deep cleaning, and non-damaging to,
smooth textured, stone surfaces coupled with a wet vac; by using a mop and
bucket; or using auto-scrub brushing techniques each in accordance with the
stone impregnator manufacturer’s recommendations. If auto- scrub brushing,
thoroughly scrub stone flooring using soft medium bristle brush heads, instead
of nylon pads, to deep clean textured surfaces and grout joints of polished and
honed finished surfaces. Test floor cleaning machine, or auto-scrub brushes,
to ensure that they will not harm each of the finishes, and types, of stone
flooring prior to cleaning operations. During machine cleaning, or auto-
scrubbing, operations monitor the quality and cleanliness of the equipment, or
brushes, to assure that they do not become worn or contaminated and scratch
the finish of the stone flooring.
B. Sealing:
1. Impregnator Application: Allow floor to thoroughly dry for 24 to 72 hours
after floor preparation. Using brush, or roller, applicators apply two thin,
even, wet on wet coats of impregnator allowing 5 to 10 minutes between
each coat for proper penetration unless otherwise recommended by the
impregnator manufacturer. 10 to 15 minutes after final coat is placed, but
prior to its surface drying, remove all excess “puddled” impregnator using a
white cloth to avoid splotchy/dull areas. Allow 72 hours for impregnator to
cure.
2. Surface Protection Coating: Not more than 4 days before occupancy by
Owner apply no-rinse stone surface protection coating to stone using dilution
rates as recommended by the surface protection coating manufacturer. Apply
surface protection coating by using either mop and bucket or auto-scrub
brushing techniques in accordance with the surface protection coating
manufacturer’s recommendations. If scrub brushing, thoroughly scrub stone
flooring using soft medium bristle brush heads, instead of nylon pads, to deep
clean textured surfaces and grout joints of polished and honed finished
surfaces. Test brushes, to ensure that they will not harm each of the finishes,
and types, of stone flooring prior to cleaning operations. During auto-
scrubbing operations monitor the quality and cleanliness of the brushes, to
assure that they do not become worn or contaminated and scratch the finish
of the stone flooring. Do not rinse with water as rinsing will remove the stone
surface protection coating.
C. Leave finished installation clean and free of warped, curled, cracked, chipped,
broken, un- bonded, discolored and otherwise defective stone units.
1. Replace warped, curled, cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded, discolored and
otherwise defective stone in manner which results in stonework matching
approved samples and field-constructed sample installations, showing no
evidence of replacement.
D. Protect installed stone work with kraft paper or other heavy, breathable, covering
and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the stone material
manufacturers and installer that ensures that stone work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Parcel 34 221 of 1243
End of Section
Parcel 34 222 of 1243

SECTION 096613 - PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 section includes
This Section includes the Terrazzo roof tiles.

Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for specifications of joint sealants
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of terrazzo tiles and fittings indicated. Include
terrazzo fabrication and installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, patterns, elevations, sections, joints details,
and adjoining to other Work.
C. Samples: For each type, color, and pattern of terrazzo tiles and fittings
required and in size indicated below:
1. Terrazzo Tiles: Full size samples.
2. Fittings: Full size sample of each type of fitting specified.
D. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Use products of firm that produce precast
terrazzo units similar to those specified for the project with a record of
successful in-service performance and who have sufficient production capacity
to produce required units for the project without delaying the Works.
1.5 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Handle tiles and fittings in a manner not to chip edges or cause cracking to
surfaces. Cement, packaged materials for mortar and grout shall be furnished
in bags displaying the manufacturer's trade mark and indicating type of
material Cement shall be dry and free of lumps and shall be stored over damp-
proofed wood blocks minimum 100 mm clear from ground in a dry and weather
tight location.
B. Sand shall be stored and handled in such a manner as to prevent intermixing
with foreign matter.
C. Store packaged cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover and
in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that become damp.
Parcel 34 223 of 1243

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement: For manufacture of tiles and for mortar beds, cement shall be a
standard brand of Portland cement conforming to Egyptian Standard
Specification (ESS) No. 373.
B. Sand: For manufacture of tiles (backing layer) and fittings shall be to ESS
1109, clean, siliceous sand. Use sand of coarse grading.
C. Sand: For manufacture of tiles (face layer) and for mortar beds, shall be clean,
siliceous sharp, properly graded for the purpose and shall conform to ESS No.
1108. Clay, loam and silt content shall not exceed 3%.
D. Stone Chips: From natural local marble or granite as selected by the Engineer,
well-graded and of maximum size of 8 mm.
E. Pigments: Shall comply with requirements of BS EN 12878. Use pure mineral
pigments, alkali resistant, color stable and compatible with mix materials.
F. Water: Potable.
G. Bedding Mortar Admixture: Liquid-type admixture to increase workability of
mortar and increase bonding.
H. Reinforcement: Mild steel plain bars, 6 mm diameter formed to approved
details. Tie wire shall be 1.00 mm diameter annealed steel wire.
I. Joints Sealants: Urethane Sealant as specified in Division 7, Section “Joint
Sealants”.
2.2 TERRAZZO TILES
A. Terrazzo Tiles and Fittings shall be to BS EN 13748, mechanically vibrated in the
moulds, hydraulically pressed by 14 - 18 N/mm2 (depending on size of tile) and
steam cured with 100% humidity for 24 hours at 65 deg. C, comprising:
B. Marble, granite aggregate or mixture there from.
C. Size of aggregate up to 8 mm random
D. White cement for facing layer and grey cement for backing layer.
E. Pigment to BS EN 12878, color as selected by the Engineer
F. Corners and edges of tiles and fittings shall be absolutely square
G. Water absorption for any single test when tested in accordance with BS EN
13748 shall be not more than 0.4 g/m2 for tile face and 8 % for the whole tile
unit.
H. Transverse strength shall not be less than 3 N/mm2 for any single result.
I. The facing layer shall be such as to provide a minimum wearing thickness of
not less than 8.00 mm after grinding. 70% of the facing layer shall be covered
with marble aggregate.
J. The base layer shall consist of a 1: 3 mix of cement-aggregate (by weight).
Aggregates shall conform to BS 882.
Parcel 34 224 of 1243

K. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, terrazzo tiles shall be 300 x 300 mm,
by 25 mm thickness.
L. Terrazzo tiles and fittings shall have a factory-applied fine grit finish so as
exposed surfaces are smooth and polished but without luster.
M. Precast Terrazzo Base Units: Minimum 20-mm- thick, precast terrazzo units,
lengths coordinated with tile size
N. Construction: One layer from face matrix.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Use
polyurethane based sealants, trafficable grade of colors approved by the Engineer.
B. Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10 that is
biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by cleaner manufacturer
for use on terrazzo type indicated.
C. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically
neutral with pH factor between 7 and 10, does not affect color or physical
properties of terrazzo, is recommended by sealer manufacturer.
D. Control-Joint System: Is to be prefabricated, heavy-duty EPDM rubber section
reinforced with stainless steel angles and confirming to the requirements of BS
5385: Part 3. Select depth of section to comply with depth of stone slabs or
tiles and bedding mortar according to manufacturer's details.
E. Joint Filler: as specified in Division 7, Section "joint sealer"
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to setting all units, inspect surfaces and arrange for the satisfactory
correction of defects.
B. Clean substrates to produce clean, dry, and neutral substrate for terrazzo
application.
C. Remove substances that might impair bond of terrazzo system, including oil,
grease, and curing compounds.
D. Grounds, bucks, outlet and receptacle boxes, rough plumbing and other fixtures
and fittings shall be in place and trenches, chases or other openings decks
properly closed.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Work shall be carefully laid out, avoiding small, unsightly cuts. Use of thin cuts and
pieces, chipped, spalled or otherwise disfigured tiles shall not be accepted.
Parcel 34 225 of 1243
3.3 SETTING BEDS FOR TILES
Mortar for setting beds shall be composed of 350 kg cement per cubic meter of
sand with sufficient mixing water. Approved liquid-type admixture may be
added to the mix to improve workability.
3.4 SETTING OF TILES
Tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour prior to
setting and shall be applied to setting beds while damp, but without free water
on the back of tile.
Tiles shall be accurately set, firmly pressed and tamped into full mortar beds
with well fitted joints in true planes, sloped or level as indicated on Drawings
and neatly cut and fitted closely against abutting work.
Intersections and returns shall be accurately formed and cuts rubbed smooth
with fine stone. Cut edges shall be set against fixtures or other tile penetrations
with at least a 1 mm joint.
Beds that have partially hardened shall not be retempered.
Movement Joints: Are to be to the full depth of tiles and mortar bedding,
extending entire perimeter of tiling area and at 15-meter intervals in both
directions. Install control joint fittings and fillers at vertical surfaces during setting
of tiles. Completely seal movement joints after grouting of normal joints.
3.5 SETTING TOLERANCES
Gradual variation of surface plane of floorings shall not exceed 3 mm in 3 m

from level indicated when tested with 3 m straight edge.
3.6 GROUTING
Thoroughly open tile joints before grouting. Grout joints after setting bed is dry,
but not less than before 12 hours elapse, with colored ordinary Portland cement
mixed with water to a slurry consistency and thoroughly forced into joints to fill
entire depth.
3.7 BASES
Setting Mortar: Same proportions as used for floors with stiff consistency to fill
back of tiles entirely.
Firmly press and tamper tiles into backing mortar with well fitted vertical joints,
level and aligned top edge.
Fill any open vertical joints with grout as specified.
3.8 FITTINGS INSTALLATION
Install units using method recommended in writing by manufacturer, according to

details indicated on approved shop drawings. Set units with alignment level and
true to dimensions, varying 3 mm maximum in length, height, or width.
Parcel 34 226 of 1243

Seal joints between units with colored cement grout matching precast terrazzo
color.
3.9 PROTECTION AND CURING
Close grouted floors to traffic completely for 72 hours after installation.

Protected installed floor tiles from premature drying of setting mortar. Cover
finished tile area with wet jute for a minimum period of 72 hours.
3.10 CLEANING AND CURING
Continuously during installation, tile surface shall be cleaned and traces of mortar or
residual tile pieces and foreign matter shall be completely removed.
Parcel 34 227 of 1243

SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING
GENERAL

A. Wall-to-wall carpet and cushion (pad) as required and the accessories as
indicated on Drawings and as specified in this section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit
written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and
flame resistance and smoke development characteristics.
B. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern
direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways,
enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are
required in carpet. Show installation details at special condition.
C. Submit 400 x 400 mm samples of each type, color, texture, and pattern of carpet
to be used for the work.
D. Manufacturer's standard color chart.
E. Certificate of compliance.
1.3 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers,
labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number.
B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-
ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme
temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum
temperature of 20 degree C at least three days prior to and during installation in
area where materials are stored.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written 5 years guarantee, starting from substantial handover of project,
for all items specified under this section, signed by manufacturer and the
Contractor, against defective material and workmanship.

A. Installer: Carpet installer shall have at least five years successful experience in
carpet installation similar in size and type to the installation for this Project.
Installer shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
B. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested
for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated
below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Parcel 34 228 of 1243
Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

organization.
1. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70
2. Rating: Pass
3. Test Method: ASTM E 84
4. Flame Spread: 75 or less
5. Smoke Developed: 450 or less
C. Dimensional Stability: Maximum variance not exceeding plus or minus 0.02
percent.

A. Substrate: Examine the substrate and conditions under which the carpet is to be
installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
B. Protection: Protect carpet from soiling and damage during transit, storage, and
installation.
C. Temperature: Temperature in the area to be carpeted shall be within the
manufacturer's recommended range.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The carpet should be 100% washable and stain resistant. The carpet should be
commercial grade of class33 and
Total weight: 1.8 kg/m2.
Acoustical sound impact: 20dB.
Warranty and allergy certificate 10 years. Nylon carpet sheet class fiber based
anti-microbial sanitized carpet roll of 4.3mm thickness
B. Pile above substrate shall be cut, loop or cut and loop.

C. Provide Manufacturer’s data for Rows per cm, Gauge per mm, Stitches per cm
D. For insulation from sound through absorption of sound (absorption coefficient)
provide Manufacturer’s calculated value (in accordance with EN 1307).
E. Carpet shall be rot resistant (in accordance with EN 1307).
2.2 CARPET CUSHION (PAD)

A. Polyurethane: manufactured of densities, thickness, and weights to meet heavy
conditions.
B. 10mm thick. Bonded polyethylene foam rolls as an underlay layer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
Parcel 34 229 of 1243

A. 100 mm high oak wooden skirting. Installation should be done by authorized

installer of company
B. Seaming Tape: Hot-melt adhesive tape as recommended by carpet

manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form
secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams.
C. Adhesives: Water resistant, non-staining and as recommended by the carpet
manufacturer to comply with the flammability requirements of the installed
carpet.
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Measurement: Measure each space to receive carpet as a basis of supplying and
cutting the carpet. Do not scale Drawings or calculate sizes from dimensions
shown.
B. Patch holes and cracks, and level to a smooth surface. Seal powdery or porous
surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.
C. Vacuuming: Immediately prior to carpet installation, vacuum substrate and remove
all deleterious substances which would interfere with the installation or be harmful
to the work.
D. Substrate: Prior to installation of the carpet, ascertain that floors are completely
dry to prevent accumulation of moisture under carpet, and that the temperature of
the premises is proper to prevent sag, buckle, and shrinkage of carpet after
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and
direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams
perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not
bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet.
B. Where required, install carpet cushion.
C. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and
closets of each space.
D. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by
protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
E. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to
substrate.
F. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming tape to provide
sufficient strength for stretching where carpet length is greater than 20 feet.
G. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple-free, taut, trim edges; secure to
stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where
Parcel 34 230 of 1243
carpet length is greater than 20 feet.
H. For bonded application, glue carpet to cushion using approved adhesive

materials, in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
I. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts
with seaming tape. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with
carpet manufacturer's written instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams
without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform
bond.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended
cleaning agent.
B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with
commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace
carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn.
C. Vacuum clean carpet.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and the Engineer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or
deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 097413 – WOOD WALL COVERS

Parcel 34 231 of 1243
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Wood Stone 3D seamless wall panel system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and substrate for
Wood Stone wall panel system.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors and finishes, and species list available for Wood Stone wall panel system.
D. Samples for Verification: As requested by Architect.
A. Source Limitations: For field-finished Wood Stone wall panel system, obtain each
species, grade, and cut of wood from one source with resources to provide
materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
B. Forest Certification: Provide Wood Stone wall system produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."
A. Deliver Wood Stone wall panel system materials in unopened cartons or bundles
and store in a dry, warm, ventilated, weather-tight location.
A. Install Wood Stone wall panel system after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A Wood Stone “Interlocking” Wall Panel System is a patented unique 3-dimensional

panel system Preassembled and prefinished blocks for installation of Wood Stone
wall panel System.
Parcel 34 232 of 1243

2.2 WOOD STONE WALL PANEL SYSTEM
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wood Stone wall panel system
by one of an approved manufacturer as the followings:
1. Oak wood species (unless Otherwise Specified) in the construction of the
Wood Stone wall panel system.
2. The Wood Stone wall panel shall have solid wood blocks fastened in the
specified design to 1/2" plywood panel measuring. Panels are manufactured to
be fastened to substrate 16" O.C.
3. All solid wood blocks in width and length as indicated in approved shop
drawings
4. Solid wood block depth: 25mm.
5. Panels will be preassembled with some solid wood finish blocks shipped
unattached to facilitate attachment of the plywood to the substrate.
6. Wood Stone wall panel system shall to be stained with Natural stain.
7. Wood Stone wall panel system shall be finished with Clear Satin, finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Wood Stone wall panel system.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum and hand wipe clean area where panels are to be installed immediately
before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for any additional
substances requiring removal. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Wood Stone wall panel system manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. Construction grade adhesive and mechanical fasteners must be used to attach to

substrate.
C. Solid wood finish blocks will be installed with construction grade adhesive after
mechanical fasteners have attached panels to substrate.
D. Construction grade adhesive and mechanical fasteners provided by others.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed Wood Stone wall panel system during remainder of construction
period.
Parcel 34 233 of 1243

SECTION 099110 - PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the work of site applied painting as required by contract and
include the following:
1. Latex Emulsion Water Binder Paint
2. Alkyd Paint (drying oil and resin binder)
3. anti- Carbonation Protective paints
4. Stains
B. The work includes surface preparation, priming painting, and finishing of exposed
interior and exterior items, and surfaces of ferrous metals, carpentry, concrete and
plaster.
C. Extent of each type of Painting shall be where required to patch the works and as
directed by the Engineer.
D. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar
adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Engineer shall select
these from standard colors or finishes available.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

Painting work shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications,
Drawings and the stipulations of the Saudi Arabia Standard Organization SASO,
the Code of Practice (CP) and the corresponding Standard Specifications
1.3 Definitions
Paint includes coating systems, materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains,
sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, inter-
mediate or finish coats.
1.4 Quality Assurance

A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint
produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by
paint manufacturer and use only within recommended limits. The Contractor shall
only be allowed to use materials delivered to the site in sealed cans bearing the
Parcel 34 234 of 1243
manufacturer's name.
B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and
conditions for application of each paint system.
2. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at
least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
3. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas
required.
4. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
5. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply
additional mockups of additional colors selected by
Architect at no added cost to Owner.
6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of
deviations from the Contract Documents contained in
mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
7. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups
may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
1.3 Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
Specification Sections:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label
analysis and application instructions for each material and paint system proposed
for use.
Provide a list of the required coating materials, application and finish system.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number.
B. Samples: Prior to beginning work, Engineer shall furnish color chips for surfaces
to be painted. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
Submit samples for Engineer’s review of color and material with texture to
simulate actual conditions. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are
achieved.
Label each sample as to location and application.
1.4 Delivery and Storage

A. Deliver materials to job Site in original, new and unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name, label and following information:
1. Product name or title of material
Parcel 34 235 of 1243
2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture and expiry

date
3. Manufacturer's name
4. Contents by volume, for major pigment
5. Thinning instructions
6. Application instructions
7. Color name and number
8. Product description (generic classification or binder type)
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated
area at a minimum ambient temperature as recommended by manufacturers.
Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
C. Protect from overheating where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly.
Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen
and work areas are adequately protected from fire and health hazards resulting
from handling, mixing and application of paints.
1.5 Job Conditions

A. All paints shall be used within six (6) months from manufacturing.
B. Apply water-base paints or solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces
to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 10C and 35C, unless
otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or
to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's
printed instructions.
D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be
painted are enclosed and maintained within temperature limits specified by paint
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
E. Each succeeding coat of priming and undercoating paint shall be sufficiently
different in color as to be readily distinguishable.
F. Sanding and rubbing down shall be necessary between coats for final leveling and
smoothing. After rubbing down surface must be carefully dusted to remove
residue of filler and putty.
G. Paint shall be kept well stirred and shall not be used when a thick sediment has
settled.
H. Any paint which develops a skin on the contents within the tin shall be removed.
I. Any residue left in a tin shall not under any circumstances be added to the
contents of other tins.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Parcel 34 236 of 1243
2.2 Materials
A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade (Premium grade) of various types of
coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers.
Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade
product shall not be acceptable.
Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply
that products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent
products of other manufacturers.
Emulsion paint used for the exterior elevation shall be based on acrylic or
polyurethane paint as indicated on drawings.
Paint used for woodworks shall be lacquer paint with rubber base binders and shall
be single pack polyurethane lacquer from an approved manufacturer.
B. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service
indicated as to provide:
1. Color and opacity
2. Reinforce physically and increase the thickness of the dry film
3. Absorb or reflect harmful ultra violet radiation
4. Inhibit corrosion of metal surface
5. It is recommended to use for:
a. White pigment titanium dioxide
b. Tinting pigment, natural or synthetic metal oxide
C. Auxiliary Materials
1. Knotting: Quick drying solution of shellac in industrial methylated spirit.
2. Cleaning Agents: Soap, powder cleaners or detergent solution for normally
soiled surfaces, proprietary solvent, emulsion cleaners for removal of oil and
grease.
3. Solvents
a. Potable water.
b. White spirit.
c. Thinner.
d. Oxygenated solvents.
D. Anti-carbonation paints: Single component emulsion containing inert pigments,
with a primer solid volume. Use paints with UV stable and waterproof protective
coat based on styrene- acrylic copolymer of 30% , volume solids is 55%, reduction
in chloride ions ingress @ 28 days is 97% ,chloride ion diffusivity is 4.98 x 10 and
min Elongation 300%
E. Painting for Piping and Fitting
1. Priming: shall be a polymide cured catalyzed epoxy free primer with a total
Parcel 34 237 of 1243
volume solid content of mixed materials not less than 50%.

2. High Build: The top coat shall be polymide cured catalyzed epoxy high build
and self-priming with a total volume solid content of mixed materials 56%
minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection
A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work shall be
applied and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic

moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.
3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
4. Wood: 15 percent.
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
6. Plaster: 12 percent.
D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
E. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
F. Paint must be compatible with the material to which it is applied.
G. Precaution shall be taken to keep down dust before and during painting process.
H. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
I. The time and conditions necessary for a paint to dry must be checked.
3.2 Surface Preparation

A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate
condition.
B. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments.
Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning by means of a suitable
Parcel 34 238 of 1243

solvent or by high pressure water jetting or steam cleaning with, if necessary, an

alkaline cleaning agent (Na3Po4).
C. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process shall
not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.
D. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as
required. Notify the Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using the
specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
E. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already in place and are not to be painted, or provide
surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.
Following completion of painting of each space or area, clean and prefix or
reinstall removed items in position.
F. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-
coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by
solvent or white spirit and succession of clean swabs, to the extent-that the only
traces remaining are slight stains in the form of spots or stripes.
G. Excessive rust scale shall be removed using impact cleaning tools.
H. Blast steel surfaces if necessary. Treat base and sand blast or pickled clean
metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming.
I. All bolt holes shall be solvent-cleaned prior to blast cleaning.
J. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required
by other sections of these specifications.
K. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer.
Blast Cleaning. Metal surfaces can be cleaned by blasting, Sand and other
potentially silica-containing materials shall not be used, unless permitted by local
authorities and accepted by the Engineer.The abrasive shall be free from oil,
grease, moisture, salts, and not be rusty.
1. suitable abrasives for use in blast cleaning are:
a. Steel grit
b. Steel shot
c. Malleable iron shot
d. Crushed steel wire
e. Aluminum oxide (corundum)
f. Blast furnace slag
g. Copper slag
2. Grade of Surface Finish: Blast cleaning shall apply, with degree of surface
roughness (peak-to-valley) height of not more than 80 Micron. Finally, the
surface shall be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner, clean dry compressed air
or a clean brush.
Parcel 34 239 of 1243

3. It is essential to ensure that no condensation occurs on blasted steel. Blast

cleaning shall not be done in open areas close to painting operations or wet
coated surfaces, to prevent dust and abrasive contamination.
4. A dry blast-cleaned surface shall be brushed with clean brushes made of
hair, bristle or fibber, blown-off compressed air (free from oil and water) or
vacuum-cleaned to remove all traces of blast cleaned products from the
surface or from pockets and corners. Particular care shall be taken to
prevent rusting/or contamination of cleaned surfaces. The substrate shall
be thoroughly dry before painting is applied.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil, corrosion and surface contaminants with non-
petroleum based solvent or chemical washes solvent free of chloride.
C. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete
block, and cement plaster to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by per-forming
appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause
blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of
paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted
in manufacturer's printed directions.
Surfaces which are to receive water paint shall be treated with one coat of
petrifying liquid applied by brush and allowed to dry for at least 24 hours before
application of water paint.
Porous surfaces may require a block filler or a cement grout/ latex primer.
Stopping and filling shall be, when hard and dry, rubbed down level with the
surrounding surfaces.
D. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, dust, oil and foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits and sand-paper as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots and apply a
thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot-sealer before application of
primer. After priming fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty, sand
smooth when dried, all nail holes, cracks and other small holes shall be filled after
the full prime coat.
1. Prime, stain or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood, including cabinets,
counters, cases and paneling.
2. When transparent finish is required, back prime with spar varnish.
3. Back prime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet
wall construction occurs on backside.
4. Seal tops, bottoms and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.
5. Unless otherwise described, all coatings to timber work shall be applied by brush.
6. Wood work required to be stained: Surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease
Parcel 34 240 of 1243
and dirt. The wood shall then be stopped, filled and rubbed down. In the case
of oak surface shall be cleaned with white spirit to remove free oil.
Hard stopping for surfaces tinted shall be an approved tinted filler to match the
color of the surface.
Stain for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil stain complying with BS
1215.
All hardwood and softwood to receive decorative staining shall receive two (2)
coats of pigmented stain and three (3) coats of silk-lacquer; sand surfaces
between coats.
3.3 Materials Preparation
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir
as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3.4 Application
A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
2. Apply additional coats when putty undercoats, stains or other conditions show
through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and
appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
4. It is essential to use a grade of abrasive paper appropriate to surfaces, the
surface shall be sanded in the direction of and not across the grains.
5. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and
touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Each stage of the work shall be subjected to inspection and approval.
B. Painting Procedure: Apply primer coat or first-coat material to surfaces that have
been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as
practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1. After preparation and the prime coat, apply on the over all surface a smoothing
and leveling putty (filling) the material must be stiff and applied with a putty or
stopping knife, firmly pressed into cavity, and knifed flush with surrounding
surfaces, it may be required filling in two stages.
2. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the
Parcel 34 241 of 1243

application method. Sand between applications to produce an even smooth

surface.
3. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do
not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint
does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness on the entire
surface as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Mechanical Work: Painting of mechanical work is limited to those items exposed
in occupied spaces and exterior areas exposed to view.
a. Mechanical items to be painted include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports
2. Tanks
3. Ductwork, insulation
4. Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports
5. Accessory items
A. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or
finished and which has not been prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
Priming paint shall be brushed well into the surface and shall be allowed to dry
and harden before application of subsequent coats.
B. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture.
Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or
other surfaces imperfections.
C. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Sand surfaces smooth
prior to applying primer and after applying putty. Cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections shall not be
acceptable.
D. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth
surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color
irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes or other surface
imperfections.
Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 Completed Work
Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or
repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
Parcel 34 242 of 1243

3.6 Clean-up and Protection

During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans
and rags at end of each work day.
Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping,
using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,
and repainting, as acceptable to the Engineer.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work,
after completion of painting operations.
At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.7 Surface Preparation Schedules

A. The following shall apply, unless the original condition defers.
B. Fair-Face Concrete Surfaces (Exterior and Interior)
Patch holes and voids and remove surface irregularities and imperfections with
powder filler mixed with water to a consistency so as to work readily under a putty
knife.
1. Apply one coat of water-based coating primer.
2. Apply 2 finish coats over the primer.
C. Exterior Cementitious Plastered Surfaces (for Emulsion Paint)
1. Apply one coat of water-based coating primer.
2. Patch holes and voids and treat surfaces irregularities by water-based putty.
3. Apply 2 finish coats over the block-filler.
D. Interior and Exterior Cementitious Plastered Surfaces (for Alkyd Paint)

Apply one coat of pure untinted boiled linseed oil or one coat of water-based
coating primer.
Apply two directional passes (one horizontal and one vertical) of putty compatible
with finishing coats materials. Putty shall be applied with hand-pressed putty
knife so as to cover entire surface to be painted and to produce a smooth surface
free of holes, voids and irregularities with thickness putty just filling surface
roughness.
Apply 2 finish coats over the putty.
E. Wood Surfaces of Opaque Finishes: Clean and treat wood seasoned knots with
knotting material or apply one thin coat of white shellac.
Parcel 34 243 of 1243

1. Apply one coat of prime

2. Apply two directional passes (one vertical and one horizontal) of oil-based putty.
3. Note: where putty is needed after a paint coat to treat surface imperfections,
use a special prepared putty compatible with finish coating type.
3.8 Paint Schedule

The following shall apply, unless the original condition defers.
A. Plastered or Concrete Surfaces
1. Plastic Emulsion Finish (Washable): 4 coats with total film thickness not less
than 100 microns.
a. Prime Coat: Pure, untinted oil paint or alkyd base primer sealer
b. First Coat: Plastic emulsion paint thinned with 35% water maximum
c. Second Coat: Plastic emulsion paint thinned with 20% water
maximum
d. Third Coat: Plastic emulsion paint thinned with 10% water maximum
e. Apply necessary putty for levelling and smoothing between coats.
2. Flat Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat acrylic paint for use on the exterior
over concrete, masonry, etc.
Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's direction. Use applicator and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
Apply 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mm.
First Coat: Exterior acrylic emulsion
Second Coat: Exterior acrylic emulsion.
3. Coarse Textured Acrylic Paint Coating
a. Prime (First) Coat: Dilute acrylic resin water-based emulsion diluted with
water 1:1 roller applied.
b. Apply necessary putty of the same material and color to smooth surfaces.
c. Second Coat: Acrylic resin water-based emulsion, trowel applied, with a
course textures 3.0 Kg/m2.
4. Alkyd Paint Finish: Prepare surfaces as indicated in Item 3.7.C.
a. Prime Coat: Apply one coat alkyd paint of the color required over the 2
coats of putty.
b. Sand and apply necessary putty of the same material and color.
c. Second and Third Coat: Apply an enamel coating of the color required.
5. Anti-carbonation paints: Coat application made by brush onto correctly
prepared surfaces. The material shall be mixed and applied in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions
B. Ferrous Metal
Parcel 34 244 of 1243
1. Alkyd Paint: Compatible primer coat shall be required on shop-primer items.

Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness
not less than 75 microns.
a. Prime Coat: Red Lead Base Primer, or zinc chromate primer. Prime coat
is not required on items delivered shop primed.
b. First and Second Finish Coats: Interior Flat Latex Base Paint.
2. Semi-gloss Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film
thickness not less than 65 microns.
a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer
b. First Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoat
c. Second Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel
3. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry
film thickness not less than 65 microns.
a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer
b. First Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoat
c. Second Coat: Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel
4. Stove Enamel Paint: Paint is sprayed over primed surfaces and unit shall be
heated in special stove to obtain the required enamel according to Engineer
requirements.
5. Electrostatic Coating: Shall be a powder coating electrostatically applied with
electrostatic equipment to obtain, a uniform thickness, decorative, attractive
and durable coating.
a. The powder shall be a formulated polymer and curing agent.
b. Surface to be coated shall be clean either mechanically or chemically to
obtain a good adhesion of the coating film to the metallic surface.
c. Thickness of the coating shall not be less than 60 microns, the average
weight of the zinc layer shall be 550 g/m2 with a minimum of 500 g/m2.
6. Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating: steel or iron units shall be dipped in molten zinc to
obtain a zinc coating and zinc-iron alloy layers, according to BS No. 729.
7. Finish Appearance: Surfaces of articles shall be free from uncoated areas,
blisters, flux deposit and blackspots.
8. Surface shall be smooth, coating shall be reasonably uniform in thickness and
free from flux stains.
C. Piping and Fittings: The recommendations of the paint manufacturer shall be
followed closely in order to achieve the optimum properties.
Apply first layer of paint (primer coat) to surfaces that have been cleaned
pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
Parcel 34 245 of 1243

Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat until paint has dried or where it feels firm, coat does not cause lifting or loss
of adhesion of the under layer.
Flange facings shall not be painted.
D. Wood Work: Clean and treat wood seasoned knots with knotting material or apply
one thin coat of white shellac.
1. Semi-gloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film
thickness not less than 100 microns.
a. Prime Coat: Pure linseed oil or alkyds with zinc chromate and zinc oxide.
b. First Coat: Interior flat - latex - base paint
c. Second Coat: Interior enamel undercoat
d. Third Coat: Odorless interior semi-gloss alkyd enamel
E. Alkyd Gloss Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film
thickness not less than 65 microns
1. First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel
2. Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel
F. Low-Luster (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer.
1. First Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion
2. Second Coat: Exterior Acrylic Emulsion
G. Woodwork and Hardboard
Stained Woodwork
1. Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: 3 finish coats over stain plus filler on open-
grain wood. Wipe filler before applying stain.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain, Semi Transparent, Penetrating
Wood Stain
b. Filler Coat: Paste Wood Filler
c. First Coat: Cut Shellac
d. Second Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish
e. Third Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish
2. Stained-Wax Polished Finish:4 finish coats over
stain.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain, Semi Transparent, Penetrating
Wood Stain
b. First Coat: Cut Shellac
c. Second Coat: Paste Wax
d. Third Coat: Paste Wax
e. Fourth Coat: Paste Wax
3. Natural-Finish Woodwork.
Rubbed Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats over shellac plus filler on open-grain
wood.
a. First Coat: Cut Shellac
b. Filler Coat: Paste Wood Filler
Parcel 34 246 of 1243
c. Second Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish

d. Third Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish
4. Polished Wax Finish: 4 coats.
a. First Coat: Cut Shellac
b. Second Coat: Paste Wax
c. Third Coat: Paste Wax
d. Fourth Coat: Paste Wax
Parcel 34 247 of 1243

SECTION 099656 - EPOXY COATINGS
GENERAL

A. Resinous flooring including epoxy screed and colored epoxy coating for areas
shown on drawings.

A. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates to receive
resinous flooring.
B. Division 3 Section "Concrete Finishing" for concrete toppings applied over base
concrete slabs to receive resinous flooring.
C. Division 7 Section "Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation of
sealant materials at joints in resinous flooring systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory
required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance
to fading, and flame resistance and smoke development characteristics.
B. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern
direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways,
enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are
required in carpet. Show installation details at special condition.
C. Submit 400 x 400 mm samples of each type, color, texture, and pattern of
carpet to be used for the work.
D. Manufacturer's standard color chart.
E. Certificate of compliance.

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract.

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has
specialized in installing resinous flooring similar in material, design, and extent
to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to resinous flooring
manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken,
bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage
and mixing with other components.
Parcel 34 248 of 1243
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental
effects.

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's
written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture,
ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring installation.
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place,
simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than
24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EPOXY RESIN FLOOR SCREED
A. Epoxy Resin Floor Screed: Shall be a three component solvent free mortar
consisting of an epoxy resin base, a modified polyamine hardener, and a
specially selected and graded silica aggregate of high crushing strength and
applied over two-part epoxy resin primer. Screed shall be trowel-applied at
thickness shown on drawings. Products complying with other equivalent
standards than mentioned herein shall be acceptable if meeting the
specifications requirements.
B Physical Properties:
1. Compressive Strength (BS 6319:Part 2 1985): 70 N/mm2.
2. Flexural Strength (BS 6319:Part 3 1985): 16N/mm2.
3. Bond to primed concrete (Elcometer pull off): Greater than tensile strength
of concrete.
4. Tensile Strength (BS 6319:Part 7 1985): 11 N/mm2.
5. Water Absorption (in house): 0.1 %.
7. Color: As indicated
C Chemical Properties: Resistant of chemicals at 300 C, as follows:
1. Petrol
2. Sodiumchloride (saturated solution)
3. Sodium hydroxide. (50% solution)
4. Hydrochloric Acid
5. Motor oil.
2.2 COLORED EPOXY
A. Coating: Colored epoxy coating shall be a two component water dispersed
epoxy resin coating system complying with BS476, Part 7: 1987 – Class 1
spread of flame. Products complying with other equivalent standards meeting
the specifications requirements shall be acceptable. Coating shall be suitable
for application by brush or lambswool roller in 2 coats to total dry film thickness
Parcel 34 249 of 1243
of 100 micron unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Color of epoxy coating

shall be as shown drawings or approved by engineer.
1. Dry film thickness (2 coats): 100 microns (approx)
2. Chemical Properties: Resistant to chemicals.
B. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous
flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 REPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to epoxy screed and epoxy
coating manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide
clean, dry, and neutral substrate for resinous flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze,
efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil,
and other contaminates incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements, unless manufacturer's written
instructions are more stringent.
2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3. Cleaned substrates shall be at least 14 days at 35 0 C before epoxy screed
shall be applied.
C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to
resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Epoxy Screed: Mix components, prepare materials and lay screed to primed
area according to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Use
epoxy resin primer approved by the epoxy screed manufacturer.
E. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks
from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing
surface of thickness indicated.
1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of
resinous flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring
to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations.
Parcel 34 250 of 1243
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended

spreading rate.
C. Apply self-leveling slurry body coat(s) in thickness indicated.
D. Apply troweled or screeded body coat(s) in thickness indicated. Hand or power
trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and
roughness.
E. Apply sealing or finish coat(s), including grout coat, if any, of type
recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer to produce finish indicated.
Apply in number of coats and at spreading rates recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of
construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary
covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
B. Clean resinous flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project
area. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended in writing by
resinous flooring manufacturer.
Parcel 34 251 of 1243

SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTEMENTS
PART 1 — GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and

supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the toilet partitions as vertical solid surface product types
1.3 DEFINITION
A. Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the

same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer,
aluminum tri- hydrate filler and pigment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices and other components.
a. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements,

attachments, etc.
b. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures,
soap holders and other items installed in solid surface.
C. Samples:
1. For each type of product indicated.
a. Submit minimum 6-inch by 6-inch sample in specified gloss.
b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous

seam.
c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation.
2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work.
D. Product data:
Parcel 34 252 of 1243
Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with

specified
Performance requirements.
E. Maintenance data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and

cleaning instructions.
a. Maintenance kit for finishes shall be submitted.
2. Include in project closeout documents.
A. Qualifications:
1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to
those required for this project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator/installer qualifications:
1. Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified in

writing by the manufacturer.
D. Pre-installation conference:
1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division
A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation.
B. Store components indoors prior to installation.
C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining

following installation for duration of project.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials.
1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective

materials.
Parcel 34 253 of 1243

2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive

heat will not be warranted.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide maintenance requirements as specified by the manufacturer.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from approved

vendor list.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Solid polymer (acrylic) partitions.
1. Cast, nonporous, filled acrylic, not coated, sandblasted construction with

through body having minimum physical and performance properties
specified.
2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) shall be repairable

by sanding and/or polishing.
B. Fixations:
1. Bolts
2. Metal angles.
C. Thickness: 6mm thick.
D. Edge treatment: sharped.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. bolts and fixing angles.
1. Manufacturer’s standard bolts and fixing angles to fix partitions either on

floor and wall or on bathtub and walls.
2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION
A. Shop assembly
Parcel 34 254 of 1243

1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes

indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer’s printed instructions and technical bulletins.
a. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2" wide.
2. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as

required or as indicated on the drawings.
3. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.
a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template.
b. Smooth edges.
c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.
B. Thermoforming:
1. Comply with manufacturer’s data.
2. Heat entire component.
3. Form pieces to shape prior to seaming and joining.
4. Cut pieces to finished dimensions.
5. Sand edges and remove nicks and scratches.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install partitions as manufacturer instructions and manual guides.
3.3 REPAIR
A. Repair or replace damaged work, which cannot be repaired to architect’s

satisfaction.
A. Keep components clean during installation.

Parcel 34 255 of 1243
END OF SECTION 102113.19
Parcel 34 256 of 1243

SECTION 102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Toilet and washroom accessories as shown on drawings and

specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: Full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design,
operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may
be used in the work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by
toiles locations of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.
2. Identify products using designations indicated.
A. Maintenance data.
A. Coordination: Coordinate the accessories locations, installation, and

sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper
installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of the accessories
items.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide two year warranty on all other accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Stainless Steel toilet paper roll holder :

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Duravit d-code 0099261000.
Parcel 34 257 of 1243
2. Description: Roll unit.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
B. Stainless Steel Tissue Dispenser:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Egyptian investment CO.
2. Description: Boxed unit.
C. Stainless Steel Hook:
1. Basis of Design: Duravit 0099041000.
2. Materials: Stainless steel finish.
3. Projection from Wall: 4 inch (100mm).
D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser (for lavatory counter) :
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Duravit 0099161000.
2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form.
3. Mounting: Deck mounted on lavatory counter
E. Handicap hand Bar (Grab Bar) and L-Shaped Handicap hand Bar:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Hanimex 042902306.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
4. Finish: Smooth, Chrome color and slip-resistant texture in grip area.
5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
6. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Stainless Steel Circular Waste Bin:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: IKEA 402.454.11.

2. Mounting: Floor mounted.
3. Description: Circular unit (Dim. 200x400mm).
G. Stainless Steel Rectangular Waste Bin:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: IKEA 203.140.71.

2. Mounting: Floor mounted.
3. Description: Boxed unit.
H. Mirror Unit: Clear Glass Facial Mirror

Plate glass, one piece mirror shall be of quality grade No.1, not less than 6 mm
thick, guaranteed 10 years against silver spoilage.
Mirror type back shall be 20mm thick plywood backing protected by shock-
absorbing waterproof, non-abrasive 6 mm thick polystyrene padding.
For mirror with stainless steel use type 304 frame, satin finish, and as approved by
the Engineer.
Parcel 34 258 of 1243
1. Basis-of-Design Product: European Standards.

2. Mirror Size: size, height as indicated on drawings
3. Galvanized steel back shall have integral horizontal hanging brackets for
mounting on concealed wall hangers and secured with concealed vandal-
proof screws in lower frame.
4. Frameless mirrors shall have manufacturer's standard accessories as
required for proper fixation.
2.2 WARM-AIR DRYERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:
1. Hanimex.
B. Warm-Air Dryer:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Hanimex 067101102.
3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.
4. Cover Material and Finish: Chrome.
5. Electrical Requirements:
• Voltage: 220V/50Hz,6A OR 110V/60Hz,12A

• Air Temperature: 42℃ (D=10CM,Room Temp.=25℃)
• Rated Power: 2300W
• Air Velocity: 30M/S
• Air Flow: 270M3/H
• Drying Time: 15-20S
• Sensor Range: 5-15CM
• Protection Level: IPX1
• Electric Isolation: CLASS 1
• Finish: Bright
• Brush Motor: 6500R/M
• Noise(at 1M): 70dB
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of four <4> keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using
fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
Parcel 34 259 of 1243
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at
heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust toilet and bath accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms
function smoothly.
B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing the protective coatings.
Parcel 34 260 of 1243

SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Panel stainless steel signs.
2. Plexiglass signage.
3. Metal & Plexiglass signage.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in
permanent construction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be
provided by others, and accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed
component, and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic
symbols.
D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a
sign schedule.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For signs indicated in "Performance Requirements"
Article.
1. Include structural analysis calculations for signs indicated to comply with

design loads; signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

Parcel 34 261 of 1243
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.

A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in
permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before
fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, registered in the
State of Florida, to design sign structure and anchorage of all sign type(s) to
withstand design loads as indicated on Drawings.
B. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from
ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SIGNS
A. Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform
faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Solid-Sheet Sign, Returns, and Back: Metal sheet with finish specified in
"Surface Finish and Applied Graphics" Subparagraph below and as follows:
a. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign.
b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied vinyl film.
2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a. Edge Condition: Square cut.
b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.
B. Stainless Steel: Sheet as recommended by stainless steel producer or finisher for

type of use and finish indicated and with not less than strength and durability
properties specified in ASTM, A484 and A276, type 302 or type 304.
1. Thick.: as indicated on drawings
Parcel 34 262 of 1243
C. Plexiglass sign: Sheet as recommended producer type of use and finish indicated
Thick. 10mm if not otherwise indicated on drawings
D. Adhesives: Silicone adhesive as recommended by producers for permanent
adherence to indicated interior surfaces.
E. Anchors and Inserts: stainless steel anchors and inserts as required for corrosion
resistance. Furnish inserts, as required, for concrete, masonry or gypsum board
installation surfaces.
F. Finish: Brushed stainless steel.
G. Graphs Painting Color: Light reflected paint as noted on drawingsFinish: Brushed
stainless steel.
A. Graphs Painting Color: Light reflected paint as noted on drawingsPaints and
Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by
manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant
for colors and exposure indicated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage
of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to
requirements indicated.
1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and
handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply
markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.
2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather
to resist water penetration and retention.
3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide
welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring
exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and
dress exposed and contact surfaces.
4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.
6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to
attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed
fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
Parcel 34 263 of 1243

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not

acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if
they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and
perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of signage work.
B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs
without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces
C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to
B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations

according to accessibility standard.
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply
with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes
or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar
minor repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to
manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in
finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from
damage until acceptance by Owner.
Parcel 34 264 of 1243

SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTEMENTS
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, material, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation Cubicles
partitions of HPL, high plastic laminated finish and solid phenolic core material
with floor mounting. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for completion of
work in this section as shown in the approved shop drawings and specified
herein. Door hardware for the cubicle doors shall be integral with the system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For type of cubicle specified. Include details of construction

relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors,
hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of cubicles. Include plans,
elevations, section, details, and attachments to other works.
C. Samples of color and finish required, prepared on 150-mm square samples of
same thickness and material indicated for work.

A. Field Measurement: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by the field
measurements before fabrication and indicates measurements on shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the work.
B. Co-ordination: Finish inserts and anchorage, which must be built into other
work for installation of cubicles and related items. Co-ordinate delivery with
other work to avoid delay.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written Warranty signed by Manufacturer and
Contractor agreement to repair or replace components of toilet compartments
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Faulty operation of locks or hardware.
2. Deterioration of finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
B. Warranty Period: Against delamination for 5 Years. The factory authorized
fabricator, product installer and phenolic manufacturer must sign the warranty
Parcel 34 265 of 1243
and submit a copy to the General Contractor. The project name must be on
the warranty.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Product Reference

A. Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the
purposes of establishing minimum quality standards. Products, which are,
equal to or better than those specified and which conform to the Engineer’s
design requirements and colour selections, may be acceptable subject to
Engineer’s approval.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Material – Doors, panels, pilasters and urinal screens shall be fabricated from
phenolic material comprised of multiple layers of melamine resin impregnated
kraft paper, and a decorative surface sheet on both faces. All layers shall be
fused together under high temperature and pressure.
B. All components shall be water‐resistant. Rough edges shall be machine
sanded with a 45 degree radius edge and black finish
C. Stile Shoes and Caps: Shall be 20 gage ASTM A-167, Type 304 stainless
steel, not, Number 4 Satin (brushed) finish.
D. Panel performance requirements:
1. Compressive strength: 24,000 psi minimum.
2. Weight: 93 lbs. per cubic foot maximum.
3. Flame spread (ASTM E-84): Class 1A (25).
4. Non-porous surface and edges.
5. Will not support micro-organic growth.
E. Hardware.
1. Hinges: Supply minimum two heavy duty cast stainless steel hinges
Type 304 with Number 4 finish for Solid Surface.
2. Latch and Keeper: Type 304 stainless steel with Number 4 finish.
Latching device shall consist of a slide latch with combination stop
and emergency release feature.
3. Coat Hook: Type 304 stainless steel with Number 4 finish coat hook
4. Door Pull: Type 304 cast stainless steel with a Number 4 finish
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens and stiles fabricated for
compartment system. Furnish units with cut-outs and drilled holes to receive
compartment hardware as indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 730mm wide in-swing
doors for ordinary toilet compartments and minimum 1100mm wide (clear
opening) out-swing doors for compartments that meet the requirements of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
Parcel 34 266 of 1243

F. Toilet Cubicles
1. Design: Moisture resistant solid phenolic core high plastic
laminate finish panels in conjunction with vertical and
horizontal stainless steel profiles.
1. Front posts, doors & dividing panels and urinal screens:
a. Solid grade phenolic core laminate panels, 13-mm thick,
absolutely moisture resistant, rot-proof, scratch and
impact resistant.
b. Overall height: width, depth and door opening shall be
according to drawings and door panel under clearance to
be (+/- 10 mm).
c. Anti-noise buffer lining on post.
d. Door should be flush integrated with post.
e. Divider panel: size as per drawing.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Install
units’ rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 5
mm between pilasters and panels and not more than 5 mm between panels
and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer’s recommended
stainless steel anchoring devices.
B. Floor Anchored Compartments: Set Pilaster units with anchors penetrating not
less than 50 mm into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in
manufacturer’s written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten of pilasters when
doors are in closed position

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to
manufacturer’s written instructions for proper operation. Swinging doors
should be closed position when unlatched.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet cubicles are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
C. Clean and Protect: Clean exposed surfaces of compartment systems using
materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection
as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period
END OF SECTION
Parcel 34 267 of 1243

SECTION 102213 - WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Standard-duty wire mesh partitions.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes,
general Construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage
methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific
requirements.
1. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to
2. Permanent construction. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) panel constructed of
specified frame members and wire mesh. Show method of finishing members at
intersections.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wire mesh partitions indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Welding certificates.
Parcel 34 268 of 1243

A. Maintenance Data: For wire mesh partition hardware to include in

maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by

manufacturer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the

following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and
doors and with posts wrapped, palleted, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic.
1. Tag each item or package separately with identification, and include basic
installation instructions with each item or package.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire

mesh units by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Structural Performance: Wire mesh units shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Woven Screen Wire: ASTM A580M Type 304 stainless steel wire;
conforming to the following:
1. Fill Wire Size: 3.5 mm.
2. Mesh Size: 125 x 125 mm.
3. Mesh Weave Design: Plain weave
A. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Stainless steel Pipe& tubing: Refer to Section 055000 Metals
C. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
Parcel 34 269 of 1243

I. Post-Installed Anchors: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6

times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load
imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM
E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
J. Hinge Doors: Constructed of the same materials as panels, with 1-1/4 inch
by 1/8 inch flat steel bar cover on sides. Complete with all necessary mounting
and locking hardware to install and operate.
1. Hinges: Three butt hinges
2. Floor Shoes: Metal, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) high; sized to suit vertical
framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling
adjustment.
A. Accessories: As recommended from manufacturer and approved shop drawings
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections; to sizes and profiles required; with

framing members fitted, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements.
B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Project Site, ready for
installation.
C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
D. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finish surface. Ease exposed
edges to small uniform radius.
E. Make exposed joints flush and hairline.
F. Provide components required for anchorage. Fabricate anchorage and related
components of same material and finish as framing members.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly

clean items of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with
metallic phosphate process.
B. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of wire mesh units unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.
1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
C. Stainless Steel Finish: Brushed stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Parcel 34 270 of 1243

B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.
C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.
3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION
A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter postinstalled
expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor shoes located at each
post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and
plumb installation.
1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled

expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner
panel framing and as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use expansion anchors.

2. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to
steel framing or concealed reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size
and type required to support structural loads.
C. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter
"U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c.
E. Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run,
provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings.
F. Weld or bolt sheet metal bases to wire mesh partitions and doors.
G. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb or Level: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in total partition height.
B. Maximum Misalignment from True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
A. Remove and replace defective work, including framing that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
Parcel 34 271 of 1243

SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried, and automatic fire extinguishers for fire
extinguishers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with

NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers to ensure fit and function.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher indicated.
Parcel 34 272 of 1243
1. Manufacturers: As per client approved vendor list.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product by one of Emaar Approved Vendor List.
3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with

NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher
location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
B. Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated ABC cartridge type, 6-kg nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard
enameled container.
C. Carbon Dioxide Type: UL-rated [10-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] nominal capacity, with
carbon dioxide in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.
D. Automatic Dry-Chemical: UL-rated ABC type, 12-kg nominal capacity, with mono
ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled
container.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to

secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and
capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel
finish.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
comparable product by one of Emaar Approved Vendor List.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter

style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Parcel 34 273 of 1243

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at

locations indicated.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 44 16 -FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Section includes portable, hand-carried, and automatic fire extinguishers for fire
extinguishers.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Operation and maintenance data.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers to ensure fit and function.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period: one years from date of Substantial Completion.
Parcel 34 274 of 1243

PRODUCTS
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguisher indicated.
Manufacturers: As per client approved vendor list.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location,
inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated ABC cartridge type, 6-kg nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard
enameled container.
Carbon Dioxide Type: UL-rated [10-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] nominal capacity, with carbon
dioxide in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.
Automatic Dry-Chemical: UL-rated ABC type, 12-kg nominal capacity, with mono
ammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled
container.
MOUNTING BRACKETS
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire
extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
comparable product by one of Emaar Approved Vendor List.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
Parcel 34 275 of 1243

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at

locations indicated.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 12 00 - CAR PARKING AND BARRIER GATE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements, which

affect work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned
in this Section.
B. Coordinate work with that of all trades affecting, or affected by work

of this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure that steady progress
of all work under the Contract.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. General: Arm rising barriers shall be installed for the incoming and
outgoing vehicles.
B. Scope of work is to include the

following:
1. Parking Control Panel.

Parcel 34 276 of 1243
2. Arm rising Barriers.
3. Exit Verifier
4. Parking Computers.
5. Proximity Smart Card Reader
6. Guard Bush Button.
7. Car Counter.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide list of all types of equipment and devices including manufacturer's

name, part/code number and quantities.
B. Product Data: for each type of product indicated submit manufacturer’s

technical product data, including specifications and installations for each
type of equipment.
C. Shop D r a w i n g s : submit s h o p drawings showing equipment

locations. Shop drawings shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: detail wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and

for system with all terminals and interconnections identified
Parcel 34 277 of 1243

all cables, conduits…..etc.
3. Device Address List: co-ordinate with final system programming.
4. System Operation Description: detailed description for this Project,

including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit
and sequence of operations for manually and automatically
initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
D. Operating Instructions: for mounting Parking Control Panel.
E. Product Certificates: signed by manufacturers of system components

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
F. Installer Certificates: signed by manufacturer certifying that installers

comply with requirements.
G. Field Test Reports: indicate and interpret test results for

compliance with performance requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: for the system to include in maintenance

manual. I. Provide samples of various items.
J. Provide a compliance sheet item by item in a comparison between the
specified and the submitted items.
A. Installer Qualifications: an experienced installer who is an

authorized representative of the system manufacturer for both installation
and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: a firm experienced in manufacturing systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
C. Source Limitations: obtain system components through one source from

a single manufacturer.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: comply with applicable building

code, local regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. During the construction of the system, the contractor shall put in writing
all his remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested
alternations from the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment
or devices which arise from coordination between the system and other
activities.
Parcel 34 278 of 1243
B. Provide a complete as built set of drawings for approval.
Parcel 34 279 of 1243

1.06 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer for the

period of Two years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee
shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and
workmanship as directed by the Engineer.
PART-2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved manufacturers: are subject to compliance with

requirements, specifications, regulations and drawings.
B. Refer to the list of recommended manufacturers APPENDIX LC (LCVL)

Note: as per approved vendor List by EMAAR.
2.02 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. The control of system should be by a standalone parking control panel
B. Operation for free parking
1. Barrier gate arm is automatically raised and employ allowed entry

after a using his proximity card at an entry access reader.
2. After employ parking period end. Barrier gate arm is automatically

raised and employ allowed exit after a using his proximity card at an
exit access reader.
2.03 PARKING COMPUTER:
A. Parking transaction shall be registered in the computer’s memory and

a permanent record is printed on the system printer.
B. The computer shall communicate with main host computer through RS-
485 or Rj45/Cat6 interface to allow receiving up-to-the minute transaction
information from the computer.
C. Detailed daily, monthly and yearly reports should be easily generated via
interface with a PC.
Parcel 34 280 of 1243

D. Specifications.
Power Source : 220/240 VAC (50/60HZ) with ground.
Power Reserve : A built in lithium battery maintains the

clock, transaction data records, and the
program data for 72 hours during a power
failure.
Temperature : 0 OC to
40OC Relative Humidity : 10% to
90%
Clock system : Operated by a quartz oscillator and LS1
: Accuracy of ± 3 seconds per week at 25

OC ±5
OC
: Perpetual calendar shall automatically set

the day of the week from the calendar
date
2.04 PROXIMITY SMART CARD READER
A. Card readers should be at parking gate, connected to and controlled by

the PCP. They should be provided with appropriate enclosures to ensure
protection from weather conditions to allow for continuous unaffected
operations.
B. Proximity card readers should work in the range of min 15-20 cm with
reading verification and activation maximum time of 5 seconds
C. When proximity card is presented at a card reader, the encoded

information shall be compared with the stored data for authorized access.
D. The proximity card used should be the same which used for access control
system
Parcel 34 281 of 1243

2.05 ARM RISING BARRIER:
A. Operation:
1. Separate barriers shall be installed for the incoming and outgoing

vehicles.
2. Entering the barriers via remote control/Bush button and exit by

magnetic loop. At the exit, the vehicle is detected by an induction loop
situated several meters in front of the barrier.
3. Barriers shall have self-locking Technical Specifications:
B. High performance fully automatic electro-mechanical arm barriers in white

with red straps. Each module of the arm has a safety switch trim.
C. Barrier shall have self-locking 24V DC gear motor. In case of power

failure, the nonreversible motor can be unlocked with special key.
D. Motor Housing shall have door and lock in galvanized sheet with polyester
coating. E. Flashing light indicating barrier movement on the housing. It shall
have a built-in
Antenna, 433 MHZ Radio receiver & support for surface wall-mounting.
F. Modulated infrared ray photocells. Weather proof and mechanically

resistant outside container. Pair of photo cells for mounting under the arm
between the housing and column.
G. Two Channel Radio control with 433. 92 MHZ operating frequency powered
by a
12 V D.C battery.
2.06 LOOP DETECTOR:
A. Vehicle Loop Detector should be provided to provide safely and

auto-close operation.
B. Loop Detector should be coordinated with the parking entry and exit. Loop
detector slots should be 5mm wide to a depth of 35-50mm.
C. 3 turns of 1.5mm2 (Min.) cable should be inserted into slots width tall
being twisted and then fed back to the speed gate where connection is
made to the vehicle detection loop amplifier, and/or as per manufacturer
recommendations.
2.07 MANUAL CONTROL BUTTONS:
A. Manual Control Buttons: are to consist of a momentary switch within

Parcel 34 282 of 1243
enclosure equipped with a tamper switch. Each switch is to be provided with

one (1) set of normally open and normally closed contacts Mounting
screws for surface mounting are to be provided inside the enclosure or, if
exposed, shall be tamperproof requiring a special for removal.
B. Manual control Buttons

Operation:
1. Pressing the exit push-button prior to exiting a security area shall

initiate the authorized access sequence for the associated portal.
2. The switches shall be rated for a minimum of 1,000,000 activations

without malfunction.
2.08 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall supply the spare parts not less than 5 percent(5%)
of the quantity of each components:
PART-3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Connect the Parking control panel with a disconnect switch with lockable
handle or cover.
B. Connect all system equipment as per manufacturer recommendations.
3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: install wiring according to Division 16 Section.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: separate power-limited and non-power-

limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install
conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the
enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in
any enclosure associated with the system to terminal blocks. Mark each
terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections
with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks,
or plug connectors.
C. Cable Taps: use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet
boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are
made.
Parcel 34 283 of 1243

D. Color-Coding: color-code conductors differently from the normal building

power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different
color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating
circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for
visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint system junction boxes and covers
red.
Parcel 34 284 of 1243

3.03 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's

written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the
greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup,
cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: locate at main equipment rack or cabinet.

Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as

necessary
Comply with installation requirements in Division 16 Section
"Grounding."
D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits,
minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode
returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 4-ohm
maximum ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report
ground resistance.
A. Pretesting: after installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and
perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the
compliance of the system with requirements of Drawings and
Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory
performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic
recording of acceptance test results.
B. Report of Pretesting: after pretesting is complete, provide a letter

certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names
and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.
C. Final Test Notice: provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing

when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.
D. Minimum System Tests, Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit

conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and
measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit
Parcel 34 285 of 1243
resistance of each circuit on record drawings.
4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in

the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission

under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be
opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating
devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of
wiring used.
6. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved.
E. Retesting: correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely

retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the
total system meets Specifications and complies with applicable standards.
F. Report of Tests and Inspections: provide a written record of inspections,

tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the
satisfactory completion of tests.
G. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests

have been satisfactorily completed.
3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Cleaning: remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit
internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage afactory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and

schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing,
adjusting, and maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a
minimum of 8 hours' training.
2. Training Aid: use the approved final version of the operation

and maintenance manual as a training aid.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven

days' advance notice.
3.07 TRAINING:
Parcel 34 286 of 1243

A. Equipment's manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall

provide, in depth, equipment service, operation and programming on site
training to selected Employer's personnel for two weeks.
END OF SECTION 11 12 00
Parcel 34 287 of 1243

Parcel 34
SECTION 11 14 00 – TURNSTILE AUTOMATIC SPEED GATE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special
Conditions and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this
section.
B. Access control
C. BMS
D. Other documents related to this section
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Work includes providing all materials, equipment, hardware, software,
accessories, services, tests and operation and maintenance documentation
necessary to complete and make ready for operation turnstile System with
side glass doors in accordance with Drawings and Specifications..

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of
IP- System of types, ratings, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,
DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, and NFPA Standards pertaining to the
access control and alarm monitoring system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Complete, Detailed, and Original Catalogue for the
manufacturer and marked up for all of the proposed equipment.
B. Detailed Bill of material indicating the model number and quantity for all of the
proposed equipment.
C. Riser Diagram: Submit detailed riser diagram to indicate the connection
between all of the system components and the interface with all other system.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background
drawings indicating all of the proposed equipment, part numbers, cables,
raceways, Etc.
E. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement
with this specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or
Parcel 34 Specifications 288 of 1243
Parcel 34
accomplish the stated function or specification in a manner different from that

described and specified a full description of the deviation shall be provided.
1.5 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective
parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's
standard warranties for a period of not less than three year from date of initial
startup and consultant acceptance of the system and include labor and travel
time for necessary repairs at the job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Refer to the list of recommended manufacturers APPENDIX LC (LCVL)
2.2 GENERAL
A. All equipment and materials used will be standard components, regularly
manufactured and regularly utilized in the manufacturer’s system.
B. All systems and components will have been thoroughly tested and proven in
actual use.
C. All systems and components will be provided with an explicit manufacturer
warranty.
D. The speed gate is usually used in bank lobby, office building, fitness club,
school, it prevents unauthorized people to enter the restricted areas,
E. The speed gate barriers are designed to work in a normally closed mode and
retract inside the pedestal after a valid card has been presented to allow the
authorized user to pass. The fast moving close behind the authorized person
to deter tailgaters.
F. Architecture:
1. The System shall conform to the TCP/IP networking communications
protocol between the application server(s), client workstations, control
panels, and database subsystems, using 10/100Mb Ethernet connectivity
over LAN/WAN network typologies.
2. The System shall be flexible and scalable in architecture, permitting
expansion of both capacity and functionality, to be implemented
progressively as needed, through software licensing and/or software
upgrades.

Parcel 34
3. The System shall provide the ability to perform network deployed software
updates. Network deployed updates shall have the option to be deployed
manually or automatically.
4. The System shall provide a real-time display of all system status and data at
all operator workstations.
5. The shall monitor status and record activity transactions of all secured areas
and alarm input/output points; visually and audibly annunciate alarms upon
change of status, for assessment and response at all operator workstations.
6. The System shall monitor and record card access, alarm, and operator
activity to an online history/archive database for reporting.
7. Each equipment shall be able to continue access control and alarm-
monitoring operations autonomously, in the event of System hosting failure
or network segment outage through interface with access control & BMS
system.
8. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall manage and
automatically download in real-time, all database changes made at all
operator workstations, to the control panels that require notification of the
specific database changes or updates.
9. Also it shall be centralized by integrated with BMS, access, elevator and
barrier gate through one server.
G. Features
1. Slim body, beautiful design

2. Fast speed, speed can be adjustable,
3. Reliable lock and unlock system
4. Bidirectional control, by authorized card or biometric identifications, push
button and so on
5. Can be integrated with all kinds of access control systems,
6. Throughput rate : Up to 30 people / Min
7. Shall have staff supervision
8. Flow direction guide with high bright led lamp
9. Anti-punch, the barrier will not close if it detects people inside the
passageway
10. Anti-tailgating, it allows only one person to pass for an authorized card
presented.
11. Anti-panic, when power off, the barrier will open for people to go through.
12. Normal close or normal open (for group pass)
13. Close and open by remote control
14. Card reading memory function, the user can set multiple time card reading
passing or single time card reading passing
15. Failure detection and alarm functions;
Parcel 34
16. Construction
Sensor barrier height 1020
Sensor barrier length 2050
Passage width 650
Total width 1050
17. Material
Housing, base columns, guiding elements: Stainless steel (AISI 304)
Leaf elements: Transparent vandal proof polycarbonate
Finish: Satin stainless steel
18. Operation
Power-assisted motion: Two servo-positioning drives, electrically controlled
in both directions
19. Drives
20. Integrated in rotating tube
21. Security level
Automatic crawl-under prevention and child and baggage detection;
distance between floor surface and sensor is 220 mm
22. Modes
Basic open position, daytime operation:
Barrier elements close automatically if unauthorized access is detected
Basic closed position, nighttime operation:
Barrier elements open and close automatically for authorized persons
23. Electrical components
Integrated control system
Power (main) supply 110–230 V, 50/60 Hz
Standby power consumption 17 VA
Barriers can be moved freely during power failure
24. Installation
Dowelled on finished floor level: Indoor
25. Protection class
Housing, motor, sensor and locking device: IP43
H. System Redundancy & High Availability

1. The System shall provide multiple levels of communications redundancy
and failover for all hosted controllers, digital video recorders, API service
connections, and client workstations.
2. The System shall be capable of automatically re-routing communications to
alternate Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System computers across the
system without operator intervention.
I. Operator Interface:
Parcel 34
1. The System shall use a single Windows based client application interface
for system configuration, administration, management, and monitoring
operations.
2. The System shall provide a mouse-driven, Windows based, graphical user
interface.
3. The System shall provide on-line context sensitive help files to facilitate
operators in the configuration and operation of the Access Control & Alarm
Monitoring System. Standard Windows help commands for Contents,
Search, Back, and Print shall be supported.
4. The System shall implement National Language Support (NLS) in a manner
that allows simultaneous multi-lingual operation, based on individual
operator language preference.
J. Cardholder Management
The System shall provide an operator interface for enrolment, modification,
and deletion of cardholder’s personnel and access control information. Plus
it shall allow enrolment of cardholder’s personnel and access control
information in advance, without requiring assignment of access control
card(s). The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide the
ability to select multiple cardholders and badge records in applying mass
changes. The
Cardholder’s personnel and access information shall include the following
data:
• First Name.
• Middle Name 1.
• Middle Name 2.
• Last Name.
• Employee Number.
• Personnel Type
• Department (Selectable from a user defined list).
• Facility (Selectable from a user defined list of database partitioned

Parcel 34
• Trace Activity (Enable/Disable).
• Telephone.
A. CONTROLLER OPERATION:
1. Built in Access Control downloads all “local” access control parameters from
the Host PC to the access control panel, so that it may operate in a
centralized basis. This ensures rapid access processing and minimal
dependence on a single point of failure. Support for a door monitor input,
locking mechanism output, secondary alarm bypass output, and a request
to exit input is provided for each door. Optionally, on each door a second
reader may be used for door exiting. When the door is controlled by two
readers for entrance and exit, anti-pass back operation is available. As a
distributed intelligence network controller, the access control panel
allows centralized alarm monitoring, historical data collection, and zoned
anti-pass back.
2. First Entry Auto Unlock allows the door to automatically unlock during the
day based upon a time and day profile. However, this feature ensures that
the door is not unlocked until at least one “authorized” person has arrived,
following occupancy time.
3. The systme shall include card reader, controller, sensors, ….etc. (built-in_
B. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
• Memory: 64k EPROM, 128k ram.
• Buffer: 100 messages, nominal.
• Ram battery backup: on-board ni-cad, rechargeable. Maintains ram for

30 days.
• Clock/calendar: crystal controlled, real time.
• Power failure notification: standard, using internal detection logic.
• Controller battery backup – maintenance free, rechargeable.

Parcel 34
• Battery capacity: four hours of normal operation.
• Operating temperature: 0°c to 50°c
• Operating humidity: 10% to 90% RH, non-condensing.
• Power not increase than 100 Watt per each unit
2.3 PROXIMITY CARD READERS

A. PROXIMITY READER built-in:
1. Reader will be sealed in a ragged, weatherproof poly-carbonated enclosure,
providing reliable performance and a high degree of vandal resistance.
2. Interface with all existing Wigand protocol access control systems.
3. Output data in Wigand or Clock and Data format, includes a tamper switch
to provide notification of reader tampering.
4. Recognize card formats up to 137 billion unique codes.
5. Optional integrated weatherproof keypad, which provides an additional level
of security by allowing the use of a personal identification number (PIN).
B. PROXIMITY CARDS:
1. The proximity cards will be a PVC credit card size, with a punched slot for a
strap, clip, or for attachment to a key ring.
2. The presence of small metal objects such as keys or coins near the card will
not alter the code read by the reader or prevent the code form being read by
the reader.
3. The individual card will be coded from a population of at least 134 million
unique codes. Cards will be sequentially numbered. The user may specify
codes or numbers. Exact replacements for cards which may be lost,
damaged or stolen will be available upon request. Cards having the same
number will also be available upon request.
4. Cards may be used interchangeably and will be compatible with all readers
in the system, regardless of the reader’s physical size or style, and
without any code matching or memory devices in the reader.
5. The card manufacturer will guarantee the availability of additional quantities
of cards having the same facility code, for a period of at least eight years.
2.4 SOFTWARE
The system software will be compiled for faster execution speeds and will offer
all of the following features and capabilities:
Parcel 34
Input/output Capabilities: From any local PC workstation or any remotely

connected PC workstation, the system operator will have the capabilities
through the keyboard/mouse to request dynamic displays of current values or
status using a tabular or graphic format. A global database sort utility will allow
an expanded tabular display of only the points on the current graphic display.
This expanded tabular display will list point name, hardware address, dynamic
state or value, alarm status, override status, and test mode status.
A. Obtain a summary of all gates with status (under access control, access
control disabled, or access control ignored) and allow issuing commands to
the access control doors to manually force the door to one of the above
states, or provide a momentary release (act as a valid key/card access), or
return to automatic control (remove manual state).
B. Add, delete, or change points within each panel/module or application routine
while on- line.
C. Change point I/O descriptors, status, and alarm descriptors and
engineering unit descriptors while the system is on-line.
D. Add new panel/module to the system while the system is on-line
E. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays
providing dynamic, animated displays. All development, editing and display
work will be capable of being performed with the system fully on-line and
in full communications with the panels/modules.
F. To enhance system response the database will be distributed with up to
24,000 ID records residing in each door processing unit. Each distributed
control unit will support a combination of up to 64 sub LAN controllers
consisting of access control panels, alarm input units and alarm input output
units. Each access control panel will be capable of providing full access control
decision capabilities and monitoring of assigned input/output alarm points
whether on or off-line with host computer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
The Contractor will provide timely written requirements for the areas and
conditions under which the system is to be installed. The Contractor will notify
in writing if the conditions are found to be detrimental to proper completion of
the work, prior to installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The contractor will install the system, including associated control devices as
indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves the intended function.

Parcel 34
B. The contractor will coordinate with other works as necessary, to interface the
installation of the work with Architecture and other disciplines .
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in
accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values
for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torqueing requirements are
not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening
torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B.
D. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure
enclosures are permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware
and accessories for proper mounting.
E. Provide equipment earthling connections for the access control system as
required.
F. Provide link between Fire alarm detection system, BMS, and Access control, in
case of fire, the related infection area with fire shall open access doors.

Upon completion of installation and after circuitry and equipment have been
energized, the contractor will demonstrate capability and compliance of the
access control system with all specified requirements. Where required, the
contractor will correct malfunctioning units at site, and then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
retest.
3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING

Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in
procedures for starting up, testing and operating the access control system,
intruder detection system and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three paper
operator's manuals and one digital copy, providing installation and
operating instructions for the access control and intruder detection system.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
In addition to the training manuals, above, the security Contractor is required
to provide two copies, one paper and one electronic, of the
handover and commissioning documentation. This documentation will
include, but is not limited by, the following.
• O & M manuals for all products supplied.
• Trouble shooting guide.
• Log book for service, maintenance and repairs.

Parcel 34
• As built specification, schematic and drawings.
• Drawings of any special installations, i.e. not off the shelf.
• Commissioning documentation to include schedules of cables and

loop resistance measurements; schedules of power supplies with
on load current and voltage measurements; and details of all back
up batteries including capacity and voltage.
SECTION 125000 - FURNITURE
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies office furniture, including various accessories,

components, connectors, as indicated in the Systems Furniture Supplemental
Information at the end of this Section and as indicated on the Drawings. Work
includes, but not limited to:
1. Reception Chair, for Main Reception Desk (Model : Office)

2. Office Chair, for Offices in basement level (Model : Babar)
3. Office Chair, for Offices in basement level (Model : Bistro)
4. Office Desk, for Offices in basement level (Model : New Alfa)
5. Office Drawers, for Main Reception Desk & Offices in basement level
(Model : Drawers)
B. Refer to the manufacturer for information regarding removals, storages and

reinstallations requirements of existing office furniture.

Parcel 34
C. Refer to the Drawings and cut sheets for furniture layout and configurations.
D. Refer to Section 127000 “SYSTEM FURNITURE” for system furniture

requirement.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include all associated
accessory. Include installation instructions.
1.
Clearly indicate (by red cloud line) furniture components that are larger
than those specified.
B. Samples: For all exposed components and fabrics.
1.4 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Indicate compliance with specified requirements.
A. Operation and Maintenance Manual:
1. Comply with requirements of Section 017823 “Operation and

Maintenance Data”. 2. Include manufacturer’s standard operation and
maintenance data for each pro duct.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Include

coordination of the following:
1. Coordination with systems furniture.

2. Installation and final power and IT connection requirements for
furniture mounted equipment.
3. Scheduling and installation of specified products.
B. Field Measurements: Verify adequate and code complicate space by field

measurements.
1. Advise the COTR in writing of inadequate conditions and obtain written
direction prior to implementation of effected work.
1.9 WARRANTY

Parcel 34
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to

replace seating frame that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in 36-inch length.
2. Broken components, hardware and accessories.
3. Laminate delimitation or separation from substrate.
4. Separation of anchors, screws, or panels from supporting components.
5. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal wear.
B. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OFFICE FURNITURE
A. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Provide the products as indicated in the Office

Furniture Schedule at the end of this Section and as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.2 FABRICS AND FINISHES
A. General: Provide the fabrics and finishes as indicated in the Office Furniture
Schedule at the end of this Section and as indicated in the Finish Schedule
on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine floors, with furniture installer present, for compliance with

requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of systems furniture. Proceed with installation only after
1. Verify raised access flooring grommet holes, power provisions and IT

provisions are suitable for power and IT installations without need to
disassemble specified furniture.
2. Verify building finishes and systems are complete or protective
provisions are established to prevent damages to furniture
Parcel 34
installations and prevent disconnections of furniture to accommodate

other work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning: Before installing specified furniture and accessories, vacuum floor

and remove dust, dirt, and debris.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install specified furniture, miscellaneous components, hardware and

accessories according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Do not use shims.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Clean installations according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Provide temporary coverings and provisions to protect installed work until

accepted by the Engineer.
1. Remove protective coverings and provisions following written

acceptance by the Engineer.
C. Replace damaged furniture, components and accessories up to written

acceptance by the Engineer.
1. Damages include defects listed in warranty.

2. Damages also include soiled, dents, marks, scratches, paint, fabric
failures, nonoperational components, and defects as judged by the
Engineer.
D. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate to
District’s personnel to adjust, operate, fix, clean and maintain specified
furniture.
SECTION 129323 - TRASH AND LITTER RECEPTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Parcel 34
A. Section includes:
1. Provide and install trash receptors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit a complete material list for written approval prior to
performing any work. The material list shall include the manufacturer, model
number and description of all materials and equipment to be used.
B. Samples: Submit color/material samples for items prior to ordering
materials.

A. Quality Standard: Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications and with contract documents. Field verify with Owner's
Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. As per Engineer’s approved sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and with
contract documents. Field verify with Owner's Representative.

Parcel 34
SECTION 129200 - Interior Planters and Artificial Plants
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provision of plastic planter pots
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard catalog cut sheets.
B. Samples: As required for color selection only.
C. Shop Drawings: For custom applications, showing critical sizes and dimensions
for installation and integration with other work.

A. Inspect planters after delivery for signs of damage during transit.
B. Protect planters from damage during storage and handling.
C. Store planters indoors, in their original packaging.
D. Do not expose plastic plante
E.
F. rs to temperatures during storage where material will exceed 150 dig. F.
G. Do not store planter liners in stacks more than 5 units high.
H. Do not stand or walk on planter liners.

A. Contractor to provide adequate structural support for planter units.
B. Protect units from damage by adjacent work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC PLANTER

A. Construction Type I: Modular units of unibody construction, having no seams or
welded joints. Liner units shall be impervious to long term soil moisture
corrosion.1
1. High Impact Polystyrene Plastic (HIPS) - Standard color: black. For custom
applications where other colors are required, manufacturer shall paint flanges
for drop-in application or the full unit for exposed application. Fire retardant
material also available for critical applications. Material to have integral UV
inhibitors to prolong unit life.
2. Linear Low Density Polyethylene Plastic (PE) - PE normally used for very large
custom applications. Standard color: gray, other colors to be integrally
incorporated by manufacturer into liner as required. Material to have integral
UV inhibitors to prolong unit life.
Parcel 34
B. Construction Type II: Modular units consisting of welded rigid wall sections. Liner
units shall be impervious to long term soil moisture corrosion.
1. Stress-Relieved Polypropylene Plastic (PP) - Standard color: black. For
custom applications, other colors to be integrally incorporated by manufacturer
into liner. Material to have integral UV inhibitors to prolong unit life. Each unit to
be individually leak tested by manufacturer prior to delivery.
C. Finish: Smooth semi-gloss; factory finished.
D. Sizes: Modular units trimmed to size by manufacturer as required to fill specified
areas. Custom fabricated sizes if necessary
2.3 PLANTER ACCESSORIES

A. For PE Liners - factory-installed drainage fitting. 3/8" to 3"NPT female thread
available. 1 to 3 fittings per unit, evenly spaced. Welded unit ensures reliable
seal. Location of fitting on liner must be specified in advance.
B. For HIPS, PE and PP Planter Liners - field installed drainage/irrigation connection
fitting5. Thread-by-thread thermoplastic drainage adapter, 1/2", 3/4", and 1” NPT
female thread available standard, large available upon request. Contractor to
locate drainage hole, drill as necessary, and install drainage adapter.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to planter liner fabrication, the contractor shall verify as-built dimensions of
planter receptacles ensure proper size, fit and quantity required. 6
B. Unless liners have drainage fittings as in 2.3.A, drainage holes to be located and
made by contractor in the field to fit to drainage system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install planters to allow for easy removal if necessary.
B. Provide continuous basal support.
SECTION 13967 - CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART - 4 GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY

Parcel 34
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:

1. Piping and piping specialties.
2. Extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Extinguishing agent.
4. Detection and alarm devices.
5. Control and alarm panels.
6. Accessories.
7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm
system.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for
total flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling
and below the raised floor (if applicable). Provide separate zones above and
below the raised floor. If smoke is detected below the raised floor, agent
shall be discharged in the under floor zone only. If smoke is detected above
the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in zones above and below the
floor.

A. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as
appropriate for areas being protected and include safety factor. Use clean
agent indicated and in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge HFC 227ea (FM-200) within 10
seconds and maintain 7.1 percent concentration by volume at 70 deg F (21
deg C) for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.
1. HFC 227ea (FM-200) concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0
percent immediately after discharge or less than 5.8 percent throughout
holding time will not be accepted without written authorization from Owner
and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 620-psig (4278-kPa) calculated working
pressure and 360-psig (2484-kPa) initial charging pressure.
C. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound
alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing
agent on actuating single-detection device in other zone.

Parcel 34
D. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on

activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on
actuating second-detection device.
E. System Operating Sequence: As follows:
1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize
audible alarm and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning
and ventilating systems serving protected area, close doors in protected
area, and send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel,
energize audible and visual alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to
protected equipment, start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge
for 30 seconds, and discharge extinguishing agent. On agent discharge,
release preaction valve to allow water to fill sprinkler system.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe
lights inside and outside the protected area.
F. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when
activated.
G. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while
being activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge.
Release of hand pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the
time delay has expired.
H. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
I. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set
pressure.
J. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
9. Pipe hangers and supports.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Include design calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure,
drawn to scale:

Parcel 34
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of
extinguishing agent required for each hazard area.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted
items, and the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles,
detectors, and accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.
5. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a. Controls and alarms.
b. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if
mounted in space, detectors, and accessories.
c. Equipment and furnishings.
6. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
b. Method of supporting piping.
C. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 2001, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Include design calculations.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals.

A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
clean-agent extinguishing systems that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of clean-agent extinguishing systems and are based on the
specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
Parcel 34
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type
installed.
2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and
type installed.
3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in
largest hazard area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles were titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe,
tube, fitting, and joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards
listed in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," for charging pressure of system.
2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B or ASTM A 106, Grade B;
Schedule 40, or Schedule 80, seamless steel pipe.
1. Threaded Fittings:
a. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
b. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless
Class 600 is indicated.
2. Forged-Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket
pattern.
3. Grooved-End Fittings: FMG approved and NRTL listed,
ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with
dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to
AWWA C606.
Parcel 34
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions

of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm)
maximum thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys
for general-duty brazing.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being
welded.
F. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for clean-
agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536,
ductile-iron housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.04 VALVES
A. General: Brass; suitable for intended operation.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever,
capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended
flow capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent
entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing
agent when container is removed from manifold.
2.05 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS

A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-
pressure rating that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure
switch, and pressure gage.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, enamel or epoxy paint.
2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for
multiple storage containers, as indicated.
3. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets
consisting of steel straps and channels; suitable for container support,
maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.
2.06 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT

A. Clean Agent: HFC 227ea (FM-200), heptafluoropropane.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements from UL or FM-
approved supplier with trade or manufacturing branch in Egypt
2.07 DISCHARGE NOZZLES

Parcel 34
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of

type, discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.
2.08 MANIFOLD AND ORIFICE UNIONS

A. Description: NRTL-listed device with minimum 2175-psig (15-MPa) pressure
rating, to control flow and reduce pressure of IG-541 gas in piping.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for
system design requirements.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, sized for
2.09 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and
features required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing
system.
B. Power Requirements: 240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to
system components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as
needed to produce power at voltage required for accessories and alarm
devices.
C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
1. Mounting: Surface or Semirecessed.
D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.
1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable
devices assigned to the required number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.
E. Provide the following control-panel features:
1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and
operating system electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
4. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with
visual status indication on the annunciator panel.
F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans and
locations of detectors, abort, EPO, and manual stations. Include lamps to
indicate device-initiating alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control
panel, and stainless-steel or aluminum enclosure.

Parcel 34
G. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to

operate system for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include
automatic battery charger, with varying charging rate between trickle and
high depending on battery voltage that is capable of maintaining batteries
fully charged. Include manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter,
electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.
2.10 DETECTION DEVICES

A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the
following types:
1. Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having
sampling and referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
2. Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light
source and silicon photodiode receiving element.
2.11 MANUAL STATIONS

A. General Description: Surface or Semirecessed FMG approved or NRTL
listed, with clear plastic hinged cover, 240-V ac or low voltage compatible
with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and red finish. Unit can
manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains
engaged until unlocked.
C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.
D. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.
2.12 SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 120-V ac or
low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to
control panel.
1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.
2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release
circuit signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical
interlock to cause the door operator to drive the door closed.
2.13 ALARM DEVICES

A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, low voltage, and surface
mounting, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Bells: Minimum 6-inch (150-mm) diameter.
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
Parcel 34
2.14 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING

A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 16.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
hazard-area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting work performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.
B. Fittings Working Pressure: 620 psig (4278 kPa) minimum.
C. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
D. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40, steel pipe; malleable-iron
threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
E. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): Schedule 40 and welded joints.
F. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Schedule 40 and welded joints.

A. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union:
1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 2175 psig (15 MPa) minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 600 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Schedule 80 and welded joints.
B. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union:
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 1000 psig (6900 kPa) minimum.
3.04 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and
plumb and according to manufacturers' written instructions.

Parcel 34
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for

basic pipe installation and joint construction.
C. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606
dimensions. Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end
fittings with steel, keyed couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's
D. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.
E. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to
requirements listed in NFPA 2001 and in ASME B31.1.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure
relief devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.
3. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and
accessories, complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section
"Detection, Actuation, and Control Systems," as required for supervised
system application.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and
maintenance.
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm
system. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 13
Section "Fire Alarm."
3.06 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment,
and panels according to NFPA 2001.
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they
are entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning
of the horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.

A. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section
"Approval of Installations." Include the following tests and inspections to
demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.
2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and
check mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
Parcel 34
4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure

Inspection," and Appendix C, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure."
5. Perform functional pre-discharge test.
6. Perform system functional operational test including, EPO, abort, and
manual release.
7. Check remote monitoring operations.
8. Check control-panel primary power source.
9. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
B. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system
when installation is complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area
enclosure construction has been completed and openings sealed. Comply
with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval
of Installations." Include the following to demonstrate compliance with
requirements:
1. Perform functional predischarge test.
2. Perform system functional operational test.
C. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as
specified and indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat
procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated
in NETA ATS, Sections "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System
Function Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.08 CLEANING
Parcel 34
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before
assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner.
Pipe network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before
installing nozzles or discharge devices.
3.09 SYSTEM FILLING

A. Preparation:
1. Verify that piping system installation is completed and cleaned.
2. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
3. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
B. Filling Procedures:
1. Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and
pressurize to indicated charging pressure.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.
4. Adjust operating controls.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain clean-
agent extinguishing systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout
Procedures] [Demonstration and Training]."
END OF SECTION
SECTION 139670
CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART - 5 GENERAL

this Section.
3.12 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:
9. Piping and piping specialties.
Parcel 34

12. Detection and alarm devices.
13. Control and alarm panels.
14. Accessories.
15. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
16. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm
system.
3.13 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.

A. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for
total flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling
and below the raised floor (if applicable). Provide separate zones above and
below the raised floor. If smoke is detected below the raised floor, agent
shall be discharged in the under floor zone only. If smoke is detected above
the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in zones above and below the
floor.

A. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as
appropriate for areas being protected and include safety factor. Use clean
agent indicated and in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge HFC 227ea (FM-200) within 10
seconds and maintain 7.1 percent concentration by volume at 70 deg F (21
deg C) for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas.
1. HFC 227ea (FM-200) concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0
percent immediately after discharge or less than 5.8 percent throughout
holding time will not be accepted without written authorization from Owner
and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 620-psig (4278-kPa) calculated working
pressure and 360-psig (2484-kPa) initial charging pressure.
C. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound
alarm on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing
agent on actuating single-detection device in other zone.
D. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on
activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on
actuating second-detection device.
E. System Operating Sequence: As follows:

Parcel 34
1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize

audible alarm and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning
and ventilating systems serving protected area, close doors in protected
area, and send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel,
energize audible and visual alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to
protected equipment, start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge
for 30 seconds, and discharge extinguishing agent. On agent discharge,
release preaction valve to allow water to fill sprinkler system.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe
lights inside and outside the protected area.
F. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when
activated.
G. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while
being activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge.
Release of hand pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the
time delay has expired.
H. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
I. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set
pressure.
J. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
K. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping and containers shall be
capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to [ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."].
3.16 SUBMITTALS
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
9. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints.
Include design calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure,
drawn to scale:

Parcel 34
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
3. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of
extinguishing agent required for each hazard area.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted
items, and the following:
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.
5. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a. Controls and alarms.
b. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if
mounted in space, detectors, and accessories.
c. Equipment and furnishings.
6. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
b. Method of supporting piping.
C. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 2001, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Include design calculations.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals.

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
clean-agent extinguishing systems that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of clean-agent extinguishing systems and are based on the
specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
Parcel 34

labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type
installed.
2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and
type installed.
3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in
largest hazard area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
PART - 4 PRODUCTS
4.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles were titles below introduce lists, the following
products by one of the manufacturers specified.

A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe,
tube, fitting, and joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards
listed in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," for charging pressure of system.
4.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B or ASTM A 106, Grade B;
Schedule 40, or Schedule 80, seamless steel pipe.
1. Threaded Fittings:
a. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
b. Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless
Class 600 is indicated.
2. Forged-Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket
pattern.
3. Grooved-End Fittings: FMG approved and NRTL listed,
ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with
dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to
AWWA C606.
Parcel 34
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions

of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm)
maximum thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys
for general-duty brazing.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being
welded.
F. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for clean-
agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536,
ductile-iron housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.
4.04 VALVES
A. General: Brass; suitable for intended operation.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever,
capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended
flow capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent
entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing
agent when container is removed from manifold.
4.05 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS

A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-
pressure rating that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure
switch, and pressure gage.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, enamel or epoxy paint.
2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for
multiple storage containers, as indicated.
3. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets
consisting of steel straps and channels; suitable for container support,
maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.
4.06 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT

A. Clean Agent: HFC 227ea (FM-200), heptafluoropropane.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements from UL or FM-
approved supplier with trade or manufacturing branch in Egypt
4.07 DISCHARGE NOZZLES

Parcel 34
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of

type, discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.
4.08 MANIFOLD AND ORIFICE UNIONS

A. Description: NRTL-listed device with minimum 2175-psig (15-MPa) pressure
rating, to control flow and reduce pressure of IG-541 gas in piping.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, sized for
4.09 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and
features required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing
system.
B. Power Requirements: 240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to
system components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as
needed to produce power at voltage required for accessories and alarm
devices.
C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
1. Mounting: Surface or Semirecessed.
D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.
1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable
devices assigned to the required number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.
E. Provide the following control-panel features:
1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and
operating system electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
4. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with
visual status indication on the annunciator panel.
F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans and
locations of detectors, abort, EPO, and manual stations. Include lamps to
indicate device-initiating alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control
panel, and stainless-steel or aluminum enclosure.

Parcel 34
G. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to

operate system for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include
automatic battery charger, with varying charging rate between trickle and
high depending on battery voltage that is capable of maintaining batteries
fully charged. Include manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter,
electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.
4.10 DETECTION DEVICES

A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the
following types:
1. Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having
sampling and referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
2. Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light
source and silicon photodiode receiving element.
4.11 MANUAL STATIONS

A. General Description: Surface or Semirecessed FMG approved or NRTL
listed, with clear plastic hinged cover, 240-V ac or low voltage compatible
with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and red finish. Unit can
manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains
engaged until unlocked.
C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.
D. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.
4.12 SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 120-V ac or
low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to
control panel.
1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.
2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release
circuit signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical
interlock to cause the door operator to drive the door closed.
4.13 ALARM DEVICES

A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, low voltage, and surface
mounting, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Bells: Minimum 6-inch (150-mm) diameter.
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.

Parcel 34
4.14 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING

A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 16.
PART - 5 EXECUTION
5.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
hazard-area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting work performance.
corrected.

A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
B. Fittings Working Pressure: 620 psig (4278 kPa) minimum.
C. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
D. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40, steel pipe; malleable-iron
E. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): Schedule 40 and welded joints.
F. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Schedule 40 and welded joints.

A. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union:
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 2175 psig (15 MPa) minimum.
B. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union:
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 1000 psig (6900 kPa) minimum.
5.04 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and
plumb and according to manufacturers' written instructions.

Parcel 34
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for

basic pipe installation and joint construction.
C. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606
dimensions. Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end
fittings with steel, keyed couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's
D. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.
E. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to
requirements listed in NFPA 2001 and in ASME B31.1.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure
relief devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.
3. Install seismic restraints for extinguishing-agent containers and piping
systems.
4. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and
accessories, complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section
"Detection, Actuation, and Control Systems," as required for supervised
system application.
5.05 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and
maintenance.
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm
system. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 13
Section "Fire Alarm."
5.06 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment,
and panels according to NFPA 2001.
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they
are entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning
of the horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.

A. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section
"Approval of Installations." Include the following tests and inspections to
demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.
2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and
check mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
Parcel 34
3. Check electrical systems.

4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure
Inspection," and Appendix C, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure."
5. Perform functional pre-discharge test.
6. Perform system functional operational test including, EPO, abort, and
manual release.
B. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system
when installation is complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area
enclosure construction has been completed and openings sealed. Comply
with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval
of Installations." Include the following to demonstrate compliance with
requirements:
1. Perform functional predischarge test.
2. Perform system functional operational test.
C. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as
specified and indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat
procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated
in NETA ATS, Sections "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System
Function Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

Parcel 34
5.08 CLEANING
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before
assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner.
Pipe network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before
installing nozzles or discharge devices.
5.09 SYSTEM FILLING

A. Preparation:
1. Verify that piping system installation is completed and cleaned.
2. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
3. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
B. Filling Procedures:
1. Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and
pressurize to indicated charging pressure.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.
4. Adjust operating controls.
5.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain clean-
agent extinguishing systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout
Procedures] [Demonstration and Training]."
END OF SECTION
SECTION 13968
CO2 AGENT PRE-ENGINEERED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Conditions, apply to work of this section.

Parcel 34
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in the
firefighting division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this
division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
DESCRIPTION
This specification outlines the requirements for a pre-engineered fire

suppression system using CO2 as extinguishing agents and where the flexible
pneumatic, thermally sensitive tubing is used as a detection device. The
thermally sensitive tubing shall be installed as linear detection capability before
the suppression takes place by the nozzles. The pre-engineered fire
suppression system shall be used to protect enclosed hazard such as electrical
board, cabinets and compartment (enclosed) containing electrical or electron
components.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
Standards and codes that are generally applicable to the work of this section are
listed below:
NFPA12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
NFPA70 National Electrical Code
NFPA72 Protective Signaling Systems
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features,
components, ratings and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation
views of components and enclosures and details of control panels.
B. Maintenance data for systems and products to include in "Operating and

Maintenance Manual" Include the following:
C. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and

abnormal conditions.
D. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
E. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at

the site for ready access.

Parcel 34
F. Wiring diagrams detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power, signaling
and controls.
G. Qualification data for Manufacturer and Contractor as specified in clause 1.5 of

this section. Data describe capabilities and experience.
H. Design analysis and computer calculations
I. Material, equipment and fixture list
J. Parts and special tools list
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of the types and capacities

indicated with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single-source Responsibility:
Obtain pre-engineered components from a single Manufacturer with

responsibility for the entire system.
PART 2 - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
A. The pre-engineered extinguishing system is used for total flooding applications.

Total flooding protection is applicable to enclosed special hazards such as
rooms or space containing flammable liquid, electrical equipment, records, or
other combustibles where the agent may be used for extinguishment. The
hazard area must have no outside air flow present in order to successfully
achieve the extinguishing concentration within the enclosure.
B. The system shall provide a minimum agent design concentration, as defined by

NFPA 12, in all protected spaces. The system should be designed to discharge
its contents in 60 seconds or less. Final concentration inside the room shall not
Parcel 34
exceed 5% for normally occupied spaces. Concentration may vary depending on

the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ} but may never be less than the one
defined by NFPA 12.
C. The system shall be complete according to the design manual. It shall include all
system components, all detection equipment, agent storage cylinders, discharge
nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release, audible and visual alarm devices,
caution/advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other
operations necessary for a functional Fire Suppression System for use with
CO2.
D. The systems are direct or indirect "automatic" type systems that utilize flexible,
pneumatic, thermally sensitive tubing to activate the system. This tubing is
connected to the discharge valve assembly and is pressurized with nitrogen
along with the cylinder contents. When the pressure in this tubing is vented, the
valve piston moves up, the valve opens and the extinguishing agent is
discharged through a separate piping network.
There are three ways of venting the pressure in the tubing in order to actuate
the System:
a. Manual operation by use of end of line manual actuator

b. Electrical operation by use of end of line solenoid actuator
c. Automatic operation when a sufficient temperature is
reached to burst the tubing
E. The Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for
Electrical Cabinets, describes the design, installation, usage, maintenance, and
limitations for these systems.
These systems are to be designed, installed, used, and maintained explicitly as

described in the system manual identified above.
2.2 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. General Requirements
1. The pre-engineered fire suppression system materials and equipment shall

be standard products of the supplier’s latest design and suitable to perform
the Functions intended. When one or more pieces of equipment must
perform the same function(s), they shall be duplicates produced by one
manufacturer.

Parcel 34
2. The extinguishing system unit shall be designed to operate between -4°F (-

20°C) and 130°F (55°C).
B. CO2 Storage
1. Each system shall have its own cylinder of CO2.
2. Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's

guidelines.
3. Each supply shall be located out of the hazard area, as near as possible, to
reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
4. The pre-engineered fire suppression system shall suitable for applications

where the cylinder ambient storage temperature is between -4°F (-20°C)
and l30°F (55°C).
5. A complete traceability system shall be set up and the following

documents shall be accessible for all cylinder batch series:
a. Thermal control report from the cylinder supplier

including information on the h eat treatment, compliance
with heat parameters and results of the material tests.
b. Material test report including results of the material tests,
impact tests, bend tests and bursting tests.
c. Ultrasonic test results.
d. Hydraulic test report.
C. Valve
1. The valve shall be made of brass, equipped with a pressure gauge to

monitor the system pressure, with a ball valve interfacing the tubing and the
cylinder, and with a burst disc for protection against over pressure.
2. Each discharge an d filling port shall be fitted with hexagonal safety

nuts for safety purposes during transportation and intended to
prevent uncontrolled discharge of a cylinder in the event of accidental
system activation.
3. All valves shall be delivered with a safety clip preventing from

unauthorized manipulation of the ball valve when sea led.
4. A contact reed device shall be mounted on each safety clip of ball valves
when the system is armed. It shall generate an electric signal in case of
unauthorized manipulation of the sealed ball valve.
5. All valves shall be tested against leakage prior to be validated for sales. The
maximum leak rate authorized shall be 5xl0-6 mbar. L/s.
Parcel 34
6. A complete traceability system shall be set up and an inspect ion certificate

3.1 according to EN 10204:2004 shall be available on demand for all valve
bodies and give the following information:
a. Chemical Analysis
b. Tensile strength test results
c. Adjustment of regulator verification
d. External leak tightness test results
e. Internal leak tightness test results
f. Dimensional and visual inspection, Cleanliness,
Identification and marking control
7. The valve must present a digital measurement port, in order to get a signal
continually indicating the CO2 quantity inside the cylinder (for monitoring
and maintenance). The valve shall be able to generate an alarm signal
when the quantity of CO2 goes above a defined level, chosen by the end
user.
D. Mounting Brackets
1. The cylinder wall mounting brackets shall be in powder-coated steel and

must be used to mount the cylinder in vertical position.
2. Cylinders and brackets shall be arranged to allow cylinder removal.
E. Burst Disc
1. Burst disc shall be provided to protect the cylinders against overpressure.
2. A traceability system shall be set up for all burst discs, and linked to valves
where they’re mounted on.
F. Pressure Gauge
1. Each system shall have a pressure gauge on its detection line to indicate
internal sensor tubing pressure. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to
display the acceptable operating range, under and over pressure range.
2. Each system shall have a pressure switch plugged on its detection line to
provide electrical supervision of the sensor tubing pressure, where the
system requires digital monitoring. The low pressure switch shall be wired to
an alar m device to provide an audible and visual supervisory condition
signal in the event the sensor tubing pressure drops below 8 bar (+/- 0,3
bar) of working pressure.

Parcel 34
3. Pressure switch shall be easily assembled and disassembled when the

cylinder is Pressurized.
G. END OF LINE (EO L)
1. The End of Line (EOL) shall be required to pressurize the thermal activation
tubing.
2. EOL Manual Actuator shall be used w here the system shall be manually
activated and without external power require.
3. EOL Manual Actuator shall use piston technology. No diaphragm

technology (or Technologies requiring replacement of components after
actuation) shall be used.
4. EOL Manual Actuator shall be provided with a sea l or other device to

minimize the potential for accidental discharge.
5. EOL Solenoid Actuator (an electro mechanical device) shall be used w here
the system required relay signal to actuate electric ally from control panel or
other electric signal.
H. LINEAR THERMAL DETECTOR AN D ACTUAT ION TUBING
1. Linear Thermal Detector and Actuation Tubing shall be designed to meet

the following Requirement:
a. Max. Working pressure 20 bar (at 20°C)

b. Internal diameter 4 mm
c. Outside diameter 6 mm
d. Temperature range - 30°C ... + 80°C
e. Permeability: min. 10-4 mbar. l/s (100% Helium testing)
2. The sensor tubing shall be made of multiple layers for enhanced resistance
to UV and chemicals.
3. The week and year of production shall be marked on the sensor tubing.
4. The sensor tubing should be CE compliant, according to construction

products directive
5. The compatibility between most widespread chemicals and sensor tubing

shall have been tested and results shall be accessible to end-users.

Parcel 34
6. All devices and equipment shall be tested and validated by UL and FM

during the certification process of complete systems. The following tests
shall have been processed and validated:
a. One year leakage test, in accordance with FM Approvals

b. Air-Oven Aging Test in accordance with FM Approvals
and UL 2166
c. 30-Day Extreme Temperature Leakage Test, in
accordance with FM Approvals
d. Corrosion - Salt Spray, in accordance with ASTM B117,
Standard for Salt Spray Testing.
7. The Linear Thermal Detector shall be validated and considered as a mean

of detection by UL.
I. DISCHARGE NOZZLE
1. The discharge nozzle used to control the flow of and distribute the agent
into the hazard area shall be stainless steel construction.
J. PIPING REQUIREMENT
1. Piping must be stainless steel pipe.
2. Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the,

manufacturer's requirements and approved piping standards and
guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals
using accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be
adequately supported and anchored at all directional changes and before
nozzle locations. The piping shall be laid out to give maximum flow and to
avoid possible mechanical, chemical or other damage. Installation shall
follow drawings as closely as possible. System designer must be consulted
for anything other than minor deviations in pipe routing.
3. The discharge line shall be connected to the ground to avoid the

accumulation of static electricity during discharge.
K. DISCHARGE PIPE FITIINGS
1. Pipe fittings shall be compression tube fittings only made of stainless steel
316L, according to ASTM A276 and ASTM A182. They shall have a

Parcel 34
minimum working pressure of 4350 psi (300 bar). Temperature ratings of

the fittings must not be exceeded.
2.3 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The system shall be designed and installed such that it activated the discharge
valve by any one of the following:
A. MANUAL ACTUATION VIA MANUAL RELEASE VALVE
The pre-engineered Fire suppression system can be manually activated by

installing the manual release device at the end of the linear sensor tubing. The
manual release device shall depressurize the linear sensor tube and open the
valve to activate the CO2 discharge through the discharge nozzle installed within
the protected! Area . Pressure switch is activated and opens (or closes) electric
contacts to switch on/switch off electric devices.
B. ELECTRIC ACTUATION VIA ELECTRIC RELEASE DEVICE
The pre-engineered Fire suppression system can be electrically activated by

installing the solenoid actuator at the end of the linear sensor tube. The electro-
mechanical device allows actuation of the pre-engineered Fire suppression
system from control panel or other electronic sensor.
C. AUTOMATIC ACTUATION VIA TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE TUBING
The system automatically operates when the thermal temperature sensitive

tubing installed as linear detection capability bursts because of heating. Heat or
direct flame impingement during a fire situation will cause the tubing to rupture.
The tubing ruptures at the hottest point along its entire length, and then the CO2
is discharged through the piping network and nozzles to extinguish fire. Pressure
switch is activated and opens (or closes) electric contacts to switch on/switch off
electric devices.
PART 3 - DOCUMENTATION AND TESTING
3.1 - SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT
Upon completion of installation, a meeting shall be held at the site with the
contractor. Equipment supplier and owner personnel shall be present. The
Parcel 34
contractor shall familiarize owner's personnel with system components, system

functions, and recommend procedures. The contractor will provide the owner
with a complete operation and maintenance manual as well as written summary
of any functional tests conducted.
The check-out procedures is intended to represent the minimum requirement for
the extinguishing portion of the system. Additional procedures may be required
by the applicable governmental or regulatory authorities.
A. COMPARTMENT (HAZARD) AREA CHECK
A good review of the hazard area shall be made. Certain aspects about the
hazard may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall
system performance.
B. AREA CONFIGURATION
The hazard area dimensions shall be checked against those shown on the
system plan(s). If the area volume or geometry has changed, the agent
weight shall be recalculated and compared with the agent weight supplied.
The area shall also be checked for bulkheads or movable partitions, which
have been added or changed. If partitions have been added, installer shall
check to see that all areas within the compartment still receive adequate
agent distribution.
C. CONTAINERS
1. Installer must check to ensure all cylinders and brackets are securely
fastened.
2. Installer must check inside pressure of all containers. It can be measured

directly through the digital measurement port of the valve.
3. Installer must verify that cylinders of correct weight and pressure are
installed in accordance with the design drawings.
D. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Operation of auxiliary functions such as door closures, damper closures, a ir

handling shutdown, etc. shall be verified when the pressure switch is
activated.

Parcel 34
3.2 - TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational

training to each shift of the owner's personnel. Each training session shall
include manual and (optional) abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory
procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
The following shall be included in the contractor's quotation:
a. Duration of training
b. Location of training (on site if feasible)
c. Material covered and training aids available
3.3 - MAINTENANCE
The maintenance procedures and intervals are indicated in the "The installation
and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical
Cabinets", and are meant to represent the minimum requirements for CO2
systems. These procedures do not preclude those required by the applicable
governmental or regulatory authority. More frequent service intervals may be
necessary if systems are installed in more severe service applications.
A regular maintenance program must be established for the continuous

operation of all fire suppression systems. A periodic maintenance program shall
be established and followed. A maintenance log must be maintained for ready
reference. The log must include the following accumulated data:
a. Inspect ion Interval
b. Inspection procedure performed
c. Maintenance performed as a result of the inspect ion
d. Name of inspector performing the task
Any time rust or corrosion is found on a fire suppression cylinder it should be

taken out of service and replaced.
3.4 - INSTALLATION
Parcel 34
Installation procedures shall be performed in accordance with "The

Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for
Electrical Cabinets", by fire protect ion personnel - qualified and trained by
CEODEUX Extinguisher Valves Technology S .A. - in accordance with existing
regulations, rules and guidelines including requirements of the Governmental
and/or Local authority and other regulatory authorities.
3.5 - WARRANTY
System shall be warranted for parts and labour for not less than a period of one
(1) year from date of installation. The contractor shall specify the maintenance to
be performed during the warranty period to maintain warranty conditions. The
standard life time for the tube must be (5) years under the normal operating
condition and within the stated specification of the tubing.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 140120 - ELECTRICAL TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
3.3 SUMMARY
1. Electric traction Passenger elevators.

1. DIVISION 26 Section "General provisions for electrical work".
2. DIVISION 26 Sections for electrical service to elevators,
including fused disconnect switches, Low voltage cables &
wires…etc.
3.4 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on Drawings and in the Specification are

synonymous and may be used interchangeably:
1. "Elevator" and "Lift". (Gear less type motor)
B. Electric Traction Elevators: Elevators in which cars are hoisted by wire ropes
using electrically driven traction sheaves and are defined to include driving
machines; cars; hoistway doors; guide rails; guide-rail brackets; roping;
buffers; counterweights; signals; control systems; electrical wiring within
elevator system; and devices for operations, safety, security, required
performance at rated speed and capacity, and for complete elevator
installation and system , doors and car finishes , control and protection.
C. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failures; performances

below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of
materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance;
abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and
unsatisfactory conditions.
3.5 SUBMITTALS

Parcel 34
A. Product Data: For each elevator. Include capacities, sizes, performances,

operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed

warranty, stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and
exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each elevator. Show plans, elevations, sections, and
large-scale details indicating service at each landing, coordination with building
structure, and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from
specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on
building structure at points of support, and locations of equipment and signals.
Include maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes for car, hoistway doors, and signal equipment;
75 mm square samples of sheet materials; and 100 mm lengths of running
trim members.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses
of architects/engineers and owners, and other information specified or
required by the Engineer.
E. Maintenance Manuals: For each different electric traction elevator, including

operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated,
recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar
information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to
manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for the
Employer's information at project closeout as specified in Division 1.
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
G. Inspection and acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by

governing authorities for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
H. As-Built Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed

elevators, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
I. All above submittals including software programs shall be in English Language

only.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an experienced

Installer approved by the elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
Parcel 34
B. Regulatory and Safety Requirements: In addition to local governing

regulations, comply with the applicable provisions of the latest edition of the
following standards, referred to as the "Code", in order of priority:
1. EN 81 and BS EN 81, "Safety Rules for the Construction and

Installation of Lifts ".
2. ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators".
a. Seismic Zone: Comply with code requirements for seismic risk zone
2A.
3.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty signed by the elevator

manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work
within the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion.
3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 36

months' full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the
elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and
capacity. Use parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation
of original equipment. Maintenance schedules are to be established by the
Contractor and submitted for approval.
1. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback

service.
a. Response Time: A standby team shall be available at site to attend

emergency callbacks immediately.
PART 4 - PRODUCTS
4.1 PASSENGER LIFT
In accordance to: EN 81-1, EN 81-58, EN81-73, EN81-72,

EN 81-70, Egyptian code requirements

Parcel 34
Manufactures: Refer to Vendor List
Capacity: 800 KG
Class loading: Passenger (10 persons)
Lift speed: 1.6 m/s
Roping: 2:1
Machine: Machine Room Less, gearless traction
Machine Location: Inside Shaft at overhead
Supervisory Control: Microprocessor based system
Motor Control: Variable Voltage Variable Frequency

(VVVF)
Power Characteristics: 400 Volts, 3-Phase, 50 Hz
Stops: 5 Stops For Building 5,6
6 Stops For Building 7
Floors Served: For Building-5,6 (B1, G, 1, 2, 3)
For Building-7 (B1, B2, G, 1, 2, 3)
Available Shaft 7300 mm W x 2000 mm Deep
Overhead: 4000 mm
Pit Depth: 1200 mm
Shaft type Concrete
Car Size: 1150 mm W x 1600 mm deep x 2200mm

high
Entrance Size: 900 mm W x 2100 mm internal height
Door Operation: Speed Regulated by Frequency
Door Protection: Infrared, Full Screen Device with Nudging

with Buzzer
Safety Gear: Gradual

Parcel 34
Guide Rails: Planed Steel Tees
Car Design (as per ID choice): Ceiling: Decorative with direct lighting,
LED panel
Car Wall: F Asturias Satin
Cabin front wall: F Asturias Satin
Mirror :
Glass mirror
FW/PH Full width/Partial height
Full Width mirror on side C
Handrail:
Handrail is on C and D walls
HR64-Tube D38 w/ rounded ends
Skirting:
F - Asturias Satin, brushed St.St.
Door design
2L,Two-panel to left opening
F Asturias Satin
To prevent injury to people by the self-
closing doors, the cabin door is fitted with
a closing force limiter. This also reduces
the risk of damage to the door system or
objects in the door area.
Curtain of light, fix to sill (CF)
Car Door Sill Type – A Side:
N Sill without carpet profile
Car Door Sill Material:
A Extruded aluminum
Landing door
Narrow Frame
F - Asturias Satin
K, With labyrinth, without insulation
E-Expander Bolt
Landing Door Sill Type
N1 - Sill w/o carpet trim, in the well
Landing Door Sill Material
A - Extruded aluminum profile (standard
w/o surface treatment)
Operating and signal elements, stops
F Asturias Satin
LCD display
W - On Wall
ADDITIONAL FEATURES:
o CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT SLIDE GUIDES

Parcel 34
o CAR TOP INSPECTION STATION
o CAR & LANDING GONG
o ALARM BELL
o CAR EMERGENCY LIGHT
o PRE-OPENING DOORS
o DETECTOR: PHOTOELECTRIC CURTAIN
o FIRE RATED LANDING DOOR PANELS – 2 HRS. (EN81-58)
o EXTERNAL CALL CANCELLING
o MONITORING UNITS FOR SENSING RUN/STOP
o NUDGING FEATURE W/OUT BUZZER
o 2 WAY INTERCOM (CABIN-SUPERVISORY ROOM)
o EMERGENCY LANDING IN CASE OF POWER FAILURE
o CAR VENTILATION.
o AUTOMATIC CAR LIGHT TURN OFF
o AUTOMATIC CAR CALL DELETION
o 180 START/HOUR
o LOAD-WEIGHING DEVICE WITH BUZZER

Parcel 34
o PROVISION FOR CCTV
o FIREFIGHTING IN ACCORDANCE TO EN 81-72
o CONNECTION TO AUXILLIARY POWER SOURCE
o EVACUATION SWITCH AT GF – NEXT TO LANDING FRAME
o INTERCOM SYSTEM FOR CAR AND SUPERVISORY/CONTROL ROOM
o CAR DOORS ARE IPX3 PROTECTED
o 400 DAYS DEFECTS LIABILITY
o 400 DAYS FREE MAINTENANCE & CALL-BACK SERVICE
o 5 YEARS MOTOR WARRANTEE
o 2 YEARS OPERATIONAL WARRANTEE
4.2 LOOSE EQUIPMENT, SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Generally: Supply loose equipment, spare parts and accessories as required

for normal operation and routine maintenance of the systems. Supply is to
include, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Loose Equipment: Operating handles, emergency brake

release keys and the like.
2. Spare Parts: One complete set of main contacts and control
coil for each type of power contactor, solid-state PC cards,
contacts and control coils for each type of control relay, two
each of transistors, diodes, rectifiers, resistors, etc. used in
control
circuits, one complete set of indicating lamps, fuses,
capacitors, circuit-breakers, contact points, etc., air filters,
brushes, bearings and the like, as necessary for two years
operation.
Parcel 34
3. Tools and Accessories: Tools and equipment required for

routine checking, maintenance, testing and control of
installations, with appropriate portable measuring and test
instruments.
B. Identification: Parts are to be packed in sealed plastic bags with identifying

labels and factory part list numbers.
PART 5 - EXECUTION
5.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas, with the Installer present, for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of elevator work. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, and
pits, as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting
structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
5.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper
time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use established
benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the Work.
Coordinate equipment installations with the building construction to prevent
alteration to structure and cutting of holes and chases after equipment
installation has started. Ensure provision of pit screen separators between
adjacent elevators and for screening off counterweight to a height of 2.5 m
from bottom of pit for safety of maintenance personnel.
C. Assembly: Equipment is, as far as possible, to be factory assembled, wired

and tested. Site work is to be limited to installation and assembly of parts
dismantled at factory for transportation, or otherwise to work not possible at
factory.
D. Workmanship: Carry out work in a neat, workmanlike and efficient manner in

accordance with specified requirements. Installation is to be performed by
skilled personnel, specialized in elevator installation, who are in the permanent
employment of the manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized dealer.
E. Accessibility: Install equipment so that it is readily accessible for operation,

maintenance and repair.

Parcel 34
F. Builder's Work: Carry out all builder's work necessarily required in connection
with installation of elevators, including but not limited to, forming or cutting
chases, rebates, etc., grouting, supports, steelwork, scaffolding, etc. Provide
convenience power, lighting and other services required, from assigned
terminal points, to carry out construction work.
G. Elevator Shafts: Ensure that entrance shaft wall is in same vertical plane as
face of landing doors and that whole face is perfectly smooth.
H. Fixing Elevator Guide Rails: Keep rails in proper alignment using steel splice
plates of adequate strength. Verticality of rail is to be within 0.2% tolerance.
Space fixing brackets to minimize rail vibration during operation, and at not
more than 2 m centers.
I. Painting: Protect unfinished metalwork by painting, unless technically

undesirable. Painting is to include thorough cleaning of metal, application of
rust inhibiting prime coat and two finishing coats of approved enamel.
J. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating

mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure
and thereby, eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system.
K. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by

manufacturers.
L. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of

elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where
possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft.
Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.
M. Leveling Tolerance: 3 mm up or down, regardless of load and direction of

travel.
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of elevator installation and

before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform
acceptance tests as required and recommended by the "Code" and governing
regulations (local and international) and agencies.
B. Advise the Employer, Engineer, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance

of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators.
C. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry

out all tests including free-wheel tests, load and speed tests, and other tests
required by the Governing Regulations and Standards. Carry out any other
tests the Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of installation
with specified requirements. Tests are to be witnessed by the Engineer and,
Parcel 34
if required, by the authorities having jurisdiction. Free-fall test shall be part of

the Type tests conducted by an authorized body.
D. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused
by tests or damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation,
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required

for tests.
5.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's

maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for maintaining,
operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing elevators.
1. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with the

Employer's maintenance personnel present, just prior to
Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems
and devices are functioning properly.
5.5 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: Do not use elevators for construction purposes unless

otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, and cars are provided with
temporary enclosures, either within finished cars or in place of finished cars, to
protect finishes from damage.
1. Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent

employees of the elevator Installer for elevators used for
construction purposes. Include preventive maintenance,
repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts
and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of
original equipment.
2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other
procedures to protect elevators. If, despite such protection,
elevators become damaged, engage the elevator Installer to
restore damaged work so that no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the
field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire
unit, or provide new units as required.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to the

elevator manufacturer and Installer that ensure the elevators are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
Parcel 34
SECTION 16760 - IP CCTV SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. It is required to supply, install, test, commission and put into operation a
complete closed circuit television system to allow security personnel to
overview project secured areas.
B. CCTV surveillance will be provided for the project entrances and exists as per
drawings
C. Main monitoring system, NVR and screen will be inside central control room.
D. Security persons and monitoring team to be in shift for 24/7.
E. The video signal that will be provided must comply with CCIR standards
F. The system shall be a digital recording system to offer network integration
possibilities to transfer alarms or events with their associated pictures and
messages to centralized surveillance system where a multi view client is
running in the same network.
G. The basic stand-alone system shall offer multiplexed access of up to from 8 to
16 video cameras. It shall administrate digital entry contacts for event
controlled recording and allows control of external devices via output contacts.
H. Pictures shall be recorded locally on a digital recording set of hard disks.
I. Additionally this system shall offer the possibility of network interfacing,
through PC network.
J. There are two types of cameras shall be installed to monitor the movement of
the people as follows:
- IP fixed dome camera outdoor type,
- IP fixed dome camera outdoor type LPR, (in future)
- IP fixed dome camera indoor type.
- IP fixed box camera indoor type.
- IP PTZ dome outdoor type. (In future)

Parcel 34
K. IP fixed dome outdoor camera with IR motion detection shall be mounted on

the on wall of the building to monitor the entrance and exit.
L. All cameras shall be true IP camera.
M. All outdoor cameras shall be in IP-66 housing.
N. All outdoor items for cameras like JBs, power supply, etc. shall be in water
poof and dust proof housing.
O. Purchaser’s LAN network being laid by third party would be utilized to extend
the IP CCTV connectivity to central server.
P. Focal length shall be calculated by special supplier based on selected vendor
list.
Q. Storage capacity shall be calculated by special supplier based on selected
vendor list.
1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

The system shall support video signals in the CCIR/PAL standards.
A. The system shall comply with the Egypt regulations and related CCITT
Recommendations.
B. The components and the installation shall comply with the applicable
IEC recommendations and with NEC-Article 800.
1.3 SYSTEM FEATURES

The system shall have certain features but not limited to the following:
A. Definition of User Access Rights:

The system shall be accessible for registered users only (password
protection). It shall be possible to assign different access levels to each user.
Access to setup functions or picture evaluation can be assigned
independently Camera exception lists allow to block specific cameras for
review by certain users. Monitor exception lists block the access of certain
users to the composite video outputs.
B. Recording:
1. The basic system shall operate with window NT 4.0-workstation.Video
compression shall be used in JPEG format with 25 FPS.
2. The recording quality can be adjusted in different levels according to CCIR
and to achieve higher resolution JPEG during the review session.
3. The system shall offer different data formats for saving pictures and events
to different media, for manual backup to tapes, CD/DVD-writers, different
tape drives or (mapped) a hard disk. An automatic back up can be realized
by client logs into the server database.

Parcel 34
C. Recording System:
Up to 24 cameras can be recorded on same monitor in multiplex mode.
D. Permanent Recording:
Recording rate and image quality can be adjusted individually
For each video input.
E. Event Triggered Recording:

Event recording can be triggered by the switching of on/off the 24 digital
inputs or via a serial interface.
F. Camera Check:
The integrated camera check shall be available to compare picture quality
And camera position with a former stored reference picture
1. Submit as per Senior Commandos Representative requirements.

2. Submit three copies of Instruction Books, Manuals and Diagrams to
indicate the following:
a. IP Cameras, converters and NVR sets.
b. Maintenance and Supervision requirements.
G. Search Criteria
Recorded pictures can be selected using search criteria e.g. date and time or
Camera number or by selecting an event from the list.
H. Filter Function:
Recorded pictures of a camera can be filtered for time and date, event specific
data or for event types.
I. Motion Search:
The motion search function shall offer the possibility to search for movements
or activity on recorded pictures in a user definable area of the camera picture.
J. Zoom:
The digital zoom function shall allow zooming into recorded pictures to verify
details. A rectangle section within the picture to be magnified and defined will
then be adapted and displayed accordingly in the active video window.
K. Integrated Printing Functions:

The menu shall allow printing pictures either on a printer connected via a
Printer interface of the PC or on a printer installed within the network.

Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

1. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components that are
non-obsolete or available off the shelf.
2. All systems and components shall be thoroughly tested and proven in actual
use.
3. All system components shall be field proven meaning that they have been
successfully utilized for six months in a similar work
environment/application.
2.3 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
1. The Contractor shall provide equipment that operates in the environmental

conditions as described in previous sections, the systems automatically
compensate for varying climatic conditions.
2. All communication cables shall continuously operate as per

specification at ambient temperatures between -10 and +70°C and be
capable of operating under these conditions while immersed in water.
A. IP Video System Overview:
1. Transmit and Receive H.264 and MPEG-4 Video and bi-directional Audio.
2. Video and alarm management software under one single front end and
should be on open platform with support to renowned IP camera brands
(like Axis, Samsung, Pelco, DvTel, Honeywell, Panasonic, Sony etc.)
3. Support for multi user and multi user group environment in addition to user
hierarchy
4. System should allow to be used as a distributed or central architecture with
support to any number of cameras and any number of clients that may be
added in future.
5. System Guarantees Bandwidth & Frame rate control.
Parcel 34
6. Provides Activity Controlled Frame rate, which in turn reduces the

Bandwidth and the Storage requirements.
7. Provides Broadcast quality Video across IP network including Internet.
8. Provides multiple failover and network resilience.
9. Provides real time recording at 25fps with no frame loss.
10. Supports Multiple IP Video Streams.
11. Secured recording for evidence purposes and user authentication to protect
data Integrity.
12. Video Stream bit rate selectable from 32 to 4096kbps.or better
13. All IP cameras shall have SD card slot for recording in SD card when
network is down/fail
B. IP Indoor (Dome/ BOX) Camera

1. Ethernet : RJ-45 (10/100BASE-T)
2. Video Compression Format : H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC), MJPEG
3. Resolution : 1280 x 1024 (1.3 MP) for each camera at Stairs
4. Resolution : 1600 x 1200 (2 MP) for each camera in Basements
5. Max Frame rate: H.264: Max 25fps at all resolutions.
6. Video Quality Adjustment : H.264: Compression level, Target bitrate level
control
7. Bitrate Control Method : H.264: CBR or VBR / MJPEG: VBR
8. Steaming Capacity : Multiple streaming (Up to 6 profiles)
9. Audio I-O : Mic / Line in, Line out
10. Audio Compression Format : G.711 u-law, G.726 (16Kbps, 24Kbps,
32Kbps, 40Kbps)
11. Audio Communication : Bi-directional
12. Protocol : TCP/IP, UDP/IP, RTP (UDP), RTP (TCP), RTSP, NTP, HTTP,
HTTPS, SSL, DHCP, PPPoE, FTP, SMTP, ICMP, IGMP, SNMPv1/ v2c / v3
(MIB-2), ARP, DNS, DDNS, QoS, UPnP
13. Security : HTTPS (SSL) login authentication, Digest login authentication, IP
address filtering, User access log, 802.1X authentication
14. Streaming Method : Unicast / Multicast
15. Max User Access : 10 users at unicast mode
16. Memory Slot : SD / SDHC memory slot
17. ONVIF Conformance : Yes
18. Webpage Language: English, French, German, Chines, Korean, Russian,
Japanese.
19. Web Viewer : Supported OS: Windows XP / VISTA / 7, MAC OS X 10.7 or
higher, Supported Browser: Internet explorer 7.0 or higher, Firefox 9.0 or
higher, Chrome 15.0 or higher, Safari 5.1 or higher
20. Central Management Software : NET-i-viewer
Parcel 34
21. Camera Title : Off / On (Displayed up to 15 characters)

22. Day And Night : Auto (ICR) / Color / B/W / External
23. Backlight Compensation : Off / BLC / HLC / WDR
24. Wide Dynamic Range : Off / On (96dB) 3M Mode: 20fps, 2M Mode: 30fps
25. Digital Noise Reduction : SSNRIII (2D +3D noise filter) (Off /On)
26. Motion Detection : Off/On (4 Rectangular zones)
27. Privacy Masking : Off / On (1 ea 4 point polygonal + 16ea rectangular
zones)
28. Sense-up frame integration : Off / Auto (2x ~ 60x)
29. Gain Control : Off / Low / Medium / High
30. White Balance : ATW / AWC / Manual / Indoor /Outdoor
31. Electronic Shutter Speed : Auto / A.FLK / Manual (1/30 ~ 1/12,000sec)
32. Flip-Mirror : Off /On
33. IVA : Yes
34. IVA detail : Audio detection, Face detection, Scene change, Virtual line,
Enter / Exit, Appear / Disappear
35. Alarm I-O : Digital 1/1
C. IP Fixed Box Camera (Outdoor Type)
A. IP outdoor camera is a ready-to-use, complete network video

surveillance system inside a compact and stylish housing. , high-
performance technology into the realm of homes, small office and retail
businesses by offering a cost-effective solution for a broad range of
applications. Camera should improve image quality in all lighting
conditions and to identify areas for enhanced processing. The camera
examines the scene using intelligent video analytics and provides
feedback to retune the image processing. This provides better detail in
the areas that matter and better all-round performance.
B. The camera housings with IP66 are smartly styled enclosures that
enable you to use the Cameras in an outdoor environment or in areas
where the cameras need to be protected
C. Technical specifications
– Resolution: 1920X1080 ( 2 MP)

– Scan: Progressive
– Color representation: complies with ITU-R BT.709
Parcel 34
– Aspect ratio: 16:9

– Frame rate: 25 and 30 frames/s
– Sensor type 1/2.7‐inch CMOS
– Sensitivity – (3200K, reflectivity 89%, F1.4, 30IRE)
• Color 0.25 lx
• Mono 0.05 lx
– Dynamic range 76 dB Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)
– Signal-to-noise ratio > 50 dB
– Day/Night Color, Monochrome, Auto
– Shutter: Automatic Electronic Shutter (AES) Fixed shutter (1/25[30] to
1/15000), Selectable, Default shutter
– Noise reduction Intelligent Dynamic Noise Reduction with Separate
temporal and spatial adjustments
– Vari focal megapixel IR corrected lens. 1/1.8" sensor max; C-mount; 4-
pin DC-iris; MP; 12 to 50 mm; F1.6 to T360
– Lens mount CS mount (C-mount with adapter ring)
– Lens connector Standard 4-pin DC-iris connector
– Focus control Manual adjustment
– Iris control Automatic iris control
D. Network Video Recorder

1. Should be installable on a Linux/Windows PC.
2. The NVR/NAS should have no limitations on the kind of storage to be used
RAID, NAS… etc.
3. The NVR/NAS must be capable of recording 24 cameras simultaneously.
4. The NVR/NAS must be providing for a disk management system which will
automatically reap old recordings to overwrite with new ones when max disk
usage is reached.
E. Raid Storage
1. RAID-5 compliant
2. Up to ten (10) 1-inch-by-3.5-inch SATA II hot-pluggable 3.0 Gbps hard
drives at speeds of 7200 rpm
3. Loaded with 4TB usable storage (after RAID 5 implementation) with
hot- pluggable drives and minimum one spare drive. Maximum capacity up
to 28TB using seven 4TB drives.
4. Upgradable for dual host support providing direct connectivity to drives 0
through 7 and a separate connectivity to drives 7 to 14
5. LED indications for systems status, power, split mode, activity, drive
indicator per drive, fan fault, SAS ports etc.
6. Configured with RAID 5 support for RAID levels 0,1,5,510,50 Operating
temperature up to 35 degree Celsius
F. UPS (ONLINE) WITH BATTERY BACKUP FOR 30 MINUTES (if needed)

Parcel 34
1. UPS rating as per mentioned at Riser diagrams

2. Application: Power supply requirement for IP CCTV
3. Technology: IGBT, on line double conversion
4. Input:
• Nominal AC Input Voltage: 1 Phase 230V AC + Neutral + Earth, 50Hz
• Line low/ High transfer: + 15%
• Frequency range: + 5%
• Power factor: >0.9
5. Output
• Voltage: 220VAC/ 230VAC/ 240VAC
• Voltage Regulation: + 1%
• Frequency: 50 Hz+/- 0.1%
• Output waveform: Pure sine wave
• Harmonic distortion: < 2% (linear load) / 5 % nonlinear load
• Power factor: 0.7 to unity
• Crest factor: 3:1
• Inverter overload capacity: 110% 15 min./ 125% 10 min.
150% 1 min. / > 150% 1 sec.
• Efficiency (AC – DC): 90%
• Bypass: Static bypass e. Transfer time
• Line to battery mode: 0 ms
• Battery to line mode: 0 ms
• Line to bypass mode: <5ms synchronized with mains
• Bypass to line mode : <5ms synchronized with mains
6. Battery
• Battery type: SMF
• Communication interface
• Standard: RS 232 port for software interface

Parcel 34
• Optional: SNMP
7. Display
• Standard: 2 line x 20 characters, Backlight LCD
• AC input voltage, AC input frequency, Battery voltage,
AC output voltage, AC Output frequency, AC output load %, Temperature
• UPS status (Mains fail, Individual phase fail, Battery low DC high,
Overload with shut down time, Output low, Output high, over temperature,
UPS bypass)
8. General
• Operating temperature: 0 to 45 Deg C
• Humidity: Up to 95% RH, no condensing
• Noise level: < 60 dB @ 1 meter
• Indication: Mains ON, Inverter ON/ OFF/ Faulty, Battery level,
Static bypass On, Load level, over temperature
• Audible alarm: Mains failure alarm/ Low battery alarm/ Overload and load
on by pass/ DC high/ Inverter fault
• Protection: Advanced electronic protection for device safety backed with

MCB‟s
• Parallel redundant option: Unitary/ Parallel redundant/ redundant hot

standby.
G. Monitors (LED)
A. Some of this monitor will be fixed in CCTV console & and other ones at wall
as shown in Drawings.
B. The flat panel 32” LED monitor shall have performance-enhancing features
such as Picture-in- picture, menu controls to adjust video features, and
automatic detection of a PAL or an NTSC signal.
C. The flat panel LED monitor shall provide a front panel that allows the user to
adjust image quality, brightness, size, position, and geometry for optimal
viewing.
H. CAT – 6 Cable:

Parcel 34
1. 23 AWG Annealed bare solid copper, CAT-6 UTP Cable, Channel

optimized to 350 MHz
2. Meets EIA/TIA 568-B.2-1 Category 6 specifications, Passed UL 444 test
and meets CM and CMR ratings
3. Worst Case Cable Skew: 45 nsec/100 meters
4. Characteristic Impendence : 100(+/- 3 ) Ohms 500MHz , Tested till 700
Mhz
5. Conductor Annealed copper wire Diameter 0.52 mm (nominal)
6. Insulation High Density polyethylene, Diameter 0.94 mm (nominal)
7. Support for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet IEEE
802.3/5/12,Voice,ISDN, ATM 155 & 622 Mbps and Broadband
8. DC Resistance Max: 6.6 Ohms/100m
9. UL Listed and Third Party verified by ETL to “ANSI/TIA/ EIA-568-B-
2.1”Specifications
10. Zero Bit Error verified by ETL
11. Sheath Fire retardant PVC Compound (FRPVC) Flame Rating: 60 deg. C
as per UL 1685 CM
12. PAIRS Color code: Blue / White-Blue, Orange / White-Orange Green /
White- Green, Brown / White – Brown
13. Outer Sheath PVC compound Thickness Diameter 0.5 mm (nominal)
Outer diameter 6.5 mm (nominal)
14. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS at 20° C Input Impedance (0.772-100
MHz)100 + 15 Ohms 125-250 MHz) : 100 +/- 22 Ohms
15. Mutual Capacitance: 5.0nF/100m Capacitance, unbalance (Max.)
330pF/100m
16. Standard length: 305 Mtrs (1000 ft.)
I. Other equipment:
Incase equipment are mentioned in drawings without and specification. It shall
be provided by supplier for review and approved before supply stage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

Parcel 34
Examine areas and conditions under which IPCCTV System shall be

installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CCTV SYSTEM
A. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other Works of the

Contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trades.
B. The equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to its

authorized, local representative to:
1. Coordinate the selection of system equipment
2. Generate the system software programming
3. Supervise the installation of the complete IPCCTV system
4. Perform a complete functional test of the system
5. Submit a written report to the Contractor attesting the proper

operation of the completed system.
C. Install IPCCTV System as indicated, in accordance with equipment

Manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable
portions of local standards of installation.
D. Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Color

code wiring and install per Manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram
Provide extra wiring or extra power supplies required to fulfill any
requirement for extra power, determine above with Manufacturer's
representative while equipment is being installed.
A. Connection and Supervision: Make connections to rack under

Manufacturer's supervision. Run wiring to main terminal cabinet located
Parcel 34
adjacent to CCTV/DATA rack. Complete connections from to rack utilizing

Manufacturer's technicians.
B. System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and
operation only, pre- approved by authority having local jurisdiction.
C. Prior to final acceptance of system, Manufacturer of system shall, in

presence of the Contractor, Employer's representative and Engineer's
representative test each sensing or detection and alarm device.
D. Submit copy of test results in duplicate after signed by Employer's

representative to the Engineer, Employer's insurance company and local
authority. Mount copy of inspection record in enclosed frame assembly on
control panel.
E. Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving
alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be
notified of the testing to prevent unnecessary response.
3.4 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS
A. Check for all other systems that must be coordinated and interfaced as
mentioned in drawings and BOQ (if needed)
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the

following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet
(1 m) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation
connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being
controlled.
3.5 TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct training classes for the Employer personnel on
the installation, maintenance, programming, and operation of the

Parcel 34
equipment. The training shall be on site for five (5) persons for duration of 5
working days.
SECTION 21 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 6 - GENERAL
6.1 SUMMARY

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping
systems.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Sleeves.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Grout.
6. Fire-suppression demolition.
7. Concrete bases.
8. Supports and anchorages.
6.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment

rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof,
spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include

finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop
locations.

Parcel 34
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from

physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in
chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from

weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to
outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated
shelters.
6.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel.
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher

electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is
approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and
conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or
efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
PART 7 - PRODUCTS
7.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials
and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
7.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not
listed below.

Parcel 34
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free,

1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is
indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended
by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F 493.
7.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
7.4 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping

flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

Parcel 34
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
7.5 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an
ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD
that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished

chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
7.6 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, no staining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 8 - EXECUTION
8.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections

specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used
to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.

Parcel 34
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
J. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-
board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves

and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve
size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.


Parcel 34
N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop
materials. Refer to Division 7 for firestop materials.
O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

roughing-in requirements.
8.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15
Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise

indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's
"Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with
ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook, "Pipe

and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe
ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:

Parcel 34
1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,

and solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
8.3 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4

inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around
the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend
through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
7. Use [3000-psi (20.7-MPa)], 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
8.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and
equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
8.5 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support,
and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

Parcel 34
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
8.6 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces,
pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for
equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 12 00 - FIRE SUPPRESSION STAND PIPE
PART 9 - GENERAL
9.1 SUMMARY
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Hose connections.
4. Pressure gages.
1. Division 13 for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.

Parcel 34
9.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Automatic Wet-Type, Class II Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1 (DN 25) hose
stations. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable
of supplying water demand.
B. Automatic Wet-Type, Class III Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)
hose stations and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections. Has open water-supply
valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.
A. Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 100-psig (690-kPa)

minimum working pressure.
B. Delegated Design: Design fire-suppression standpipes, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Fire-suppression standpipe design shall be approved by authorities having

jurisdiction.
1. Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is as follows:
a. NPS 1 (DN 25) Hose Connections: [65 psig (450 kPa)].
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) Hose Connections: [100 psig (690 kPa)] .
2. Maximum residual pressure at required flow at each hose-connection outlet

is as follows unless otherwise indicated:
9.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-suppression standpipes. Include plans, elevations,

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For standpipe systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

Parcel 34
E. Approved Standpipe Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 14,

that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic
calculations if applicable.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Operation and maintenance data.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-

suppression standpipes and providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results
of fire-hydrant flow test.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties,

accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with NFPA 14, "Installation of
Standpipe and Hose Systems."
PART 10 - PRODUCTS
A. Above ground steel Pipe: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A 53, Type S
(seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40.

Parcel 34
10.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard-Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of

seamless steel pipe with threaded ends [ASTM A 53/A 53M].
B. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
C. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard

pattern.
D. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
E. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
F. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
G. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
H. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

include Emaar Approved Vendor List.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.

3. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions
matching steel pipe.
4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,
rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include
ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
10.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless
C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
10.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
Parcel 34
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B. Check Valves:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: As per client approved vendor list.
3. Standard: UL 312.
5. Type: Swing check.
6. Body Material: Cast iron.
7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
C. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
5. Body Material: Bronze.
6. End Connections: Threaded.
D. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:

6. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
8. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.

b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
9. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 240-V ac, prewired, two-circuit,

supervisory switch indicating device.

Parcel 34
10.5 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:

4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting
pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.
6. Material: Brass or bronze.
7. Size: NPS 1 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 25 or DN 65), as indicated.
8. Inlet: Female pipe threads.
9. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose
valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department
threads.
10. Pattern: Angle or gate.
11. Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing.
12. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 100 psig (690 kPa).
13. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
B. Nonadjustable-Valve Hose Connections:

4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve for connecting fire hose.
threads.
10.6 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

Parcel 34
B. Water-Flow Indicators:

3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated
alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and
tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
C. Valve Supervisory Switches:
3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed
contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
10.7 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: As per client approved vendor list.
B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum.
E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial

face.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
10.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with set-

screws.

Parcel 34
C. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw.
E. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with

concealed hinge and set-screw.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with concealed

hinge.
G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
10.9 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall-Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to

ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless
B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness;

round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer

surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden

forms.
E. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight,

zinc coated, plain ends.
G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.
10.10 SLEEVE SEALS
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill

Parcel 34
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of

pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating
of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
10.11 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post hardening and volume adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Non shrink, and recommended for interior and exterior

applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 11 - EXECUTION
11.1 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to water-service piping at service

entrance into building. Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 2.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories at connection to fire-suppression water-service piping. Comply with
requirements for backflow preventers in Division 2.
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
11.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate

general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval
from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect
before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of fire-

suppression standpipe piping.

Parcel 34
C. Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.
E. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department
connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
F. Install local alarm devices in piping systems.
G. Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
H. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe.
Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with
soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and
valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject
to freezing.
I. Drain dry-type standpipe system piping.
J. Pressurize and check wet-type standpipe system piping.
K. Fill wet-type standpipe system piping with water.
11.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than
system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end
connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.

Parcel 34
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

corroded or damaged.
H. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe

according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant,
and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for
steel-pipe joints.
I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe

steel-pipe grooved joints.
J. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using

qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance"
Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded
joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with

materials of both piping systems.
11.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and
trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control

sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
11.5 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage

restriction.
C. Install NPS 1 (DN 25) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device.

Parcel 34
D. Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1 (DN 65 by DN 25) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device.
E. Install wall-mounted-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe

escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply
piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire
hose. Comply with requirements for cabinets in Division 10.
11.6 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
B. Escutcheons for New Piping:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
stamped steel with set-screw.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece,
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with
set-screw.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set-
screw.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor
plate.
11.7 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through
penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Parcel 34
Comply with requirements for joint sealants in Division 7 Section "Joint

Sealants."
H. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
I. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
J. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Galvanized-

steel pipe.
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical
Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Galvanized-steel pipe.
a. Extend sleeves 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend
cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping
flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2
inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Comply with requirements
for flashing in Division 7.
3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:
a. PVC-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).

b. Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water-supply tubes and
waste pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover
openings.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Galvanized-steel

pipe.
5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).

b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide [1-inch (25-mm)]
annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when
sleeve seals are used.
6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:

K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,


Parcel 34
materials. Comply with requirements for firestop materials and installations in

Division 7.
11.8 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping

entries into building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size.
Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install
in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
11.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to

requirements in NFPA 14.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Division 16.
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C. Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not

pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
11.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping shall be of the following:

Parcel 34
1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron

END OF SECTION
SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
PART 12 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions.
12.2 SUMMARY

3. Sprinklers.
4. Excess- supply pressure.
5. Pressure gages.
1. Division 13 for standpipe piping.
12.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed

to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping

containing water and that is connected to water supply through local alarm valve.
Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers
open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections
are included if indicated.

Parcel 34
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa)

B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications shall be as per NFPA 13.

2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design shall be as per
NFPA 13.
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per NFPA 13.
4. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to
NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated:
12.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with

preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to

NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including
hydraulic calculations if applicable.
G. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
I. Field quality-control reports.

Parcel 34
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing

sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-
hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans,

calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer.


application.
D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories,

installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
A. Interruption of Existing Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than ten days in advance of proposed interruption of

service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written
permission.
12.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that

penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.

Parcel 34
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged

cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler
wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler
wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type
of sprinkler used on Project.
PART 13 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe,

tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service
locations, and pipe sizes.
A. Standard-Weight Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733 made of


pattern.

include, but are not limited to, Emaar approved vendor list.

Parcel 34


2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200
kPa).
B. Check Valves:

include, but are not limited to, the Emaar approved vendor list
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum
C. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:

include, but are not limited to, the Emaar approved vendor list.

Parcel 34
6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 220-V ac, prewired, single-circuit,

13.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval

Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
B. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available

13.6 SPECIALTY VALVES

2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig (1200 kPa)

minimum.

4. Size: Same as connected piping.
B. Alarm Valves:

3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch,
pressure gages, retarding chamber and fill-line attachment with strainer.
5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main
drain piping.
6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
C. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:

Parcel 34

4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
5. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
13.7 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:

include, but are not limited to, Emaar approved vendor list:
4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as
required to match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and
integral test valve.
6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
C. Branch Line Testers:


Parcel 34
4. Body Material: Brass.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
13.8 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, Emaar approved vendor list.
B. General Requirements:

2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Standard-Response Applications:
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated (not required for upright sprinklers)

2. Bronze.
3. Painted.
E. Special Coatings:

Parcel 34
1. Wax.
2. Lead.
3. Corrosion-resistant paint.
F. Sprinkler Guards:

3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
13.9 ALARM DEVICES
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:

3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
5. Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.
7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
8. Outlet: NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connection.
C. Water-Flow Indicators:

D. Pressure Switches:
Parcel 34

3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
E. Valve Supervisory Switches:

contacts.
13.10 PRESSURE GAGES


face.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include “AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
13.11 ESCUTCHEONS
B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: [Polished chrome-plated] finish with set-

screws.

Parcel 34
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw


hinge, set-screw.
13.12 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to



forms.


13.13 SLEEVE SEALS


Parcel 34

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
13.14 GROUT

applications.
PART 14 - EXECUTION
14.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 291.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building.

Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 2 Section "Facility Fire-
Suppression Water-Service Piping."
B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Comply with requirements for backflow
preventers in Division 2 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service
Piping".
water service.
14.3 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-distribution piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water supply.

Parcel 34

practical.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in

NFPA 13.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with

shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve.
Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.
J. Install local alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection,
and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less
than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for
draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.
M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

Parcel 34
indicated.

connections.
ASME B31.9.

ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting.
Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
I. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join light wall steel pipe and steel
pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

Article.
K. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe

steel-pipe joints.

Parcel 34
L. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe

M. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel

N. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with

jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control

valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection in the proper direction. Install
backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of

flow, in main supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in
main supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level,
alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber
attachment, and fill-line attachment.

Parcel 34
set-screw.
screw.
plate.
indicated.
Sealants."
Sealants."
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe using sleeve seals.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs Galvanized-steel

pipe


Parcel 34

for flashing in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".

openings.

pipe.

b. Cast-iron wall-pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.

L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


Parcel 34
14.10 IDENTIFICATION


3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
5. Start and run excess-pressure.
6. Coordinate with local fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
14.12 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
A. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall
be of the following:

B. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and bigger, shall
be the following:
Parcel 34
1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with grooved ends; Victaulic fittings and
joints.
14.14 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed pendent sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Pendent Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

2. Upright Sprinklers: rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view;
wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 21 00 - CARBON-DIOXIDE FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
E. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions,
apply to work of this section.
F. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in the fire fighting
division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to
this section unless specified to the contrary.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
This section covers the following:
1.2.1 - CO2 agent total flooding fire extinguishing system.
1.2.2 - CO2 agent pre-engineered fire extinguishing system.

Parcel 34
1.3 Applicable Codes and Standards
Standards and codes which are generally applicable to the work of this section are
listed below:
NFPA13 Standard of Sprinkler System Installation
1.4 Submittals
A. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features,
components, ratings and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of
components and enclosures and details of control panels.
B. Maintenance data for systems and products to include in "Operating and Maintenance
Manual" Include the following:
C. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
D. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
E. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at the
site for ready access.
F. Wiring diagrams detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power, signaling and
controls.
G. Qualification data for Manufacturer and Contractor as specified in clause 1.5 of this
section. Data describe capabilities and experience.
H. Design analysis and computer calculations
I. Material, equipment and fixture list

Parcel 34
J. Parts and special tools list
1.5 Quality assurance
A Manufacturer Qualifications
Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of the types and capacities indicated

with a record of successful in-service performance.
B Single-source Responsibility:
Obtain system components from a single Manufacturer with responsibility for the entire
system.
2.1 Design Requirments for CO2 total flooding System

A General
1. The amount of CO2 agent in the system shall be at least sufficient for protection of
the largest single hazard within single area or groups of areas that are to be
protected simultaneously with the same gas battery.
2. CO2 agent shall be discharged into the room to be protected (hazard area),
including false ceilings and raised access floors and alike, through nozzles designed
for the intended purpose. The nozzles shall be sized and located to provide the
rates of discharge and coverage needed. The size of pipe and nozzles shall be
determined on the basis of calculated flow and terminal pressure. Flow and nozzle
data shall be in accordance with established test data.
3. The Drawings indicate the extent and the general arrangement. The location of
hangers and the final routing of the piping shall be subject to acceptance. Piping
and hangers 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller may be located in the field with general
installation Drawings and system diagrams. All piping shall be shop-fabricated and
installed according to the layout Drawings.
4. All materials, equipment, and appliances provided shall comply with NFPA 12
requirements and shall bear the listing mark of UL (Underwriters Laboratories) or
FM (Factory Mutual).
Parcel 34
5. Ventilation openings to avoid excessive overpressure in rooms to be protected shall

be in accordance with NFPA 12.
B Gas Cylinders:
1. The high pressure CO2 agent storage units shall be of seamless steel and consist of
45 kg pressure cylinders of 150 bar designed to meet the requirements of the ASME
boiler and pressure vessel. Storage units will have a pilot cylinder with slave
cylinder(s) and pilot function.
2. The storage units shall be super-pressurized with dry nitrogen in accordance with
NFPA 12.
3. A gauge for determining the pressure in the cylinders shall be provided.
4. Each cylinder shall be fitted with a brass quick action valve. The pilot cylinder valve
shall be actuated electrically. The sequence cylinder(s) shall be actuated
pneumatically by the pilot line pressure.
C Cylinder Connectors:
1. Each cylinder valve shall be connected to the manifold with a synthetic rubber,
galvanized steel hose.
2. Connectors shall be the same nominal size as the cylinder discharge valve or larger
in order not to restrict flow. Each connector shall be fitted with a brass non return
valve to prevent the loss of Clean Agent if a cylinder is disconnected.
D Distribution Piping:
1. Black or galvanized steel pipe shall be either ASTM A 53 seamless or electric

welded, Grade A or B.
2. Schedule 40 pipes will permitted to be used for sizes 3/4-in. and smaller. Pipe that
is 1 in. through 4 in. shall be a minimum of Schedule 80.
3. Welded joints, screwed and flanged fittings (malleable iron or ductile iron) shall be
permitted to be used.
4. Mechanical grooved couplings and fittings shall be permitted to be used if they are
specifically listed for carbon dioxide service

Parcel 34
5. Class 300 malleable or ductile iron fittings shall be used through 2-in. internal pipe
size (IPS) and forged steel fittings in all larger sizes.
6. Flanged joints upstream of any stop valves shall be Class 600. Flanged joints
downstream of stop valves or in systems with no stop valves shall be permitted to
be Class 300.
E Discharge Nozzles:
1. Nozzles shall be of UL or FM approved.
2. Discharge orifices shall be of corrosion-resistant metal
3. The nozzle discharge pattern and size shall be designed for the area to be
protected. Size shall be determined by the geometry of the area to be protected and
based on flow calculations.
F Automatic Controls:
1. Each system shall be provided with means for manual and automatic release of CO2
agent. Automatic release shall be initiated by cross zoned electric heat and
ionization smoke detectors. A pressure alarm switch with non return valve, pressure
indicator and test connections shall be provided.
2. An A.C. powered, 220 V, control cabinet meeting the requirements of NFPA 72 shall
be provided to monitor the system, including LCD display, provide power to the
detectors, and actuate the cylinder discharge valves and if more zones the selector
valve involved. Control signals will be 24 V, D.C.
3. The control cabinet shall provide electrical component features as required by

NFPA 12 Standards. The control panel shall include a trouble buzzer.
4. Battery back up shall consist of an automatic battery charger and dry cell units,
providing emergency power for the detection and activating the extinguishing
systems for a period of 24 hours.
5. Each system shall have cross wired detection circuits. A pre-alarm shall be
announced on the control panel display, when one (1) circuit is activated. The alarm
shall activate a visual and audible alarm to alarm personnel to leave or do not enter
the room. Two (2) circuits activated will release CO2 agent and a fire alarm will be
announced on the control panel display.
G Accessories

Parcel 34
1. Discharge Delay Timer:
Each system shall include an adjustable timing device to delay discharge after
initiation of the automatic actuation sequence. The timer shall not delay discharge
after a manual actuation.
3. Discharge Abort Switch:
A discharge abort switch shall be provided on the control panel.
4. Additional Contacts:
The alarm system of CO2 or any building control system should be able to perform
the following functions without delay:
i. Shut down heating and air-conditioning system.

ii. Shut down ventilation fan motors.
iii. Turn on emergency lighting system.
iv. Close dampers and louvers in the area affected.
5. Warning and Instruction Signs:
i. Provide flash light at each entrance of protected room, wired back to the control
panel.
ii. At each entrance and inside of rooms to be protected, instruction signs to be

provided. Instruction signs may show the following:
iii. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation in the event of fire alarm.
iv. Leave room immediately.
v. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation activated. Do not enter the room.
2.2 Design Requirments for CO2 pre engineered System
G. The pre-engineered extinguishing system is used for total flooding applications. Total
flooding protection is applicable to enclosed special hazards such as rooms or space
containing flammable liquid, electrical equipment, records, or other combustibles where
the agent may be used for extinguishment. The hazard area must have no outside air

Parcel 34
flow present in order to successfully achieve the extinguishing concentration within the
enclosure.
H. The system shall provide a minimum agent design concentration, as defined by NFPA
12, in all protected spaces. The system should be designed to discharge its contents in
60 seconds or less. Final concentration inside the room shall not exceed 5% for
normally occupied spaces. Concentration may vary depending on the Authorities
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ} but may never be less than the one defined by NFPA 12.
I. The system shall be complete according to the design manual. It shall include all
caution/advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other operations
necessary for a functional Fire Suppression System for use with CO2.
J. The systems are direct or indirect "automatic" type systems that utilize flexible,
pneumatic, thermally sensitive tubing to activate the system. This tubing is connected to
the discharge valve assembly and is pressurized with nitrogen along with the cylinder
contents. When the pressure in this tubing is vented, the valve piston moves up, the
valve opens and the extinguishing agent is discharged through a separate piping
network.
There are three ways of venting the pressure in the tubing in order to actuate the
System:
d. Manual operation by use of end of line manual actuator

e. Electrical operation by use of end of line solenoid actuator
f. Automatic operation when a sufficient temperature is reached to
burst the tubing
K. The Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical
Cabinets, describes the design, installation, usage, maintenance, and limitations for
these systems.

2.2.1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
L. General Requirements
3. The pre-engineered fire suppression system materials and equipment shall be

standard products of the supplier’s latest design and suitable to perform the
Functions intended. When one or more pieces of equipment must perform the
same function(s), they shall be duplicates produced by one manufacturer.
Parcel 34
4. The extinguishing system unit shall be designed to operate between -4°F (-20°C)
and 130°F (55°C).
M. CO2 Storage
7. Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
8. Each supply shall be located out of the hazard area, as near as possible, to reduce
the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
9. The pre-engineered fire suppression system shall suitable for applications where
the cylinder ambient storage temperature is between -4°F (-20°C) and l30°F
(55°C).
10. A complete traceability system shall be set up and the following documents
shall be accessible for all cylinder batch series:
e. Thermal control report from the cylinder supplier including

information on the h eat treatment, compliance with heat
parameters and results of the material tests.
f. Material test report including results of the material tests,
g. Ultrasonic test results.
h. Hydraulic test report.
N. Valve
8. The valve shall be made of brass, equipped with a pressure gauge to monitor the
system pressure, with a ball valve interfacing the tubing and the cylinder, and with
a burst disc for protection against over pressure.
9. Each discharge an d filling port shall be fitted with hexagonal safety nuts for
safety purposes during transportation and intended to prevent uncontrolled
discharge of a cylinder in the event of accidental system activation.
11. A contact reed device shall be mounted on each safety clip of ball valves when the
system is armed. It shall generate an electric signal in case of unauthorized
manipulation of the sealed ball valve.
13. A complete traceability system shall be set up and an inspect ion certificate 3.1
according to EN 10204:2004 shall be available on demand for all valve bodies and
give the following information:
g. Chemical Analysis
Parcel 34
h. Tensile strength test results

i. Adjustment of regulator verification
j. External leak tightness test results
k. Internal leak tightness test results
l. Dimensional and visual inspection, Cleanliness, Identification
and marking control
continually indicating the CO2 quantity inside the cylinder (for monitoring and
maintenance). The valve shall be able to generate an alarm signal when the
quantity of CO2 goes above a defined level, chosen by the end user.
O. Mounting Brackets
3. The cylinder wall mounting brackets shall be in powder-coated steel and must be
used to mount the cylinder in vertical position.
P. Burst Disc
4. A traceability system shall be set up for all burst discs, and linked to valves where
they’re mounted on.
Q. Pressure Gauge
4. Each system shall have a pressure gauge on its detection line to indicate internal
sensor tubing pressure. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to display the
acceptable operating range, under and over pressure range.
5. Each system shall have a pressure switch plugged on its detection line to provide
electrical supervision of the sensor tubing pressure, where the system requires
digital monitoring. The low pressure switch shall be wired to an alar m device to
provide an audible and visual supervisory condition signal in the event the sensor
tubing pressure drops below 8 bar (+/- 0,3 bar) of working pressure.

R. END OF LINE (EO L)
6. The End of Line (EOL) shall be required to pressurize the thermal activation tubing.
7. EOL Manual Actuator shall be used w here the system shall be manually activated
and without external power require.
8. EOL Manual Actuator shall use piston technology. No diaphragm technology (or
Technologies requiring replacement of components after actuation) shall be used.
Parcel 34
9. EOL Manual Actuator shall be provided with a sea l or other device to minimize the
potential for accidental discharge.
10. EOL Solenoid Actuator (an electro mechanical device) shall be used w here the
system required relay signal to actuate electric ally from control panel or other
electric signal.
S. LINEAR THERMAL DETECTOR AN D ACTUAT ION TUBING
8. Linear Thermal Detector and Actuation Tubing shall be designed to meet the
following Requirement:
f. Max. Working pressure 20 bar (at 20°C)

g. Internal diameter 4 mm
h. Outside diameter 6 mm
i. Temperature range - 30°C ... + 80°C
j. Permeability: min. 10-4 mbar. l/s (100% Helium testing)
9. The sensor tubing shall be made of multiple layers for enhanced resistance to UV
and chemicals.

products directive
12. The compatibility between most widespread chemicals and sensor tubing shall
have been tested and results shall be accessible to end-users.
13. All devices and equipment shall be tested and validated by UL and FM during the
certification process of complete systems. The following tests shall have been
processed and validated:
e. One year leakage test, in accordance with FM Approvals

f. Air-Oven Aging Test in accordance with FM Approvals and
UL 2166
g. 30-Day Extreme Temperature Leakage Test, in accordance
with FM Approvals
h. Corrosion - Salt Spray, in accordance with ASTM B117,
14. The Linear Thermal Detector shall be validated and considered as a mean of
detection by UL.
T. DISCHARGE NOZZLE

Parcel 34
2. The discharge nozzle used to control the flow of and distribute the agent into the
hazard area shall be stainless steel construction.
U. PIPING REQUIREMENT

manufacturer's requirements and approved piping standards and guidelines. All
distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using accepted
practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported and
anchored at all directional changes and before nozzle locations. The piping shall
be laid out to give maximum flow and to avoid possible mechanical, chemical or
other damage. Installation shall follow drawings as closely as possible. System
designer must be consulted for anything other than minor deviations in pipe
routing.
6. The discharge line shall be connected to the ground to avoid the accumulation of
static electricity during discharge.
V. DISCHARGE PIPE FITIINGS
2. Pipe fittings shall be compression tube fittings only made of stainless steel 316L,
according to ASTM A276 and ASTM A182. They shall have a minimum working
pressure of 4350 psi (300 bar). Temperature ratings of the fittings must not be
exceeded.
i. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The system shall be designed and installed such that it activated the discharge valve by
any one of the following:
W. MANUAL ACTUATION VIA MANUAL RELEASE VALVE
The pre-engineered Fire suppression system can be manually activated by installing the
manual release device at the end of the linear sensor tubing. The manual release
device shall depressurize the linear sensor tube and open the valve to activate the CO2
discharge through the discharge nozzle installed within the protected! Area . Pressure
switch is activated and opens (or closes) electric contacts to switch on/switch off electric
devices.
X. ELECTRIC ACTUATION VIA ELECTRIC RELEASE DEVICE

Parcel 34
The pre-engineered Fire suppression system can be electrically activated by installing

the solenoid actuator at the end of the linear sensor tube. The electro-mechanical
device allows actuation of the pre-engineered Fire suppression system from control
panel or other electronic sensor.
Y. AUTOMATIC ACTUATION VIA TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE TUBING
The system automatically operates when the thermal temperature sensitive tubing
installed as linear detection capability bursts because of heating. Heat or direct flame
impingement during a fire situation will cause the tubing to rupture. The tubing ruptures
at the hottest point along its entire length, and then the CO2 is discharged through the
piping network and nozzles to extinguish fire. Pressure switch is activated and opens
(or closes) electric contacts to switch on/switch off electric devices.
ii. SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT
Upon completion of installation, a meeting shall be held at the site with the contractor.
Equipment supplier and owner personnel shall be present. The contractor shall
familiarize owner's personnel with system components, system functions, and
recommend procedures. The contractor will provide the owner with a complete
operation and maintenance manual as well as written summary of any functional tests
conducted.
The check-out procedures is intended to represent the minimum requirement for the
extinguishing portion of the system. Additional procedures may be required by the
applicable governmental or regulatory authorities.
Z. COMPARTMENT (HAZARD) AREA CHECK
A good review of the hazard area shall be made. Certain aspects about the hazard
may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall system
performance.
AA. AREA CONFIGURATION
The hazard area dimensions shall be checked against those shown on the system
plan(s). If the area volume or geometry has changed, the agent weight shall be
recalculated and compared with the agent weight supplied. The area shall also be
checked for bulkheads or movable partitions, which have been added or changed. If
partitions have been added, installer shall check to see that all areas within the
compartment still receive adequate agent distribution.

Parcel 34
BB. CONTAINERS
4. Installer must check to ensure all cylinders and brackets are securely fastened.
5. Installer must check inside pressure of all containers. It can be measured directly
through the digital measurement port of the valve.
CC. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Operation of auxiliary functions such as door closures, damper closures, a ir handling

shutdown, etc. shall be verified when the pressure switch is activated.
iii. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to
each shift of the owner's personnel. Each training session shall include manual and
(optional) abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory procedures, auxiliary
functions and emergency procedures.
d. Duration of training
e. Location of training (on site if feasible)
f. Material covered and training aids available
iv. MAINTENANCE
The maintenance procedures and intervals are indicated in the "The installation and
Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical Cabinets", and are
meant to represent the minimum requirements for CO2 systems. These procedures do
not preclude those required by the applicable governmental or regulatory authority.
More frequent service intervals may be necessary if systems are installed in more
severe service applications.
A regular maintenance program must be established for the continuous operation of all
fire suppression systems. A periodic maintenance program shall be established and
Parcel 34
followed. A maintenance log must be maintained for ready reference. The log must
include the following accumulated data:
e. Inspect ion Interval
f. Inspection procedure performed
g. Maintenance performed as a result of the inspect ion
h. Name of inspector performing the task
Any time rust or corrosion is found on a fire suppression cylinder it should be taken out
of service and replaced.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
a. Installation FOR CO2 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
All installation shall be in accordance with, Manufacturer's written instructions, and

NFPA Standards.
3.1.1 Inspection and testing
After the system has been installed, adjusted and placed in proper operating condition,
it shall be field inspected and tested in accordance with NFPA 12, to meet the approval
of the Government Representative or authorized Fire Service Officer.
b. Installation FOR CO2 PRE ENGINEERED SYSTEMS
Installation procedures shall be performed in accordance with "The Installation and

Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical Cabinets", by fire
protect ion personnel - qualified and trained by CEODEUX Extinguisher Valves
Technology S .A. - in accordance with existing regulations, rules and guidelines
including requirements of the Governmental and/or Local authority and other regulatory
authorities.
i. WARRANTY

Parcel 34
System shall be warranted for parts and labour for not less than a period of one (1) year
from date of installation. The contractor shall specify the maintenance to be performed
during the warranty period to maintain warranty conditions. The standard life time for
the tube must be (5) years under the normal operating condition and within the stated
specification of the tubing.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 15 - GENERAL
15.1 SUMMARY

systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Concrete bases.
15.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.
Parcel 34

locations.

chases.

shelters.
15.3 SUBMITTALS

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher

PART 16 - PRODUCTS
listed below.
B. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended
C. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

Parcel 34
1. PVC Piping: DIN standards.

2. PP-R Piping: DIN standards.
16.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa)

minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or

300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit
system pressures.
D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working
pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa)
minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing
element.

16.5 SLEEVES

with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

Parcel 34

F. PVC Pipe: DIN standard.
G. PP-R Pipe: DIN standard
16.6 ESCUTCHEONS

16.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,

applications.
PART 17 - EXECUTION


Parcel 34

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other
design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are

unless specifically indicated otherwise.
removal.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves

seals.
diameter.

Parcel 34
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for


P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

before assembly.
D. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
1. Comply with DIN standards, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,

2. PP-R Pressure Piping: Join as per DIN standards.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to DIN standards.
E. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to DIN standards.
F. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to DIN standards.
17.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
Parcel 34
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged
valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to
connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
17.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting

heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible
locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
17.5 CONCRETE BASES

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

instructions.
reinforcement as specified in Division 3.

Parcel 34
A. Refer to Division 5 for structural steel.

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and
equipment.
17.7 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors.
equipment.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 18 - GENERAL
18.1 SUMMARY
1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.
2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
Parcel 34
3. Dial-type pressure gages.

4. Gage attachments.
18.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product certificates.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 19 - PRODUCTS
19.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

comparable product by one of the following:
As mentioned in approved vendor list.
C. Standard: ASME B40.200.
D. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm)
nominal diameter.
E. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and

scales in deg F and deg C.
F. Connector Type(s): Union joint, [adjustable angle] [rigid, back] [and] [rigid,
bottom] , with unified-inch screw threads.
G. Connector Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
H. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.
I. Window: [Plain glass] [or] [plastic] .
J. Ring: Stainless steel.
K. Element: Bimetal coil.
L. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
M. Accuracy: Plus or minus one percent of scale range.

Parcel 34
19.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

comparable product by one of the following:
3. Standard: ASME B40.200.

4. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
6. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
7. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings graduated in deg F and deg C.
8. Window: Glass or plastic .
9. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
10. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to
a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.
B. Plastic-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

comparable product by one of approved vendor list.
4. Case: Plastic; 7-inch (178-mm)nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
5. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
6. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue [ or red] organic liquid.
7. Tube Background: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings graduated in deg F and deg C.
8. Window: Glass or plastic.
9. Stem: Aluminum, brass, or stainless steel and of length to suit installation.
a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
10. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

Parcel 34
11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to
a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.
19.3 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


comparable product by one of approved vendor list.

4. Case: Sealed type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch (114-
mm)nominal diameter.
5. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
6. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15),
ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type
is indicated.
7. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to
pointer.
8. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in psi and kPa.
9. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
10. Window: Glass or plastic.
11. Ring: Stainless steel.
12. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
19.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15),
ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston porous-metal-type surge-dampening
device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or
DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
PART 20 - EXECUTION
20.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located
on pipe at the most readable position.

Parcel 34
B. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.
C. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
D. Install thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.
3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.
4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.
E. Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Building water service entrance into building.

2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.
3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.
F. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service
and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
G. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
20.2 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of
the following:
1. Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.

2. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall
be one of the following:

C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall

D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall

E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

Parcel 34
20.3 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115
deg C.
B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F and 0 to 150
deg C.
C. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F and minus 20 to
plus 70 deg C.
20.4 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be one of
the following:
1. Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

2. Sealed, direct-mounted, plastic case.
B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall

C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall

20.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.
B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi and 0 to 1400 kPa.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

Parcel 34
PART 21 - GENERAL
21.1 SUMMARY
1. Brass ball valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.
3. Bronze swing check valves.
4. Bronze gate valves.
21.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
A. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve
dimensions and design criteria.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
PART 22 - PRODUCTS
22.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as
required for system pressures and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the
following features:
1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive
material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without
breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
E. Valve-End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

Parcel 34
2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
22.2 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
1. Manufacturers: As per client approved vendor list
B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
C. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
22.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
C. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
22.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
22.5 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

Parcel 34
B. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:
PART 23 - EXECUTION
23.1 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to

allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly, gateandglobe valves NPS 4

(DN 100) and larger and more than 96 inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend
chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished floor.
1. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal
position with hinge pin level.
23.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put
into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent
leaking occurs.
23.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Throttling Service: Globe, ball, or butterfly valves.
3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze
or nonmetallic disc.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check
valves with lever and weight or with spring.
c. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm
Drainage: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.

Parcel 34
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same
types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except
where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends
except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules
below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends
except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules
below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
23.4 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead
of threaded ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronzedisc.
3. Ball Valves: One or Two piece, full, regular or reduced port, brass or
bronze with brass or bronze trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS or RS.
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronzedisc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to NPS 100): May be provided
with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDMseat, aluminum-
bronze disc.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metalseats.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and
spring.
5. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS or OS&Y.
6. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
23.5 SANITARY-WASTE AND STORM-DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

Parcel 34
1. Bronzeand Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead

of threaded ends.
2. Ball Valves: One or Two piece, full, regular or reduced port, brass or
bronze with brass or bronze trim.
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS or RS.
5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to NPS 100): May be provided
with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metalseats.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and
spring.
4. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRSor OS&Y..
5. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 24 - GENERAL
24.1 SUMMARY
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Metal framing systems.
3. Equipment supports.
B. See Division 5 for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe
and equipment supports.
C. See Division 22 for pipe guides and anchors.
D. See Division 22 for vibration isolation devices.
24.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe

Hangers and Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.
24.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

Parcel 34
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
C. Welding certificates.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 25 - PRODUCTS
25.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the approved vendor list.
25.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use
specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers: As per client approved vendor list.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion
for support of bearing surface of piping.
25.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of

steel channels and other components.
B. Manufacturers: As per client approved vendor list

Parcel 34
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are

indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
25.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from

structural-steel shapes.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

PART 26 - EXECUTION
26.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying

piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and
equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except

as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of

noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
Parcel 34
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450
deg F (49 to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400),
requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For
suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring
clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30
(DN 15 to DN 750).
6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to
NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and
cast-iron floor flange.
7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to
NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused
by expansion and contraction might occur.
8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe
risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required
for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150

mm) for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C)
piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment
to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with
bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom
flange of beams, channels, or angles.

Parcel 34
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom

flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of
beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending
from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated
loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at
beam is required.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior

voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does
not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load
and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and
contraction of piping system from base support.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that
are not specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications
that are not specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of

building attachments where required in concrete construction.

Parcel 34
26.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly
support piping from building structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on
field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as
specified above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated

piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool
manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed
and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement
of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to
facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and
similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.

Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges,
and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of
piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms
and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
Parcel 34
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads
and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and
so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services
piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may

project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-
hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining
insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor
barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm)
thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long
and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long
and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead

or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing
surface.
Parcel 34
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
26.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections
that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work, and with the following:
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
26.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments

and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
26.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up
field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils (0.05 mm).
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 27 - GENERAL
27.1 SUMMARY
1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings,

and specialties inside the building.
2. Specialty valves.
3. Flexible connectors.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 22 for water-service piping and water meters outside the building
from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
27.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Field quality-control reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Comply with DIN standards for plastic, potable domestic water piping and
components.
PART 28 - PRODUCTS

tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service

Parcel 34
28.2 PP-R PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PP-R Pipe & Fittings: In accordance with DIN standards
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: In accordance with DIN standards.
28.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified

piping system fitting.
B. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
1. Description: [PP-R] one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one
solvent-cement-socket[ or threaded] end.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
1. Description: [PP-R] four-part union. Include brass threaded end, solvent-

cement-joint plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
28.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-

braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa).

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or
plain-end copper tube.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
28.6 ESCUTCHEONS
B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.
C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated

finish.

Parcel 34
D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with [setscrew] [or] [spring
clips].
E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge
and setscrew.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with [concealed] [exposed-

rivet] hinge, [setscrew] [or] [spring clips].
28.7 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop unless otherwise
indicated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B,

Schedule 40, zinc-coated, with plain ends.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
28.8 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to
fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

2. Pressure Plates: [Carbon steel] or [Plastic].
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,
28.9 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

Parcel 34
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 29 - EXECUTION
29.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements
are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee
with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply
with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing
Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
C. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply

with requirements in Division 22 for pressure-reducing valves.
D. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility

company's requirements.
E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
F. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
G. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
H. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and

maintenance.
I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

Parcel 34
J. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same
as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless
K. Install piping free of sags and bends.
L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
M. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment,

machine, and specialty.
N. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing
pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for
pressure gages.
O. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in

Division 22 for thermostats.
P. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with
requirements in Division 22 for thermometers.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
C. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
1. Comply with DIN standards for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,

and solvent cements. Apply primer.
2. PP-R Piping: Join according to DIN standards.
D. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 for valve

installations.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving
plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each
water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate
valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for
piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
Parcel 34
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are
specified in Division 22.
1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and

branches.
2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where
indicated.
D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge
side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but
not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly
valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 for balancing valves.
29.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition [fittings] [or] [unions].
29.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each

domestic water pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each
domestic water booster pump.
B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
29.7 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation, and install water
meters according to utility company's requirements.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and
the following:

Parcel 34
D. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet.

Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless
prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and
outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping
on brick or concrete piers.
F. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and

of authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for pipe hanger and support products
and installation.
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis
hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller
hangers.
3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of
3/8 inch (10 mm).
D. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PP-R piping with the following maximum
horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-
inch (13-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-
inch (16-mm) rod.
4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
E. Install supports for vertical PP-R piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and

Parcel 34
29.9 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and

maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition

fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend
and connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes

indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements
in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller
than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each
connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep
pattern.
stamped steel with set screw.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece or split
plate, stamped steel with set screw.
set screw.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set
screw.
plate.

Parcel 34
indicated.
joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 for joint sealants.
Comply with requirements in Division 7 for joint sealants.
and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe.
Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Stack sleeve fittings.

in Division 7 for flashing.
a. PVC pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and
openings.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe.

Parcel 34
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm)

materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 for firestop materials and
installations.

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 for

identification materials and installation.
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been
inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day
before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in
presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before

concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.

Parcel 34
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass
tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for
reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are
not air bound and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping
uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose
work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system
materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
29.15 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in
either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does
not appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at

least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and
allow to stand for 24 hours.

Parcel 34
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at

least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand
for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water

coming from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having
jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows
contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work
progresses.
29.16 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not
indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and
from equipment.
C. PP-R valves matching piping materials may be used.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 11 19
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 30 - GENERAL
30.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Strainers.
2. Hose bibbs.
B. See Division 22 for water meters.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: as

mentioned in design drawings.
30.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Field quality-control test reports.
PART 31 - PRODUCTS
31.1 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers :
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining
complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Perforation Size:

Parcel 34
a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm .

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.062 inch (1.57
mm).
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm).
6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
31.2 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs :
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or
solder-joint inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable,
hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
12. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
PART 32 - EXECUTION
32.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic
installation requirements.
B. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve and
pump.
C. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap,
or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
D. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
E. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,

indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper

Parcel 34
operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in

Division 22.
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check

backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction
and the device's reference standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest
as specified above.
32.3 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing

valves.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal

pumps for domestic cold- and hot-water circulation:
1. Close-coupled, vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps.
B. See Division 22 Section "Packaged Booster Pumps" for booster systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified.
Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and
rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

include one of the approved vendor list.
Parcel 34
2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, VERTICALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL

PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, overhung impeller, single-stage,

close-coupled, vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps as defined in HI 1.1-
1.2 and HI 1.3; and designed for installation with pump and motor shafts
mounted vertically.
1. Pump Construction: Bronze fitted.
a. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with wear rings and threaded
companion-flange connections for pumps with DN 50 pipe
connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS DN 65 pipe
connections. Include pump manufacturer's base attachment for
mounting pump on concrete base.
b. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
c. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Stainless-steel or steel shaft, with copper-
alloy shaft sleeve.
d. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel
spring, ceramic seat, and rubber bellows and gasket. Include water
slinger on shaft between motor and seal.
e. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.
2. Shaft Coupling: Rigid type if pump is provided with coupling.

3. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and directly
mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section
"Motors."
a. Lifting and Supporting Lug: Factory mounted in top of motor

enclosure.
C. Capacities and Characteristics: As per equipment schedule in design drawings

1. Electrical Characteristics: As per equipment schedule in design drawings
A. Manufacturers:
B. Description: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid.
Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to tubing.

Parcel 34
Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends matching

pump connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by

pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D. Install in-line, sealless, or close-coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal

pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal.
E. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers, spring hangers

or spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of sufficient size Mechanical Vibration to
support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 22
Section " and Seismic Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required.
Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
F. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
H. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping
equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping."
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge

piping of close-coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps.
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve
and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size
as connected piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty
valves for domestic water piping and Division 22 Section "Plumbing
Specialties" for strainers.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral
pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage
connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and gage
connectors.

Parcel 34
I. Ground equipment according to Division 25 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
J. Connect wiring according to Division 25 Section "Conductors and Cables."
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent
piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa) .
4.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
agency.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
A. PVC Pipe: In accordance with DIN standards.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: In accordance with DIN standards.

2. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:
a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Parcel 34
PART 6 - EXECUTION
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless

C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be
of the following:
1. PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
D. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be
of the following:
E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall
F. Underground, soil and waste Piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be of the
following:
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22.
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect
to building sanitary sewers.
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each
service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking
rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals are specified in Division 22.
D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through

foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are
E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using
appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-
Parcel 34
sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is
from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings
if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change
direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers
and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of
drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system.
Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to
manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping

NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for
piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.
2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent
stack.
H. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to DIN standards.
I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22.
B. PVC Non pressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to DIN standards.
A. General-duty valves are specified in Division 22.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
1. Use gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Use gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, downstream from shutoff valve, on
each sewage pump discharge.

Parcel 34
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
hangers.
hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring
cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-
mm) minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-
inch (10-mm) rod.
inch (16-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
6.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping via inspection
chambers and gully traps.
B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

Parcel 34
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section
"[Plumbing Specialties]".
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in
sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22
Section "[Plumbing Specialties]".
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if
indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for
connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with
requirements.
B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities

1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
6.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

Parcel 34
6.9 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats
of water-based latex paint.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 13 19
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 7 - GENERAL
7.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Area Drain
4. Garage Drain
5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
6. Trench drain.
7. Gully trap
8. Slow down chamber
9. Oil interceptor
7.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of

specified testing agency.
PART 8 - PRODUCTS
8.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Plastic Floor Cleanouts:

2. Size: Same as connected branch.
3. Body: PVC.
4. Closure Plug: PVC.
5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out of same material as
drainage piping.

Parcel 34
8.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Plastic Floor Drains:

2. Standard: DIN standards.
3. Material: PVC.
4. Trap Material: [Plastic drainage piping].
8.3 Area Drain 400*400mm hand cast galvanized ductile iron grate, black color
matte finish with a decorative natural shape for the openings:
8.4 Garage Drain 400*400mm hand cast galvanized ductile iron grate.
8.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Sleeve Flashing Device :
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that

forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include
galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches (51
mm)above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of
fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
B. Stack Flashing Fittings :
1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for

terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending
vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
C. Vent Caps :
1. Description: PVC. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent

pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

Parcel 34
8.6 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains 300mm width hand cast galvanized ductile iron grate as a
drainage grill cover, black color matte finish with a decorative natural shape for
the openings:

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.
3. Material: Ductile iron.
4. Flange: As per design drawings.
5. Clamping Device: [Required].
6. Outlet: [Bottom].
7. Grate Material: [Ductile iron
8. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: As per design drawings
9. Top Loading Classification: [Extra Heavy-Duty].
10. Trap Material: [Cast iron].
8.7 SUSPENDED GULLEY TRAP
A. Plastic gully trap with opening in top recessed to accommodate light duty cover
and frame.
B. Inlet and Outlet: Difference in elevation between inlet and outlet is to be 30

mm. Outlet is to have trap and cleanout.
8.8 OIL INTERCEPTORS
A. Oil Interceptors

2. Manufacturers: According to Vendor list
[the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the
following:
As per client approved vendor list
4. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing light oil

from wastewater.
5. Body Material: Reinforced concrete.
6. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
7. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
8. Body Dimensions: .
9. Inlet and Outlet Size:
Parcel 34
10. End Connections: Flanged.

11. Cleanout: Integral or field installed on outlet.
12. Mounting: Recessed in acid-resistant, coated steel frame and cradle]
[Recessed, flush with floor.
13. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.
14. Descriptive Type or Function:
15. Oil Storage Tank: Coordinate with Division 22Section Facility Fuel-Oil
Piping.
PART 9 - EXECUTION
9.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping
joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide
cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover,
and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100)
for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100)
and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top
flush with finished floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of
types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of
drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage
area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,

but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
Parcel 34
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent

slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent
slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between

drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes
where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain,
G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that
extend through roof.
H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend
through roof.
I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches (51 mm) above
floor.
J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-
seal primer connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste

piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.
M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.
N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes
unless trap is indicated.
P. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if
required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
Q. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of
drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

Parcel 34
9.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
9.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-
inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft.
(20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or

embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10
inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at
least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or
commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7.
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or
secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
9.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,

indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in
Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

Parcel 34
9.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work
stops.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 13 29
SANITARY SEWAGE PUMPS
PART 10 - GENERAL
10.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sewage pumps and accessories for sanitary
drainage piping systems in buildings:
1. Submersible, quick-disconnect sewage pumps.
2. Sewage pump basins and pits.
B. See Division 22 for applications in storm-drainage systems.
10.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sewage pump specified. Include
certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated
capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.


Parcel 34
PART 11 - PRODUCTS
11.1 MANUFACTURERS


by one of the manufacturers specified.
11.2 SUBMERSIBLE, QUICK-DISCONNECT SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, duplex, single-stage, centrifugal,

end-suction, submersible, direct-connected sewage pumps complying with
UL 778 for submersible sewage pumps.
1. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list
2. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) that elevate
pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion
flange for piping connection.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically
and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen, nonclog design and capable
of handling solids; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to
shaft.
4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-

lubricated ballbearings and double mechanical seals.
5. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload

protection; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable
of length required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for
connection at pump.
a. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture

alarm.
b. Motor Housing Fluid: Air or oil.
6. Guide-Rail Supports: Include the following for each sewage pump:

Parcel 34
a. Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of

galvanized steel or other corrosion-resistant metal, attached to
baseplate and basin sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor,

supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other

attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and

positioning device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates

to movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at

manhole.
B. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M,

Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe.
C. Pit Cover: Cast iron or coated steel and suitable to support controls. See Part 2
"Sewage Pump Pits" Article for other requirements.
D. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with

floats, float rods, and rod buttons.
E. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with

floats, float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate
operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one
pump cannot handle load.
11.3 SEWAGE PUMP PITS
A. Description: Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and separate
cover.
B. Sump: Construct of watertight, cast-in-place, reinforced concrete with sidewall

openings for pipe connections.
1. Pipe Connections: Sleeved openings large enough for mechanical sleeve

seals for drainage piping. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are
specified in Division 22 and drainage piping is specified in Division 22.
C. Curb Frame and Cover:
1. Curb Frame Material: Galvanized steel or steel with bituminous coating.

Parcel 34
a. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height

matching cover, for recessed mounting with installed cover flush with
top of floor slab.
2. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for
access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent
connections, and power cables.
a. Material: Cast iron.
b. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic

for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.
A. Manufacturers: As per approved vendor list.
B. Description: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends

matching pump connections:
1. Bronze Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with

bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends,
braze-welded to tubing.
2. Stainless-Steel Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel
nipples or flanges, welded to tubing.
PART 12 - EXECUTION
12.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section

"Earthwork"; not included in this section.
B. Install sewage pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4.
C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal
of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
D. Suspend wet-pit-mounted, vertical sewage pumps from pit covers. Make direct
connections to sanitary drainage piping.
E. Set submersible sewage pumps on pit floors. Make direct connections to

sanitary drainage piping.

Parcel 34
1. Anchor guide-rail supports to pit bottoms and sidewalls or covers. Install

pumps so pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive
seals when pumps are lowered into place.
F. Install sewage pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace
interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
distortion or collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to
basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
G. Construct sewage pump pits and connect to drainage and vent piping. Set pit
curb frame recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb
flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.
H. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
I. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Drainage

and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
J. Install piping adjacent to sewage pumps to allow service and maintenance.
K. Connect sanitary drainage and vent piping to pumps. Install discharge piping
equal to or greater than size of pump discharge piping. Install vent piping equal
to or greater than size of pump basin vent connection. Refer to Division 22
Section "Sanitary Drainage and Vent Piping."
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in discharge piping.
2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump.
Install unions on pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves
same size as connected piping. Refer to Division 22 for general-duty valves
for sanitary waste piping.
L. Ground equipment according to Division 25.
M. Connect wiring according to Division 25.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 14 13
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 13 - GENERAL
13.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building.
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
13.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related
Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for
plastic drain piping.
PART 14 - PRODUCTS
A. Solid-Wall and Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: in accordance with DIN Standards.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: In accordance with DIN standards.

2. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

Parcel 34
a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 15 - EXECUTION
A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be of the
following:
C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be of the
following:
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22.
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to
building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Plumbing
Specialties."
C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each
service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking
rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals are specified in Division 22.
D. Install wall-penetration-fitting system at each service pipe penetration through

foundation wall. Make installation watertight.
E. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends,
and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.
Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes
are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is
prohibited.
F. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install
true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place
Parcel 34
hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to

manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.
G. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping

NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for
piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.
H. Install PVC aboveground storm drainage piping according to DIN standards.
I. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to DIN standards.
J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22.
B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to DIN standards.
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
hangers.
hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring
cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

Parcel 34
D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-
mm) minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-
inch (10-mm) rod.
inch (16-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
15.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use
transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing-in after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having
jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with
requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test
or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having

jurisdiction.
15.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

Parcel 34
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 14 23
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 16 - GENERAL
16.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties:
1. Cleanouts.
2. Roof drains.
3. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
16.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of

specified testing agency.
PART 17 - PRODUCTS
17.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Plastic Floor Cleanouts:

3. Size: Same as connected branch.
4. Body: PVC.
5. Closure Plug: PVC.
6. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to clean out of same material as
drainage piping.
17.2 ROOF DRAINS
A. Plastic Roof Drains:

Parcel 34

3. Standard: DIN standards.

4. Pattern: Balcony, Canopy, Roof and Scupper drain.
5. Body Material: PVC.
6. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
7. Outlet: Side, Angle.
8. Dome Material: PVC.
PART 18 - EXECUTION
18.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping
joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100)
for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100)
and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top
flush with finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of
types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage

between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof
membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
F. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors
with waterproof membrane.

Parcel 34
G. Install cast-iron soil pipe downspout boots at grade with top of hub 6 inches (152
mm) above grade.
H. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto
grade.
I. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished

required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
18.2 CONNECTIONS

18.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt
or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work
stops.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 33 00
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PART 19 - GENERAL
19.1 SUMMARY

1. Storage electric water heaters.
2. Water heater accessories.
19.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
D. Warranty.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA-90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;
Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable
water.
19.4 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

Parcel 34
b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): Five years.
PART 20 - PRODUCTS
20.1 MANUFACTURERS

include approved vendor list.
20.2 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial Electric Booster Heaters: Comply with UL 1453 requirements for

booster-type water heaters.
2. Storage-Tank Construction: Corrosion-resistant metal or steel.

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-
water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
3. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
d. Jacket: Rectangular shaped, with stainless-steel front panel, unless
e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type
arranged in multiples of three.
1) Option: Booster heaters with 9 kW or less total may have 2 or 3

elements.
2) Staging: Input not exceeding 18 kW per step.
f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat, to setting of at least 180

deg F (82 deg C).

Parcel 34
g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices

or systems.
h. Relief Valve: combination temperature and pressure relief valve.
Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include
pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.
Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage
tank.
i. Gages: Combination temperature and pressure type or separate
thermometer and pressure gage.
4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with brackets for undercounter

and legs for floor installation.
5. Capacity and Characteristics: As per design drawings and tender
documents.
B. Commercial, Storage Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 1453

requirements for storage-tank-type water heaters.
1. Manufacturers as per Emaar Approved Vendor List.
2. Storage-Tank Construction: steel horizontal or vertical arrangement.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and

piping connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.
1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.

2) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends for steel and
stainless-steel flanges, for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

or systems.
h. Relief Valves:

Parcel 34
i. for combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include one

or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as
heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater
working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing
element that extends into storage tank.
4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.

5. Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for
enabling and disabling water heater.
documents.
20.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand

for floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include
dimension that will support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457
mm) above the floor.
B. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated

steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and
water.
C. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not
less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4
(DN 20).
D. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 or ASHRAE 90.2-2004.
E. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig-

(172.5-kPa-) maximum outlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
PART 21 - EXECUTION
21.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation

on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

Parcel 34
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are
accessible.
C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of

storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks.
Extend commercial, water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as
domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive
air gap onto closest floor drain.
D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into
open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in
water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22
Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.
E. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22

Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
F. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet
piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
G. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage
tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
H. Fill water heaters with water.
21.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance.

Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 25 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 25 Section "Conductors and Cables."
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled

components and equipment installation, including connections.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm
proper operation.

Parcel 34

C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and
retest as specified above.
21.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial electric
water heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 33 00
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PART 22 - GENERAL
22.1 SUMMARY

1. Storage electric water heaters.
2. Water heater accessories.
22.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
D. Warranty.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA-90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and

label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;
Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable
water.

Parcel 34
22.4 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): Five years.
PART 23 - PRODUCTS
23.1 MANUFACTURERS

include approved vendor list.
23.2 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial Electric Booster Heaters: Comply with UL 1453 requirements for

booster-type water heaters.
2. Storage-Tank Construction: Corrosion-resistant metal or steel.
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-
water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.


Parcel 34
d. Jacket: Rectangular shaped, with stainless-steel front panel, unless

1) Option: Booster heaters with 9 kW or less total may have 2 or 3

elements.
f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat, to setting of at least 180

deg F (82 deg C).
or systems.
h. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3, combination temperature and pressure relief valve.
Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include
pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.
Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage
tank.
i. Gages: Combination temperature and pressure type or separate
thermometer and pressure gage.
4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with brackets for undercounter

and legs for floor installation.
documents.
B. Commercial, Storage Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 1453

requirements for storage-tank-type water heaters.
1. Manufacturers as per Emaar Approved Vendor List.
2. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code, steel horizontal or vertical

arrangement.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and

piping connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.
1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to

ASME B1.20.1.
2) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to
ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according
to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

Parcel 34

d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

or systems.
h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3, for combination temperature and pressure relief
valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity
at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than
water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with
sensing element that extends into storage tank.
4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.

5. Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for
enabling and disabling water heater.
documents.
23.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand

for floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include
dimension that will support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457
mm) above the floor.
B. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated

steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and
water.
C. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not
less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4
(DN 20).
D. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 or ASHRAE 90.2-2004.
E. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 25-psig-

(172.5-kPa-) maximum outlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

Parcel 34
PART 24 - EXECUTION
24.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation

on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
2. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 22
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are
accessible.
C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of

storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks.
Extend commercial, water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as
domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive
air gap onto closest floor drain.
D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into
open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in
water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22
Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.
E. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22

Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
F. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet
piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
G. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage
tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
H. Fill water heaters with water.
24.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance.

Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 25 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 25 Section "Conductors and Cables."

Parcel 34
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled

components and equipment installation, including connections.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm
proper operation.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and
retest as specified above.
24.4 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial electric
water heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 25 - GENERAL
25.1 SUMMARY
1. Faucets for lavatories, showers and sinks.

2. Toilet seats.
3. Fixture supports.
4. Shower receptors.
5. Water closets.
6. Lavatories.
7. Individual showers.
8. Kitchen sinks.
9. Service sinks.
25.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used
by people with disabilities.
C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
F. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with

heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
25.3 SUBMITTALS

Parcel 34

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1,

"Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"[; Public Law 90-480,
"Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities
Act";] for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486,

"Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing
fixtures.
D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--
Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components
that are compatible.
F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for plumbing fixtures:
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2. Plastic Laundry Trays: ANSI Z124.6.
3. Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2.
4. Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6.
5. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
6. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
7. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
8. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
9. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
10. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
11. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for lavatory and [sink] faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray:

ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:
ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
Parcel 34
9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for bathtub and shower faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald
Faucets: ASSE 1016.
3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
4. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
5. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
7. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
9. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and
ASSE 1016.
10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified
for miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
6. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
7. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
9. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
10. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

Parcel 34
PART 26 - PRODUCTS ( REFER TO ID SPECIFICATIONS )
26.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucets, :

3. Description: Single-control mixing. Include hot- and cold-water indicators;

coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet
with spout and fixture receptor.
26.2 SHOWER FAUCETS
A. Shower Faucets, :

3. Description: Single-handle [pressure-balance] valve. Include hot- and

cold-water indicators; check stops; and shower head, arm, and flange.
Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and outlet with diverter valve.
26.3 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink Faucets, :

3. Description: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets

with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture
receptor.
26.4 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats, :

Parcel 34

3. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.
26.5 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

B. Manufacturers: As per client approved vendor list
26.6 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets, :

26.7 LAVATORIES
A. Lavatories, :

26.8 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks, :

26.9 SERVICE SINKS
A. Service Sinks, :
Parcel 34

PART 27 - EXECUTION
27.1 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to

manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste
piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for
accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to
supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or

building substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be

connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate
within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be
easily reached for operation.
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly
connected to sanitary drainage system.
I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly

connected to drainage system.
J. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on
wide side of compartment.
K. Install toilet seats on water closets.

Parcel 34
L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts
if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if
required.
M. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture

supplies at stop valves.
N. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet
spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include
adapters if required.
O. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower
arms.
P. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch
where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
R. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting.
Install [in sink deck] [on countertop at sink]. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher
and outlet hose to disposer.
S. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with

spout over sink.
T. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished

required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22.
U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-
type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture
color. Sealants are specified in Division 7.
27.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,
waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 25.
D. Connect wiring according to Division 25.

Parcel 34
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for
locations where installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other
specified components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation.
Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
27.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in
writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 28 - GENERAL
28.1 SUMMARY

systems.
3. Sleeves.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Grout.
6. Fire-suppression demolition.
7. Concrete bases.
28.2 DEFINITIONS

rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof,
spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


locations.

chases.

shelters.

Parcel 34
28.3 SUBMITTALS

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel.
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher

PART 29 - PRODUCTS
listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free,

1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is
indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.

Parcel 34
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F 493.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

29.4 SLEEVES

with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

Parcel 34
29.5 ESCUTCHEONS

29.6 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, no staining,

applications.
PART 30 - EXECUTION


arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used
to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design

unless specifically indicated.
Parcel 34
removal.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
J. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves

seals.
diameter.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for


N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

materials. Refer to Division 7 for firestop materials.
O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

Parcel 34
P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise

indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's
"Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with
ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook, "Pipe

and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to


welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

Parcel 34
30.3 CONCRETE BASES


instructions.
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and
equipment.
30.5 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support,
and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
30.6 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces,
pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
Parcel 34
equipment.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 12 00 - FIRE SUPPRESSION STAND PIPE
PART 31 - GENERAL
31.1 SUMMARY

3. Hose connections.
4. Pressure gages.
1. Division 13 for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.
A. Automatic Wet-Type, Class II Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1 (DN 25) hose
stations. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable
of supplying water demand.

Parcel 34
B. Automatic Wet-Type, Class III Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)
hose stations and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections. Has open water-supply
valve with pressure maintained and is capable of supplying water demand.
A. Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 100-psig (690-kPa)

B. Delegated Design: Design fire-suppression standpipes, including comprehensive

C. Fire-suppression standpipe design shall be approved by authorities having

jurisdiction.
1. Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is as follows:
2. Maximum residual pressure at required flow at each hose-connection outlet

is as follows unless otherwise indicated:
D. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression standpipes shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and [ASCE/SEI 7].
31.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-suppression standpipes. Include plans, elevations,

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For standpipe systems indicated to comply with

preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

Parcel 34
E. Approved Standpipe Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 14,

that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic
calculations if applicable.
G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and
"Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
I. Operation and maintenance data.
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-

suppression standpipes and providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results
of fire-hydrant flow test.


application.
D. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties,

accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with NFPA 14, "Installation of
Standpipe and Hose Systems."
PART 32 - PRODUCTS
A. Above ground steel Pipe: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A 53, Type S
(seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40.

Parcel 34
A. Standard-Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of


pattern.


Parcel 34

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B. Check Valves:

C. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
D. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:

8. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.

b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
9. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 240-V ac, prewired, two-circuit,


Parcel 34
32.5 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:

4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting
pressure-control device, for connecting fire hose.
threads.
11. Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing.
12. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 100 psig (690 kPa).
B. Nonadjustable-Valve Hose Connections:

4. Standard: UL 668 hose valve for connecting fire hose.
threads.
32.6 ALARM DEVICES

Parcel 34
B. Water-Flow Indicators:

C. Valve Supervisory Switches:
contacts.
32.7 PRESSURE GAGES

face.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
32.8 ESCUTCHEONS
B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with set-

screws.

Parcel 34

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw.


hinge.
32.9 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall-Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to




forms.


32.10 SLEEVE SEALS

Parcel 34

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating
32.11 GROUT

applications.
PART 33 - EXECUTION
A. Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to water-service piping at service

entrance into building. Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 2.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories at connection to fire-suppression water-service piping. Comply with
requirements for backflow preventers in Division 2.
water service.

practical.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of fire-

suppression standpipe piping.

Parcel 34
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for

seismic-restraint device materials and installation.
D. Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.
F. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department
connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
G. Install local alarm devices in piping systems.
H. Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
I. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe.
Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with
soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and
valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject
to freezing.
J. Drain dry-type standpipe system piping.
K. Pressurize and check wet-type standpipe system piping.
L. Fill wet-type standpipe system piping with water.
indicated.

connections.
ASME B31.9.
Parcel 34


H. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe

steel-pipe joints.
I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe


Article.
K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with

jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control

valve.
33.5 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage

restriction.
C. Install NPS 1 (DN 25) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device.

Parcel 34
D. Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1 (DN 65 by DN 25) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device.
E. Install wall-mounted-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe

escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply
piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire
hose. Comply with requirements for cabinets in Division 10.
set-screw.
screw.
plate.
indicated.
Sealants."

Parcel 34

Sealants."
H. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
I. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] annular clear
J. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Galvanized-

steel pipe.

for flashing in Division 7.
a. PVC-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).

openings.

pipe.


K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,


Parcel 34

Division 7.

33.9 IDENTIFICATION


3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
equipment.
C. Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not

pass tests and inspections.
A. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping shall be of the following:

Parcel 34

END OF SECTION
SECTION 211313
WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS
PART 34 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions.
34.2 SUMMARY

3. Sprinklers.
4. Excess- supply pressure.
5. Pressure gages.
1. Division 13 for standpipe piping.
34.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed

to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping

containing water and that is connected to water supply through local alarm valve.
Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers
open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections
are included if indicated.
Parcel 34
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa)

B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications shall be as per NFPA 13.

2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design shall be as per
NFPA 13.
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per NFPA 13.
4. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to
NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated.
D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to NFPA 13 and [ASCE/SEI 7].
34.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with

preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to

NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including
hydraulic calculations if applicable.
G. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

Parcel 34
I. Field quality-control reports.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing

sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-
hydrant flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans,

calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer.


application.
D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories,

installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
A. Interruption of Existing Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than ten days in advance of proposed interruption of

service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written
permission.
34.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that

penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.

Parcel 34
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged

cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler
wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler
wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type
of sprinkler used on Project.
PART 35 - PRODUCTS

tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service
A. Standard-Weight Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733 made of


pattern.


Parcel 34


2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200
kPa).
B. Check Valves:

include, but are not limited to, the Emaar approved vendor list
C. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:


Parcel 34
6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 220-V ac, prewired, single-circuit,

35.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

B. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available


2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig (1200 kPa)

minimum.

B. Alarm Valves:

3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch,
pressure gages, retarding chamber and fill-line attachment with strainer.
5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main
drain piping.
6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
C. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:

Parcel 34

4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
5. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
35.7 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:

include, but are not limited to, Emaar approved vendor list:
4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as
required to match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and
integral test valve.
C. Branch Line Testers:


Parcel 34
4. Body Material: Brass.
6. Inlet: Threaded.
7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
35.8 SPRINKLERS

B. General Requirements:

2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Standard-Response Applications:
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated (not required for upright sprinklers)

2. Bronze.
3. Painted.
E. Special Coatings:

Parcel 34
1. Wax.
2. Lead.
3. Corrosion-resistant paint.
F. Sprinkler Guards:

3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
35.9 ALARM DEVICES
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:

3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
5. Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.
7. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
8. Outlet: NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connection.
C. Water-Flow Indicators:

D. Pressure Switches:
Parcel 34

3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
E. Valve Supervisory Switches:

contacts.
35.10 PRESSURE GAGES


face.
F. Air System Piping Gage: Include “AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
35.11 ESCUTCHEONS
B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: [Polished chrome-plated] finish with set-

screws.

Parcel 34
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw


hinge, set-screw.
35.12 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to



forms.


35.13 SLEEVE SEALS


Parcel 34

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
35.14 GROUT

applications.
PART 36 - EXECUTION
36.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 291.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building.

Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Division 2 Section "Facility Fire-
Suppression Water-Service Piping."
B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Comply with requirements for backflow
preventers in Division 2 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service
Piping".
water service.
36.3 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-distribution piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water supply.

Parcel 34

practical.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in

NFPA 13.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-

restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with

shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve.
Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.
K. Install local alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection,
and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less
than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for
draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.
N. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

Parcel 34
indicated.

connections.
ASME B31.9.

follows:

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting.
Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.
I. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join light wall steel pipe and steel

Article.
K. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe

steel-pipe joints.

Parcel 34
L. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe

M. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel

N. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with

jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control

valve.
C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection in the proper direction. Install
backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
D. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of

flow, in main supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in
main supply to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level,
alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber
attachment, and fill-line attachment.

Parcel 34
set-screw.
screw.
plate.
indicated.
Sealants."
Sealants."
and pipe using sleeve seals.
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs Galvanized-steel

pipe


Parcel 34

for flashing in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".

openings.

pipe.

b. Cast-iron wall-pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.


Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


Parcel 34


3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
5. Start and run excess-pressure.
6. Coordinate with local fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
36.12 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
A. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall

B. Wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and bigger, shall
be the following:
Parcel 34
1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with grooved ends; Victaulic fittings and
joints.
36.14 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed pendent sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Pendent Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

2. Upright Sprinklers: rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view;
wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 21 21 00 - CARBON-DIOXIDE FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

DD. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special
Conditions, apply to work of this section.
EE. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in the fire
fighting division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this
division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
This section covers the following:
1.2.1 - CO2 agent total flooding fire extinguishing system.
1.2.2 - CO2 agent pre-engineered fire extinguishing system.
1.3 Applicable Codes and Standards
Standards and codes which are generally applicable to the work of this section
are listed below:
NFPA13 Standard of Sprinkler System Installation
1.4 Submittals
K. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features,
components, ratings and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation
views of components and enclosures and details of control panels.

Parcel 34
L. Maintenance data for systems and products to include in "Operating and

Maintenance Manual" Include the following:
M. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and

abnormal conditions.
N. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
O. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at

the site for ready access.
P. Wiring diagrams detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power, signaling
and controls.
Q. Qualification data for Manufacturer and Contractor as specified in clause 1.5 of

this section. Data describe capabilities and experience.
R. Design analysis and computer calculations
S. Material, equipment and fixture list
T. Parts and special tools list
1.5 Quality assurance
A Manufacturer Qualifications
Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of the types and capacities

indicated with a record of successful in-service performance.
B Single-source Responsibility:
Obtain system components from a single Manufacturer with responsibility for the
entire system.

Parcel 34
2.1 Design Requirments for CO2 total flooding System

A General
6. The amount of CO2 agent in the system shall be at least sufficient for
protection of the largest single hazard within single area or groups of areas
that are to be protected simultaneously with the same gas battery.
7. CO2 agent shall be discharged into the room to be protected (hazard area),
including false ceilings and raised access floors and alike, through nozzles
designed for the intended purpose. The nozzles shall be sized and located to
provide the rates of discharge and coverage needed. The size of pipe and
nozzles shall be determined on the basis of calculated flow and terminal
pressure. Flow and nozzle data shall be in accordance with established test
data.
8. The Drawings indicate the extent and the general arrangement. The location
of hangers and the final routing of the piping shall be subject to acceptance.
Piping and hangers 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller may be located in the field
with general installation Drawings and system diagrams. All piping shall be
shop-fabricated and installed according to the layout Drawings.
9. All materials, equipment, and appliances provided shall comply with NFPA
12 requirements and shall bear the listing mark of UL (Underwriters
Laboratories) or FM (Factory Mutual).
10. Ventilation openings to avoid excessive overpressure in rooms to be

protected shall be in accordance with NFPA 12.
B Gas Cylinders:
5. The high pressure CO2 agent storage units shall be of seamless steel and
consist of 45 kg pressure cylinders of 150 bar designed to meet the
requirements of the ASME boiler and pressure vessel. Storage units will
have a pilot cylinder with slave cylinder(s) and pilot function.
6. The storage units shall be super-pressurized with dry nitrogen in accordance

with NFPA 12.

Parcel 34
7. A gauge for determining the pressure in the cylinders shall be provided.
8. Each cylinder shall be fitted with a brass quick action valve. The pilot cylinder
valve shall be actuated electrically. The sequence cylinder(s) shall be
actuated pneumatically by the pilot line pressure.
C Cylinder Connectors:
6. Each cylinder valve shall be connected to the manifold with a synthetic

rubber, galvanized steel hose.
7. Connectors shall be the same nominal size as the cylinder discharge valve
or larger in order not to restrict flow. Each connector shall be fitted with a
brass non return valve to prevent the loss of Clean Agent if a cylinder is
disconnected.
D Distribution Piping:
7. Black or galvanized steel pipe shall be either ASTM A 53 seamless or

electric welded, Grade A or B.
8. Schedule 40 pipes will permitted to be used for sizes 3/4-in. and smaller.
Pipe that is 1 in. through 4 in. shall be a minimum of Schedule 80.
9. Welded joints, screwed and flanged fittings (malleable iron or ductile iron)
shall be permitted to be used.
10. Mechanical grooved couplings and fittings shall be permitted to be used if

they are specifically listed for carbon dioxide service
11. Class 300 malleable or ductile iron fittings shall be used through 2-in. internal
pipe size (IPS) and forged steel fittings in all larger sizes.
12. Flanged joints upstream of any stop valves shall be Class 600. Flanged
joints downstream of stop valves or in systems with no stop valves shall be
permitted to be Class 300.
E Discharge Nozzles:
4. Nozzles shall be of UL or FM approved.
5. Discharge orifices shall be of corrosion-resistant metal

Parcel 34
6. The nozzle discharge pattern and size shall be designed for the area to be
protected. Size shall be determined by the geometry of the area to be
protected and based on flow calculations.
F Automatic Controls:
6. Each system shall be provided with means for manual and automatic release
of CO2 agent. Automatic release shall be initiated by cross zoned electric
heat and ionization smoke detectors. A pressure alarm switch with non return
valve, pressure indicator and test connections shall be provided.
7. An A.C. powered, 220 V, control cabinet meeting the requirements of

NFPA 72 shall be provided to monitor the system, including LCD display,
provide power to the detectors, and actuate the cylinder discharge valves
and if more zones the selector valve involved. Control signals will be 24 V,
D.C.
8. The control cabinet shall provide electrical component features as required

by NFPA 12 Standards. The control panel shall include a trouble buzzer.
9. Battery back up shall consist of an automatic battery charger and dry cell
units, providing emergency power for the detection and activating the
extinguishing systems for a period of 24 hours.
10. Each system shall have cross wired detection circuits. A pre-alarm shall be
announced on the control panel display, when one (1) circuit is activated.
The alarm shall activate a visual and audible alarm to alarm personnel to
leave or do not enter the room. Two (2) circuits activated will release CO 2
agent and a fire alarm will be announced on the control panel display.
G Accessories
1. Discharge Delay Timer:
Each system shall include an adjustable timing device to delay discharge

after initiation of the automatic actuation sequence. The timer shall not delay
discharge after a manual actuation.
8. Discharge Abort Switch:

Parcel 34
A discharge abort switch shall be provided on the control panel.
9. Additional Contacts:
The alarm system of CO2 or any building control system should be able to
perform the following functions without delay:
v. Shut down heating and air-conditioning system.

vi. Shut down ventilation fan motors.
vii. Turn on emergency lighting system.
viii. Close dampers and louvers in the area affected.
10. Warning and Instruction Signs:
vi. Provide flash light at each entrance of protected room, wired back to the
control panel.
vii. At each entrance and inside of rooms to be protected, instruction signs to

be provided. Instruction signs may show the following:
viii. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation in the event of fire alarm.
ix. Leave room immediately.
x. Automatic gas fire extinguishing installation activated. Do not enter the
room.
2.2 Design Requirments for CO2 pre engineered System
FF. The pre-engineered extinguishing system is used for total flooding applications.
Total flooding protection is applicable to enclosed special hazards such as
rooms or space containing flammable liquid, electrical equipment, records, or
other combustibles where the agent may be used for extinguishment. The
hazard area must have no outside air flow present in order to successfully
achieve the extinguishing concentration within the enclosure.
GG. The system shall provide a minimum agent design concentration, as defined by
NFPA 12, in all protected spaces. The system should be designed to discharge
Parcel 34
its contents in 60 seconds or less. Final concentration inside the room shall not
exceed 5% for normally occupied spaces. Concentration may vary depending on
the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ} but may never be less than the one
defined by NFPA 12.
HH. The system shall be complete according to the design manual. It shall include all
caution/advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other
operations necessary for a functional Fire Suppression System for use with
CO2.
II. The systems are direct or indirect "automatic" type systems that utilize flexible,
pneumatic, thermally sensitive tubing to activate the system. This tubing is
connected to the discharge valve assembly and is pressurized with nitrogen
along with the cylinder contents. When the pressure in this tubing is vented, the
valve piston moves up, the valve opens and the extinguishing agent is
discharged through a separate piping network.
There are three ways of venting the pressure in the tubing in order to actuate
the System:
g. Manual operation by use of end of line manual actuator

h. Electrical operation by use of end of line solenoid actuator
i. Automatic operation when a sufficient temperature is
reached to burst the tubing
JJ. The Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for
Electrical Cabinets, describes the design, installation, usage, maintenance, and
limitations for these systems.

2.2.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
KK. General Requirements
5. The pre-engineered fire suppression system materials and equipment shall

be standard products of the supplier’s latest design and suitable to perform
the Functions intended. When one or more pieces of equipment must

Parcel 34
perform the same function(s), they shall be duplicates produced by one

manufacturer.
6. The extinguishing system unit shall be designed to operate between -4°F (-

20°C) and 130°F (55°C).
LL. CO2 Storage
12. Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's

guidelines.
13. Each supply shall be located out of the hazard area, as near as possible, to
reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
14. The pre-engineered fire suppression system shall suitable for applications
where the cylinder ambient storage temperature is between -4°F (-20°C)
and l30°F (55°C).
15. A complete traceability system shall be set up and the following

documents shall be accessible for all cylinder batch series:
i. Thermal control report from the cylinder supplier

including information on the h eat treatment, compliance
with heat parameters and results of the material tests.
j. Material test report including results of the material tests,
k. Ultrasonic test results.
l. Hydraulic test report.
MM. Valve
15. The valve shall be made of brass, equipped with a pressure gauge to
monitor the system pressure, with a ball valve interfacing the tubing and the
cylinder, and with a burst disc for protection against over pressure.
16. Each discharge an d filling port shall be fitted with hexagonal safety
nuts for safety purposes during transportation and intended to
prevent uncontrolled discharge of a cylinder in the event of accidental
system activation.
18. A contact reed device shall be mounted on each safety clip of ball valves
when the system is armed. It shall generate an electric signal in case of
unauthorized manipulation of the sealed ball valve.
Parcel 34
20. A complete traceability system shall be set up and an inspect ion certificate
3.1 according to EN 10204:2004 shall be available on demand for all valve
bodies and give the following information:
m. Chemical Analysis
n. Tensile strength test results
o. Adjustment of regulator verification
p. External leak tightness test results
q. Internal leak tightness test results
r. Dimensional and visual inspection, Cleanliness,
Identification and marking control
continually indicating the CO2 quantity inside the cylinder (for monitoring
and maintenance). The valve shall be able to generate an alarm signal
when the quantity of CO2 goes above a defined level, chosen by the end
user.
NN. Mounting Brackets
5. The cylinder wall mounting brackets shall be in powder-coated steel and

must be used to mount the cylinder in vertical position.
OO. Burst Disc
6. A traceability system shall be set up for all burst discs, and linked to valves
where they’re mounted on.
PP. Pressure Gauge
7. Each system shall have a pressure gauge on its detection line to indicate
internal sensor tubing pressure. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to
display the acceptable operating range, under and over pressure range.
8. Each system shall have a pressure switch plugged on its detection line to
provide electrical supervision of the sensor tubing pressure, where the
system requires digital monitoring. The low pressure switch shall be wired to
an alar m device to provide an audible and visual supervisory condition

Parcel 34
signal in the event the sensor tubing pressure drops below 8 bar (+/- 0,3
bar) of working pressure.

QQ. END OF LINE (EO L)
11. The End of Line (EOL) shall be required to pressurize the thermal activation
tubing.
12. EOL Manual Actuator shall be used w here the system shall be manually
activated and without external power require.
13. EOL Manual Actuator shall use piston technology. No diaphragm

technology (or Technologies requiring replacement of components after
actuation) shall be used.
14. EOL Manual Actuator shall be provided with a sea l or other device to
minimize the potential for accidental discharge.
15. EOL Solenoid Actuator (an electro mechanical device) shall be used w here
the system required relay signal to actuate electric ally from control panel or
other electric signal.
RR. LINEAR THERMAL DETECTOR AN D ACTUAT ION TUBING
15. Linear Thermal Detector and Actuation Tubing shall be designed to meet
the following Requirement:
k. Max. Working pressure 20 bar (at 20°C)

l. Internal diameter 4 mm
m. Outside diameter 6 mm
n. Temperature range - 30°C ... + 80°C
o. Permeability: min. 10-4 mbar. l/s (100% Helium testing)
16. The sensor tubing shall be made of multiple layers for enhanced resistance
to UV and chemicals.

products directive
19. The compatibility between most widespread chemicals and sensor tubing
shall have been tested and results shall be accessible to end-users.

Parcel 34
20. All devices and equipment shall be tested and validated by UL and FM
during the certification process of complete systems. The following tests
shall have been processed and validated:
i. One year leakage test, in accordance with FM Approvals

j. Air-Oven Aging Test in accordance with FM Approvals
and UL 2166
k. 30-Day Extreme Temperature Leakage Test, in
accordance with FM Approvals
l. Corrosion - Salt Spray, in accordance with ASTM B117,
21. The Linear Thermal Detector shall be validated and considered as a mean
of detection by UL.
SS. DISCHARGE NOZZLE
3. The discharge nozzle used to control the flow of and distribute the agent
into the hazard area shall be stainless steel construction.
TT. PIPING REQUIREMENT

manufacturer's requirements and approved piping standards and
guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals
using accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be
adequately supported and anchored at all directional changes and before
nozzle locations. The piping shall be laid out to give maximum flow and to
avoid possible mechanical, chemical or other damage. Installation shall
follow drawings as closely as possible. System designer must be consulted
for anything other than minor deviations in pipe routing.
9. The discharge line shall be connected to the ground to avoid the

accumulation of static electricity during discharge.
UU. DISCHARGE PIPE FITIINGS
3. Pipe fittings shall be compression tube fittings only made of stainless steel
316L, according to ASTM A276 and ASTM A182. They shall have a

Parcel 34
minimum working pressure of 4350 psi (300 bar). Temperature ratings of

the fittings must not be exceeded.
i. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The system shall be designed and installed such that it activated the discharge
valve by any one of the following:
VV. MANUAL ACTUATION VIA MANUAL RELEASE VALVE
The pre-engineered Fire suppression system can be manually activated by

installing the manual release device at the end of the linear sensor tubing. The
manual release device shall depressurize the linear sensor tube and open the
valve to activate the CO2 discharge through the discharge nozzle installed
within the protected! Area . Pressure switch is activated and opens (or closes)
electric contacts to switch on/switch off electric devices.
WW. ELECTRIC ACTUATION VIA ELECTRIC RELEASE DEVICE
The pre-engineered Fire suppression system can be electrically activated by

installing the solenoid actuator at the end of the linear sensor tube. The electro-
mechanical device allows actuation of the pre-engineered Fire suppression
system from control panel or other electronic sensor.
XX. AUTOMATIC ACTUATION VIA TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE TUBING
The system automatically operates when the thermal temperature sensitive

tubing installed as linear detection capability bursts because of heating. Heat or
direct flame impingement during a fire situation will cause the tubing to rupture.
The tubing ruptures at the hottest point along its entire length, and then the CO2
is discharged through the piping network and nozzles to extinguish fire.
Pressure switch is activated and opens (or closes) electric contacts to switch
on/switch off electric devices.
ii. SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT
Upon completion of installation, a meeting shall be held at the site with the
contractor. Equipment supplier and owner personnel shall be present. The
contractor shall familiarize owner's personnel with system components, system
functions, and recommend procedures. The contractor will provide the owner

Parcel 34
with a complete operation and maintenance manual as well as written summary

of any functional tests conducted.
The check-out procedures is intended to represent the minimum requirement for

the extinguishing portion of the system. Additional procedures may be required
by the applicable governmental or regulatory authorities.
YY. COMPARTMENT (HAZARD) AREA CHECK
A good review of the hazard area shall be made. Certain aspects about the
hazard may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall
system performance.
ZZ. AREA CONFIGURATION
The hazard area dimensions shall be checked against those shown on the
system plan(s). If the area volume or geometry has changed, the agent
weight shall be recalculated and compared with the agent weight supplied.
The area shall also be checked for bulkheads or movable partitions, which
have been added or changed. If partitions have been added, installer shall
check to see that all areas within the compartment still receive adequate
agent distribution.
AAA. CONTAINERS
7. Installer must check to ensure all cylinders and brackets are securely
fastened.
8. Installer must check inside pressure of all containers. It can be measured

directly through the digital measurement port of the valve.
BBB. AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Operation of auxiliary functions such as door closures, damper closures, a ir

handling shutdown, etc. shall be verified when the pressure switch is
activated.
iii. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Parcel 34
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational

training to each shift of the owner's personnel. Each training session shall
include manual and (optional) abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory
procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
g. Duration of training
h. Location of training (on site if feasible)
i. Material covered and training aids available
iv. MAINTENANCE
The maintenance procedures and intervals are indicated in the "The installation
and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for Electrical
Cabinets", and are meant to represent the minimum requirements for CO2
systems. These procedures do not preclude those required by the applicable
governmental or regulatory authority. More frequent service intervals may be
necessary if systems are installed in more severe service applications.
A regular maintenance program must be established for the continuous

operation of all fire suppression systems. A periodic maintenance program shall
be established and followed. A maintenance log must be maintained for ready
reference. The log must include the following accumulated data:
i. Inspect ion Interval
j. Inspection procedure performed
k. Maintenance performed as a result of the inspect ion
l. Name of inspector performing the task
Any time rust or corrosion is found on a fire suppression cylinder it should be

taken out of service and replaced.

Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
a. Installation FOR CO2 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
All installation shall be in accordance with, Manufacturer's written instructions,

and NFPA Standards.
3.1.1 Inspection and testing
After the system has been installed, adjusted and placed in proper operating
condition, it shall be field inspected and tested in accordance with NFPA 12, to
meet the approval of the Government Representative or authorized Fire Service
Officer.
b. Installation FOR CO2 PRE ENGINEERED SYSTEMS
Installation procedures shall be performed in accordance with "The

Installation and Maintenance Manual Pre-Engineered CO2 System Kit for
Electrical Cabinets", by fire protect ion personnel - qualified and trained by
CEODEUX Extinguisher Valves Technology S .A. - in accordance with existing
regulations, rules and guidelines including requirements of the Governmental
and/or Local authority and other regulatory authorities.
i. WARRANTY
System shall be warranted for parts and labour for not less than a period of one
(1) year from date of installation. The contractor shall specify the maintenance to
be performed during the warranty period to maintain warranty conditions. The
standard life time for the tube must be (5) years under the normal operating
condition and within the stated specification of the tubing.
END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 22 52 00
FOUNTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and Division 0 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A This Section includes the following:
1. Pipes and fittings
2. Filters
3. Pumps
7. Sundries
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A Product data for each fountain filter, pumps, nozzles, drains, and special duty
valves. Include rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialities and
accessories, and installation instructions.
B. Shop drawings detailing dimensions, required clearances for fountain distribution

piping systems in accordance with Division-22 Section "Basic Mechanical
Requirements".
C. Maintenance data for fountain filters, pumps, nozzles, drains, piping specialities
and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual
Parcel 34
specified in the General Requirements and Division-22 Section "Basic

Mechanical Requirements".
D. Test reports specified in Part 3 below.
A. Guarantee: provide written guarantee that when fountain or fountains

equipment is operated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
fountain/fountains water will be crystal clear, sparkling bright, free from
suspended matter and completely sterilised at all times.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTUREERS
A. Obtain equipment from one of the following: Approved Vendor List.
2.2 FOUNTAIN DESIGN PARAMETERS:
Fountain volume m3 : As per schedule and drawings
turnover rate : one complete change over every 1 hrs.
circulation rate 1/s : As indicated in schedule and drawings
2.3 PIPES
B. Piping Under Fountain pressure uPVC pipe and fittings.
2.4 PUMPS
Parcel 34
A. Type: submirsable circulation pump package designed for specified flow rate and
operating pressure and hydrostatically tested at factory to specified test pressure.
F. Controllers to be provided as recommended by supplier.
G. Accessories: Pump to be complete with all accessories as recommended by

supplier.
2.5 FOUNTAIN FITTINGS
A. Generally: fountain fittings to be heavy cast bronze, heavily chrome plated with
polished finish to withstand corrosion and action of chlorine.
B. Inlet Fittings: round ajustable louvre type with outer face fixable in any position for
regulating flow of water into fountain.
F. Main Drains: square grate and frame to cover sumps. Grate is to fit frame closely
and be flush at surface.
2.6 SUNDRIES
A. Strainers on pump suctions to be straight, in-line, flanged type, designed for

fountains, with cast iron body and stainless steel basket, suitable for working
pressure of 200 kPa and with quick opening cover lid, positively sealing O-ring,
yoke type cover clamp with threaded tightening bolt and 40 mm IPS drain plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Parcel 34
A. Qualified Engineer or Technician from equipment manufacturer is to supervise

installation, start-up equipment, make necessary adjustments, calibrations and
tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and instruct and train the
Employer's personnel.
3.2 EMBEDDED FOUNTAIN FITTINGS AND PIPING
A. Install fountain fittings and piping embedded under fountain and in concrete walls
of fountain and plant room during concreting.
B. Concreting: a member of the setting crew is to be present during concreting to

check grade and alignment of embedded fittings and pipework and to correct
any displacement before concrete has hardened.
C. Lay embedded fittings and piping to proper elevation, line and grade and support
and anchor during concreting.
D. Coat And Plug fittings and piping to prevent damage and ingress of concrete.
E. Earth Metal Fittings by connecting to fountain reinforcing steel with copper wire
welded to fitting and reinforcement.
F. No-Leak Flanges: provide on pipe connections to inlet and drain fittings and
vacuum fittings within concrete fountain wall.
G. Pipe Connections through plant room walls to have no- leak flanges fitted
centrally in wall.
3.3 EQUIPMENT

Parcel 34
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Strainers: provide on suction of each pump.
3.4 FOUNTAIN SIDE ACCESSORIES
A. Earth Metal Accessories by connecting to fountain reinforcing steel with copper

wire welded to accessory and reinforcement.
3.5 TESTS
A. Performance Tests: carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate

that equipment meets design requirements as noted on the Drawings and in the
Specification.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 230501 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Parcel 34

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
2.8 GROUT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.9 GROUTING

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methodsto
complement other Division 22 and Division 23 Sections.

systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 22 and Division 23 piping
system Sections.
Parcel 34
1.3 DEFINITIONS

rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately
below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and
tunnels.

C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from

duct shafts.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. UPVC: Un plasticized polyvinyl chloride.
5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood
supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.
Parcel 34
B. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
C. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of

mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems,
installations, and building components. Show space requirements for
installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations
are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-
stem movement.
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and

specialties, including space for disassembly required for periodic
maintenance.
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment

into building during construction.
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors,

walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and
installations.
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air

outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication system components,
sprinklers, ceiling access panels and other ceiling- mounted items.
D. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation

required for each identification material and device.
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

operators.

Parcel 34
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and
viewing angles of identification devices.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical

dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished at no additional cost to
the Contract, provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors,
bases, equipment spaces and the like are increased accordingly. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet
design and commissioning requirements.
C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel
D. Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and
prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade.
Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging
and bending.
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building

components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure
during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.

Parcel 34
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are
constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large
equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.
E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and

overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing
regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items

requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and
doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and

painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before
installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Central Plastics Co.
c. Or approved equal
2. Dielectric Couplings:
Parcel 34
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
c. Or approved equal
3. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
b. Perfection Corp.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
d. Or approved equal
4. Flexible Connectors:
a. Flexi craft Industries.
b. General Rubber Corp.
c. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
d. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
e. Mercer Rubber Co.
f. Metraflex Co.
g. Proco Products, Inc. h. Uniflex, Inc.
i. Or approved equal
5. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Metra flex Co.
c. Thunder line/Link-Seal.
d. Or approved equal

Parcel 34
6. Transition Fittings
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
g. Or approved equal
7. Mechanical Sleeve Seals
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Or approved equal
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 and Division 23 piping Sections for pipe and
fitting materials and joining methods.
A. Refer to individual Division 22 and Division 23 piping Sections for special

joining materials not listed below.

Parcel 34
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of

piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2-mm maximum

thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel

flanges
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated;
and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material

recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10

percent maximum lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum

lead content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum

lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent
maximum lead content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.

Parcel 34
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials
H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber
gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts.
K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end,

pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A 47 M malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined

dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain,

and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange

assembly, full-face or ring type.

Parcel 34
Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene

bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035-
or 2070-kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system
pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 2070-kPa minimum working pressure
at
107 deg C.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070-kPa minimum
working pressure at 107 deg C.
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will
provide flexible pipe connections. Include 860-kPa minimum working-pressure
rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the
following:
1. DN50and Smaller: Threaded.
2. DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for DN65 and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered

with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends,
braze welded to hose.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-

steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples
or flanges, welded to hose.
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated,

stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include
stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

Parcel 34
E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction,

with multiple plies of NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses.
Include 860-kPa minimum working-pressure rating at 104 deg C. Units may
be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NSF 61 if
used in potable water system.
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to

continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting
bolts and pressure plates.
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6-mm minimum thickness, galvanized, round

tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain
ends.
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral

clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane
flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern

type if required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome-plated finish.
5. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome-
plated finish.
6. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
Parcel 34
2.8 GROUT
A. Non shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout, no staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for
interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition"

for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and

components indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be

removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible
piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping

with same or compatible piping material.
3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be

removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or

compatible ductwork material.
5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment.
Parcel 34
6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services

and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall,
reconnect, and make equipment operational.
7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services

and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is

unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with
new products of equal capacity and quality.
A. General: Install
piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise.
Individual
Division 22 and Division 23 piping Sections specify unique piping installation

requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and

diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems.
Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system

operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment

rooms and service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building
walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building
elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for
ceiling panel removal.
Parcel 34
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25-mm clearance around

insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls,
wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and
polished chrome-plated finish.
Use split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with

set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge,

spring clips, and chrome- plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or

spring clips.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls,
gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical

equipment areas or other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor
level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to
secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 6-mm annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve
materials:

Parcel 34
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN150.
b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes DN150 and larger,

penetrating gypsum-board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install
section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above
finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink,

nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants.
Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant,
P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25-mm annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 150 mm in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes"

for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size
sleeve for 25-mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with
firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through- Penetration
Firestop Systems" for materials.
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

Parcel 34
T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically
required in individual piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of
steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering

Manual,” Chapter “The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper
Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing

Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings
and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and

proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should
be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads,

unless dry seal threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe
is being threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads

that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have
cracked or open welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12,

"Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel
Pipe," using qualified processes and welding operators according to
"Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket

material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket
concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening
Parcel 34
to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as

possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
and uniformly using torque wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by

wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to
the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners,

primers, and solvent cements.
b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
e. PVC Non-Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
f. PVC to ABS Non-Pressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and

solvent cement according to ASTM D 3138.
9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by

wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657
procedures and manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
V. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless

otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at
final connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller threaded
pipe connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN65and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and

at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe
connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to

connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

Parcel 34
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights

are not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data.Portions of the Work are

shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Engineer.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,
with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to
accessible locations.
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally

and parallel to equipment shafts if possible.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and

application of paint. B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include

finish coat over enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish.

Include two finish coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include

finish coat over enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include

two finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish.

Include two finish coats over galvanized metal primer.

Parcel 34
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish.

Include two finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes

with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but

not less than 100 mm larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow
supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie
locations. Use 21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and

otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on (450-mm) centers around the full
perimeter of the base.




instructions.

Parcel 34
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and
equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support
and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

Parcel 34
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other
surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled
mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing

surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for

equipment.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Parcel 34
SECTION 230516 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
2.3 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
2.4 GUIDES

Parcel 34
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION

3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
3.5 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping
systems.
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials,

working pressures, and temperatures.
B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between

anchors.

Parcel 34
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and
selection and design of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions

and methods of assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for

each expansion fitting and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional
engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is
legally registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Welding:Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Expansion Joints and Compensators:
a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
b. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.
c. Flexicraft Industries.
d. Metraflex Co.
e. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion Joint Div.
f. Or approved equal.
2. Flexible Ball Joints:

a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
c. Or approved equal.
3. Guides:
a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
b. Flex-Weld, Inc.
c. Grinnell Corp.
d. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
e. Metraflex Co.
2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

Parcel 34
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa minimum pressure rating, with end

fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end
connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless
2. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows,
stainless-steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
3. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and
carbon-steel shroud.
B. Expansion Compensators: 1200- kPa m i n i m u m pressure rating, with
internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
1. End Connections for DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
2. End Connections for DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and

pressure rated for 1200 kPa at 116 deg C minimum.
1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections;
external control rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt
holes.
2. Types: Single and double sphere.
D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-

metal-hose legs joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and
outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.
1. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.
a. End Connections for DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
b. End Connections for DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-

braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C and 3550
kPa at 315 deg C minimum pressure ratings.
d. Joints for DN65 to DN150: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,

stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C and 1380 kPa at
315 deg C minimum pressure ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-

braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg C and 830
kPa at 315 deg C minimum pressure ratings.

Parcel 34
2.3 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint

designed for repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204
deg C minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match
piping system, drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and flanged-
end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.
2. Double-Slip Type: With base.
B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition

packing, designed for 360- degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725
kPa at 204 deg C minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, “Materials Specifications,” and with ASME
B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-
containing parts and bolting.
1. End Connections for DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
2. End Connections for DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for DN150 and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.
2.4 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for
alignment of piping and two- section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head. C.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for

use in hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
Parcel 34
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with

hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy
resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where
fastener is to be installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on
stud, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged non-shrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.
2. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed
C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

Parcel 34
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required

to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in
temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION

A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted
by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected
equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to
piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated,
or otherwise required, and include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written
instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and
anchors installed on or in concrete.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for
touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of
0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

Parcel 34
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with AS1M A 780.
SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1.7 WARRANTY
2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
2.4 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.5 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.6 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.7 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.8 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
2.9 THERMOMETER WELLS
2.10 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
2.12 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
2.13 TEST PLUGS
2.14 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
2.15 TURBINE FLOWMETERS
2.16 VORTEX-SHEDDING FLOWMETERS
Parcel 34
2.17 FLOW INDICATORS

2.18 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
2.19 WATER METERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
3.8 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
3.9 CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical and fire protection
systems and water meters installed outside the building.
B. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for
installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves
for each meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale
range, fittings, and location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying
accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified
requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1. Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flow meters.

Parcel 34
3. Thermal-energy flow meters.

4. Water meters.
A. Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to
construction and installation of meters and gages.
A. Prepare meters and gages for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set flow meters closed or slightly open.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain meters and gages end protection.
2. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store off the ground in
watertight enclosures.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
labels describing contents.
1. for each type of flow meter O-ring and flow sensor.

2. for each type of thermometer, one spare thermometer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish at least three years manufacturer warranty flow meters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Thermometers:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
b. Ernst Gage Co.
c. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
e. Or approved equal.
2. Pressure Gages:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
b. Ernst Gage Co.
Parcel 34
c. Noshok, Inc.
d. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
e. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
3. Test Plugs:
a. Flow Design, Inc.
b. MG Piping Products Co.
c. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
d. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
4. Flow Elements:
a. ABB, Inc.; ABB Instrumentation.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
f. Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div.
g. Taco, Inc.
h. Or approved equal.
5. Flowmeters:
a. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
b. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
c. Hersey Measurement Co.
d. Onicon, Inc.
e. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Measurement Div.
6. Thermal-Energy Flowmeters
a. Data Industrial Corp.
b. ONICON Incorporated.
c. Thermo Measurement Ltd.
d. Or approved equal.
7. Flow Indicators:
a. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
b. Emerson Electric Co.; Brooks Instrument Div.
c. Ernst Gage Co.
8. Water Meters:
a. ABB Water Meters, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Div.
c. Hersey Measurement Co.
d. ISTEC Corp.

Parcel 34
e. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div.

2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.
2. Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale
divisions.
3. Condenser Water: minus 18 to plus 70 deg C, with 1-degree scale
divisions.
4. Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions.
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale
division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
A. Description: ASTM E 1.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front,
spring secured, 230 mm long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane,
360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length
to suit installation.
2.4 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- diameter, glass lens.
D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently
etched markings.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length
to suit installation.
2.5 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- diameter, glass lens.
C. Movement: Brass, precision geared.

Parcel 34
D. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently

etched markings.
E. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit
installation.
F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.
2.6 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.3; direct-mounting, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Stainless steel with 125-mm- diameter, glass lens.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.
2.7 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.3, bimetal type.
B. Dial: 25-mm diameter.
C. Case: Stainless steel.
D. Stem: Dustproof and leakpro of 3-mm- diameter, tapered-end stem with
nominal length of 125 mm.
2.8 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded
pipe fitting to hold fixed thermometer stem.
1. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
2. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not
insulated.
3. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
4. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
5. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.9 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to
hold test thermometer.
1. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not
insulated.
3. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
Parcel 34
4. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.

5. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.10 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded
end for attaching thermometer.
thickness of exterior insulation.
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom
connection; dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets
and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115-mm- diameter, glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8.
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure.
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
2.12 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A. Valves: DN8 brass or stainless-steel needle type.
B. Syphons: DN8 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, DN8 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-
metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.13 TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa minimum.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm OD probe from dial-
type thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C,
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C, ethylene-
propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial
thermometers, pressure gage and carrying case.

Parcel 34
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the

system's operating conditions.
2.14 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing,
valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and
system fluid.
1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range
of equipment or system where used.
2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
3. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total
volume in (liters).
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm-
diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to
flow element.
1. Scale: Liters per second.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
C. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
D. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting
made for installation in piping.
1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings
and attached tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for
DN50 and smaller elements and flanged or welded for DN65 and larger
elements.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa.
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg C.
E. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for

insertion into piping.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with
brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.
2.15 TURBINE FLOWMETERS
A. Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in liters per second.
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body and plastic turbine or
impeller, with integral direct- reading scale.
2. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa minimum.
3. Temperature Rating: 82 deg C minimum.
volume in liters.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2-1/2 percent.
2.16 VORTEX-SHEDDING FLOWMETERS
Parcel 34
A. In-Line Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation between pipe flanges;

measures flow directly in liters per second.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel body, with integral transmitter and direct-

reading scale.
volume in liters.
6. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power operation.
7. Accuracy: Plus or minus 7/10 percent for liquids and 1-1/4 percent for
gases.
B. Insertion Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation in pipe; measures
flow directly in liters per second.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe, with integral transmitter and direct-
reading scale.
volume in liters.
6. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection.
7. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent for liquids and 1-1/2 percent for gases.
2.17 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in
piping systems.
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic
pelton-wheel indicator.
2.18 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
A. Instruments include turbine-wheel flowmeter, two temperature sensors,
transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery pack, integral stop valves,
strainer, and magnetic trap.
B. Instruments include turbine-wheel or flow-sensor element and meter, two
temperature sensors, transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery
pack, integral stop valves, strainer, and magnetic trap.
1. Construction: Bronze body.
3. Temperature Range: 0 to 121 deg C.
4. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatt
hours or joules.
Parcel 34
5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.

6. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.
2.19 WATER METERS
A. Description: AWWA C701, turbine type. Registers flow in liters or cubic meters
as required by utility.
B. Description: AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line, proportional,
detector type; 1035-kPa working pressure; with meter on bypass. Registers
flow in liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
1. Bypass Meter: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case; size not less
than one-half nominal size of main-line meter.
2. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; size not less
than one-half nominal size of main-line meter.
C. Description: AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line-turbine,
detector type; 1200-kPa working pressure; with strainer and with meter on
bypass. Registers flow in liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
1. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; not less than
DN50.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written
instructions for applications where used.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic chiller.
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up
central systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
4. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
5. Each duct thermometer support flange.
C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing
connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use
minimum tubing length.
D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed
thermometers are indicated.
1. Install with socket extending to center of pipe.
2. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.
E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test
thermometers are indicated.
1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.
Parcel 34
2. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct
thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe
at most readable position.
B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
2. Building water-service entrance.
3. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump,
including fire and booster pumps.
D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure
gages.
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flow meters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet
of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of
pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's
D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible
locations.
E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in
accessible locations.
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters
as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for
remote sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to
support meter.
A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 and utility's
requirements.

Parcel 34
1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water meter

inlet. Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass around
meter, unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter
inlet and outlet and on full- size valved bypass around meter. Support
meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
3.8 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to
utility's instructions and requirements.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and Division
23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow
service and maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters
and devices.
C. Ground electrically operated meters.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s
published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after
installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces.
Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred
surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.

Parcel 34
SECTION 230523 – VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
2.3 GATE VALVES
2.4 BALL VALVES
2.5 PLUG VALVES
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
2.8 CHECK VALVES
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
3.8 ADJUSTING

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping
systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design,
pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating
materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances,
and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating
at least 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in
successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on
adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations"
Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and
ASME B31.1 for power piping.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm
drainage piping valves unless referenced.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents
referenced.
D. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.

Parcel 34
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the
ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do
not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
1. Valves:
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division (UK).
b. Econosto (Holland)
c. NIBCO Inc (USA).
d. Hattersley (UK).
e. Victaulic Company of America (USA).
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as
specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full
extension of rising stems.
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under
ground or above ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated
with 7.5 mm fusion bonded epoxy coating.

Parcel 34
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule"

of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and
temperatures.
D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the
following special operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 and smaller, except for
plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1
wrench for every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 and larger, installed 2400

mm or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 and larger.
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended

stems arranged to receive insulation.
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain
connections.
H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24
for bronze valves.
J. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a
melting point below 450 deg C for gate, globe, and check valves; below
216 deg C for ball valves.
K. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access

shall be provided.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, DN65 and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa cold
working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070-kPa CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-
bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper- silicon alloy rising
stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered
end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
B. Gate Valves, DN80 and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 1380-kPa CWP, ASTM
A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem,
outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland
assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES

Parcel 34
A. Ball Valves, DN100 and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 4140-kPa CWP,
ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated
brass ball, standard port for DN15 valves and smaller and conventional port for
DN20 valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and
seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
3. Memory Stop: For operator handles.
2.5 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug Valves: Lubricated MSS SP-78, 1200-kPa CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body and bonnet, cast- iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or
grooved end connections:
1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 and larger.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 and larger,
2400 mm or higher above floor.
2.6 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe Valves, DN65 and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa CWP, or
Class 150, 2070-kPa CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet,
rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze- alloy stem, teflon-impregnated
packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with
aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, DN80 and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 1380-kPa CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable
bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-
impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with
cast- iron handwheel.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1380-kPa CWP, 1035- kPa maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck,
stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals,
lug, or grooved style:
1. Disc Type: Epoxy-coated ductile iron.
2. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Lever handle with latch lock.
3. Operator for Sizes DN200 to DN600: Gear operator with position

indicator.

Parcel 34
4. Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger, 2400 mm or Higher above Floor:
Chain-wheel operator.
2.8 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa
CWP, or Class 150, 2070- kPa CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62
cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition
seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 1380-kPa
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted
non-slam, bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
C. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126,
AWWA C508 having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air
cushioned side mounted cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis connected to
ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved connection.
D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main
components), horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, bronze disc
or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel holder threaded or soldered end
connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent
disc movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and
seats made accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check
bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper
size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and
damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Parcel 34
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and Division

23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to
allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system
shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm above finished floor
elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel
wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside
of tube.
D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition
discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder
inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact.
Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or
overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts
around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal
seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except
where dry seal threading is specified.

Parcel 34
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into
which the pipe is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges
and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and
downstream for proper shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe
and ball valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification
Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa CWP, with stem extension.
3. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system,
and bronze or teflon disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or

elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem
seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
7. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.
C. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body.
2. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.

Parcel 34
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class
125, cast-iron body.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or

elastomer-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
5. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat;
Class 125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer
check; or Class 125, cast-iron body lift check.
D. Condenser Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
2. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
3. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class
125, cast-iron body.
4. Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze, epoxy-coated ductile iron disc;

EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
5. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat;
Class 125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer
check; or Class 125, cast-iron body lift check.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into
service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak
persists.
SECTION 230529- HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Parcel 34
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings
Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe
Hangers and Supports."
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test
water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test
water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
D. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and
supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system
component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
Parcel 34
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for

multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic and design
calculations justifying forces, sizes, embedments and characteristics of
components and fabrication details.
operators.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and
calculations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified
professional engineer.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and
calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a
qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is
legally registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of hangers, supports and seismic restraints that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
d. Erico-Caddy.
e. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. Channel Support Systems:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.

Parcel 34
c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
d. Unistrut Corp.
e. Erico-Caddy.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
b. Pipe Shields, Inc.
c. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
d. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-
fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in
Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have
field-applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are
indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa minimum compressive-strength
insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire
circumference of pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of
pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating
below ambient air temperature.

Parcel 34
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin

attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and
galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and packaged, nonshrink and
nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting;
recommended for both interior and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment
and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and
except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following
types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of
noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750.
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to
DN900, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type
support for pipes, DN65 to DN900, if vertical adjustment is required, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750,
from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65
to DN500, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN1050, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

Parcel 34
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN600, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
DN50 to DN750, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe
risers, DN20 to DN500, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe
rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to
various types of building attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C piping
installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper
attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom
flange of beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of
beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For
attaching to structural steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending
from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated
loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg.

Parcel 34
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg.
8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam
is required.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject
to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree
insert of high-density, 690-kPa minimum compressive-strength, water-
repellent-treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with
vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does
not exceed 32 mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load
and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction
of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load
and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction
of piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid
transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or
connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test,
and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

Parcel 34
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-
89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly
support piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as
specified above for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.
Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-
69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves,
flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of
piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms
and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed
and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder- actuated tool
manufacturer's operating manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement
of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors,
and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion
bends, and similar units.

Parcel 34
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead
loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected
equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes
and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping," is not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-

hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor

barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe DN100 and larger if pipe is installed
on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor
barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe DN100 and larger if pipe is installed
on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. DN8 to DN90: 300 mm long and 1.22 mm thick.
b. DN100: 300 mm long and 1.52 mm thick.
c. DN125 and DN150: 450 mm long and 1.52 mm thick. d. DN200

to DN350: 600 mm long and 1.91 mm thick.
e. DN400 to DN600: 600 mm long and 2.67 mm thick.
5. Pipes DN200 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
Parcel 34

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or
to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing
surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes
and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections
that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work, and with the following:
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments
and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for
touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of
0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

Parcel 34
SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC

RESTRAINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.6 SEISMIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration
isolation roof curbs, and seismic restraints and snubbers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of
isolator specified. Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional
engineer, for the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators,
design of vibration isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages

and attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include
auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
3. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints

and snubbers.

registered and qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations
of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration
and seismic restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
a. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in
selection of vibration and seismic restraints. All selection shall be
certified by manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all

specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance
Requirements" Article above. Include the following:

Parcel 34
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is

based on actual test of assembled components or on calculations.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.

A. Project seismic zone is 2B with a zone factor of 0.20.
B. Building Importance Factor: 1.5.
1.6 SEISMIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: The requirements for seismic protection measures
described in this section shall be applied to the mechanical equipment and
systems listed below.
B. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall
include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in other
Sections of the Specification:
1. Expansion air separator tanks.
2. Water chiller units.
3. Cooling towers.
4. Air handling units.
5. Pumps with motors.
6. Exhaust and return fans.
C. Contractor Designed Bracing: The Contractor shall design the bracing in

accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Design shall be
performed by a certified engineer. Resistance to lateral forces induced by
earthquakes shall be accomplished without consideration of friction resulting
from gravity loads.
D. Items Not Covered By This Section: Fire Protection Systems. Seismic protection
of piping for fire protection systems shall be installed as specified in Division 21.

Parcel 34
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-
restraint devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is
supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-
system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation
bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corp.
4. Greene Rubber Co.
5. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
6. King, H.A., Ltd.
7. Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Rubatex Corp.
9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
10. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
11. Or approved equal
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of the equipment supported.
1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single
or multiple layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates
of sufficient stiffness to provide uniform loading over the pad area.

Parcel 34
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than
25 mm thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times
the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa and a deflection not less than 2 mm per
25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa.
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant

rubber or neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates.
Factory-drilled and tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-
drilled baseplate for bolted connection to structure. Color-code to indicate
capacity range.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed
height of the spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated

load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,

without deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm

thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size
baseplates to limit floor loading to 690 kPa.
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable,

steel open-spring-type isolators.
1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring
extension due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled
baseplate for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Provide adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt.


load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.

Parcel 34

6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Hot-dip galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or

neoprene isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded
connections for hanger rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring
and elastomeric insert in compression.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to
allow for 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.


load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate

capacity range.
2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and
fabricated by the isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment
static loadings, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever
loadings.
1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel
shapes, plates, and bars conforming to ASTM A 36M. Include support
brackets to anchor base to isolation units. Include prelocated equipment
anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height
with not less than 25- mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural

frame. Pour concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
Parcel 34
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide
for anchor bolts and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight
curb designed to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand
56-m/s wind impinging laterally against the side of the equipment. Design
restraints to meet seismic requirements.
B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding,
unhoused, laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1. Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building
structure and include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material
and 50 mm of rigid insulation on the inside of the assembly.
2. Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt

to permit leveling of equipment after installation. Attach to lower
assembly with a rubber isolation pad. Locate spring isolators so they are
accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation
without interfering with the integrity of the roof.
3. Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials,

attached to the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer
of the lower support assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify
actual locations before installation.
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products according to
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation
bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
Parcel 34
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation

bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete,
and trowel to a smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in
Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration
isolators.
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or
concrete inertia bases.
B. Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-
mounted piece of equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the
vibration isolators and bolt to supporting structure.
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze
anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend
across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-
iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze
anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to
hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal
operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so
they are out of contact during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at
operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal
mode of operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written
recommendations to resist seismic forces.
I. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-
control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

Parcel 34

Parcel 34
SECTION 230553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

3.2 VALVE TAGS
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond
paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown
on tag, room or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark
valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Furnish copies
for maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 aside from mounted copies.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for
lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices.
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and
painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 22

and Division 23 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed
applications, selection is Contractor's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data
engraved or stamped.

Parcel 34
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,

operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and
essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to

recommendations of ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts,
and 20 mm for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
1. Material: Brass.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless

otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to

ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-

coded, pressure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees
around pipe at each location.
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to
accommodate both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to
indicate direction of flow.
G. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the

following color codes:
1. Green: Cold-air supply.
2. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
3. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply,

return, and exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.
H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-

adhesive, vinyl tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.
1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65
mm for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system
abbreviation and 13-mm sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum.
2. Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

Parcel 34
J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.

K. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with
abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-
mm center hole for attachment.
L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on
masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-

thickness glass.
M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base,

phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black
phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical
fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to
match equipment identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent

adhesive.
N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the

following color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
3. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
4. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME

A13.1.
5. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:

a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and

leaving conditions, and speed.
6. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 by 150
mm for equipment.

Parcel 34
O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of

plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 85 by 145 mm.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION,

or DO NOT OPERATE.
P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other

designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations
indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification,
operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple
systems of same name are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction
of flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by
following method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 20 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker,
and covering full circumference of pipe.
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by
following method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 40 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker,
and covering full circumference of pipe.
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts,
tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according
to the following:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and
terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible

enclosures.

Parcel 34
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15-m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to

7.5 m in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately

spaced markers.
3.2 VALVE TAGS

A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,
valves within factory- fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops,
shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn- watering hose connections, and
HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures
and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color
scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: 40 mm, round.
2. Hot Water: 40 mm, round.
3. Fire Protection: 40 mm, round.
4. Sprinkler: 40 mm, round.
5. Gas: 40 mm, round.
E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Cold Water: Blue.
2. Hot Water: Yellow.
3. Fire Protection: Red.
4. Sprinkler: Red.
5. Gas: Yellow.
F. Letter Color: According to the following:

1. Cold Water: Black.
2. Hot Water: Black.
3. Fire Protection: White.

Parcel 34
4. Sprinkler: White.
5. Gas: Black.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each
major item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general
categories of equipment:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
2. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
3. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
4. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption

units.
5. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
6. Coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar

equipment.
7. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
8. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, , fan coil units, controls
and components.
9. Tanks and pressure vessels.
10. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar

equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in

exposed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed
above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment.
1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in
unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with
duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and
direction of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed
spaces and at maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are
exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

Parcel 34
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become

visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
2.2 PREPARATION
2.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.6 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
2.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
2.8 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
2.9 MOTORS
2.10 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
2.11 TEMPERATURE TESTING
2.12 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
2.13 TOLERANCES
2.14 REPORTING
2.15 FINAL REPORT

Parcel 34
2.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing VAC systems to produce
design objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including
submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to
specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total VAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of VAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of VAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and
equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and
equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment,
such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including
submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more
factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow,

Parcel 34
whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally

dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to
yield repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the
pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on
the suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the
performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from
those presented when the fan was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters
or leaves the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or
equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing
and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
P. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team
members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article
below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Engineer's
Notice to Commence, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report
as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies
and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below.
Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

Parcel 34
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of

reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by
the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and
balancing report forms.
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified
by either AABC or NEBB, or another agency acceptable to the Engineer.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Employer's
and the Engineer's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and
balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of
the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team
members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, VAC
controls,Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice
of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the

testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes
the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare
certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the
approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent's report forms as approved by the Engineer.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national
standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for
NEBB Certification".
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months
or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
Parcel 34

A. Employer Occupancy: The Employer may occupy completed areas of the
building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Employer during
testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the
Employer's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems
and equipment, VAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate VAC
systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing
activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test
dates and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on
air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project
requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may
preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that
quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and
appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of VAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section " Record
(As-Built) Documents."
D. Examine the Engineer's design data, including VAC system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems'
output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about VAC system
and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system
effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced
capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce
the performance ratings of VAC equipment when installed under conditions
different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at
the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts
Parcel 34
found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in

SMACNA's "VAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this
data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are
complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified
in individual Specification Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine VAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated
balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for
effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by
adjusting and balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed,
bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with
functioning controls is ready for operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes,
to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and
functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight.
Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine valves for proper installation for their intended function.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and
straight fins.
P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks
and controls.
Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended
controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness
of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone
units, mixing boxes, and variable- air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-
way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
Parcel 34
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract

Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system
reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different
from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures.
2.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and
step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports.
Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are
required and access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system
operations can be met.
2.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the
procedures contained in SMACNA's "VAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test
probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of
procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch
insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor
barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification
material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control
levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
2.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

Parcel 34
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet
factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of
required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the
return dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor
starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
2.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and
exhaust-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-
volume. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this
Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm
listed by the fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as
follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as
practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows
and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the

flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as

near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and
downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of

the plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

Parcel 34
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which

maintenance personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as

sound traps under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations
in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual
system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where
variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual
conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the
Engineer. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and
electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload.
Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors.
Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no
overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and
economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch
ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper

and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable
for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal
outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within
specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet
manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within
specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume
dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified
tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the
limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
Parcel 34
2.6 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence
starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows
against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus
5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following,
in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at
design flow.
3. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential
pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-
displacement type, unless several terminal valves are kept open.
4. Set system controls so that automatic valves are wide open to heat
exchangers.
5. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-
balancing device so that motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
6. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
2.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for
positive-displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.
Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and
correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the
manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the
intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential
across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve.
Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake
horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's
performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with
nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

Parcel 34
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first
balance.
1. System components that have CV rating or an accurately
cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-
indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to
achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as
follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design
flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest
percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the
lowest percentage over design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage,
voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures,
including outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the
conclusions of balancing.
2.8 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems
at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified
above for hydronic systems.
2.9 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the
following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

Parcel 34
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at

speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the
controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller
manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
2.10 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils

designed for less than 3540 L/s.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
2.11 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in
temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of
2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove
correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone
is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
2.12 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would
adversely affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature
controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and
valve operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and
device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements.
Note the speed of response to input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
Parcel 34
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer
operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the
system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe
operations.
2.13 TOLERANCES
A. Set VAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
2.14 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract
Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the
adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes
and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance
measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to VAC
systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring
and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed
procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list
of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced.
Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems
serving multiple floors.
2.15 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard
bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and
balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified
testing and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the
following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.

Parcel 34
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include

approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the
following data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the

report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the

Contract Documents.
10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from
design values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the
following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

Parcel 34
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum

pitch diameter.
f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution

systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c..
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m.
h. Tube size in DN.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Airflow rate in L/s.
b. Average face velocity in m/s.

Parcel 34
c. Air pressure drop in Pa.
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg. C.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg. C.
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg. C.
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg. C.
h. Water flow rate in L/s.
i. Water pressure differential in kPa.
j. Entering-water temperature in deg. C.
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg. C.
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa.
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg. C. o. Inlet steam pressure in

kPa.
G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in

mm.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

Parcel 34
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm , and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in

mm.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
a. Total airflow rate in L/s.
b. Total system static pressure in Pa.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa.
e. Suction static pressure in Pa.
H. Round, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg. C.
d. Duct static pressure in Pa.
e. Duct size in mm.
f. Duct area in sq. m.
g. Design airflow rate in L/s.
h. Design velocity in m/s.
i. Actual airflow rate in L/s.
j. Actual average velocity in m/s.
k. Barometric pressure in Pa.
I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

Parcel 34
c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. m.
b. Air velocity in m/s.
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in L/s.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in m/s.
e. Final airflow rate in L/s.
f. Final velocity in m/s.
g. Space temperature in deg. C.
J. System-Coil Reports: For coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.
b. Entering-water temperature in deg. C.

Parcel 34
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg. C.
d. Water pressure drop in kPa.
e. Entering-air temperature in deg. C.
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg. C.
K. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems,

stand-alone refrigerant compressors, or air-cooled condensing units, include
the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in kg.
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg. C.
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in Pa.
b. Outlet-duct static pressure in Pa.
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg. C.
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg. C.
e. Condenser water pressure differential in kPa.
f. Control settings.
g. Unloader set points.
h. Low-pressure-cutout set point in kPa.
i. High-pressure-cutout set point in kPa.
j. Suction pressure in kPa.
k. Suction temperature in deg.C.

Parcel 34
l. Condenser refrigerant pressure in kPa.
m. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg. C.
n. Oil pressure in kPa.
o. Oil temperature in deg.C.
p. Voltage at each connection.
q. Amperage for each phase.
r. The kW input.
s. Crankcase heater kW.
t. Number of fans.
u. Condenser fan rpm.
v. Condenser fan airflow rate in L/s.
w. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
x. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
y. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
L. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller
size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in L/s.
g. Water pressure differential in kPa.
h. Required net positive suction head in kPa.
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in mm.

Parcel 34
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
a. Static head in kPa.
b. Pump shutoff pressure in kPa.
c. Actual impeller size in mm.
d. Full-open flow rate in L/s.
e. Full-open pressure in kPa.
f. Final discharge pressure in kPa.
g. Final suction pressure in kPa.
h. Final total pressure in kPa.
i. Final water flow rate in L/s.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
M. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the

following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Applicatin.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.

Parcel 34
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform

additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being
maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were
not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform
additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and
winter conditions.
2.17 TESTING OF THE THIRD PARTY INTERFACES TO THE BMS
A. Certain of the extra low voltage building systems interface with the BMS
at the BMS Automation level. The interface between the BMS Automation
Level Network and each third party system shall be demonstrated at an offsite
location prior to the award of contract for the third party system. The tests shall
be fully coordinated by the mechanical contractor who shall liaise with each
party concerned and shall ensure that the necessary test facilities are available
and operational.
B. It shall be conclusively demonstrated that the BMS can communicate with the
third party system and vice versa. Provide a report detailing the tests
undertaken and the results of the tests. If the tests are successful a time shall
be established that is acceptable to the Employer and Engineer when the
interface can be demonstrated. Each party involved in the test shall provide
the applicable components necessary to perform the demonstration. Ensure
the presence of suitably skilled personnel at the tests. The components
provided for and the functions performed at the tests by each party shall be
those that they are required to provide for the actual installation.
C. The testing of the interface between the BMS Automation Level Network and
the third party system shall verify, at minimum, that:

Parcel 34
1. All data communicated from the third party system to the BMS
Automation Level Network is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply
completely with ASHRAE SSPC/135 or LON SNVTs that comply
completely with ANSI/EIA-709.1 as applicable. The decision as to
whether the interface is BACnet or LON shall be dependent on the BMS
selected.
2. All data points mapped from the BMS to the third party system are
displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.
3. All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering
units and significant digits on both systems.
4. All points mapped from the third party system to the BMS meet all
of the specifications detailed in the contract documents for points directly
monitored/controlled by the BMS.
5. The communications watchdog is functioning correctly.
6. Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
7. Both systems restart and communications between the two systems

resume following a power failure without operator intervention.
D. The third party systems that shall be interfaced with the BMS Automation Level
shall be:
1. Variable speed drive controllers
2. Duplex drainage and sewage pumps controllers
3. Pre-action valve controllers
E. Certain of the extra low voltage systems interface with the Management Level
Network. The interface between the Management Level Network and the third
party systems shall be demonstrated at an offsite location prior to the award of
contract for the third party system. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the
mechanical contractor who shall liaise with each party concerned and shall
ensure that the necessary test facilities including a data port to a 1 gigabit per
second Ethernet network, a terminal server and a BMS thin client workstation
are available and operational.
F. It shall be conclusively demonstrated that a BMS thin client workstation on the
Management Level Network can communicate with the third party system and
vice versa. Provide a report detailing the tests undertaken and the results of
the tests. If the tests are successful a time shall be established that is
acceptable to the Employer and Engineer when the interface can be
demonstrated. Each party involved in the test shall provide the applicable
components necessary to perform the demonstration. Ensure the presence of
suitably skilled personnel at the tests. The components provided for and the

Parcel 34
functions performed at the tests by each party shall be those that they are
required to provide for the actual installation.
G. The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and the
third party system shall verify, at minimum, that:
1. All data communicated from the third party system to the
Management Level Network is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply
completely with ASHRAE SSPC/135.
2. All data points mapped from the Management Level Network to the third
party system are displayed correctly on the third party system monitor.
3. All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering
units and significant digits on the third party system and the BMS thin
client workstation.
4. All points mapped from the third party system to the Management Level
Network meet all of the specifications detailed in the BMS specifications
for points directly monitored/controlled by the BMS.
5. The communications watchdog is functioning correctly.
6. Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
7. Both systems restart and communications between the two systems

resume following a power failure without operator intervention.
H. The third party systems that shall be interfaced with the Management Level
Network shall be :
1. UPS Controllers.
2. Switchboard Electronic Meters.
I. All parties associated with the exchange of data between the third party
systems and the Management level Network and between the third party
systems and the BMS Automation Level shall coordinate their work so as to
ensure that the intent and requirements of these specifications, the
specifications for the third party systems and the specifications in Section
15900 are attained.

Parcel 34
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.7 COORDINATION
1.8 SCHEDULING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
3.5 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
3.7 FINISHES
3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching
insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and
attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for
firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and
smoke barriers.
2. Division 23 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and

application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 23 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
4. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.

A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or
otherwise attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry
state. Materials to be used on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795
requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by
NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-
insulation materials, except cellular elastomers, shall have a maximum flame-
spread classification (FSC) of 25 and a smoke-developed classification (SDC)
of 50. Flame-contributed classification (FCC) shall be as specified for the
application. These maximum values shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255.
C. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.
Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified
temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures
normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory
and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

Parcel 34
2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections
of each sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for
each type of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer,

indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements
indicated. Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply
with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials
identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723,
NFPA 225 or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement
material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-
developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and

smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation
and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
finishes. Build mockups according to the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 3-m section of rectangular straight duct.
b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
c. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.

Parcel 34
e. Four support hangers.
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application

details for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation

application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if

undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with
appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade,
and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation
application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Manson.
2. Fiberglass Ltd.
3. Johns-Manville.

Parcel 34
4. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
5. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
6. Schuller International, Inc.
7. St. Gobain.
8. Izocam
9. Manson
10. or approved equal

A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and
with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim,
aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
2. Density : 24kg/m3.
B. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of

noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type
II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270
g/sq. m.
1. Tape Width: 100 mm.
B. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or

1.6-mm, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

Parcel 34
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel

plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with
adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate
for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to
achieve a holding capacity of 45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the
adhered surface.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are
compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the
manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to
receive a vapor retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and
vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

Parcel 34
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in

insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-
retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around
anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are
indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended
by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply

mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and
fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor
retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal
with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same
facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape
or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and

secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having
same facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with
top of roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation

ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke
damper sleeves for fire- rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at
floor support at top of floor.

Parcel 34
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and

seal insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic.

A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage

rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum
surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of

fittings and transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal
ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from
insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm
o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply
additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at
cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,

rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation
by removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 13- mm staples, 25 mm
o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 50 mm on longitudinal seams

and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a
maximum of 450 mm o.c.

Parcel 34
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full

insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-
oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150- mm wide strips of the same material used to
insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange
with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage
rates for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of

fittings and transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along

longitudinal centerline of duct.
Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400
mm o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints.
Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against
surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,

rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation
by removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 13- mm staples, 25 mm
o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full

insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as
Parcel 34
closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply

insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered
gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150- mm wide strips of the same material used to
insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange
with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for

insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.

A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as
follows:
1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands.
Tighten bands without deforming the insulation material.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least
75 mm. Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel
wire. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands.
3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a

skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed
insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on
one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm.
Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the
finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or
insulation with factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams
and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket

manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw

insulation.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-
cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured,
apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

Parcel 34
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to
allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of

this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules
at the end of this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply-, and return air ductwork.
2. Indoor exposed supply-, and return air ductwork.
3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
4. Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
following systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner.
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and

sections.
5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Testing agency labels and stamps.
7. Nameplates and data plates.
8. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Supply-air ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
2. Thickness: 25 mm.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket

where exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
Parcel 34
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Return-air ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.
3. Number of Layers: One.

SECTION 230716 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.6 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
Parcel 34

3.5 FINISHES
3.7 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation materials and
application for ducts and plenums.
2. Division 23 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Field application for each equipment type.
2. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square
sections of each sample material.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to

Engineer, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
with requirements.
Parcel 34
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a

craft training program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
NFPA 225, or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
inspecting agency.
a. One balancing or pressure regulating valve.


Engineer.

application.

8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed

at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation
application.

Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
but are not limited to, the following or approved equal:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson. (USA)
b. Fiberglass Ltd. (USA)
c. Izocam (Turkey)
d. Johns-Manville. (USA)
e. Lapinus (Cypus)
f. St. Gobain. (france)
2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (USA)
b. Rubatex Corp. (USA)
c. K-Flex (Italy )

A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-

rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

Parcel 34
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation

2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity: ≤ 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction : Up to 27 ΔL for 20mm thick insulation.

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy
complying with ASTM B209M, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier
over entire surface in contact with insulation.
1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.8 mm thick for indoor
installation and 1 mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II
for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270
g/sq. m.


D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel
plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with
adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate
for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve
a holding capacity of 45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered
surface.
Parcel 34
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
and free of voids throughout the length of equipment.
thicknesses required for each equipment system.
insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in
retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around
anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are
indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
Parcel 34
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic

on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and
pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures,
tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
O. Insulate the following indoor equipment:
1. Chilled water, valves and accessories.
P. Omit insulation from the following:

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and
joints.


insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.

Parcel 34
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor- retarder mastic.
C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of
tanks and vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end
joints with manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead
under lap and the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
D. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.5 FINISHES
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency acceptable to Engineer, to
perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
B. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing
insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with
requirements:
1. Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Engineer.
2. Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent
of chilled-water pumps, whichever is greater.
3. Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small
tanks, whichever is greater.
C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with
new materials according to these Specifications.
D. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for

inspection according to these Specifications.
Parcel 34
3.7 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at
the end of this Section.
SECTION 230719 - PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
3.8 FINISHES

Parcel 34
3.9 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

3.11 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
3.12 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating
cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.

1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for
firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and
smoke barriers.
2. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 23 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and

application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
4. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and
protection saddles.

A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or
otherwise attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry
state. Materials to be used on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795
requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by
NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-
insulation materials, except cellular elastomers, shall have a flame-spread
classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke-developed classification (SDC) of 50.

Parcel 34
These maximum values shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E 84

and NFPA 255. Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for
each type of insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties

for each type of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50.
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.
3. Jacket Materials: 300 mm long by DN50.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer,

indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a
craft training program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
NFPA 225 or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
inspecting agency.
Parcel 34

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and

smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.
a. One 3-m section of DN50 straight pipe.
b. One 90-degree elbow.
c. One tee fitting.
d. One DN50 valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One reducer.


Engineer.

application.

8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed

at time of Substantial
Completion.

Parcel 34

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields
specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation
application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where
required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may
begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
e. St. Gobain.
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
b. Or approved equal.
3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Rubatex Corp.
Parcel 34
4. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:
a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.
5. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
b. Pabco.
c. Schuller International, Inc.
6. Sealant, mastic coating and adhesives:
a. Foster Product Corporation.

A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation : Glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin complying with the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type1, with factory-
applied, all- purpose, vapor-retarder FSK jacket.
a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
b. Density: 64 kg/m3.
2. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes

and grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-
fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for
bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for

indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
4. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
5. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM

C 196.

Parcel 34
6. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and FinishiCement: Comply

with ASTM
C 449M/C 449.
B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed,

rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type
II, Class 1.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-

rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and
Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity: ≤ 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 ΔL for 20 mm thick insulation.
D. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement.
Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and
flanges.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant all
purpose, kraft paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and
forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), 3003
alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick.
2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

Parcel 34
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows;

same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
D. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll
stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.
1. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
2. Elbows: Gore type, for 45- and 90-degree elbows in same material, finish,
and thickness as jacket.
3. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II
for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270
g/sq. m.


2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION

Parcel 34
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove
free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
thicknesses required for each piping system.
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe
runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous
thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to
special instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in
retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend

insulation on anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe
and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

Parcel 34
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by
the hanger, support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage
rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75-mm wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip and spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply insulation

with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at
100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a

vapor retarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic

on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and
fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal
voids with vapor- retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with
top of roof flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation

ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50

mm below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

Parcel 34
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls,

terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with
vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through
walls and floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously
through penetrations of fire- rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7
Section "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic
where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints
with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at
intervals of 4.5 to 6 m to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation
segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched
staples at 150 mm o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended
by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange
and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,

overlapping seams at least 25 mm, and seal joints with vapor-retarder
mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

Parcel 34
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight

segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply
mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a
thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with
wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Secure fitting

covers with manufacturer's attachement and accessories. Seal seams with
tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:

2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber

blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to
packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For
check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without
disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories.
Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation
with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of
air to the pipe surface.

1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

Parcel 34

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of
sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will
allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will
allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe
insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of
insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with

manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in
insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 300-mm
intervals and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75
mm. Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire
spaced at 300-mm intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands
at 300-mm intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of

installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and
press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm.
Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish
coat to achieve smooth finish.
Parcel 34

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block
insulation of the same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.

2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered

sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with
stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.

1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to
strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and
joints.


insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
Parcel 34
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor- retarder mastic.
C. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50-mm overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end
joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and at end joints.
3.8 FINISHES
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured,
apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective
coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
3.9 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the
following systems, materials, and equipment:
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow
regulators.

Parcel 34
A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency acceptable to Engineer, to

perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
B. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing
insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with
requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.
2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is

less, for various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is

less, for various pipe sizes.
C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with
new materials according to these Specifications.
D. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for
inspection according to these Specifications.
3.11 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor
retarders, and field- applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and
material, thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.12 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.
1. Operating Temperature: 15 to 60 deg C.
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber; except for pipe drops to fixtures within
walls, use flexible elastomeric, 13 mm thick.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, DN50 and Smaller: 25 mm.
b. Pipe, Larger than DN50: 38 mm.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: None.
B. Service: Condensate drain piping.

Parcel 34
2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
3. Insulation Thickness: 25 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.
6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, all sizes: 50 mm.

6. Finish: None.
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 STANDARDS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.6 COORDINATION
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

2.5 PREINSULATED PIPING
2.6 VALVES
2.7 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
3.10 ADJUSTING
3.11 PAINTING
3.12 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for,
chilled-water cooling, and condenser water systems.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and
methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for

sealing pipe penetrations through exterior walls.
Parcel 34
3. Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general

piping materials and installation requirements.
4. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product

descriptions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is
specified in this Section.
5. Division 23 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and
check valves.
6. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and
pressure gages.
7. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying

hydronic piping.
8. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories

for hydronic piping.
9. Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature-

control valves and sensors.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative
1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings
2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are
made on threads(metric dimensions)
3. BS 916 Black bolts, screws and nuts
4. BS 1387 Screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars for plain end steel
tubes suitable for welding of for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
5. BS 1845 Filler metals for brazing
6. BS 1965 Butt-welding pipe fittings for pressure purposes
7. BS 4504 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and
pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings,
calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow- control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe
support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their
attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment
guides, and expansion joints and loops.

Parcel 34

personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
Include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include

in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality
available at Project site.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for
materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall
bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and
expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system
components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related
Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls
and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified
in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and
smoke wall and floor assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system
startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial
Completion.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Victaulic Company of America.
2. Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Gerand Engineering Company.
c. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
d. Taco, Inc.
3. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
b. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.
4. Safety Valves:
b. ITT McDonnell & Miller Div.; ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
c. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

Parcel 34
a. Flow Design, Inc.
b. Griswold Controls.
6. Expansion Tanks:
b. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. c. Taco, Inc.
d. Reflex
e. Pneumatex AG
7. Air Separators and Air Purgers:
b. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. c. Taco, Inc.
d. Reflex
e. Pneumatex AG

A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe
and fitting materials.
A. Steel Pipe, DN 300 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, DN 350 through DN 450: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-
resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel,
plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, DN 500 and Larger: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance
welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 20, black steel, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black
steel; seamless for DN 50 and smaller and electric-resistance welded for DN
65 and larger.
D. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.

Parcel 34
E. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

F. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
G. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125,
and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
H. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining
pipe.
I. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5,
including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end
connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
J. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile

iron; ASTM A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S,
Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or
shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
K. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and
synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts,
bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
L. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-
reinforcing protective jacket; 1035-kPa minimum working pressure and
121 deg C maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged
or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be
capable of 20-mm misalignment.
M. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel
flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating
temperatures up to 121 deg C and pressures up to 1035 kPa.
N. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1035-kPa minimum working pressure, steel
pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring,
packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome- plated finish on slip-pipe
telescoping section.
O. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and
for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.
P. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled;
and design temperatures and pressures.
2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.

Parcel 34
B. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule
40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.
1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2.5 PREINSULATED PIPING

A. Description: Factory-fabricated piping with carrier pipe, insulation, and casing.
B. Carrier Pipe: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B
with beveled ends for welded joints.
C. Carrier Pipe Insulation:
1. Polyurethane Foam Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 591, preformed, rigid, cellular.
a. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.13 at 75 deg F (0.019 at 24 deg

C).
b. Service Temperature: Minus 250 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 156 to

plus 93 degC).
c. Moisture Absorption: ASTM D 2842, maximum 0.054 percent by

volume.
d. Minimum 90 percent closed cell.
e. Dry Density: 2 lb/cu. ft (32kg/ cu. m) maximum.
f. Compressive Strength: 35 psig (242 kPa) minimum at 5 percent

deformation.
g. Water-Vapor Transmission: 1.26 perm inches (1.83ng/Pa x s x m)

according to ASTM E96.
D. Casing: HDPE
E. Casing accessories include the following:
1. Joint Kit: Half-self, pourable or split insulation, casing sleeve, and shrink-
wrap sleeve.
2. Expansion Blanket: Elastomeric foam, formed to fit over piping.
3. End Seals: Shrink wrap the casing material to seal watertight around
casing and carrier pipe.
F. Source Quality Control: Factory test the carrier pipe to 150 percent of the
operating pressure of system. Furnish test certificates.
2.6 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 23 Section
"Valves."

Parcel 34
B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.

C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, DN 50 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 1035-
kPa working pressure, 107 deg C maximum operating temperature, and having
threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for
portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a
memory stop to retain set position.
D. Calibrated Balancing Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball
type, 1035-kPa working pressure, 107 deg C maximum operating
temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have
calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter
with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with
low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system
shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity,
and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating
pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
F. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass
and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and
heat capacity and shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section IV.
G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Gray-iron body, factory set to maintain
constant flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations,
and equipped with a readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow
charts, and carrying case. Each valve shall have an identification tag attached
by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification, valve number, and
flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs:
1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 1206 kPa at 93 deg Cwith stainless-
steel piston and spring.
2. Brass or ferrous-metal body, designed for 2068 kPa at 121 deg C

with corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring
assembly easily removable for inspection or replacement.
3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control
valve, with stainless- steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and
temperature test valves, and designed for 2067 kPa at 121 deg C.
H. Drain Valves: Valves shall be the gate valve type which are in accordance with
MSS SP-80. Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above
with a threaded end connection. Valve shall be provided with a water hose
nipple adapter.
I. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa minimum
CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass
ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel
handle.
Parcel 34
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread

and cap.
2.7 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa working
pressure; 107 deg C operating temperature; manually operated with
screwdriver or thumbscrew; with DN 6 discharge connection and DN 15 inlet
connection.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze
body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa working pressure; 116 deg C
operating temperature; with DN 8 discharge connection and DN 15 inlet
connection.
C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 400 kPa working pressure
and 121 deg C maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from
system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible [diaphragm]
[bladder] securely sealed into tank. Provide sight glass and include drain fitting
and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with
steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory
fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed
and labeled for 860-kPa minimum working pressure and 191 deg C maximum
operating temperature; perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to
direct released air into expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections;
threaded connections for DN 50 and smaller; flanged connections for DN
65 and larger; threaded blowdown connection. Provide units in sizes for full-
system flow capacity.
E. In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to
decelerate system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to
1206 kPa and liquid temperature up to 149 deg C.
F. Air Purgers: Cast-iron body with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to
separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.
Maximum working pressure of 1035 kPa and temperature of 121 deg C.
G. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 860-kPa working
pressure; 19-L capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to
prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected
equipment.
H. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1035-kPa working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,

Class B), flanged ends for DN 65 and larger, threaded connections for DN 50
and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless- steel basket, and bottom drain
connection.
Parcel 34
I. Basket Strainers: 1035-kPa working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body

(ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated
stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
J. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-
reinforcing protective jacket; 1035-kPa minimum working pressure and
121 deg C maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged-
or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be
capable of 20-mm misalignment.
K. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel
flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating
temperatures up to 121 deg C and pressures up to 1035 kPa.
L. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1035-kPa minimum working pressure, steel
pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring,
packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome- plated finish on slip-pipe
telescoping section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Chilled Water, DN 50 and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded
joints. Use the fewest possible joints belowground and within floor slabs.
1. Contractor Option: Aboveground, use of Type B drawn-temper copper
tubing with soldered joints. Belowground or within slabs, use of Type A
annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
B. Chilled Water, DN 65 and Larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and
flanged joints.
1. Contractor Option: Use of grooved mechanical-joint couplings.
C. Condenser Water: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
1. Contractor Option 1: Use of grooved mechanical-joint couplings.
2. Contractor Option 2: Aboveground, use of Type B drawn-temper copper

tubing with soldered joints. Belowground or within slabs, use of Type A
annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following
valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Globe and ball valves.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply
connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is
connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch
Parcel 34
connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment,

and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or
cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install silent type check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as
required to control flow direction.
E. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as
required to regulate system pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic
piping installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying
insulation and servicing of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 ball valve, and short DN 20
threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and risers, and
elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings
in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-
feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve,
solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated.
H. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum
spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m
long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping
6 m or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or

longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

Parcel 34
5. On plastic pipe, install rubber pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to

prevent hanger from scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20: Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
11. DN 300: Maximum span, 7 m; minimum rod size, 22 mm.
D. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe

manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading.
Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.
E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing;
threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints
for PVC piping.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at top of risers and high points in piping, at heat-transfer
coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

Parcel 34
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of
system piping, at heat- transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air
venting.
C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression
tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units DN
50 and larger.
E. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install
piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Delete
paragraph below if Division 23 Section "HVAC Water Treatment" is used.
Coordinate location of an equipment drain near feeder locations.
F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in
upright position with top of funnel not more than 1200 mm above floor. Install
feeder in bypass line, off main, using globe valves on each side of feeder and in
the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest
equipment drain.
G. Install expansion tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on
end of tank. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual
vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.
1. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry
weight of tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank
of water. Do not overload building components and structural members.
H. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and
ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel
control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of
chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling,
and to sustain the water characteristics appropriate to use.
B. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

Parcel 34
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination

during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain

reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate
expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its

closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to
valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of
overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release
trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that
system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5
times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum
pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under
test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not
exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times
"SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by
tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test
until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. Test chemical feed piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and
satisfactory test results are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping
tested.

Parcel 34
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced

water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has
been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic
system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced
position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed
and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling

towers to design requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.11 PAINTING
A. All exposed surfaces of ferrous and non-ferrous piping outdoors or indoors in
equipment rooms and exposed to view in occupied spaces shall be cleaned,
primed and painted.
B. Refer to Section “Painting” for painting requirement.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace
strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but

Parcel 34
before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction

diffusers.

Parcel 34
SECTION 23 21 23 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Pump Selection & Design Requirements
1.2 Related Works Specified Elsewhere
1.3 Pumping Equipment Operating Characteristics
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 End-Suction Pumps
2.2 Horizontal / Vertical Split Case Pumps
2.3 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive
2.4 Vertical Multi-Stage Pumps
2.5 Horizontal Multi-Stage Pumps
2.6 Centrifugal In-Line Pumps
2.7 Sealed Type Expansion Tank
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Pumps
3.2 Pump Settings
3.3 Pumps Testing
3.4 Spare Parts
3.5 Special Tools
3.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3.7 Guarantee and Warranted Period
3.8 Approved List of Manufacturers:

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
Works of this Section shall be governed by Contract Conditions.

1.1 Pump Selection & Design Requirements
A. The designed pump head indicated on the drawings is only approximate
and the Contractor shall confirm the exact head of the pumps after all
the pump selections and the shop drawings are approved.
B. The Contractor shall submit for approval and prior to shipment all
detailed construction drawings showing exactly in place all pumps with
their concrete bases, vibration isolators, pipe connection and power
connections.
C. Construct all apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for
the conditions encountered during continuous operation.
D. Provide shaft packing or seals compatible with the pump design, and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Pump manufacturers should take particular note of the suction head
pressure required for each pump so as to provide casings, seals, and
overall pump construction to withstand the high pressure required for
some pumps.
F. All pumps shall be designed to operate with non-overloading
characteristics at manufacturer's specified RPM.
G. All pumps shall be as much as possible selected from one pump
manufacturer.
H. All Electrical works and materials supplied and installed under this
section shall confirm, in all repect, to the requirements of Electrical
Specifications.
I. The Contractor shall submit head calculation for Engineer review and
approval.
A. The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-
sections are included in this Section in each applicable part, as if
repeated herein verbatim.
Section 23 05 01 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Section 23 07 16 - Equipment Insulation
Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls
Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
Section 23 73 00 - Central Station Air Handling Units
Section 23 82 19 - Fan Coil Unit
1.3 Pumping Equipment Operating Characteristics
A. Pump operating characteristics shall be in such a way when operating

at the speed specified the pump motor will not be overloaded no matter
Parcel 34
what the variation in pumping head.

B. Pumps must operate without any pulsation, vibration, or internal
recirculation. Pump characteristics shall be such that a variation of 10%
in the head will result in no more than a 15% variation in water pumping
rate.
C. Pump shall be selected so that the operating flow rate is just below, and
to the left of, the flow rate corresponding to the peak horsepower for the
pump operating at design speed.
D. Performance curve data sheets shall be provided with Shop Drawings
for each type and size of pump submitted for approval.
E. The closed discharge head for all pumps shall not exceed the working
head by more than 25%.
F. The pump motor shall be sized so that it operates continuously
throughout the performance range of the pump without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Motor should be sized to have minimum
20% extra as safety margin on the total power requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 End-Suction Pumps
A. Each pump shall be of the type specified and shall be directly coupled
to an electric motor and mounted on a common steel base plate.
B. Pump casing shall be of the close-grained, high tensile strength gray
iron, with smooth water ways and fitted with bronze wear ring. Impeller
shall be bronze, enclosed, accurately machined and statically and
dynamically balanced. Shaft shall be one piece stainless steel with
bronze sleeve of ample size to carry any axial and radial thrust.
C. Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and
ceramic type. Pump ball bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all
axial and radial thrust.
D. Each pump set, for domestic water supply application, shall be
complete with the following:
E. Electric control panel complete with circuit breakers, earth leakage
protection as required by the Authorities, Phase failure protection,
starters, automatic electric alternators, indicating lights and selector
switches. Panel shall be made of sheet steel of dust and splash proof to
minimum IP 54 type with lockable door. Panel and door shall be rust
proof.
F. Float switches, installed in both domestic water reservoirs, and control
cables between the float switches and the electric control panel.
G. Pump speed shall be as shown in the pump schedule.
H. Panel and door shall be rust proof.
2.2 Horizontal / Vertical Split Case Pumps
A. Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings frame mounted
Parcel 34
split case centrifugal pumps of characteristics as shown in the capacity

schedule on the Drawings and as described hereinafter.
B. Pump and motor shall be mounted on a heavy cast iron drip base, and
connected thru a heavy duty flexible coupling.
C. Pump casing shall be of high tensile strength gray iron and fitted with
bronze wear ring.
D. Impeller shall be bronze, enclosed, accurately machined and statically
and dynamically balanced. It shall be fitted with a key and locked in
place. Shaft shall be stainless steel of ample size to carry any axial and
radial thrust.
E. Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and
ceramic type. Pump ball bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all
axial and radial thrust.
F. For chilled water applications, the necessary disconnect switches and
motor starters shall be supplied and installed under the electrical part of
the works.
2.3 Variable Speed / Variable Frequency Drive
A. For Specification of the variable speed / variable frequency drive, refer
to Electrical Specification.
2.4 Vertical Multi-Stage Pumps
A. Each pump shall be the type specified and shall be directly coupled to
an electric motor. Pump body shall be manufactured from high tensile
grey iron. Shaft shall be stainless steel and fitted with balance drum to
reduce axial loading on motor bearing. Balance drum of stainless steel
shall run in bronze bearing in each stage piece. Impeller stage pieces
and tie rods shall be constructed of stainless steel.
B. Pump shall have mechanical seal-self adjusting type with carbon
rotating against a stationary ceramic seal.
C. Pump/motor coupling shall be manufactured from cold forged steel or
cast iron.
D. Each pump set, for domestic water supply application, shall be
complete with the following:
protection as required by the Authorities. Phase failure protection,
minimum IP 55 type with lockable door,
F. Panel and door shall be rust proof.
G. Panel shall include volt free contacts for connection to BMS 0-10v DC,
4-20 mA.
H. Pump speed shall be shown in the pump schedule.

Parcel 34
2.5 Horizontal Multi-Stage Pumps

A. Each pump shall be the type specified and shall be directly coupled to
an electric motor. Pump body shall be manufactured from high tensile
grey iron. Shaft shall be stainless steel and fitted with balance drum to
reduce axial loading on motor bearing. Balance drum of stainless steel
shall run in bronze bearing in each stage piece. Impeller stage pieces
and tie rods shall be constructed of stainless steel.
B. Pump shall have mechanical seal-self adjusting type with carbon
rotating against a stationary ceramic seal.
C. Pump/motor coupling shall be manufactured from cold forged steel or
cast iron.
D. Each pumpset, for domestic water supply application, shall be complete
with the following:
protection as required by the Authorities. Phase failure protection,
minimum IP 55 type with lockable door,
F. Panel and door shall be rust proof.
G. Pump speed shall be shown in the pump schedule.
2.6 Centrifugal In-Line Pumps
A. Casing and backcover shall be manufactured from close-grained cat
iron to BS 1452 grade 220. Impeller shall be high-grade gunmetal
(bronze) to BS 1400 grade PB3-C. Mechanical seals shall be of the
flexible bellow type having carbon running against a stationary ceramic
set with EPDM elastomer component. Shaft shall be high grade
stainless steel to BS 970 grade 431S29.
B. Motors shall be TEFC to IP54 of the squirrel cage type.
C. Electric control panel shall be with circuit breakers, starters, earth
leakage protection as required by the authorities, automatic electric
alternators, indicating lights and selector switches. Panels shall be
made of sheet steel of dust and rust proof type with lockable door.
D. Level controller wherever shown on drawings and control cables
between the level controllers and electric control panel.
2.7 Sealed Type Expansion Tank
A. Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings one expansion tank
of the sealed type of capacities as shown on the Drawings.
B. Each tank shall consist of the following items, all wired, piped and
packaged into an automatic unit.
C. Two pressurizing pumps (one standby), each of centrifugal end suction
type.
D. Expansion tank, constructed of welded black steel 3mm. thick, and
Parcel 34
complying with ASME recommendation.

E. Suction tank with ball valve, pressure switch for pump control.
F. Non-return valve, pressure regulating valve and gauge.
G. Hand-off-Auto switch.
H. Pumps starters.
I. High and low pressure cut out switches, which operate the pump when
the pressure drops due to loss of water from the system.
J. Necessary expansion vessels and valves.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of Pumps
A. Pumps shall be mounted on bases with isolating pads as specified in
the specification.
B. Pumps and motors shall be aligned and leveled throughout the length
and width, and wherever necessary, suitable shims shall be provided to
facilitate pipe connections and leveling.
C. Pumps shall be secured to bases with proper size anchor bolts.
D. Drains for packing glands and base shall be piped to nearest drain
outlet.
E. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials
and assembly methods must be used including isolation of dissimilar
metals against galvanic interaction.
F. Provide casing connections for vents, drains, suction and discharge
pressure gauges.
G. Balance impellers and all other moving components statically and
dynamically.
H. Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.
I. Install packing rings with alternate layers staggered 90 degrees. Tighten
packing for seal while permitting prescribed amount of leakage.
J. Install and align mechanical seals in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
K. Each pump shall be provided with pressure gauges at suction and
discharge sides.
L. Coupling guards shall be provided to all pumps.
3.2 Pump Settings
A. All pumps and motors shall be properly set, leveled, and aligned on
bases and foundation pads in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instruction and their recommended tolerances. This shall be done
before any piping or electrical connections are made.
B. After all connections have been made, and just prior to putting each
Parcel 34
pump into operation it shall be checked again for levels and alignment.
C. All necessary adjustments shall be made to assure that the thrust is
balanced, that shaft rotates freely when turned by hand and that pump
is quiet in operation.
3.3 Pumps Testing
A. Pumping equipment shall be tested for operating characteristics, and
duration of test shall be set by the Engineer. Apparent defective
equipment shall be repaired or replaced and adjustment made to the
equipment as may be necessary, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test all components
hydraulically at 150% of rated working pressure for ability to withstand
maximum design pressure and for tightness.
C. Upon completion of the installation, test all equipment under field
operating conditions to demonstrate capability of the equipment to meet
specified requirements. Compile and certify the following data.
i. Water flow, GPM (l/s) at rated head.
ii. Shut-off head.
iii. Operating Kilowatts from measured voltage, amperes and power
factor.
3.4 Spare Parts
A. The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract a separate list (as an
option) of spare parts for all the equipment supplied sufficient for three
years of operation all in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturers of the equipment.
3.5 Special Tools
A. A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and
equipment supplied, adequate for 12 months operation shall be
supplied by the Contractor at the completion date of the project.
A. The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate
bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material:-
B. Brief description of each system and its service and basic operation
features.
C. Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional
components of the systems listed on the drawings, control diagrams
and wiring diagrams of controllers. List shall give system No., unit no.,
Manufacturer's Model No., and Manufacture's Drawing no. Parts list
shall include manufacturer's recommended spare parts for one year
operation.
D. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
E. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
F. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.

Parcel 34
G. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment control

diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers.
H. Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all electrical
motor controller connections and interlock connections of other
mechanical equipment.
I. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for his
review as to the fulfilment of the specified requirements.
J. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the substantial
completion date.
A. All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-
Contractor under this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum
period of one year from the date of final completion certificate.
B. All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the
Contractor shall immediately provide and install a replacement unit of
equal or superior performance until such time as the original unit is
repaired. Failure by the Contractor to comply within 6 hours of
notification, will entitle the Employer to purchase or hire a replacement
and seek reimbursement from the Contractor for all related
disbursements.
C. The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any
manufacturing or installation defects for a period of one year, starting
from the date of issue of the substantial completion certificate.
END OF SECTION 23 21 23.

Parcel 34
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
2.5 VALVES
2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
3.8 CONNECTIONS
3.10 ADJUSTING
3.11 CLEANING
3.12 COMMISSIONING

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications,
including pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and
refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings,
including pipe and tube sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and
locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment
connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between
piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout
and installation of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties,
and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with
warranties of connected equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects/engineers and owners, and any other information required by
Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to
include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and
Brazing Qualifications."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
2. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated
Valves."

Parcel 34
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL
listed and labeled.
A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents. Deliver to Employer.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct
1 test.
2. Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg (22 lb) of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Refrigerants:
a. Allied Signal Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.
d. ICI Americas Inc.; Fluorochemicals Bus.
e. or approved equal.
2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
a. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.
b. Eaton Corporation; Industrial Control Div.
c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.
d. Henry Valve Company.
e. Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division.
f. Sporlan Valve Company.

Parcel 34
g. or approved equal.
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type B (ASTM B 88, Type L), annealed
temper.
D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type A (ASTM B 88, Type K), annealed
temper.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
2.5 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135
deg C (275 deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or
bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms,
rising stem and handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-
end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135
deg C (275 deg F) working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-
brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded
stem packing, with solder-end connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating
pressure, 149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with
removable piston, PTFE seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe
design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern, with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating
pressure, 149 deg C (300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with
cast-bronze or forged brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically
retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall be straight-through or angle pattern, with
solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with
copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ARI 760; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature
rating, 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve
seat, 2-way straight-through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual
operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1 solenoid enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-
inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally closed holding coil.

Parcel 34
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass

or cast bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage
tappings, 24-V dc standard coil, and wrought- copper fittings for solder-end
connections.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; direct acting, brass with pilot
operator, stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat,
factory sealed and ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ARI 750; thermostatic-adjustable,
modulating type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements;
solder-end connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for
hot-gas bypass line, and external equalizer line.
K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of
compressor unloading; solder- end connections.
2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure;
forged-brass or steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel
screen, and screwed cleanout plug, with solder-end connections.
B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working
pressure; steel shell with stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C
(200 deg F) operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable,
polished, optical viewing window with color-coded moisture indicator, and
D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel
shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and
wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit,
including gaskets, as follows:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel
support, ARI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated

alumina, ARI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and

desiccant with integral gaskets.
E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure,

107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and
wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; molded-felt core surrounded
by desiccant.
F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg
F) maximum operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end

Parcel 34
connections to copper tubing; forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-
inch) nominal copper-tube size and ductile iron for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3- inch)
nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and
fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on flanges and bolts.
G. Flexible Connectors: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; seamless tin-
bronze or stainless-steel core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, solder-end
connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180
mm long.
H. Mufflers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, brazed-steel construction
with fusible plug, sized for refrigeration capacity.
2.7 RECEIVERS
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed;
2760-kPa (400-psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure
relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and
stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8D;
2760 kPa (400 psig) with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure
relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.
2.8 REFRIGERANT
A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane (for small size split units only).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
B. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.
C. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-
copper tubing.
D. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-
copper tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
Parcel 34
C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints,
elbows, and fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other
equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for
service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and
hangers, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through
floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full- thickness insulation.
F. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
G. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and
all leaks have been eliminated.
H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically
and symmetrically.
I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing
will be exposed to mechanical injury.
J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4
percent downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward
to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain
oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs
are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.
M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
N. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-
inch NPS).
O. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves,
expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
P. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles
to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
Q. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
R. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Parcel 34
S. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove
stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of
refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near bulb of expansion valve.
T. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections.
Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
U. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve
outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.
V. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipe pressure relief
valves on receivers to outdoors.
W. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following
ASHRAE 15 procedures.
X. Charge system as follows:
1. Install filter-dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 1.7 deg
C (35 deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge to 14 kPa (2 psig).

A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports." Provide according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP-69.
B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in
length.
C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.
D. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 6 m or longer supported by a trapeze.
E. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as
expressed in ASTM B 88M (ASTM B 88).
1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.

Parcel 34
8. 79 mm: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
9. 105 mm: Maximum span, 3.6 m; minimum rod size, 12 mm.
G. Support vertical runs at each floor.

A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 23 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing
to prevent formation of scale.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at
compressor inlet and outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet
and outlet, and on each side of strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid
lines on multiple condenser systems.
D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between
receiver shutoff valve and expansion valve.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction
lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass
valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections.
Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve
outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

Parcel 34
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.
I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15.

3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving
receiver, and on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including
expansion valves, solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor
suction valves.
C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral
strainers are used.
D. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and
thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.
F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers
and before each solenoid valve.
G. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using
hermetic compressors, and before each solenoid valve.
H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single
pump-out or pump-down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple
evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop
flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts down.
I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with
long piping runs, sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration
does not absorb vibration.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for
electrical connections.
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at
186-kPa (27-psig) vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or
electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning

controls and equipment.
Parcel 34
C. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat
requirements.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and
fittings with trichloroethylene.
3.12 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 1.67

deg C (35 deg F) is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve

between vacuum pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa

(2 psig).
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line.

Provide full-operating charge.

Parcel 34
SECTION 23 25 00 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.2 Chilled Water Piping Treatment System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
D. The works covered under this Section shall include all the supply, installation,
testing and delivery in good operating conditions of a complete HVAC water
treatment system as described, shown detailed or implied in the tender
documents of the project.
E. The contractor shall employ a specialized and approved water treatment
company to carry out the works as per the following requirements.
F. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary components and accessories
as well as manpower, scaffolding, testing facilities, etc... at his own expense
to execute a complete operable system.
G. The contractor shall be responsible for flushing and cleaning the piping
system and for the supply and installation of water treatment chemicals and
chemical feeding equipment for the control of scale, corrosion and algae in
the system.
H. The Contractor shall supply with each system an estimate of one year's
supply of water treatment chemical as specified.
I. A complete water analysis shall be conducted at the job site by the water
treatment chemical equipment supplier and a written report shall be
submitted.
J. The Contractor shall include the services of a water treatment company every
thirty (30) days during the first full year after system is placed in operation.
The company shall make complete water analysis at the time of each service
call and a written report of the findings shall be left with the Owner's operating
personnel. The Company shall also be present for the initial charging of each
system with chemical and shall fully instruct Owner's operating personnel to
insure continuation of proper water treatment.
K. The chemical feeding equipment shall be automatic as shown on Drawings.
L. Related Works Specified Elsewhere
The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-sections are
included in this Section in each applicable part, as if repeated herein
verbatim.
Parcel 34
Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps

M. The Contractor shall program his work such that it will not interfere with other
trades and to suit site requirements.
1.2 Chilled Water Piping Treatment System
N. Automatic Chemical Feeding Unit
An automatic dosing system based on measuring conductivity shall be

installed as shown on drawings and consist of conductivity controller,
conductivity sensor, metering pump and plastic chemical tank of
suitable capacity for dissolving required chemicals.
O. Initial Treatment Procedures
The chilled water system cleaning shall be carried out for removing rust,
millscale, debris and other foreign bodies by:
i. Initially fill the system with fresh water and circulate water by
operating existing system circulating pumps for 30 minutes.
ii. At the end of this period the system shall be partially drained from
the lowest drain points.
iii. Dismantle the strainers and refix after removing all impurities
iv. Refill the system and operate the circulating pumps
v. Fill the system with sufficient dose of non acidic pre operational
cleaner
vi. Once it is established that the chemical is completely mixed after
being circulated for at least 16 hrs. The system shall be
completely drained from the lowest drain point.
vii. Refill the system with fresh water and re-circulate for a minimum
period of 2 Hours and then drain the whole water.
viii. Continue flushing procedure with fresh water only until tests
indicate that the water is of an acceptable quality within the
following parameters, before continuing the process:
Total dissolved solids - Equivalent to incoming main
PH - Equivalent to incoming main
Iron in solution - Maximum of 10 ppm above that of

the incoming mains.
Appearance - Visually clear of bright water, free
from suspended solids.
These readings shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer prior to
commencing the next stage.
P. Final Chemical Treatment
The final water treatment program shall be carried out by providing

sufficient molybdate type corrosion inhibitor to maintain a molybdate
Parcel 34
level of 150 – 200 ppm as Mo in system water. Corrosion inhibitor should

be effective for steel, copper, copper - alloy and mixed metallurgy
systems. The product shall contain a unique blend of scale inhibitors to
enhance performance of equipment by maintaining clean metal
surfaces.
Finally the water shall be analyzed to confirm the correct condition and
concentration of chemicals, these results shall be approved by the
Engineer and shall be recorded on a Completion Certificate within the
following control parameters.
Control Limits-Chilled Water System

CONTROL
PARAMETER
LIMITS
pH 9.0 – 10.5
MOLYBDATES LEVEL Mo04 200 - 400

(PPM)
NITRITE, NO2 (PPM ) 600 - 900
IRON, Fe (PPM) < 3.0
TSS, (PPM) < 2.0
CORROSION RATE MPY < 3.0

(Mils/YR) STEEL
CORROSION RATE MPY < 1.0

(Mils/YR) COPPER
LEGIONELLA BACTERIA, NIL

QUARTERLY TEST
End of Section 23 25 00.

Parcel 34
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

2.2 DUCT LINER
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
2.6 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
2.7 FIRE STOPPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

3.2 UNDERSLAB DUCT INSTALLATIONS
3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
3.5 CONNECTIONS
3.7 ADJUSTING
3.8 CLEANING

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums
for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from
minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined
in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x
in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified.
Values are expressed as Btu or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving
and -distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to
layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing
by Engineer. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations
showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without
increasing system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction.
6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration

isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment.
Parcel 34
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and

coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide

access to dampers and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers,

grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and

personnel comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this
Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details,
reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to
perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2,
"Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and
AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless
E. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system
pressure classifications higher than 500 Pa (2-inch wg). Build mockups to
comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed
Work:
1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Engineer. Mockup may be a representative section of the
actual duct system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:
a. Five transverse joints.

Parcel 34
b. One access door.
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each

duct and apparatus.
3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup

construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified
minimum acceptable results.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work.

6. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
7. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of

Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work.

A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers
or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation,
color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective
paper maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275
coating designation; mill- phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to
view.
B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with
standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for
concealed ducts.

Parcel 34
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where

installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum
and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or
less; 10-mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 BLACK STEEL SHEETS
A. black steel sheets used in the construction of boiler breechings shall be 10
gauge material.
B. black steel sheets used in the construction of rectangular or round ductwork or
exhaust hoods and msoke evacuations shall be of gaude set fourth in the
following schedule:
1. Rectangular ducts (longest side)
Up to 24 inches 16 gauge
25 inches to 36 inches 14 gauge
Over 60 inches 10 gauge
2. Round ducts (diameter)
Up to 26 inches 16 gauge
Over 65 inches 10 gauge
C. Black steel sheets used in the construction of belt guards shall be 18 gauge
material. The side panels shall be expanded metal. An opening with cover shall
be provided in side panel at both the motor and fan shafts for taking rpm
readings.
D. All seams and joints shall be continuous weld. Where seams and joints are
exposed to view, in finished areas, the weld seams shall be ground to a smoth
finish.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS OR SHEETS
A. Stainless steel used in the construction of ductwork and for kichen exhaust, and
dishwashing
exhaust hoods shall be type 302 with No. 4 finish for exposed areas.
B. Minimum gauges for stainless steel, type of joints and reinforcing angle sizes
shall be as set
forth for galvanized steel in the latest SMACNA low pressure duct construction standard.
C. All stainless steel ductwork exposed to view in finished areas shall bbe
streamlined

Parcel 34
construction having no visible standing seam, joints or angle baracing. Gauge of metal
shall
be of a thickness suitable for welding, and all welded joints shall be ground and
polished.
D. All hoods be constructed having no visible standings seams, joints or angle
bracing on the
outer surface of the hood. Gauge of metal shall be of a thickness suitable for welding
and all
welded joints shall be ground and polished.
E. Concealed and visible ductwork serving dishwashers shall be constructed of
welde tupe 304
stainless steel. Gauge of mtal shall be suitable for welding. Welded joints in concealed
locations will not be required to be ground or polished but must be neat. Welde joints in
visible locations shall be ground and polished.
2.4 DUCT LINER

A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Liner Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C mean temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-

developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.
5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging
liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing
leakage in duct.
a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 23-kg tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and

without projecting more than 3 mm into airstream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-

hazard classification of duct liner system.

Parcel 34
2.5 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials
of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-
weave fabric strips and mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.
2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum

mineral compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react
exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,

polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint

sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or
structural-steel fasteners appropriate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 100 mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-

aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, all-threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread
rod.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for
steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal

screws; compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless

materials are electrolytically separated from ductwork.
2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

Parcel 34
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and

other construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements
for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and
joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to
reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, and discolorations.
B. Fabricate grease hood exhaust ducts with 3-mm thick, carbon-steel sheet for
concealed ducts and 2.5-mm thick stainless steel for exposed ducts.
Continuous weld seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick stainless steel.
Continuous weld seams and joints.
D. Fabricate locker room shower exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick aluminum.
Continuous weld seams and joints.
E. Acid-Resistant Ducts: PVC-coated galvanized steel.
F. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to
the following:
1. Supply Ducts, Constant Volume and Upstream of Terminal Units: 1500 Pa .
2. Supply Ducts, Downstream of Terminal Units: 500 Pa .
3. Return Ducts: 500 Pa ,negative pressure.
4. Exhaust Ducts: 500 Pa , negative pressure.
G. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480
mm and larger and 0.9 mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of unbraced
panel area, unless ducts are lined.
2.8 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent
coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation
to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make
longitudinal joints necessary.

Parcel 34
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7
m/s.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 300 mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from
transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness
as specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain
metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 2.4-mm diameter, with an overall open area
of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning
vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections)
or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall
with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at
connection to fire-damper sleeve.
2.9 FIRE STOPPING
A. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one part elastomeric sealant formulated for use
in a through penetration fire stop system for filling openings around duct
penetrations through walls and floors, having fire resistance ratings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure
classification indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7 m, unless
interrupted by fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape,
and connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into
duct.
Parcel 34
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel

and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural
and permanent enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25 mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in
solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers,
lighting layouts, and similar finished work.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through
transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Where ducts are exposed to view in machine rooms and in spaces without
suspended ceiling, cover with aluminum jacketing to protect against accidental
damage.
N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior
partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between
construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of
same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 38
mm.
O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions
and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and
firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23
Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods
are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.2 UNDERSLAB DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Verify undamaged conditions of duct before enclosure with fill or encasement.
B. Install underslab ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" and as indicated.
C. Protect ducts from damage by equipment used in placing concrete on or around
ducts. D. Protect duct openings.
3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class
indicated and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."
B. Pressure Classification Less Than 500 Pa (2-Inch wg): Transverse joints.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems
indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."
Parcel 34
B. Support horizontal ducts within 600 mm of each elbow and within 1200 mm of
each branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 5 m and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding
one-fourth of failure (proof- test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for
lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to
accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test
requirements.
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum
design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications
are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do
not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give
seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage
to surface area of test section.
D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage
Classification 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, and Leakage Classification 6 for
pressure classifications from 500 to 2490 Pa .
E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual." G. Perform leakage test on supply ducts constructed to pressure
higher than 500 Pa .
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design
airflow.
B. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed
procedures.
3.8 CLEANING

Parcel 34
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

Parcel 34
SECTION 233300 – DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
2.3 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
2.4 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS
2.5 FIRE DAMPERS
2.6 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS
2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS
2.8 DUCT SILENCERS
2.9 TURNING VANES
2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
2.13 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 ADJUSTING

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Motorized dampers.
4. Fire and smoke dampers.
5. Duct silencers.
6. Turning vanes.
7. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
8. Flexible ducts.
10. Duct accessory hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Motorized dampers.
4. Fire and smoke dampers.
5. Duct silencers.
6. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
7. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,

weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
location, and size of each field connection. Detail the following:

Parcel 34
1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.
2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-

mounted access doors and panels.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-
noise power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss,
dimensions, and weights.
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
2. Back draft Dampers: Furnish 2 back draft dampers of sizes matched to

dampers sizes installed in toilets make up air system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275
coating designation; mill- phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to
view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial
quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with
standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for
concealed ducts.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where
installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum
and stainless-steel ducts.

Parcel 34
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or
less; 10-mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. Dampers shall not
produce noise while in operation.
B. Frame: 1.6 mm thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.
C. Blades: 1.2 mm thick aluminum sheet.
D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
E. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
F. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.3 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers
in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper
components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 500 Pa or Higher: End bearings or other seals
for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends
of operating shaft.
B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or

opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside air
stream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of
1.6 mm thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where
indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for
installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 1.6 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Jackshaft: 25 mm diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing

assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-
damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper of a multiple- damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 2.4
mm thick zinc-plated steel, and a 19 mm hexagon locking nut. Include center

Parcel 34
hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated
duct mounting.
2.4 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel-blade design; 2.8 -mm minimum, galvanized-
steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than
1.6 -mm galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 200 mm, and with edge
seals.
1. Blades shall be secured to 13 -mm diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-
plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-
plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade
bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 93 deg. C.
3. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
4. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with

inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage
at less than 51 L/s per sq. m of damper area, at differential pressure of 995
Pa when damper is being held by torque of 5.6 N x m; when tested
according to AMCA 500D
2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: One and one-half hours.
C. Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.
D. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.85-mm thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
E. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-
formed, 0.85-mm thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3 mm or 3.5 mm thick as indicated, and length to suit
application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct

attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and
thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.
G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In
place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized steel
blade connectors.
I. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure
spring. J. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 or 100 deg C rated.
Parcel 34
2.6 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested
floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory."
B. Frame: 1.0-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; round or rectangular; style to suit
ceiling construction.
C. Blades: 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel with nonasbestos refractory
insulation.
D. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 deg C) rated.
2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be
labeled for one-and-one- half-hour rating to UL 555.
B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 deg. C rated.
C. Frame and Blades: 1.6 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel;
length to suit wall or floor application.
E. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.
1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and
sealed gear trains.
2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism

where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing
designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 17 N
x m and breakaway torque rating of 17 N x m.
3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring

gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal
heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg. C .
4. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 2.3 sq. m, size motor for
running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 34 N x m.
5. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz
2.8 DUCT SILENCERS

A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with
performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory
materials shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for
smoke developed when tested according to ASTM E 84.

Parcel 34
C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.85-mm thick, solid

sheet metal for outer casing and 0.55-mm thick, perforated sheet metal for inner
casing.
D. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thicknesses for diameters listed below:
1. Up to 600 mm: 0.85 mm.
2. 650 through 1000 mm: 1.0 mm.
3. 1050 through 1300 mm: 1.3 mm.
4. 1350 through 1500 mm: 1.6 mm.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than
that indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm and designed for minimum
aerodynamic losses.
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3-mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet
metal.
F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed
under not less than 5 percent compression.
G. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or
otherwise react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to

frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
H. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:

1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both
directions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise

power levels, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and
reverse flow (air and noise in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least
10-m/s (2000-fpm) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan
static pressure or 1500-Pa(6-inch wg) static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.9 TURNING VANES

Parcel 34
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 38-mm wide, curved blades set 19
mm o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 50 mm o.c.; and set into
side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with
perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more chrome-
plated enamel painted steel hinges and quick fastening locking devices.
Provide doors as large as practical. Include vision panel where indicated.
Include 25-by-25 mm butt or piano hinge and cam latches. Access doors up to
300 X 300 mm shall have two cam locks, larger sizes shall have four cam locks.
B. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. As an
alternative, removable access doors may be used.
C. Access doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an
inner and outer door panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door
shall consist of two panels spot-welded together which totally encapsulate
insulation identical to corresponded ductwork insulation. The inner and outer
doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded handles in such a configuration that
the panels can be drawn together to secure the door to the duct in a sandwich
fashion.
D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical
springs shall be used between the door panels to facilitate installation and
removal of the door. Fireproof neoprene gasket shall be used around the
outside edge of the inner or outer panel, but not both, to seal the door.
E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat-oval
ductwork.
F. Insulation: 25-mm thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89
mm wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet
steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected
ducts.
C. Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric
146 mm wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized,
sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with
connected ducts.
D. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89
mm wide attached to two strips of 111-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized,
Parcel 34
sheet steel or 0.8-mm aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with

connected ducts.
E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric
double coated with polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.
2. Tensile Strength: 84 N/mm in the warp, and 63 N/mm in the filling.
F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double

coated with a synthetic- rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's
ultraviolet rays and ozone environment.
G. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with

silicone rubber and having a minimum weight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile
strength of 50 N/mm in the warp, and 32 N/mm in the filling.
H. High-Corrosive-Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated
with a chemical-resistant coating.
2.12 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl
sheathing or Corrugated aluminum.
C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, comply with
ASTM C 553, Type II, with an outer jacket enclosing 38 mm thick with thermal
Conductivity of 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F) mean temperature, glass-
fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. Acoustic insertion loss shall not
be less than 3 dB per 300 mm (foot) of straight duct, at 500 Hz, based on 150
mm (6 inch) duct, of 750 m/min (2500 fpm).
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.
2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab,

integral fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord or aluminum foil.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
D. Pressure Rating: 1500 Pa positive, 125 Pa negative.

E. Flexible ducts shall be maximum 1.5 in length. Minimum bend radius shall be
twice the duct diameter.

Parcel 34
F. Flexible Ducts Serving High Velocity Systems: Acoustic type, factory fabricated
from PVC coated fiber glass grid bonded to PVC coated spring steewire helix
and covered with 25 mm thick glass wool inuslation. All covered in PVC coated
fiber glass fabric. Suitable for 30 m/s air velocity and 2500 Pa working
pressure
2.13 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material,
including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other
testing instruments, and length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 6-mm, zinc-
plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber
gasket and square-head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to
tighten band with a worm- gear action, in sizes 75 to 450 mm to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and
resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and
NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside
and where indicated.
C. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
D. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written
instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
F. Install duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connectors, lagged
with loaded vinyl sheet on inlets and outlets.
G. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct
access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes,
and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning,
inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.

Parcel 34
H. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum
1500-mm (60-inch) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
I. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
J. Label access doors according to Section "Mechanical Identification." Section.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section
"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
SECTION 233413 - AXIAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 PROPELLER FANS
2.3 MOTORS
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION

Parcel 34
3.3 CONNECTIONS
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING
3.7 COMMISSIONING
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Propeller fans.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to

this Section:
1. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints"
for vibration hangers and supports.
2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control

devices.
3. Division 26 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect

switches.
4. Division 26 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for starters and fusible

switches.

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. B. Operating
Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in
equipment schedule(s) on the Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping,
installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound power ratings.

Parcel 34
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical

accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and

indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field
C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to
scale. Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships
between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"
and "Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret
test results for compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA
70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this
Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and

are licensed to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.

Parcel 34
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting
points.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify
clearances.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products
installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Aerovent, Inc.
2. Cook (Loren) Co.
3. Greenheck Fan Corp.
4. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
5. or approved equal.
2.2 PROPELLER FANS

A. Description: direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan blades,
hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring
with baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider
bolted to cast-iron hub.
D. Cast-Aluminum Fan Wheels:Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to
cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Extruded-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil
blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades
with nylon bearings.

Parcel 34
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA

specifications, removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal

screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100

percent to less than 50 percent.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload

protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal
aluminum conduit.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-
installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or

building occupants.

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans
according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing
of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air

density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings
according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Parcel 34
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
B. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and
terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of
fans, including duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks
before startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete.

Parcel 34
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,

starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction,
and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation.
Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt
guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan
wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures

for air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design
conditions. Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial
fan units. Refer to Division 1 Section
SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Parcel 34
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
2.3 FAN UNITS
2.4 HOUSINGS
2.5 WHEELS
2.6 SHAFTS
2.7 BEARINGS
2.8 BELT DRIVES
2.9 ACCESSORIES
2.10 MOTORS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
3.4 CONNECTIONS
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
3.8 COMMISSIONING
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor installations.

Parcel 34
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. B. Operating

Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute (CFM)
and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions

and at ll0 percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional
pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may

allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When
submitted as a deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of
energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure
point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static

efficiency.
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and

discharge exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation. Noise level for
all ceiling mounted equipment shall not exceed NC35.
F. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

accessories.
B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and


Parcel 34
C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to

scale. Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships
between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and
certify field measurements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"
F. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA
70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping
limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the
final location following manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting
points.
clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete" Section.
Parcel 34
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Greenheck Fan Corp
2. Aerovent, Inc.
3. Carnes Co.
4. Cook (Loren) Co.
5. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
6. Trane Co. (The).
7. or equal approved.

A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit
construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99
and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted

inlets and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other
provisions are required, and shall be constructed in accordance with
applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation shall be such that fan
vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.

Parcel 34
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and

coated with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint.
Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of:
ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and
ASTM G 23 weathermeter.
C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be
provided for the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during
air-quantity balancing operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the
following:
1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed
necessary for proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed

necessary for proper air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan
speed has been determined.
D. Fresh air fans shall be associated with air filter in compliance with Division 23
section “Air Filters”.
2.3 FAN UNITS
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with
indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
2.4 HOUSINGS
A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make
curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or
panels to allow access to internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel
to fabricate fans downstream from humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting
and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel
cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and

reinforced-steel panels with welded seams and the following:
a. Outlet guide vanes.
b. Motor disconnect switch.

Parcel 34
c. Spun inlet cone with flange.
d. Outlet flange.
e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
2.5 WHEELS
A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange,
back plate, backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back
plate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with
set screws.
B. Forward Curved: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet
flange, back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction
of airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; cast-steel hub
swaged to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
C. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange; heavy back
plate; hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange
and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to
shaft with set screws.
2.6 SHAFTS
A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and
belt adjustment made after installation.
B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a
protective coating of lubricating oil.
C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the
top of the fan's speed range.
2.7 BEARINGS
A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball
bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
B. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; tapered

roller bearings with double- locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 50,000 hours.
C. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; ball or roller

bearings with adapter mount and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2.8 BELT DRIVES

Parcel 34
A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.
B. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.
2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published

recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch

diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be

standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less
than 1.5.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-
sheave or variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-
sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts
shall be aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically
balanced at factory.
D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm
thick, 20-mm diamond- mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or
equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short
circuiting vibration isolation. Include provision for adjustment of belt tension,
lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

2.9 ACCESSORIES
Parcel 34
A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches

and gaskets.
B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections.
C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.
D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2
permanently lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single
control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently
lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single
control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.
F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2

plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings,
with blades linked out of air stream to single control lever.
1. Configuration: Parallel blade.
2. Configuration: Opposed blade.
G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft
bearings.
H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width
fans.
L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to
housing.
2.10 MOTORS
installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
during operation.

building occupants.
3. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).

Parcel 34
D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as
otherwise specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with
fixed-sheave standard belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable,
pivoted motor bases wherever equipment configuration permits proper
installation.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat
aluminum parts.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat
before assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not
required.
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans
according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density,
speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using
neoprene pads or housed spring isolators as indicated . Secure units to
anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.
C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods,
vibration isolation springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices
are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

Parcel 34
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.
Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall
dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM
A 36), size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide
cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland
cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 27 MPa compressive strength, and
normal-weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation

Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal
primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23
Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct
accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and
fans, including duct and electrical connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor
shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt adjustments, and lubrication, and to report
results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
Parcel 34
and abrasions.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete.
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters,
and disconnects.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan
drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" Section for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
centrifugal fan units. Refer to Division 1.
SECTION 233423 - POWER VENTILATORS

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
2.4 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
2.5 MOTORS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION

Parcel 34
3.4 CONNECTIONS
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
3.8 COMMISSIONING
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY

1. In-line centrifugal fans.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to
this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for roof curbs and
equipment supports.
2. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints"
for vibration hangers and supports.
devices.
4. Division 26 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for
disconnect switches.

Parcel 34
5. Division 26 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for starters and fusible

switches.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for
roof-mounted exhaust fans.
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static
pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions
and at ll0 percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional
pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may
allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When
submitted as a deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest
of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and

discharge exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions
indicated.

Parcel 34

accessories.
B. Design Analysis and Calculations shall be submitted for fans indicating the
manufacturer's recommended sound pressure level ratings, self-alignment
and thrust load requirements, horsepower ratings, and required system
rpm's.
C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and
D. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected
ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units
mounted above ceiling. Submit with Shop Drawings. Show the following:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
F. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"
G. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
1. Include lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to
the Engineer. Electrical components and devices for the smoke extract fans and
kitchen exhaust fans shall comply with NFPA 70 and to be UL705 listed.
Parcel 34
D. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705. Smoke

exhaust fans to be UL label for “Power Ventilators for smoke control systems”.

clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. (USA)
Parcel 34
2. Aerovent, Inc. (USA)

3. Axair (UK)
4. Carnes Co. (USA)
5. Cook (Loren) Co. (USA)
6. Greenheck Fan Corp. (USA)
7. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. (USA)
8. Trane Co. (The).
9. Woods. (Finland)
2.2 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid
opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials
under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall
be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale
on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be
acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302.
Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA
99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted
inlets and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other
provisions are required, and shall be constructed in accordance with
Parcel 34
applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation shall be such that fan

vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and
coated with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint.
Manufacturers paint and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of:
ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and
ASTM G 23 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified,
with provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be
imposed by the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel
alloys and shall have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy
rating of 200,000 hours. Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for
lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron unless
otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be
surface ball check type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease
pressure relief fittings shall be provided. Bearing and seal
construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite
the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal maintenance
locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where
necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel
spiral wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper
pins are not acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified
materials and ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be
provided for fans driven by motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2
horsepower (375 watt).
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.
2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch
diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less
than 1.5.

Parcel 34
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-
sheave or variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be
fixed-sheave, high- capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less
than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts
shall be aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of
the Engineer.
E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with
cross section to suit sheave grooves.
2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the
factory. Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is
not acceptable. Each belt set shall be bound with wire and tagged with
equipment identification.
2.4 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel,

outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect
switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes;
inlet and outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or
ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to
disconnect located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,
enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan
bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in
fan outlet.

Parcel 34
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for
units not connected to ductwork.
2.5 MOTORS

installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty,
Design B or equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 34.
C. Air-over-motor units shall be provided with NEMA-rated Class H insulation for all
services where air stream temperature exceeds 38 deg. C (100 deg. F). Air
velocity over motor surfaces shall be sufficient to maintain insulation
temperatures within NEMA standards at maximum fan horsepower. Motors
used with variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall be rated for VFD use.
D. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
during operation.
building occupants.
3. Totally enclosed motors where located in unfiltered air streams.
E. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as
otherwise specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with
fixed-sheave standard belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable,
pivoted motor bases wherever equipment configuration permits proper
installation.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
D. Paint finish of fans exposed to outdoor shall be suitable for the hot and humid
climate of the project.
E. Internal sides of fans used for 100 percent outdoor air shall be specially painted.

Parcel 34

Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans
according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air
density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings
according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
B. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of
installation. The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Control
Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports
using neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
housekeeping base.
2. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports
using housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
housekeeping base.
Parcel 34
3. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.
4. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel
rods, vibration isolation springs, and seismic restraints.
5. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded rods or metal
straps, and neoprene washers.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.
Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall
dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M,
size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross
bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use Portland
cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 27-MPa compressive strength, and
normal-weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal
primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct
accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and

Parcel 34


fans, including duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING

3.7 CLEANING
and abrasions.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
connections for ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and
disconnects.

Parcel 34
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect
fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures
for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

power ventilator units. Refer to Division 1
SECTION 23 34 33 - AIR CURTAIN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.4 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTSMANUFACTURERS
2-1 MATERIALS
2-2 FANS
2-3 MOTORS

Parcel 34
2-4 FILTERS
2-5 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes air curtains.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for
each unit indicated.
Shop Drawings:
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Operation and maintenance data.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

Comply with AMCA 220, "Test Methods for Air Curtain Units," for airflow, outlet
velocity, and power consumption.
Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service
Establishments."
1.4 WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair or replace air curtains that fail in materials and workmanship within
minimum 3years from date of Substantial Completion.
Parcel 34
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming
manufacturers and products.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

Retain above for nonproprietary or below for semiproprietary specification. Refer

to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:
Air Economy Corporation.

Berner International Corp.
Biddle Air Systems Limited.
Cambridge Engineering, Inc.
Disco Engineering, Inc.
Fantech.
KING.
Loren Cook Company.
Marley Engineered Products.
Mars Air Products; Dynaforce Division.
Mars Air Products; Mars Air Door Division.
MesTec AG; L. J. Wing Division.
Miniveil Air Systems.
TMI Inc.
TMI Inc.; Curtron Products Division.
Greenheck.
2.2 MATERIALS
C. Retain one of three options in first paragraph below.
Housing Materials: Air curtain fans shall be self-contained one-piece housing,

fire retardant and corrosion proof, Housing shall be of sufficient strength for
fastening to wall on both ends without any intermediate support. Galvanized
steel with electrostatic ally applied epoxy enamel finish over powdered
mirror
Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and
capable of reducing air-outlet velocity by 60% with louver in totally closed

Parcel 34
position. Air intake to be protected against inclement weather for units

installed on the outside wall.
Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, containing adjustable air-

directional vanes. Units shall be provided with adjustable vanes at outlet
nozzle to direct air to compensate for possible draft conditions through door
openings. Provide adjustable lower damper control on all units installed over
food preparation and food serving areas.
Unit shall be fire retardant and corrosion proof. Steel of 18 gage paint lock metal
and doubly protected with grey rust preventative coating. All interior parts
safeguarded against inclement weather.
2.3 FANS
D. Fans: direct drive double width and double inlet squirrel cage blower wheels
and fan housings Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet.
Fan Drives: Direct or Belt, equipped with belt guards and adjustable sheaves
and pulleys for adjusting air-outlet velocity.
2.4 MOTORS
E. Motor Type: Motor shall be continuous duty type, totally enclosed with
sealed lubricated ball bearings, resilient mounted and protected by an
automatic thermal over-load switch. U.L. approved. Explosive proof motors
available. Multispeed resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed,
air over with integral thermal-overload protection.
Bearings: Permanently sealed, lifetime, prelubricated, ball bearings.
Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.
2.5 FILTERS
F. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-

type, disposable air filters with holding frames.
Media: Interlaced glass-fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive in

cardboard or galvanized-steel frame.
Washable Panel Filters: Removable, stainless-steel, baffle-type filters with

spring-loaded fastening; with minimum 1.984-mm thick, stainless-steel filter
frame.
Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and
suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
Parcel 34
2.6 ACCESSORIES
G. Edit this Article to suit Project.
Built-in or Field-Installed Thermostat: Line voltage, factory installed and wired to

the junction box on air curtain.
Automatic Door Switch: Plunger type installed in door area to activate air curtain
when door opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.
Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air curtain to

operate from 0.5 seconds to 10 hours.
Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 115-V ac transformer with

primary and secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type 1 or 12
enclosure.
Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
H. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
Provide air curtain fans at doors to food preparation, food serving, warehouses
and shop areas as indicated on the Drawings
3.2 CONNECTIONS
I. Install piping adjacent to air curtain to allow service and maintenance.
Breaching: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section,

"Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." Connect breaching to full size at flue
outlet.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check of
individual components.

Parcel 34
After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor rotation
and unit operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test gas train and verify that there are no gas leaks.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
Repair or replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
SECTION 23 11 00 - FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
PART 37 - GENERAL

Section.
37.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes [fuel-oil and diesel-fuel-oil] distribution systems and the
following:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping and tubing joining materials.
3. Piping specialties.
4. Valves.
5. Liquid-level gage system.
7. Grout.
8. Concrete bases.
37.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include

B. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

locations.

Parcel 34
C. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment

rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below
roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
A. Maximum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 3-psig (21-kPa) fuel-oil supply pressure

at oil-fired appliances.
B. Delegated Design: Design restraint and anchors for fuel-oil piping, ASTs, and
equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
C. Seismic Performance: Factory-installed support attachments for AST shall

withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
[SEI/ASCE 7].
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic
forces specified [ and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event]."
37.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles.
Also include, where applicable, rated capacities, operating characteristics,
electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1. Piping specialties.
2. Valves: Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical
connection data of selected models.
3. Fuel maintenance system.
4. Liquid-level gage system.
5. Leak-detection and monitoring system.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility fuel-oil piping layout. Include plans, piping layout
and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and
attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors,
alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: [1/4 inch per foot (1:50)].

2. For fuel-oil storage tanks and pumps, include details of supports and
anchors.

Parcel 34
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fuel-oil piping and equipment indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of anchors and seismic restraints.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic
restraints.
3. Detail fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for
multiple pipes, and attachments of the same to building structure.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil

piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from
installers of the items involved.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping and tanks are shown
and coordinated with other services and utilities.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For ASTs, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
H. Brazing certificates.
I. Welding certificates.
J. Field quality-control reports.
K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-oil equipment and accessories to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
L. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
B. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel

according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Parcel 34
C. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
E. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel-oil piping
materials, installation, testing, and inspecting.
F. Comply with requirements of the EPA and of state and local authorities having
jurisdiction. Include recording of fuel-oil storage tanks and monitoring of tanks
and piping.
A. Lift and support fuel-oil storage tanks only at designated lifting or supporting
points, as shown on Shop Drawings. Do not move or lift tanks unless empty.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to
prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C. Store pipes and tubes with protective PE coating to avoid damaging the coating
and to protect from direct sunlight.
D. Store PE pipes and valves protected from direct sunlight.
A. Interruption of Existing Fuel-Oil Service: Do not interrupt fuel-oil service to

facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary fuel-oil supply
according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify [Construction Manager] no fewer than [two] days in advance of

proposed interruption of fuel-oil service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of fuel-oil service without [Construction
Manager's] written permission.
37.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment

provided.

Parcel 34
37.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair or replace components of fuel-oil storage tanks and flexible, double-
containment piping and related equipment that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
PART 38 - PRODUCTS
38.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. See Part 3 piping schedule articles for where pipes, tubes, fittings, and joining
materials are applied in various services.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard

pattern.
2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for butt and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat,
ground joint, and threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum
Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material
group, end connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or
ASME B16.21 nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer

coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
A. Flexible Connectors: Comply with UL 567.
1. Metallic Connectors:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the approved vendor list

Parcel 34
b. Listed and labeled for aboveground and underground applications by

an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
c. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel,
wire-reinforcing protective jacket.
d. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
e. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match
connected piping.
f. Maximum Length: 30 inches (762 mm).
g. Swivel end, 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum operating pressure.
h. Factory-furnished anode.
2. Nonmetallic Connectors:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the approved vendor list
b. Listed and labeled for underground applications by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
c. PFTE bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel, wire-
reinforcing protective jacket.
d. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
e. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match
connected piping.
f. Maximum Length: 30 inches (762 mm).
g. Swivel end, 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum operating pressure.
h. Factory-furnished anode.
B. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged
ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: [80]-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel
basket with 50 percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
C. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and
bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged
ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. T-Pattern Strainers:

Parcel 34
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end
cap for strainer maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
E. Manual Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for fuel oil.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540
deg C) complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than
0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.
D. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping

manufacturer.
38.4 MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See valve schedule in Part 3 for where each valve type is applied in various
services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller for Liquid
Service: Comply with UL 842.
1. CWP Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)].

2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve
schedule.
5. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

Parcel 34
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
Comply with UL 842.
1. CWP Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)].

2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve
schedule.
D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

by one of the approved vendor list
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in the valve schedule.
E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE.
6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
Parcel 34
A. Pressure Relief Valves: Comply with UL 842.

2. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities

3. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
4. Springs: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
5. Seat and Seal: Nitrile rubber.
6. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
7. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: [150 psig (1035 kPa)].
9. Relief Pressure Setting: [60 psig (414 kPa)].
B. Oil Safety Valves: Comply with UL 842.


3. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
4. Springs: Stainless steel.
5. Seat and Diaphragm: Nitrile rubber.
6. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
7. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
8. Manual override port.
9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: [60 psig (414 kPa)].
10. Maximum Outlet Pressure: [3 psig (21 kPa)].
C. Emergency Shutoff Valves: Comply with UL 842.


3. [Double] poppet valve.
4. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
5. Disk: FPM.
6. Poppet Spring: Stainless steel.
7. Stem: Plated brass.
8. O-Ring: FPM.
Parcel 34
9. Packing Nut: PTFE-coated brass.

10. Fusible link to close valve at 165 deg F (74 deg C).
11. Thermal relief to vent line pressure buildup due to fire.
12. Air test port.
13. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).
D. Mechanical Leak Detector: Comply with UL 842.

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the
approved vendor list.:

4. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
5. O-Rings: Elastomeric compatible with fuel oil.
6. Piston and Stem Seals: PTFE.
7. Stem and Spring: Stainless steel.
8. Piston Cylinder: Burnished brass.
9. Indicated Leak Rate: Maximum 3 gph (3 mL/s) at 10 psig (69 kPa).
10. Leak Indication: Reduced flow.
38.6 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,
galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop unless otherwise
indicated.

2. Sealing Elements: [EPDM] interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and
sleeve.
3. Pressure Plates: [Carbon steel].

Parcel 34
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating]

of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include
one nut and bolt for each sealing element.
38.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling

escutcheons and floor plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube and with OD that
completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn brass with polished

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With set screw.
1. Finish: [Polished chrome-plated or rough brass].
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: [Polished chrome-plated or rough brass].
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With [set screw or spring clips] and

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With [concealed] [exposed-rivet] hinge,

[set screw] [set screw or spring clips], and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast brass with concealed hinge and

set screw.
38.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Posthardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining,

applications.
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6
Parcel 34
inches (152 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a
description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for
corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30
inches (762 mm) deep; colored yellow.
38.11 CONCRETE MANHOLES
A. Precast Concrete Manhole Sections: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), base and
concentric-cone sections with integral ladder or steps.
B. Cast-Iron Frame and Cover: Heavy-duty, water-resistant, cast-iron manhole

frame, gasket, and bolted cover; [24-inch- (609-mm-)] diameter, inside opening
dimension; [8-inch (203-mm)] frame riser height.
A. Pressure test and inspect fuel-oil storage tanks, after fabrication and before
shipment, according to ASME and the following:
1. [Horizontal], Single-Wall Steel ASTs: UL 142.

2. FRP USTs: UL 1316.
B. Affix standards organization's code stamp.
PART 39 - EXECUTION
39.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for fuel-oil piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.

corrected.
39.2 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating,

trenching, and backfilling.
39.3 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel oil to premises or piping
section.

Parcel 34
B. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental

ignition.
39.4 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install underground fuel-oil piping buried at least [18 inches (457 mm)] below
finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for
excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
1. If fuel-oil piping is installed with less than [12 inches (305 mm)] of cover to
finished grade, install in containment piping.
B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining, to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by
protective coating manufacturer. Review protective coating damage with
Architect prior to repair.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
C. Install double-containment, fuel-oil pipe at a minimum slope of 1 percent

downward toward fuel-oil storage tank sump.
D. Install vent pipe at a minimum slope of 2 percent downward toward fuel-oil

storage tank sump.
E. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through sump sidewalls
for liquid-tight joints.
F. Install metal pipes and tubes, fittings, valves, and flexible connectors at piping
connections to AST and UST.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction in rigid pipe.
H. Install system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
I. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel

pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Install sleeve size to allow for 1-inch
(25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
J. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

K. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Position pipe in center of sleeve.

Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe
Parcel 34
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
L. Install pressure gage on suction[ and discharge] from each pump. Pressure
gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
39.5 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building
structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in

removal.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type.
b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: [One-piece or
split-casting], cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: [One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed
hinge] and set screw.
f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
[polished chrome-plated] finish.
Parcel 34
g. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type

with [set screw or spring clips].
h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
i. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with [set
screw or spring clips].
j. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-
plate type.
I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems."
J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
K. Comply with requirements for equipment specifications in Division 23 Sections

for roughing-in requirements.
L. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, or utility spaces; above ceilings;
below grade or floors; and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to
view.
M. Prohibited Locations:
1. Do not install fuel-oil piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or

trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or
dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
2. Do not install fuel-oil piping in solid walls or partitions.
N. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings
with level side down.
O. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
P. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at final connection to each
piece of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on
flanged devices.
Q. Do not use fuel-oil piping as grounding electrode.
R. Install [Y-pattern] [basket] [T-pattern] strainer on inlet side of fuel-oil pump.
A. Install manual fuel-oil shutoff valves on branch connections to fuel-oil appliance.
B. Install valves in accessible locations.
C. Protect valves from physical damage.

Parcel 34
D. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating fuel-oil piping systems.
E. Identify valves as specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."
F. Install oil safety valves at inlet of each oil-fired appliance.
G. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and return
lines.
H. Install one-piece, bronze ball valve with hose end connection at low points in
fuel-oil piping.
I. Install manual air vents at high points in fuel-oil piping.
J. Install emergency shutoff valves at dispensers.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

follows:

welds.
D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using

Article.
1. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

2. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer
at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe

and Tube" Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

Parcel 34
G. Flared Joints: Comply with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench
according to fitting manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not overtighten.
H. Fiberglass-Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and
join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Maximum span, 84 inches (2130 mm);
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 108 inches (2740 mm); minimum rod
size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 1/2
inch (13 mm).
5. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 1/2
inch (13 mm).
6. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 13 feet (4 m); minimum rod size, 5/8
inch (16 mm).
C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 15 feet
(4.5 m).
D. Install hangers for horizontal, drawn-temper copper tubing with the following
maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: Maximum span, 60 inches (1524 mm);
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (10 mm).
4. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 96 inches
(2440 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
6. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
(13 mm).
7. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 5/8
inch (16 mm).

Parcel 34
E. Support vertical copper tube at each floor and at spacing not greater than 10 feet
(3 m).
39.9 FUEL-OIL PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Submersible Pumps:
1. Suspend pumps from supply piping and anchored to bottom of tank.
B. Transfer Pumps:
1. Install pumps with access space for periodic maintenance including

removal of motors, impellers, and accessories.
2. Set pumps on and anchor to concrete base.
C. Install two-piece, full-port ball valves at suction and discharge of pumps.
D. Install mechanical leak-detector valves at pump discharge.
E. Install [Y-pattern] [basket] [T-pattern] strainer on inlet side of simplex fuel-oil

pumps.
F. Install check valve on discharge of simplex fuel-oil pumps.
G. Install suction piping with minimum fittings and change of direction.
H. Install vacuum and pressure gage, upstream and downstream respectively, at

each pump to measure the differential pressure across the pump. Pressure
gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages."
39.10 FUEL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install suction line, with foot valve, at one end of storage tank, 1 inch (25 mm)
from the bottom of tank.
B. Install return line at the opposite end of storage tank from suction line.
39.11 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid-level gage system. Locate panel inside building where indicated.
39.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and
at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.
Parcel 34
C. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged
valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe
connection.
D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union between
valve and equipment.
E. Install flexible piping connectors at final connection to burners or oil-fired

appliances that must be moved for maintenance access.
A. Nameplates, pipe identification, and signs are specified in Division 23 Section

B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplates and signs on or near each service regulator, service meter, and
earthquake valve.
1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units,

inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Install detectable warning tape directly above fuel-oil piping, [12 inches (304
mm)] below finished grade, except [6 inches (152 mm)] below subgrade under
pavements and slabs. Terminate tracer wire in an accessible area, and identify
as "tracer wire" for future use with plastic-laminate sign.
1. Piping: Over underground fuel-oil distribution piping.

2. Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks: Over edges of each UST.
39.14 FIELD PAINTING OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and
exterior fuel-oil piping.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except
components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(gloss)].
d. Color: [Gray].
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except
components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
Parcel 34
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.
a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Color: [Gray].
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.
a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Color: [Gray].
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes

with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.
39.15 CONCRETE BASES


otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on [18-inch (457-mm)] centers
around the full perimeter of the base.
6. Use [3000-psig (20.7-MPa)], 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in [Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."]
[Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)."]

representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Parcel 34
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Tanks: Minimum hydrostatic or compressed-air test pressures for fuel-oil

storage tanks that have not been factory tested and do not bear the ASME
code stamp or a listing mark acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Single-Wall Tanks: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5 psig

(34.5 kPa).
b. Double-Wall Tanks:
1) Inner Tanks: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5 psig

(34.5 kPa).
2) Interstitial Space: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5
psig (34.5 kPa), or 5.3-in. Hg (18-kPa) vacuum.
c. Where vertical height of fill and vent pipes is such that the static head
imposed on the bottom of the tank is greater than 10 psig (69 kPa),
hydrostatically test the tank and fill and vent pipes to a pressure equal
to the static head thus imposed.
d. Maintain the test pressure for one hour.
2. Piping: Minimum hydrostatic or pneumatic test-pressures measured at

highest point in system:
a. Fuel-Oil Distribution Piping: Minimum [5 psig (34.5 kPa)] for minimum

[30] minutes.
b. Suction Piping: Minimum 20-in. Hg (68 kPa) for minimum [30]

minutes.
c. Isolate storage tanks if test pressure in piping will cause pressure in
storage tanks to exceed 10 psig (69 kPa).
3. Inspect and test fuel-oil piping according to NFPA 31, "Tests of Piping"
Paragraph; and according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Test liquid-level gage for accuracy by manually measuring fuel-oil levels at
not less than [three] different depths while filling tank and checking against
gage indication.
5. Test leak-detection and monitoring system for accuracy by manually
operating sensors and checking against alarm panel indication.
6. Start fuel-oil transfer pumps to verify for proper operation of pump and
check for leaks.
8. Bleed air from fuel-oil piping using manual air vents.
D. Fuel-oil piping and equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass
tests and inspections.

Parcel 34
39.17 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain [leak-detection and
monitoring systems] [fuel-oil pumps].
39.18 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground fuel-oil-tank fill and vent piping shall be[ one of] the following:
1. [NPS 2 (DN 50)] and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded
fittings, and threaded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating
for steel piping.
2. [NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)] and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and
welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
B. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
C. Aboveground fuel-oil piping shall be[ one of] the following:
1. [NPS 2 (DN 50)] and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded
fittings, and threaded joints.
2. [NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)] and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and
welded joints.
39.19 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground fuel-oil piping shall be[ one of] the following:
1. [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] and Smaller: [Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron
threaded fittings, and threaded joints].
2. [NPS 5/8 to NPS 2 (DN 18 to DN 50)]: [Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron
threaded fittings, and threaded joints].
3. [NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)] and Larger: [Steel pipe, steel fittings, and welded or
flanged joints].
4. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
5. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
6. Annealed-temper copper tube, brass fittings, and flared joints.
7. Drawn-temper copper tubing, copper fittings, and brazed joints.
39.20 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be[ one of]
the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

Parcel 34
2. Two-piece, [full] [regular]-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be[ one of]
the following:

2. Bronze, [nonlubricated] [lubricated] plug valve.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be[ one of] the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

END OF SECTION

Parcel 34
SECTION 233700- DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 CLEANING
3.5 CEILING DIFFUSERS
3.6 REGISTERS
3.7 GRILLES

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally

located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply
air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary
air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage,
which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished;
indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and
noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing
designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and
accessories furnished.

Parcel 34
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials
and methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to
scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with
other items installed in ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color
finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's
standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the
same material to be used for the Work.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of

diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of
the systems selected. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA
90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

manufacturers offering water-source heat pumps that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Titus
2. Trox
3. Carnes Co. Inc.
4. Hart and Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle and Bailey Div.
5. Nailor Industries Inc.
6. or approved equal.

Parcel 34
2.2 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
A. Air-diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or

vibration. Devices shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for
mounting in indicated surface construction.
B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.
C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid.
Dampers shall be extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall.
Terminal velocity is not to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer
velocities through diffuser are not to exceed 3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be
able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below room temperature without
causing objectionable conditions.
E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the
face of the device. Volume adjustments shall be made by removable key or
tamper-deterring device.
F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished
surfaces.
G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.
H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage),
provide sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.
I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air
quantity, as measured on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless
specified otherwise
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.
B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for

Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

Parcel 34
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to

manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and
referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general
arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations
have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise
criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other
items conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final
location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and
to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire
dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated,
or as directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING

Parcel 34
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish.

Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers,
registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
3.5 CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Equip with baffles or other devices required to provide proper air distribution
pattern. Provide factory- fabricated, single key, volume dampers. Except for
linear diffusers, internal parts shall be removable through the diffuser neck for
access to the duct and without the use of special tools.
B. Ceiling Diffusers to have flange suitable for flush mounting on false ceiling and
round neck sized to fit outside duct. They are to be complete with volume
control damper accessible from face of diffuser and equalizing deflectors to
provide an even air discharge pattern.
C. Circular, Square, And Rectangular Diffusers Type (SCD & RCD):
1. Construct each ceiling diffuser of four or more concentric elements
designed to deliver air in a generally horizontal direction without excess
smudging of the ceiling. Interior elements of square and rectangular
ceiling diffusers may be circular, square, or rectangular as
manufacturer's standard.
2. Diffusers to be able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below room
temperature and for heating at 30 deg. C above room temperature without
causing objectionable conditions.
3. Round Ceiling Diffusers: three cone adjustable type.
4. Square And Rectangular Ceiling Diffusers: two-piece design consisting of
mounting frame and removable core attached with spring lock.
D. Linear Diffusers Type (SLD & RLD):
1. Continuous, single or multiple slot type, as indicated, with individually
adjustable supply air pattern and volume control blades on each slot. Air
supply pattern is to be adjustable through 180 degrees from diffuser face
with two way capability from multiple slots. Noise level is not to exceed 25
NC at specified air quantity.
2. Joints between diffuser sections shall appear as hairline cracks. Provide
alignment slots for insertion of key strips or other concealed means to align
exposed butt edges of diffusers. Equip with plaster frames when mounted
in plaster ceiling. Do not use screws and bolts in exposed face of frames
or flanges. Frames and flanges exposed below ceiling shall be metal-filled
and ground smooth. Furnish separate pivoted or hinged adjustable air-
volume-damper and separate air- deflection blades.

Parcel 34
3. To be complete with end caps on end sections and one-piece

diffusers, grid pattern air straighteners and concealed mounting brackets
for easy installation without need for special tools.
4. Diffusers to be factory supplied with coated steel insulated internally with
15 mm thick duct insulation plenum.
3.6 REGISTERS
A. Double-deflection supply registers. Provide manufacturer-furnished volume

dampers. Volume dampers shall be of the group-operated, opposed-blade type
and key adjustable by inserting key through face of register. Operating
mechanism shall not project through any part of the register face. Automatic
volume control devices will be acceptable.
B. Provide exhaust and return registers as specified for supply registers, except
that exhaust and return registers shall have a single set of non-directional face
bars or vanes having the same appearance as the supply registers.
3.7 GRILLES
A. Construct and finish as specified above for registers, except that volume
dampers shall be omitted.
B. Door grilles:
1. No-vision, V-shaped louver type. Grille net free area to be not less than
70% of gross face area.
C. Transfer Grilles:
1. To be fixed blade type with blades set at 45-degree deflection parallel to
long dimension. Grille net free area not to be less than 70% of gross face
area.
D. Wire Mesh Grille
Use grilles where shown in unfinished areas, fabricate grille with 2 x 2 mesh 13
mm aluminum hardware cloth in a spot welded galvanized steel frame with
approximately 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) margin.

Parcel 34
SECTION 234100 - AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.5 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 EXTENDED-SURFACE, GENERAL
2.3 EXTENDED-SURFACE, NONSUPPORTED-MEDIA BAG FILTERS
2.4 FRONT- AND REAR-ACCESS FILTER FRAMES
2.5 SIDE-SERVICE HOUSINGS
2.6 FILTER GAGES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.3 CLEANING

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to

remove particulate matter from air for HVAC applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights;

required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final
pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details to illustrate
component assemblies and attachments.
1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of
assembly of components.
2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor
bolts and anchorages.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.

Parcel 34
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional

requirements of air filters and are based on the specific system selected. Other
manufacturers systems with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements".
B. Air Filter Performance Report for Extended Surface Filters:
1. Submit a test report for each Grade of filter being offered. The report
shall be less than five years old and will have been prepared by an
independent testing laboratory using test equipment, method and duct
section as specified by ASHRAE Standard 52.1-92 for type filter under
test and acceptable to Resident Engineer, indicating that filters comply
with the requirements of this Specification. Test for 150 m/min (500 fpm)
will be accepted for lower velocity rated filters provided the test report of
an independent testing laboratory complies with all the requirements of
this Specification.
2. Selection procedures: All filters tested shall have been procured by
the independent testing laboratory from the open market independent
of manufacturer of these filters and a statement to this effect must
accompany test report.
C. Nameplates: Each filter shall bear a label or nameplate indicating
manufacturer's name, filter size, rated efficiency, UL classification.
D. Electronic Air Cleaners and Electrical Devices and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency
acceptable to the Engineer.
E. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
F. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE 52.1 for method of
testing and rating air- filter units.
G. Comply with ARI 850.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
the Engineer.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts

into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified
in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Parcel 34
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Air Filters and Filter-Holding Systems:
a. AAF International.
b. Airguard Industries, Inc.
c. Continental Air Filter Div.; NiCon Filter Corp.
d. Camfil Farr.
e. International Air Filter, Inc.
f. Flanders.
g. or approved equal.
2. Filter Gages:
a. Airguard Industries, Inc.
b. Dwyer Instruments Inc.
c. or approved equal.
2.2 EXTENDED-SURFACE, GENERAL
A. Use factory assembled air filters of the extended surface type with supported or
non-supported cartridges for removal of particulate matter in air-conditioning,
heating and ventilating systems. Filter units shall be of the extended surface
type fabricated for disposal when the dust-load limit is reached as indicated by
maximum (final) pressure drop.
B. Filter Classification: UL approved Class 1 or Class 2 conforming to UL Standard
900.
C. Filter Grades, Percent, Nominal Efficiency and Application:
1. Grade A: 90-95 after-filter.
2. Grade B: 80-85 after-filter.
3. Grade C: 50-60 prefilter.
4. Grade D: 25-30 prefilter.
D. Filter Media:
1. Grade A, B and C Nonsupported (Bag) Type: Construct media of high-
density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Enclose or pocket each pleat
in woven or non-woven backing material. Seal and fasten (stitch) to
maintain pleat shape in a proper frame to insure no air leakage for life of
filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
Parcel 34
2. Grade A, B and C Supported (Rigid Pleated) Type: Media shall be

composed of high-density glass fibers or other suitable fibers. Fastening
methods used to maintain pleat shape, (metal backing or aluminum
separators) shall be sealed in a proper enclosing frame to ensure no air
leakage for life of filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
3. Grade D (Pleated) Type: Media shall be composed of synthetic/natural
fibers. A metal grid backing shall be bonded to the air leaving side of the
media to maintain uniform pleat shape and stability for proper airflow and
maximum dust loading. The media frame shall be constructed of high
strength moisture resistant fiber or beverage board. Bond the pleated
media pack on all four edges to ensure no air leakage for the life of the
filter. Staples and stays are prohibited.
E. Filter Efficiency and Arrestance: Efficiency and arrestance of filters shall be
determined in accordance with ASHRAE 52.1-92. Atmospheric dust spot
efficiency and synthetic dust weight arrestance shall not be less than the
following:
Percentage of Percentage of Percentage
Initial Average of Average
Efficiency Efficiency Arrestance
Grade A 75.4 86.4 99.0
Grade B 58.0 79.0 98.0
Grade C 25.0 53.0 97.0
Grade D Less 22.0 89.0

than
20.0
F. Maximum initial and final resistance, Pa (inches of water), for each filter
cartridge when operated at 150 m/min (500 feet per minute) face velocity:
Initial Final
Resistance Resistance
Grade A (Bag) 130 (0.52) 250 (1.00)
Grade A (Rigid 185 (0.74) 250 (l.00)

Pleated)
Grade B (Bag) 100 (0.40) 250 (l.00)
Grade B (Rigid 150 (0.60) 250 (l.00)

Parcel 34
Initial Final
Resistance Resistance
Pleated)
Grade C (Bag) 70 (0.28) 200 (0.80)
Grade C (Rigid 85 (0.35) 200 (0.80)

Pleated)
Grade D (2-inch 80 (0.32) 175 (0.70)

deep)
Grade D (4-inch 65 (0.27) 175 (0.70)

deep)
G. Dust Holding Capacity: When tested to 250 Pa (l.00-inch water) at 150 m/min
(500 fpm) face velocity, the dust holding capacity for each 600 mm by 600 mm
(24 inches by 24 inches) (face area) filter shall be at least the values listed
below. For other filter sizes the dust holding capacity shall be proportionally
higher or lower to the face area.
Grade A (Bag) 300 grams
Grade A (Rigid Pleated) 90 grams
Grade B (Bag) 430 grams
Grade B (Rigid Pleated) 175 grams
Grade C (Bag) 910 grams
Grade C (Rigid Pleated) 250 grams
Grade D (2 inch deep) 150 grams
Grade D (4 inch deep) 300 grams
H. Minimum Media Area: The minimum net effective media area in square meter
(square feet) for each 600 mm by 600 mm (24 inches by 24 inches) (face area)
filter at 150 m/min (500 fpm) face velocity shall be at least the values listed
below. For other filter sizes the net effective media area shall be proportionally
higher or lower.
Grade A (bag) 8.5 (91.0)
Grade A (rigid pleated) 5.3 (57.0)

Parcel 34
Grade B (bag) 8.5 (91.0)
Grade B (rigid pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade C (bag) 8.5 (91.0)
Grade C (rigid pleated) 5.3 (57.0)
Grade D (2-inch deep) 1.4 (14.8)
Grade D (4-inch deep) 2.1 (23.0)
2.3 EXTENDED-SURFACE, NONSUPPORTED-MEDIA BAG FILTERS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting filters

with holding frames.
B. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in
tapered form by flexible internal supports under rated-airflow conditions.
C. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel.
D. Filter-Media Frame: Hard polyurethane foam.
E. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners,
and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.
F. Bag filter section shall be installed for all fresh air fans. Bag filters shall be
medium efficiency type of class EU6 (MERV12).
2.4 FRONT- AND REAR-ACCESS FILTER FRAMES
A. Framing System: Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream
(front) or downstream (rear) filter servicing, cut to size and prepunched for
assembly into modules. Vertically support filters prevent deflection of horizontal
members without interfering with either filter installation or operation.
B. Prefilters: Incorporate a separate track, removable from front or back.
C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters to
ensure seal between gasketed filter elements to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
2.5 SIDE-SERVICE HOUSINGS

Parcel 34
A. Description: Factory-assembled, side-service housings, constructed of

galvanized steel, with flanges to connect to duct system.
B. Prefilters: Integral tracks to accommodate 50-mm disposable or washable filters.
C. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive-locking
devices. Arrange so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door.
D. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal
top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air.
2.6 FILTER GAGES
A. Description: Diaphragm type with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves,
black figures on white background, and front recalibration adjustment.
1. Diameter: 115 mm.
2. Diameter: 50 mm.
3. Range: 0 to 750 Pa (0- to 3.0-inch wg).
B. Manometer-Type Filter Gage: Molded plastic with epoxy-coated aluminum
scale, logarithmic-curve tube gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to
read from 0 to 750 Pa (0- to 3.0-inch wg), and accurate within 3 percent of full
scale range.
C. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting
bracket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install filter frames according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance.
Anchor filter holding frames to substrate.
C. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
D. Install filter gage for each filter bank.
E. Install filter gage static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters to
measure pressure drop through filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter
housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined
gages.
F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations. G.
Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
Parcel 34
H. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are

representative to inspect field- assembled components, filter and filter-frame
installation, and electrical wiring. Report results in writing.
B. Operate automatic roll filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct
malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and
replace units that cannot be corrected with new units and retest.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing

air-handling and air- distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new
filter media.

Parcel 34
SECTION 23 64 26 - SCREW CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 General
1.3 Codes and Standards
1.4 Design Conditions
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Chiller Controller
2.2 Compressor
2.3 Evaporator
2.4 Air-Cooled Condenser
2.5 Refrigerant Circuits
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 General Requirements
3.2 Chiller Sequence Controller
3.3 Spare Parts
3.4 Special Tools
3.7 Approved List of Manufacturers:

Parcel 34
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 General
Q. The Contractor shall supply and install factory assembled air-cooled
packaged refrigeration machines. The number and capacity of which shall be
as indicated in the capacity schedule shown on the Drawings.
R. Each machine shall consist of refrigerating circuits comprising screw
compressors, air-cooled condenser, and evaporator, interconnecting
refrigerant piping, controls, safety devices, accessories, and control power
transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 240 volts maximum. No
phase to neutral voltage shall be required.
S. The machine shall be completely charged at the factory with Environment
Friendly Refrigerant. All factory wiring and piping shall be contained within the
machine enclosure. All electrical components shall be protected from the
weather.
T. Each machine shall have heavy steel base frame with coil frames and panels
of galvanized steel phosphatized, and finished with baked-on enamel paint.
U. Provide low ambient control and high ambient options as required to
ensure unit is capable of operation from 0F to 125F (-18C to 52C )
ambient. Unit shall ship in one piece and shall require installer to
provide only a single evaporator inlet and outlet pipe connection. Chiller
model that ships in multiple pieces shall NOT be acceptable. Trim kits
and multiple evaporator inlet and outlet pipe connections shall NOT be
acceptable to meet the single piece shipment requirement of this
specification.
V. The works specified in the following divisions, sections and sub-
sections are included in this Section in each applicable part, as if
repeated herein verbatim.
Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps
Section 23 25 00 - Hvac Water Treatment
1.3 Codes and Standards
W. Codes and standards applicable to this section shall be primarily British

Standards and United States Codes, unless otherwise specified, the
performance/manufacturing standards of items mentioned in this
section shall conform to the applicable portions of the latest editions of
Parcel 34
the following codes, standards and regulations.

Reference Code Applicable
Abb. Title of Standard
Standard
American Society of ASHRAE - -
Heating Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers.
National Electrical NEMA - -
Manufacturers Association
National Electrical Code NEC Section -
424
Air Moving and Conditioning AMCA - -
Associations
National Fire Protection NFPA NFPA 90A Standard for Air
Association Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems
American Refrigeration Institute ARI
1.4 Design Conditions
The air conditioning system is based on the following design conditions.
Outside summer conditions:-
105.8 °F (41 °C) Dry Bulb.
80.6 °F (27 °C) Wet Bulb.
23.9 °F (13.27 °C) Daily range.
The inside summer conditions are indicated on the Drawings in the units
capacity schedules.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Chiller Controller
X. Microprocessor based controller shall be housed in a weather proof
enclosure with removable panels to allow for customer connection of
power wiring and remote interlocks. All controls including sensors
shall be factory mounted and tested prior to shipment.
Y. Microprocessor controls shall provide all control functions including start-up,
shut-down, leaving chilled water temperature control, compressor and
electronic expansion valve modulation, fan sequencing, antirecycle logic,
automatic lead/lag compressor starting and load limiting.
Z. Unit protective functions shall include loss of chilled water flow, evaporator
freezing, loss of refrigerant, low refrigerant pressure, high refrigerant
Parcel 34
pressure, reverse rotation, compressor starting and running over current,

phase loss, phase imbalance, phase reversal and loss of oil flow. Panel shall
have a clear language display to indicate operating data points including
chilled water set point, current limit set point, leaving chilled water
temperature, evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressures and
temperatures.
AA. The display shall be read and advanced on the unit without opening any
control panel doors.
BB. Each chiller shall have its own microprocessor based controls to maintain the
supply chilled water temperature at the pre-set value. The microprocessor
shall also have a provision for resetting the set point from the BMS.
CC. Provide capacity control system capable of reducing unit capacity to
15% of full load. Compressor shall start in unloaded condition using the
variable speed drive.
DD. Chiller shall automatically reset to normal chiller operation after power
failure.
EE. Unit operating software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Field
programmed set points shall be retained in lithium battery backed real
time clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5 years.
FF. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for
automatic chiller operation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field
control wiring necessary to interface sensors to the chiller control
system.
2.2 Compressor
GG. Compressors: Shall be direct drive, semi hermetic, rotary twin-screw
type complete with variable speed drive motors, including: muffler,
temperature actuated ‘off-cycle’ heater, rain-tight terminal box, and
precision machined cast iron housing. Compressor shall be U.L.
Recognized.
HH. Motors: Refrigerant suction gas cooled accessible hermetic
compressor motor, full suction gas flow through 0.006” maximum mesh
screen, with inherent internal thermal overload protection and external
current overload on all three phases.
II. Lubrication: External oil separators with no moving parts, 450 PSIG
design working pressure, and UL listing. Refrigerant system differential
pressure shall provide oil flow through service replaceable, 0.5 micron,
full flow cartridge type oil filter internal to compressor. Filter bypass,
less restrictive media, or oil pump not acceptable.
JJ. Capacity Control: Compressors shall start at minimum load. Capacity
control range from 100% to 15% of chiller full load. Provide
Microprocessor control to command compressor capacity to balance
compressor capacity with cooling load. When required to meet
minimum load, hot gas bypass shall be factory installed and integrated
Parcel 34
into standard control system.

2.3 Evaporator
A. Direct expansion type shell and tube evaporator or hybrid falling film
with high efficiency copper tubes. Independence refrigerant circuits
shall be provided per compressor.
B. The water flowing through the baffled shell and refrigerant through the
tubes. Shell shall be manufactured from seamless carbon steel pipes,
seamless copper tubes with aluminium star inserts, anti-corrosive steel
baffles around tubes. Design working pressure tube side shall be 230
psig and water side 200 psig or applicable to withstand CHW system
pressure.
i. Vent and drain connection shall be included.
ii. Refrigerant heads shall be removable.
iii. Equipped with antifreeze protection heater.
iv. The shell shall be completely insulated with 2" (50 mm) thick
urethane foam insulation covered with a sheet steel jacket.
2.4 Air-Cooled Condenser
KK. The condenser shall be air-cooled, upward air discharge type, copper
tube / aluminium fins OR Al Al Microchannel coils
LL. Condensing coils shall be seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded
to plate aluminium fins of min. thickness of 0.12 mm and max pitch of 16
FPI. Fins shall have full self spacing collars and completely cover the
tubes.
MM. Condenser coil fins shall have factory applied anti-corrosive coating
as approved by the Engineer against the high humidity and salty
atmosphere.
NN. A separate sub-cooling coil integral with main condenser coil to be
provided for each refrigerant circuit. Fans shall be propeller type,
placed to have uniform air distribution and shall be statically and
dynamically balanced for minimum noise and vibration. Motors for
outdoor application and specified ambient shall be tropicalized T. E. A.
O. class "F" insulation and with permanently lubricated ball bearings.
Heavy gauge protections guards are to be provided for each condenser
fan. Condenser coils shall be factory leak tested at 21 Bar.
OO. Coils shall be fitted with PVC coated steel guards.
2.5 Refrigerant Circuits
PP. Chillers shall have at least two completely independent refrigerant
circuits with one or more screw compressor per circuit. Each
refrigerant circuit shall include compressor suction and discharge
service valves, liquid line shut-off valve, removable core filter drier,
sight glass with moisture indicator, charging port and an electronic
expansion valve.

Parcel 34
2.6 POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

QQ. Power/Control Panel:
NEMA (IP55), powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched, and
gasket sealed outer doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing.
Provide main power connections(s), compressor starters and fan motor
contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring. Panel shall include
control display access door.
RR. Short Circuit Withstand Rating shall be 30,000 Amps
SS. Motor Starters: Motor starters shall be Variable Frequency Drive type
with zero electrical inrush current.
TT. Power Factor:
i. Provide equipment with a power factor of 95%.
ii. Power factor shall be same at full load and throughout part load
operation. Designs that produce a power factor that reduces
during part load operation will not be acceptable.
iii. Externally mounted power factor correction capacitors will not be
acceptable.
UU. Exposed compressor and fan motor power wiring shall be routed
through liquid tight conduit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 General Requirements
VV. The manufacturer shall perform all field or factory testing, balancing
and final adjustment of the refrigeration machines in accordance with
the applicable provisions of the relevant ASHRAE Standards.
WW. The following data shall be compiled and certified:
i. Temperature of chilled water "In and Out".
ii. Chilled Water flow (gpm).
iii. Pressure drop in chiller (Feet of Water).
iv. Operating power consumption from measured voltage, amperes
and power factor.
XX. Any part of the machines or system failing to meet the contract requirements
shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced.
YY. Unless indicated otherwise on electrical drawings Each packaged unit shall
be factory equipped to connect to only one electrical power feeder with the
necessary built-in circuit breakers or disconnect switch.
ZZ. The selection of the chiller shall be based on the optimum performance model
of the approved manufacturer, which combines best COP, FER and noise
level ratings. Contractor shall be responsible to select accordingly and to the
approval of the Engineer.
AAA. Each packaged unit shall be mounted on spring type vibration isolators
Parcel 34
flexible enough to dampen any vibrations.

BBB. The selection of the chiller shall be based on the optimum performance
model of the approved manufactureres which combines best COP, EER and
noise level ratings. Contractors shall be responsible to select accordingly and
to the approval of the Engineer.
3.2 CHILLER SEQUENCE CONTROLLER
CCC. Introduction
The Contractor shall supply and install the chillers sequence controller
as specified under this section of the specifications.
DDD. Controller
i. The controller shall serve all the chillers and the chilled water
pumps and shall be of the electronic type.
ii. The Controller shall be complete with a remote water temperature
sensor in the return chilled water header with all the necessary
interlocking devices, and all necessary items required for
satisfactory operation of the central chilled water system as
generally described herein below.
iii. This controller shall be supplied in addition to the individual
control panels of each chiller which is factory assembled and wired
and as specified under the chiller specifications.
EEE. Operation Sequence
i. All the chillers shall be electrically interlocked with the chilled
water pumps such that no chiller shall operate unless the duty
chilled water pump(s) have run for a pre-set time interval. Each
shall also be interlocked with it's water flow switch, installed in the
water outlet of the chiller in such a way that the chiller stops
automatically when its flow switch fails to sense water circulation
through it.
ii. The Contractor shall produce a schematic line diagram to show the
manual and automatic control system described hereinafter and
shall submit this diagram to the Engineer for approval.
iii. The control and operating sequence for the cooling equipment
shall be as follows:-
• The chilled water pump(s) shall be started manually by placing
the selector switch on automatic position.
• The flow switch in the chiller water circuit shall, after sensing
the rated flow, permit the starting of the refrigeration machines
provided that a signal from the sequence controller is received
by these machines.
iv. The water temperature sensor in the return chilled water header of
the system shall control the operation of the refrigeration machines
through the sequence controller which sends its signal direct to
Parcel 34
the multi-stage temperature controllers of the refrigeration

machines. When there is need for cooling, one stage of the multi-
stage controller shall operate a control relay which permits the
operation of the condenser fans and the corresponding refrigerant
solenoid valve and non-recycling relay, one at a time.
v. One stage of the first compressor can then start after the above
mentioned relays are in operation provided the following safety
and control cutouts are closed:-
• High pressure cutout
• Low pressure cutout
• Oil pressure cutout
• Low temperature cutout (freeze protection)
vi. When there is need for more cooling. The other stages of the first
compressor shall operate until the first compressor is fully loaded.
The same sequence will follow for the other compressors of the
refrigeration machine when more cooling is needed.
vii. A step controller shall prevent the compressors from starting all at
the same time and it shall start them one at a time with a time delay
between one another.
viii. Upon a further increase in the return chilled water temperature the
sequence controller will send a signal to the second refrigeration
machine and the same sequence of first machine will be repeated
and so on until the load is satisfied and design water temperatures
are maintained.
ix. Upon a drop in load one stage of the multi-stage controller opens
and as a result, the last operated compressor starts unloading and
upon further drop in load the relay of the solenoid valve is de-
energized and starts the pump down cycle until the compressor
stops by the action of the low pressure cutout. When load is
diminished more, and return water temperature drops further, other
compressors of the refrigeration machine are de-energized by the
same procedure. The condenser fans keep running after the relay
is de-energized, through the period of pump down and will stop
after the last compressor of refrigeration machine stops. On a
further drop in load, another step of the sequence controller
similarly de-energizes the compressors of the second refrigeration
machine through its multi-stage controller. The chilled water
pump(s) shall run continuously and shall be independent of the
automatic starting and stopping of the refrigeration machines.
x. A manual switch in the sequence controller shall enable the
operator to alternate the operation of the duty and stand-by pumps
and chillers.

Parcel 34
xi. A reversing switch shall be provided on the sequence controller to

equalize the running time of the refrigeration machines.
3.3 Spare Parts
FFF. The Contractor shall provide as part of his contract a separate list (as
an option) of spare parts for all the equipment supplied sufficient for
three years of operation all in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturers of the equipment.
3.4 Special Tools
GGG. A complete set of special tools, oil and grease for all the plant and
equipment supplied, adequate for 12 months operation shall be
supplied by the Contractor at the completion date of the project.
HHH. The Contractor shall furnish and submit to the Engineer in triplicate
bound, A4 size, Instruction Manuals containing the following material:-
i. Brief description of each system and its service and basic
operation features.
ii. Manufacturer's mechanical equipment parts list of all functional
components of the systems listed on the Drawings, control
diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers. List shall give system
No., unit no., Manufacturer's Model No., and Manufacture's drawing
no. Parts list shall include manufacturer's recommended spare
parts for one year operation.
iii. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.
iv. Possible breakdowns and repairs for each type of equipment.
v. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.
vi. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment
control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers.
vii. Complete, as installed, colour coded wiring diagrams of all
electrical motor controller connections and interlock connections
of other mechanical equipment.
viii. The Contractor shall furnish all the foregoing to the Engineer for
his review as to the fulfilment of the specified requirements.
ix. All items shall be available at least four weeks prior to the
substantial completion date.
3.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTEED PERIOD
III. All equipment and accessories supplied by the nominated Sub-
Contractor under this contract shall be guaranteed for a minimum
period of 1 year and 5 years from the date of final completion certificate.
JJJ. All guarantee shall be unconditional. In the event of breakdown, the
Contractor shall immediately provide and install a replacement unit of
Parcel 34
equal or superior performance until such time as the original unit is

repaired. Failure by the Contractor to comply within 6 hours of
notification, will entitle the Employer to purchase or hire a replacement
and seek reimbursement from the Contractor for all related
disbursements.
KKK. The Contractor shall guarantee every piece of equipment from any
manufacturing or installation defects for a period of five years, starting
from the date of issue of the substantial completion certificate.
End of Section 23 64 26.

Parcel 34
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.6 COORDINATION
1.7 WARRANTY
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
2.4 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 CONNECTIONS
3.4 COMMISSIONING
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

Parcel 34
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of

separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are
designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
devices not packaged with units.
2. Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operation" for control sequences
affecting operation of units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that

contains a coil for cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.
B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit
that contains a refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating

weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product
indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities,
Parcel 34
static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and

electrical characteristics.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating
obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate
between manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of
sections of units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-
applied color finishes.
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"
E. Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional

requirements of split-system units and are based on the specific system
indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance
characteristics may be considered.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable
and suitable of working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.
D. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the
fan operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall
not exceed 40dBa at low speed and 48dBa at high speed.
E. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in
accordance with the test procedures specified in ANSI S12.23. Sound-power
values apply to units provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and
standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models will be
acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no
variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or
relative arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the
building structure.
1.6 COORDINATION
Parcel 34
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs,
equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section
"Roof Accessories."
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer

agreeing to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div. (USA)
2. Trane Company (The); Commercial Systems Group. (USA)
3. York International Corporation. (USA)
2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

Parcel 34
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with
polystyrene.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins,
complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly
connected to motor.
D. Fan Motor: Multispeed, PSC type.
E. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to
controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide
brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on
vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive
overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: [Reciprocating] [Scroll].
2. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low- pressure switch.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins,
complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. F.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 7 deg C .
G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.4 ACCESSORIES

Parcel 34
A. Thermostat: [Low voltage with sub-base to control compressor and evaporator

fan].
B. Thermostat: [Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and
evaporator fan, with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time
setting, operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting].
5. Interface with BMS
C. Thermostat: [DDC wall type. Refer to specification section 15900, clause 2.5–A]
D. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory
cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with
flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting
devices securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on minimum
100 mm thick, reinforced concrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than
unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3, "Cast-
in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D. Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports
specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with
removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a
minimum static deflection of 25 mm.
F. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings.
Install tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS

Parcel 34

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves
to allow units to be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping
system Sections for specific valve and specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
piping and electrical connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

service, and report results in writing.
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do
the following:
1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.
2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.

Parcel 34
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.

4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen
vibration transmission to structure.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain split-system air-
conditioning units. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training]
[Closeout Procedures]."

Parcel 34
SECTION 238219 - FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.5 COORDINATION
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL
2.3 CONFIGURATION
2.4 MATERIALS
2.5 WATER COILS
2.6 FAN
2.7 FAN MOTORS
2.8 ACCESSORIES
2.9 CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

Parcel 34
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 CONNECTIONS
3.5 CLEANING
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.

1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for fan-coil
operation controls.
2. Division 23 Section "Air Coils" for coils.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and
configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and
configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment.

Parcel 34
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and
coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to
concealed units.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this
Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral
controls, and filters.

the Engineer.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.

Parcel 34
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish 1spare filter for each filter installed.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 spare fan belt for each unit installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid
opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials
under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be
satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures.
Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components
shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

1. Carrier Corp.(U.S.A.)
2. York International Corp. (U.S.A.)
3. Trane Company; North American Commercial Group. (U.S.A. or
France)

Parcel 34
2.2 GENERAL
A. Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed
models.
B. Units shall have three speeds switch and shall be selected at medium speed.
C. Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with
auxiliary water coil, valve and piping package, drain pans, air filter, fan motor,
and motor control.
D. All thermal and acoustical insulation shall be contained within a double walled
enclosure or sealed with a coating that is impervious to moisture.
E. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the
fan operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed
the following values at the midfrequency of each octave band:
OCTAVE BANDS
Frequency 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000

(hertz)
Power Level 60 55 53 50 48
F. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in

accordance with the test procedures specified in ANSI S12.23. Sound-power
values apply to units provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and
standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet models will be
acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no
variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or
relative arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the
building structure.
G. Capacity of he units shall be as indicated. Room fan-coil units shall be certified
as complying with ARI 440 and shall meet the requirements of UL 883.
2.3 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet filter, chassis, coil, drain pan,
fan, and motor in blow- through configuration with hydronic cooling coil.
B. Concealed Units: An enclosed, horizontal type assembly including cabinet, filter,
chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with
hydronic cooling coil with inlet and outlet duct collars.

Parcel 34
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.

B. Coil Section Insulation: 25-mm duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 and
attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a maximum
flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of 50 when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be
insulated with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall extend to
underside of valves, strainers and accessories, and be formed to slope from all
directions to drain connection.
D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.
1. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and
hinge and attached with safety chain; with cast-aluminum discharge grilles.
E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on
primer with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Engineer,
applied to factory-assembled and -tested fan-coil unit before shipping.
F. Enclosure shall be constructed of not lighter than 18-gage, 1.3 millimeter,
galvanized steel, properly reinforced and braced. Front panel of enclosure shall
be removable and provided with 1/2-inch (13 millimeter) thick insulation
conforming to NFPA 90A, to prevent condensation. Discharge louvers shall be
four-way adjustable and shall be designed to properly distribute air throughout
the conditioned space. All ferrous-metal surfaces shall be galvanized. All
exposed-to-view enclosure corners and edges shall be rounded. Discharge
louvers shall be mounted in a top panel that is removable for coil cleaning.
Access doors shall be hinged and shall be provided for all piping and control
compartments. Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer's standard in color
selected by the Engineer.
2.5 WATER COILS
A. Cooling/Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins

spaced no closer than 2.5 mm and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for
a minimum working pressure of 2068 kPa and a maximum entering water
temperature of 135 deg C .
2.6 FAN

Parcel 34
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made

of galvanized steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt
driven from motor. Fan shall be suitable for these speed operation. Fan-coil
capacity shall be based on medium speed. The noise level shall not exceed
NC30 unless otherwise specified.
2.7 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor

with integral thermal- overload protection and resilient mounts.
B. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled, with hinged mount,
adjustable motor pulley and permanently lubricated bearings.
C. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power
circuit. Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen.

B. Steel subbase, height as indicated.
C. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.
D. Filters: 25-mm thick, washable type, aluminum filters and frames.
E. Dampers: Steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade
length and having factory- mounted electric operators for 25 percent open cycle.
2.9 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Two-Pipe Valve Cycle: Wall-mounted electronic wireless infrared functioning

thermostat to remotely control the three-speed fan and electronic cycling of
valves, suitable to be connected to the central building control system specified
in Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls".

Parcel 34
A. Test and rate units according to ARI 440.

B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual
locations before fan-coil unit installation.
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators
(rubber hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section
"Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls at heights to match lighting
controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each
connection.

Parcel 34
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground equipment.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in
writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper
operation and electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs
or replacements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial
Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training.

Parcel 34

Parcel 34

Parcel 34
SECTION 23 09 00 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART1- GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE OF WORK
a. The contractor shall supply and install a fully integrated Building Management
System (BMS) in accordance with the contract document.
b. The BMS shall incorporate the following subsystems which shall be

capable of operating in standalone mode and software integrated.
1. TC/EMS Automatic Temperature Control and
Energy Management System.
2. FA Fire Alarm System
3. WT Water Tank
4. VS Ventilation System
5. LC Lighting Control
6. Elevator
7. Turnstiles
c. Although not specifically indicated the contractor shall include for a

supplementary and/or miscellaneous items, devices incidental and
necessary for the complete system.
1.2. RELATED WORK
The Contractor shall be fully aware of the general terms and conditions of the
contractor and the related work contained in specification sections.
General Requirements
Electrical Services
Mechanical Services
1.3. TENDER DOCUMENTS

Parcel 34
The contractor shall provide a detailed technical proposal with his tender,
including
The following information:
a. Product data sheets describing all aspects of the hardware

configuration, software and functional operation of the BMS.
b. List of materials
c. Point schedule.
d. Controls schematic and system diagrams.
e. other submittals need by consultant and owner for approved the provided
system.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

2.2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
a. The Building Management System shall be capable of integrating multiple

building functions including equipment supervision and control, alarm
management energy management, fire management, lighting control,
information management, historical data collection and archiving.
b. The Building Management System shall consist of the following:
i). DDC Outstations.
ii). Application Specific Controllers

(PAC). iii). Local display devices.
iv). Portable operations terminal.
v). Personal computer workstation C/w graphic user interface and all
accessories as per needed.

Parcel 34
c. The system shall be modular in nature and shall be suitable for expansion in
capacity and functionality.
d. The system architecture design shall eliminate dependence on any single

device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel shall
operate independently by performing specific control alarm management
operator I/O and historical data collection.
e. The failure of any single component shall not interrupt the execution
of control strategies or after operational devices.
2.3. NETWORK
a. The design of the BMS shall network the operator workstation with the
DDC Panels.
b. The system shall have the facility of interfacing with Internet and other
systems as mentioned in drawings, BOQ
2.4. DDC OUTSTATION PANELS
a. The DDC outstation shall be microprocessor based, each outstation shall

consist of modular hardware with plug in processors, communication
controllers, power supplies and input outfit modules.
b. Each outstation shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating
system.
On off control
Energy Management
Alarm Management
Historical / trend date
Maintenance support
Operator I/O
Dial up communication

Parcel 34
Manual Override Monitoring.

c. Each outstation shall provide the following point inputs and outputs:
Digital inputs for status / alarm contacts.
Digital outputs for on / off equipment control
Analogue inputs temperature, pressure, and power consumption.
2.5. ENERGY MANAGEMENT
The DDC outstation shall have the ability to perform energy management
controls.
Time of day scheduling
Calendar based scheduling
Peak energy demand and limiting.
2.6. MEP EQUIPMENT INTERFACES
MEP equipment as indicated in drawings shall be provided with a dedicated BMS

interface. The BMS shall provide the following functions, start, stop trip alarm and
adjustment of temperature set point.
a. The Building Management System shall be interfaced with the fire alarm
system to indicate graphically the layout of the systems and to log events.
b. The Building Management System shall be interfaced with the KNX lighting
system. The system shall have the capacity of operating and monitoring the
status of the lighting system which are controlled via local panel board.
c. The Building Management System shall be interfaced with chillers, child water
pumps, and fan coil units for monitoring and controlling.
d. Water tank shall be monitored via the BMS.

e. Generator shall be monitored via the BMS.
f. smoke fans inside the parking shall be monitored via the BMS.
g. Elevator shall be monitored via the BMS.
h. Turnstiles shall be monitored via the BMS.
g. The attached BMS input output schedule lists the points, which are connected
to the system, the contractor shall provide with his tender a full schedule of
equipment list and all item associated with the system
2.7. INPUT AND OUTPUT (I/O) FUNCTIONS
a. Analogue Inputs (IA): The AI function shall monitor each analogue input. Perform A
to D conversion, and hold the digital value in a buffer for interrogation. The AI
components shall include:
• A to D conversion with a minimum resolution of 10 bits plus sign.
• Signal conditioning for each analogue input. All analogue inputs shall
be individually calibrated for zero and span, in hardware or in
software.
• Common mode noise rejection of 60dB from 0 to 120Hz and normal

mode noise rejection of 20dB at 60Hz from source impedance of
10,000 ohms.
• Input ranges: Within the range of 0.20Vdc, plus to minus 10Vdc, and
0-50mA-dc.
b. Analogue Inputs (AI): The AI function shall monitor each analogue input.
c. Analogue Outputs (AO): AO function shall accept digital data, perform D to A

Conversion, and output as signal within the range of 0-20Vdc, plus to minus
10Vdc, or 0-50mA-dc. Minimum resolution of D to A conversion shall be 8 bits
plus sign. All analogue outputs shall be individually calibrated for zero and
span. The AO function shall be provided with short circuit protection. Pulse

width modulation shall be acceptable where that is the standard of the

manufacturer.
d. Digital Inputs (DI): The DI function shall provide open/close contact closures,
or other two-state data indications. It shall be equipped with isolation and
protection against input voltage surges, up to 180Vac peak.
e. Digital Outputs (DO): The DO function shall provide contact closures for
momentary and maintained operation of field devices.
Closures shall have minimum duration of 0.1 second. The DO function shall be
equipped with the following:
i.) Electromagnetic interference suppression on all output lines to

limit transients to non-damaging levels.
ii.) Isolation and protection against voltage surges, up to 180Vac

peak. iii.) Contacts rated 2Amps at 24Vac.
f. Pulse Accumulator: Pulse accumulator function shall have the same
characteristics as the digital inputs, except that, in addition, require a buffer to
totalize pulses between interrogations. The pulse accumulator shall be
designed to accept rates up to 10 pulses per second.
g. Signal Conditioning: Sensors requiring separate excitation shall be provided

with signal conditioning.
2.8. BMS INPUT / OUTPUT SCHEDULE
a. Contractors shall submit Building Management System (BMS) schedules

based on site requirements for approval moreover include the required spare
as mentioned in drawings.
b. The contractor shall use BMS design drawings interconnection points

input/
Output as a guidance for complete the interconnection systems.

2.8. SPARE PARTS
B. The Contractor shall supply the following spare parts:
1. 10% of the all field equipment.
2. 15% from total of DDC’s at least one DDC similar to minimum installed DDC.
3. 25% of total I/O’s in each module.
4. Each DDC shall have additional spare card
PART - 6 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.6 EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which BMS shall be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to installer.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF BMS
E. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other Works of the Contract
shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trades.
F. The equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to its


3. Supervise the installation of the complete system

G. Install BMS as indicated, in accordance with equipment Manufacturer's written

instructions and complying with applicable portions of national / international
standards of installation.
F. Connection and Supervision: Make connections to panel under

Manufacturer's supervision.
G. System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation
only, pre- approved by authority having local jurisdiction.
H. Prior to final acceptance of system, Manufacturer of system shall, in

I. Submit copy of test results in duplicate after signed by Employer's

representative to the Engineer and Employer's insurance company. Mount copy
of inspection record in enclosed frame assembly on control panel.
J. Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm,
supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be notified of the
testing to prevent unnecessary response.

K. Tests of all systems shall be made at intervals of not more than 24 hours.
Check for all other systems that must be coordinated and interfaced with fire the
alarm system:
1. Control panels of the air handling units of the HVAC System.
2. Electrical panels to shut down electricity in case of fire.
3. Other systems as mentioned in Drawings.
3.10 TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct training classes for the Employer personnel on the
installation, maintenance, programming, and operation of the equipment. The
training shall be on site for five (5) persons for duration of 10 days.

SECTION 26 27 26 - LC WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements, which affect
work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
Section.
B. Coordinate work with that of all trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure that steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers end-user Low current devices such as push buttons, card
reader, nurse call push buttons …ETC.
B. Devices listed in this section may or may not be used on this project.
Specifications for devices not included in the Contract Documents are included in
case they are needed during construction phase.
1.3 LOCATION OF DEVICES

A. The approximate schematic location of devices is given on the drawings.
The exact location shall be determined at the building as the work
progresses. Refer to Architectural plans for any special details, elevations, and
reflective ceiling plan. Verify door swings at job site.
B. All device boxes shall be installed plumb and level. All similar wiring devices in a
given project shall be similarly positioned with respect to surrounding architectural
features, to ensure consistency of final appearance throughout project (i.e. uniform
distance of back boxes from doorframes, uniform position on wall column, uniform
location under window, etc.). While Contract Drawings indicate approximate
location of outlet boxes, this attention to consistency shall dictate final box
placement.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, or otherwise decided at the site, outlet boxes in walls
shall be located with centerline at elevation above the finished floor as shown on
the Drawings.
D. The Engineer and the Owner reserve the right to change the location of any outlet,
before it has been installed.

A. Equipment shall comply with relevant standards, including the following (or updated
editions):
1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the local regulations,
codes and standards applicable in the project/host country. Components shall
be standard approved manufacturers’ products, uniform and modular.
2. Standards Compliance: provide wiring devices, which are listed and comply with
applicable standards for the various applications indicated in the specification.
3. 3Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,
IEC 60669-1 and IEC 60884-1 pertaining to wiring devices.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer’s data on each electrical wiring device specified
for approval by the Engineer.
B. Submit Samples of those products indicated for sample submission in Engineer’s
comments on product data submittal. Include color and finish samples of device
plates and other items per Engineer’s request.
C. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC
60669-1 and IEC 60884-1 pertaining to wiring devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 INTRODUCTION
A. Use the products of a single manufacturer for each type of wiring device..
B. Surface or Recessed Boxes: provide compatible type with conduit or cable system
and of shapes and sizes compatible with standards applicable to switches, socket
outlets and lighting fixtures approved.
C. Unused Openings: close with knock-out closers manufactured for the purpose.
D. Blank Plates: provide blank plates on outlet boxes installed in the tenant space or
on which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus installed does not have
suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be attached by a bridge
with slots for horizontal and vertical adjustment.

E. Nonmetallic boxes are to be used for recessed outlets in ceiling or wall.
2.3 MATERIALS:
Large floor service boxes shall be a steel recessed floor box with four wiring
compartments or as indicated in drawings. Fully adjustable mounting hardware.
Wiring compartments shall be interconnected within the box with removable
dividers. Each floor box shall use flush activation. The cover shall be suitable for
the application. Specifically a flush access hatch with carpet trim or flush furniture
partition feed. The exact type of cover for each box will be determined by the
owner in conjunction with the interior finishes. Boxes with no connections shall
be equipped with the flush access hatch. The covers shall not be installed until the
floor covering or tile is installed. The boxes shall be protected from damage during
construction
SECTION 260500 – GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 – GENERAL

Conditions and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
section.
C. It’s the Contractor responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the above.
A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions and
special Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work of this division.
B. In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements of

Division 1, refer the issue to engineer for direction.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract

requirements to the best available standards at the scale required.
D. Light and power and system riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally
indicate equipment connections to be used for various systems. Provide system
raceway and wiring as required for actual systems installed on this project. Provide
all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.
E. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the

contractor shall," "shall be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have been
omitted for brevity.
F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or
description of any item, in the Drawings of Specification or both, carries with it the
instruction to furnish and install the item complete with all appurtenances or
accessories necessary to complete any required system, regardless of whether or
not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description.
G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for a
complete interpretation of the work.
H. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various

items of work. Neither of these have any dimensional significance nor do they
delineate every item required for the intended installation.
Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the
electrical and mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated
on final architectural and structural working drawings and on equipment shop
drawings.
I. Certain details appear on the drawings which are specific with regard to the
dimensioning and positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the
purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination
for the indicated work.
J. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and architectural

drawings and specifications.
K. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and / or between drawings and
other parts of the Contractor Documents or where the interpretation of either is in
doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the Owner's authorized
representative on such matters before commencing the Work.
1.3 PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

A. The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such work and
the Contractor shall submit for consultant review and approval evidence of the
suitability and number of his staff who will undertake these tasks.
B. The construction Drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment, etc.,

and the Contractor shall allow for any minor modifications to location that may be
necessary.
1.4 COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Should the Contractor propose that the commissioning and performance testing be
carried out by a specialist firm, full details of the capability and experience of such
firm shall be submitted to the consultant for review and approval
1.5 CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS
A. Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials and
equipment proposed for the Work.
B. Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be purchased
from other sources without the prior written agreement of the consultant.
1.6 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
The Contractor shall submit a supplementary proposal for an annual system

Maintenance
Contract under which the Contractor would undertake, is addition to his obligations
under this contract, to fully maintain the system in efficient working order, including
routing checks, adjustments, lubrication and replacement of consumable spares, etc.,
The proposal shall set out the terms of the offer, the work to be carried out, the
guarantees of performance, the inclusive price for the twelve months following practical
Completion, and terms under which annual maintenance may be carried out thereafter.
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS
2.1 GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following initials, words and phrases shall have the following meanings:
EEA - Egyptian Electricity Authority.
TE - Telecom. Egypt.
IEC - International Electro technical Commission.

DIN - German Standard Institute.
VDE - Association of German Electrical Engineers.
BS - British Standards.
EN - European Standards.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
NEC - National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
INETA - International Electrical Testing Association.
NESC - National Electrical Safety Code.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
FM - Factory Mutual.
FIA - Factory Insurance Association.
ANSI - American National Standard Institute.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association “Standard of
Installation”
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
"The work" - That part of the project dependent

upon or subsequent to the statement.
"The works" - The works referred to in the

Specification and which are fully
shown and described in the Contract
Documents.
"Directed" - Directed by the Owner's authorized

representative
"Inspected" - Inspected by consultant.
“Submitted” - Submitted to or submit to the Owner's

or submit authorized representative
"Specificati - The description of performance

on" requirements, materials and
workmanship contained in the
Contract Documentation.
"IEE - The Wiring Regulations for Electrical

Regulations Installations within Buildings as issued
" by the IEE 16th edition.
2.2 DEFINITION OF "AGREEMENT", ACCEPTANCE" AND “APPROVAL"
"Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:
"Agreed" or - Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing
"Agreement"
"Accepted" or - Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing
"Acceptance"
"Approved" or - Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing" Approval"
"Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the

following limitation:
i) When given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of

construction submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents shall not be construed as denoting any degree of satisfaction with the
materials used in, or the execution of the Works.
ii) When given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the
contract Documents or proposed by the Contractor, is only for conformance with the
design intent and information given in the Contract Documents or contained in
subsequent Instructions.
iii) When given in respect to the methods of keeping records shall mean those
methods are satisfactory.

2.3 DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The definitions for words and phrased commonly associated with the design,
manufacture and site work for public health, mechanical and electrical installations
shall be those of the IEE Regulations, the IOP, plumbing Services Design Guide,
CIBSE Guides, BS, CP and associated Statutory Acts.
B. The terminology related to the voltages stated in the Contract Documents shall be
that used in the IEE Regulations unless specifically identified by values or
descriptions are not covered by such terminology.
C. L.V. shall be taken as meaning "Low voltage", and H.V. shall be taken as meaning
"high voltage" under the IEE Regulations.
D. Any reference to M.V. shall be for voltages in excess of 1000V A.C. or 1500V D.C.
between conductors, or 600V A.C. or 900V, D.C. between any conductor and earth.
E. “Systems" - Includes all necessary equipment, accessories, controls, racks,

suspension members, sheet metal supports, miscellaneous steel
members, etc.
F. "Fixing only" or - Includes the unloading, getting in, unpacking, returning “fix
only" empty cases, wrappings, etc., carriage paid, stacking, safely storing,
protecting, taking from store, handling, hoisting lowering, fitting, placing in position,
fixing and connecting.
G. “Allow" - Means that the cost of the item will be at the sole risk and
expense of the Contractor who is given the opportunity of
inserting such prices in the Bill of Quantities as he considers
relevant including overheads, profit and establishment charges, as
no subsequent claim for such items will be accepted.
H. “As Necessary" - Means that the work referred to shall be carried out to the
extent and by a method consistent with good practice
I. Words in the documents importing the singular only, also include the plural, and
vice versa where the context requires.
J. Where any possible doubt exists as to the meaning of words or terms used in the
Contract Documents the matter shall be referred by the Contractor to the Owner's
authorized representative for clarification.
2.4 CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS
A. All publications referred to shall be the latest edition thereof together with any
amendments current ten days before the date of issue of contract documents.

2.5 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. The Contract Documents shall be deemed to include, whether or not specifically

mentioned or shown, any materials, accessories or works as may be necessary for
the satisfactory completion of the contract Works in accordance with accepted
current practice or procedure.
B Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and/or between drawings

and other parts of the Contract Documents or where the interpretation of either is in
doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the Owner's authorized
representative on such matters before commencing the work.
2.6 SYMBOLS
A. The symbol notation for all drawings to be produced by the Contractor shall be in
accordance with applicable standards and regulations and shall be agreed by the
consultant and shown on a separate drawing.
PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS
3.1 TENDER DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings prepared in such detail as may be necessary to enable
those tendering to interpret the design for the Works and to submit competitive
Tenders for the execution of the Works.
3.2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings contained in or forming part of the numbered documents
which constitute the Contract Documents.
3.3 TAKING DIMENSIONS FROM DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of all dimensions abstracted from the
consultant's drawings, including verifying the accuracy by taking dimensions on
site, in the preparation of any drawings by the Contractor and before the relevant
work proceeds.
3.4 DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS
A. Should any differences exist between the drawings or should there be any
discrepancy in the figures, scale or the respects, the Contractor shall refer the same
to the Owner's authorized representative for clarification before proceeding with the
work.
PART 4 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

4.1 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings, based on the Contract Drawings showing details of the
Contractor's proposals for the execution of the Works. The drawings shall be to
such scales, in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to enable the Work
to be installed and shall indicate all pipe layouts, bends, tees flanges, valves,
connections etc., necessary for installation and also particular installation methods
to be applied in certain instances, e.g. where connecting to existing services.
These drawings shall also relate to builder's work drawings confirming relationships
to valve pits, cable intakes... etc.
B. In respect of drainage drawings, shall take account of the exact location and type of
sanitary ware scheduled by the consultant, and all manholes and access points
shall be shown and dimensioned to take account of walls, paving and other
adjacent permanent work.
C. In respect of fire protection services shall include layouts of sprinkler installations

and details and location of sprinkler heads showing dimensional co-ordination with
false ceiling systems.
D. In respect of gas installations there shall be in addition a "line diagram" indicating

the positions of all gas installation pipes, meters, meter controls, valves or cocks,
pressure test points and electrical bonding, all in accordance with the "Gas Safety
regulations" and gas authority requirements.
E. In respect of electrical installations shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
i) Site distribution and cable routes.
ii) General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the Contract.
iii) Schematics for main and sub-main distribution.
iv) Cabling and wiring connections showing cable types, sizes and loads.
v) Trunking and cable tray routes with details of sizes, fixings, cables carried and
terminations.
vi) Conduit routes with conduit sizes, methods of installation and details of cables,
loads and terminations, and all junction and pull-in boxes
vii) Power distribution for lifts.
viii) Lighting layouts for normal and emergency purposes, detailing positions and
types of luminaries, switch positions and wiring connections.

ix) Fire detector and alarm positions and wiring routes with type details and
functions.
x) Earthing system with precise details of routing, conductor sizes, capacity and
connection.
xi) Lightning protection system with precise details of position, routing, conductor
sizes and terminations.
xii) Communication systems wiring, terminal equipment types and functions, wiring,
terminal equipment types and functions, wiring routes and details.
xiii) Standby generator distribution system, other power supply systems and
changeover arrangements including schematic and detailed wiring with
identification of those sections of the normal system operated from the standby
source.
4.2 BUILDER'S WORK INFORMATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings and Schedules prepared to show requirements for
architectural or structural provisions necessary to facilitate the execution of the
Works and allow their integration into the project.
B. Such drawings should include requirements for foundations, bases, lifting and
supporting structures for plant or equipment, all holes in walls, floors and ceiling
elements, provision of services requirements within voids above false ceilings or
below false floors, the integration of the services installations into the false ceiling
system and trenches, depressions, ducts, etc., in or through building and site
elements.
C. General arrangements and floor plan drawings giving builder's work requirements
shall be to a scale of 1:50.
D. Builder's work drawings for plant rooms shall be to a scale of 1:20.
E. In cases where preliminary builder's work and structural information has already
been given by the consultant such information shall be confirmed and amplified as
required above by the contractor (including confirmation of weights of items of
equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.,) and incorporated in his drawings.
4.3 SHOP/FABRICATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings produced for the purpose of explaining how the
components of the designed works are to be fabricated and assembled.
B. In respect of ductwork, shall be to a scale of not less than 1:50 and shall indicate
the length of each duct section, the internal dimensions of the bare sheet steel,

dimensions of bends and fittings, location of stiffeners and supports, and shall
dimensionally locate the ducts in relation to the supporting or any adjacent
structure.
In addition, the location and size of all equipment, grilles, diffusers, access panels,
dampers, fire dampers, test points, penetrations and associated fittings for
automatic controls and instrumentation, etc., shall be shown.
C. In respect of pre-fabricated piping, shall be to a scale of not less than 1:50 and shall
indicate tube sizes, pipe length between fittings, location and size of valves and
fittings, anchors, guides, supports and brackets, cleaning eyes and drain points,
etc. Drawings shall relate the location of the pipe to the supporting and adjacent
building structure.
4.4 MANUFACTURERS' AND EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings of any item of plant or equipment produced by a

manufacturer or equipment supplier indicating principle dimensions, fixings,
connections and all other relevant details.
B. Where manufactures' original drawings are used they shall be specific to the
relevant Works and all references to optional features, other machines of a range,
etc., shall be deleted or the original drawings redrawn to comply with this clause.
C. Each drawing shall be stamped CERTIFIED by the Manufacturer which shall mean
that:
i) The drawing represents accurately the item concerned with correct dimensions
and all connections precisely located;
ii) The item conforms to the specific description given in the Documents, quoting
the reference numbers from the Contract Document;
iii) The item is shown complete and entire as it will be supplied for the works and
no extraneous or alternative parts are indicated;
D. Individual and layout drawings from electrical component manufacturers shall

include wiring internal and external to panels and controls.
E. All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly that wiring which forms part of or is
connected to the equipment as delivered and shall include the following minimum
information to enable the site connections and wiring to be completed:
i) Maximum electrical loading for each power cable
ii) Cable termination facilities

iii) Cable identification and all terminal numbers
iv) Inter-connections between different items.
4.5 CONTROLS DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings and schematics of plant and equipment showing the
control layout with each item uniquely identified, and including a brief description of
the controls operation and any associated interlocking.
B. In respect of electric controls shall mean logic sequence and wiring diagrams
showing the connections of all items of electric control equipment and interlocking
on the plant control schematics.
4.6 SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION PANEL DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings showing the general arrangement, the construction, the
external and internal layout of panels, and wiring diagrams comprising internal
wiring, schematics of interlocking and external wiring diagrams, for the complete
systems in the panels. The drawings shall also indicate all pipe work and capillary
connections from the panels to external equipment.
4.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing work, provide complete set of black and white prints of
Contract Drawings.
B. Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such
prints, at time of occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings.
C. Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural points.
D. Make drawings available for the Architect’s periodic inspection and submit for
review with As-Built Drawings.
A. Before commencing work, provide complete set of lithotracings of Contract

Drawings on 4 mill mylar or transparencies and upon completion of works
contractor shall submit 2 sets on 3.5” diskettes or CD, computer reproducible as
built drawings of electrical works and prints.
B. Neatly revise to conform with Record Drawings.
C. Conspicuously indicate major deviations by specific reference to shop drawings and

provide an accurate and complete record of the work as installed.

D. Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified lithotracings as As-Built and
referenced Shop Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record Drawings, to the
Architect of acceptance.
PART 5 - DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR
5.1 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Prepare and submit before the relevant work proceeds, all drawings necessary to
install the Works. Drawings shall be based on the Contract Drawings and must be
fully coordinated with the architectural works and other disciplines and shall take
into account any modifications either to the building or the installation which may
have taken place, incorporating details of the actual items of plant and equipment to
be installed.
B. Prepare and submit all necessary Schedules of Equipment and devices with the
relevant drawings.
C. Prepare and submit schedule of light fittings and luminaires.
D. The effect of any authorize variation or site instruction shall be carried through and
shown on all applicable drawings by the Contractor. The cost of so doing shall be
reimbursed to the Contractor as part of the cost of the variation of the instruction.
5.2 SIGNATURE ON CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS
A. Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be signed by the Contractor to

confirm that:
i) The work shown thereon has been coordinated both in sequence of installation
and in physical relationship to the work of others.
ii) The drawing does not contain any variations other than those authorized by the
Owner's authorized representative instruction.
iii) On re-submittal, all alterations made since initial submission have been clearly
annotated on the drawing and listed separately down the right hand side of the
drawing.
PART 6 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
6.1 GENERAL

A. Submit to the Owner's authorized representative to a program agreed with the

Owner's authorized representative comprehensively detailed drawings showing all
builders work required for the Works.
B. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with such information as the Owner's
authorized representative may require on any matter related to or affecting the
Works.
6.2 INFORMATION LISTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit to the Owner's authorized representative all items of information required by

the Contract Documents at the proper time so as not to impede the progress of the
works.
6.3 INFORMATION FOR MANUALS
A. Where the Contractor sublets the preparation of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual to a specialist firm, the Contractor shall provide or obtain all necessary
information in respect thereof.
6.4 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL LITERATURE
A. Manufacturers' technical literature submitted for examination or for inclusion in the

Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be prepared and assembled specifically
for the project and shall exclude any irrelevant matter. Each item shall be clearly
identified on the record Drawings and cross-referenced to the contract Documents.
6.5 MANUFACTURERS' GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. All manufacturers' guarantees and warranties on plant, equipment, etc., shall be

valid at least up to the end of the Defects Liability Period, or for at least twelve
months after Practical Completion of the total project, whichever is the longer
period.
B. All equipment normally guaranteed by the manufacturers for a period of time which
goes beyond the period defined above shall be held to remain under guarantee for
the maximum period.
C. Provide two copies of all such guarantees, one of which shall be included in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
6.6 PLANT ROOM SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATICS

A. In addition to the provision of Record Drawings, provide the following at a size to be

easily readable and frame under glass and hang in each plant room and other
appropriate location as directed by the Owner's authorized representative:
i) Circuit diagrams consisting of schematic drawings of circuit layouts showing

identification and duties of equipment, numbers and locations, control and
circuits.
ii) Valve schedules in the form of typewritten sheets showing the number, type,
location, application, service and symbol, and normal operating position of each
valve installed.
iii) Control schematics.
iv) Mechanical and electrical plant items:
v) First aid instructions for treatment of persons after electric shock.
vi) All other items required under Statutory or other regulations.
vii) Location of main incoming gas valve serving gas meter.
viii) Location of sprinkler fire main control valve.
ix) Emergency operating procedures and telephone numbers for emergency call-
out service applicable to any system or item of plant.
6.7 RELAY COORDINATION
A. Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.
The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on a log-log papers showing that

the choice of the C.B. settings are correct for coordination.
If selectivity coordination study is failed, contractor is responsible to change any

number of breakers, relays, such that the selectivity study is fully achieved with no
extra cost to the owner.
6.8 SHORT CIRCUIT AND VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION
A. Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculation

based on the actual impedance values of the electrical components such as supply
short circuit level at the 24KV, transformer per unit impedance, bus bars and cables
impedance’s ...etc.
PART 7 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals (which shall incorporate Instruction

Manuals on detailed requirements) covering and including the information detailed
below:
7.1 SCOPE OF SYSTEMS
i) A full technical description of each of the systems installed, written to ensure that
the Owner's staff fully understand the scope and facilities provided.
ii) A technical description of the mode of operation of all systems.
7.2 INSTALLATION RECORD
i) A photo reduction of all Record Drawings to A1 size together with an index.
ii) Diagrammatic drawings of each system indicating principal items of plant,

equipment, valves, etc.
iii) Legend for all color-coded services.
iv) Schedules of plant, equipment, valves, etc., by system, stating their locations within
the building, duties and performance figures, together with anticipated life
expectancies.
v) A unique code for each item of plant, equipment, valves, etc., installed number
cross-referenced to the record and diagrammatic drawings and Schedules. The
name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer of every item of
equipment and plant shall be listed together with catalogue list numbers.
vi) Manufacturers' literature including detailed drawings, electrical circuit details, and
printed operating and maintenance instructions for all items of plant and equipment
supplied under this contract.
vii) A copy of all test certificates including those for all plant, equipment, valves, etc.,
used in the installations, including (but not limited to) electrical circuit tests,
corrosion testes, type testes, works tests, start-up and commissioning tests,
including those for air and water balancing.
viii) A copy of all manufacturers’ guarantees.
7.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
i) Starting up, operating and shutting down instructions for all equipment and systems
installed.
ii) Control sequences for all systems installed.

iii) Scheduled details of all equipment settings, and actual values maintained in
controlled variables during commissioning.
iv) Procedures for seasonal changeovers.
7.4 MAINTENANCE
i) Detailed recommendations as to the preventive maintenance frequency and

procedures, including related health and safety procedures, which should be
adopted by the Owner to ensure the most efficient operation of the systems.
Specific details of maintenance procedures to prevent any hazard arising to health
and safety e.g. Legionnaires Disease, shall be included.
ii) Lubrication Schedules for all lubricated items of plant and equipment.
iii) A list of normal consumable items.
iv) A list of recommended "running spares" required, being those items subject to wear
or deterioration and which may involve the Owner in extended deliveries when
replacements are required at some future date.
v) Procedures for full diagnosis.
vi) Emergency procedures.
7.5 NUMBER OF COPIES REQUIRED
A. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with one original and three copies of
the final Operation and Maintenance Manual.
7.6 PREPARATION OF MANUALS
A. The manuals shall be contained in A4 size, plastic-covered, lose leaf, four ring
binders with stiff covers, each indexed, divided and appropriately cover-titled.
Drawings larger than A4 shall be folded and accommodated in the binder so that
they may be unfolded without being in any detached from the rings.
B. Prepare the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in draft as soon as the Installation
Drawings are in hand.
C. Make two sets of temporary manuals (with provisional Record Drawings and
preliminary performance data) available at commencement of commissioning to
enable Owner's staff to familiarize themselves with the installation.

These should be of the same format as the final manuals with temporary insertions
for items which cannot be finalized until the works are commissioned and
performance tested.
7.7 OBLIGATIONS OF MANUFACTURERS TO PROVIDE LITERATURE
A. The requirements and obligations of manufacturers to provide literature as part of

the installation record shall form part of plant and equipment orders and such
orders shall be considered unfulfilled until literature requirements have been met.
PART 8 - INSPECTION, TEST AND APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
8.1 GENERAL
A. Submit Inspection, Test and Approval Certificates as required by the contract

Documents.
PART 9 - PROVISION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
9.1 DRAWING PRODUCTION
A. Prepare and submit a master plan for drawing production covering the following:
i) list of drawings to be produced
ii) drawing/Schedule titles and numbers
iii) symbols/notation/scales to be used
iv) Cross-references to other drawings
v) Identification of drawings required for record purposes.
9.2 CHECKING PRIOR TO SUBMISSION
A. All drawings, Schedules and other information provided by manufacturers,

suppliers, or approved sub-contractors shall be checked by the contractor who shall
ensure that all requirements of the Contractor who shall ensure that all
requirements of the Contract documents have been incorporated prior to
submission.
9.3 PREPARATION OF RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation of the
Works as each section is completed. The Owner's authorized representative and
the consultant shall be allowed to inspect these drawings on request during their

preparation and each drawing shall be submitted to the Owner's authorized

representative prior to Practical Completion.
9.4 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The final draft of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be submitted in due
time, and in any case not less than four weeks prior to Practical Completion, so that
at least one copy of the complete final version is in the possession of the Owner at
Practical Completion.
B. the Operation and Maintenance Manual is an essential part of the works. The works
will not be accepted as complete and payment will be withheld until the required
number of copies of the complete final document have been received by the
Owner's Authorized representative.
C. If partial possession is required by the Owner then the documentation shall also be
phased accordingly and so arranged to finally form one comprehensive document.
D. It shall be the contractor's responsibility, whenever a successive phase of the works

is handed over, to amend and update the previously issued version of the
Operation and Maintenance Manual, bring it to the appropriate stage of completion
and submit same to the Owner's Authorized representative in due time.
9.5 FAILURE TO PRODUCE RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A. If the contractor fails to produce and submit the record drawings as required during
the progress of the works, or other information for the operation and Maintenance
Manual by the due dates. then the Owner's Authorized representative may instruct
a third party to provide any or all of these documents and the total cost of preparing
such documents shall be borne by the contractor.
PART 10 - STATUTORY UNDERTAKINGS AND OTHER AUTHORITIES
10.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor will be responsible for programming, coordinating and progressing

the involvement of the Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities in the works.
B. Provide all necessary information so required by the Owner's Authorized

representative in respect of the Statuary Undertakings and other Authorities related
to the works.
C. In addition, the contractor shall execute the following in connection with the
applicable statutory Undertaken and other Authorities.
10.2 COMPLETION OF NEGOTIATIONS

A. Take responsibility for and complete negotiations commenced by the Owner's

Authorized Representative or the Owner in respect of the provision or diversion of
utility services.
10.3 APPLICATIONS BY OWNER
A. Take responsibility for and complete any application made by the Owner in respect
of any matter related to the works.
10.4 SAMPLES
A. Provide and submit prior to placing orders samples of workmanship for testing by
the applicable statutory undertaking or other authority.
10.5 CONNECTIONS OF NEW WORKS
A. Make arrangements to allow connection of the new works to the supply networks
including providing details of the proposed works and obtaining approval as
necessary.
10.6 BY-LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. Examine and check the contract Documents for compliance with the Statutory
Requirements so that written notice of any divergence the contractor may find
between the contract Documents and the Statuary Requirements, can be issued to
the Owner's Authorized representative by the contractor in due time so as not to
delay the progress of the works, Where Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities require to witness tests, the contractor shall give all necessary notice,
carry out such tests, provide attendance and facilities and copy any documents,
etc., as required.
10.7 NOTICES AND FEES
A. Give all notices in accordance with BY-Laws and regulations and pay all fees and
charges legally demandable. Provisional Sums are included in the Bill of Quantities
for fees and charges payable to Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities.
10.8 BUILDERS WORK IN CONNECTION
A. Obtain details of any builders work required, and provide the Owner's Authorized
representative with all necessary details of same.
10.9 AMENDMENTS
A. Details of any amendments to the works deemed necessary by a Statutory

Undertaking or other Authority shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized
representative prior to work being executed

10.10 FORMALITIES
A. Comply with all formalities in connection with test notices, agreements, application
for supply forms, etc., and forward all such documents requiring the Owner's
signature to the Owner's Authorized representative in ample time.
B. Prepare installation Drawings for sprinkler systems, fire mains, pumps, alarms, fire
prevention systems and the like, together with related calculations and technical
information in a suitable form and submit same to the local Authorities and Fire
Insurers as required by the Owner's Authorized representative.
10.11 CORRESPONDENCE, ETC.
A. Provide copies of all correspondence, test certificates, notices, etc.
10.12 COST OF RE-CONNECTIONS, ETC.
A. The contractor shall be responsible for any cost changes for re-connections, re-
visits, re-testing, etc., except for such charges arising from any direction of the
Owner's Authorized representative arising from any direction in respect of defective
work.
10.13 GENERAL FACILITIES
A. Arrange for facilities to be provided for the purpose of laying new mains and
services and adjusting existing equipment.
B. Notify the owner's Authorized representative that the work of the Statutory
Undertakings and other Authorities is complete in order that the owner's Authorized
representative can issue directions in respect of covering up of the permanent
works by other contractors.
PART 11 - CONTROL OF QUALITY
11.1 SPECIFIED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Unless otherwise specified all materials, plant and equipment, and the use and
installation thereof, shall comply with the material, test and other requirements of
the relevant . IEE wiring regulations 16th edition, IEC standards and BS standard.
B. Materials or substances which are generally known at the time of use to be

deleterious shall not be used other than as allowed by standards or statutory
regulation current at the time of use

C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality, and shall be produced by skilled and
responsible craftsmen fully experience and in their respective trades.
D. Allow for proper packing and safe delivery of all equipment and materials and for
returning re-usable packaging to the suppliers as appropriate
E. Include for obtaining materials from any source whatsoever to complete the works
within the contract period and no claim will be allowed for materials ex-stock or from
any other source in the event of difficulty of supply.
D. Identical parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable and any items, fittings or
accessories which are used in quantity shall in each case be the produce of one
manufacturer.
11.2 GUARANTEE AVAILABILITY OF SPARES
A. Guarantee or provide manufacturers' written guarantees that spares will be

available for a minimum period of ten years from the date of practical completion
both to the Owner and to any other future building Owner, occupier or contractor
having responsibility for the maintenance of the works.
11.3 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO FIXING
A. All installation materials, component parts or complete items of equipment shall be

delivered and stored on site in properly labeled boxes, crates or containers, suitably
designed and constructed to give protection against transportation and handling
damage and deterioration during storage. The packing shall be weather-proof.
B. Store all materials on raised boarded platforms under weather-proof cover and
store pipes, conduits, Trunking and the like on racking.
C. Equipment or component parts of equipment specifically designed to operate in

normal room conditions, shall be delivered to and stored on site with suitable
waterproof protection.
D. Take particular care to protect component parts specifically designed to act as heat
transfer surfaces. These surfaces shall have purpose-designed packing to protect
them whilst in transit and storage on site.
E. Completely cover valve ports and ends of pipes or plug to prevent the ingress of
foreign matter, and additionally protect flanges against damage to the flange
surface.

F. Examine all materials and equipment supplied under this contract on delivery to site
and immediately prior to installation. Any material or equipment which is damaged
or faulty shall be replaced.
11.4 SETTING OUT
A. The contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the works
and for the correctness of position, levels, dimensions and alignment for all parts of
the works and for the provision of all necessary instruments, appliances and labor
in connection therewith. If any error shall appear or arise in the position, levels,
dimensions or alignment of any part of the works the setting out for which the
contractor was responsible, the contractor shall at his own expense rectify such
error.
B. The checking of any setting out or of any line or level by the Owner's authorized
representative shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the
correctness thereof. The contractor shall carefully protection preserve all bench-
marks, sight rails, pegs and other things used in setting out the works.
C. Take all necessary dimensions on site, check runs and levels and mark out for
builder's work.
D. Any unnecessary work carried out by the Owner's authorized representative or

other contractor due to inaccuracy of the contractor's drawings, dimensions, or
marking out shall be paid for by the contractor.
11.5 PROTECTION OF NEW WORK
A. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that all his work is
adequately protected. Protection shall be by the contractor at the completion of
each day and during periods of inclement weather, and all work exposed to view
on completion in the works shall be protected from spillage, stains and other
damage. All systems shall be kept in a fully drained condition prior to
commissioning.
B. Test water shall be disposed of so as not to damage any part of the temporary or
permanent works, or any adjoining land or property.
11.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING GENERALLY
A. Agree procedures for notices, witnessing, reporting and recording tests with all
parties involved including local authorities and statutory undertakings, prior to the
commencement of the works.

B. Submit copies of the formal test certificates signed by the contractor's

representative not later than seven days after completion of successful tests.
A. Re-test or carry out at no extra cost any additional tests required to establish
acceptability of the works following failure of any part thereof or any item therein to
meet the required standard or functional performance.
11.8 INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING
A. Supply, check, re-calibrates whenever necessary and maintain in good working

order all instruments and equipment for setting out, measurements, gauging,
inspection, commissioning and performance testing whether they are specifically
called for or implied by the contract documents.
B. All such instruments and equipment shall be adequate for the purpose and shall
satisfy the purposes and accuracy’s required by the contract documents.
C. All instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the contractor.
11.9 PROVISION OF STAFF
A. Provide all necessary staff with the relevant skills and competence for all
inspection, testing, commissioning and performance testing.
11.10 ACCEPTABLE HARMONIC LEVELS
The acceptable limits of harmonics voltages and currents shall be as per the
engineering recommendation IEEE-591.
These recommendations are as follows:
The following table permitted harmonic currents for any one consumer at point of
common coupling

The contractor must include harmonic filters with appropriate size to be connected in
the network and/or at places where source of harmonics exists (such as elevator
panels, UPS...etc.) in order not to exceed the above mentioned figures.
PART 12 - INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING
12.1 GENERAL
A. Provide assistance and make available to the consultant and Owner's authorized
representative any instruments or other equipment he may require from time to time
for examining the accuracy, quality and performance of the contract works.
PART 13 - INSPECTION AND TESTING CERTIFICATES
13.1 PROCEDURES
A. Schedule and submit an integrated program in respect of those elements of the

works for which inspections and tests shall be carried out and for which inspection
and test records shall be maintained.
These elements shall include in particular those which will be covered up during
construction, and other matters described under certificates for materials and
equipment.

B. Testing of individual items of plant and equipment at manufacturers' works shall be

witnessed and approved by Owner's consultant. On site, and final testing of
completed installations or parts of installations shall all be in accordance with the
contract documents.
13.2 CERTIFICATES FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the appropriate
British Standard or as described. Should the contractor propose an alternative
item without the appropriate certification, independent testing shall be carried out at
the contractor's expense to determine compliance with the contract documents.
B. Where appropriate all materials delivered to the site shall bear the manufacturer's
name, brand name and any other data that may be required to verify their exact
nature and relate it to the requirements of the contract documents.
13.3 WORKS TESTS CERTIFICATES
A. Works tests certificates shall include, whenever applicable, full information to

enable the item tested to be identified, such as project title, contractor's name,
manufacturer's nameplate or serial numbers, the location in the works and the
delivery or batch which the sample represents.
13.4 INSPECTION, AND TESTING RECORDS
A. Maintain records of all inspections, and testing performed to substantiate conformity

with the contract documents including those carried out by the contractor and/or
third party testing agencies, together with manufacturers' or suppliers' certificates of
test.
B. All records shall be retained on site and made available to the Owner's authorized
representative on request. On completion of the works all records shall be handed
over to the Owner's authorized representative unless otherwise directed.
C. These records shall include, as appropriate, but not be limited to, project title,
contractor's name, the identification of the element, item, batch or lot, the nature
and number of the observations and tests, the dates of testing, the name and
signature of the person responsible for the testing, the number and type of
deficiencies found, and details of any corrective action taken.
D. Any record which indicates that any part of the works inspected or tested does not
comply with the contract documents shall be submitted without delay in order that
the contractor's proposals for rectification may be assessed.
13.5 MATERIALS AND SAMPLES

A. Each manufacturer must be willing to admit the Owner's authorized representative

and the consultant to his premises during normal working hours for the purpose of
examining and witnessing the testing of materials and equipment proposed for the
works.
B. All materials and equipment shall be new.
C. Obtain and implement manufacturers' instructions on the assembly and installation

of materials and equipment.
D. Submit all samples required by the contract documents.
E. The procedure for submission of samples shall be agreed prior to commencement

of the works.
F. Samples of materials, workmanship, components and equipment accepted as

complying with the contract documents will be retained by the consultant and all
related items included in the works shall be at least equal in all respects to these
samples.
Provide safe storage of accepted samples on site including racks for display,
reference and inspection.
13.6 REJECTION OF MATERIALS OR WORKS NOT TO STANDARD OF SAMPLES
A. Any material or work which is inferior to an accepted sample or is different from

parts of the works already constructed or which is stained or damaged after
installation will be treated as defective work.
13.7 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Defective work, and the opening up of the works to ascertain same, shall be dealt
with strictly in accordance with the requirements detailed elsewhere in the contract
document.
B. Replace defective work with materials, goods or work in accordance with the
contract documents. Alternatively submit proposals for any treatment or making
good that is considered will bring the defective work to the standard required by the
contract documents. Such proposals shall not relieve the contractor of his
responsibility to execute the works to the full intent of the contract documents.
C. The costs as defined in the contract conditions shall include the cost of any related
delay or disruption in the progress of the works, or any other consequential cost.
13.8 DAMAGE BY INCLEMENT WEATHER

A. The contractor shall not execute any work when it is likely to be adversely affected
by inclement weather and he shall make good any damage so caused at his own
expense.
PART 14 - COMMISSIONING THE WORKS
A. All pre-commissioning checks, setting to work, commissioning and performance

testing shall be carried out as detailed elsewhere in the contract documents.
14.1 ATTENDANCE AND CO-OPERATION
A. give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of

requirements for the attendance and co-operation by the Owner's authorized
representative and by other contractors.
14.2 NOTICE TO CONSULTANT
A. Give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of any
commissioning or testing to be carried out to enable the consultant to witness all or
any of such tests, etc.
14.3 UNSUCCESSFUL TESTS
A. The contractor shall pay any costs incurred by the Owner, Owner's authorized
representative or the consultant in connection with unsuccessful tests, including
costs incurred due to the inability of the contractor to make or complete a test,
having given the notice required above.
14.4 CHECKING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning includes the setting to work and regulation of the installation.
B. Check all installations and commission in accordance with the contract documents
including but not limited to the following:
i. Co-operation with the Owner's authorized representative to produce a

coordinated program for the testing and commissioning of the complete works.
ii. Provision of all consumable materials.
iii. Provision of such temporary communication apparatus as is necessary to

enable members of the commissioning team who are unable to be in visual or
aural contact with each other to carry out their tasks safely and effectively. Such
apparatus shall not cause interference with equipment owned or operated by
any other parties.

iv. Provision of proper and permanent records of relevant readings of all quantities
taken during the checking, pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures.
The form of the records shall be agreed with the Owner's authorized
representative in advance of commissioning and the record for each complete
commissioning procedure shall be dated and signed by the person whom the
contractor has appointed to be formally in charge of commissioning.
14.5 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. When the Contractor has completed the commissioning of the whole of works he
shall give to the Owner's authorized representative written certification of this fact.
The certificate shall be signed by the director or manager responsible for the
contract.
B. Only when this written certification has been received by the Owner's authorized
representative will performance tests be allowed to commence. Unless otherwise
agreed by the Owner's authorized representative in writing, where engineering
systems involve the works of more than one works contractor, performance tests
will only be allowed to commence when written certification from all the relevant
works contractors has been received.
C. Carry out during this period full tests on the complete works to demonstrate that the
works meet the requirements of the contract documents.
D. The Owner's authorized representative may at his discretion waive any part of the
full test procedure if he considers it has been satisfactorily demonstrated, recorded
and properly certified at any earlier time but the contractor shall however allow in
his costs for carrying out all of the provisions in this clause.
14.6 RECORDS OF WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Keep a daily record throughout the contract period of the maximum, minimum and
average outside shade temperature, humidity and wind speed.
14.7 SUMMER AND WINTER PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Test the performance of the whole of the works in both summer and winter design
conditions and allow for any special visits to site and provide any necessary
attendance during the defects liability period to set up, monitor and remove test and
recording equipment.
14.8 SYSTEMS USED BEFORE PRACTICAL COMPLETION

A. No part of the permanent services installations shall be used by the contractor for
his own benefit without the written agreement of the Owner's authorized
representative.
B. Should any part of the works be operated during the period of the contract for the
benefit of the contractor and/or the Owner's authorized representative, all
consumable spares, including light bulbs and tubes which have been so put to use
shall be replaced by new not more than seven days prior to practical completion.
14.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY
A. Defects, shrinkage’s or other faults appearing at any time during the defects liability
period which have led, or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are likely to lead to failure
or malfunction of any part of the works shall be made good immediately upon
receipt of any instruction or direction of the Owner's authorized representative.
B. Prepare and submit a record of any failure or malfunction of any part of the works,
the remedial action taken, subsequent re-testing and the results thereof.
C. Notify the Owner's authorized representative of any malfunction in, or damage to,
the works which the contractor can demonstrate had been caused by incorrect
operation of the system, vandalism or action of a third party.
D. Inform the Owner's authorized representative in writing when all defects are finally
rectified so that an inspection may be carried out prior to the issue of the final
certificate.
PART 15 - PREVENTION OF NUISANCE AND DANGER TO PERSONS
15.1 SITE SAFETY GENERALLY
A. The contractor before commencing work shall inform the, Owner's authorized
representative of the person who will be on site during working hours and who will
have the authority to take action on and be responsible for all aspects of safety,
health and welfare in connection with the contract works.
B. Take all the necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all site personnel, and
the general public, and in respect of the contract works provide for the safety,
health and welfare of work-people employed on the site to comply with the
requirements of the following and of all other relevant statutes, statutory
instruments, statutory regulations or industrial agreements.
15.2 FIRE PRECAUTIONS
A. Take all reasonable precautions to avoid the outbreak of fire, particularly in work
involving the use of naked flames and impress on workmen the dangers involved in

the careless disposal of matches and cigarettes, etc., and the accumulation of
rubbish on site. Where considered necessary due to the nature of the works or as
directed by the Owner's authorized representative, institute a "No smoking” regime.
B. The use of naked lights shall be prohibited except in cases of absolute necessity,
and extreme care taken in the use of all equipment likely to cause fire damage.
15.3 NOISE AND NUISANCE CONTROL
A. Conduct operations in such a manner that nuisance shall not be caused to the
general public, adjoining residents and users of adjacent buildings.
If such nuisance is being caused the contractor shall immediately make such
arrangements as will prevent a recurrence of the same and indemnify the Owner
against any claims arising therefrom.
B. Attention is also drawn to the necessity to comply with BS 5225 Code or Practice
for noise control on construction and demolition sites.
15.4 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Comply with local regulations and satisfy the requirements of the environmental
health office under whose authority the works are being executed.
15.5 RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE
A. All apparatus where the normal operation is such that interruption of low frequency
or direct electrical currents occur shall be fitted with means of suppressing the radio
and TV interference so caused.
B. The equipment and methods to be used in determining the level of radio

interference shall be as specified in BS 727 and the limits of interference shall in all
cases be those specified in BS 800.
C. Reference shall be made to CP 1006 for guidance on the provision and installation
of equipment to meet the above standards.
D. C.B. radio shall not be used except with the written consent of the Owner's
authorized representative.
15.6 USE OF LASER EQUIPMENT
A. The following safety precautions shall be observed in addition to the

recommendations of BS 4803.

i. At least one warning notice at each laser location.
ii. The laser should be turned off or shuttered when not in use or unattended.
iii. The laser should be set well above or below the heads of employees when
possible.
iv. Employees should never stare directly into the laser beam or point the laser at
another person.
v. All laser equipment must bear a label indicating the maximum beam output,
which must not exceed 5 milli watts.
vi. Only qualified employees shall be assigned to install, adjust and operate the
laser equipment.
B. In addition, the maximum period of exposure (MPE) to laser light should be

determined and monitored in accordance with BS 4803
PART 16 - EXISTING SITE SERVICES
A. Co-ordinate and co-operate with the Owner's authorized representative in the location,
protection and any necessary temporary diversion of existing site services.
B. Make a dimensioned sketch describing the exposed service and locating it in plan
and section to permanent and accessible reference points date and sign the sketch
and submit same to the Owner's authorized representative.
C. Any service so exposed shall only be covered up by permanent works with the
written consent of the Owner's authorized representative.
PART 17 - EXISTING TREES AND PLANTS
A. Carefully protect and maintain all trees, hedges, shrubs, etc., in proximity to the works
and which are to be retained in the permanent works.
PART 18 - INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S STAFF IN OPERATION OF SYSTEMS AND

EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO PRACTICAL COMPLETION
A. Prior to practical completion of the installation, the Owner will be appointing

maintenance staff or maintenance contractor to undertake the operation and
maintenance of the building services installation.
The contractor shall include for providing assistance to the Owner's staff during the
course of the installation to explain the purpose and function of the works.

B. Include for a minimum period of 25 plant operating days prior to practical

completion, to instruct the Owner's maintenance staff or maintenance contractor in
the day to day running of the plant and systems. The location and function of all
items listed on the record schedules shall be explained and the procedures given in
the operating and maintenance manuals for starting up, shutting down, isolating
sections, emergency procedures, etc., shall be comprehensively explained and
demonstrated to the Owner's satisfaction.
PART 19 - SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
19.1 ADDITIONAL SPARE PARTS
A. Six weeks prior to practical completion, submit a schedule of the additional spare
parts that the contractor recommends should be supplied over and above those
consumable spares required up to practical completion and for routine
maintenance.
B. Each item on the schedule shall have the manufacturer's current price inserted,
which shall also include for packaging and delivery to site.
C. These additional spare parts may or may not be ordered during the currency of the
contract and therefore the cost thereof shall only be included in the contract sum
when the subject of an instruction by the Owner's authorized representative.
D. Spare parts shall be completely interchangeable and suitable for use in place of the
corresponding part supplied with the plant. They shall be greased and/or painted
before packing to prevent deterioration during delivery and storage.
E. Where spare parts are supplied by the contractor, each package shall be clearly
marked and numbered for identification in accordance with the schedule of spare
parts and referenced to the equipment list in the operation and maintenance
manual.
F. Spare parts shall be handed over to the appointed representative of the Owner.
19.2 TOOLS
A. At practical completion, provide two complete sets of tools and portable indicating
instruments for the operation and maintenance of all plant and equipment together
with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
PART 20 - FUEL AND POWER FOR COMMISSIONING
A. Fuel and power for commissioning and performance testing the works including
payment of statutory undertakings for same.

B. Fuel, water and power for running the contract heating system to dry out the building
including payment of statutory undertakings for same.
PART 21 - ATTENDANCE UPON OTHERS
A. Attendance upon and co-ordination of other contractors as necessary for the

commissioning and performance testing of the contract work.
PART 22 - TEMPORARY WORKS
A. All temporary works required for the proper and safe construction of the permanent
works and for the protection of personnel on site.
B. Advise the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant of all temporary
works required to be carried out together with all details of work required to uphold
existing services and intended temporary connections thereto.
PART 23 - CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES
A. All necessary notifications and authorizations in respect of connection of temporary

or permanent connection to existing services or investigator opening up thereof.
B. No temporary or permanent connection to existing services or investigator opening

up thereof shall be carried out without prior notification to the Owner's authorized
representative and any necessary authorization obtained from the Owner's
authorized representative.
PART 24 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. The contractor shall provide and maintain in full working order all necessary safety
equipment for access and inspection purposes for use by the contractor and for use by
other personnel on site as instructed by the Owner's authorized representative. Such
equipment shall include, but not be limited to, protective clothing, safety harness, gas
detection and emergency breathing apparatus for inspection of confined spaces.
PART 25 - SCOPE OF WORKS
25.1 THE CONTRACT WORKS
A. The works covered by this contract are the design, selection, manufacturing, works
testing, supplying and delivery to site, erecting, connecting up, testing,

commissioning, performance testing and handing over in working order the

complete engineering services installations described in the contract document.
25.2 SYSTEMS INCLUDED
1. Medium voltage switchgear and transformers.
2. Low voltage switchgear and distribution
3. Standby generation
4. Lighting installation
5. Emergency and exit lighting fixtures

8. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system
13. Earthing system
14. Automatic reactive power compensation
15. Lightning Protection system
PART 26 - RELATED WORK
There will be other Contract Works associated with and related to this Contract.
The Contractor shall make himself fully aware of the interfaces between the
requirements of his Works and the works of other. The Contractor's Works related to
the Works of others shall include but not be limited to the following.
A. Associated Contract Works
i) Substructure and under slab drainage
ii) Lifts
B. Associated Local Supply Company Works
i) Gas company
ii) Water Company
iii) Electricity Company
iv) Telephone company
v) Sewerage company

The Contractor shall, before commencement his contract work, make himself fully
aware of the special setting-out and installation requirements of other contract Works
that affect the Works of this Section.
PART 27 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. The contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems
under this Contract function and operate in full accordance with the Specification
and the testing and commissioning procedures described elsewhere in this
Specification.
B. Once the Contractor has demonstrated the operation of the Works to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized Representative the complete integration of
the Contractors Works with the Works of others will be the responsibility of others.
C. Notwithstanding this, the Contractor's Works will not be deemed complete until the
works are fully integrated and demonstrated in function and operation as being fully
integrated with the associated works by others.
D. The Contractor shall allow for full attendance to the Owner's Authorized Representative
and others in order that the whole of the Works under this contract can be successfully
demonstrated to be functioning and operating with all other associated works to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized Representative.
E. This shall not relieve the contractor in any way of his responsibilities under the
Contract.
SECTION 262500- ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes bus assemblies and fittings.


1. DIVISION 26 Section " General provisions for electrical work ".

2. DIVISION 26 Section "Wires and Cables" for bus drop cables.
3. DIVISION 26 Section "Switchboards" for bus duct termination provisions.
4. DIVISION 26 Section "Medium Voltage Transformers" for bus duct termination
provisions.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting position,

mounting method, vertical supports, materials, fire stops, and weather stops for
each component.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of enclosed bus assemblies

including plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other
construction elements. Detail connections to switchgear, switchboards,
transformers, and panel boards. Detail supports and connections to building.
C. Coordination and Construction Drawings: Include floor plans and sections to show
enclosed bus-assembly layouts and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus-assembly components through one source

from a single manufacturer.
B. Standards:
- NEMA BU1, BU1.1, BU 1.2.

- UL 857.
- ANSI/IEEE C37.23.
- IEC 61439-1 and IEC 60439-2.
- IEC 60529.
A. Deliver, store, and handle bus assemblies according to Standards recommendations.

A. Field Measurements: Verify existing dimensions by field measurements. Verify

clearances and locate obstructions within manufacturing and installation tolerances
of enclosed bus assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Plug-in Units: 2 percent of installed units, but not less than one unit of
each type installed.
2. Hookstick operator for plug-in units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Refer to the approved vendor list
2.2 BUSWAY, GENERAL

A. Busway shall be:
Feeder type for non-tapped straight runs and direct connections between
equipment, as applicable and / or shown on the drawings, complete with
manufacturer's recommended fittings and accessories where indicated and as
required for a complete, functioning and safe installation .
B. Busway is to include bus bars, electrical insulators, enclosures, switchboard flange,

elbows, offsets, cable tap boxes, transformer flange connections with flexible AL
braid link, generator flange connection with flexible AL braid link and vibration
absorber, power take-off sections, expansion joints, end closures, supports, and
other components and accessories needed to form complete systems.
C. Ratings: three phase with voltage and current ratings and requirements f o r
neutral and ground conductors as indicated and specified. Short circuit ratings of
busbars shall be in excess of those indicated for each location.

D. Busway Conductor Material: hard drawn Aluminum with not less than 98 percent
conductivity.
E. Busway: silver plated and insulated over entire length, with flame retardant 130
deg C class epoxy insulation.
F. Hot Spot Temperature Rise: not in excess of 55 deg C above an ambient

temperature of 40 deg C at any point in the busbar when busbar is operated at
rated load current and system frequency.
2.3 BUSWAY (225 to 5000A)
A. Type: Indoor, 600/1000 V grade, 3-phase, 5-wire with fully sized neutral and half
size earth bar, insulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated and of compact design to
provide degree of protection of IP43 to IEC 60529, with ratings as shown on the
Drawings at site maximum ambient temperature conditions. Busbar is to comply
with approved standards. Short- circuit capacity is to be at least equal to value
at main protective device, for 1 second. Where indoor busway is partially running
through outdoor / wet areas, these portions are to be IP66 rated.
B. Construction: Prefabricated, insulated flat Aluminum conductors, with minimum 2

mm galvanized sheet steel flanged housing, totally enclosed, non-ventilated,
extruded aluminum type. Housing is to be bonderized inside and outside and
finished with gray baked electrostatic paint. Joints between sections are to have
special insulation, flanged and pressure bolted, easily dismantled and giving
equally strong mechanical connection to busbar sections. Any one section of the
busway is to be removable without disturbing adjacent sections.
C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next shall are to be arranged in
joint stacks incorporating busbar conductors, and each joint stack shall is to be
arranged for tightening with a single bolt. Joint design shall is to be such that any
length or fitting of a run may be removed without disturbing the connecting lengths.
D. Reactance: Busbar is to be specially built and assembled to provide low reactance.
E. Accessories: Busbar is to be complete with necessary factory made adaptor boxes,

junction boxes, bends, expansion connections, fittings, fire barriers etc. as may be
required to provide complete system between terminal points indicated on the
Drawings. Fixing and mounting materials are to be galvanized steel. For vertically
mounted busbars, spring suspension type hangers are to be used for equalizing
weight of trunking between all supports.

F. Terminal adaptors or chambers are to be factory made. Coordinated

components at both ends are to match equipment connected thereto. Connections
are to be made with insulated AL bars of equivalent sections and of exact shapes
to fit and be fixed with bolts and spring washers.
G. Busbar is to be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths and shapes.
Busbar cutting on site is not acceptable.
Plug-In Openings: five, dead-front, hinged cover openings per side of each 3
m (10 ft). length of busbar. Openings shall be useable simultaneously.
2.4 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. General: as recommended by busbar manufacturer and conforming to DIVISION

26 section "Supporting Devices".
B. Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: adjustable for leveling and spring tension
and arranged to permit relative movement between floor and busbar.
C. Rigid Floor Supports: adjustable for leveling.
D. Expansion Section: capacity and conductor provisions same as adjacent busbar

section. Arranged to absorb expansion and contraction of bus bars and housing.
E. Fasteners to connect busbar supports to the building structure as follows:
1. Expansion Anchors: carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

2. Toggle Bolts: all steel spring head type.
3. Powder. Driven Threaded Studs: heat, treated steel, designed specifically
for the intended service.
2.5 FIRE STOPPING:
A. General: materials approved for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers.
Refer to Section "Basic Electrical Requirements".
B. Wall and Floor Flanges: sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum thickness close
fitting to busbar arranged to close the wall or floor opening at the busbar
penetration.
B. Two-Part Sealant: formed-in-place sealant as specified in paragraph "Fire-

Resistant Joint Sealers" in DIVISION 26.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUSBARS:
A. Install busbars and accessories as indicated and in compliance with applicable

requirements of applicable codes/regulations. Conform to manufacturer’s written
instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in the
approved applicable standards.
C. Expansion Fittings: install at locations where busbar crosses a building expansion

joint. In addition, install at intervals in long runs or risers where length comes
within 10 percent of the maximum length without expansion joints stated by the
manufacturer for the type and material of busbar installed.
D. Fire Stops: install fire stops where busbar penetrates fire- -rated walls and
floors. Seal between busbar and opening and around opening with sealant or
sealing mortar having fire rating not less than that of wall, or floor penetrated.
Where busbar manufacturer's sealing and stopping devices are not fire rated,
provide fire stopping as required to satisfy authority having jurisdiction and
Engineers approval.
E. Weather Seal: install integral weather seal where busbar penetrates exterior wall
or roof. Provide appropriate flange and seal around openings to make weather tight.
F. Floor Penetrations: provide a minimum 75 mm (3-inch-high) curb around

busbar penetrations of floors to prevent water from spills and leaks from contacting
busbar.
G. Support busbar from the building structure independently from other suspended
items.
H. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection, spacing, and

installation of supports.
I. Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be adequate to

support busbar load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four or 90 kg (200 lb),
whichever is greater.

J. Fastening Supports: unless otherwise indicated, fasten supports securely to the

building structure as specified in DIVISION 26 Section "Supporting Devices".
K. Support at Connections to Equipment: where busbars connect to equipment,

provide flanged fittings fastened to the busbar and to the equipment. Support the
busbar separately. Do not carry the weight of the busbar on the equipment enclosure.
3.2 EARTHING:
A. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for busbars as

indicated and specified in Section "Earthing System".
B. Tighten bonding and earthing connections to comply with tightening torques

specified in applicable Standard or to assure permanent and effective earthing.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Test busbar runs prior to energizing as follows and provide written report of tests.
B. Phasing: verify that proper phase relationships exist between source, busbar, and
connected equipment using phase rotation meter and verifying phase continuity
from source to equipment.
C. Insulation Resistance: measure IR for all busbar components with 1000 Volt d.c.
megohms- meter and compare in report with manufacturer's stated acceptable
values. Measure each phase to phase and each phase to earth. Any reading
should be better than 50 megohms- meter.
D. Energize busbar and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
E. Test Failures: correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest.
Verify that equipment meets the specified requirements.
3.4 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR:
A. Upon completion of installation of busbars, remove burrs, dirt, and construction

debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches and abrasions.
B. Galvanized Finish: repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended

by t h e manufacturer.

C. Paint Finish: repair damage using matching touch-up coating recommended

by the manufacturer.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT:
A. Align busbar runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists.
Provide support stiffeners at locations where indicated and where there is
excessive movement.
B. Check bus plug circuit breaker trip settings, fuse ratings, and starter overload
elements against connected loads and revise as required to conform to
recommended values.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion perform an infrared

scan of bus assembly including joints and plug-in units.
1. Uses an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature

or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation
of device calibration.
2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of bus assembly, one at four months
and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying bus assembly checked and describing
results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken and scanning observations after remedial action.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the

system installation. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and Division-1 (General Requirements) apply to work of this section.
section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to raceways specified elsewhere in this

specification.
A. Work includes providing completely coordinated grounded raceway systems

complete with boxes, fittings, supports, anchors, sleeves, hangers, clamps, straps,
seals, flexible connections to vibrating equipment and accessories, as specified and
as required for a complete system. Conduit or tubing sizes referred to in the
specifications and on the Drawings are nominal internal diameters. Raceway is
required for all wiring unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems,

boxes and fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

VDE/DIN, IEC, BS, NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to raceways, boxes
and fittings. Provide raceways, boxes and components which have been UL listed
and labeled.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications

and installation instructions, for each type of raceway system and box required.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Samples: Submit 15 cm length of exposed type surface raceways with required

finish, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
C. Shop Drawings: submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of

raceways, boxes and fitting including, but not limited to size of raceways, boxes and
fittings elevations, type and reference no.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): Full weight steel pipe hot dipped galvanized inside and
outside, threaded, minimum 20 mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15 mm for
switch legs.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid intermediate grade, hot dipped galvanized
outside, threaded, minimum 20 mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15 mm for
switch legs.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Thin wall steel, galvanized, inside and outside
thread less, minimum 20mm, unless other wise noted ; minimum 15mm for switch
legs.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit: Continuous length of specially wound interlocked, galvanized

strip steel, minimum 20 mm.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Continuous length of flexible interlocked,

galvanized inside and outside steel tubing, with a continuous copper bonding
conductor wound specially between the convolution, coated with a liquid tight jacket
of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum 20 mm.
F. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit
1. Self-extinguishing and heavy gauge conduits and conduit fittings to meet

BS4607, BS6099 and BS7671 wiring regulations.
2. For concrete encasement.
3. For direct burial, Schedule 40 conduit.

4. Minimum 20 mm diameter for lighting and power wiring minimum 16 mm diameter

for telephone installation.
G. Wireways: Steel, minimum 1.5 mm thickness, with baked enamel finish, screw-on
covers, raceway knockout, elbow fittings, hangers, wire retainers, and cabinet
adapter; size as noted or required.
2.2 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. GENERAL
1. Accessories as required including, but not limited to, bushings, knockout closures,
locknuts, mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster
ears, and plasterboard expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with
device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring
situation.
2. Die-cast fittings not permitted.
3. Earthing (grounding) Bushings: With lug suitable for the size and type of earthing
(grounding) conductor to be terminated.
B. RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS
1. Steel or malleable iron, standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and

elbows.
2. Conductive type thread compounds to insure low resistance ground continuity

through conduit. Watertight couplings and connections in concrete.
3. Locknuts of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of
the enclosure.
4. Bushings of the metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded

or locked into the metallic body of the fitting.
5. Corrosion resistant metallic conduit fittings.
6. Sealing fittings of the threaded cast iron type. Where sealing fittings are used to
prevent passage of water vapor, utilize the continuous drain type.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings: Steel or malleable iron concrete tight couplings
and connectors of the gland and ring compression type; set screw type connectors
are permitted for interior dry locations only, indent type connectors are not permitted.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Steel or malleable iron, insulated throat angle wedge
type.

E. Surface Metal Raceway Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer to match

integrity of raceway system.
F. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit Fittings: As recommended by the manufacturer to match

integrity of each type of raceway system.
G. EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION COUPLINGS
1. Comply with approved applicable standards.
2. Accommodate 1.9 cm deflection, expansion and contraction in any direction.
3. Allow 30 degree angular deflection.
4. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity
and fault currents.
5. Watertight, seismically qualified corrosion resistant threaded and compatible

with associated conduit.
6. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant

molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
H. SUPPORTS
1. Zinc coated or equivalent.
2. Conduit hangers, designed for the purpose and have pre-assembled closure bolt
and nut and provision for receiving hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers not less than 38 cm x 38 cm, 2.7 mm thickness
steel, cold formed, dipped clamps. Hanger rods not less than 0.95 cm diameter
steel.
4. Anchors of types, sizes and materials designed for the purpose.
2.3 OUTLET BOXES
A. OUTLET BOXES
1. PVC heavy gauge for concealed work, and galvanized cast iron or aluminum with
threaded hubs for exposed work; boxes of shapes, cubic inch capacity, and sizes
as required, suitable for installation at respective location.
2. With mounting holes and with cable and conduit size knockout openings.

3. With threaded screw holes, with corrosion resistant ridged cover and grounding
screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment
grounding.
4. For concealed work, utilize 10 cm square or octagon outlet boxes, except as

otherwise required by construction devices or wiring and as follows:
a. Above ceiling: 3.8 cm deep.

b. In ceiling or slab: 5 cm deep.
c. In wall for fixtures: 5 cm deep.
d. In wall for receptacles and switches: 3.8 cm deep.
e. With raised covers and fixture studs where required.
f. Back-to-back boxes type not permitted.
g. Gangable type boxes are not permitted.
h. For installation of more than two devices in a common outlet box, utilize boxes
and device rings manufactured specifically for this purpose.
i. Outlet box device rings used to be of sufficient depth so as to make the use of
extension boxes and rings unnecessary.
5. For exposed work utilize 10 cm round x 5 cm deep for mounting on ceilings and
10 cm square x 5 cm deep for mounting on walls, except as otherwise required by
construction, devices, or wiring.
6. Provide blank covers for outlet boxes without devices. Covers to match adjacent
plates.
2.4 WIRING, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Heavy gauge PV, galvanized sheet steel with screw-on covers for interior work, and
galvanized cast iron and/or 2.7 mm thickness stainless steel with threaded hubs and
gaskets for outdoors and damp locations; boxes of shapes, cubic cm capacity, and
sizes as required, suitable for installation at respectable location.
B. Insulated cable supports.
Refer To The Attached Manufacturers' List.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine conditions under which raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings are to be
installed and substrate which will support raceways. Notify Architect in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1. Install raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings as indicated, in accordance

with manufacturers' written installation instructions, requirements of applicable
standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
2. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways, boxes,

and components with other work. Run raceways concealed, except as noted.
3. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for

conductors to form continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes,
fittings and cabinets to provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical
assembly. Maintain grounding continuity of interrupted metallic raceways with
ground conductor.
4. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of

electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion
inhibiting compound before assembling.
5. Support raceways by means of ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, wall brackets

with back spacer, structural steel angles or channels. Support riser raceways at
each floor. Secure raceways to supports with pipe straps or U-bolts. Space
supports as per applicable electrical code and per manufacturer's
recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Mount supports to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry, expansion

shields or inserts on concrete and brick, machine screws on metal, wood
screws on wood. Nails, rawl plugs, wood, and/or plastic plugs are not
permitted.
7. Keep raceways clear of motor foundations and boilers. Also, do not obstruct
headroom, doorways, or walkways, with raceway.
8. Do not install conduit in terrazzo floors.
9. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions,

split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and
manufactured for their particular application.

10. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment furnished by

equipment supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to equipment only
after receiving dimensioned drawings from equipment installer and after
checking location with other trades.
11. Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball mandrel. Clear
any conduit which rejects ball mandrel.
12. Provide long radius bends for empty raceway systems where required to satisfy
the system cabling requirements.
13. Install complete raceway runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install raceways
so that required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain
to raceway or cable. Where raceway size is not indicated, follow applicable
code.
14. Keep end of raceways plugged or capped during construction.
15. For empty raceways over 3 m long, provide fish or pull wire. For 3.8 cm and
larger pull wire to consist of steel core nylon rope and terminal ball.
16. Remove damaged or deformed raceways.
17. Do not support branch circuit conduits by the suspended ceiling or its
supporting members, lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air conditioning
ducts.
18. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings. Avoid
present and future openings in floor, wall or ceiling construction, when so
indicated on drawings.
19. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 45 cm from parallel runs of flues or boiler
breaching and 15 cm from hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Wherever
possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Provide
thermal insulation where these separations cannot be maintained.
20. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
21. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where
required, use 3-piece union or split coupling.
22. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have
been removed.
23. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to
enclosed electrical wiring.

24. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 150 mm
separation.
25. Do not install aluminum products in concrete. Plug and seal conduit
interconnections.
26. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.
27. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to
which attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
28. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and
damage.
29. Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Secure boxes to the building
structure and adequately support all boxes during construction to prevent
movement.
30. Verify outlet locations in finished spaces with Architectural Drawings or Interior
Design drawings, details and finishes. Take caution in locating outlet to allow
for overhead pipes, ducts, and variations in arrangement, thickness in finish,
window trim and other Architectural Construction Details.
31. Correct any inaccuracy in locating outlets without additional expense to the
Owner. Refer to Architect any condition that would place an outlet box in an
unsuitable location, such as a molding, break glass in wall finish, or behind a
heating enclosure.
32. Mount outlet boxes for similar equipment at uniform height within same or
similar areas. Where mounting height or location of outlets is not shown or
specified, mount outlet as best suited for equipment connected thereto, or as
directed.
33. Provide barriers between switches connected to different phases.
34. Except where special outlets are required, provide 10 cm square wall outlets
with single gang raised cover and bushed plate for signaling systems.
35. In cold rooms, walk-in refrigeration boxes, etc., weatherproof raceway

installations and use sealing fittings and compounds as entries.
36. For conduit or cable tray runs exposed inside the building, mark (stencil 3 M on
centers, including in hung ceiling, with the notation, "Danger, Volts," indicating
the actual voltage (i.e. "Danger 22,000 Volts," "Danger 380 Volts").
37. Install conduits located underground beyond the building as follows:

a. With a minimum of 60 cm top cover, above the conduits, and sloped away
from the building.
b. Placed over well tamped trench bottom and on concrete block 1.5
M on center. Anchor conduits to prevent their movement.
Stagger conduit joints a minimum of 15 cm apart. Make all joints
watertight.
c. With a minimum clear separation between the electric and telephone

conduits of 30 cm of tamped earth or 15 cm of concrete.
38. For and direct burial cable entering the building and for the manholes preceding
the conduits entry to the building, perform the following:
a. Plug all empty raceways.
b. Enter through floor or wall entrance fittings. For the entrance fittings utilize a
gland assembly cable of providing a seal around the conduit or cable to
withstand 15 M head of water without leakage.
c.
Slope away from building.
d. In lieu of wall entrance fittings through floor or wall, 2.5 mm metal plates may
be utilized subject to the following:
1) Plate extends a minimum of 100 mm from raceway in every direction.
2) Plate is welded to raceways forming a watertight seal.
3) Raceways are not damaged.
39. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities
to avoid damaging them.
40. Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to
weather or moisture.
41. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. Coordinate trim
with type of finish, i.e., tile, carpet, etc.
B. For all vibrating equipment adjacent or above acoustically treated areas, i.e.,
ballrooms, meeting rooms, restaurants, guest rooms, etc., provide the following:
1. Flexible conduit at the entries, exits, and outlets.
2. Sealing fittings with compound at the entries and exits.

3. Supports of rubber-in-shear ceiling hangers.
4. Expansion fittings at isolating slab joints.
5. Rubber gasketed recessed outlets.
6. Back plaster recessed outlets.
7. Free-standing equipment with vibration isolators.
C. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use rigid steel conduit for underground installation, in wet or damp locations, for
exposed runs on the exterior of the building, in concrete slabs, for all feeder
conduits, in mechanical equipment spaces, and as noted.
2. Where conduit is directly buried, provide two coats of polyurethane. Dry

thoroughly between coats and before backfilling.
3. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5 cm with
concrete envelope with walls not less than 8 cm thick.
D. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
1. Use intermediate metal conduit in lieu of rigid steel conduit where permitted by
applicable electrical codes.
2. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5 cm with
concrete envelope not less than 8 cm thick.
E. ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
1. Use electrical metallic tubing for branch circuits only, in dry locations (hung
ceilings, hollow block walls and furred spaces) and for fire alarm, smoke and fire
detection system where in accordance with all applicable codes, authorities, etc.
2. EMT is not permitted to be used in mechanical equipment spaces and where

subject to moisture, dampness, i.e. plenums, condensate spillage, etc.
F. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use flexible steel conduit with an internal earth (ground) connection for short
connections where rigid conduit or tubing is impracticable and for final
connections to vibrating equipment.
2. Provide a minimum length of 46 cm with slack. Connect the earth (ground)

conductor to the enclosure or raceway at each end.

G. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
1. For damp and wet conditions and in all plenums.
2. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to motor terminal
boxes, transformers and other vibrating equipment.
3. Provide a minimum length of 45 cm with slack. Connect the ground conductor

to the enclosure or raceway at each end.
H. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC)
1. Use in or below slabs for service entrance conductors for lighting system and
telephone service for lightning protection down conductors and only as
otherwise indicated. Provide separate earthing (ground) wire.
2. Cut ends square, ream smooth, wipe clean, apply approved solvent cement and
quarter turn as drawing up tight in accordance with recommendations of
manufacturer.
3. Convert to steel conduit using adapters when entering the building from
underground locations.
4. Maintain a 1M minimum clearance of PVC conduits from hot water and steam
lines.
5. Where located under building, parking lot, and roadways, concrete encase
conduit for all runs above 50 mm.
6. Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be of the same manufacture to provide a

consistent system with compatible appearance. The use of alternative designs
and different manufacturer's products will not be permitted.
7. All conduit joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacture's

installation recommendations using a solvent adhesive recommended by the
maker of the conduit. All such joints shall be watertight.
The same conditions shall apply to joints between conduit, fittings and
accessories. The dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is
expressly forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit ends shall be cut square
and all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed.
Care should be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all
faces of conduits and accessories prior to jointing. Conduits shall be entered
fully into box spouts and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for
jointing purposes.

8. Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on the
drawings or when the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal equipment,
conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such entries are not available,
non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall be used.
9. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints or where there are changes of
temperature in excess of 25 C, flexibility of the conduit to cope with the
associated movement shall be achieved by a method approved by the
manufacturer of the conduit.
10. All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25 mm
and below may be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot.
A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation. The radius of
any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 time the outside diameter of the
conduit. Naked flames shall not be used directly to heat conduit for bending
purposes. The use of conduit bends having factures and conduits with any
wrinkles on formed bends is not permitted.
11. Concealed conduit and accessories shall be securely fixed before any
operations involving casting, concrete pouring, screed laying and plastering.
Fixing shall be by means purpose made clips which shall not cause deformation
of the conduit. Fixings shall be used at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5
meters and the distance of clips on each side of bends or accessories shall not
exceed 150 mm.
2
12. A protective conductor of not less than 2.5 mm with green and yellow
insulation shall be installed throughout, sufficiently long to allow looping in and
of fittings and accessories. Where expansion couplers are used allowance shall
be made in the length of the protective conductor to accommodate any
expansion.
13. Where luminaries are to be connected to a ceiling conduit system, metal conduit
boxes shall be used. Fittings may not be hung from the PVC conduit system
and full details of the means of support shall be shown on the Co-ordination and
Builders Work Drawings.
14. Where a number of conduits converge, large adaptable PVC boxes shall be
employed to avoid the conduits crossing. Conduits shall be connected to the
boxes by means of male bushes and couplers.
15. Different colours shall be applied for conduits of different systems.

I. Provide expansion-deflection fittings at expansion joints and on length of runs in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize expansion - deflection
fittings of size as required complete with bonding jumper.
J. For Hazardous Locations
3. Utilize rigid steel only, unless otherwise noted.
2. Install approved sealing fittings to prevent passage of explosive vapors as

required by the applicable electrical codes.
K. For Wet, Damp, or Moist Locations
1. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass
from warm to cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, air conditioned spaces,
or similar spaces.
A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, perform continuity tests by testing the

resistance of all feeder conduits from the service to the point of their final distribution
using 1 conductor return. Limit the maximum resistance to 25 ohms. When possible,
field-correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected, at no additional cost to
the Owner.
4.1 CONDUITS AND WIREWAYS APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Conduits and wire ways installations are to be as described below, unless

otherwise shown on the drawings or described in the particular section of
the Specification.
B. Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit is to be used for all exposed installations
comprising lighting, power, low current, communication and signal system
wiring, including mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms,
service areas and where subjected to Mechanical damage. Use rigid steel
conduit in areas classified as hazardous explosive area. Flexible conduit is
not acceptable.
C. Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT) is to be used for exposed installations over

false ceilings when the false ceiling is used as a return plenum.

D. Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT) is to be used for exposed and above false
ceiling wiring installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route
lighting/central battery circuits, fire alarm & security installations.
E. Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT) is to be used for all installations in elevator

machine rooms and shafts, electrical equipment rooms, mechanical rooms,
parking floors, kitchen, laundry & solid waste rooms.
F. Conduit termination in sheet metal enclosures is to be fastened by lockouts,

and terminate with bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
G. Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used for lighting and power circuits,
low current, communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in
concrete masonry earth, under floor, except where otherwise shown on the
Drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
SECTION 260536 – CABLE TRAY
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all
cable trays in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable trays of

the types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to cable
trays. Provide cable trays products and components which have been listed
and labeled.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more
stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for cable trays.
B. Samples: - Submit 30 cm length of each size of cable tray complete with its
accessories and fittings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural

backgrounds of cable trays including, but not limited to, offsets and
connections. Show accurately scaled cable trays with locations of
supports and fittings, including fire stops and weather seals. Indicate
relationship of cable trays to other associated equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE TRAY
A. GENERAL
1. A complete cable support system with all required straight sections,

fittings, connectors and accessories.
2. All trays and system components as defined by and in conformance with

approved Standards or latest applicable revisions.
3. Cable Support System: Ladder type; width as required or as shown on

the drawings; radius of fittings, 60 cm or as shown on the drawings.
4. Fittings such as elbows, tees, crosses, etc., with a tangent, or straight

section beyond the curvature to accept one type of universal splice plate
to simplify field erections.

5. Usable Minimum Clear Loading Depth: 8 cm.
6. Straight Sections: 3.7 - 4 meters in length.
7. Cable Support System: Aluminum: 6063T6 alloy for extruded parts and
5052 alloy for parts fabricated from sheet.
8. Cable trays shall be perforated and manufactured from mild steel and to
be galvanized after fabrication the galvanization must be hot dip
galvanized
9. Minimum thickness of cable trays shall be 1.5 mm thickness for cable

tray 30 cm width and below and shall be 2mm thickness for 40 cm width
and above.
10. Cable trays shall be manufactured with plain return flanges
11. Adequate supports shall be provided to prevent stress on cables where

they enter or leave the tray. Where cable trays extend transversely
through partitions and walls additional protection in the form of fire-proof
non-combustible barriers shall be provided.
12. All cables shall be fastened securely by purpose made straps or saddles
to the cable trays.
13. Cable trays shall be connected by means of flexible tinned straps to the
nearest bare earthing conductors and at maximum of 30 meters spacing.
14. Cable trays must be specially reinforced to have high load bearing
capabilities across wide spans, maximum deflection should not exceed
0.5% in the longest span. Also it shall be mechanically designed to give
high torsional rigidity and good resistance against lateral loading.
15. Where the supported cables run in either a vertical or horizontal

direction, manufactured bends or sets shall be provided in order that a
continuous cable tray be provided throughout the length or run.
16. Bends in either vertical or horizontal directions should be dimensioned

such that cables may not be curved less than 15 times its diameter.
17. Perforate-type cable tray shall be used above the suspended ceiling. It
shall be manufactured from mild steel 1.5 mm or 2 mm thick, finished
hot-dip galvanized with a 20 mm return flange on both edges. Edge
height 80mm.
18. All components and accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized steel after
manufacture to give resistance to corrosion.

19. Same typical details of trays, ladder and perforated type are shown in the
drawings.
20. Cable tray width shall be chosen according to the number and diameter
of cables laid on the tray. Main feeders shall be laid such that their outer
radius are spaced a distance equal to the diameter of he largest cable.
21. All Cable trays shall be covered with cover in parking areas, open space
and roof.
B. SAFETY FACTOR
1. Cable Tray at 2.5 meters Span: Capable of sustaining a working

(allowable) load of 68 kg per linear 30 cm with a safety factor of 2, when
tested as a simple beam and in accordance with approved load test
method; test specimen to be a single section of cable tray.
2. In addition to and concurrent with the above working load, a 90kg

concentrated load applied at mid span to result in no permanent
deformation of the tray.
3. Design to be such that all like parts are interchangeable and that tray
may be readily assembled and joined without the use of special tools.
C. Fittings: at least the same thickness and cross sectional area of side members
and (rungs, bottom) as straight sections.
D. Connectors: High pressure rigid plate type connected by ribbed-neck or

square-neck plated steel bolts and free-spinning lock type nuts not requiring a
washer; ribbed-neck or square-neck portion of bolt to grip the tray side member
and connector plate metal to prevent bolt from rotating during tightening of nut.
E. Where necessary, provide expansion guides and connectors per manufacturer's

thermal contraction and expansion table; install fixed hold down clamps
approximately midway between expansion connectors; install expansion guides
at all other support locations to allow thermally induced movement of the tray.
F. Resistance of the connection between adjacent sections of cable trays: not

more than 0.00033 ohms; use bonding jumpers of suitable ampacity at all
expansion connections and at all adjustable points.
G. LADDER TYPE TRAY SECTIONS
1. Ladder-type cable tray shall be used to support heavy cabling as indicated

on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The tray shall be designed

ladder-like, offering free circulation of air around cable and minimum

moisture and dust-gathering surfaces. Rungs shall be welded to the ladder
profiles. Rung width shall not be less than 30 mm, and center distance
between rungs shall not exceed 250 mm.
Cables are to be prevented from falling down the ladder system by 50 mm

height edges along the whole length of the ladder.
2. Cable ladder shall be perforated and manufactured from hot dip mild steel
and galvanized after fabrication.
3. The ladder thickness should not be less than 1.5 mm.
4. Bearing Surface of Transverse Members: Minimum of 1.9 cm.
5. Rungs (transverse members) assembled to the side rails by welding to

insure integrity of fault ground path for the life of the system and maximum
structural capability; non-welded joining of rungs to side rails are not
acceptable.
H. LIGHT DUTY TRAYS
1. Aluminum with a maximum overall depth of 10 cm and a minimum usable

loading depth of 8 cm.
2. Capable of sustaining working (allowable) load of 36 kg per 30 cm on a

2.5 meter simple span.
3. Safety factor of 1.5 mid-span deflection not to exceed 1.25 cm.
4. Trough Type Trays:
a. Three piece construction consisting of two longitudinal members

(side rails) with a corrugated bottom welded to the side rails.
b. Peaks of the corrugated bottom with a minimum flat cable bearing

surface of 7 cm and spaced 15 cm on center.
c. To provide ventilation in the tray, the valleys of the corrugated

bottom to have 6 cm x 10 cm rectangular holes punched along the
width of the bottom.
I. All cable trays shall be heavy duty type unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which cable trays are to be installed. Notify Architect
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trays and accessories as indicated in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trays work with other

work.
C. Install integral fire stops where cable trays penetrates fire-rated walls and floors.
Seal between cable trays and opening and around opening with fire-rated
sealant not less than wall, or floor, fire ratings.
D. At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10 cm high, around

cabl trays and seal with non-combustible material.
E. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing (grounding) connections for

cable trays. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified by
manufacturers to assure permanent and effective connections and grounds.
F. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure

enclosures are permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware
and accessories for proper mounting.
G. Route cable trays as required and make final field measurements before
ordering cable tray.
H. Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to

accommodate fittings directly connected, adjustable vertical connectors or
adjustable horizontal connectors with straight section in between may be used.
Avoid slopes that would cause cable to bend on smaller radii; than that allowed
by cable manufacturer.

I. Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting
cable tray as required.
A. Prior to installing cables in cable trays, test for electrical continuity of bonding,
and earthing connections, and to demonstrate compliance with earthing
requirements.
B. Electrically energize cable tray systems and demonstrate functioning in

accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units,
and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot
be satisfactorily corrected.
SECTION 260519 – WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to wire and cable work specified
elsewhere in these specifications.
A. Work includes providing all wires, cables and connections, complete with all
accessories in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for
a complete system. Wiring size referenced in this Section is metric, except as
noted. For special wiring for individual systems, refer to respective Section of
these Specifications.

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wires, cables, and

connections of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, ICEA, IEEE, EEC and ASTM Standards
pertaining to wires, cables and connections.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on wires, cables and connectors.
B. Samples: Submit 25 cm length cables of each type and size of wires and
Cables, Manufacturer Name, insulation class and reference no. Should be
indicated on the Submitted Sample.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MAINS AND SUBFEEDER CABLES
A. GENERAL
Provide all of the mains cables shown on the drawings or detailed in the cable
schedules or the schedules of work.
All single and multi-core cables shall comply with IEC 502 and all
conductors shall be copper P.V.C. and XLPE insulated and P.V.C. sheathed
(0.6/1 K.v), armoured or none armoured type as indicated on the drawings.
Copper conductors shall be stranded for sections 2 mm2 and above for lighting
and power, and 1.5 mm2 and above for low current systems and control
circuits. Signal and control cables shall have solid conductors. Flexible cords
shall have finely stranded conductors.
Conductor sizes shall be metric, as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with

cross-sectional areas smaller than specified will not be accepted.

The current carrying capacity of conductors have been determined in

accordance with the Regulations for the specified type of insulation and the
expected conditions of installation. No change will be accepted in the specified
type of insulation, unless warranted by special conditions and approved by the
Engineer.
The insulation of each conductor shall be colour coded or otherwise identified

as required by the Regulations. Colour coding shall be maintained throughout
the entire installation.
For each lot of cable supply a certificate of origin issued by the manufacturer
stating its origin, manufacturer, constitution and standards to which it complies
with. In the absence of such documents, the Engineer reserves the right to
require that tests, at the Contractor's expense, be performed by an official
laboratory on samples taken from lots of cables delivered to the Site.
Be responsible for any delays in the work resulting from non-compliance with
the requirements mentioned above.
Cable installations whether so indicated or not shall include all joints and their
accessories at terminating ends or at tap-off points, earthing and bonding etc.
Carried to completion.
Joints in cable shall not be accepted unless so required in the Drawings.

Cables shall be supplied in lengths sufficient for a straight-through pull from
termination to termination.
The definition of "Low Voltage" given in the IEE wiring regulations shall apply
and "High Voltage" shall mean any voltage higher than low voltage.
All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals, labels, or
other proof of origin intact. Such labels and seals shall not be removed until the
cable is required for use, and shall be retained for inspection.
Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the drawings or in the cable

schedules all cable over sheaths shall be black.
Cables shall be handled, terminated and installed in accordance with the cable
manufacturer's recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's
recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's specialists shall
be followed if any special conditions or unusual circumstances apply.
Where cable sizes are not indicated on the drawings or in the cable schedules,
the contractor shall be responsible for determining the correct size of each
cable.

Cable sizes shall be determined on the basis of current rating and/or voltage
drop and/or earth loop impedance, together within allowance for grouping with
other cables and the method of installation, whichever is relevant, after taking
into account the type of cable, the ambient conditions, the method of installation
and the disposition of each cable relative to other cables.
Full details, with illustrations, of all cable supports and fixing devices shall be
submitted before any orders are placed or work put in hand. All cable supports
and fixing devices shall be designed to have a factor of safety of not less than4
Wherever cables pass through walls, ceilings, partitions and the like, a heavy-
gauge PVC sleeve shall be provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 12
mm, but not more than 25 mm, than the diameter of the cable.
The length of any such sleeve shall be such that each end projects by 5 mm
beyond the surface of the element through which it passes, and the ends of
they bore shall be provided with an adequate radius to prevent chafing of the
cable sheath.
Wherever cables pass through floors a heavy-gravy-gauge steel sleeve shall be

provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 12 mm, but not more than 25
mm, than the diameter of the cable and projecting above floor level by at least
50 mm.
Where cables pass through walls and/or floors which form part of the building's
fire compartmentation, the hole(s) through which the cables pass shall be
sealed after the cables have been installed, so as to give the same standard of
fire resistance as the original wall or floor. Details of the proposed sealing
method shall be submitted prior to implementation.
All cables shall be separated from water, gas, and other piped services by a
distance of not less than 150 mm unless the circumstances of the installation
make this impossible.
2.2 WIRES FOR FINAL CIRCUITS
Provide wires for final circuits as shown on the drawings to all wiring devices such as
lighting fixtures, sockets, switches and all electrical devices.
All wires shall comply with IEC 60227 (450 – 750) volt.
2.3 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATIONS

Cabling and wiring installation shall be performed strictly in compliance with the
IEE wiring regulation.
Indoor distribution feeders and sub-feeders such as to distribution panel boards,

motor control-gear, isolating switches etc.
Shall be in the form of single conductor pulled inside conduits, or raceways or

multi-conductor cables clipped on cable trays, all as generally shown on the
Drawings.
Where two or more cables are run in parallel, they shall be fixed on galvanized
steel trays or in approved special cable supporting and protecting raceways.
Cables shall be fixed to the supporting structures with approved galvanized cast
steel clamps at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.
No joints or splices shall be accepted on main feeders and sub- feeders.
Wires and cables shall be routed in such a way that they are not exposed to
excessive heat or to corrosive agents. If such a condition cannot be complied
with the wires and cables shall be of a type designed for the particular condition
or enclosed in the necessary protective raceway, duct, concrete etc.
B. FINAL SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING
Final sub-circuit work originating from light and power panel boards shall be
arranged as shown on the Drawings.
Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings, all final sub-circuit for
corridor lighting and sockets shall be multi core cables installed on cable tray
above false ceiling.
At least 150 mm of free conductor shall be left at each outlet, switch point and
pull box for the making up of joints, or the connection of fixtures or devices,
except where conductors are intended to loop without joints through lamp
holders, receptacles and similar device boxes.
C. WIRES AND CABLES-LIGHT AND POWER-LOW VOLTAGE
All wires and cables shall be manufactured to comply with the relevant standard
specification I.E.C. or equal standard. The cables delivered to the Site shall
bear the mark of identification of the manufacturer and the Standard to which it
is manufactured. Any cable not having identification marks shall be rejected.
C. IDENTIFICATION OF L.V and H.V CABLES

Except in the case where it is terminated in full view onto a clearly labelled
switch, starter, distribution board or similar piece of apparatus, or onto a motor
or other item of equipment the function of which is evident, each and every
cable end shall be provided with an approved means of identification. In
particular, this requirement shall apply to all cables terminating on the back, or
in the base, of cubicle type or similar switchboard or control panel and in any
other case where the function of the cable is not immediately obvious.
The means of identification shall be as follows:-
(i) An engraved brass or aluminum label securely fixed to the cable sealing
box.
(ii) An engraved brass or aluminum label securely tied to the cable with
galvanized iron or tinned copper binding wire.
Self-adhesive embossed plastic labels will not be accepted as permanent

means of identification.
The means of identification shall give the cable size, number of cores, and
function together with the cable reference number if one has been allocated.
The cores of all control cables shall be individually identified, at terminations, by

means of approved plastic ferrules bearing indelible characters, in accordance
with the numbering on the relevant wiring diagrams.
All cables run above ground shall be identified by means of engraved brass or
aluminum label at intervals not exceeding 30 meters. The labels shall bear
details of the cable size, number of cores, function, and reference number (if
any) and shall be securely attached to the cables with galvanized iron or tinned
copper binding wires.
E. TERMINATIONS OF L.V. WIRES AND CABLES
Terminations of wires and cables of sizes up to 16 mm², shall be tightly twisted

and where possible doubled back before being clamped. Where two or more
wires are looped into the same terminal these conductors shall be tightly twisted
together before being inserted into the terminals.
Wires and cables of sizes over 16 mm² shall terminate with sweated or
compression type lugs. Insulating sleeve shall be used to protect any exposed
part of the conductor or sleeve projecting beyond any insulated shrouding or
mounting of a live terminal.

Glands for the various types of multi core cables shall be purpose made and
suitable for the equipment enclosure.
F. JOINTS AND TAPS ON L.V. WIRES AND CABLES
Joints and taps in multi core or single core feeders and sub- feeders shall be
affected in purpose made kits consisting of outer containing mould,
thermosetting insulating compound (or resin) and by use of appropriate tinned
copper ferrules crimped onto the conductors and taped before pouring in the
compound.
Joints or taps on L.V. wires and cables shall be permanently accessible, and
unless permitted otherwise shall be made only in tap boxes or cabinet gutters.
Joints in branch circuits of conductor sizes up to 16 mm² shall be made by

barrel type connectors with pinching screws, the whole shielded in porcelain or
self-setting compound shroud. Shrouds of polythene or similar non-heat
resistant materials will not be permitted.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes larger than 10 mm² shall be made by
means of pre-insulated spring-type spring shall be corrosion resistant tempered
metal. Enclosure shall be a steel shell with an overall vinyl cap and skirt.
Connector shall be equal to "Scotch lock" as manufactured by the 3M
Company.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes 16 mm², and larger shall be made by
two-bolt clamps protected with an insulating phenolic cover.
2.4 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES: JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
H.V. cables between the high voltage switchgears and the transformers shall be
XLPE with three cables single core, 240 mm² Aluminum conductor.
The cables shall comply with the IEC Recommendations 228, 229, 230, 270,
502 and 540.
CONSTRUCTION
Construction of 24 k.V. cables shall have three conductors of Aluminum

concentric standard wires in accordance with IEC-288 "Nominal cross-section
and composition of conductors of insulated cables or approved equivalent".

Each conductor shall have an extruded screen covering of semi-conducting

compound or semi-conducting tape.
Each conductor shall have a zone resistant layer of cross-linked polyethylene

(XLPE) extruded on the screened conductor.
The thickness shall be 5.5 mm to correspond with the relevant IEC publication
502 for 24 k.V. insulation level.
The insulation shall be suitable for continuous conductor temperature of 90

oC maximum emergency conductor temperature 130 oC and maximum short
circuit conductor temperature 250 oC
Each core (insulated conductor) shall be screened by either a semi conducting,

tape or layer of extruded semi conducting compound, but shall be completely
free stripping.
Each screened core shall be shielded with a layer of copper tape.
Each shielded core shall have an extruded sheath of thermoplast, to prevent

moisture from penetrating and provides a good corrosion protection.
The three cores shall be assembled together, the interstices filled with
non-hygroscopic material so that the completed cable assembly is of substantial
circular cross-section.
The inner covering wrapping the three cores together shall be of extruded
corrosion resistant material. The materials used for the filler and inner covering
shall be suitable for the cable operating temperature. The thickness of the inner
covering shall be in accordance with IEC - 502.
Identification of cables shall be carried out by embossing on the outer PVC

sheath the voltage rating (class), size and number of conductors,
manufacturer's name throughout the whole length of cables.
Identification of phases shall be carried out by using numbered plastic tapes (1,
2 & 3) throughout the whole core under the copper shield.
B. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TERMINATIONS
Shielded power cable termination kits shall be factory engineered for the
application.
The kits shall consist of high-permittivity, high-resistivity, heat-shrinkable stress

control tubing and outer insulation tubing , made from UV-stable, non-tracking

(per ASTM D 2302) materials. Heat activated sealant materials to help prevent
moisture ingress and contamination should also be included.
Termination kits shall meet or exceed all rating requirements of IEEE-48 for
class I terminations and the test sequence prescribed by IEEE-404, including
130 C load cycling and 130 C impulse withstand.
In addition to the phase terminations, multi conductor termination kits shall

provide a heat-shrinkable breakout boot, factory-coated with sealant for strain-
relief and sealing purposes.
Each kit shall include lengths of heat-shrinkable tubing to help prevent corrosion
and shifting of the shielding layers between the boot and the phase termination
installation point.
When grounding conductors are included, the kit includes lengths of heat-
shrinkable tubing and sealant material to seal each conductor from the boot to
its connection point.
The termination shall withstand the following tests:
Raychem Product And

Voltage Class
TEST DESCRIPTION
HVT-250 (25 KV²)
AC withstand, 1 minute, (KV) 65
DC withstand, 15 minute, (KV) 105
Partial discharge (min.KV) for 3 pC or 25.7

less
Impulse withstand 1.2× 50 μs, crest KV 125
Continues current rating Equal to cable ampacity
Wet withstand, 10 seconds, KV rms 60
Dry withstand, 6 hours, KV rms 55
2.5 CABLE TESTING
As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation and termination of

the cables specified herein, or of any usable group of such cables, the

Contractor shall carry out the tests described below, together with such other
tests and measurements to prove compliance with this Specification and with
the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
An insulation resistance test, carried out with a "Megger" insulation tester or

other similar type of testing instrument, to measure the insulation resistance
between each conductor and the remaining conductors and between each
conductor and the metallic sheath (if any) and armouring. The voltage to be
applied shall be as follows:
Cables Volts
Low 500
voltage
> 1000
Medium
voltage
The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any pressure tests
and the insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in DIN/VDE or
NEC standards for all cables up to 3.3 k.V. The contractor shall submit
insulation resistance figures for cables above 3.3 k.V.
A voltage test of 15 minutes duration shall be applied in accordance with the

relevant at the test voltage indicated in IEE wiring regulation 16th edition and
IEC standards DIN/VDE an NEC.
- DIN/VDE CODE for cables with thermosetting insulating.
- DIN/VDE CODE for PVC insulated cables, or
- DIN/VDE CODE for insulated cables.
The Contractor shall submit proposals on the appropriate test voltage in respect
of other types of cable.
Phase-rotation a phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that the cables

have been correctly connected.
2.6 SMALL WIRING
For the purpose of this specification, the description "small wiring" shall apply to
all low voltage cables and wiring connected directly or indirectly to the public
electricity supply system, or to any independent private supply system for the

purpose of supplying electricity to general power and lighting circuits, except the
following:
(i) Telephone, public address, and other communication circuits,
(ii) Fire detection, alarm, and other security circuits operating at a voltage
level of 24 volts or less between conductors.
(iii) Cables and wiring forming part of a system for the control and/or
supervision of the building engineering services.
All of the above cables and wiring included are fully described elsewhere in this
Specification under appropriate headings.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant British
Standards.
The contractor shall submit with his Tender details of any internationally
recognized Standards and Codes of practice he proposes to use in lieu of, or in
addition to, those stated.
All wiring shall be carried out using one or more of the following wring systems,
as indicated on the drawings.
(i) single-core unsheathed cables drawn into metallic or non-metallic

conduit and/or trunking as specified elsewhere.
(ii) twin- and/or multi-core sheathed cables, armored or unarmored, clipped

to building surfaces or structures or to cable tray as specified elsewhere.
(iii) Mineral insulated cables, sheathed or clipped to building surfaces or

structures or to cable tray as specified elsewhere.
(iv) Flexible cords and/or cables.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant DIN/VDE
and IEC Standards.
PVC cables to and rubber cables to IEC/DIN/VDE shall not under any
circumstances be run underground.
No cables shall be installed unless the ambient temperature and the

temperature of the cable are above 0 oC, and have been so for the preceding
24 hours.
Where cables have subjected to temperatures below 0 oC, care shall be taken
to ensure that they are above that temperature for 24 hours before installation.

2.7 LV Fire Resistant Cable
Fire resistant cables will be used as indicated on the drawings and it shall be
copper conductors, XLPE/Steel tape armoured type fire rated for 3hours (950
°C), category C,W and Z with normal operating temperature (90 °C) to meet BS
6387 and shall have insulation class level not less than (0.6/1 KV).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which wires, cables and connections are to be

installed. Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wires, cables and connectors as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
B. Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with

other work.
C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same
raceway.
D. Use anti-seize compound for copper lug connections to bus bars.
E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable
grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
G. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed

structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible.

H. Complete conduit or raceway installation (joints made up tightly and the entire
run secured in place) before pulling wire and cable.
I. Support wires and cables at the upper end of all risers and at intermediate
points as required by the approved manufacturer and applicable electrical
codes.
J. Seal, between the wire and conduit with a non-hardening compound approved
for the purpose, cable and wire entering a building from underground where
cable exits the conduit.
K. Install cable spacers where required. Provide conduit fittings for spacing of
cables at terminations, consisting of galvanized or cadmium plates, steel or
malleable iron threaded conduit and fittings and inserts of non-metallic
insulating material with openings adequate to accommodate cables being
spaced.
L. In certain systems, equipment furnished by an approved manufacturer may

require a different number and arrangement of conductors from that indicated
on the Drawings. In such cases, comply with such requirements at no
additional cost to the Owner.
M. In wire ways and large pull boxes, lace and tie off conductors in groups of 3
phases and neutral (if used) as installed in conduits to limit conductor
unbalanced loading.
N. Leave all wires with sufficient slack at terminal ends and lighting fixtures for
convenient connections and servicing. Stow loose ends neatly in outlet box.
O. Provide splices and taps in accessible boxes, panel board’s fittings, gutters,
terminal panels, etc., only. Provide materials compatible with the conductors,
insulation’s and protective jackets on the cables and wires.
P. Keep conductor splices to minimum.
Q. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent-or- better mechanical strength
and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use connectors which are
compatible with conductor material.
R. Tie all circuit and control wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes, and junction
boxes.
S. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and

terminals to comply with tightening torques as specified by approved

manufacturer.
T. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring
diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper
interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
U. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater

insulation resistivity rating than, electrical insulation rating of those conductors
being spliced.
V. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and
insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and
wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will
remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning
wire. Cut armored jackets with tools made specifically for that purpose.
W. Do not install thermoplastic wires in computer area raised floors.
A. Check for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with drawings.
B. Megger conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for continuity and

insulation tests before connection to utilization devices for the following:
1. 100 percent of feeders
2. 100 percent of branch circuits
3. 100 percent of 3-phase motor branch circuits, 18.5 kW (25 HP) and over
C. Perform tests prior to connecting equipment and in presence of authorized

representatives.
D. Submit written reports of test results.
E. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short
circuits.
F. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct
malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units
which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

SECTION 260726 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to wiring devices specified elsewhere in

these specifications.

wiring devices in accordance with drawings and specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring

devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, and IEEE Standards pertaining to wiring
devices. Provide wiring devices which are DIN listed and labeled. Provide
device plates which are DIN listed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on wiring devices.

B. Samples: Submit samples of all wiring devices included in the contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Samples of all wiring devices detailed in this section and a choice of cover
plates shall be submitted to the Owner Authorized Representative for
approval/selection.
B. Wiring devices shall comply fully with the relevant European or International
Standards.
C. Each type of wiring devices where applicable shall be of the same manufacture
and where necessary of the same maker's catalogue number or description to
provide consistent appearance and finish.
D. Flush mounting wiring devices shall be fitted into purpose made of PVC boxes
only. All wiring devices shall be flush mounted except in plant rooms.
E. All boxes or sections of boxes for use with wiring devices must incorporate a
suitably marked earth terminal. Accessory plates shall be secured to boxes by
not less than two fixing screws. Where these screws do not provide adequate
earth continuity to metal plates or plates including parts to be earthen then a
bonding connection shall be provided from the earth terminal to the plate or
part. The bonding shall be protected with a green/yellow insulated sleeve. The
above requirement shall not apply to the earth socket on a socket outlet when
directly connected to a protective conductor.
F. All wiring devices marked weather-proof shall not be less than IP 44 for damp,
IP 55 for wet, IP 67 for wet outdoor.
G. Where more than one phase of a supply exists in a multi gang box the following
requirements shall apply:
A clearly visible label showing the maximum voltage present shall be arranged
as a warning notice before access can be gained to live parts.
Wiring and accessories connected to each phase shall be separated from each
other by fixed screens or barriers.
H. All faceplates for switches and sockets flush mounted type should be high
quality Plastic material.
2.2 SWITCHES

A. All switches for lighting and associated circuits shall comply with BS or DIN and
shall be quick make and break for use on a.c. supplies. Switches shall be
single pole and rated not less than 10 A, 250 V for use only on a.c. systems,
including fluorescent or inductive loads to DIN/VDE or NEC standards.
B. Switches shall be one-way or two-way or intermediate or push button as

indicated on the drawings.
C. Switches for lighting shall be PVC plate switch type with rocker operation, and
in single or multi gang formation where installed in groups.
D. In damp or outside positions, switches shall be IP 44 for damp, IP 55 for wet, IP

67 for wet outdoor of non-tracking plastic, single pole, operated by external
means. The switch enclosure shall be polycarbonate /polypropylene housing
E. Ceiling switches shall be of the all insulated pull cord type suitable for mounting
on a conduit box and having an overlapping plate. Each unit shall be complete
with 1.5 m white cord terminating in a white/red acorn. The unit shall be rated
at 5A at 220 V and suitable for inductive, fluorescent or resistive loads.
F. Push buttons single units or forming part of a multi gang unit shall be rated at 10
A, 250 V. The switch shall be single/double-pole and arranged for push to
make/ to break the contacts as applicable for the application.
G. All push buttons and switches located in corridors or stairs shall be illuminated
type.
H. Explosion-Proof Switch: Conform with the Regulations for type of hazard at

location installed, rated 10 A, 250 V a.c., housed in heavy cast iron box, with
machined spigot joint and cover fitted with neoprene gasket and secured with
shrouded head bolts to prevent unauthorized removal. Cover is to be
interlocked with switch to allow removal only when switch is off.
I. Weatherproof Switch: 10 A, 250 V, for installation outdoors, with weatherproof

plate, synthetic gasket, weatherproof outlet box, on/off indication, IP 56
enclosure.
2.3 SOCKET OUTLETS
Socket outlets shall be suitable to plugs generally available in Egypt used:
I. German standard 10A DIN 49400 (2 pin at 19 mm centers, earth at top/bottom).
Type (i) shall be supplied and installed in all areas except in kitchens, laundry,
plant rooms, parking areas and where marked weather-proof.

II. Industrial type switched sockets (3P+N+E) or (1P+N+E) as indicated on the

drawing shall be used in plant rooms parking areas, workshop etc. and shall be
of all rigid construction for surface mounting.
III. B.S. standard 13/10 A with different shape shall be used for sockets connected
on UPS system.
IV. Plates for emergency receptacles in all back of house areas , colored red and
permanently marked emergency in 6mm white letters , except in public spaces
plate color to match adjacent plates and engraved "Emergency" in 6mm red
letter
V. Weatherproof socket outlets are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in

surface mounted cast metal box and with cover comprising spring-retained
gasket hinged flap. Enclosure is to be pre-designed box and cover for type of
socket outlet specified. All sockets shall be provided with its matching plug.
2.4 DISCONNECTING SWITCHES FOR F.C.U.
All disconnect switches for F.C.U. units shall be double pole with pilot lamp and flex
outlet.
2.5 ELECTRIC OUTLET UNITS
Outlet plates for cables or flexible cords shall be similar to switch plates and complete
with not less than two fixing screws. Terminals shall be provided to accommodate
incoming wiring and outgoing cables or flexible cord. The unit shall be unfused and
shall incorporate an outgoing cable clamp or cord grip. The cover plate of white
moulded plastic shall have a smooth aperture for the cable/flexible exit.
2.6 FLOOR BOXES
Floor box shall be made of zinc die-cast or heavy duty plastic type, cover to be made
of nickel galvanized to withstand 300 kg with non-permanent deformation.
The floor box should have hinged lid without recess, lid offset for used position (cable
outlet).
The floor box must suite the No. of approved outlets as indicated on the drawings.
The floor box should have a degree of protection ‘IP67’ for outdoor installation.

The floor box should be suitable to the used tiles (carpet or marble) floor and to be
approved by Arch. Consultant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed. Notify

Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other

work.
C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess
building materials, dirt, and debris.
D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed and tested.
E. Install wall-plates after painting work is completed.
F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance

with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring
devices.
G. Protection of Wall-plates and Sockets upon installation of wall-plates and

sockets advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience
outlets. Prior to Owner accepting project, replace those items which have been
damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
H. Provide equipment earthing connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise

indicated.
I. Verify exact locations of switches and receptacles with architectural and interior
design drawings.

J. Install switches indicated on plans for the various rooms directly adjacent to the
entrance door and as shown on the approved shop drawings.
K. Check the architectural drawings for the door swings and locate all switches on
the lock side of the openings. Verify in field prior to switch outlet installation.
L. Coordinate all final mounting heights with Architect's elevations and details prior
to installation. Where heights are different than those indicated or specified, the
architectural heights take precedence.
M. Where two or more switches control more than one 220 volt branch circuit,
barrier boxes to prevent 380 volts occurring in any one box.
N. Where more than one wiring device is mounted in the same location, gang
mount such devices una common face plate.
O. Vertically align devices shown above other on the drawings on a common

centerline unless shown otherwise.
P. Where an outlet is indicated as serving a specific piece of equipment, locate

outlet as required by equipment or layout roughing drawings. Work from
approved equipment and roughing shop drawings to locate outlets.
Q. Fully coordinate switched mounted in metal architectural frames, posts and

mullions with all trades involved. Submit method of wiring and type and style
switch to Architect for approval.
A. Upon completion of installation of wiring devices, prior to energizing circuitry,

test wiring devices for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. Ensure proper
polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization, test wiring
devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

SECTION 260900 – MICELLANEOUS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.

miscellaneous control equipment in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of miscellaneous

control equipment of the types and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide
miscellaneous control equipment produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to
miscellaneous control equipment. Provide miscellaneous control equipment
which have been listed and labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for miscellaneous control equipment,

including sizes and types of enclosures, finishes, and electrical ratings and
characteristics.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTACTORS AND REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES
A. GENERAL
1. Mechanically or magnetically held with contacts normally open or

normally closed and/or combination as indicated on drawings or required.
2. Rated for continuous operation with capacities and voltage at 50 Hz, as

indicated on drawings or required.
3. Spring loaded contacts to maintain contact pressure in closed position,

readily replaceable, self-aligning type.
4. Suitable for inductive or non-inductive loads, unless otherwise noted.
5. With arc shields and magnetic blow coils if interrupting duty exceeds 300
ampere.
6. Interrupting capability not less than six times rated full load current.
7. Operating coils voltage: 220 volts, unless otherwise noted.
8. Enclosure: Dead front, NEMA type, soundproof, with vibration isolation

mounting.
B. MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Single and/or dual coil operation.
2. Positive locking type without the use of latching hooks or magnets.
3. With a manual operator for hand operation giving positive indication of

contactor position.
4. Control Circuit: For 3-wire operation with momentary contact open/close

stations as indicated.
C. MAGNETICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Spring assisted gravity open on normally open contacts and spring

loaded magnetically open in normally closed contacts.
2. Control Circuit: For 2-wire operation with maintained contact

open/closed stations as indicated or required.
2.2 MULTIPLE POLE RELAYS

A. Electrically operated, mechanically held type, with 10 amperes minimum rated

contacts.
B. Open and close coils rated 220 volts or 380 volts, 50 Hz, unless otherwise
indicated or required.
C. Number of poles as indicated on drawings or schedules.
D. Enclosure: Industry Standards.
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS
A. Rated as required for voltage, momentary volt-ampere load, and continuous

volt-ampere load and suitable for the intended application.
B. With primary and secondary over current protection with fused switches in
accordance with the codes governing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which miscellaneous control equipment are to be

installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install miscellaneous control equipment and accessories as indicated in

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable
Standards in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of miscellaneous control

equipment work with other work.

C. Protect miscellaneous control equipment systems from dirt, moisture and

construction debris subsequent to and during installation until project is
accepted by Owner.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance

with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
E. Mount all equipment in cabinets suitable for installation with all necessary bus
bars and terminal strips. Separate low and high voltage sections with barriers.
F. Provide all wiring, conduit and accessories including but not limited to terminal
strips, rectifiers, switches, and fuses for systems to perform intended function.
G. Provide emergency shut-down facilities at mechanical equipment rooms and

other locations indicated on drawings and as required.
A. Prior to energization of installed miscellaneous control equipment, test for

electrical continuity of circuitry and for possible short circuits.
B. Electrically energize miscellaneous control equipment systems and

demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary,
correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

SECTION 26281610
SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS (DISCONNECTS)
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to safety and motor disconnects

specified elsewhere in the specification


safety and disconnect switches (fused and un-fused) in accordance with

Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of safety and motor

disconnect switches of types and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. Provide
safety and motor disconnects produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to safety and
motor disconnects. Provide disconnect switches which have been listed and
labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature,

installation, instructions, and catalog cuts for each type of safety and motor
disconnect switches.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SAFETY AND MOTOR DISCONNECT
A. SWITCH INTERIOR
1. Switchblades fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open.
2. Removable arc suppressor where necessary to permit easy access to

line side lugs.
3. Industry listed lugs for aluminum and/or copper cable and front
removable.
4. Plate all current carrying parts.
5. Provision for field installed fuse pullers.
6. Solid neutral where required

B. SWITCH MECHANISM
1. Heavy duty load break type 4 poles.
2. Rating: Voltage, poles, amperes, horsepower, and maximum available

fault current as required or shown on drawings.
3. Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism integral

with the box, not the cover.
4. Defeatable dual cover interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the

switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with
the door open.
5. Handle position to indicate if switch is ON or OFF.
6. Provision for padlocking handle.
C. ENCLOSURE
1. Industry Standard except as otherwise noted or required, with multiple

knockouts on all sides and back.
2. Hinged door and cover.
3. Industry Standard for exterior installation.
4. Industry Standard type most suitable for the environmental condition of

the area.
5. All disconnect switches marked weather –proof type should be nema

“type –3R with gasket “ (for indoor installation) and nema “type – 4X” for
(outdoor and roof installation).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which safety and motor disconnects are to be

installed. Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install safety and motor disconnect switches as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of safety and motor

disconnects with other work.
C. Protect disconnect switches from dirt, moisture and construction debris,

subsequent and during installation until project is accepted by Owner.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws bolts and equipment

grounding connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published
torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
E. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances and motors and
controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide box with spare set of each size fuse used on project. Provide
nameplate on switch, indicating equipment served.
G. Install fuses in fused switches.
H. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a

permanent and effective ground, for electrical disconnect switches.
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches and after

circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Close all switches to check for proper energization of all loads.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
SECTION 263213 - EMERGENCY DISEL GENERATOR

PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and Division-1 "General requirements", apply to work of this Section.
Section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, a diesel engine generator set
complete with engine generator batteries, charger, silencer, day tank, generator
control panel and all required appurtenances and accessories. Refer to appropriate
section of Specifications and drawings for additional requirements.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of diesel engine

generator sets of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Provide diesel engine
generator set produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in
this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, ISO

8528, DIN, VDE, IES, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards pertaining to
diesel generator set.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation

and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines;" NFPA 99, "Standard
for Health Care Facilities;" NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings
and Structures;" "Life Safety Code;" "NFPA 110;" and "Emergency Standby Power
Systems".
D. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse located within 100 Km of the
job site, at which spare parts are stocked and where a field service engineer who is a
full-time employee of the manufacturer permanently resides, and is a factory trained
and qualified individual whose primary duty is field service.
E. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
. provision will govern.
F. Equipment Rating: 230/400 volt, 3 phases, 4 wires, 50 HZ, 1500 rpm, Kw rating as
indicated on the drawings. At temperature 50 C and altitude 1000 m and humidity
90% at 0.8 power factor and capable of continues operation at rated output for the

duration of any utility power failure. Ratings of diesel electric set based on operation
of the set at rated generator RPM when equipped with all necessary operating
accessories, such as air cleaners, radiator fan, lubricating oil pump, fuel transfer
pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor alternating current generator
and exciter. All ratings must be factory certified.
G. The same manufacturer is to build, test, and ship the whole system (the engine,
generator, and all major items of auxiliary equipment).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for diesel engine driven generator sets
and components, including:
1. Drawing of the diesel generator set.
2. The following data in tabulated form:
a. Make of engine.
b. Number of cylinders.
c. Bore, inches (millimeters).
d. Stroke, inches (millimeters).
e. Piston displacement, cubic inches (liters).
f. Piston speed, feet per minute (liters/min.), at rated RPM.
g. BMEP at rated KW output.
h. Make and type of generator.
i. Generator electrical rating, KVA or KW at .8 power factor.
j. Number and type of bearings.
k. Exciter type.
l. Generator insulation class and temperature rise.
m. Parts and service support.
n. Engine manufacturer's certified engine BHP curve and certified generator

set fuel consumption curve.
3. Batteries and battery charger.

4. Silencer.
5. Day tank.
6. Fuel system complete.
7. Cooling system complete.
8. Exhaust system complete.
9. All auxiliaries.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of

diesel engine generator sets.
C. Submit a certified test report showing serial number of the engine, generator and all
accessories furnished, and actual readings taken during a factory-conducted full load
test including the following:
1. Cold start acceleration to rated voltage and frequency within 8 seconds.
2. Full and partial load applications and rejections during the test (at least 2 per
hour). Frequency and voltage stability and transients not to exceed the limits
specified herein.
3. 15 minutes 1/4 load, or function warm up, 1/2 hour 1/2 load, 1/2 hour 3/4 load,
and 2 hours full load. Test shall be conducted at 0.8 power factor.
4. Demonstrate that all applicable safety shutdowns function along with their
respective audio and visual alarms.
D. Ten working days written notice shall be given prior to factory tests being carried out
and all necessary facilities shall be made available for the consultant to witness such
tests.
E. A complete set of tools and portable instruments for the operation and equipment
shall be provided, together with suitable means of identification, storage and
securing.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Obtain all necessary permits prior to delivery.
B. Delivery and rigging shall be fully coordinated with, and approved by the consultant.
C. Upon delivery, inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate rating of unit
with this specification.

D. Prior to installation, engine-generator controls and all associated electrical equipment

shall be stored indoors, fully protected from weather, dust and dirt.
E. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent bumping or dropping. All rigging and
handling shall be in full accordance with engine-generator manufacturers'
requirements.
Avoid the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical
equipment contained therein.
F. Do not install damaged equipment, remove from site and replace with new
equipment.
G. Extreme care shall be taken to assure that all equipment is properly secured and
braced for any overland and vertical travel.
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts

and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard
warranties for a period of not less than 1 year from date of initial start-up and Owner
acceptance of the system and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at
the job site. The system warranty not to be limited by running hours.
1.7 SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT
A. The supplier of the diesel engine generator set to provide a service contract for a
period of five years after guarantee period and include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Engine manufacturer's recommended procedures for weekly (biweekly)

inspection and maintenance to be done by user.
2. Quarterly inspection by the supplier personnel to review the weekly maintenance

records being kept by user and train any new Owner operating personnel.
Inspection to include scheduled oil sampling for lube oil contaminants as outlined
below. Also include a 100% load test run on the generator set.
3. Annual inspections to include all of items in above paragraph except run the
generator set under system load.
B. Scheduled Oil Sampling
1. In order to forecast and minimize engine downtime, the supplier of the equipment
must provide an oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel can utilize for
Schedule Oil Sampling.

2. Scheduled Oil Sampling of the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method and

accurate to within a fraction of one part per million for the following elements:
a. Iron
b. Chromium
c. Copper
d. Aluminum
e. Silicon
f. Lead
3. In addition, test the sample for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and antifreeze.
4. Provide all equipment needed to take oil samples in a kit at the time of
acceptance and include the following:
a. Sample extraction gun (1).
b. Bottle (10).
c. Postage-paid mailers (10).
d. Written instructions (1).
5. Provide immediate notification to the consultant when analysis shows any critical
reading. If readings are normal, provide a report showing that the equipment is
operating within established parameters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the automatic start diesel generating
sets with all necessary switchgear, control panel and accessories all as either herein
specified or shown on the Drawings.
The size of the set shall be standby rating to the rating shown of the Drawings, when
operating at the specified frequency, voltage, altitude, maximum temperature and
humidity.

The Contractor shall be guided by the emergency power room layout details shown on
the drawings, but a final detailed and dimensioned layout suitable for construction shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval, prior to ordering of equipment.
The Contractor shall indicate the nearest location from which service facilities and spare
parts may be obtained.
The design of the plant and its installation including all ancillary equipment, shall be
such as to minimize noise and vibration.
Materials and workmanship - All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units
specified herein, shall be new and unused, of current manufacture and highest grade.
Manufacturer - the unit shall be factory assembled, and tested as complete unit by the
engine manufacturer. It shall be inspected and started at the job site by his authorized
dealer having a parts and service facility in the area.
Warranty - Equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed against defective
parts or workmanship under dealer's standard warranty. Warranty period shall in no
case be less than one year of unrestricted service commencing from date of putting the
unit into service and not limited to any fours limitation.
Tests - the generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard factory load testing.
Prior to acceptance of the installation, equipment shall be tested to show it is free of any
defects and be subjected to full load test.
Start-up and Instructions - on completion of the installation, start-up shall be performed

by a factory-trained dealer service representative. Operating and maintenance
instruction books shall be supplied upon delivery of the unit and procedures explained to
operating personnel.
Specifications and Drawings - The bidders shall furnish information showing

manufacturer's model numbers, dimensions and weights for the generator set and major
auxiliary equipment. Proposed deviations from the specifications shall be stated in the
bid. The successful bidder shall submit copies of pertinent drawings. And wiring
diagrams for approval.
The diesel generator set should have performance class G2 according to ISO 8528.
2.2 OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
The loss of normal power from the transformer shall automatically cause the generating
set to start through Automatic Transfer Switch.
The Diesel generating set shall have an automatic start facility.

The emergency generating set shall be designed so that it will come up to steady full
speed from cold condition within 10 seconds of the "start" impulse.
Should the Diesel engine fail to start in 10 seconds following the "start" impulse, it shall
come to rest for 10 seconds. Two further attempts shall be automatically performed with
intermediate periods of rest. Should the set not start after three attempts, an alarm shall
sound and signal "start failure" shall illuminate.
It shall be possible to operate the set manually for testing and normal operation
purposes. For this purpose the set shall be provided with a duty selector switch
arranged for OFF/TEST/MANUAL/AUTO. It shall be possible to run the engine with or
without operation of the Emergency Distribution Board circuit breakers.
The Diesel generator set must still be running a 3-5 minutes after transfer and after
removal of all load to ensure that a change-over in the event of a repeated mains failure
can rapidly be realized and to obtain a cooling effect to avoid an accumulation of heat.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
The engine-generator sets shall be a complete package unit mounted on rigid base
suitable for skidding as indicated in the drawings.
The design of the set shall allow the easy replacement of major items subject to
wear.
A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generator to provide the
drive and absorb the transmission of shock loads, and shall be completely shielded
by a coupling ring and adequate steel guards.
Complete protection from machine vibration is required for the building and all
instrumentation and control equipment, including engine-mounted instruments. This
may be achieved either by mounting the combined engine/generator unit to a
separate sub- frame resiliently mounted on the main frame, or by mounting the entire
main frame on anti-vibration mountings, and securing the machine instrument panel
by its own resilient mounting. The machine instrument panel by its own resilient
mounting. The mountings employed, method of mounting and floor structure and
thickness shall be approved by the manufacturer and the Engineer.
2.4 DIESEL ENGINE
The engine shall be of the direct injection four stroke, even number of cylinders dual
turbo-charged and after cooled and not series turbocharged. The set shall operate on
diesel fuel oil at 1500 R.P.M. The net power rating of the engine under worst site

conditions shall be such as to deliver the net electric power indicated on the generator
taking into consideration generator efficiency.
The engine shall be of the water-cooled, radiator type with gear driven water pump
system shall be pressurized and equipped with a heavy-duty radiator mounted integrally
with the set and cooled by a refers flow fan. A fan coil and hand protection guard shall
be fitted. Coolant temperature shall be measured and controlled by means of one or
more thermostats.
The lubricating oil system shall be of the full pressure circulating type, complete with full
flow lubricating oil filters with replaceable elements and a lubricating oil heat exchanger.
Filter system shall be equipped with a spring loaded by-pass valve as an insurance
against stoppage of lubricating oil circulation in the event the filters become clogged.
Adequate inspection openings per cylinder to provide quick access and inspection of
camshafts and connecting rod.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall be capable of supplying the engine by
gravity from a day fuel tank. It shall be equipped with easily replaceable fuel filter
elements. The fuel system shall be equipped with a built in, gear type, engine driven
fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel against a head of 250 cms. For supplying fuel
through the filters to the injection pump at constant pressure.
The exhaust system shall be insulated complete with dry type exhaust manifold with
flanges, flexible exhaust expansion connections, exhaust pipes and a residential
exhaust silencer which shall be fitted with a drain plug at its lower end to permit
evacuation of condensed humidity. The exhaust piping shall be insulated with asbestos
tape with a total thickness not below 10 mm.
The electric starting of the engine shall be possible either manually by means of push
button or automatically by means of the automatic control panel. The starting system
shall consist of a 24 volts d.c. starter motor, heavy duty 24 volts lead - acid battery and a
suitable automatic trickle battery charger. The starting pinion shall automatically
disengage when the engine.
An isochronous electronic type engine governor with speed control and droop
adjustments shall be provided and shall be capable of providing accurate speed control
within 1% of the rated speed.
An automatic shut-down protective system with signalling lights shall be provided to shut
down the engine in the event of engine overspeed, low lubricating oil pressure, and high
cooling water temperature.
Complete shutdown system shall be arranged to energize an alarm system located

within the plant room and to trip the respective generator circuit-breaker.

The following engine mounted instruments shall be provided:
1. Water temperature gauge calibrated in C
2. Lubricating oil temperature gauge calibrated in C
3. Lubricating oil pressure gauge.
4. Tachometer.
5. Operating time meter.
6. Oil filter differential.
7. Jacket water temperature.
8. Fuel pressure.
2.5 GENERATOR
The generator shall be of drip VDE 0530 proof construction, in accordance with screen
protected, revolving field, brush less type with adaptor and flexible coupling for direct
connection to the engine at the flywheel end.
Required Generator Characteristics
i Type Brushless with salient pole field system incorporating rotating

exciter and three phase rectifier system.
ii No. of phases Three with 4 terminals
iii Voltage 380 Y/220
iv Winding connection Star with grounded neutral
v Net rated output As indicated on the drawings @ 50 C ambient temperature.
vi Power factor 0.8 lagging.
vii Frequency 50 Hz.
viii Insulation Class "F" stator class "F" rotor with temperature rise according
to class F 105 C over 50 C ambient temperature.

The exciter shall be of the static type with a digital voltage regulator forming an integral
part of the alternator.
Overall voltage regulation from no load to full load, including hot to cold, variations and
load power factor between 0.8 lagging and unity shall be within + 0.5% of nominal
voltage.
Voltage buildup shall be in a positive and rapid manner even when the machine is
connected to its load circuit.
The line to line voltage wave form shall be at least to the requirements of VDE 0530
(less than 5% deviation. The total harmonics content shall not exceed 3%.
Radio interference suppression shall be at least according to degree "N" of VDE 0875 or
equivalent.
Engine-Generator Set Control: The control shall have automatic remote start capability.
A panel mounted switch shall stop the engine in the STOP position, start and run the
engine in the RUN position and allow the engine to start and run by closing remote
contact, and stop by opening the remote contact when in the REMOTE position.
a. The control shall include a cycle cranking function. The cranking cycle,
nonadjustable, shall consist of an automatic crank period of approximately 10
seconds duration followed by a rest period of approximately 10 seconds duration.
Cranking shall cease upon engine starting and running. Two means of cranking
termination shall be provided, one as backup to the other. Failure to start after three
cranking cycles shall shut down and lockout the engine, and visually indicate an over
crank shutdown on the panel.
b. The control shall shut down and lock out the engine upon: failing to start after the
specified time (over crank), overspeed, low, lubricating oil pressure, high engine
temperature, or operation of a remote manual stop station.
c. The generator control panel shall have degree of protection IP 54.
d. The control shall provide a twelve light engine monitor on the control panel; one red
light for each of the four shut downs (except the remote manual stop), and one yellow
light each for the high engine temperature and low engine oil pressure pre-alarms,
and one green run light. The control panel monitor shall include; a flashing red light to
indicate the generator set is not in automatic start mode, a yellow light to indicate low
coolant temperature, a yellow light to indicate low fuel, and two red lights for auxiliary
use (for a total of twelve).
A panel mounted switch shall reset the engine monitor and test all the lamps. The
engine-generator set starting battery(ies) shall power the monitor. Operation of shut
down circuits shall be independent of indication and pre-alarm circuits. Individual

relay signals shall be provided for each indication for external circuit connections (not
to exceed 1/2 amp draw) to a remote annunciator. A common alarm contact for
external connection to an audible alarm shall be provided.
e. Provide a low coolant level shutdown, which shall be indicated as a high engine
temperature fault.
f. Provide the supervised points as indicated in fire alarm system section.
g. Control panel shall be mounted on the generator set with vibration isolators or wall
mounted type as indicated on the drawings. The control shall include surge
suppression for protection of solid state components. A front control panel
illumination lamp with On/Off switch shall be provided. Control panel mounted
indicating meters and devices shall include: Engine Oil Pressure Gauge, Coolant
Temperature Gauge, DC Voltmeter, and Running Time Meter (hours); Voltage
adjusting rheostat, locking screwdriver type, to adjust voltage +/- 5% from rated value;
Analog AC Voltmeter scale 0-500 V dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy;
Analog AC Ammeter, dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog Frequency
meter, 45-65 Hz, 90 degree scale, +/- 0.6 Hz accuracy; Seven position phase selector
switch with OFF position to allow meter display of current and voltage in each
generator phase.
h. Provide exerciser clock (2-week type) to automatically start the generator for 30
minutes.
2.6 FUEL SYSTEM
The generator shall be provided with a fuel system as indicated in mechanical

specification section.
2.7 BATTERY TRICKLE CHARGER
A battery trickle charger mounted on the generator control panel shall be supplied with
the generator in order to maintain the two battery sets in good condition. It shall be fitted
with on-off switch indicator light, input and output fuses and reverse current protection.
Upon operation of the standby plant the charger shall be disconnected from the battery
and from the mains. An ammeter to indicate rate of charger and battery voltmeter shall
be fitted for each set of batteries.
2.8 ENGINE GENERATOR SUPPORT AND ISOLATION SYSTEM
A. Equip the engine and generator set with a suitable common steel base for mounting
the engine-generator unit on a concrete foundation.

B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding and laterally stable rated for seismic areas with
housings that include vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when
weight is removed; the isolators complete with neoprene acoustical friction pads
between the baseplate and supports.
C. All mounting leveling bolts rigidly bolted to the equipment; spring diameters no less
than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs to have a
minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
D. Provide a minimum of six Mason type 'SLR' rated deflection 5 cm, 2431 kg load
spring mount and six No. Z1225, 2268 kg "all-directional seismic snubber." Prior to
installation, approved manufacturer shall submit installation drawing for approval.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS
The Contractor shall calculate the reinforced concrete foundation block to support the
generating set. Calculation and detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
A water pipes shall be installed between the radiator and the engine.
The Contractor shall supply and install all piping cabling and other required accessories
and items for a complete emergency generating set.
The Contractor shall supply all the required standard and special tools for routine
maintenance and normal over hauls, in suitable cupboard.
The spare parts required for normal operation during 1500 operation shall be supplied
with the set, and placed in a suitable cupboard. Priced spare part list shall be supplied
with the Tender.
Manuals and Technical literature required for operation maintenance and overhaul shall
be supplied in English in 3 copies.
2.10 EQUIPMENT DATA/SHOP DRAWINGS
The equipment data to be provided by the Contractor prior to ordering any material
covered by this sub-division shall include but not be limited to:
Complete technical data on diesel engine, includes operating characteristics, site rating,
fuel and lubricating consumption, manufacturer's catalogue cuts, dimensions and
weights, etc.

- Detailed description of all components of the engine: starting system, super charge,
governor, injector, cooling radiator, air, fuel and lubricating filters etc... With
manufacutrer's catalogue cuts and operating characteristics.
- Detailed description of all auxiliaries: batteries and charger, fuel day tank, exhaust
pipe and silencer.
- Detailed description of engine control, instruments protection, alarms and cut offs, etc.
- Complete technical data on generator and excitation: standards to which it complies,

type of insulation, system of cooling system of excitation voltage regulation, etc... With
manufacturers catalogue cuts.
- List of standard and special tools supplied for routine and major overhauls.
- List of spare parts for 1500 hours operation.
- Operator's manuals, maintenance book and drawings.
The Contractor's shop/construction drawings for installation covered by this sub-division

shall include but not be limited to:
Complete drawings of the generating plant in the particular location of the project, with
indication of all components, piping exhaust pipes, power and control cabling, etc.
- Construction drawings of the foundation block with indication of holes for anchoring
bolts.
- Schematic diagram for power and control wiring.
- Complete lay-out drawings of piping.
- Shop drawings for all supports, frames, louvers plates.
- Plans and elevations of control panels.
2.11 TESTS
Sets shall be available for visual inspection at works by the consultant before loading for
despatch to site.
Sets shall be available at works for noise level tests to be made by the consultant before
loading for despatch to site.
Performance tests shall be made as specified on the Equipment Data Sheets.
2.12 GENERATOR PROTECTION

The generator shall be protected against all types of excess current that will damage the
generator electrical system.
Earth leakage protection shall be provided by means of a 'core balance' residual current
device. The restricted earth fault protection level shall be capable of being varied over
the range 0.3 amps to 10 amps.
The Contractor shall provide all auxiliary equipment necessary for monitoring the
electrical parameters utilized in the protection systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which diesel engine-driven generator sets are to be

installed and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion
of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diesel engine-driven generator set as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies
with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of engine-generator equipment work

with other work.
C. Lift generator using eyes and other devices provided by the manufacturer.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
E. Align shafts of engine and generator within tolerances recommended by

engine-generator unit manufacturer.

F. Provide break glass station to shut down engine generator set.
G. Provide equipment grounding connections for diesel engine-driven generator units as

required.
H. Install diesel fuel piping from diesel engine to day tank.
A. Upon completion of installation of diesel engine generator set, test and inspect
system to ensure compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct
malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace
equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B. At the construction site, provide the services of a competent, factory trained engineer
or technician employed by the manufacturer of the diesel engine generator set to
technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the set
and major auxiliaries.
Make adjustments and test in the presence of the Owner.
C. Provide start-up and load test in accordance with NFPA 110 and include the following:
1. A minimum of 3800 liters of fuel oil for testing.
2. Record room temperature and time of beginning of test.
3. Start the units and record the number of seconds it takes each unit to get it
started.
4. Record voltage readings on all phases and also running hour meter reading RPM
and frequency meter reading. Use a hand tachometer to check RPM against
frequency meter reading.
5. Provide load banks for full load rating of generator to test all systems on
generator for minimum of 4 hours.
D. Mechanical Examination
1. Check engine fuel system and water cooling system for possible leaks during the
load test. If any fuel or water leaks are observed, stop the unit and tighten or
replace the leaking item as required, and restart the load test. It is necessary that
each unit run for 2 hours at full load without any leaks or excessive water
temperature, low oil pressure, etc., before acceptance.

2. Deliberately speed up the engine by misadjusting the governor and record the
speed at which the engine automatically shuts down.
3. Simulate low oil pressure by shorting the contacts of the oil pressure relay, to test
for automatic engine shutdown on low oil pressure.
4. Simulate high water temperature by shorting the contacts of the water temperature
relay to test for automatic engine shutdown on high water temperature.
5. With engine running under load, during the last half hour of the 2-hour test, measure
room and outdoor ambient temperatures. Room temperature not to exceed the
motor-generator manufacturer's limit for room temperature with outdoor air
temperatures at 35 oC design day.
The Contractor to submit this data to the motor-generator manufacturer for

o
computation of equivalent room temperature based upon 35 C day operation.
Manufacturer to certify that room temperature data is consistent with manufacturer's
o
recommended operating limits for a 35 C design day.
3.4 INSTRUCTION AND FINAL INSPECTIONS
A. Laminate or mount under plexiglass a set of operating instructions for the system and
install instructions within a frame mounted on the wall near the diesel
engine-generator set.
B. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for five

4-hour periods for instructing personnel in operation and maintenance of the
equipment, on the dates requested by the Owner.
C. Contractor to furnish 5 copies of operating, maintenance and diagnostic instructions

and parts list, and illustrated parts books covering the engine-generator and auxiliary
equipment which will require operating instructions and periodic maintenance.
D. Supply one complete set of spare oil, fuel and air filters plus one set of lamps and
fuses.
A. Building Operating Personnel Training : Train Owner's building personnel in

procedures for starting up, testing and operating stand-by generators and auxiliary
equipment. Furnish three operator's manual providing installation and operating
instructions for each generator.
3.6 DIESEL GENERATOR: SCHEDULE OF SPECIALTESTING/COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS

In addition to the acceptance and type of tests carried out at the manufacturer's
works, the following testing/commissioning procedures shall be carried out:
1.0 At the manufacturers works
All testing to the satisfaction of the Owner's consultant shall be carried out as follows:
Heat Run
- 50% for ½ hour + 75% for ½ hour..
- 2 hours full load.
i) Recorded ½ hourly readings of speed, oil pressure, oil temperature, water

temperature, fuel consumption, battery charge rate and voltage, generator voltage,
load current, kilowatt output, frequency and power factor, generator temperature
rise when connected to a resistive/reactive load to produce 0.8 power factor.
ii) Demonstration of voltage regulations at set point of 385V from full load to no load
to full load, including transient variation and response time.
iii) Demonstration of speed/frequency regulation under conditions of 2 above.
iv) Cold start, 3 attempts and lockout on set fail.
v) Cold start, run up and on full load time.
vi) Demonstration of accuracy of all metering using standard test meters.
vii) Demonstration of operation and setting of all protective relays and timing devices.
viii) Demonstration of full sequential operation.
ix) Demonstration of all alarm and indication.
x) Temperature rises on generator starter/rotor.
xi) Installation resistance of generator bed plate wiring and controls.
Records of all tests shall be made in appropriate test folders and

initialled by the Contractor and Owner's Consultant . These shall be
photocopied and 3 No sets provided under the contract.
The Contractor shall provide 14 days notice of tests to the Owner's consultant and shall
allow witnessing of tests by the Owner's consultant.
2.0 On Site After Installation

The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, instruments, tools, fuel, lubricating oil
and test loads for commissioning tests.
The tests specified below shall be carried out by Contractor in the present of the Owner's
consultant.
The Contractor shall carry out the following:
i) Check that the base is levelled in all directions, that engine and generator shafts
are in proper alignment and that the vibration absorbing devices are properly
installed and located.
ii) Check water and sum oil levels.
iii) Check the battery and terminal connections.
iv) Check that the types and grades of fuel and oil are as recommended for the unit.
v) Fill the main and daily service tank with the correct amount and grade of diesel fuel
oil.
vi) Check that all radiator and engine block water drain points are free from sludge and
other blockages.
vii) Check engine bolts, main drive couplings, valve clearances, fuel pump settings,
governor settings, pipeline connections, water hose, exhaust coupling, flexible pipe
work, etc.
viii) Check all connections on the alternator and at the control panel. All lugs for
principal connections shall have clean and bright contact surfaces. A suitable
abrasive material shall be used where necessary.
ix) Check access panels and doors for proper opening and closing and for the
functioning of any interlocks fitted.
x) Check all signal and control circuits for correct operation.
xi) Measure the resistance of stator, rotor, and exciter windings and ensure that this is
not less than the Specialist Supplier's figures.
xii) Start the engine by means of the 'start' push button and allow it to run up to normal
speed. Check that during the time the engine starter motor is in operation, the
mains battery charger is automatically switched off
xiii) Check instruments and gauges for normal operation and response and check that
the generator voltage is being maintained within the prescribed limits, making due

allowance for no-load conditions. Compare the reading of the frequency meter with
that of the engine tachometer.
xiv) Stop engine after 30 minutes. Check water and oil levels.
xv) Restart set and run at various loads for periods totalling at least 3 hours. Check the
voltage and current in each phase in turn and that the voltage and frequency are
being maintained with the required limits with large alterations of load. Note the
rate of charge on the alternator ammeter with the engine stopped. Check against
specialist rates in necessary.
xvi) Check the operation of the turbo-charger unit and the colour of the exhaust gas at
various loads.
xvii) Check that all the engine safeguards operate satisfactorily.
xviii) Check the vibration absorbing devices for proper operation and that the
performance of all flexible connections, both mechanical and electrical are
satisfactory.
xix) Check the effectiveness of the radio suppression.
xx) Check the temperature rise in the alternator.
xxi) Check the operation of all auxiliary fans, motors, pumps, float switches etc, and their
associated switching control gear.
When all tests are satisfactory and agreed with the Owner's consultant, the lubricating oil
be finally checked, the fuel oil tank replenished and the set left in normal operating order.
When installation of the set and control panel is complete and the installation has been
commissioned, they shall be subjected to load tests as follows:
i) 50% load for ½ hour.
ii) 75% load for ½ hour.
iii) 100% load for 2 hours.
Sound level readings in the following areas to establish compliance with 75 dB at 7 m

from generator room.
a) 7m from generator set room.
b) 7m from exhaust outlet pipe.
3.7 INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts,
relays, wiring, terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information
for the central control system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and
data schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20
VA. @ 220 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should
add interposing relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS
supplier (either 4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
SECTION 263533 – POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes automatic power factor correction equipment rated

600 V and less.
1. DIVISION 26 Section " General provisions for electrical work ".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on features,
ratings, and performance.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,

weights, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection. Show access and workspace requirements and
required clearances.
C. Factory Test Reports: Evidence of product’s compliance with specified

requirements.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
E. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include maintenance manuals specified

in Division 1.
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for

storage at Project site.
2. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
1. Comply with IEEE 18 and NEMA CP 1.
2. IEC 60831-1&-2, IEC 60871-1&-2 and IEC 60931-1&-2.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sensor-communication module package with BMS and

SCADA systems for successful transmission and remote readout of

remote monitoring data specified.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.
1. Fuses: 10 for every type and rating, but not less than 3 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CAPACITORS, GENERAL
A. Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-

phase groups and mounted in metal enclosures.
B. Capacitor Cells: Dry, metalized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be

encapsulated in thermosetting resin inside plastic container.
C. Capacitors are to comply with IEC 871-1 and IEC 831-2, with a loss factor not
exceeding 0.3 x 10(-3) (a consumption of about 0.4 watts per kVAR).
D. Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.
E. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current-limiting, non-interchangeable type factory

installed in each phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features
include the following:
1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A, minimum.

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor
manufacturer.
3. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse
has opened, but is still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the
enclosure.
F. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired. Resistors may be
omitted if permitted by NFPA 70.

G. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid

leakage from capacitor cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable
for type of mounting indicated.
H. Indoor Enclosures: IP 21 to IEC 60529 or NEMA 250, Type 12 or as

indicated.
I. Outdoor Enclosures: IP 54 to IEC 60529 or NEMA 250, Type 4, equipped
with watertight conduit connections.
2.3 FIXED CAPACITORS
A. Description: Integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Internal Wiring: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at
a single set of pressure terminals.
2.4 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION UNITS
A. Comply with IEC 60831-1,2 and IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA
ICS 2.
B. Description: Capacitor banks, contactors, controls, and accessories

factory installed in independent enclosures as close as possible to/or within
nominated switchboard requiring PF improvement. Units include a
separately mounted current transformer to sense current in the power
circuit being corrected and to provide input to unit controls.
C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power

factor, adjustable to any value between unity and 0.80 lagging. Controls
continuously sense the power factor on circuits being corrected and, when
the power factor differs from the target setting for more than 10 seconds,
operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit.
Contactors are opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit
power factor closer to the target setting. Switch only one capacitor bank at
a time.
D. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the

following:
1. Under voltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and

disconnects capacitors for power supply interruptions longer than 15
minutes.

2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to

permit manually controlled capacitor-bank switching.
A. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in
the capacitor application.
B. Buses: Plated copper.
C. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor,

interconnecting wiring, and capacitors.
D. Inductors: Air-core-type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit

switching surges to within contactor ratings.
E. Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the

maximum fault current to which they may be exposed.
F. Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front

panel.
G. Enclosure: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door shall be interlocked

with controls or main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is
opened.
H. Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of

enclosure, indicating target and actual power factors accurate to plus or
minus 1 percent of reading.
I. Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and

mounting conditions.
J. Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect
the unit.
1. Operating handle can be padlocked.
K. Necessary interfaces for connection to BMS and SCADA systems,

including relays, transducers, wiring, etc. for the functions described in
Mechanical Specification Sections, BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.
2.5 FACTORY FINISH
A. Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or

primer coat.

A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with IEC
60831-1,2 and IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA CP 1. Include the
following:
1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage,

capacitance, leak, and dissipation-factor tests.
2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective
devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Cast-in-place

concrete is specified in Division 3.
B. Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
C. Connect remote monitoring communication module to electrical power monitoring

and control data network through appropriate network interface unit.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
Identify components according to DIVISION 26 Section “Basic Electrical

Materials and Methods”.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and

inspecting agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect automatic power factor correction equipment
installation and connections. Report results in writing. Include the
following:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuits have been energized,

connect and observe units to confirm proper operation.
2. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Inspection: Perform external and internal inspection of capacitor

equipment for damage and for compliance with the Contract
Documents and manufacturer’s documentation. Check mechanical and
electrical bolted connections for required torqueing.
D. Testing: Perform the following and certify compliance with test
parameters:
1. Test insulation resistance between capacitor terminals and case.
Follow manufacturer’s written instruction or those below:
a. Use test voltages 500 V minimum, for equipment rated 250 V and
less, and 1000 V minimum, for equipment rated more than 250 V.
b. Apply test voltage for 60 seconds.
c. Investigate, report, and resolve insulation resistance less than that

stated by manufacturer’s literature or less than allowable 25 mega
ohms for equipment rated 250 V and less and 100 mega ohms for
equipment rated more than 250 V.
1. Measure capacitance of pole-to-pole capacitor combination and compare

with manufacturer’s published values. Report readings, and investigate
and resolve discrepancies more than 10 percent of manufacturer’s
nominal values.
2. Energize circuits and demonstrate electrical operating features of

automatic power factor correction units according to manufacturer’s
3. Verify accuracy of remotely monitored parameters transmitted from

automatic power factor correction units by communication module.
Correct deficiencies shown by inspections and tests on site where

possible, and retest; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
Report of tests and inspection: written record including adjustment settings.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for optimum automatic power factor correction.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components.

Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged
finish to match original finish.
B. Clean components internally, on completion of installation, according to

manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and

maintain the system installation. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures” and “Demonstration and Training."
SECTION 261330 – MEDUIM VOLTAGE RING MAIN UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this
Division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division
also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
C. Basic Electric Material and Methods, Section 16050, applies to work of this
Section.

tests necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the
Owner, primary switchgear and ring main units in accordance with Drawings
and Specifications.
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

primary switchgear of the types and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years as approved
by Architect.

DIN/VDE, IEC, BS, EN, NEC, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE Standards, pertaining to
primary medium voltage and ring main units. Provide primary medium voltage
ring main units products and components which conform to one or more of the
foregoing codes and standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for primary medium voltage ring
main units, including, size, enclosures, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background

drawings of primary medium voltage ring main units, single-line diagram, and
outline drawings.
C. After Architect's approval and prior to fabrication, submit foregoing including

approved transformer shop drawings to Utility Co. for approvals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Refer To The Attached Manufacturers' List.
2.2 RING MAIN UNITS
A. Each main unit comprises three three-pole load break switches rated 630
Amps, two for the incoming ring main feeder's cables, one for the outgoing
cable connected to the medium voltage switchgear.
The unit must comprise measuring compartment including three current

transformers and voltage transformers protected with H.R.C. fuses to effect
metering the input electric power by the electricity authority.
B. Cable termination boxes shall be provided for the incoming and outgoing.
C. Switch disconnectors shall be manufactured to IEC 298, 294 and 262 category
B VDE-67 part 3 and 6 or BS 5227 or any approved equal.
D. They shall be air insulated or SF 6 gas insulated compact ring main unit of IP
65, and of 3 pole gang operated type capable of interrupting safely, their
nominal full load current.
E. The switch disconnector shall have the following rating:
1. Rated voltage 24 KV.
2. Nominal operating voltage 22 KV.
3. Rated current 630 A.
4. Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 us
▪ Between phase and earth 125 KV.

▪ Over open blades 145 KV.
5. Power frequency test voltage
▪ To earth 55 KV rms.
▪ Over open blades 75 KV rms.
6. Load breaking capacity
At power factor 0.7 and Un 630 A.

7. Closed loop breaking capacity
At power factor 0.3 and 0.25 Un 630 A.
8. Rated short time current for 1 second
▪ Line blades 25 KA rms.

▪ Earth blades 25 KA rms.
9. Peak with stand current
▪ Line blades 50 KA.

▪ Earth blades 25 KA.
F. The ring main unit shall be of SF6 or air insulated type.
G. The load break switches shall be operated by hand-operated handles through

levers. Protective barriers must be provided to safeguard the personnel from un
intential contact with the live parts during switching operations.
Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the ON/OFF positions of the switches
and the hand-operated handles shall be provided with locks.
Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when working
on cables.
H. Earthing switches are to be provided on the feeders' side to enable earthing the
cable feeders when working on the cables.
I. Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their relevant
earth switches such that no load break switch can be switched on as long as his
mate earth switch is in the ON position and vice versa.
J. Ring main unit must be equipped with earth fault indicator of the type and
according to the Electricity Authority.
K. Tests
Supply test results to confirm that the switch has been tested to substantiate
designs according to applicable Standards verifying not only the performance of
the switch, but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus
bracing. In addition, factory test each switch in accordance with approved
Standards.
All tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer at works and at his expense
and under control and supervision of electricity Distribution Company.

The contractor is responsible for testing all ring main units, all equipment …etc.
as per EE A requirements on his expenses.
L. EQUIPMENT DATA
Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not be
limited to the following:
Construction and installation details for the 24 KV ring main unit equipment.
Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of
cubicles.
Details of connection of high voltage cables to the cubicles.
Handling, installation and assembly drawings.
Key interlocking scheme showing key numbers and operations performed.
The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by

this section shall include but not be limited to the following:
Complete technical data on the 24 KV ring main unit other equipment including
data on operating characteristics, compliance with standards, dimensions and
weights, detailed description, operating mechanism etc.
Complete technical data on instruments protective and auxiliary relays,

measuring instruments including manufacturer's catalogues, operating
characteristics, operating curves, and detailed description.
2.3 LOAD BREAK SWITCH
It shall fulfill the following data:
- Rated Voltage: 24 KV.

- Rated Current: 630 A.
- Short circuit level: 500 MVA at 22 KV.
- Impulse withstands voltage 1.2/50 u sec.: 125 KV.
The load break switches shall be operated by hand-operated handles through levers.
Protective barriers must be provided to safeguard the personnel from unintentional contact
with the life parts during switching operations. Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the
ON/OFF positions of the switches and the hand-operated handles shall be provided with
locks.
Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when working on

cables.
Each load break switch must be equipped with space heaters to prevent moisture &
humidity ingress (220Vx 2 x 200W) controlled by miniature breaker and hygrostat.
Earthing switches are to be provided on the feeders side to enable earthing the feeders
when working on the cables.
Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their relevant earth switches
such that no load break switch can be switched on as long as his mate earth switch is in
the on position and vice versa.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which ring main unit is to be installed. Notify

Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install ring main unit as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written

instruction, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with Utility
Co. requirements to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of ring main unit with other

work.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values
for equipment connectors.
D. Provide 6.35mm minimum thick x 60cm wide insulation mat in front of ring main
units and rear of freestanding equipment.
E. Provide protective covering during construction.
F. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.
G. Provide fuses for potential transformers and control, with five spare fuses for
each rating.

H. Coordinate with and obtain approval of Utility Company for equipment

requirements including all metering prior to fabrication and installation.
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been

energized, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new equipment and retest at no
additional cost to Owner.
B. Prior to energization of medium voltage ring main unit
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and

phase-to-earth for one (1) minute. Minimum test voltage to be 2,500
volts D.C. with a minimum resistance of 5,000 mega ohms.
2. Check primary medium voltage ring main units for continuity, and for
short circuits.
3. Notify Architect of any abnormalities.
C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize equipment and demonstrate

in accordance with requirements.

SECTION 261300 – MEDUIM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes medium-voltage switchgear and associated auxiliary

equipment.
B. Description o f Work: medium voltage (MV) switchgear installations comprise t h e

following:
1. Indoor fixed metal enclosed (LSC2A) switchgear unless otherwise specified on

drawings and BOQ
2. Control power supply.
4. Earthing of switchgear.
5. Ancillary work.
6. Monitoring and control through BMS, including interface elements such as
relays, transducers, etc. as detailed in BMS section

C. Related Sections include the following:
1. DIVISION 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

2. DIVISION 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. DIVISION 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for cable terminations at
switchgear.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues, detailed description of

construction, provisions for extension, compliance with the
Standards, dimensions and weights, operating characteristics,
operating curves and error curves (VT, CT) for all switchgear,
control gear, protective gear, metering gear etc.
2. Details of miscellaneous items including pilot lights, cabling or wiring, incoming

and outgoing feeder terminal fittings, supports, labels, interlocks, bracing etc.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1. Plans and elevations, with indication of switchgear mounted components,

dimensions and weights.
2. Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
3. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and
busbars and types and locations of protective gear (relays, metering
instruments, CTs, VTs) etc.
4. Schematic and elementary diagrams of control circuits.
5. Block diagrams for BMS and interface points
6. Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.
7. Physical arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, instrument
transformers, busbars, connections etc.
8. Dimensions and weights of control power supply and other auxiliary
equipment or components.
C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the

manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.

D. Calculation of current and voltage transformers characteristics to verify their

suitability for proper unsaturated operation under site fault condition and their
adequacy for relay/wires/metering requirements
E. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to equipment

manufacture:
1. Schedule of selected circuit breakers, relays and control gear, with

complete identification of each component and its characteristics.
F. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with the
relevant IEC Standards, including the following:
1. Impulse withstand-voltage tests

2. Power frequency withstand-voltage tests.
3. Temperature-rise tests.
4. Short time current tests.
5. Verification of making and breaking capacity.
6. Mechanical endurance/operation tests.
7. Verification of degrees of protection for persons against contact with live and
moving parts.
8. Internal arc tests.
9. Protection degree test to IEC 60529.
G. Routine Tests: Each complete switchgear unit is to undergo routine tests

at the manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit
routine test reports, prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test conditions
and guaranteed rating of equipment under site conditions.
H. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article.
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
J. Maintenance Data: For switchgear to include in the maintenance manuals

K. Coordination Study: Submit protection coordination study, including pick-up

settings and time-grading, together with time-current curves and range of
adjustments etc. as required to coordinate with upstream and downstream
protective devices of the complete system based on coordination curves of
protective devices used and specific calculated prospective short circuit currents at
various points.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing

switchgear similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the following
Standards:
1. Common Clauses for HV Switchgear and Control Gear Standards: IEC

6277-1.
2. A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages
above 1 KV and up to and including 52 kV: IEC 62271-200.
3. HV A.C. Circuit Breakers: IEC 62271-100.
4. Insulation Coordination: IEC 60071.
5. HV a.c. Fuse-switch combinations and Fuse-Circuit-Breaker
Combinations: IEC 62271-105.
6. A.C. Disconnectors (isolators) and Earthing Switches: IEC 62271-102.
7. HV Switches: IEC 62271-103.
8. Surge Arrestors: IEC 60099.
9. Metering and Protective Current Transformers (CTs): IEC 60044-1.
10. Metering and Protective voltage Transformers (VTs): IEC 60186.
11. Relays: IEC 60255.
12. Reading Instruments: IEC 60051.
13. Watt-Hour Meters: IEC 60521.
14. Power Transformers: IEC 60076, & 60726.
15. Sulfur Hexa-Fluoride: IEC 60376.
16. Fuses: IEC 60282-1.
17. Climate Conditions: IEC 60721-3-3 & 60721-3-4.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer

agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this
section during the specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path as indicated.
B. Store so condensation will not form on or in switchgear.
C. Apply temporary heat where required to obtain suitable service conditions.

D. Handle switchgear using factory-installed lifting provisions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear with other construction and

room dimensions. Advise the Engineer in case of conflict.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide spare parts, as recommended by the manufacturer, for one
year maintenance as expected under local conditions, and to allow for
emergency replacement due to accidental breakage or failure. Spare parts are to
1. Two sets of each type of lamp, fuse, auxiliary switch, trip coil, control
switch, selector switch, neon indicator and the like.
2. Complete set of main contacts of each rating.
3. Complete set of breaker/switch auxiliary contacts.
4. Complete mechanism of breaker/switch of each type.
5. Drive motor of each type
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal
routine inspection, testing, operation and maintenance including levering crank,
manual charging handle, manual shutter operator, testing jumpers and HV
test bushings, set of rail extensions, digital micro ohm-meter, set of mobile
lifting and handling equipment etc. as necessary for the type of switchgear.
1.9 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS

Factory acceptance tests of equipment's under this Contract are subject to be

witnessed by the Engineer. The Contractor is to include in his price the costs for
one factory witness test visit in manufacturer premises for two persons from the
Engineer/Employer side, including travel on business class flights and all costs of
five stars hotel accommodation, local transportation and test expenses
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Busbars: high conductivity, electrolytic copper, modular, designed to withstand

worst short- circuit conditions without allowing permissible temperature rise at
ambient conditions to be exceeded, in accordance with the Standards. Busbar
connection from one unit of switchgear to another is to be expansion/contraction
compensated, plated and bolted. Busbar supports are to be flame-retardant,
track-resistant, glass polyester, porcelain or equally reliable fiberglass reinforced
epoxy to approved standards.
B. Busbars: are to be insulated, either with epoxy insulation applied by the fluid-dip
process or heat shrinkable insulated sleeves. Busbar connections are to be
insulated with easily installed, performed vinyl boots, secured by nylon hardware.
C. Earth Bus: Copper of not less than minimum size required by the Standards,
designed to withstand worst earth- fault current of power system without showing
any signs of thermal or mechanical damage or degradation. Earth bus is to
extend full length of switchgear.
D. Power Cable Terminations: Fixed bolted type, unless otherwise specified,

complete with standard fittings and accessories for connection of incoming and
outgoing cables. Cable compartment is to be designed to permit cables to enter
enclosure and connect at respective terminals from below, or as shown on the
Drawings. Terminations are to include appropriate sealing ends, fittings and
accessories for type of cable used, including stress cones or other stress relieving
accessories, heat shrinkable sleeving, end boxes or end bushings and fittings of
any kind necessary to support and protect specified cable ends.
E. All switchgear are to be provided with Local/Remote selector switch for controlling
Parcel 34 Specifications 1000 of

1243
the switchgear either from local or remotely via BMS system
F. Potential Indicators: Neon indicators are to be provided at front of each switchgear

unit, one per phase, using capacitive potential divider to indicate voltage state on
cable terminals.
G. The primary windings of VTs are to be protected by a HRC fuses.
H. The secondary windings of VTs are to be protected by MCBs located at

the LV compartment. Each MCB is to be equipped with necessary auxiliary
contacts for alarm, interlock, BMS interface, etc. applications.
I. All secondary circuits are to be wire with PVC insulated flexible 750V copper
wires, with a minimum cross section of 1.5mm2 for control, alarms, signaling
etc..., and 2.5mm2 and 4mm2 for voltage and current circuits respectively.
J. The secondary circuits of the current transformers are to be connected to

terminal blocks located inside the LV compartment. These terminal blocks are to
be equipped with suitable shorting facilities.
K. DC supplies to each cubicle are to be protected by suitable MCBs equipped with

necessary auxiliary contacts to give alarms in case of MCB trips
L. Interlocks are to be provided on switchgear so that:
1. Circuit breaker cannot be isolated, earthed or put into service position

when closed.
2. Access to cable compartments cannot be made unless earthing switch is
closed.
3. Earthing switch cannot be opened unless cable compartment is closed.
M. Keys and padlocks are to be provided for manually interlocking two or more
units if required. Electrical and mechanical interlocks are to be provided for
automatic safe and functional operation of the system as shown on the
Drawings/Schedules.
N. Earthing facilities are to be provided for earthing and/or short-circuiting the feeder
at its terminals through built-in, safety-interlocked, quick-make earthing switch,
without use of loose attachments.
O. Metal cases of instruments and control devices are to be connected by

bare copper conductors of not less than 2.5mm2 cross-section to nearest earth
bar.

1243
P. Ferrules: Cable and wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved
type at each termination. Colour coding is to be as required by the Regulations
and the applicable Section of the Specification.
Q. Test terminal blocks are to be provided inside insulating covered bases for
instruments, instrument transformers, relays etc. in LV compartments.
R. Components are to be interchangeable when of same rating and function.
S. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of steel enclosures and structure are to be
cleaned, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with two
coats of baked enamel, color standard gray (RAL 7033) unless otherwise
approved. Finish is to be vermin and fungus proof and suitable for worst climatic
conditions on site.
T. MV Switchgear Ratings:
1. Rated Voltage: 24 kV.

2. Nominal Service Voltage: 22 kV.
3. Rated Frequency: 50 Hz.
4. Rated One Minute Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (rms) to Earth
and Between
5. Phases: 50 kV.
6. Rated Impulse Withstand-Voltage (1.2/50 micro-sec) (peak): 125 kV.
7. Rated Normal Current of Busbars: as shown on the Drawings.
8. Rated Short Time Withstand-Current: 25 kA for 1 second.
9. Rated Peak Withstand-Current: 63 kA.
10. Internal Arc classification for metal enclosed LSC2A switchgear or
extendable ring main units (LSC2B or LSC2A) is designated as follows:
- Classification IAC AFL
U. Auxiliary Power Supply Rating:
1. Rated Supply Voltage of Closing and Opening Devices and Auxiliary

Circuits: 110 d.c. V.
2.3 WITHDRAWABLE METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
A. Type: For installation indoors comprising air insulated single busbar system,
horizontally isolated, with draw able circuit breakers, floor mounted, free standing,
modular design of matching units to form a continuous integral metal-clad switchgear
assembly extendable at either end.

1243
B. Degree Of Protection: switchgear is to have a degree of protection, against contact

with live parts or contact with movable parts and against external effects, of IP 41 for
enclosures and IP 3XD for partitions/shutters according to IEC 62271-1 and IEC
60529, when in the connected position.
C. Climate Conditions: switchgear is to be designed for climate class I2 to IEC 60721-3-

3 & 60721-3-4.
D. Arc proof: switchgear is to comply with IEC 62271-200 requirements for

resistance to internal arc faults, classification AFLR, 25 kA, 1 second. Test reports
are to be submitted to confirm that.
E. Construction: Each switchgear unit is to be divided into main switchgear

compartment, bus bar compartment, cable compartment and LV compartment and is
to comprise with draw able part and stationary part. Compartments are to have
bolted, interconnected and earthed metal partitions. Enclosures, structure and
partitions are to be galvanized steel.
F. With draw able part is to comprise circuit breaker with operating and control
mechanism, isolating contacts and front shield completing the compartment
enclosure, all mounted on one metal truck or carriage, provided with racking
mechanism to allow for moving the withdrawable part between connected,
disconnected/test (control circuits are connected) and removed positions. Isolating
contacts are to be self-aligning, pressure type, silver plated copper, fully shrouded,
and visible when in disconnected position.
G. Stationary part is to comprise the various compartments and required fixed

components of the unit, with all operating, monitoring, setting and adjusting devices,
protective relays, key interlocking and padlocking devices accessible to operator at
front panel.
H. Front panel is to include open and closed indicating lamps, on and off circuit breaker
control switch, mimic diagram, pad lockable earthing switch handle with indications of
position and direction of rotation, and potential indicators, as a general requirement
for all units. Particulars of additional components, relays and indicating instruments
are specified under article shown on the Drawings.
I. Metal safety shutters are to automatically close isolator spouts in fixed compartment
when withdrawable part is in disconnected position. Shutters are to be double
latched for extra safety, pad lockable, painted red and with the word “BUSBARS”
marked in white on front of busbar shutters and painted yellow with the word
“CABLE” marked in white on cable end shutters.

1243
J. Metal Truck: 4-wheel type, with handle for racking and locking breaker into in-
service or disconnected positions. Truck is to be of self-aligning design running on
fixed steel rails, continuously earthed.
K. Interlocks: In addition to those specified in Paragraph "General

Requirements" Subparagraph 6 hereof, interlocks are also to be provided to:
1. Discharge the stored energy mechanism of a circuit breaker upon

insertion or withdrawal from service position.
2. Prevent disconnecting auxiliary circuits while circuit breaker is in service
position.
3. Prevent moving breaker into service position whilst auxiliary circuits
are not connected and/or earthing switch closed.
4. Prevent complete withdrawal of circuit breaker whilst auxiliary circuits
are connected.
5. Prevent closing of earthing switch when circuit breaker is between
disconnected and service position.
6. Prevent transition from test position to either disconnect or service position
while the breaker is closed.
7. It shall not be possible to operate the busbar-earthing device if any of the
circuit breakers associated with the busbar to be earthed is in the normal service
position.
8. Circuit breaker shall be mechanically prevented from being inserted into the
service position when the busbar earth switch of the associated busbar is
closed
L. Access to LV and auxiliary wiring is to be from front of unit for control, protection,
test terminal blocks and associated connections. Multi-pin, disconnect able, locks-
in type plugs and socket arrangement is to be provided between withdraw able and
fixed parts of switchgear.
M. Anti-Condensation heaters with thermostat, switch and pilot lamp and of rating
recommended by manufacturer are to be provided in each section of switchgear
assembly.
N. Wiring diagram, suitably protected and located inside LV compartment of each unit,
is to indicate all data and components related to the particular unit and its external
circuitry.
O. Insulating Mat: Anti-slip, synthetic, insulating, rubber mat, minimum 5 mm thick and
900 mm wide, with heavy canvas lining on lower face, is to be provided for full
length in front of switchgear assembly.

1243
P. Busbar earthing is to be provided by means of manufacturer's pre-designed, truck-

mounted transferable unit.
Q. Voltage transformers and auxiliary control power transformers with current limiting
fuses are to be provided on withdraw able trucks, unless otherwise specified or shown
on the Drawings.
2.4 INDOOR FIXED METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR
A. Type: For installation indoor categorized (LSC2A-PI or PM), three

compartments with insulated or metallic partitions, comprising Single busbar, floor
mounted, free standing switchgear of modular construction, forming a continuous
integral structure extendable at either end, with withdraw able mounted circuit
breakers, fixed breaker-switch disconnector combination, isolating disconnectors,
and/or switch –disconnector-fuse combination, as specified or shown on the
Drawings.
B. Switchgear is to have a degree of protection, against contact with live parts and
against external effects, of IP3X for enclosures and IP 2X for partitions according
to IEC 62271-1 and IEC 60529, when in the connected position.
C. Circuit breakers are to be frame mounted and bolted into position. Frame is to
have wheels for handling during installation or maintenance.
D. Busbars: high conductivity, electrolytic copper, modular, design to withstand worst

short- circuit conditions without allowing permissible temperature rise at ambient
conditions to be exceeded, in accordance with the Standards. Busbar connection
from one unit of switchgear to another is to be expansion/contraction compensated,
plated and bolted. Busbar supports are to be flame-retardant, track-resistant, glass
polyester, porcelain or equally reliable fibreglass reinforced epoxy to approved
standards.
E. Busbars: are to be insulated, either with epoxy insulation applied by the fluid-dip
process or heat shrinkable insulating sleeves. Busbar connections are to be
insulated with easily installed, preformed vinyl boots, secured by nylon hardware.
F. Single air-break /SF6 isolator is to be provided, on busbar side of circuit breaker,

interlocked with circuit breaker operation such that isolation or connection of
circuit breaker is not possible while circuit breaker is closed. Isolators are to be
padlockable in the off and earth positions.

1243
G. Compartementation is to be provided by insulated partitions between switching

devices, busbars, cable terminations and LV equipment.
H. Mechanical interlock between the door and the switch disconnector’s “Earth
Position” is to be provided.
I. Control and monitoring of each unit is to be provided on front panel and is to include
mimic diagram, operating handles of main device and earthing switches, position
indicators, close and trip push buttons, potential indicators, identification and
instruction plates, protective devices, metering and indicating instruments, key and
pad lockable devices, as specified and shown on the Drawings.
J. Access to LV wiring is to be from front of cubicle for control, protection, test terminal
blocks and associated LV power connections. Multi-pin, disconnectable, lock-in
type plug and socket arrangement is to be provided between circuit breaker and
stationary part of cubicle.
K. Anti-condensation heaters with thermostat, switch and pilot lamp, and of rating
recommended by manufacturer are to be provided in each section of switchgear
assembly.
L. Wiring diagram, suitably protected and located inside LV compartment of each unit,
is to indicate all data and components related to the particular unit and its external
circuitry.
M. Anti-slip, synthetic, insulating, rubber mat, minimum 5 mm thick and 900 mm wide,
with heavy canvas lining on lower face, is to be provided for full length in front of
switchgear assembly.
2.4 MV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Type: SF6 circuit breaker using rotating arc or puffer principle, with closed gas circuit,
and with pressure detector to prevent operation of circuit breaker in case of loss of
gas pressure within the sealed enclosure.
B. SF6 breakers are to be provided with gas filling valve and with pressure switches,
one per pole, to initiate alarm in case the pressure of the SF6 gas drops below
manufacturer set values.
C. Particulars: In addition to the ratings specified in paragraph 2.2TT "MV

Switchgear Ratings" of Article 2.2 "General Requirements" hereof, circuit breakers are

1243
to have the following ratings:
1. Rated Normal Current: As shown on Drawings.

2. Rated Short-Circuit Breaking Current at Nominal Service Voltage and
Percentage D.C. Component in Accordance with IEC 62271: 25 kA.
3. Rated Short-Circuit Making Current (peak): 63 kA.
4. Rated Duty Operating Sequence: O - 3 min - CO-3 min - CO.
5. Rated Transient Recovery Voltage (TRV) for Terminal Faults (peak): 30
KV.
6. Rated Cable Charging Breaking Current: 31.5 A.
7. Rated (single) Capacitor Breaking Current: To be stated by
Manufacturer (400 A minimum).
D. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip- free, stored energy,

spring loaded, manually charged by lever or hand-crank, electrically charged by
suitably rated universal motor, and capable of one complete off-on-off cycle in case of
loss of control power. Circuit breaker is to have electrical close solenoid and two trip
coils, mechanical on and off push buttons, mechanical on/off/charged indicators,
operation counter and auxiliary switches to satisfy all functions specified or shown
on the Drawings. Five N.C. and five N.O. spare auxiliary switches for future use are
to be provided in addition to those required. Insertion of manual spring charging lever
or hand- crank is to automatically disconnect the motor. Slow closing of circuit
breaker contacts for inspection and adjustment is to be possible whilst in the
disconnected position.
E. Automatic tripping is to be by indirect auxiliary power through CT operated

protective relays.
F. Interchangeability: Circuit breakers of different current ratings are not to be

interchangeable Circuit breakers of same current rating are to be wired alike and
interchangeable.
G. Mechanical endurances of circuit breakers is to be class M2 according to IEC

62271-100.
2.5 PROTECTIVE RELAYS, DEVICES AND AUXILIARIES
A. Protective Relays: Digital, programmable, solid state, static, sealed type, having
high immunity to electric field, with modular design, suitable for operation at 55 deg. C
ambient temperature, mounted in dust-tight steel enclosures with cover, with self-
supervision system test buttons for testing without removing from case, and built in
self-regulated power supply unit and installed where shown on the Drawings.

1243
Adjustments and settings are to be accessible and visible from front of relay.
B. Protective Relay: is to be provided with D.C. power from the switchgear power
supply, and to be provided with a pilot LED which is to be lit under healthy operating
conditions. Relay is to be provided with a self-supervision system which upon power
supply interruption or a fault condition is to switch off the LED and to initiate an
alarm. The rated current and voltage for current & voltage sensing relays are to
match that of the corresponding current and voltage transformers of the switchgear
respectively. The continuous rating of the output contacts is not to be less than 5A.
C. Interference and test voltages of the solid state relays are to be as follows:
1. Insulation test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and the relay
frame work as per IEC 60255-5: 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.
2. Impulse test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and the relay
frame work as per IEC 60255-3: 5 kV, 1.2/50 micro sec.
3. High frequency test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and
the relay framework as per IEC 60255-6: 2.5 kV, 1MHZ.
4. Spark interference test voltage, terminal groups between themselves and
the relay framework as per SS346 15 03 class 3: 4-8 kV.
D. Over Current Relay: 3 phase, non-directional, solid state type with two setting stages
as follows:
1. Low setting stage for overload protection with current setting range of 50 % to
250 % of rated current and adjustable definite time and inverse time operation
modes as per IEC 60255-3.
2. High setting stage (instantaneous) for short circuit protection with current
setting range up to 4000% of rated current.
E. Earth fault relay, non-directional, solid state type with two setting stages as follows:
1. Low setting stage of 10 % to 80 % of rated current and adjustable definite
time and inverse time operation modes as per IEC 60255-3.
2. High setting stage (instantaneous) with current setting range up to 1000%
of rated current.
F. Restricted earth fault relay, on secondaries of distribution transformers and

generators having a solidly grounded neutral and rated over 500 kVA, is to be high
impedance, instantaneous differential type, current calibrated from 1% - 20% of phase
current.
G. Under-Voltage and Over Voltage Relays: three phase or three single phase,
solid state definite time type with the following setting ranges:
1. Under Voltage Relay: 60 % to 90 % of rated voltage and 0.2 to 6 sec time
delay.

1243
2. Over Voltage Relay: 80 % to 130 % of rated voltage and 0.2 to 6 sec time
delay.
H. Under-Voltage and Phase-Sequence Relays: Under-voltage relay is to be time-

delay type, with selectable time/voltage characteristics 0.1 - 1.0 seconds for settings
between 60% and 90% of normal voltage, sensed at VT secondary. Combined
under-voltage and phase- sequence relays are to be provided where specified or
shown on the Drawings. Phase-sequence relay is to prevent operation (closing) of
respective circuit breaker in case of non- conformance of phase rotation.
I. Each relay is to be provided with an interface data link (IEC 61850 or equivalent)
and adequate number of contacts for tripping annunciation, and interface with
SCADA functions.
J. Auxiliary Relay: to be suitably rated with sufficient number of N.O. and N.C. contacts
for operation in conjunction with protective relays or control/interlocking
requirements. Relay is to have two N.O. and two N.C. spare contacts.
K. Surge Arresters: Gap-less, metal oxide, heavy duty type, silicon polymer housing
with the following characteristics:
1. Arrester Rated Voltage: 11.2 kV.

2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (Uc): 9 kV.
3. Nominal Discharge Current (8/20 micro-sec peak): 10 kA.
4. Energy Input Capacity: 3.5 kJ/kV.
Surge arresters are to be vertical, free standing, explosion-proof type, with

pressure-relief device and discharge counter. Submit complete data and
characteristics in accordance with IEC 99 testing requirements and procedures.
L. Control power supply is to be a complete system, including main LV switch,

battery charger, batteries, racks and connectors, factory assembled and completely
pre-wired to minimize field installation.
M. Auxiliary LV power is to be obtained from a self-contained control power transformer

unit supplied with the switchgear, when specified or shown on the Drawings. Where
two alternate sources of LV power are shown/specified, an automatic transfer
switch with manual over-ride and off- position is to be provided.
N. Batteries: Nickel cadmium type, of capacity sufficient to supply all MV switchgear

auxiliary loads, relays, coils, lamps, alarms etc. for 8 hours, to close all circuit
breakers in rapid succession, and trip all circuit breakers simultaneously with the
charger off. Battery is to be heavy-duty type with transparent containers, maximum

1243
and minimum electrolyte level indicators and alarm initiating relay in case of D.C.
output failure. Battery calculation is to be submitted according to IEEE 1115 based
on simultaneous trip of all circuit breakers in T1 (1 minute) period, continuous load
in T2 (758 minutes) period, and successive close of all circuit breakers in T3 (1
minute) period. Batteries are to be sized for nominal system voltage +10% -15%.
Calculation is to consider the following factors:
1. 1.15 design margin.
2. 1.25 aging factor
O. Battery Racks: Generously dimensioned termite resistant hardware with electrolyte

resistant paint finish, or square sectioned steel tubes treated with electrolyte
resistant extruded coating. Fittings and connectors are to be approved and
certified electrolyte resisting and corrosion proof materials.
P. Battery Charger: Automatic voltage controlled, solid state type, suitable for float and
boost charging, returning batteries to 90% full charge within 4 hours after full
discharge, plus full duty cycle required of batteries. Charger is to operate from 220
V supply, 50 Hz, single- phase, giving specified D.C. output and having minimum
range of adjustment of 100% -125% float voltage and 110%- 135% boost voltage.
Ripple is not to exceed 1% of nominal output voltage. Charger is to be rated 125%
of its nominal full load and is to have its own automatic control against overcharging
and overload protection. Charger is to have a.c. voltmeter, D.C. voltmeter, D.C.
ammeter, main incoming circuit breaker, pilot lights on a.c. input and D.C. output, and
earth fault detector with alarm indication.
Q. Battery Charger Type: Is to be Dual charger-type, parallel redundant, with each

module capable of carrying the full load requirements of the system.
2.6 METERING INSTRUMENTS - INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
A. Instruments Generally: to be housed in enameled, square steel cases for

switchboard flush installation, size 96 x 96 mm with 5 mm frontal, protected and
sealed white background dials with black pointers (in general) and anti- parallax
shadow-proof glass covers. Accuracy of instruments is to be class 1.5 unless
otherwise specified. Moving parts are to be damped, revolving on hard-stone bases,
with zero adjustment screw.
B. A.C. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, operating from VT secondaries, and with the
following characteristics:
1. Measuring Range: 1.25 x 24 kV with red line marked on nominal
voltage, 250 degrees decimal scale.
2. Overload Factor: 1.2 times rated voltage continuous and twice rated

1243
voltage for 1 minute.
C. D.C. Voltmeters: Moving coil type, with the following characteristics:

1. Measuring Range: 1.25 x 130 V.
2. Overload Factor: 1.2 times rated voltage continuous and twice rated
voltage for 1 minute.
D. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position, rotary type, with cam-operated contacts,

permitting line-to-line and line- to-neutral voltage readings, and with off position.
E. A.C. Ammeters: Moving iron type, operating from CT secondary, and with the
1. Measuring Range :1.25 times CT primary amps, 250 degrees decimal
scale
2. Overload Capacity: 1.2 times measuring range continuous, twice
measuring range for 2 minutes, and ten times measuring range for 1
second.
F. D.C. Ammeters: Moving coil type, with the following characteristics:

1. Measuring Range: 2 x normal d.c. range A.
2. Overload Capacity: Ten times measuring range for 5 seconds.
G. Power Factor Meters: Totally enclosed, 3-phase, electro- dynamic type, with
cross-coil meter movement and accuracy of 1% from at least 20% - 100% rated
current at rated voltage.
1. Measuring Range: 0.1 conductive-unity-0.1 capacitive
H. Wattmeter: Totally enclosed, 3-phase, electro-dynamic type, with overload factor of

1.2 times continuous.
1. Measuring Range: 1.25 x Rated kW.
I. Watt-Hour Meters: 3-phase, to IEC 60521, unless otherwise required by the Local
Power Authority, for operation from 5 A CT secondaries.
J. Frequency Meters: Vibration (reed) type, rated frequency 50 Hz, class 1, rated
frequency range 55-65 Hz, and unaffected by voltage variations of +/-20%.
K. Current Transformers (CTs): Indoor dry type (cast- resin), with the
1. Metering (general): Class 1, 5 A secondary.

1243
2. Protection: 5P10, 5 A secondary.
3. Kilowatt-Hour-Metering: Class 0.5, 5A secondary (check with power

authority).
4. Continuous rating Factor: 1.2.
L. Rated primary current, core size and accuracy limit factors are to be
determined in accordance with nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level
and burden. CT is toperform under specified conditions without exceeding accuracy
limit. Submit error curves for approval. Thermal short-circuit rating is to be the same
as specified for the MV switchgear with dynamic short-circuit rating of 2.5 times
thermal rating.
M. Voltage Transformers (VTs): Magnetic, single-phase, indoor, dry type (cast-resin),

with the following characteristics:
1. Rated Voltage:
a. Primary: (22.0)/3kV.
b. Secondary: 110/3 V.
2. Accuracy Class: 0.5.
3. Rated Voltage Factor: 1.2 continuous, 1.9 for 30 seconds.
R. Check associated burden and ensure VT can perform satisfactorily under

specified conditions. Submit error curves for approval.
2.7 MICROPROCESSOR BASED METERING AND MONITORING UNIT
A. General: A microprocessor based metering unit is to be provided on the incoming

and/or outgoing feeder panels of the MV switchgear as specified in items of
Paragraph "MV Switchgear assemblies" above and/or as shown on the drawings.
Unit is to be capable of monitoring and displaying the functions listed below as well
as providing the protection function indicated and the capability to communicate data.
Unit is to be similar to Cutler Hammer type IQ DP-4000 or other equal and approved.
B. Direct reading metered values are to be displayed by the unit as

follows:
1. AC amperes in each phase, +/-0.5% accuracy
2. AC voltage, phase to phase, phase to neutral, +/-0.5% accuracy
3. Megawatts, +/-1% accuracy

1243
4. Mega vars, +/-1% accuracy
5. Megavolt amperes, +/-1% accuracy
6. Power factor, +/-2% accuracy
7. Frequency, +/-0.1 Hz accuracy
8. Megawatt demand (5,10,15,30 minute interval field programmable), +/-1%

accuracy
9. Megawatt , megavars and VA hours, +/-1% accuracy
10. %THD , +/- 1%
C. Trip and/or Alarm: Device is to trip and/or alarm on the following conditions as a
minimum.
1. Voltage phase loss, if any phase RMS is less than 50% of the nominal line
voltage.
2. Current phase loss, if the smallest phase is less than 1/16 of the largest
phase value.
3. Line voltage phase unbalance, programmable from 5 to 40% of nominal
in 5% increments.
4. Voltage phase reversal
5. Over-voltage, programmable from 105 to 140% in 5% increments
6. Under-voltage, programmable from 95 to 60% in 5% increments
D. Device is to have a time delay for the trip and/or alarm settings for over-voltage,
under- voltage and phase unbalance. Delay is to range from 0 to 8 seconds in 1-
second intervals.
E. Display screen and LEDs are to indicate both trip and alarm conditions. Cause of a
trip or alarm is to be indicated on the display window. Device is also to signify reverse
power flow, negative power factor and negative kVAR. Unit is to trip in the event of an
internal malfunction.
F. Unit is to be provided with an interface data link (IEC 61850 or equivalent) for
connection with BMS system.
G. Control power is to be drawn from the monitored incoming AC line terminal

connections.

1243
Device is to have non-volatile memory and does not require battery backup. In the
event of a power failure, the device is to retain preset parameters.
H. Unit is to allow user to disable undesired values or functions and to later reactivate
them if required. In the event of trip or alarm condition, a built-in reset button is to
allow a manual reset of the unit. Unit is also to be capable of being remotely reset via
its communication port.
I. Addressable communication card is to be provided for interfacing with SCADA

system, for transmission of all data, including trip data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 IINSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and
components may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as
approved, provided the required functions and operations are accomplished; follow
the identification of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease checking and
building maintenance procedures.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for
installation of equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for
fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations,
bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and
that they are properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power A's

1243
requirements.
H. Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in DIVISION 26 Section

"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the Drawings.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as

specified in DIVISION 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Diagram and Instructions: Frame under clear acrylic plastic on the front of
switchgear.
1. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including

control and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
2. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for
a copy of the maintenance manual.
3. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders,

distribution components, and major loads.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to the
Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness and as
recommended by the manufacturer and check phasing of buses, contact
alignment and clearances.
C. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections,

including current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and

1243
relays.
D. Before energization carry out at least the following tests:
1. Insulation resistance on busbars (with circuit breakers in disconnected

position), circuit breakers, bushings and insulators, feeder terminals etc., using
at least a 5 kV megger for MV circuits and a 1000 V megger on all control and
protection circuits, with relays, lamps and the like components disconnected, to
ensure satisfactory insulation resistance as recommended by the Standards
and approved practices.
2. High voltage tests on busbars, circuit breakers in disconnected position,

switches, VTs and insulators, by applying HV a.c. test voltage between
phases and phase to earth at 80% of the IEC voltage withstand test for 1-
minute.
3. Resistance across closed contacts of circuit breakers using appropriate

micro-ohm meter.
4. Functional test of circuit breakers, switches, earth switches, interlocking,

protection, alarms, interface with SCADA system, etc.
5. Polarity check and ratio tests for CTs.
6. CT transformation ratio.
7. VT polarity test.
8. VT transformation ratio.
9. Calibration checks and adjustment for ammeters and voltmeters.
10. Primary and/or secondary injection tests to check relay operation, using
appropriate test sets, followed by tripping of circuit-breaker once only,
through its protective relay circuit.
E. Cables: With circuit breaker in disconnected position, ensure that HV testing of

feeder cable and respective termination is carried out as required under cable
tests.
F. After energization carry out inspection and checking as follows:

1. Breakers are to be closed, one at a time, with as little load on the feeder as
possible; check meters as load is increased and any indication of

1243
overheating detected by appropriate instruments or sensors.
2. Open and withdraw circuit breaker after a prolonged test run, inspect and
check circuit breaker conditions, isolating contacts, contacts on all instruments
and control switches, connections at terminal blocks etc., busbar connections
and busbars for any
Indication of overheating; check for loose connections and bolts etc. and
finally re- apply megger tests to ensure same quality of insulation as before
energization.
3. Close circuit breaker slowly, while in the disconnected position and inspect
contacts and/or contact movement and compare with design figures.
G. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry

out and record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months
after the end of the Defects Liability Period, perform an infrared scan of
switchgear assembly. Make bus joints and connections accessible to a portable
scanner and perform scanning during a period of normal working load as advised
by Employer.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform one additional follow-up infrared scan at
same locations as before, 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or

detects significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
scanning device used for electrical distribution equipment.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all connections

checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed switchgear. Remove paint-splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation.

1243
SECTION 261213- DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes distribution and power transformers with medium-

voltage primaries.

2. DIVISION 26 Section "Bus ways" for bus way connections between

transformers and main distribution equipment.
3. DIVISION 26 Section "Wires and cables" for cable terminations at

transformers.
4. Necessary interfaces for connection to BMS system, including interface

elements such as relays, transducers, wiring, etc. As d e t a i l e d i n BMS
Specifications and schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Include full technical data on features, components, ratings, and
performance for each type of transformer specified. Include core material,
grade, lamination thickness, flux density, winding material, and current density.
Additionally, Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views. Show

1243
minimum clearances and installed devices and features. Submit

Manufacturers' catalogues.
A. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify terminals for tap changing
and connecting field-installed wiring.
B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the

manufacturer /Manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying

that the products furnished comply with requirements.
D. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of main equipment with

the relevant IEC Standards.
E. Routine Tests: Each transformer unit is to undergo routine tests at the
manufacturer's works in accordance with the relevant standards. Submit
routine test reports, prior to shipping equipment, indicating ambient test
conditions and guaranteed rating of equipment under site conditions.
F. Special Tests: Factory special tests are to include noise level, temperature
rise, impulse withstand on one transformer of each rating to be delivered.
G. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including,

but not limited to, the following:
1. Plans and elevations, with dimensions and weights.

2. Arrangement of equipment and general layouts.
3. One-line diagram of power system.
4. Schematic diagram indicating the secondary wiring of transformer
mechanical protection and the control circuit of cooling fans (if any).
5. Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
I. Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance

manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing

transformers similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of

1243
B. Standards: Equipment and component parts are to comply with the

following Standards:
1. Common clauses for HV switchgear and control gear standards: IEC

62271-1.
2. Power transformers: IEC 60076.
3. Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V: IEC 60137.
4. Material thermal class insulation: IEC 60085.
5. For transformer characteristics: BS EN 50464-1 for oil type transformers, and
BS EN 50541-1 for dry type transformers.
6. Neutral Earthing Resistor: IEEE standard 32.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer

agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this
section during the specified warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
A. Temporary Heating: For indoor, dry-type transformers, apply temporary heat

according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each
ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not
energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of
temperature and humidity.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of transformers with other construction.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete or mounting bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.8 FACTORY WITNESS TEST
Factory testing units for two units of each rating of the transformers to be supplied
is to be witnessed by the Engineer. Selection of transformers for witness test is to

1243
be randomly carried out by the Engineer and is to cover all ratings to be delivered.
Witness test is to include complete routine and function testing in addition to the
special tests specified above, special tests may be carried out on one unit of each
transformer rating subject to engineer’s approval. Test procedure and program are
to be submitted for approval prior to test conduction, by at least 14 days. Provide
four man-visit to cover all types of tests including business class air tickets, five
stars Hotel full accommodation, transportation and all test expenses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 DRY TYPE CAST RESIN POWER TRANSFORMER
A. Type: 3-phase, indoor type, two winding, low loss, solvent less cast epoxy
resin, windings, with minimum class F insulation for LV and MV windings, rated
for continuous operation under worst site ambient conditions at full load, and
complying with IEC 60726. Winding temperature rise is not to exceed 80 deg.
Co ver an ambient temperature of 40deg. C for class F insulation.
B. Insulation and Encapsulation: Humidity resistant, explosion and fire-resistant,

self- extinguishing, tropicalized, giving non-toxic gases in the event of fire. To
fulfil environmental, climate and fire classes of E2, C2 and F1 respectively to
CENELEC HD 464 SI/DIN 42523.
C. Winding current densities at rated normal and short circuit conditions are to be
submitted for approval. Normal densities are to be within 2 A/mm2 for Copper
and 1.6 A/mm2 for Aluminum winding respectively, unless otherwise submitted
by manufacturer and approved by engineer.
D. Tapping is to be provided on MV side by means of re-connectable links (off-

circuit), giving +/-2.5% and +/-5% tapping on transformers for each primary
voltage rating or as per electricity requirements.
E. Rubber sound isolation pads are to be provided between core and coil
assemblies, and between base and housing.
E. Cooling fans, are to permit 35% increase in rated power.
F. No load and load losses shall be minimum for efficient operation.

1243
G. Mounting and Handling: Transformer base and structure are to have lifting
hooks or lugs, towing and lashing eyes or lugs and provision for roller wheels.
H. Temperature monitoring is to be provided by externally mounted tripping units

giving alarm and trip at two stages with adjustable temperature difference,
actuated by three embedded thermistor sensors in LV windings (hot-spot).
Additional thermal monitoring/control is to be provided for cooling fan
operation. Temperature monitoring system is to be microprocessor
based digital type and equipped with temperature indicator to display
winding temperature values in degrees celcius.
I. Terminals: Arranged as specified and/or as shown on the Drawings, and

are to be compatible for copper or aluminum cable termination.
J. Earthing bolts or copper pads are to be provided on main frame of

transformer. Earthing bus bars are to be provided on LV and MV sides of
housing.
K. Housing: Sheet steel construction, IP 21 with provision of fans for indoor

installation.
L. Noise Level: A weighted sound power (LWA)/pressure (LPA) level measured at

1m in any direction from transformer (with fans off) is to be less than the
following limits:
Transformer (kVA) dB
1000 73/58
1250 74/58
1600 76/60
2000 78/62
2500/3150 81/65
M. Noise level for transformers with fans: the sound power/pressure level with
all fans in operation is not to exceed 6 dB additional to the values above.
N. Characteristics:
1. Rated Power (net without fans) : as shown on drawings

2. Frequency: 50 Hz.
3. Rated Voltage:
a. MV Side (primary) : 22kV.

1243
b. LV Side (secondary) : 400V.
4. Winding Connections: Dy11 neutral insulated and brought out.

5. Impedance Voltage at Rated Current: 5% for up to 1250 KVA
Transformers and 6% for over 1250 KVA transformers.
6. Highest voltage for equipment (HV/LV) : 24/1.1 kV.
7. Rated short duration induced and separate:
Source AC with stand voltage (HV/LV) : 50/3 kV
8. Separate source AC withstand voltage duration test time: 60 seconds.
9. Short duration test time: 60 seconds for any test frequency up to and
including twice the rated frequency, or according to requirements of IEC
60076-3 for higher test frequency.
10. Lightning Impulse Withstand-Voltage: 125 kV.
11. Short-Circuit Apparent Power of the System at Location: 500 MVA.
12. Duration of Short-Circuit-Withstand: 2 seconds.
13. Terminal Connection System:
a. MV Side: open bolted terminals with cable sealing ends (epoxy

joints) for cables from below.
b. LV Side: fully enclosed terminal box with cable sealing ends and
removable nonmetallic plates for cables from above.
6. Accessories are to include the following:
1. Fans and fans control for 40% extra rating of transformer.

2. Four re-orientable roller rim wheels and attachment accessories.
3. Digital protective unit for transformer monitoring and protection against winding
temperature and fan operation with thermometer for indication of
winding temperature values, 2 N.O. contacts for winding temperature alarm
and trip, along with necessary winding temperature sensors (at least one 3-
wire PT100 or equivalent per phase) and interface with fan control and
protection system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Layout: Exact locations and physical layout of equipment and
components may be varied as required to suit manufacturer's design and as
approved, provided the required functions and operations are accomplished;
follow the identification of the units indicated on Drawings exactly to ease
checking and building maintenance procedures.

1243
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes
for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as
required.
C. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop
and construction drawings.
D. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves
for passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete
foundations, bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and
when required and that they are properly installed.
E. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and
level, before grouting in holding-down bolts.
F. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports,
cable ends and termination fittings required for MV, LV and control cables.
G. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Local Power
Authorities requirements.
H. Earthing: Ensure that earthing installation is as described in DIVISION 26

Section "Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification and/or as shown on the
Drawings.
I. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels,

brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and
components.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to DIVISION 26

Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten bus joint, connector, and terminal bolts according to

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque
values are not indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.

1243
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to
Engineer.
B. Components: Check component ratings, types, sizes and wiring connections,

including current and voltage transformers, fuses, switches, instruments and
relays.
C. Manufacturer's instructions are to be followed under all circumstances. Carry

out and record measurement and tests recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and

manufacturer's tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and
is suitable for energizing.
E. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach

a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
F. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test

commencement.
G. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective
materials and installation.
H. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to

1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical

integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing
has been removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and
covers for dry-type transformers.
2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer’s

published torque values.
3. Insulation Resistance: Perform meg-ohmmeter tests of primary and secondary

winding to winding and winding to ground.
4. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes.
5. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from 20

deg C standard.
6. Turns Ratio: Measure between windings at each tap setting. Measured ratios

1243
deviating more than 0.5 percent from calculated or measured ratio for an
adjacent coil is not acceptable.
7. Winding Resistance : Measure for win d in gs at nominal tap setting.

Measured resistance, deviating more than 1 percent, from that of adjacent
windings, is not acceptable.
8. Verification of the operation of the cooling system.
9. Functional test of all protective devices.
I. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or

manufacturer’s data.
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers
meet specified requirements.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with DIVISION 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for materials and
installation requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and

other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match
original finish. Clean components internally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to
match original finish.
B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization
equipment throughout normal operating cycle of facility.
Record primary and secondary voltages and Tap settings and submit with test
results.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the

system installation.

1243

1243
SECTION 261816- ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit

breakers used for the following:
1. Service disconnecting means.

2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means
2. DIVISION 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles,

and toggle switches used for disconnecting means.
3. DIVISION 26 Section "Switchboards" for circuit breakers.
C. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and

modular, complying with one set of approved Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed

literature, manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification,
overall dimensions and special features, as applicable for each type of
switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including,

2. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including

required clearances and service space around equipment. Show
tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

1243
a. Enclosure types and details.

b. Current and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings
of individual over current protective devices and
auxiliary components.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate

between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve
test results that comply with requirements.
D. Samples: Submit samples of each type of equipment for approval, unless

otherwise agreed in writing by the Engineer.
E. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for
components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In
addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting
switches and circuit breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type
of circuit breaker.
A. Comply with related Standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and

components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment,
and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

1243
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Refer to Material Manufacture List
2.2 SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (DISCONNECTING SWITCH)
A. Rating: 500 V, 2, 3 or 4 pole, load break, short-circuit make, in

accordance with IEC 408, utilization category 22 for heating and lighting
loads, category 23 for motor circuits, and with ampere rating shown on
the Drawings.
B. Design: non-fused, air-break switch disconnector, single throw, safety type,

housed in separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on each pole.
C. Operating Mechanism: quick-make, quick-break, independent of

operator, with external operating handle mechanically interlocked to
prevent opening the door unless switch is in open position. Switch
disconnector is to have provision for bypassing interlock. Position of
handle is to be positive and clearly indicated on cover.
D. Enclosure: general purpose sheet steel for indoor use IP 44, and
weather-proof type cast-metal or sheet steel for outdoor installations IP
65, unless otherwise required or shown on the Drawings. Locking of
operating handle is to be possible in open and closed positions.
2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit Breaker: Refer to respective type specifications in DIVISION 26

Section "Switchboards".
B. Enclosures: Meet environmental conditions of installed location in accordance

with IEC 529.
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

enclosures before shipping.
PART3 - EXECUTION
1.1 EXAMINATION

1243
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit

breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected.
1.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of equipment. Exact

locations are to be determined from detail drawings. Any condition that would
place equipment in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer.
B. Waterproof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and

connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
C. Damaged Equipment: Reject damaged equipment. Protect equipment

against damage after installation and until handed over.
1.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;

provide warning signs as specified in DIVISION 26 Section "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or

laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
1.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with
ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and
control and indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values.
A. Visual Inspection: Equipment is to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.

1243
B. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended
at full load without any signs of heating.
C. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker,

component, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
1.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures.

Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not
use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to
match original finish.
SECTION 262713 – INSTRUMENTS AND METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to instruments and metering specified

elsewhere in these specifications.
D. Distribution boards section 16470.
E. Low voltage switchgear assemblies main distribution boards section 16425.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation instrument and metering as
shown in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1243
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of instrument and

metering of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide instruments and
metering produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to instrument and metering.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for instrument and metering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall comply with IEC 51, DIN/VDE standards and
shall be digital type.
2.2 INSTRUMENTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
All ammeters and voltmeters shall be digital type.
All instruments shall be flush mounted.
B. COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
1. STANDARD IEC 51
2. ADMISSIBLE OVER LOADS
a. Voltage: 1.2 rated voltage continuously 2 rated voltage for 2 seconds.
b. Current: - 2 in continuously.

1243
- 10 in for 10 seconds.
- 40 in for 2 seconds.
3. DIELECTRIC STRENGTH: 2 KV. R.M.S. for 1 min.

o
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE: - 10 C to + 60 oC
5. RESPONSE TIME: < 15.
C. AMMETER AND VOLTMETER SWITCHES
On 3-phase, 4-wire system, ammeter switches shall have four operating positions,
marked 'R', 'Y', 'B' and 'N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single
ammeter to read, in sequence, the currents in each of the three phases and the
neutral wire, On 3-wire systems ammeter switches shall have three operating
positions marked 'R', 'Y' and 'B' and an 'OFF' position. Ammeter switches shall be
connected so that the associated current transformers are short-circuited when they
are not connected to the ammeter.
On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall have six operating positions,
marked 'R-Y', 'Y-B', 'B-R', 'R-N', 'Y-N' 'B-N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall enable
the single voltmeter to read, in sequence, each of the three line voltages and each of
the three phase-to-neutral voltages. On 3-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall
have three operating positions marked 'R-Y', 'Y-B' and 'B-R' and an 'OFF' position.
Voltmeter switches shall have 'break-before-make- contacts.
2.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTS)
All CTs shall comply with all relevant requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE standards and
shall have an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Tariff metering Accuracy Class Designation 0.5
Non-tariff metering Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter ammeters Accuracy Class Designation 3.0

1243
Protection (overcurrent, UEF) Accuracy Class Designation 10p
Protection (UEF) Accuracy Class Designation x
Unless otherwise specified in the schedules or drawings, the CTs are required for
use under service conditions not more onerous than those set out in IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
CTS shall be designed either for measurement or for protection and shall not be
used in a dual-purpose role serving both instruments and protective gear.
Unless otherwise specified, all CTs shall have 5A secondary windings.
So far as it is practicable, all CTs shall be of the ring type. Wound primary CTs will
only be accepted when the rated primary current is so low as to make the ring type
impracticable.
One side of the secondary of each CT shall be connected to earth at one point via a
bolted removable link.
For mattering circuits, either, a proprietary front of panel CT test block or special
"shorting" terminals within the panel shall be provided for test purposes.
All CTs whether of the ring type or the wound primary type, for use at voltages
exceeding 1000 V shall be epoxy resin encapsulated.
Where dual-ratio CTs are specified, they shall be provided with two separate
secondary windings capable of being connected in series or in parallel to give the
required ratio.
All CTs shall be provided with a rating plate bearing the information as stated in IEC,
DIN/VDE standards. All CTs shall be installed in accessible location. The secondary
connections shall be brought out by means of insulated leads, and made off on a
suitable terminal block-mounted in a readily accessible position.
Magnetization curves and/or type Test Certificates shall be provided for all CTs
associated with protection devices.
Every CT shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total burden of the
instruments, relays, and/or other apparatus which it is to serve.
2.4 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

1243
Voltage transformers shall be of the type, rating, and voltage ratio specified in the
schedules or drawings.
All voltage transformers shall comply with all relevant requirements of BS 3941 and
shall have an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Metering Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter voltmeters Accuracy Class Designation 3.0
Protection Accuracy Class Designation 3p
Unless other specified in the schedules or drawings, the voltage transformers are
required for use under service conditions not more than those set out in IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
Voltage transformers designed for a primary voltage not exceeding 4000 V shall be
the air insulated type, with the windings encapsulated in epoxy resin or other suitable
synthetic material.
Unless otherwise specified, all voltage transformers shall be designed for a

secondary output voltage of 110 V.
Each voltage transformer shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the
total burden of the apparatus or instruments which it is to serve.
The insulation resistance of each voltage transformer shall be indelibly marked on

the shipping/dispatch label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which instrument and metering are to be installed and
notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1243
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install instrument and metering as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practto ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves infection.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of instrument and metering.
A. Prior to energization of instrument and metering devices test devices for intended
function Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
SECTION 262413 – SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Main Distribution Boards work for low voltage (LV)
distribution, ancillary mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and
supports.
B. Connection to BMS and SCADA systems, including interface elements such as

relays, transducers, etc., as detailed in Mechanical and SCADA Specifications,
shown on BMS and SCADA Schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.

1243
C. Requirements of the following Sections apply to this Section:
1. DIVISION 26 Section “General provisions for electrical work ".

2. DIVISION 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
3. DIVISION 26 Section "Wires and Cables".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MDB: Main distribution board.

B. CT: Current Transformer.
C. VT: Voltage Transformer.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. RMS: Root mean square.
F. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are
synonymous and may be used interchangeably: "Switchboard" and "Main
Distribution Board".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards
including all components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating
compliance with the Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article,
equipment characteristics, details of construction, operating data, dimensions and
weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous items including incoming and outgoing
feeder terminal arrangement, connections at busbars, isolating, earthing, interlocks,
control devices, indicating and metering instruments etc. Boards are to be factory
assembled and tested and shipped as complete package (s).
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not
1. Plans and elevations with indication of built-on equipment, exact

dimensions, and weights.
2. Arrangement of boards inside rooms allocated, indicating spaces and

clearances.
3. Arrangement of equipment inside board.
4. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and

1243
busbars and types and locations of protective gear (relays, instruments, CTs,
VTs etc.)
5. Schematics and wiring diagrams of control circuits. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
6. Foundation details and grouting holes installation details.
7. Arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, terminal fittings, instruments,

busbar connections etc.
8. Utility Company’s metering provisions with indication of approval by

utility company.
9. Mimic-bus diagram.

manufacturer /manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor
D. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to placing

orders for equipment manufacture:
1. Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range,

features and characteristics, short- circuit ratings, time-current curves etc.
2. Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-
fault currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based
on specific coordination curves of protective devices used and specific
calculated prospective short-circuit currents at various points.
3. Test methods on site and references, including testing equipment for
microprocessor controlled trip units.
E. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish, for color
selection.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification.
G. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer’s type and

routine test records, in accordance with the Standards specified in "Quality
assurance" Article.
H. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:


1243
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that
comply with requirements.
I. Manufacturer’s field service report.
J. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final main distribution
board load connections have been made, for record.
K. Maintenance Data: For main distribution boards and components to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified
in Division 1 include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for main distribution boards and all

installed components.
2. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
L. Coordination Study: Submit coordination study along with setting of protective

devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-fault currents as coordinated
with upstream and downstream systems based on specific coordination curves
of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective short-circuit currents
at various points.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with minimum five

years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing main distribution
boards units similar to those required for this project.
B. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of main

distribution boards, of types, sizes, and capacities required, and whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:
1. IEC 61439-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies.

2. IEC 60947-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 1: General
Rules.
3. IEC 60947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 2: Circuit
Breakers.
4. Relevant IEC Standard for other components, where not otherwise specified.

1243
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable local

regulations/code requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These will have
precedence over other codes/standards nominated for the project, unless otherwise
approved in writing.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions

for main distribution boards, including clearances between main distribution boards,
and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum
dimensions.
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
Deliver MDBs and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids
to facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or
wrappings for MDBs and components to protect equipment from damage. Inspect
equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred during shipment.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent

condensation. Protect from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances,
and physical damage.
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover main distribution boards to provide

protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside main distribution
boards; install electric heating (250- W per section) to prevent condensation.
D. Handle MDBs carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components.

Remove packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the
use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical
equipment contained therein. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site
and replace damaged equipment with new.
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out

panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving main distribution boards
into place.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by

Employer or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then

1243
only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to

requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
3. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the

1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of main distribution boards and components

with other construction and electrical work, including conduit, piping, equipment,
adjacent surfaces, raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment
access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency

replacement and/or one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable
(consumable) contact set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit
breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and
similar devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective
devices as appropriate for type of switchgear supplied.

1243
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Refer to the approved Vendor List.
A. Generally: Main distribution boards are to be dead-front type, metal enclosed,

multi-cubicle, floor mounted, free standing, with 1000V rated insulation voltage,
and 600 V rated operational voltage, with fixed or draw-out switchgear,
manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the drawings, with
matching vertical sections to form a continuous integral and rigid structure.
Outgoing sections are to be of equal width.
B. Generally: Coordinate with SCADA and Building Management System (BMS)

suppliers and provide all necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, etc., necessary
for the functions specified in the SCADA and BMS schedules and/or shown on the
Drawings.
C. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet

steel enclosures, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with
thermal polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating, gray color (RAL 7703 or
ANSI 61) to approval. Switchgear is to be vermin, dust and rodent proof, IP42
protection to IEC 60529 for indoor installations and IP54 protection for outdoor
installations or installations in wet areas, with adequate lifting means and base-
frames and capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to floor
without additional sills. For ratings up to 3200A enclosures are to have mechanical
impact resistance of IK10 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree IP54 and
higher, and IK08 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree lower than IP54.
Test certificates for mechanical impact are to be submitted for approval; otherwise
enclosure thickness is not to be less than 1.5mm. For rating larger than 3200A
enclosures are to have minimum thickness of 2mm.
D. Ventilation: Compartments are to be ventilated, by approved methods complying

with the Standards.
E. Main Distribution Boards are to have a short circuit withstand as shown on

drawings for 1 sec.
F. Fastenings between structural members are to be bolted.

1243
G. Extension of structure and busbars is to be possible at either end of switchboard for

form 3 and form 4 type switchboards.
H. Arrangement is to permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to enter

enclosure as indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without
inconvenience to installation or maintenance.
I. Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment are to be

provided for extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from enclosures as
appropriate for type of switchgear.
J. Spare and space positions are defined as follows:
1. Spare position: Fully equipped enclosure with switchgear

2. Space position: Fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear.
K. Busbars: Site rated for normal current as shown on the Drawings or at least site
rated to same rating of main circuit breaker frame size, and braced for a
symmetrical rms short- circuit duty as specified. Busbars are to be copper, of
sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable insulation or equipment
temperature ratings, and to maximum 90 deg C. Connections and buswork are to
be bolted with copper alloy hardware and are to be accessible for inspection and
maintenance unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved
by Engineer. Contact surfaces are to be Electro-silver plated.
L. Connections from busbar to switchgear are to be rated to carry full continuous

current rating of switchgear frame and are to be insulated.
M. Full size neutral is to be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus is to be

insulated and separate from earth bus and connected to it with removable links, at
every bus section. Links are to be of the same cross-section of the earth bus.
N. Earth bus is to extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance
with the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at
each end), and required number of feeder protective earth connectors.
O. Earth bus is to be half size of phase buses, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
P. Switchboard Type: Switchboard(s) are to be of the following type(s), unless

otherwise indicated on drawings:
1. Form 3b type-2.

1243
2. Incoming: Withdrawable type – Air Circuit Breaker (ACB).

3. Tie: Withdrawable type - ACB.
4. Outgoing: Fixed type – Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) for ratings
up to 1000A and draw out type with electronic trip units for ratings greater than
1000A.
Q. Withdrawable metal enclosed circuit breaker section is to consist of compartmented

unit(s), stationary part with rear busbar and cable connection compartments and
front draw-out circuit breaker assembly. Partitions between sections are to be
bolted steel plate and partitions between compartments are to be tough solid
insulating removable bolted barriers. Each unit is to have hinged lockable front door
with grip-handle and door mounted instrumentation.
R. Draw out circuit breaker assembly is to have disconnecting contacts, wheels and
interlocks to prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open
position, and to prevent closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three
positions (connect, test, disconnect). Racking mechanism and rail assembly are to
be approved worm and lever mechanism. It is to be possible to close the unit door
with breaker in any of the three positions and when removed. External position
indicator is to be provided. Fixed disconnecting primary contacts are to be
accessible and replaceable from front and are to be silver plated copper. Moving
primary disconnect contacts are to consist of self-aligning, silver plated, spring
pressure, finger-cluster, copper contact fitted on line and load studs of circuit
breaker.
S. Pull Sections: An additional cable pull section is to be provided, depending on

actual configuration shown on the Drawing, and subject to Engineer’s approval.
T. Front accessible, front aligned, individually mounted fixed MCCB distribution

sections as basic construction for form 3B type-2 switchboards, are to be
compartmentalized construction, consisting of front modular circuit breaker
compartments, busbar system compartments and rear cable termination
compartments (as per the form type selected), with insulating barriers between front
compartments and busbar compartments and between rear compartments and
busbar compartment (removable for maintenance). MCCBs are to be closely
coupled to busbars (to minimize chances of bus-side faults), and to rear cable
terminals, through compatibly frame-sized insulated connectors. MCCB modules
are to be covered on the front, by recessed frame-type bolted covers, 1.5 mm
minimum thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides and rear are to
be covered with removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.
2.3 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ACBs)

1243
A. Type: Encased in high strength, high temperature resistant, molded plastic

insulating materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosure
at point of application, tested to an approved standard, manually operated for
normal functions, and automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Trip
power is to be derived from main power circuit, with sufficient tripping energy to
reliably trip circuit breaker. Fixed mounted circuit breaker is to be rear connected.
B. Construction: Manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the

Drawings, with two-step, spring charged, stored energy mechanism, quick-make,
quick-break type, electrically and mechanically trip-free, to prevent maintaining
circuit breaker closed against over-current condition whether under manual or
automatic operation. Electrically operated circuit breakers are to have integrally
mounted, spring charging motor mechanism automatically recharged upon closing.
Both manually or manually and electrically operated circuit breakers are to have
mechanical built-in charging lever and are to include open and close direct acting
push buttons. Stored energy provision is to allow open/close/open sequence of
operation without use of external energy. Circuit breaker is to have arc- quenching
device on each pole and replaceable arcing contacts.
C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip device,
where required, control power is to be 120V ac obtained from in-built MDB control
power transformer connected and fused on line-side of circuit breaker. Where
shunt trip and/or under voltage release are required, a sufficient capacitor trip
device is to be provided.
D. Rating: 3-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 600 V class, with
continuous current rating (frame size) as shown on the Drawings, ranging between
1250 A and 5000 A (1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 4000 and 5000 A), fully
rated (100%) for service under worst site conditions. Breakers are to be rated for
a symmetrical rms service short-circuit breaking capacity as shown on the
Drawings, to IEC 60947-2 sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking
capacity) at specified voltage and frequency, meeting IEC 60947-2, sequence I, II,
III and IV tests (for circuit breakers of utilization category B), tested in an enclosure
substantially the same as the enclosure in which they are to be installed.
E. Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for
compatible frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and
with transparent, sealable cover. Trip unit is to be direct acting trip device, current
transformer operated, with flux transfer shunt trip that requires no external
power. It is to have adjustable current setting (0.5 to 1.0 times trip unit rating)
with adjustable long-time delay from 1 to 24 seconds, short-time pick-up and short-
time delay, earth-fault pick-up and time delay and instantaneous over current

1243
pickup. Current setting range is to be by means of replaceable trip-units within the

maximum frame size rating. Once removed, circuit breaker is to remain in the trip-
free position. Earth-fault trip is to be adjustable, range 10% to 60% of normal
current rating of the circuit breaker and a maximum of 1200A, with adjustable
time delay between 0.1 and 0.5 seconds. Short time delay is to be adjustable in
steps, 2 - 9 times current setting, with adjustable time delay of 0 to 0.4 seconds.
Instantaneous trip is to be adjustable in steps at least 2 – 13 times the trip unit
rating. Over-ride protection is to allow full sensitivity up to interrupting capacity of
Circuit Breaker.
G. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker
operation, long time over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short
time over current trip, ground fault trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to
count long time, short time, instantaneous and ground fault trips.
H. Position Indicators: Positive with trip indication target. Target indicator is to be

mechanical and is to give indication even when control power has been lost.
I. Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for every
phase. Current sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall be
encased in epoxy filled plastic housing to protect against damage and moisture
and shall be integrally mounted in breakers.
K. Circuit breaker accessories are to include the following:

1. Padlocking or key-locking provisions for all positions (disconnected, test,
connected, closing blocking, open)
2. Overload, short-circuit, and ground fault trip LEDS
3. Trip indicator and reset button
4. Operations counter.
5. On/off pilot lights.
6. Shunt-trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control.
7. Bell alarm for remote over-current trip indication.
L. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for
remote monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.
M. Electrical Interlock: If electrical interlock is required between power air circuit

breakers (as shown on the drawings), the mechanical closing button of the
circuit breaker is to be disabled in the connect position and an additional electrical
push button is to be provided for the closing of the circuit breaker through the
breaker’s shunt close coil. The electrical interlock is to be provided on both shunt
trip and close coils of the circuit breaker in order to perform simultaneous tripping
and inhibit closing functions on the interlocked breaker(s).

1243
2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. MCCBs generally are to be with electronic trip unit for ratings more than 250A and
thermal magnetic trip units for ratings less than 250A. All circuit breakers are to be
3- pole unless otherwise shown on drawings.
B. Construction: Type tested to the approved standards. Totally enclosed, molded

case, constructed from high quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded
insulating materials, for normal operation at maximum temperature within
enclosures, to approved standards, provided with quick-make, quick-break, trip-
free switching mechanism manually operated by front toggle type handle and
automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Multi- pole breakers are to
have common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Contacts are
to be non-welding silver alloy with arc quenching metallic devices of approved
construction. Cable terminals are to be solder-less anti-turn box lug or clamp type
with set screws suitable for copper or aluminum cables.
C. Electronic trip circuit breakers are to have solid state trip units with long time delay
setting range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating with
adjustable time delay from 1 to 24 seconds, short time delay range 3 to 10 times
maximum trip rating with adjustable time delay from 0 to 0.4 seconds, , and
instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 15 times continuous rating. Solid
state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between
-20 and +40 deg. C. Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where
specified, and is to be adjustable between 0.2 and 0.6 normal phase current pick-up
with adjustable time delay from 0 to 0.4 seconds, and is to be suitable for
connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided on
cover for testing the trip unit.
D. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated
by the handle between on and off positions.
F. Circuit breaker ratings are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with
continuous duty at site conditions, 750 volt rated insulation voltage, 600 volt Ac and
250 volt DC rated operational voltage and with frame size and interrupting capacity
to IEC 60947-2, sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity), and
maximum trip rating as shown on the Drawings. Interrupting capacities at
specified voltage and frequency are to meet IEC 60947-2 test sequence I, II, III
and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B (with intended short time
withstand capability) for circuit breakers 630A and above.

1243
G. Accessories: Circuit breaker design is to allow addition of electrical operator,

control and interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and
auxiliary switches, padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and the like.
2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS
A. Generally: where conventional instruments are specified or shown on the drawings,

they are to be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush installation.
Scales and markings are to be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments is to
be within 2% unless otherwise specified.
B. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25 times nominal
system voltage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times nominal
circuit amperage, 90 degree angle, size 76 x 76 mm.
E. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
F. Provide P.F. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated
primary current, core size and accuracy are to be determined in accordance with
nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and
secondary fuses and disconnecting device.
2.6 WIRING
A. Arrangement: Wiring is to be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal

boards with suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where
required.
B. Connections are to be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal
exposed.
C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected, by

bare copper conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar.

1243
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC
sheathed for multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber
insulated cables are to be used in proximity to higher temperature components and
as flexible cable.
E. Ferrules: Wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp are to be

provided in switchboard, controlled by thermostat and/or hygrostat.
B. Schematic and wiring diagram is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive main distribution boards for

compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install main distribution boards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s

written instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with
applicable requirements of applicable standards or codes approved.
construction drawings and equipment manufacturers’ drawings and that holes
for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables etc. are provided as
required.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and

brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from main distribution board units
and components.

1243
D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for
installation of power and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
E. Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for
passage of feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations,
bases, cable trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and
that they are properly installed.
F. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and
level, before grouting in holding-down bolts.
G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable
ends and termination fittings required for power and control cables.
H. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance

with an approved scheme.
I. Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat
and two finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site,
or as required by Engineer.
J. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions
for main distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and
emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover
instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of main distribution boards.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
B. Main Distribution Board Nameplates: Label each main distribution board

compartment with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for main distribution boards with

ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

1243
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,

according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to
Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings,

types, sizes, and wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and
clearances.
C. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer’s

torque tightening specification.
D. Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical
inspection and electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests
the Engineer may require to check compliance of installation with the Specification,
including, but not limited to, the following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site,
where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new
units and retest.
1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.
E. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check
insulation resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and
between neutral and earth.
F. Primary Injection Tests: Provide portable test equipment to test time-delay

characteristics of circuit breakers by simulating an overload or fault condition.
Measure and record all test results and ambient conditions and compare with
manufacturer’s data.
G. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-
current primary injection test-sets and reports all readings.
H. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance
with the Standard specified (IEC 439 or BS 5486: Part 1) for FBAs assembled

1243
from standardized components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine

tests are also to be carried out on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by
Engineer.
I. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60

days after completion of the defects liability period, perform an infrared scan of
each main distribution board. Remove front and rear panels so joints and
connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each main distribution board 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies main
distribution boards checked and that describes scanning results. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations
after remedial action.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of main distribution

boards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not
use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original
finish.
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART- 1 GENERAL

1243
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.2
SUMMAR
Y
A. Panel boards for distribution and sub distribution of electric power and for
protection of circuits, including fixing and supporting materials and materials
for termination of feeders, sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following
types:
1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit Distribution Boards.

2. Sub Main Distribution Boards.
1. DIVISION 26 Section "General Provision of Electric Work".
1.3
DEFINITI
ONS
A. MCB: Miniature circuit breaker.
B. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.
C. MCS: Molded case switch.
D. DB: Final branch circuit panel boards, for secondary lighting and power
distribution.
E. SDB: Sub Main Distribution Board for power distribution.
F. Sub Main Distribution Boards or Distribution Boards supplied from

emergency source are prefixed with the letter “E” if supplied from emergency
source, and with letter “U” if supplied from UPS source.
G. ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker.
H. RMS: Root mean square.

1243
1.4
SUBMITT
ALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected

2. Types of panel boards and circuit breaker characteristics including
duties and ratings compensation at ambient conditions and
corresponding temperatures within the enclosures.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panel board.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short- circuit
series combinations of circuit breakers.
B. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test

and routine test records in accordance with the Standards.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including,

1. Exact composition of each panel board, indicating busbar rating,

frame and trip ratings of circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panel boards, indicating main feeder
and branch circuit conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags,
labels, mounting methods and materials used.
D. Details of Electrical Closets: Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and

ventilation of the installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting
construction.
E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test
results that comply with requirements.
F. Panel board Schedules: For installation in panel boards submit final versions
after load balancing.
G. Maintenance Data: For panel boards and components to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 1 include the following:

1243
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-

current protective devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of
over-current protective device.
1.5 QUALITY
ASSURANCE
A. Comply with
1. IEC 60439-1 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear

Assemblies".
2. IEC 60947-2 "Molded case circuit breakers"
3. IEC 60898 "Miniature circuit breakers"
4. Other components where not specified are to comply with the
relevant IEC standards
1.6
COORDI
NATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panel boards and components with

other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including
electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and
encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
39.21 SCHEDULES
A. Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of

panel board using the following criteria:
1. Type of construction (MCB or MCCB), referring to type of branch

circuit breakers.
2. Voltage, number of phases and wires.
3. Branch circuit breaker trip rating and wire size.
4. Main circuit breaker trip rating and frame size (maximum
continuous rating) for MCCB and MCB.
5. Short-circuit interrupting capacity (IC) in kA.
6. Special arrangement or provisions.
PART-2 - PRODUCTS

1243
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Refer to Materials Manufacture List
B. Lists below are examples only. Retain or insert only those manufacturers
whose products correspond with other requirements and whose availability
and suitability for the application have been verified.
A. Rated insulation voltage is to be in accordance with the respective standards.
B. Panel boards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP
42 for indoor installations and IP 54 for outdoor installations, in accordance
with IEC 60529, and are to be factory designed and assembled.
C. Earthing bar is to be half size the phase busbars.
D. Neutral bar is to be sized as the phase bus bars.
E. Protection is to be fully rated throughout the systems.
F. Series (cascade) coordinated protection (integrated equipment short-circuit

ratings) will only be acceptable within final branch circuit panel boards,
between branch circuit breakers and the main incoming circuit breaker, in
accordance with an integrated series combination chart prepared by the
manufacturer, tested and certified in the country of origin by an internationally
authorized organization, where short-circuit ratings are beyond available fully
rated types specified, and with the approval of Engineer.
G. Circuit breakers are to be non-fused type.
H. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panel boards are to have one main incoming
circuit breaker or switch and the required number of branch circuit breakers,
arranged as shown on the schedules, including spare circuit breakers and
spaces for future expansion. Three-phase panel boards are to be designed
for sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices.
I. Branch Circuit Numbering: conform with branch circuit numbering shown on

the drawings.
2.3 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES

1243
A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or
surface mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim
and door to approved manufacturer's standards and sizes.
B. Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, are to be Electro-

galvanized sheet steel of gauges not less than specified and in accordance
with the standards. Welded joints are to be galvanized after manufacture.
Gutter spaces are to conform to the standards, adequate for the utilized
cables/wires subject to the engineers’ approval and in no case less than 100
mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have pre-designed angles or threaded end
studs to support and adjust mounting of interior panel board assembly.
C. Trims are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus
compartments, to form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to
cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps engaging flange of box (use of screws
engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable). Screws where used are
to be oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims for flush mounted panel
boards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for
surface mounted panel boards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to box.
D. Doors are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination
cylinder lock and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type
handle and multiple point latch mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.
E. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Are to be
cleaned, phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final
thermosetting epoxy powder modified by polyester resins providing high
resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and alkali solvents, grease, aging
and corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of Engineer.
F. Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement,

are to be provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim
without doors are specified. Directories are to be typed to identify panel
boards and clearly indicate circuit number and description of load.
G. Outdoor enclosures are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5
mm thick, fully weatherproofed (IP 54), without knockouts, but with
removable sealed/gasketed bottom gland plates and gasketed doors.
2.4 BUSBARS
A. Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on total maximum
operating temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full
continuous rating. Bolted or clamped contact surfaces are to have

1243
maximum current density not exceeding requirements of the approved

standards. Aluminum is not to be used for bus bars or panel board parts.
B. Design: Bus bars are to be shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that

branch circuit devices can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or
changed without additional machining, drilling or tapping. Busing is to be full
size without reduction. Busing and blank plates are to allow installation of
future circuit devices, where indicated on the drawings.
C. Rating: Bus bar rating is to be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame

size. Where no main circuit breaker is required, bus bars are to have main
lugs or disconnect switch, with nominal rating equal to 1.25 times the
upstream circuit breaker trip rating, or as shown on the drawings.
D. Short-circuit Duty: Bus bars are to carry at least 125% of the maximum short-
circuit level at point of application for one second, without showing any
signs of degradation.
E. Terminals and connections are to be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure

type. Screws and bolts used for making copper/copper connections are to
be hard copper alloy with lock washers (riveted bus connections are not
acceptable).
F. Neutral bar is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-
less box type set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each
branch circuit and one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-
screw for main incoming neutral wire. Neutral is to be fully sized and rated
as for phase bus bars.
G. Earthing bar is to be copper, brazed to panel board cabinet, with bolted

pressure connector for main conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel
terminal for each outgoing conductor, to provide secure and reliable contact
with all metal parts and enclosure.
2.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. Type: Tested to approved standards, 690 V rated insulation voltage, totally

enclosed, molded case, constructed from high quality, high temperature
resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal operation at
maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and
provided with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for
manual operation of main contacts in addition to automatic operation under
over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have common integral
trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Ampere rating is to be

1243
clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp type with set
screws, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
B. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the

drawings, molded case circuit breakers of distribution panel boards (DBs)
and sub-main distribution panel boards (SMDBs) are to be thermal magnetic
type, while moulded case circuit breakers of Sub distribution panel boards
(SMDBs) are to be thermal magnetic for frame sizes up to 250 amperes and
electronic type for higher frame sizes.
C. Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: are to have bi-metallic inverse
time delay over-current element for small overloads and instantaneous
magnetic over-current trip element for operation under short-circuit conditions
on each pole. Circuit breakers rated 250 A are to have adjustable
instantaneous trips.
D. Deration: Thermal and Electronic over-current trips are to be ambient

temperature derated at specified ambient conditions and corresponding
temperature within the enclosures. MCCB shall not be derated if the space
where the panels are installed is air-conditioned.
E. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers greater than 250 A frame
size, are to be solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0
times maximum trip rating and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to
10 times continuous rating. Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to
changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +40 deg C. Earth fault
protection is to be built into trip unit where specified, and is to be suitable for
connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button is to be provided
on cover for testing the trip unit. Short time over current protection is only
required for circuit breakers if it is required by the discrimination study, short
time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum
clearing time of 0.2 seconds
F. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free

operation so that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents
under manual or automatic operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver
alloy with approved arc-quenching devices of metallic grid construction.
G. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which

overload element is set to operate.
H. MCCBs for DBs: Comply with IEC947-2 test sequences I, II, utilization
category A, and are to have rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacities

1243
(sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panel board location,
with preferred ratings in accordance with following tables.
I. MCCBs for SMBDs: MCCBs rated 630 A and above are to have utilization
category B (with an intended short time withstand capability), and are to have
rated service short circuit breaking capacities (sequence II) with suitably
selected frame sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical requirements at
the distribution panelboard location and schedules shown on the drawings,
with declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or 50%) of the ultimate
ratings as quoted by the circuit breaker manufacturer marked on the circuit
breaker rating plate. MCCBs below 630A are to have utilization category A
with rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (sequence III) to meet the
electrical requirements at the panel boards locations with preferred ratings in
accordance with the below tables.
J. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition,

operating mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position
clearly indicated by the handle between on and off positions.
K. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers of 160 A frame

size are to have interchangeable trip units.
L. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed.

Circuit breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers
sealed to prevent tampering.
M. Accessories: Circuit breakers are to be designed to accommodate standard

attachments including shunt-trip, under-voltage release, combined auxiliary
and alarm switches, and electrical motor operator to any circuit breaker of
rating (frame size) 100 A and over. Padlocking devices are to be provided,
where shown on the Drawings.
N. Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) are provided as
add-on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where required and as shown
on the Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-
current and short-circuit protection, is to be in accordance with the
Regulations. Trip current sensitivity on breakers is to be as recommended
by Electricity regulations. Circuit breakers are to include current transformer
with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to ensure
circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth faults.
O. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements.
When operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current is

1243
to be less than 1/2 cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current

as compatible with breaker construction.
P. Current limiting circuit breakers are to have, on each pole, adjustable inverse
time-delay over-current characteristics for overload protection and
instantaneous trip for short-circuit protection. Operation of main contacts is
to be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces between contacts created
by fault current. Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms value of
prospective short-circuit current.
2.6 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)
A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC

60898.
B. Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities (to IEC 60947-2) are to be as

follows:
1. 6 - 125 A MCB: 10, 20 or 25 kA at 240/415 v A.C according to

drawings.
C. Construction: MCBs are to be tropicalized for operation at ambient

temperatures up to 70 degree C within panelboard enclosure and humidity
up to 95%, and are to be constructed from high quality, high temperature,
molded insulating materials. Guaranteed duties and characteristics are to be
submitted for temperatures above 40 deg C.
D. MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and

suitable for mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
E. Operation: Under overload conditions, thermal tripping is to provide close

protection of insulated conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic
trip is to operate at 7 - 10 times normal rated current (type 3 characteristic).
Magnetic operation is to be in the current limiting region and opening time is
not to exceed 5 milliseconds.
F. Ratings: Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60,
80, 100A and 125 A, calibrated at 40 deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole
circuit breakers.
G. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to
be add-on devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker.
Non-adjustable Sensitivities of 30 mA, 100 mA and 300 mA are to be

1243
available for all ratings of 2-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers, as shown on the
drawings.
H. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, are to include alarm switch,

auxiliary switch, shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to
be modular additions to the circuit breakers.
39.22 MOLDED CASE SWITCH (MCS)
A. Molded Case Switch: Non-automatic on/off switching device of equal

construction to equivalent circuit breaker, having no over-current or fault
protective elements, but marked with maximum current withstand and
voltage rating.
2.7 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (SMDB)
B. SMDB to be form-1 or form 2b to IEC61439-1, and have a rated insulation

voltage of 690V and a rated operational voltage of 400V A.C., 240 V D.C.
SMDB is to be surface mounted type (form-1 type) or free standing type
(form-2b), complete with doors (unless otherwise shown on the Drawings)
suitable for ratings of main breaker and busbars as shown on drawings, 3-
phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire where specifically indicated), suitably and orderly
arranged for any selected combination of branch MCCBs and short-circuit
interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers smaller than
225 A frame size, where indicated, may be grouped on an integral sub-
assembly mounted to main chassis.
C. Construction: Sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and

minimum 2 mm thick for trim or trim and door. Fronts are to be single or twin
covers to shield circuit breakers, terminals and live ends.
D. Interior of panel board is to be pan assembly consisting of galvanized sheet

steel chassis minimum 2 mm thick, folded, flanged and reinforced, with bus
bars vertically arranged and mounted on molded insulators.
E. Molded insulators are to have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and
insulation grade of 3.5 kV for one minute.
F. Circuit breakers are to be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger

circuit breakers) and bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus
connectors.

1243
2.8 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS - GENERALLY
A. Arrangement: Comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with

unified profile and base, and one main circuit breaker or switch as shown
on drawings. Single and multi-pole circuit breakers or other devices are to
occupy modular spaces. Accommodation of contactors and split-bus
arrangement or other devices is not to change regularity of standard box
width.
B. Indoor Enclosure: Sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and
minimum 1.5 mm thick for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim
are to be adjustable to
C. Allow for mis-alignment between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces
(gutters) are to be at least 100 mm wide. Larger gutters are to be provided
where tap-off insulated split connectors are required. Knockouts are to be
provided in top or bottom of enclosures and are to provide a neat and
uniform conduit/cable terminal arrangement.
2.9 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS - TYPE MCCB
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 690V. single-phase and neutral (SPN)
or 3-phase and neutral (TPN), with bolted 1, 2, or 3-pole MCCBs on branch
circuits and 2, 3 or 4-pole MCCB on main incoming, listed by UL File No.
E2269 or equal, and meeting USA Specification W-P-115b Type 1 Class 1.
B. Branch circuit breakers are to be 1, 2 or 3-pole, rated 100 A frame size, with
trip ratings between 15 A and 100 A, and compatible ICs, selected from
normal (N), high-break (H) or current-limiting (L) range.
C. Main circuit breaker is to be 2 or 3-pole 100 A, or 2, 3 or 4-pole 160 A,

225/250 A or 400 A continuous rating (frame size), with trip ratings and fully
rated non-current limiting ICs of normal (N) or high-break (H) ranges, with or
without residual current device (RCD) as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Short-circuit Rating: Panel boards may only have integrated equipment

(series) short-circuit ratings in accordance with paragraph F of Article 2.2
"GENERAL REQUIREMENTS" hereof.
E. Assembly: Bus bars are to be rigidly fixed on molded insulators to back pan
in vertical arrangement. Branch circuit breakers are to be bolted in twin
arrangement to rigid copper cross and center bus connectors. Back pan
assembly is to be removable and fixed to four threaded studs integral with
cabinet.

1243
2.10 FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating of 690V.
B. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid

construction, attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole
fixings, and provided with DIN rails in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels
and in vertical arrangement for TPN panels. Assembly is to be complete with
neutral terminal block, earthing bar and one piece insulated bolt-on/comb-
type phase busbar. Busbars are to be single-phase or 3-phase with spade
connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker.
Insulation is to be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-
circuit current for one second without overheating beyond acceptable limits
required by the Standards. Panel boards are to comply with BS 5486 Part
12.
Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided
with bus bars in horizontal arrangement for SPN panels and in vertical arrangement
for TPN panels. Assembly is to be complete with neutral terminal block, earthing bar
and one piece insulated phase bus bar. Bus bars are to be single-phase or 3-phase
with spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on circuit breaker.
Insulation is to be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum short-circuit
current for one second without overheating beyond acceptable limits required by the
Standards.
C. SPN type panel boards are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service
voltage, single-phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main
incoming.
D. SPN type main circuit breaker is to be double-pole MCB, with or without

earth leakage device (RCD), as shown on the Schedules.
E. Single-pole and double-pole MCBs for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings
between 6 A and 50 A, with ICs as required in the Schedules.
F. TPN type panel boards are to be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum
service voltage, 3-phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 or
4-pole MCB or MCCB main incoming, as shown in the Schedules or on the
Drawings.
G. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers are to have trip ratings between 6 A and
100 A, with IC as required in the Schedules.

1243
H. TPN type panel board main circuit breakers are to be MCB or MCCB, 100A
continuous current rating, with trip range from 25 A to 100 A, or 225 A MCCB
with trip range 70 A to 225 A, normal (N) or high-break (H) duty with/without
RCD as shown on the Drawings.
I. Short-circuit Rating: TPN panel boards may only have integrated equipment
(series) short-circuit ratings in accordance with clause paragraph F of Article
2.2 "GENERAL REQUIREMENTS" hereof.
PART-3 - EXECUTION
39.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixing Generally:
1. Align, level and securely fasten panel boards to structure

2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panel boards at least 25mm from
wall ensuring supporting members do not prevent flow of air
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panel boards
4. Close unused openings in panel board cabinets.
B. Panel board Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections
to cabinet have been completed.
C. Wiring Inside Panel boards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to

prevent tension on circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are to be
split and bolted type, fully insulated.
D. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted
cabinets flush with wall surface finish.
E. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field

application of waterproof compound prior to installation.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panel boards: if asked by the engineer,
stub four empty conduits from panel board into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four empty conduits
into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
39.2 IDENTIFICATION

1243
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;

provide warning signs as specified in DIVISION 26 Section "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods".
B. Panel board Nameplates: Label each panel board with engraved metal or
laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
39.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for panel boards with ground

continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values.
A. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the
Engineer, on panel boards after installation, to verify compliance with the
specifications and standards. Inspect conditions within panel boards and
verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
B. Circuit Breakers: Tests are to include operation of every circuit breaker

manually. Check automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as
required by Engineer, by applying necessary short-circuit, overload and earth
leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as applicable and compare with
manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and report ambient
temperature inside enclosure.
C. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between
phases and between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and
earth. Record all readings, using 500 V megger for equipment on 240 V
systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment on systems up to 600 V, for 1-
minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
D. Routine tests on site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards,
on all panel boards assembled from standardized components of the
manufacturer outside the works of the manufacturer.
E. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panel board bus, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

1243
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
F. Testing: After installing panel boards and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
39.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.
39.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panel boards.

Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use
compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match
original finish.

1243
SECTION 262526 – EARTHING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, apply to work of this
section.
C. Testing and commissioning, section 260800
D. Requirements of this section apply to electrical earthing work specified elsewhere

in these specifications.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all system earthing,
equipment earting, earthing of outlets, special earthing for telecommunication,
earthing of raceways and conduits, earthing of distribution panelboards,
transformers, ring main units, MV switchgear ... etc., earth pits and accessories
work shall be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for
a complete system.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

earthing products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary materials, including
stranded cable, copper braid and bus and bonding jumpers whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL and IEEE Standards pertaining to electrical earthing
circuitry and equipment. Provide earthing products which are labeled for their
intended usage.

1243
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on earthing products and associated

accessories.
B. Samples : Submit sample of earthing cables and earthing accessories.
C. Shop drawings : Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background

drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRODES
A. Earth rods shall be of circular cross-section copper clad steel earth rod
2 (20mm x 1.5 meter) type Sections shall be jointed with purpose made
couplings and a suitable driving cap and tip shall be fitted to the rod
extremities. Couplings shall not exceed the diameter of the rod.
B. Rod section couplings, driving cap and tip shall be bronze or other material
which exhibits mechanical strength, electrical continuity between sections and
does not give rise to electrolytic or corrosive action. All coupling units shall be the
same length of threaded length of the rod.
C. Earth rods shall be a minimum length of 3 meters and shall be driven into the
ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. The tops of the rods shall be driven
below ground level to suit the inspection pit.
D. The top of each rod electrode shall be housed in a purpose made concrete pit to
facilitate inspection. The pit shall be provided with a lid and the assembly shall be
flush with ground level.
E. Earth pits shall be provided with a waterproof seal where installed inside the
building.
F. All copper cables or strip shall be connected 95 mm² from the top of the earth rod
with a purpose made non ferrous clamp or thermo weld.
G. Parallel connected earth rods shall be spaced at a horizontal distance equal to

their buried length. They shall be connected with bare 240 mm² stranded copper
cable unless otherwise shown on the drawings, buried not less than 800 mm below
ground level unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

1243
H. Copper strip or stranded cable may be installed where necessary in the same
trenches as HV/LV cables but shall be separated from all other cables and
services by a distance not less than 300 mm.
I. The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed two ohm. Site
testes shall be made to ascertain that the electrode system resistance meets this
requirement. If the resistance exceeds this figure the contractor shall submit his
proposals to reduce the system resistance to the specified level.
2.2 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
A. Earthing conductors connecting the main earthing terminal or bar and electrode
system shall be green/yellow PVC insulated, stranded copper cable. A minimum of
two earthing conductors shall be installed and separately connected to the
distribution bus bars and test links main earth bar with bolted test links of copper
and having a cross section as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL
A. The main earthing terminal shall consist of hard drawn copper to IEC, DIN/VDE
Standards BS 1432 formed into a bar having minimum dimensions as detailed in
the earthing schematic.
B. Each earthing bar shall be mounted not less than 450 mm above the finished floor
level and spaced by means of insulators not less than 50 mm from the fixing
surface.
C. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third of earthing bar width.
Where this is not possible then the connection shall be made to a copper flag
welded to the earthing bar.
D. Each connection to the main earthing terminal shall be identified with an

appropriately worded label made of durable material.
2.4 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
A. Protective conductors between equipment earthing terminals or bars and the main
earthing terminal or bar shall be made with 120 mm² stranded copper insulated
cables unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Cables shall be connected to
remote ends of the equipment earthing terminals or bar and separately connected
to the main earthing terminal or bar.
A. Where a number of protective conductors follow the same route these shall be

1243
green/yellow PVC covered and installed on a galvanized cable tray and fixed with
purpose made cleats.
C. Connections between main earthing terminal or bars, equipment earthing

terminals, etc, and stranded copper cables shall be made with appropriate
compression type lug, bolt, nut and lock washers. Contact surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and tinned.
D. Sockets lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, clamps, cleats or other items
which come into direct contact with copper protective conductors bars, strips,
cables etc, shall be non-ferrous and manufactured from brass, bronze or other
suitable conducting material which will not cause electrolytic or other corrosion.
Where connections occur between copper and galvanized structures, contact
surfaces shall, additionally, be tinned and after completion compounded to exclude
moisture. Protective conductors, cables, strip, bars, lugs, etc, shall be installed in
visible and serviceable positions.
The joints shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of at
least 600o C. The amount of overlap between the two strips to be jointed shall not
be less than the width of the larger conductor.
2.5 L.V. EARTHING AND BONDING
A. A complete and effective system of earthing shall be provided for the L.V.
electrical installation. The system of earthing shall comply with the IEE wiring
regulations and the recommendations stated in IEC, DIN/VDE Standards BS
7430, except where detailed otherwise in this specification and the drawings.
Where the IEE wiring regulations and IEC, DIN/VDE Standards differ then the
former shall take precedence.
B. The connection of a grounding electrode conductor shall be made in a manner

that will in ensure a permanent and effective grounding path. The effective
bonding shall be provided around insulated joints and section and around any
equipment that is likely to be disconnected for repairs or replacement. Bonding
conductors shall be of sufficient length to permit removal of such equipment
while retaining the integrity of the bond.
C. The non current-carrying metal parts of equipment such as kitchen

equipment …etc. shall be effectively bonded together.
D. Bonding shall apply at each end and all intervening raceways, boxes
and enclosures between the service equipment and the grounding
busbar.

1243
E. Metallic pipe services for example, gas mains, water mains and dry
risers when applicable shall be effectively bonded to the main
earthing terminal at their point of entry. Connections shall be made to
the services with purpose-made earthing clamps to DIN/VDE
Standards.
F. Where there is a lightning conductor system for the building or

structure, it shall be effectively bonded to the main earthing terminal
in accordance with the requirements of IEEE ANSI 80-86 Standards.
A suitable label shall be provided adjacent to this bonding
connection at the main earthing terminal indicating the purposed of
connection.
G. Steel framed structures or metallic cladding shall be effectively bonded to the

main earthing terminal.
H. The cross-sectional area of all earthing, bonding and protective conductors shall
comply with the requirements of the IEE wiring regulations. Except where detailed
otherwise in this specification or on the drawings all conductors for earthing shall
be copper, manufactured in accordance with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards for strip and
IEC, DIN/VDE Standards for cables.
I. Single-core cables forming part of the
system shall be of stranded copper, insulated to 450/750 V standards with

green/yellow PVC. These cables shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards table
1.
J. Mechanical joints between aluminum and copper shall have the joint faces lightly
coated with an anti-corrosion compound before the connection is made.
K. Where conduits, or glands for mineral insulated or armored cables, terminate on

switchgear, distribution boards, motor control center, starter panels or other
apparatus, brass compression washers shall be used to ensure an effective earth
connection.
L. Where connections are made between sections of raceways then the

manufacturer's earth continuity links shall be installed across the joint. Connections
made between raceways sections crossing a building expansion joint shall be
made with a flexible copper braid.
M. Sections of cable tray shall be thoroughly cleaned before overlapping and securing
with a minimum of two screwed fixings. The remote ends of the cable tray shall be
effectively bonded to the earthing system.

1243
N. The armoring of plastic sheathed cables when applicable shall terminate in

compression glands fitted with purpose-made earth tags. A protective conductor
shall connect the earth tag with the apparatus earthing terminal. The earth tag
shall be manufactured from a high conductivity material compatible with the cable
gland.
O. The armouring of metal sheathed cables when applicable shall be securely

clamped to the gland at the cable termination with a purpose-made bolted clamp.
A protective conductor shall be installed to connect the armour clamp or gland

fixing bolts to the apparatus earthing terminal.
P. Metal sheaths and/or armouring of multi-core cables connected to a cubicle type

switchgear when applicable shall be effectively connected to the switchgear earth
bar as described in later clauses.
Q. Where any metal sheathed and/or armoured cables of rating in excess of 100A are
terminated on an "Industrial" type motor control center, a separate protective
conductor shall connect the sheath and/or armouring to the motor control center
earthing terminal.
R. Where applicable metal sheathed and/or armoured multi-core cables of rating in

excess of 100A are terminated on a unit motor starter panel or local isolator, a
separate protective conductor shall connect the incoming and outgoing sheaths
and/or armouring to the starter panel or isolator earthing terminal. The motor
frame shall be connected directly to the supply cable sheath and/or armouring of
the starter panel or local isolator, whichever is more convenient.
S. The earth terminal of all socket outlets shall be connected to the main protective
conductor of the final sub-circuit. Where applicable the protective conductor is
formed by the metal sheath and/or armouring of cables, the earth terminal of the
socket outlet shall also be connected to an earth terminal in the box or enclosure
associated with the cable.
T. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and stranded copper
cables shall be made by compression lug, bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. Contact
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned prior to connection.
U. Connections between earth bars, equipment frames, etc, and copper strip shall be
made with by bolt, washers, nut and lock nut. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned and tinned prior to connection. The washers shall be of sufficient size to
prevent any distortion of the copper strip.

1243
V. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third the width of the earth bar or
strip. Where a larger hole is required in an earth bar then connection shall be
made to a copper flag welded to the bar. The weld shall be tested for continuity.
W. Joints in copper strip shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting
point of at least 600o C or be welded using a molecular welding process such as
furse "Thermoweld" or an equal alternative.
2.6 INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES
The test to be carried out shall include but not be necessarily limited to :-
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
2. Inspect anchorage.
b. Electrical Tests
1. Perform fall-of-potential or alternative test in accordance with IEEE

Standard 81 on the main grounding electrode or system.
2. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the

main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames,
system neutral, and/or derived neutral points.
c. Test Values
1. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should
be no greater than five ohms for commercial or industrial systems and
one ohm or less for generating or transmission station grounds unless
otherwise specified by the owner. (Reference ANSI/IEEE Standard 142)
2. Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm.
2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

1243
A. Examine conditions under which electrical earthing and bonding connections are to
be made and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical earthing and bonding systems as indicated in accordance with

instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical earthing and bonding

system work with other work.
C. Earth the electrical installation including, but not limited to the following: system
distribution, conduit system for light and power, switchgear housings, cabinets,
motor frames, housings of alarm and control panels and associated devices, lighting
fixtures, lightning protection system, emergency distribution system, telephone
system, fire alarm system, smoke detection system, communications and security
system, kitchens equipment, motor control centers, individual starters and other
non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
D. Wherever flexible metal conduit or cable are used for part of a raceway run,
provide an earthing conductor in the raceway or cable and connect to earthing
bushings at each end of run.
E. Where pull boxes contain barriers, provide an earth lug in each section.
F. Install earthing conductors in all wiring where non-metallic conduit is used.
G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment earthing conductors with
earthing lug, bus, or bushing.
H. Tighten earthing and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
connectors and bolts.
I. Route earthing connections and conductors to earth and protective devices in

shortest and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
J. Make earth wires continuous without splices. Avoid soldered joints in any earth
connection. Use solder less type connectors, clamps, etc.
K. Provide complete and isolate earthing system for the swimming pool and the
resistance must be less than one ohm.

1243
L. Earth interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductors connected to metallic

raceway at each end.
M. Provide earth conductor from main telephone equipment and frame room to same
grounding point that service building equipment system earth.
N. Provide complete and isolated earthing system for computer, all I.T racks, all A/V
racks and communication system and the resistance must be less than one ohm.
O. Apply corrosion-resistant finish to field-connections, buried metallic earthing and

bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been
destroyed, which are subjected to corrosive action.
P. Provide complete earthing connections & bondings to all kitchen and metal part
equipment.
Q. Where expansion fittings occur, provide internal code size earth conductor
terminating in adjacent pulling points with earthing bushings.
A. Weld earthing conductors to underground grounding electrodes.
B. Earthing each separately-derived system neutral to:
1. Effectively earthed metallic water pipe where applicable
2. Effectively earthed structural steel member.
3. Separate earthing electrode.
Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current

carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, earthing conductor in
raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing system.
SECTION 262419 – MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1243
B. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

Conditions and Division-1 (general requirement), apply to work of this
section.
C. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of

this section.
D. Switchboard/Panel boards sections.
E. The requirements of this section apply to contactors specified elsewhere in

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include dimensions, ratings and data on features and

components & enclosures. Type test certifications are also to be included
as required.
B. For Variable Speed Drives: Submit manufacturer's performance data

including dimensional drawings, customer connection drawings, power
circuit diagrams, installation and maintenance manuals, warranty
description, certification agency file numbers and catalog information (if
any).

manufacturer/ manufacture’s authorized representative and the contractor
D. Shop and Installation Drawings: Submit for each motor control center prior
to ordering materials and equipment specified in this Section. Include
dimensioned plans, elevations, and component lists. Show ratings,
including short time and short-circuit ratings, and horizontal and vertical bus
ampacities.
1. Complete technical schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and

factory settings on all motor starters, motor protection relays, sensing
units, control accessories, etc.
2. Instructional details of equipment, particularly motor control centers and
panels.
3. Installation details of motor control centers and panels and of control and
sensing accessories. Maintain adequate clearances and access for
maintenance.
4. Exact routing of power and control cables, wiring and conduits.
5. Feeder termination details at motor control centers, starters, motors,
isolating switches, control and sensing accessories etc.

1243
6. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting wiring diagrams (of all power and

control circuits) pertinent to class and type specified for motor control
center. Schematic diagram of each type of controller unit indicated.
7. Wiring Diagrams: Submit for approval detailed control wiring diagrams
and a list of control equipment with descriptive literature.
8. Free hand field wiring diagrams or sketches will not be accepted.
9. Factory certified Routine test certificates to be submitted with each
product delivered on site.
E. Maintenance Data: For products to be included in the Operation &
Maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Submit certified protection relay coordination settings for review, along with
certified “As- built” connection drawings, before energisation of equipment.
G. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit certified Record
Drawings of installed electrical motor control centers, in accordance with
requirements of the Specification, Division 1.

A. Source Limitations: Obtain motor control devices and enclosures/panels,
through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Comply with the following standards: ANSI; NEMA; BS; VDE; DIN; IEC;
UTE.
C. All products shall be sourced either directly from the manufacturer or from
the manufacturer’s authorized dealer/agent

A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in
delivery path as indicated.
B. Handle motor control centers according to Standards’ recommendations.
Use factory-installed lifting provisions.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices
and control circuits to which they connect.

1243
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller

with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the
required control sequence, and the duty cycle of the motor and load.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed,

are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels describing contents:
1. Spare Indicating Lights: Furnish 6 of each type required.

2. Contactor coils: Furnish 10 % of total quantity of each type, with a
minimum of one per type.
3. Control fuses: Furnish 10 % of the total quantity of each rating
used, with a minimum of one per type.
4. Circuit breaker contacts: Furnish 10 % sets of the total quantity of
each rating used, with a minimum of one set per type.
PATR 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Refer To The Attached Manufacturers' List.
2.2 STARTERS
B. Starters for 3 phase motors to be magnetic type to automatically disconnect

motor from power supply in case of supply failure, phase failure, excessive
voltage drop and over voltage, phase rotation, over current and lack of
balance in phases. Overload trips to be provided for 3 phases. All starters
should be supplied by one manufacturer.
C. Motor Data: Obtain from equipment supplier before ordering any motor
starter, or check motor nameplate for full load current rating and allowable
temperature rise in order to select proper overload thermal element for
motor starter.
D. Short circuit protection device fitted to starter to be independent of

controller and overload protection.
E. Control voltage for starters and control circuits is not to exceed 110 V.

1243
F. Step Down Control Circuit Transformers: 2 winding isolating type.
G. Control Circuit Protection: Use high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit

breakers.
H. Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be
effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
I. Control devices on starters to be as follows unless otherwise indicated or

required by driven equipment: start, stop, push buttons, one red pilot light
for "running", one group pilot light for "stopped" and one reset push button.
All indicating lights to be LED type.
J. Starter type A for single phase motors not exceeding ½ HP to be surface or

flush mounted, manual 2 pole toggle type, for non-reversing across the line
starting, fitted with 1 overload element.
K. Starter type B for 3 phase motors not exceeding 10 KW to be Direct-On-

Line, non-reversing, magnetic type, with manual reset, 3 pole overload
relay and low voltage protection, unless otherwise required by local
regulations.
L. Starter type C for 3 phase motors ratings higher than 10 KW and not
exceeding 50 HP to be star-delta or electronic “soft” starter type as
applicable and shown on the drawings, with 3 pole overload relay and low
voltage protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations.
Harmonics produced by such starters shall be certified to be within the
relevant I.E.C limits
M. Starter type D for 3 phase motors over 50 HP to be soft starter or variable

frequency drive as applicable, with 3 pole overload relay and low voltage
protection, unless otherwise required by local regulations. Harmonics
produced by such starters shall be certified to be within the relevant I.E.C
limits.
N. Individually mounted starters to be totally enclosed in galvanized sheet

steel enclosure with baked enamel finish. Design is to suit location and
application. It shall be impossible to open enclosure door unless isolator is
in open position, door interlock shall be defeatable by means of a tool.
O. Nameplates: Starters and controls to have engraved nameplates identifying

system and defining its function. The identification plate shall clearly state
the Nomenclature of the drive and the ratings. The identification shall be
engraved stainless steel in locations directly affected by the outdoor climate

1243
and engraved white traffolyte at indoor locations. Sizing shall be to client

approval.
P. Contactors: Comply with IEC 60947-4, utilization category AC3 or AC4 as

applicable, and be 3 phase, 4 pole, magnetic type, 600 V rating, capable of
interrupting at least ten times rated current inductive or non-inductive loads
under normal service conditions and are to have replaceable main arcing
contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors are to withstand, without
welding or burning of contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal rating
for 4 seconds upon closing and are to be capable of closing on the heaviest
short circuit of the system and withstand the short circuit for period required
by upstream short circuit protective device to operate. 3 N.O. (normally
open) and 3 N.C. (normally closed) spare contacts are to be provided on
each contactor.
Q. Contactors shall be of robust design and shall comply with BS EN 60947:

Part 4-1. They shall operate without undue noise or vibration. Where 2 or
more contactors are contained in the same cubicle, they shall be separated
by barriers. All secondary wiring shall be so arranged and protected as to
prevent its being damaged by arcing.
R. Starter Coordination: Motor starter devices shall be of type 2 coordination to

IEC 60947-4-1.
S. All ammeters shall be available with “dead rider” Max. Demand indicators of
the re-settable type.
T. Solid-State, Reduced-Voltage Controller (soft starter): NEMA ICS 2,

suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, Design B, poly phase, medium induction
motors.
1. Adjustable acceleration rate control utilizing voltage or current

ramp, and adjustable starting torque control with up to 500 percent
current limitation for 20 seconds.
2. Surge suppressor in solid-state power circuits providing 3-phase
protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent
or more above nominal line voltage.
3. LED indicators showing motor and control status, including the
following conditions:
a. Control power available.

b. Controller on.
c. Overload trip.
d. Loss of phase.

1243
e. Shorted silicon-controlled rectifier.
4. Automatic voltage-reduction controls to reduce voltage when

motor is running at light load.
5. Motor running contactor operating automatically when full voltage
is applied to motor.
2.3 COMBINATION STARTERS SWITCH DISCONNECTORS
A. Components to comprise magnetic starter switch disconnector and short

circuit protection devices required by the I.E.C Standards, in approved
galvanized sheet metal enclosure with approved paint finish and IP rating to
suit application. Starters are to be installed in accordance with Clauses in
2.3 of this Section. All starters should be supplied by one manufacturer.
B. Switch Disconnector Operating Mechanism: Quick make, quick break, with

external operating handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover
necessitating disconnecting switch to be in OFF position for access to
inside of enclosure. Means are to be provided for by-passing interlocks.
Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover.
C. Short circuit protection gear to be HRC fused cartridges or molded case

circuit breakers of appropriate current rupturing capacity. Switch
disconnectors are not required if circuit breakers are used for the short
circuit protection. In this case the circuit breaker will perform the
disconnection function.
D. Operation of circuit breaker to be possible from outside of enclosure.

Position of breaker ON/OFF/TRIPPED to be clearly indicated by position of
handle
2.4 PUSH BUTTONS
A. Push buttons to be one unit momentary contact START/STOP with

normally open or normally closed contacts as required by wiring diagrams
and with lockout attachments. Heads to be color-coded as per IEC and
STOP button to be protected. Push buttons controlling each piece of
equipment to be housed in separate enclosure with clear identification
labels as per requirement of specification 260500.
B. Lock keys shall be suitably attached within easy access on a stainless steel
chain fixed to immovable surface with anchor-bolts.

1243
C. All push buttons shall be of the non-retaining type with body of stainless
steel and button made of non-hygroscopic materials, non-swelling and fitted
to avoid any possibility of sticking.
2.5 RELAYS
1. Relays to be multi-pole with normally open or normally closed

contacts, electrically operated at 110 V maximum, and
magnetically held. Contacts to be double break silvered type,
interchangeable from normally open to normally closed without
additional parts. Relays are to be rated at 10 A, 600 V.
D. Relays installed on relay bases shall have retaining clips.
E. All relays shall be certified for a minimum of 100.000 operations.
2.6 CIRCUIT PROTECTORS AND SWITCHES
A. Motor Circuit Protector: Molded case, magnetic break type with adjustable
instantaneous setting suitable for motor protection.
B. Motor Circuit Protectors are to be in compliance with IEC 60947-2,

utilization category B, sequence II (service capacity) for motor control
centers and sequence III (ultimate capacity) for motor control panels and
combination starters unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Molded Case Switch: Similar to circuit breakers but without overload/short

circuit protection. Short time rating of switches is to be not less than the
short circuit current at switch location for 3 cycles. Switches are to have a
suitable self-override instantaneous protection and to be in compliance with
IEC 60947-3.
D. Main incoming switches to be equipped to provide earth fault under voltage

and phase sequence protection through shunt trip coil. Earth fault detection
and interruption to be time coordinated with those of main incoming breaker
on main distribution board.
E. All motors shall be provided with a safety disconnect switch, 1000V

insulation class, category AC23, non-fused, single throw, safety type,
housed in separate metallic enclosure
F. IP 65 with arc quenching devices on each pole, and provided with padlock
and anti-corrosion lock.

1243
G. When located outdoors, the switch disconnector enclosures shall be

provided with U.V resistant paint finish.
H. Switch disconnector handle and indicator markings shall be Red/yellow and

is to have provision for bypassing interlock by authorized and trained
technicians. Position of handle is to be positive and clearly indicated on
cover. Locking of operating handle is to be possible in open and closed
positions. Where safety disconnect switch ratings are required to be in
excess of 250 Amps, provide “ Emergency” push button stations wired
directly for trip.
I. Switch disconnectors shall comply with I.E.C 60664 and I.E.C 60947 and
shall carry KEMA or ASTA or UL certification. They shall be manufactured
to environmentally friendly and recyclable materials.
J. Switch disconnectors shall be provided with non-inflammable, non-toxic

terminal shrouds and one set of N.O and N.C auxiliary contacts.
K. Control switches for electrically operated circuit breakers and motor operated
disconnectors shall be discrepancy type and arranged to operate clockwise
when closing the devices and anti-clockwise when opening them. There
should be marking for discrepancy indications. They shall be designed to
prevent accidental operation, which shall be effected by 2 independent
movements.
L. The contacts of all switches and push buttons shall be strong and to have a
positive wiping action when operated.
M. All safety switches and emergency push buttons shall be clearly labeled as
per specification 260500.
2.7 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
A. Type: Totally enclosed, IP 42 for indoor installation, and IP 54 for outdoor

installation and in wet areas (e.g. pump rooms), free-standing sectionalized
type, modular, compartmented, form 3b type-2 to IEC 61439-1&2, for MCC
floor standing type, for wall mounted to be form 1 with plastic cover on life
parts..
B. Construction: The frame, the external panels (doors, side and rear panels,
tops) and internal elements (ducts) shall comply with the IEC 61439-1&2
mechanical impact test and protected by an epoxy-paint coating.

1243
C. MCC supplier shall have a permanent representative office with a trained

and skilled support staff, in order to prove his commitment for local support
and to provide a channel for communication. The local representatives shall
be easily accessible and shall be able to have a technical team at the site
within 24 hours' notice, 7 days of the week
D. As a general principle relating to reliability and redundancy, no MCC with a

single incoming power supply feed shall have more than 16 outgoing
feeders, inclusive of spare feeders and spaces.
E. In the event of “dual incomer” MCCs, each incomer shall feed a separate
bus-section and a “bus-coupler” 4-pole circuit breaker shall be provided
with “auto change-over” arrangement built into the MCC through a simple
logic PLC with necessary battery back-up.
F. Components: Motor control center to include the following:
1. Main incoming circuit breaker shall be ACB (air circuit breaker) or

MCCB (molded case circuit breaker) circuit breaker, as shown on
the Drawings, for terminating incoming supply cables and isolating
the bus bar system. Main circuit breaker shall be with electronic
trip release unit for ratings more than 250A.
2. Main incomer of MCC shall have power quality meter.
3. Main horizontal full-length bus bars, epoxy painted tinned copper,
rated as main incoming circuit breaker or as shown on the
Drawings. Bus bars shall be designed to withstand main breaker
frame size and three phase symmetrical short circuit for 1
seconds.
4. Branch vertical full height bus bars, epoxy painted tinned copper,
of adequate capacity to distribute power to each circuit breaker
and starter served.
5. Neutral bus bar, epoxy painted tinned copper, rated at half
capacity of main bus bar and distributed throughout whole motor
control center.
6. Earth bus bars, tinned copper, minimum 25 x 6 mm extending full
length of motor control center.
7. All copper used for the bus bars shall be electrolytic type of
minimum 99 % purity and all bus bars shall be 4-pole type.
8. One voltmeter 144mm X 144mm size, moving iron type, with
commutator, range 0-400 V. Voltmeter shall carry CE marking and
shall have certified compliance to BS EN 60051.Voltmeter burden

1243
shall not be more than 4.5 VA and enclosure shall be suitable for
a RH of 95 % non-condensing. The Voltmeter enclosure shall
comply to I.E.C 529
9. 3 Ammeters 144mm X 144mm size with expanded scale in the
operating region and with MDI indicators on all feeders with
necessary current transformers. Ammeter shall carry CE marking
and shall have certified compliance to BS EN 60051. Ammeter
shall be of 600V insulation class and shall have overload scales
for motor start duty. Ammeter burden shall not be more than 0.5
VA and enclosure shall be suitable for a RH of 95 % non-
condensing. The ammeter enclosure shall comply to I.E.C 52
10. Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating high
intensity/colored LED type lights with guaranteed life of 7 years
minimum, switches, relays, contactors and accessories as shown
on the Drawings.
11. MCCBs protecting outgoing sections shall be provided with
electronic trip release unit with shunt trip and connections to
remote BMS/Fire Alarm tripping. MCCBs shall be to IEC 60947-
2.All MCCBs shall be provided with two N.O. and two N.C.
auxiliary contacts wired to terminal blocks.
12. Interconnecting and interlock wiring with stranded copper
conductors having heat resistant color-coded insulation, neatly
wired in place with holders and “spiral binds” as necessary.
13. Each MCC section shall be equipped with anti-condensation

heater with related accessories.
14. Each MCC section shall be provided with its own control
transformer, manufactured to relevant I.E.C regulations, located in
an independent compartment to facilitate easy maintenance.
15. MCCs shall include filters as necessary to limit any Harmonics
produced “down-stream” from traveling “up-stream”, to within the
I.E.C recommendations.
16. All internal painting shall be white RAL9002.
17. Door interlock shall be defeatable by means of a tool.
G. Wiring: Motor control center wiring to be according to IEC Standards

61439-1&2.
H. Bus bars to be adequately isolated and braced to sustain maximum

possible short circuit current which may be encountered at the proposed
location. Type test certification required.

1243
I. Spare Positions: Fully equipped cells, ready for connection to motors, are to
be provided in adequate number.
J. Space Positions: if required to be fully equipped cells ready to receive

control unit are to be provided in adequate number.
K. Starters, switches, other components and electrical devices to be clearly

labeled in English and Arabic as to number and function, with incised black
letters on white laminated Bakelite/ Traffolyte. Labels to be permanently
fixed under each component.
L. Incoming line connections to be made with solder less terminal 4 bolt type
clamps.
M. Mounting plates for the draw-out feeders shall be painted galvanized sheet
steel and of minimum 2m thickness, with necessary “lock-in-place” fixtures
made of metal. Draw-out shall imply no requirement of any cable
disconnection requirements for either power or control.
N. Control wiring and BMS wiring shall not be routed through power areas
within the BMS.
O. All terminal blocks for control and BMS wiring shall be of 500V insulation
class, DIN rail mounted and manufactured from non-toxic, color coded non-
inflammable, self-extinguishing material and shall contain nickel plated
electrolytic copper terminals. The terminal contacts shall be suitable to
meet the “pull-out” forces as per I.E.C 947-7-1. All terminals shall be clearly
identified in respect of service usage, designation and number.
P. All internal wiring and cabling shall be terminated with tinned copper lugs.
Q. Current transformers provided in the MCC shall conform to IEC 185, class
H insulation, 0.5 accuracy class as per I.E.C and secondary 5A, of suitable
VA rating. The Current transformers shall have type test certification from
an internationally accredited testing laboratory and shall be subject to 100
% routine tests as per the IEC.
R. Control power supplies shall be derived from independent batteries and

battery charger mounted in a control compartment within the MCC. Control
voltage shall be provided at 48
S. V d.c. In the event of failure of control power supply, the circuit breakers
shall maintain the “last position” if no fault occurs. Batteries shall have 10
year life time. Control power “healthy” indication lamp is to be provided with
alarm on BMS if the system is “unhealthy”.

1243
T. Certified and stamped Schematic and wiring diagrams to be firmly fixed

within motor control center, showing each component and cross-
referenced with component labels.
U. Submit for approval electrical schematic diagram of whole installation

suggested layout of motor control center, interior wiring details and
complete technical literature on all proposed components, prior to
fabrication or purchase.
2.8 CONTROL SWITCHES
A. Float Switch: Level operated, stainless steel, heavy duty, bracket mounted
type, suitable for application in open tanks, complete with 178 mm spun
copper float, brass rod, two stops, floor mounting stand, lever and
counterweight. Switch to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure and 2 pole
double throw silver contacts that open on liquid rise.
B. Pressure Switch: Industrial, heavy-duty bellows actuated type, suitable for

water service, with contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to
8 kg/cm². Switch to be good for 1720 kPa operating pressure and to have 6
mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight
enclosure, single pole double throw contacts and setting adjustment.
C. Low Suction Pressure Switch: Industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm

actuated type, suitable for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling
pressure, preset at factory to 3 kPa. Switch to be good for 690 kPa
operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to
have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts,
range adjustment knob, sealing cap and range locking nut.
D. Control Switches shall be operated by shrouded push buttons or have

handles of the spade type. Control, reversing, selector and test switches
shall be mounted, constructed and wired so as to facilitate the maintenance
of contacts without the necessity for disconnecting wiring. Control switches
shall carry KEMA or ASTA or UL certification.
E. Where necessary, control switches shall be capable of being locked in

appropriate positions but control switches for circuit breakers and for motor
operated setting devices, etc., shall be of the non-locking type with spring
return to the "neutral" position. Such switches shall be controlled by
independent springs, the use of contact springs alone for restoring not
being acceptable.

1243
F. Control switches for use in direct control schemes shall be rated for the
substation battery voltage.
G. All control switches shall be provided with identification labels, including

labels to give clear indication to the direction of each operation, for
example, "open", "close", "raise", "lower", etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and

characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty
cycle of motor, drive, and load; and configuration of pilot device and control
circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit the motor controlled.
C. Push-Button Stations: In covers of magnetic controllers for manually started

motors where indicated, start contact connected in parallel with sealing
auxiliary contact for low-voltage protection.
D. Emergency disconnect switches or push buttons (as applicable) for all

motors, within 3 meters of the equipment that it is meant to protect, located
at a logically convenient position where it is clearly identifiable.
E. Hand-Off-Automatic Selector Switches: In covers of manual and magnetic

controllers of motors started and stopped by automatic controls or
interlocks with other equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor control centers according to manufacturer's written instructions

with minimum 1100 mm clearance on all sides where walls are present and
min 2000 mm away from any other board in front or back. MCC may be
located adjoining to another panel
B. Anchor each motor control center assembly to steel-channel sills 100 mm

high, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and grout sills flush with motor
control center mounting surface.

1243
C. Fuses: Install correctly rated and clearly labeled fuses in each fusible
switch as indicated.
D. Power and Control Wiring: Run in separate conduits unless otherwise

specified.
E. Rigid conduits are not to terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame or

base.
F. Flexible conduits to be used at motor connections. Allow sufficient slack to

permit motor to slide over adjustable length of motor base. Flexible conduit
in external areas to be metallic corrosion resistant type with outer finish
suitable for U.V radiation.
G. Flexible Conduits: Length and radius to be sufficient to permit bending of

feeder cables without damage to conductor or its insulation.
H. Flexible Conduits: Do not use in place of rigid conduits except at motor

connections, unless otherwise specified.
I. Support conduit with conduit supports in an adequate approved manner.
J. Conduits are not to cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They are
to be run a minimum 100 mm away from pipes of non-electrical services.
K. Conduits: Install so that moisture can drain to lowest point. Provide screw
plug at all low points for draining.
L. Keys for MCCs and other panels to be provided on stainless steel chain
alongside the panel, fixed securely to immovable surface with anchor bolt.
M. All installations shall particularly comply with requirements of I.E.C 60204-

“Safety of machinery-Electrical equipment of machines”. Contractor is
required to submit specific certification to this effect before power
energisation.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all field-installed wiring, equipment and components with

nomenclature lables and provide warning signs according to DIVISION 26
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed certified operating instructions for

motor control centers, including control sequences, and emergency

1243
procedures. Fabricate frame of metal and cover instructions with clear

acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor control centers or on nearby wall to
enable clear and easy viewing.
C. Starters: Fix certified, detailed wiring diagram inside enclosure cover to

clearly indicate circuits.
D. Starters: Identify control and power wires either by distinctive colored

insulation, engraved tags or other approved method.
E. All equipment located outdoors or in external areas subject to atmospheric

and climatic influences, shall be clearly identified with stainless steel
engraved labels with the equipment function name and nomenclature and
“fed from “indication. Labels shall be fixed with s/s screws.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
B. Protect circuits with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers.

Auxiliary supply for controls other than from main power circuit, to be
effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
C. Provide bus bar mounted fuses where direct control connections are
required.
D. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic control devices

according to an indicated wiring diagram or one that is manufacturer
approved, where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and

automatic control devices that have no safety functions when
switch is in the hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor control circuit in both hand
and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as
low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and
motor-overload protectors.
3.5 EARTHING
A. Earth motors by connecting green insulated conductor from earthing

bushing in starter to motor frame. Run earth conductor together with circuit
wiring and terminate in motor terminal box, provided earth terminal in box is

1243
connected to motor frame. If this is not feasible, extend earth conductor

through insulated bushed opening in terminal box and connect to motor
base.
B. Earth equipment by connecting non-current carrying metal parts of system

to earth source. Non-currents carrying metal parts include conduits, cable
trays, outlet boxes, cabinets, enclosures, doors, grilles, and barriers
protecting or shielding electrical equipment from direct access.
C. All MCCs shall be provided with a second earthing connection through the
local common earth bar located in the respective electrical/mechanical
room.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten motor control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal
bolts with a torque-wrench, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
B. Ensure all covers and doors are in proper alignment and all equipment
handles functioning properly.
A. Installation and testing to be witnessed and certified by

manufacturer/authorized representative.
B. Energisation to be accorded only after approved protection calculations

have been accepted. Pre-testing of the MCCS shall be carried out by the
contractor’s own construction power supply.
C. Testing: After installing motor control center and after electrical circuitry has
been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements, as per approved method statement.
1. Procedures: Perform recommended visual and mechanical

inspection and electrical test as listed in NETA. Certify compliance
with test parameters. Test method and test result recording
formats shall be to engineer’s approval.
2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and
retest.

1243
3. Submit settings along with justification to support them both at

overload and short circuit.
D. Circuit Breakers: Coordinate earth fault detection and interruption with

those of main incoming breaker on main distribution panel, and submit
settings.
E. Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure dependable operation

and correct setting.
F. Low Suction Pressure Switches: Test after installation to ensure

dependable operation and correct setting.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor control centers before energisation

and vacuum clean all dust and debris. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match
original finish. Clean devices internally, using methods and materials
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

demonstrate solid-state controllers and motor control centers, and train the
Employer's maintenance personnel.
1. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and

maintenance as specified in Division 1. Include training relating to
equipment operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.

1243
SECTION 260917 - CONTACTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and Division-1 (general requirement), apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to

work of this section.
C. Panel boards section.
D. The requirements of this section apply to contactors specified elsewhere in


tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation, contactors as shown
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of contactors of the

types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide contactors produced by a
manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable

local codes, DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to
contactors. Provide contactors.

1243
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for contactors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire, 380/220 V, 50

Hz. supplies and fitted with 200 - 250 V a.c. coils, unless otherwise detailed.
Contactors shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards only contactors which
have been type tested to meet the requirements of the IEC, DIM/VDE
Standards BS shall be used.
B. Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3.
The utilization category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may be used
where the load is positively identified as being non-inductive, but excluding
tungsten filament lamps.
C. Only one manufacturers' interlocking relays shall be used on one project. Relay
coils shall be for 200 - 250 V, 50 Hz, unless otherwise detailed elsewhere.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which contactors are to be installed and notify in

writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install contactors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of contactors.

1243
A. Prior to energization of contactor devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry

and for short circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then
demonstrate compliance with requirements.
SECTION 265000 – INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART1 - GENERAL
6.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services for interior lighting in
accordance with provisions of contract documents.
2. Completely co-ordinate with the work of other trades.
3. Furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and
devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
4. Unless otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturers’ standard series,
designed and manufactured generally in accordance with the schedule of lighting
fixture and complying with IEC 598.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 260500, General Provisions for Electrical Work.
2. Division 1, General requirements
6.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative code and
standards providing they give an equivalent degree of quality as the referenced codes
and standards and are submitted for Client review and approval in advance of their use.
All equipment furnished under these specifications shall conform to the appropriate
standards of:
1. NEC-National Electrical Code
2. IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission
3. IES-Illuminating Engineering Society
4. ANSI-American National Standards Institute
5. ASTM-Amerian Society for Testing and Materials

1243
6. ASHREA / IESNA: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-conditioning

Engineers 90.1 – 99.
7. IECC: International Energy Conservation code , Code , 2000.
6.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Required for Client review. Submit drawings for approval including, but
not limited to the following:
1. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling
features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and
pertinent to the installation.
2. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
3. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
4. Wiring details, circuit and panel board references, special lighting control
arrangements, etc.
B. Product data:
1. Names of manufacturers, cuts and catalogue numbers of all lighting fixtures to be
used on project.
2. Identify fixtures by Fixture Schedule number, including special notations for
finishes, materials specification, colours, and mountings.
3. Certified test data for fluorescent light diffuser stating brightness and efficiency.
4. Photometric performance curve for lighting calculations including polar light
distribution curves, coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency,
depreciation factors, etc.
C. Samples: submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type together with color and
texture samples of each fixture.
1. LED fixture sample with diffusers.
2. Samples of all decorative/architectural lights.
D. . Contract close out information:
1. Lens guarantee.
2. Operating and maintenance data..
6.04 GUARANTEE
Guarantee lenses in writing to the Client to provide satisfactory performance for..20
years without objectionable discoloration.
PART - 7 PRODUCTS
7.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. The L.E.D. luminaires supplied shall have the proper trim, frames, mounting devices,
configuration, and accessories necessary to be properly installed in the building

1243
construction. Catalogue numbers of luminaires in the “Luminaire Schedule” or

"Lighting Fixture Schedule" on the Drawings are to establish a type of luminaire and not
to determine a method of mounting.
1. Catalogue numbers scheduled on the Drawings may indicate luminaire
compatibility with certain types of ceiling construction. The Contractor shall
determine exact type of ceilings actually to be furnished in each area and shall
obtain luminaires to suit, deviating from specified catalog numbers or descriptions
only where necessary, and only to the extent necessary to insure luminaire-ceiling
compatibility. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and Owner in
writing where such changes are to be made.
B. Where L.E.D. luminaires are specified on the Drawings to be complete with a flat
diffusing lens, the lens shall be virgin acrylic Type 19 pattern with a minimum thickness
of 0.156 inches unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
C. When L.E.D. luminaires are specified on the Drawings to be complete with a curved or
rounded lens refractor/diffuser, the lens shall be impact resistant 100% virgin acrylic
type with diffusing optical film.
D. Double lock nuts shall be used at the load bearing ends of threaded pipe used as
part of a stem mounting assembly.
7.02 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (DRIVERS)

A. Luminaires shall be equipped with an L.E.D. driver(s) that accepts the voltage as
indicated on the "Luminaire (Lighting Fixture) Schedule". Individual driver(s) shall
be replaceable.
B. Driver(s) shall be UL8750 class 2 compliant for their intended purpose. C. Total
harmonic distortion (THD) for current: ≤ 20%
C. Driver(s) shall be rated to operate between -30ºC to 50ºC minimum.
D. Individual driver(s) shall be equipped with surge protection (6kV minimum) in
accordance with IEEE/ANSI C62.4.1. Driver shall be protected against damage
due to either an open circuit or short circuit fault condition on the driver output.
E. Driver(s) shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%.
F. Drivers shall deliver full-range dimming from 0-10V control signal.
7.03 L.E.D. LIGHT SOURCE (LIGHT ENGINE)

A. Individual light engine(s) shall be replaceable.
B. L.E.D. light engine(s) shall have a minimum lifetime of 50,000+ hours at 40º C and
shall have a minimum efficiency of 80 lumens per watt.
C. L.E.D. dies shall be tested in accordance with I.E.S.N.A. LM-80-08 standards.
D. Thermal management shall be passive by design and shall consist of heat sinks

1243
with no fans, pumps, or liquids.
7.04 SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner at the completion of the project, a
minimum of 5% spare L.E.D. driver assemblies. LED drivers shall be turned over
to the Owner representative in their manufacturer’s protective packaging. LED
drivers not in their protective packaging will not be acceptable.
B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner at the completion of the project, a
minimum of 5% spare L.E.D. light engine assemblies. LED light engines shall be
turned over to the Owner representative in their manufacturer’s protective
packaging. L.E.D. light engines not in their protective packaging will not be
acceptable.
7.05 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. Emergency lighting shall consist of normal lighting fixtures with generator or battery-
inverter system backup, emergency lighting fixtures with individual battery backup, or
sealed beam emergency lighting units in accordance with the Fixture Schedule.
B. Battery-backed LED emergency lighting fixtures shall consist of a normal LED fixture
with some or all of the LEDs connected to a battery and charger. The battery shall be
nickel cadmium and sized for a minimum of 90 minutes of fixture operation. The
charger shall be solid-state and provide overload, short circuit, brownout and low
battery voltage protection. The battery and charger shall include self-diagnostic and
self-exercising circuitry to exercise and test itself for 5 minutes every month and for 30
minutes every 6 months. The fixture shall include a test/monitor module with LED
status indicating lights mounted so as to be visible to the public. The fixture shall not
contain an audible alarm.
7.06 EXIT LIGHTS

A. Exit lights (signs) shall be universal mount and complete with factory installed light-
emitting diodes (L.E.D.’s) mounted behind a red diffusing panel and with direction
arrows as shown on the Drawings.
B. LED’s shall be wired in parallel to prevent multi-lamp failure, and shall be
concealed within the sign by a clear panel and red optical diffuser. Power
consumption shall not exceed 2 watts per face.
C. Exit signs shall have white die cast aluminum or polycarbonate
housings with universal mounting brackets; brushed aluminum stencil faces with
red letters and multi- directional knockout arrows.
D. Exit signs shall be provided with emergency battery packs and battery chargers
when required. Batteries shall be maintenance-free nickel cadmium, and shall be
mounted within the signs.
E. Exit lights: 150 mm high letters on metal stencil background.

1243
1. Letter colour: Green (Arabic and English writings).

2. Provide directional arrows as indicated on plans.
3. Back wall mount.
4. Universal mount, single face
5. Universal mount, double face.
6. Rechargeable battery for 1 ½ hours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. L.E.D. luminaires (lighting fixtures) shall be installed as shown on the Drawings
and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Recessed lay-in type linear L.E.D. luminaires shall be supported from the
building structure independently of the ceiling grids with a minimum of four (4) steel
tie wires per luminaire or as detailed on the Drawings.
C. Recessed lay-in type linear L.E.D. luminaires installed in lay-in type ceiling tile
shall be securely fastened from the building structure and be installed in the lay- in
type ceiling in such a manner that the louver/lens housing may be easily opened
and so that the luminaires may be removed and relocated without forcing the
luminaires or changing the grid system tie wires. This Contractor shall coordinate
with the ceiling installer before the ceiling grid is installed to assure a mutually
satisfactory installation of ceiling and luminaires.
D. Recessed L.E.D. luminaires installed in “hard” ceiling systems (i.e. drywall, metal
pan, etc.) shall be securely fastened from the building structure and be installed in
such a manner that the louver/lens housing may be easily opened and so that the
luminaires may be removed and relocated without forcing the luminaires or
changing the ceiling support system. This Contractor shall coordinate with the
ceiling installer before the ceiling is installed to assure a mutually satisfactory
installation of ceiling and luminaires.
E. Surface mounted linear L.E.D. luminaires shall be supported from the building
structure with a minimum of two (2) 1/4 inch threaded rods per each one (1) foot
wide by four (4) foot long and a minimum of four (4) 1/4 inch threaded rods per
each two (2) foot wide by four (4) foot long luminaire as detailed on the
Drawings.
F. Pendant/suspended luminaires shall be supported from the building structure with
1/4 inch threaded rods at each of the luminaires suspension points.
Hardware connections to the threaded rods shall be listed components from the
luminaire manufacturer and be specifically designed for the type of suspension
called for on the Drawings. Installation shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

1243
G. Recessed non-linear L.E.D. luminaires (i.e. downlights) located in lay-in type

ceiling tile shall be mounted in the center of the tile or as shown on the Drawings
and shall be supported by means of bar hangers extended across the main ceiling
support members and also supported from the building structure with no less than
one (1) 1/4 inch threaded rod per luminaire. Where luminaires are installed in
slopped ceilings the luminaires shall be complete with appropriate slopped ceiling
adapters.
H. Surface mounted non-linear L.E.D. luminaires and exit lights shall be supported
from the building structure with a minimum of two (2) 1/4 inch threaded rods per
luminaire or exit light.
I. 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch steel framing channel shall be used where required to span
bar joists and otherwise facilitate structural support for luminaires and exit lights.
J. Ceiling grid layouts when indicated on the electrical Drawings are for
convenience only. This Contractor shall coordinate the luminaires layout with the
Architect/Engineer and all other trades before the ceiling grid, air outlets, and
luminaires are installed.
K. L.E.D. luminaires installed in mechanical room and other similar equipment
rooms shall be located in the field to clear all obstructions such as ducts, piping,
bracing, and supports. Where the location of luminaires shown on the Drawings
must be radically changed, approval from the Architect/Engineer shall be
obtained before the luminaire is placed.
L. Pendant mounted luminaires and exit lights shall be located to avoid mechanical
systems, ductwork, piping, structural members, and the like.
M. Supports shall not terminate or be fastened directly to the roof decking.
3.02 GENERAL CONFORMANCE

A. Surface mounted luminaires shall not have gaps between the luminaire and
attaching surface, except where required by code regulations or manufacturer’s
instructions
B. Recessed luminaires shall not have gaps between the luminaire trim and the
adjacent surface. Where light leaks occur, suitable gaskets shall be furnished and
installed.
C. Install luminaires level, plumb and true. Align rows accurately in three (3)
dimensions.
D. Where luminaires are to be installed in areas without ceilings, this Contractor shall
furnish supports consisting of threaded rods and steel channels as required to
have a finished mounting height of 8’-0” to bottom of the luminaire (or other
mounting height as shown on the Drawings), unless pendant or chain mounting is
indicated on the Drawings or Luminaire Schedule.

1243
E. Recessed luminaires shall be connected with flexible metal conduit or MC Cable

(maximum 6’-0” length) from outlet boxes mounted above or alongside of
luminaire. Luminaires shall be wired in such a way that removal of one shall not
disrupt the continuity of power to the others.
F. All luminaires designated for wet locations shall have sealed conduit entries. Any
luminaire leaking water before or during the warranty period shall be
repaired or replaced by this Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner.
G. Prior to final inspection, this Contractor shall check all L.E.D. luminaires for
damages during construction and replace the damaged luminaires where
necessary at no additional expense to the Owner. All luminaires shall be
cleaned at the time of final acceptance of the building.
H. Illumination measurements: To be taken at selected locations, to determine level and
uniformity.
I. Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.
J. For Lighting Fixtures details Refer to the lighting fixture specification schedule in the
project drawings
SECTION 265100- NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
The work covered in this section is subject to all the requirements in the General
Conditions of the Specifications.
The contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades
covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable
system.
1.01 Description of Work
1. The extent of the lighting control system work is indicated by the drawings and by
the requirements of this section. It is defined to include, but not by way of limitation:
A. Lighting control panels containing line voltage rated relay and dimmers.
B. Network devices to facilitate communications with networks and between

1243
networks of lighting control devices.

C. Network lighting control devices, including presence sensors, keypads, light
level sensors, motion sensors, thermostats, touch screens, modular relays,
modular dimmers, modular input units and modular networking devices.
D. Associated low voltage switches, presence sensors and time switches.
E. Any work stations, software and communications hardware.
2. System installation includes the following:
A. Wiring of branch circuit and sub-circuit conductors to relay, dimmer and power
supply modules.
B. Installation of external control devices and interface with network lighting
controls.
C. Installation of communications conductors and associated hardware.
1.02 Quality Assurance
1. Manufacturers: Firms engaged in the manufacture of lighting control equipment and
ancillary equipment, of the types indicated, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. All KNX devices shall
be certified and tested from KNX organization.
2. Component Testing: All electronic component board assemblies are to be factory
tested and burned in prior to installation.
3. System Support: Factory fax/telephone/email support shall be available free of
charge during normal business hours.
4. CENELEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of CENELEC standards
for Home and Building Electronic Systems as part of the EN 50090 Series.
5. CEN Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of EN 13321-1 for media and
protocol and EN 13321-2 for KNXnet/IP.
6. IEC Compliance: Comply with applicable IEC standards, approved as a world
standard (ISO/IEC 14543-3).
8. ISO 9001: Manufacturer of hardware and software components shall be registered
as ISO 9001 compliant.
1.04 Warranty
Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship for at least one year from the date of installation or eighteen months
from date of purchase.
1.05 Submittals
1. Product Data Sheets: Submit manufacturer’s data sheet for the lighting control
system and specified components

1243
2. Panel Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s dimensional drawings with device

placement for each panel and load schedule indicating actual connected load, load
type and load voltage.
3. One Line Diagram: Submit a one-line diagram of the system configuration proposed
if it differs from that illustrated in the riser diagram included in these specifications.
4. Typical Wiring Diagrams: Submit typical connection diagrams for all components
including, but not limited to, network lighting control devices, area lighting panels,
low voltage switches, presence sensors, light level controllers, network
communications devices, and personal computers.
5. Substitutions: If a system from another manufacturer is submitted for approval, the
submittal shall include documentation showing compliance with stated
requirements of this specification. Any alternate means of compliance shall be
indicated and the methodology explained.
PART 2 - MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

2.01 Lighting Control Network
1. The lighting control system shall be a distributed intelligence each device has its
own microcontroller unit (de-centralized system) connected via a topology-free
network that employs Twisted Pair 1 YCYM 2×2×0.8 or J-Y(St)Y: 2×2×0.8 in TP1
design and facilitate communications between network devices.
2. The physical network:
A. Shall have up to 1km of Twisted Pair.
B. Shall be capable of supporting at least 64 devices per network.
C. Shall support at least 255 unique group addresses per network.
D. Shall support at least 255 unique applications per network.
E. Shall be topology-free.
3. This is based on the loop resistance of 250 kW per 1000 m. The measurement is
carried out as conductor against PE and not conductor against conductor.
2.02 Hardware
1. Touch Screen 7”
A. Provide wall touch screens as designation on the drawings. The touch screen
shall provide a touch sensitive LCD screen. The integrated visualization software
is with the self-explanatory user interface to perform a particular function when

1243
operating the touch-sensitive TFT display. Windows CE.NET is installed as the

operating system.
B. The touch screen shall connect directly to the control system network and shall
be powered from the network. No extra power pack or other power supply shall
be required
C. The touch screen shall be capable of being programmed via USB connection.
D. The touch screen shall incorporate a touch sensitive 800 x 480 pixels colored
LCD screen, 137 mm wide and 196 mm high.
E. The touch screen shall incorporate an LED backlight.
F. The ambient light level shall be monitored for automatic backlight control.
G. The 7” touch panel has a LAN (10/100 Mbit/s), KNX and USB interface. With
integrated Loudspeaker.
H. The touch screen shall have the following function: Real-time week time switch
with internet time synchronization, Presence simulation (recording and play-
back of switching habits), Alarm management, and Adjustable user interface.
L. 7” touch screen shall communicate with all other system units and obtain power
via the TP1 communication cable.
2. Switch actuators
A. Provide for independent switching of loads via make contacts. The function of
the switching channels is freely configurable. All switching outlets can be
operated manually using push-button operation. Switch actuator shall be with
integrated bus coupler. For installation on DIN rails EN 50022.
B. Distributed relays shall communicate with all other system units on the same
network without the use of central controllers.
C. Channel status display via LEDs. A green LED indicates readiness for operation.
D. software functions: Operation as break contact/make contact. Delay functions
for each channel. Staircase lighting functions with/without manual OFF function.
Cut- out warning for staircase lighting functions, Scenes, Central functions,
Disable function. Logic operation or priority control. Status feedback functions
for each channel shall be available.
E. Switching channels used for lighting shall have the following ratings: Nominal
voltage: AC 230 V, 50-60 Hz. For each switch output: Nominal current: 16 A,
Incandescent lamps: AC 230 V, max: 3600 W, Halogen lamps: AC 230 V, max.
2500 W, Fluorescent lamps: AC 230 V, max. 2500 VA, uncompensated AC 230
V, max. 1000 W with parallel compensation, capacitive load: AC 230 V, max:
105 uF.

1243
B. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
KNX / Bacnet is a multi-protocol controller which can be interfaced with several systems and
be integrated in a complete Building Management System (BMS).
KNX / Bacnet enables to connect:

• KNX products (KNX TP connection, bi-directional communication),
• Modbus RTU products (RS485 connection, bi-directional communication),
• KNX IP and Modbus IP products (TCP/IP connection, bi-directional communication),
• BACnet IP Architectures (TCP/IP connection, bi-directional communication).
• A USB 3G key.
C. INTEGRATED FUNCTIONS
KNX / Bacnet
• Weekly and annual clock,
• KNX IP router,
• Logic module,
• Energy and technical dashboard.
E. SCHEDULE MANAGEMENT
The planning management interface enables management of weekly and annual schedule
programs of its installation.
2.03 Configuration Software

1. Configuration software shall be universal software for all manufacturers who used
the same standard.
2. Software shall support system configuration, printing of configuration records, and
monitoring and control functions in a Windows environment.
3. For basic setup and control, the software shall serve as a configuration and
diagnostic utility. Basic features shall include the configuration of inputs and
outputs.
4. Software shall contain an application log that can display network commands and
origin of network commands with time and date of event.
5. Software shall be able to establish connections to the system through a PC
Interface via RS232 port or Computer Network Interface via Ethernet port or USB
connection.
6. Support for remote system dial-up shall be incorporated into the software package
(Option).

1243
Part 3 – Services
3.01 Customization
1. Manufacturer or manufacturer’s approved installer shall provide any custom
hardware or communication devices necessary to make the system perform as
specified above.
2. Manufacturer shall provide custom screens for graphical user interface as specified
above. Rough layouts of the screens will be provided to the manufacturer no less
than 30 days before scheduled system start-up.
3.02 Start-up
1. Manufacturer or manufacturer’s approved installer shall provide onsite services to
confirm correct communications wiring in the field, initiate communications between
panels, and program the lighting control system. System configuration, time-of-day
schedules, and input override assignments to be used in programming shall be
provided to the manufacturer no less than 14 days before planned system start-up.
2. Manufacturer shall provide no. of days of on-site training during the startup period.

1243
SECTION 263623- AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract,

apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switch.
2. Bypass/isolation switch.
1. Division 26 Section "General provisions for electrical work".
2. Division 26 Section “Earthing system”
3. Division 26 Section "Switchboards”.
4. Division 26 Section “Emergency Diesel Generator”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations
showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed
features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.

1243
C. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation

switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each
combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply

with requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit
closing and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance
with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic
and manual. List all factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration
instructions, including software, where applicable.
G. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

electrical systems, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a

locally established and authorized organization which can be called upon for
professional advice and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately
supply spare parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance
requirements. Failure to satisfy the Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch and

related control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with IEC 60947-6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: Refer to the project vendor list:
2.2 MAINS FAILURE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)

1243
A. The switchboard shall include an integrated automatic plugin source change over
system composed of multiple Moulded case breakers connected to « normal » and
« stand-by » sources.
B. The changeover system shall have two different operational modes “Automatic”
“Manual”, the selection between the two different modes shall be via a selector switch
with key to prevent unauthorized operation
C. The system shall be of mechanically and electrically type interlocked to exclude any
possibility of coupling together the different sources
D. To ensure continuity of service both circuit breakers shall have two stable position,
CLOSED and OPEN. It shall be possible to manually operate each circuit breaker in
the event of the absence of control voltage
E. For maintenance purpose, the system shall have a neutral position with both circuit
breakers in the OPEN position. It shall also be possible to lock each circuit breaker in
the OPEN position.
F. Each circuit breaker of the transfer switch shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts and
alarm contacts (TRIPPED status indication).
G. The control system shall be according to the scheme mentioned on the drawings such
that the choice of the connected source is according to a truth table as indicated on the
drawings.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. General:
• The circuit breakers shall comply with IEC947.2 standard.
• The breaking capacity performance certificates shall be available to the above
mentioned standards. The test shall be carried out with a breaking performance
during operation (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu).
• All circuit breakers can be reverse fed without reduction in performance.
• All circuit breakers shall have a rated operational voltage of 690V AC (50/60Hz).
• The rated insulation voltage shall be 1000V AC (50/60Hz).
• All circuit breakers shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as standard.
• The circuit breaker shall comply with the isolating function requirements of IEC
947-2 section 7.1.2.
B. Operating mechanism:

1243
• The operating mechanism shall be of the energy spring type with a closing time
of less than or equal to 80ms.
• Motor charged spring, where the springs are automatically charged by an
electric motor. The maximum time to charge the springs shall not exceed 4
seconds. It shall also be possible to charge the springs manually
C. Main contacts:
• Contacts shall be designed to be maintenance free in normal usage. The main
contacts shall be equipped with an indicator in order to allow its wear level to
be checked without measurements nor specific tools.
• A mechanical indicator shall be provided on the front face of the circuit
breaker which is linked to the main contact assembly in such a manner as to
positively indicate the contact status, it shall only be possible for "OFF" to be
indicated when all contacts are parted and isolated by the required distance.
D. Electrical auxiliaries:
All electrical auxiliaries including the motor spring charging mechanism shall be field
adaptable without adjustment or the necessity for any tool (except a screwdriver). They
shall be fitted into a compartment which under normally loaded conditions has no
metalwork energized from the main poles exposed with it. Any adaptation carried out
thus shall not increase the breaker volume.
It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front face of the circuit
breaker, this wiring shall be taken through a set of disconnecting contacts, so that all
auxiliary wiring is automatically disconnected in the isolated position.
E. Mechanical indicators:
Mechanical indication on the front of the circuit breaker shall be provided to indicate
the following:
1. Main contacts closed "ON"
2. Main contacts open "OFF"
3. Circuit breaker in "connected" position (draw out only)
4. Circuit breaker in "disconnected" position (draw out only
F. Trip unit:
The trip unit shall be micro-processor based and use digital programming techniques
for highest protection accuracy and be integrated as part of the circuit breaker.
The overcurrent relay shall have a wide adjustment range to allow flexibility of setting
on site. The trip unit shall be the true RMS type.

1243
2.4 OPERATION:
A. The voltage of each phase of the normal source shall be monitored, with pickup
adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75% to 98% of
pickup setting.
B. Single-phase voltage sensing of the emergency source shall be provided, with pickup
voltage adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and independent frequency sensing
with pickup adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal.
C. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within ± 2% over an operating temperature
range of -20°C to 70°C.
D. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments without the
use of tools, meters or power supplies. Actual settings shall be clearly defined in the
operator’s manual.
E. A time delay shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and
delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds.
F. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5
minutes for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency.
G. A time delay shall be provided on retransfer to normal, adjustable from 0 to 30
minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and
normal source is acceptable.
H. A time delay shall be provided on shutdown of engine generator for cooldown,
adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes.
I. All time delays shall be fully field adjustable without the use of tools.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounted Switch: Level and anchor unit to floor.
3.2 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS
A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and

communications requirements of transfer switches as recommended by the
manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Employer if necessary
to accommodate required wiring.

1243
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment as indicated and as required by the Standards.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing in addition to

tests recommended by the manufacturer:
1. Before energizing equipment, after transfer-switch products have been installed:
a. Measure insulation resistance phase-to phase and phase-to-ground with

insulation-resistance tester. Include control circuits. Use test voltages and
procedure recommended by manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

Inspect For:
1) Physical damage.
2) Proper installation and connection
3) Integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

d. Perform manual transfer operation.
2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational

function for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.
b. Verify time-delay settings.
c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
d. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-
switch operations.
e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer
time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine
cool-down and shutdown sequence.

1243
B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings
and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or
tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint

splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original
finish.
B. Clean equipment internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer’s

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
1. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the transfer
switches and related equipment as specified below: Coordinate this training with that
for generator equipment.
2. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with the Employer, through the Engineer, with at least 7 days'
advance notice.
5. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction.
SECTION 263353 – UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work
of this section.
section.

1243

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, an
Uninterruptible Power System, in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of

UPS Systems, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
B. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

DIN/VDE, IES, BS, N.E.C. (NFPA-70), NEMA-PE-1, UL, ANSI C-62.41-1980,
ASA-C-39.1-1964, ASME, EN, OSHA and FCC Part 15, Sub-Part J, Class A.
Provide UPS System and components which are UL-listed as a complete
system in accordance with UL-1012. UL-listing on the individual devices are not
sufficient.
D. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse at which spare parts are
stocked and where a field service engineer who is a permanent, full-time
employee of the manufacturer, factory trained and qualified individual whose
primary duty is field service resides.
E. Factory Testing: Before shipment, manufacturer to fully and completely test the
system to assure compliance with the specification including operational
discharge and recharge tests on at least a one-minute battery plant to assure
guaranteed rated performance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for UPS
System.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background

drawings.
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective

parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's

1243
standard warranties for a period of not less than one year from date of initial
start-up.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UPS SYSTEM
A. System Description
1. On-line Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system shall be provided to

supply clean, regulated three-phase power for designated electrical and
electrical equipment even when the incoming utility power is interrupted.
The system shall consist of a rectifier/charger, inverter, static bypass
switch plus internal by-pass switch and sealed, low maintenance battery
plant.
2. UPS rating as indicated on the drawings.
3. Input Voltage: 220/380 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire plus earth (ground).
4. Output Voltage: 220/380 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire plus earth (ground).
5. Output Load Capacity: Specified output load capacity of the UPS at 0.8
lagging power factor as indicated on the drawings.
6. Internal Battery Plant: Battery cells type; sealed, lead-acid,

maintenance-free with reserve time of 10 minutes at full load, 0.8 power
factor, with ambient temperature between 20 C and 30 C and recharge
time of ten times discharge time to 95% capacity.
The Battery are installed in separate cubicles.
7. Input isolation Transformer: Dry type AC input to the rectifier/charger &

bypass, (copper wiring exclusively); transformer's hottest spot winding
temperature not to exceed the temperature limit of the transformer
insulation class of material when operating at full load at maximum
ambient temperature to isolate input neutral.
8. Diesel Generator Interface: The UPS should include an interface to the

diesel generator set. The Gen-set shall include a potential free contact
which closes on opertion, the UPS system should receive this signal
and accomodate its operation as follows;

1243
a. Rectifier reduces its output voltage in an approporiate value to

maintain inverter full load operation without battery recharge,
reducing overall input a/c power consumption from the Gen- set to the
minimum.
b. Setting the inverter to free running frequency of 50 Hz +/- 0.1%
B. Rectifier/Charger
1. General: Incoming AC power converted to a regulated DC output by the

rectifier/charger for supplying DC power to the inverter and battery;
rectifier/charger, a 12 pulse phase-controlled, solid-state SCR type with
constant voltage/constant current control circuitry.
2. Input Current Walk-in: Rectifier/charger to contain a timed walk-in circuit

that causes the unit to gradually assume the load over a 30 second time
interval after input voltage is applied.
3. AC Input Current Limit: Rectifier/charger unit with AC input current

limiting whereby the maximum input current is limited to 125% of the full
input current rating; rectifier/charger to operate at a reduced current limit
mode whenever the critical load is powered from the UPS static bypass
circuit such that the maximum UPS input current will not exceed 125% of
full load input current; the rectifier/charger input current limit to
automatically reduce 24% of full load input current whenever the critical
load is powered from the UPS internal maintenance bypass circuit; an
"on generator" current limit function provided, which when activated by
an external dry contact closure (user supplied), to reduce the input
current limit to 102%.
4. Battery Recharge: In addition to supplying power for the inverter load,

the rectifier/charger to be capable of recharging the battery from
discharge to 90% charge within ten times the discharge time of the
battery.
5. Automatic Restart: Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC

power outage and prior to a UPS automatic end-of-discharge shutdown,
the rectifier/charger to automatically restart, walk-in and gradually
assume the inverter and battery recharge loads.
6. Fuse Failure Protection: Fuse power semi-conductors in the

rectifier/charger with fast-acting fuses, so that loss of any one power
semi-conductor will not cause cascading failures; all fuses with blown
fuse indicator with alarm indication on the control panel.

1243
7. Output Filter: Rectifier/charger unit with an output filter to minimize ripple

current into the battery; ripple current into the battery not to exceed 2%
RMS; filter to insure that the DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet
the input requirements of the inverter; inverter capable to operate from
the rectifier/charger with the battery disconnected.
8. Overvoltage Protection: UPS to automatically shutdown and the load to

be transferred to the static bypass line uninterrupted if the DC voltage
rises to the pre-set limit.
9. Line current THD not to exceed 3% to the mains.
10. Anti-harmonic regulated filter should be added to input to reduce the

harmonic values.
C. Inverter
1. General: Inverter to convert DC power from the rectifier/charger output

or the battery, into regulated AC power for supporting the critical AC
load; inverter, IGBT transistorized technology (Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor, phase-controlled, pulse width modulated (PWM) design
capable of providing the specified AC output.
Inverter should compromise 3 single phase bridges without paralleling of
transistors.
2. Output Power Transformer: Dry type power transformer for the inverter
AC output, (copper wiring exclusively) with hottest spot winding
temperature not to exceed the temperature limit of the transformer
insulation class of material when operating at full load at maximum
ambient temperature.
3. Overload: Capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads

exceeding 100% and up to 150% of full load current with status indicator
and audible alarm to indicate overload operation; UPS to transfer the
load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded.
4. Fault Clearing and Current Limit: Capable of supplying an overload

current of 150% of its full load rating for thirty seconds; for greater
currents or longer time duration, electronic current-limiting protection of
the inverter to prevent damage to components; with self-protecting
against any magnitude of connected output overload; inverter control
logic to sense and disconnect the inverter from the critical AC load
without the requirement to clear protective fuses.

1243
5. Inverter Shutdown: For rapid removal of the inverter from the critical
load, the inverter control electronics to instantaneously turn off the
inverter transistors; simultaneously, the static transfer switch to turn on to
maintain continuous power to the critical load.
6. Inverter DC Protection: Protect by the following disconnect levels,

independently adjustable for UPS application flexible;
- DC Overvoltage Disconnect
- DC Under voltage Warning (Low Battery Reserve)
- DC Under voltage Disconnect (End of Discharge)
7. Over-discharge Protection: To prevent battery damage from over-

discharging, the UPS control logic to automatically raise the shutdown
voltage set point as discharge time increases beyond 15 minutes.
8. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: A manual control to adjust the

output voltage from +5% of the nominal value.
9. Output Frequency: Controlled by an oscillator, temperature compensated

to hold the inverter output frequency to +0.1% for steady state and
transient conditions; drift not to exceed 0.1% during a 24-hour period;
total frequency deviation, including short time fluctuations and drift, not to
exceed 0.1% from the rated frequency.
10. Phase Balance: Electronic controls to regulate each phase so that an

unbalance loading will not cause the output voltage to go outside the
specified voltage unbalance or phase displacement.
11. Fuse Failure Protection: Fuse power semi-conductors in the inverter unit
with fast-acting fuses, so that loss of any one power semi-conductor will
not cause cascading failures; all fuses with a blown fuse indicator with
alarm indication on the control panel.
D. Static Transfer Switch
1. General: A static transfer switch and bypass circuit furnished as an

integral part of the UPS; a naturally commutated high-speed static
(SCR-type) device rated to conduct full load current continuously;
overload rating of 200% rated load for five minutes and 1000% rated load
for one cycles; static transfer switch control logic to contain an automatic
transfer control circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals,
and operating and alarm conditions; control circuits to provide an
uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate bypass source, without

1243
exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when an overload or

malfunction occurs within the UPS, or for bypassing the UPS for
maintenance.
2. Uninterrupted Bypass Transfers:
a. Automatic Transfer: Transfer control logic to automatically turn on

the static transfer switch, transferring the critical AC load to the
bypass source, after the transfer logic senses one of the following
conditions:
- Inverter overload capacity exceeded.
- Critical AC load overvoltage or under voltage.
- Battery protection period expired.
- UPS fault condition.
b. Transfer control logic to inhibit a transfer (manual or automatic) of

the critical load to the bypass source if one of the following
conditions exists:
- Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits.
- Bypass frequency out of limits.
- Bypass out-of-synchronization range with inverter output.
3. Uninterrupted Retransfer: Retransfer of the critical AC load from the

bypass source to the inverter output to be automatically initiated unless
inhibited by manual control; transfer control logic to inhibit a retransfer
(manual or automatic) of the critical load to the inverter if one of the
following conditions exists:
- Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output.
- Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding preset limits.
- Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating.
- UPS fault condition present.
E. Internal Maintenance Bypass Switch
1. Description: A manually operated maintenance bypass switch,

incorporated into the UPS cabinet to directly connect the critical load to

1243
the input AC power source, bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and

static transfer switch.
2. Isolation: Shield all energized terminals to ensure that maintenance

personnel do not inadvertently come in contact with energized parts or
terminals and provide a means to de-energize the static switch when the
UPS is in the maintenance bypass mode of operation.
3. Maintenance Capability: With the critical load powered from the

maintenance bypass circuit, the operation of the rectifier/charger,
inverter, and static transfer switch, and battery operation to be capable of
maintenance and check-up.
F. Monitoring and Control
1. Provide with a microprocessor based unit status display and controls

section designed for convenient and reliable operator interfacing, system
power flow diagram as part of the monitoring and controls section which
depicts a single-line diagram of the UPS and electrically-illuminated
visual indicators (long-life light-emitting diode (LED) type); locate all of
the operator controls and monitors on the front of the Ups cabinet;
display monitoring functions such as metering, status and alarms on an
alpha-numeric digital display.
a. The UPS system must be equipped with LCD display (Man

machine dialogue) to perform the following:
- Full operation and control of the UPS system.
- Full measurements of all parameters of, input supply,

output power & loads voltages, currents and
frequency as well as battery real autonomy time
charging/discharging voltages and currents.
- Full diagnostics of fault including history of last events
with date and time.
- Facility of making adjustments of rectifier output
voltage and inverter output voltages as well as setting
the parameters of the UPS system.
b. Metering: Display the Following Parameters:

1243
- Input AC voltage line-to-line and/or line-to-neutral for each

phase.
- Input AC current for each phase.
- Rectifier output DC current.
- Battery voltage.
- Battery charge/discharge current.
- Output AC voltage line-to-line and/or line-to-neutral for

each phase.
- Output AC current for each phase.
- Percent of rated load being supplied by the UPS.
- Battery time left during battery operation.
- Inverter O/P current.
- Frequency of rectifier input.
- Apparent power of rectifier input.
- Output power factor.
- Frequency of UPS output.
c. Alarms: Display the Following Alarms:
- Input power failure.
- Battery discharging.
- Low battery.
- Overload.
- Overload shutdown.
- Load on bypass.
- Equipment over-temperature.
- Over-temperature shutdown.

1243
- Fan failure.
- DC overvoltage.
- Control power failure.
- Output overvoltage.
- Output undervoltage.
- Fuse cleared.
- Rectifier/charger failure.
- Static transfer switch failure.
Provide an audible alarm and activate by any of the above alarm

conditions.
The following additional alarms to be displayed but not to activate

the audible alarm.
- On maintenance bypass.
- On static bypass line.
- Sync with bypass line.
- Not in sync with bypass line.
- Out of frequency range.
- Rectifier/charger in current limit mode.
- Battery circuit breaker open.
d. Controls: UPS start-up, shutdown and maintenance bypass

operations accomplished by a single rotary control switch; provide
pushbuttons to test and reset visual and audible alarms.
e. Mimic Panel: Provide to depict a single line diagram of the UPS;

Integrate Indicating lights, within the single line diagram to
illustrate the status of the UPS power paths; parameters to be
displayed include, but not limited to, the following:

1243
- Input power available.
- Output power available.
- Normal operation.
- Bypass operation.
The mimic panels for sets shall be installed in the Main security
room as indicated on the drowings.
2. Emergency Load Off Switch to isolate the UPS immediately from the load
to be installed near the UPS.
G. Electrical Specifications
1. AC Input to UPS
a. Voltage Configuration: 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
b. Voltage Range: +10% of nominal.
c. Frequency: Nominal frequency +5%.
d. Power Factor: 0.80 lagging minimum at nominal input voltage and

full rated UPS output load.
e. Inrush Current: 700% of full load current maximum for

transformer magnetization surge.
f. Current Limit: 125% of nominal AC input current maximum.
g. Input Current Walk-in: 30 seconds to full rated input current.
h. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per

criteria listed in ANSI C62.41-1980 at 4000 volt peak.
i. Current Distortion: 3% THD maximum at full load.
2. AC Output, UPS Inverter
a. Voltage Configuration: 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground.
b. Voltage Regulation:

1243
+1%, 3 phase RMS average for a balanced 3 phase load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load,
battery voltage, ambient temperature and load power factor.
+2%, 3 phase RMS average for a 50% unbalanced load for the
combined variation effects of input voltage, connected load,
battery voltage, ambient temperature and load power f.
c. Frequency: Nominal frequency +0.1%.
d. Frequency Slew Rate: 1.0 hertz per second maximum.
e. Phase Displacement: +1 degree for balanced load. +3 % for 50%

unbalanced load.
f. Bypass Line Sync Range: +0.5, +1.0, +2.0 hertz. Switch

selectable.
g. Voltage Distortion: 3% total harmonic distortion (THD) for 100%

Non linear loads and 1% for linear loods.
h. Load Power Factor Range: 0.9 leading to 0.5 lagging.
i. Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.
j. Overload Capability: 125% for 10 minutes (without bypass

source). 150% for 30 seconds (without bypass source).
k. Inverter Output Voltage Adjustment: +5% manual adjustment.
l. Voltage Transient Response:
- + 3%
- 0 - 100%
- Load stop
m. Transient Recovery Time: To within 2% of output voltage within

20 milliseconds.
n. Voltage Unbalance: Balanced load +1%; 20% unbalanced load

+1%; 50% unbalanced load +2%; 100% unbalanced load +5%.
o. Fault Clearing: Sub-cycle current of at least 300%.
H. General Mechanical Requirements

1243
1. Cabinet: Comprised of rectifier/charger, inverter, static transfer switch,

and doors/covers requiring a tool for gaining access, with casters and
leveling feet.
Front access only required for expedient servicing, adjustments and
installation; UPS cabinet structurally adequate with provisions for
hoisting, jacking and forklift handling.
2. Material: All materials and components making up the UPS to be new, of

current manufacture, and have not been in prior service except as
required during factory test.
3. Cooling: (Forced Air). Use redundant low velocity fans to minimize

audible noise output; fans power by the UPS output.
4. Thermal Design: All thermal and ambient sensors, coordinated with the
protective devices for the forced-air cooled power circuit components so
that internal or external fault conditions will be cleared by the protective
devices before excessive component or internal cabinet temperatures
are exceeded.
5. Cable Entry: Power cables to enter or leave from the top or bottom of
the UPS cabinet as required.
6. Serviceability: UPS constructed of replaceable sub-assemblies; printed

circuit assemblies to be plug-in; like sub-assemblies and like components
interchangeable.
7. Finish: UPS cabinet cleaned, primed and painted with the

manufacturer's standard color.
I. Environmental Ratings:
1. Ambient Temperature Range:
o
Operating: UPS: 0C to +40C; Battery: 25 C +5C. Storage: -20C to
70 C.
2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing.
3. Altitude:
Operating: 0 to 2,000 meters. Derated for higher altitudes. Storage: 0

to 12,000 meters.

1243
4. Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of

normal operation not to exceed a sound pressure level of 65 dB
measured 2 meters from the surface of the UPS.
J. Power Warning Signal: An isolated signal, normally closed when utility power
fails and the UPS battery is discharging, provided for user connection to
computer power warning interface.
K. Remote Contact Board: Isolated Form C contacts provided to indicate a

change of status of each of the following conditions:
- UPS on battery alarm.
- Low battery reserve alarm.
- Load on bypass alarm.
- Summary alarm.
L. Remote Status Panel: Provide in a suitable enclosure for wall mounting and
include the following indication:
- Load on UPS (LED).
- Load on bypass (LED).
- Utility power fuilure (LED).
- Low battery reserve (LED).
- UPS alarm condition (LED).
- Audible alarm with reset pushbutton.
- Lamp test/reset pushbutton.
The remote status panels are located in Main security office at reception desk.
M. Batteries: Batteries to be valve regulated lead acid batteries, with cyclic life time
to be not less than 1200 cycle at minumum discharge cell voltage of 1.8 volts.
The batteries to be minimum 5 years design floating life time.
Output power of the batteries to be calculated at minimum VPC of 1.8 volts and
working temperature of 25 deg C.

1243
The UPS should include battery charging temperature compensation feature to

abapt charging characteristice with temperature.
The contractor should provide full batteries specifications, back up time

calculations tables based on discharge current and watts per cell with respect to
time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which UPS is to be installed

and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install complete UPS System, including associated control devices as indicated,

in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of
applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended
function.
B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of UPS System

with other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance

connectors.
D. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to floors. To ensure enclosures are

permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories
for proper mounting.
E. Provide equipment earthing (grounding) connections for UPS System as

required.
A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized,

demonstrate capability and compliance of UPS System with requirements.

1243
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site then retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.
B. Provide site testing by the manufacturer's field service personnel. Site testing to
consist of a complete test of the UPS System under load and the associated
accessories supplied by the manufacturer. Document the test results, sign and
date for future reference.
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in

procedures for starting up, bypassing and operating UPS System. Furnish
three operator's manuals providing installation and operation instructions for
each UPS System.
3.5 EQUIPMENT DATA/SHOP DRAWINGS
a) Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not
limited to the following:
i) Construction and installation details for the U.P.S.
ii) Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of
connections.
iii) Details of connection of cables to U.P.S.
iv) Wiring and schematic diagrams of power, control, relay, metering and
similar circuits. The separate schematic diagrams shall include complete
three line diagrams of all instruments, switches, any other devices in the
U.P.S.
v) Handling, installation and assembly drawings.
b) The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this
section shall include but not limited to the following:
Complete technical data on U.P.S. and other equipment including manufacturer's
catalogues, data on operating characteristics compliance with standards,
dimensions and weights, detailed description ...etc.

1243
SECTION 260800 – TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and

Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.

1243
Section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment and accessories, required for
testing and commissioning of all systems, equipments and services relating to
the electrical works.
A. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards, pertaining to the
testing and commissioning.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit manufacturer's data for testing and commissioning

model No., type, size, range, etc.
B. Testing Sheets: Submit a recommended test and commissioning sheets as per

IEE wiring regulations 16th. Edition.
PART 2 - TESTING
2.1 WORKS TESTS
A. The consultant shall inspect and test at the makers' works, during manufacture
and after completion, all or any particular manufactured material, apparatus or
equipment ordered by the contractor for incorporation in the works, in order to
prove that the material, apparatus or equipment meets the requirements of this
specification. The contractor shall notify the Owner's authorized representative
in advance of all such inspections and tests.
The contractor must arrange on his expenses for works tests to be attended by
the Owner's consultant for all tests specified in different sections of
specifications.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's authorized Representative, at the

time of issue, three copies of each and every order for bought in material,
apparatus and equipment intended for incorporation in the works.
Each such order shall clearly state whether the item(s) which it covers is or are
subject to inspection or test before despatch to site.

1243
C. Upon completion of manufacture, or before despatch in the case of stock items,

all material, apparatus and equipment intended for incorporation in the works
shall be subjected, to the tests specified in the relevant National Standard or
elsewhere in this specification together with such additional tests as may be
required in order to prove compliance with this specification. When no relevant
British Standard exists, or the appropriate National Standard fails to specify
tests, the Contractor shall submit his proposals for the tests he requires to
provide compliance with the specification.
D. The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the provisions
of this specification shall be accurately and comprehensively recorded on a
form of test certificate signed by the person in charge of the testing procedure
and countersigned by the contractor and four copies of every such test
certificate shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
E. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements the date
and time of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the
test(s) carried out, the results obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Owner's authorized
Representative is advised in writing whenever material, apparatus or equipment
is ready for inspection or test at his own or his suppliers' premises. At least
seven days notice shall be given, and due allowance shall be made for this
period of notice in drawing up the program of works.
G. In cases where the manufacturer or supplier of material, apparatus or

equipment relies upon type tests to prove, either wholly or in part, the suitability
of his product(s), then the Contractor shall arrange for triplicate copies of
certificates giving the results of such type tests to be submitted to the Owner's
Authorized Representative at the time the order is placed.
H. No material, apparatus or equipment, from whatever source, shall be

despatched to site until the Owner's Authorized Representative has had the
opportunity to inspect it or has given written authorization for despatch.
I. No inspection or testing by the Owner's Consultant nor the witnessing of

satisfactory tests nor the authorizing of despatch to site shall in any way relieve
the contractor of any of his obligations under this contract, nor shall it in any
way limit the right of the Owner's authorized representative to reject such items
after delivery to site if they subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory
or unsuitable for their intended purpose.

1243
J. When the contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer who, in turn,
has bought-in major components from a secondary supplier, the Owner's
Consultant shall have the right to elect to inspect such components at the works
of the secondary supplier, and the contractor shall ensure, when placing his
orders, that such rights are secured.
For the purposed of this clause, inter-departmental orders within the same
organization shall be treated in the same manner as orders involving separate
organizations.
K. The Owner's Consultant shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the
requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus, and equipment
at the makers' works. The exercise by the Owner's authorized Representative
of this right shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his obligation to carry
out the prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
L. No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for despatch until it has been
inspected by the Owner's Consultant, or inspection has been waived and
despatch has been authorized.
M. When one or more of the Contractor's purchase orders covers the supply of a
number of like components or items of equipment, the Owner's authorized
representative shall have the right to select that one item or component of each
type and rating be subjected to type tests as described in the relevant National
Standard. Other similar items may then be subjected only to routine tests.
2.2 SITE TESTS
A. The Contractor shall carry out all necessary checks and tests to prove that the
completed installations fully comply with specified requirements.
B. Upon completion of the electrical installation, or any substantial section thereof,

the installation, or any substantial section thereof, the installation or that section
and all of the associated electrical equipment shall be subjected to the tests
specified in the relevant National Standards and in the IEE Wiring Regulations,
together with such other tests as may be specified in order to prove compliance
with the Specification.
C. All of the required checks and tests shall be carried out in accordance with a
program to be agreed with the Owner's Authorized Representative, and facilities
shall be made available for the Owner's Authorized Representative to be
present at all such checks and tests if he so desires.

1243
D. Tests not carried out in the presence of the Owners' Authorized Representative
shall not be regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the
Owner's Authorized Representative shall not be regarded as valid for the
purpose of the Contract, unless the Owner's Authorized Representative shall
have authorized the Contractor to proceed with the testing process in his
absence.
E. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements, the date
and time of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the
test (s) carried out, the result obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
F. No material, apparatus, equipment, or installation shall be covered or otherwise

permanently concealed from view instil the Owner's Authorized Representative
has had the opportunity to inspect it, o given written authorization for covering to
proceed.
G. No work shall have a final paint finish until it has been inspected by the Owner's
Authorized Representative or painting has been authorized, unless the final
paint finish is necessary to provide the necessary climate protection.
H. No apparatus, equipment, plant, or installations will be recognized as complete

until all of the specified inspections and tests have been satisfactorily carried
out.
I. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have the right to waive, at his sole
discretion, the requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus
equipment and installations and the witnessing of tests thereon. The exercise
by the Owner's Authorized Representative of this right shall not in any way
relieve the Contractor of his obligations to carry out the prescribed tests and to
submit test certificates.
2.3 CABLE TESTING
A. As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation and jointing of the

cables specified herein, or of any usable group of such cables, the Contractor
shall carry out the tests described below, together with such other tests and
measurements to prove compliance with this Specification and with the
requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
B. An insulation resistance test, carried out with a 'Megger' insulation tester or

other similar type of testing instrument, to measure the insulation resistance
between each conductor and the remaining conductors and between each

1243
conductor and the metallic sheath, if any, and armouring. The test voltage to be
applied shall be as follows:
Low voltage cables - 500 volts
High voltage cables - not less than 1000 volts
C. The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any voltage tests and
the insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in BS 6346, Table, 6,
for all cables up to 3.3kv. The Contractor shall submit insulation resistance
figures for cables above 3.3kv.
D. A voltage withstand test of 15 minutes duration shall be applied in accordance

with the relevant British Standard, at the test voltage indicated in:
BS 5467, Table 7, of for cables with thermosetting insulation.
BS 5346, Table 5, for PVC insulated cables, or
E. The Contractor shall submit proposals on the appropriate test voltage in respect
of other types of cable.
F. An earth continuity test shall be carried out to verify that the cable armouring
and metal sheath, if any, have been properly bonded to earth.
G. Phase-rotation, and phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that the

cables have been correctly connected.
2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD TESTS
A. Low voltage switchboards shall be thoroughly checked for correct functioning in

every respect and shall be subjected to the following tests:
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power
fuses fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test across the following
points:
(i) Phase to phase
(ii) Phase to neutral
(iii) Phase to earth
(iv) Neutral to earth
The voltage levels and test direction shall be in accordance with the relevant
National Standard for the equipment provided.

1243
This shall be followed by an insulation resistance test with an approved type of

500 V test instrument. With all electronic components and time switches
removed or isolated and with all min isolators closed and power fuses fitted, an
insulation resistance of not less than 20 Megohms shall be obtained between
each of the following points:
(i) Phase to phase
(ii) Phase to neutral
(iii) Phase to earth
(iv) Neutral to earth
2.5 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT EARTHING
A. The Contractor shall inspect and carry out tests on all the system and
equipment earthing provisions in accordance with the requirements of the IEE
Wiring Regulations.
B. The method of test and the selection of suitable test instruments shall conform
to the guidelines given in the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16 th. Edition.
C. These tests shall be carried out on all system and equipment earthing supplied,
installed and connected under this Contract.
D. Where an existing installation has been effectively extended in relation to the

system and equipment earthing provisions supplied under this Contract, the
existing system and equipment earthing shall be inspected and tested for
compliance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.
E. The Contractor shall inspect and re-test the system and equipment earthing
provided under this Contract thirty days prior to the end of the Defects Liability
period. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Authorized Representative seven
days notice of his intent to carry out these tests.
PART 3 - COMMISSIONING
A. Following the satisfactory conclusion of inspections and tests on completed sections of

the Works, the Contractor shall duly commission each section of the electrical
installation and leave it in full working order. The term 'Commissioning' shall be
deemed to include:

1243
(i) The energizing of electrical distribution circuits and equipments which have
previously been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of
being energize with complete safety.
(ii) The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in
accordance with the directions of the Owner's Authorized Representative or,
failing such directions, in accordance with sound electrical engineering practice.
(iii) The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment.
(iv) The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the
carrying out, where required, of further tests and the making of all necessary
adjustments so as to obtain optimum performance.
B. Compliance with the requirements of this Section of the Specification shall not, by
itself, in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that all connections and adjustments are made correctly,
and that the installations and equipment are in a completely safe and satisfactory
condition.
D. All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the requirements of this
section of the Specification shall be carried out, or continuously supervised, by a
competent and experienced commissioning engineer.
E. If considered necessary, the Owner's Authorized Representative will set up a

Commissioning Panel to oversee all activities relating to commissioning of
installations, plant and equipment. The Contractor shall provide appropriate
representatives as members of the Panel to act in an advisory capacity assisting the
Owner's Authorized Representative in all matters relating to the commissioning
process.
F. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to appoint and independent
Commissioning Engineer to act on his behalf in the control of all activities relating to
the commissioning process, and in such matters the said Commissioning Engineer
shall be deemed to be and authorized representative of the Owner's Authorized
Representative
G. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching operations
and all work on electrical circuits and equipment which have once been energized are
carried out in a thoroughly safe manner and shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an
approved 'permit-to-work' system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an
'authorized person' as defined in the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations,

1243
and shall communicate the name of such person in writing to the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
H. In appropriate cases the Contractor shall nominate a particular employee as

'Switchgear Operator' and shall ensure that all switchgear operations are carried out
by the nominated person and that such person is always available for this duty when
required.
I. The Contractor shall prepare a commissioning schedule detailing the plant to be

commissioned, the operations to be carried out, the time scale, with exact dates for
specific operations, details of requirements for water and power services, and
attendance or provisions by others. This commissioning schedule, in draft from, shall
be submitted not less than four weeks in advance of the date on which commissioning
is to commence.
J. If required by the Owner's Authorized Representative, the Contractor shall present the
information from the commissioning schedule in the form of a flodiagram or a PERT
('Critical Path') chart.
K. The procedures to be followed by the Contractor for commissioning the electrical

equipment and installations shall be as directed by the Owner's Authorized
Representative or, in the absence of such directions, shall be proposed by the
Contractor and submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative for approval.
L. No connections or adjustments shall be made to plant or equipment which has already

been commissioned and set to work, except with the prior consent of the Owner's
Authorized Representative.
M.No plant or equipment shall be charged, energized or operated without the prior
agreement of the Owner's Authorized Representative. All applicable test certificates
shall have been first submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
N. All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner
and in accordance with the provisions of the Factory Acts, the Health and Safety at
Work etc. Act, and the Electricity Regulations.
O. Following completion of commissioning, each item of equipment or, where several

items of equipment are interdependent, the complete plant shall operate continuously
and satisfactorily under normal operating conditions for a period of 72 hours without
defect of any kind. In the event of any defect or mal-operation becoming apparent
during this period the Contractor shall forthwith determine the cause and rectify it by
means of repair, replacement, adjustment or modification and the reliability run shall
be re-commenced. All materials, equipment and labour required to locate and rectify
any such defect shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.

1243
P. No plant, equipment or installation will be considered as complete until the prescribed

commissioning procedures have been satisfactorily carried out and the reliability run
has been completed without untoward incident.
Q. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to require that the hole of
the plant, equipment and installations, or selected parts thereof, be re-inspected and, if
necessary, re-tested immediately before the end of the contractual maintenance
period, and the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements
with the Owner.

1243
SECTION 27 05 33 - OUTLET BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL

work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
Section.
B. Coordinate work with that of all trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure that steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide outlet boxes in the raceway systems wherever required for pulling wires
and cables, making connections, mounting wiring devices or lighting fixtures, and
for connecting miscellaneous equipment.
B. Certain back boxes for the fire alarm, security systems shall be supplied by the
respective equipment suppliers. Any boxes required for the respective systems
and not furnished by the respective equipment suppliers shall be furnished and
installed. It is this Contractor's responsibility to determine what boxes are and
are not furnished by the respective equipment suppliers.
1.3 GUARANTEES
A. During the experimental period, the system shall be operating under the
contractor’s supervision and responsibility. After the satisfactory completion of this
period, the system shall be taken over by the client, as per contract conditions,
whereby a one-year guarantee period shall commence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 MATERIALS

1243
A. Outlet boxes specified herein refer generally to cast or pressed steel boxes of less
than 125 cubic cm internal volume per gang. Refer to "Junction and Pull Boxes" for
larger box specifications.
B. Outlet boxes were exposed to water or weather shall be approved for this use and
shall be made of cast iron.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install boxes smaller than permitted by the applicable Code. Where no
outlet box size is indicated or specified, install a box of dimensions not less than
100 mm square by 35 mm deep. In dry locations, use pressed galvanized steel
boxes, with drilled and tapped ears, and manufacturer's prepunched knockouts.
In wet locations, for exposed interior locations below 1.2 m above floor, and where
poured into exterior concrete, use cast metal boxes with threaded hubs.
B. Equip pressed steel outlet boxes with tile ring where installed in brick, tile, marble,
and similar material, and in masonry block walls. Equip with plaster rings where
plaster or drywall finish is indicated. Select rings of proper depth to place front of
ring even with the plane of the finish surface. Select style of ring to match device
and finish plates to be installed.
C. Close unused openings in pressed steel boxes with knockout closure and in cast
boxes with threaded plugs.
D. Equip cast metal boxes in wet locations with jacketed covers.
E. Use concrete type boxes wherever boxes are embedded in reinforced
concrete walls. These boxes should be placed prior to pouring wall; breaking
reinforced walls to place boxes after pouring is not permissible. If boxes are to be
added after wall is already in place, they must be surface- mounted.
F. Use multiple gang boxes for grouping devices at one location. Provide barriers
between different systems and between adjacent devices when the voltage
between adjacent exposed live parts exceeds 400 volts to ground (i.e. between
phases).
G. Support ceiling outlet boxes flush with the ceiling plane. Use approved bar hanger
or other approved means to provide adequate support for lighting fixtures or other
products attached to ceiling outlet boxes. Equip boxes with fixture studs where
required by the lighting fixtures to be installed. Support boxes in suspended ceiling
systems from main runner channels, or joists or other structural members. Do not
support from the ceiling suspension system support wires or tile support tees or

1243
similar light weight ceiling components, unless the components are designed and
approved for this purpose.
H. Equip outlet boxes used as junction boxes with blank device plates if
installed flush, and with blank galvanized covers if installed on the surface. Use
raised covers on surface boxes in finished areas. Flat plates may be used on
surface boxes in machine rooms, electrical rooms, and similar unfinished areas.
I. Equip outlet boxes with bushed cover plates where used for telephone
systems or other systems requiring an exposed cable connection from the box.
J. Locate outlet boxes so that they shall be readily accessible. Boxes over suspended
ceiling systems are considered readily accessible if the ceiling tile removal permits
ready access to such boxes.
K. Use PVC coated junction boxes in conjunction with PVC coated rigid steel conduit
and fittings.
L. All outlet boxes shall be installed plumb and level. All outlet boxes in a given
project shall be similarly positioned with respect to surrounding architectural
features, to ensure consistency of final appearance throughout project (i.e. uniform
distance of back boxes from doorframes, uniform position on wall column, uniform
location under window, etc). While Contract Drawings indicate approximate location
of outlet boxes, this attention to consistency shall dictate final box placement.

1243
SECTION 27 10 00 -STRUCTURE CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Section applies to this section:
1. Division "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
2. Division "Grounding and Bonding".
3. Division "Raceways and Boxes".
4. Division "Cable Trunk".
5. Division "Wiring Devices".
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
C. LAN: Local area network.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
F. HCC: Horizontal cross connect.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes passive equipment such as wire, cable, connecting devices,
installation, and testing for wiring systems to be used as signal pathways for voice
and high-speed data transmission suitable for local area networks (LANs). The
backbone shall take care of all other systems requirements.
B. Scope of work consists of the installation of a generic structured wiring system based
upon a star topology to connect all manner of applications covering voice and data
transmission, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Voice and data outlets to support IP telephony, and triple play system, etc.
2. Horizontal cabling.

1243
3. Horizontal Cross Connect (HCC - cable termination and cross connect cabling
hardware) including cabinets with provision space for active equipment located
in services locations, or security control room.
4. Fiber optic backbone cabling.
5. Connection to external fiber optic networks
6. Necessary conduits and raceways, patch cables, jumpers and ancillary
equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each
component specified.
B. Product data submittal shall include the following as minimum:
1. Schedule of equipment proposed, with catalog reference number.
2. Name and address of the manufacturer and country of origin of the product.
3. Compliance statement to the Specification, with necessary supporting
documents.
4. Catalog pages of proposed equipment.
5. Basic system architecture.
6. Name and address of the authorized local representative/dealer.
C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components Show
access and workspace requirements.
1. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as
specified in Part 3, in software and format selected by the Engineer.
2. Detailed system schematic diagram for voice and data.
3. Detailed floor layout showing all outlets with label reference and exact routing of
cabling and wire ways.
4. Detailed equipment layout in rooms and closets including elevations and typical
installation details.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal
equipment certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F. Field Test Reports: Submit testing equipment catalogues for approval by the
Engineer. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

1243
G. As-Built Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

communication systems, in accordance with requirements of the Specification,
Division 1.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. As-Built layouts and schematics.
2. System operation.
3. Maintenance procedure and schedule.
4. System software documentation
5. Power supply schedule.
6. Integration and interfaces with other systems documentations.
I. Record (As-Built) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record (As-Built) Drawings
of all system components and peripherals in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification, Division 1.

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified installer with minimum 5
years. Hands on experience. Submit qualifications for approval at Tender stage.
Include credentials of the Project Coordinator/Manager and Engineers involved in the
Project. Demonstrate that installer has performed at least 2 jobs of similar size.
B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:
1. Telephone installations are to comply with the requirements of Telecom Egypt.
2. ISO/IEC 11801: Generic Cabling for Customer Premises.
3. CENELEC EN 50173: Information Technology – Generic cabling systems.
4. EIA/TIA-568-B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
(ANSI).
5. EIA/TIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces (ANSI).
6. EIA/TIA-TSB 67: Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of
Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems.
7. EIA/TIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications (ANSI).
8. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code.
C. Quality of Service: Contractor shall ensure sufficient spare parts availability for
emergency replacement of any faulty component any time from project
implementation till the end of the defects liability period.

1243
1.6 SCOPE OF WORKS:

Contractor scope of work will be Horizontal cross connection or passive equipment
only (Raceways, conduits with nylon rope, outlets, cables, etc.) as shown and
indicated in drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with the Local Service provider to confirm location of service entrance
arrangement of public telephone exchange lines into the premises including all
passive equipment.
B. Obtain Telecom Egypt requirements and ensure that all installations to be in full
compliance with these requirements.
C. Coordinate Work of this Section with Employer’s:
1. Active equipment, related gateway and external connections.
2. Telephone entry instrument.
3. Triple play equipment suppliers.
D. Meet jointly with representatives of above organizations and the Employer’s
representatives to exchange information and agree on details of equipment
arrangements and installation interface.
E. Comments from Authorities having jurisdiction shall be implemented in the Contract
at no additional cost to the Employer.
F. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
G. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution cabinets, patch panels, and cross
connects in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize
arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch, Triple Play equipment.

A. Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the project
environmental conditions specified without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of operating capability.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.

1243
1. Cable: 1 percent of each size and type used for Project. Furnish on reels.
2. Patch-Panel Units: 10 percent of each type installed, but not less than1.
3. Connecting Blocks: 4 percent of each type installed, but not less than1.
4. Outlet Assemblies: 4 percent of each type installed, but not less than 1.
5. PVC Conduit: 4 percent of each type installed, but not less than 1.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Complete installation shall be certified by the manufacturer for a 25-year warranty.

Any Specific condition to meet the warranty requirement shall be clearly highlighted
to the Engineer within the warranty submission, and prior to equipment approval.
B. Proving period for system shall be three months, before provisional taking over. Any
malfunctioning or system trouble within this period shall be immediately attended by
the contractor and the three months proving period shall restart from date of clearing
the troubles.
1.11 AVAILABILITY OF SPARE PARTS AND FORWARD COMPATIBILITY.
A. The Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer
that the spare parts of the system to be installed shall be made available upon
request for at least 25 years from the date of substantial completion, in line with the
warranty specified under 1.9 above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an
integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future
performance.
B. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 50% spare fibers and
conductor pairs in cables, and space in backbone cable trays and wire ways, and
20% spare positions in cabinets, patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips.

1243
C. Waterproof Equipment: Listed and labeled for duty outdoors or in damp locations.
2.3 MOUNTING ELEMENTS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with Division 26 Section 260536 "Cable Trays".
B. Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Division 26 Section 260533 "Raceways and
Boxes".
2.4 PUNCH-DOWN INSULATION DISPLACEMENT CONNECTORS (IDC)

A. Use: On jacks, jack assemblies, patch panels, terminal blocks, and other components
where the conductors of twisted-pair cables are terminated.
Method: By use of an appropriate tool, physically punch cable conductor down on
terminals that displace the conductor insulation, holds the conductor securely in
electrical contact with the terminal, seals the connection against the external
environment, and protects it against accidental contact.
B. Type: Use one Common type of IDC throughout installation to facilitate future
maintenance.
2.5 IP BOX ( FOR TRIPLE PLAY)

A. IP Box at each office.
B. Jacks: Modular 8-position suitable for RJ45 connectors. Each 4-pair cable shall be
terminated in an 8-position modular jack at the workstation. The 100-Ohm UTP
workstation outlet shall meet the modular interface requirements specified in IEC
60603-7. In addition, the workstation outlet for 100 Ohm UTP cable shall meet the
mechanical and transmission specifications of TIA/EIA-568-B, as well as the terminal
marking and mounting specified in EIA/TIA-570.
C. Pin/pair assignments and connections shall conform to TIA/EIA-568-B
D. Faceplate (cover-plate): Identical to Division 26 Section 262726"Wiring and Lighting
Control Devices".
E. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Legend: Factory label the jacks with "Voice" and "Data" by silk-screening or
engraving.
2.6 HORIZONTAL CABLING

A. Listed as complying with wiring Standard having Category 6 for voice and data in
compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1.
B. Conductors: Solid bare copper.
C. Impedance: 100-ohm +/- 6 percent in the frequency range of 500 MHz for category6

1243
D. The horizontal cabling shall be a star topology. Each work area telecommunication
outlet/connector shall be connected to a horizontal cross-connect. The maximum
horizontal distance between the horizontal cross-connect and the outlet shall be 90
m, independent of the media type.
E. UTP Cable: Comply with Standard. 4 thermoplastic-insulated, individually twisted
pairs of conductors; No. 24 AWG, color-coded; enclosed in PVC jacket; 19.8 dB-
attenuation, 44.3 dB-NEXT, and 20.1 dB-return loss at 100 MHz frequency.
2.7 HORIZONTAL CROSS CONNECT (HCC)

Communication Cabinet: High professional quality, made of metal alloy, corrosion
resistance, dust proof, with tamper proof removable screw covers, cable holder rings,
labeling plates, equipped with relevant connecting strips, and have efficient
capacities to fully wire the complete incoming cable and outgoing ones.
A. Communication cabinets (in case of applicable) shall be in accordance with the

following minimum specification:
1. Floor standing 19-inch rack mountable. Cabinets shall be of standard height
42U, and shall have enough width not less than 800 mm to allow proper cable
management on both sides of the equipment.
2. Welded frame construction.
3. Locking front and rear doors.
4. Adjustable front and back equipment mounting rails drilled and tapped to EIA
standards.
5. 10-position electrical outlet strip.
6. Removable side panels.
7. Top mounted, thermostatically controlled exhaust fan.
8. Smoked acrylic front door.
B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with Standards. IDC type, using modules
designed for punch-down caps or tools.
1. IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs
and jacks where indicated.
2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
C. Cross-Connect Panel: Modular array of IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate
building cables and permit interconnection between cables.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: 1 for each conductor in assigned cables.
D. Patch Panel: 19-inch rack mountable, modular panels housing multiple, numbered
jack units with IDC type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair
groups of installed cables. All Category 6 cable shall be terminated on UL Listed

1243
Category 6 compliant patch panels. The EIA/TIA 568A punch down sequence shall
be used on all Category 6 compliant jacks. Wire Management panels shall be used
as spacing between all patch panels. Vertical and Horizontal Wire Management
panels shall be installed.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: 1 for each horizontal cable.
2. Number of ports: 40 percent of the total number of data outlets.
E. Cable Termination: All cable runs, regardless of media type, shall be able to reach
the designated patch panel plus an additional 5m of slack. Cable within a room shall
be bundled and terminated via standard Category 6 compliant patch panels
F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable: Modular, color-coded, RJ 45 receptacle
units with integral IDC-type terminals. Use keyed jacks for data service.
G. Patch Cords: 4 pair cables terminated with RJ 45 plug at each end, and with sufficient
lengths to achieve the connection between the switches and patch panels housed in
2 different cabinets. Use keyed plugs for data service.
H. Length limitations for cross-connect jumpers and patch cords in the cross-connect
facilities, including horizontal cross-connects, jumpers, and patch cords that connect
horizontal cabling with equipment or backbone cabling, shall not exceed 6 m in
length.
I. Fiber Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered duplex cable
connectors.
1. Permanent Connection: Permanently connect one end of each connector
module to installed Fiber cable.
2. Number of Connectors per Field: 1 for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to
field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion
criteria with at least 25 percent spares.
J. Fiber Patch Cords: Dual fiber cables in 1200 mm lengths.
Terminations: 2 duplex connectors (SC) arranged to mate with patch-panel
connectors, one at each end of each fiber in cord.
2.8 FIBER OPTIC CABLES

A. General
1. The fiber count in each cross-section will vary. For quantities and other design
information, refer to the Project Drawings.
2. All optical fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions
to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this
specification. Factory optical fiber splices are not allowed.

1243
3. All fibers shall have been subjected to a minimum tensile proof test by the fiber
manufacturer equivalent to 100-kpsi.
4. All fibers in each cable shall be guaranteed to meet the stated specifications.
5. Multi-mode Optical Fibers.
a. Fiber Type: Multi-mode; doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass
cladding.
b. Index Profile: Graded Index
c. Transmission Windows: 850-nm and 1300-nm
d. Core Diameter (nom): 62.5-μm (microns) ± 3
e. Cladding Diameter: 125-μm ± 2
f. Core-clad Concentricity: ≤ 3-μm
g. Cladding Non-circularity: ≤ 2.0%
h. Fiber Coating Diameter 250-μm ± 15 (primary coating)
i. All coatings shall be mechanically strippable without damaging the optical

fiber.
j. Attenuation (max. @ 23±5 °C; Backbone)
@ 850-nm 3.75- dB/km
@ 1300-nm 1.5 - dB/km
k. Changes to multi-mode fiber performance at extreme operational

temperatures (-40 to +70 deg. C) shall not exceed 0.2 dB/km at 1300 nm
(per FOTP-3 procedures).
l. Bandwidth (min.)
@ 850-nm 160-MHz*km
@ 1300-nm 500 MHz*km
m. No multi-mode optical fiber shall show a point discontinuity greater than 0.2
dB at the specified wavelengths. Such a discontinuity or any discontinuity
showing a reflection at that point shall be cause for rejection of that fiber by
the Owner.

1243
2.9 FIBER OPTIC SPLICES

A. Mechanical fiber optic splices shall not be used. Fusion splicing shall be used on both
single mode and multi-mode fiber.
B. Insertion Loss: Fusion splice insertion loss shall not exceed .2dB single mode and
.25dB multimode.
C. Mounting: All splices and associated non-cabled fiber shall be securely mounted in
splice enclosures as described in this specification.
2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" and the
following:
1. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers,
machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations.
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cable trays, and
other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards
to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles,
cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished
spaces.
B. Use listed cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
C. Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
category rating of components and that ensure category performance of completed
and linked signal paths, end to end. Limit amount of cable untwisting to those defined
by the Standard.
D. Install cable without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.
E. Do not bend cable in handling or in installing to smaller radii than minimums
F. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions.

1243
1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same
raceway.
2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not
damage conductor or insulation.
3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave
wire/cable grips, which will not damage media or raceway.
G. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.
H. Secure and support cable at intervals not exceeding 750 mm and not more than 150
mm from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
I. Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors.
Train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars to restrain cables,
to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than
minimums recommended by manufacturer.
J. Separation of Wires: Comply with Standard rules and IEE wiring Regulations (BS
7671) for separating unshielded copper communication and data-processing
equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and
equipment.
K. Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-
connect and patch panels.
L. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with media types.
M. Fiber Optic Cable Installation
1. Cable slack shall be provided in each Backbone fiber optic cable. This slack is
exclusive of the length of fiber that is required to accommodate termination
requirements and is intended to provide for cable repair and/or equipment
relocation. The cable slack shall be stored in a fashion as to protect it from
damage and to be secured in the termination enclosure or a separate enclosure
designed for this purpose. Multiple cables may share a common enclosure.
Slack required in the various subsystems is as follows:
2. Backbone Intra-Building: A minimum of 5-meters (approx. 15-feet) of slack
cable (each cable if applicable) shall be coiled and secured at one (1) end -
preferably at the Entrance Room and/or Main Equipment Room. Cable slack
installed other than at each end of cable run shall not be allowed.
3. Exact cable termination locations shall be field verified with Owner.
4. Where exposed, all Backbone Fiber Optic Cable shall be installed in protective
inner duct. This includes areas where the cable is routed in cable tray and
where making a transition between paths (e.g. between conduit & cable tray or

1243
into equipment racks).The inner duct should extend into the termination and/or
storage enclosure(s) at system endpoints.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. A clean earth shall be provided for all IT, MER, BMS and control rooms. Comply with
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B. Ground drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other
impairments.
C. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet. Isolate
from power system and equipment grounding.
D. Signal Ground Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.
Bond to building main ground bar.
E. Signal Ground Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground
terminal in each wiring closet and equipment room.
3.4 INSTALLATION IN EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND WIRING CLOSETS

A. Line walls with plywood backboards, floor to ceiling.
B. Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards,
C. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
D. Use patch panels to terminate cables entering the space, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components complying with applicable requirements in Division 26
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" and the following specifications.
B. System: Use a unique, 3 syllable alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label
cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same
designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility’s architectural
arrangement.
1. First syllable identifies and locates wiring closet or equipment room where cable
originates.
2. Second syllable identifies and locates cross-connect or patch-panel field in
which cable terminates.
3. Third syllable designates type of media (copper or fiber) and position occupied
by cable pairs or fibers in the field.

1243
C. Workstation: Label cables within outlet boxes, and provide labels on the outlet cover
plate as well.
D. Distribution Racks and Frames: Label each unit and field within that unit.
E. Within Connector Fields, in Wiring Closets and Equipment Rooms: Label each
connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.
Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both communication and data-processing
equipment, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
F. Cables, General: Label each cable within 100 mm of each termination and tap, where
it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at
intervals not exceeding 5 m.
H. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment
room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and
destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Provide electronic copy
of final comprehensive schedules for Project, in software and format selected by the
Engineer.

A. Testing: On installation of cable and connectors, demonstrate product capability and
compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance
from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have
been satisfactorily completed.
1. Copper Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each
conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2 bi-directional
Category 5 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations.
2. Fiber-Optic Cable Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection
and Electrical test. Certify compliance with test parameters and manufacturer’s
written recommendations. Test optical performance with optical power meter
capable of generating light at all appropriate wavelengths.
B. Correct malfunctioning units at Project site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
C. Experimental period for all systems shall be 3 months, before provisional taking over.
D. Contractor shall be responsible to replace and make operational all damaged
equipment/accessories, if any, which are part of existing, while connecting to existing
system.
3.7 CLEANING

1243
C. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged
finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s
maintenance personnel to adjust and maintain systems.
1. Train the Employer’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment
and schedules.
2. Train designated personnel in cable-plant management operations, including
changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed
cables, and extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to mentioned Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with the Employer, through the Engineer, with at least 7 days’
advance notice.

1243
SECTION 27 51 16 - PUBLIC ADDRESS AND VOICE ALARM
SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL

Contract and Division Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes equipment for amplifying, distributing, and reproducing

sound signals including the following:
1. Paging microphone.
2. Audio matrix/Switcher.
3. Power amplifiers and central equipment racks.
4. CD player
5. Loudspeakers and distribution network.
6. Volume control
7. Power supply
8. Interface with fire alarm system.
1. Division "Fire Alarm".

2. Division "Building Management System".
3. Division "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Channels: Separate parallel signal paths, from sources to loudspeakers or

loudspeaker zones, with separate amplification and switching that permit
selection between paths for speaker alternative program signals.
B. Zone: A separate group of loudspeakers and associated supply wiring that may
be arranged for selective switching between different channels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of equipment, submit data for approval including
catalogues and literature, sufficiently detailed for engineering purposes, and
with full description of components and operating parameters.

1243
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the
following:
1. Detailed system schematic diagram

2. Layout of paging microphone and audio mixer
3. Amplifier racks and cabinets layouts, dimensions, front, side and rear
views, construction, access panels, dimensions, weight etc.
4. Complete electrical and physical characteristics of amplifiers, switching
panels, loudspeakers, tape recorder, microphones etc.
5. Complete system wiring diagrams, size and type of cables, enclosures,
terminal and splice boxes etc. and routing plans of wiring system.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of equipment certifying that

products furnished comply with specified requirements.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply

with requirements.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply

with requirements.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements. Include record of final speaker-line matching
transformer-tap settings, and signal ground-resistance measurement certified
by Installer.
G. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals specified.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of type of

equipment required for the public address system whose products have been in
C. Standards: System is to be in accordance with IEC 60268, EIA, DIN or other

equal and approved standards.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

1243
2.2 OPERATION, DESIGN AND COMPONENTS
A. Operation: System is to be used for public address or paging. Under normal

conditions, an external audio source may be introduced as desired by the
operator. Pre-recorded messages via the cassette recorder are to be manually
switched in, and are to have automatic priority over the external source. By using
the microphone, operator is to have priority over audio message cassette inputs
within the system. Sound distribution to
Zones are to be controlled by zone selector controls, suitable for background
music and local paging / announcements. Under emergency conditions, &
prerecorded evacuation message will interrupt the back ground music & PA/VA
system will work as Evacuation System through Fire Alarm interface.
B. Design Parameters: System is to be designed for public address and pre-

recorded message distribution, with uniform and acceptable level of speech
intelligibility. Design shown on the Drawings is based on selected
manufacturers' models, which are to be checked for performance before
implementation. Alternative system design is to be submitted to Engineer for
approval, with specification, characteristics, aiming and mounting positions of
loudspeakers and full particulars of calculations and equipment selections.
System design is to be based on the following criteria:
1. Average Sound Pressure Level: 85 dB with respective amplifiers set at 50%

of maximum volume.
2. Intelligibility: Alcon’s : 10 or better.
3. Signal – to – Noise Ratio: 6 to 10 dB (A) – provided that the overall SPL
doesn’t become too high.
4. Total harmonic distortion.
5. Electronic: Less than 1% at specified output level.
6. Acoustic: Less than 3% at specified output level.
7. Sound Pressure Level: 80 to 90 dB A
8. Frequency Response: +/-3 dB over 300 Hz to 10 kHz
9. Uniformity of Coverage: +/- 3 dB (0.5, 1, 2 and 4 kHz)
10. Signal Head Room: 6 dB margin
2.3 PAGING MICROPHONE
A. Paging Microphone: Dynamic cardiod, gooseneck and desktop type, having

1243
double audio in signal chime unit. Microphone is to be fully dust and moisture
protected, designed specifically for speech reproduction and with at least the
following performance:
1. Frequency Response: 60 Hz – 15 kHz (+/- 3 dB)

2. Nominal Impedance: 250 ohm
3. Output Level (1 kHz): - 54 dB (o dB = 1 mw/ µbars)
4. Ambient Temperature Range: 0 to 45°C
2.4 CENTRAL RACKS AND CABINETS
A. Central Racks are to contain audio mixer, tape recorder, power supply module,
monitor unit, power amplifier and output terminal module. Racks are to be 483
mm standard frame racks, with drawable and hinged. Equipment is to be
mounted and designed for 483 mm rack mounting.
B. Cabinets are to be 483 mm frame, totally enclosed, with side and rear panels
removable, and cable entrance at rear, top or bottom. Surface finish is to be
textured and of approved color. Frames are to be anodized aluminum sections.
Each frame is to be provided with ventilation rack, including automatically
operated fan with thermostatic control. Suitable ventilation openings are to be
provided. Enclosure is to be IP 42 to IEC 144 for indoor installation.
C. Storage: Rack cabinets are to have storage drawers for cables and accessories.
D. Mains Wiring: Equipment is to operate from 220 V, 50 Hz mains and is to be

capable of continuous operation under any load conditions with variations of +/-
10% of nominal voltage. Mains wiring inside console are to be totally segregated
from low-level signal wiring.
E. Electric connections, other than those for low-level signals, are to be by push-on
spade clips or multi-connector blocks.
F. Low Level Signal Wiring: Heavily braided, PE insulated, screened cable, PVC
sheathed with standard DIN plug connections. Amplifier output lines are to be
twisted pairs heavily screened with tinned copper braid. Hum-producing earth
return loops are to be avoided.
G. Power Supply: Complete power supply unit is to be provided, independently

fused on the live conductor, with mains front indicator light, on/off switch,
cartridge-type fuse and fuse-holder with blown fuse indicator lamp. Standby
power is to be available from source shown on the Drawings.

1243
H. Monitor unit is to monitor sound signals at loudspeaker level. Unit is to contain

position input-selector switch, volume control with on/off switch and pilot lamp.
Amplifier section is to have isolation transformer, power amplifier with solid-
state integrated circuits, and regulated power supply. Amplifier is to be capable
of operation from 220 VAC, 50 Hz a.c. line. Monitor speaker is to be compact
type, mountable on monitor unit panel, with 10-watt power rating, uniform
frequency response (60 - 15,000 Hz) and is to provide, with 1-watt input, an 80
dB SPL at 1 m.
2.5 AUDIO MATRIX/SWITCHER.
A. Audio Matrix or SWITCHED: multi-source broadcasting, inputs and outputs

based on actual need in drawings plus 20% spare, easy operation. Menu-driven
LCD display on the controller main frame indicates operations carried out by
mains of the function switch on the front panel, and makes set-ups and changes
easy. It has the following features:
1. BOM Pattern: One of the preset BGM patterns can be recalled by using
the function switch on the front panel.
2. Fade-In/Out Capability: The BGM level graphically decreases (fade out)
when paging is begun, and it is gradually restored to the original level
(fade-in) upon completion of the paging announcement.
3. Priority: 9 levels of priority (priority I to8plus one for BGM).
B. Specifications
1. Power: 230 VAC -60 Hz

2. Control Inputs: based on actual need in drawings plus 20% spare
3. Control Outputs: based on actual need in drawings plus 20% spare
4. Interface: PC interface (RS-232C).
5. Audio inputs: based on actual need in drawings plus 20% spare
6. Input level: -60/ -20 / 0 dBV (selectable) electronically balanced
7. Input impedance: 2 kΩ/10 kΩ (selectable) balanced with expansion (1and 2)
8. Audio outputs: based on actual need in drawings plus 20% spare
9. Output level: 0 dBv: 600 Ω
10. Display operation: 320 x 240 dot graphic liquid crystal
function keys, cursor movement keys, and circle entry key.
2.6 POWER AMPLIFIER
A. General: At least one power amplifier is to be provided per zone, for mounting in
standard 483 mm racks,. Amplifiers are to be driven by audio mixer or switcher
such that malfunctions of any single amplifier results only in one zone failure.

1243
B. Input Level: Adjustable with a preset potentiometer on front panel. Illuminated

VU meter is to be mounted on front panel.
C. Output: Fully protected against failure due to mismatch, short circuits, thermal
and electrical overloads, overdrive or eventual transients.
D. Performance: Each power amplifier is to have at least the following

Performance:
1. Output Power: As shown on the Drawings.

2. Effective Frequency Range: 50 Hz to 18000 Hz.
3. Input: 0 dBm line level (0.775 V).
4. Input Impedance: 50 Kilo-Ohm.
5. Output Voltage (load impedance): 100 V (100 ohm), 70 V (50 ohm) and 50
V (25 ohm).
6. Signal/noise Ratio (all controls closed): ≥85 dB (un – weighted).
7. Total Harmonic Distortion at 1000 Hz: Less than 0.5%.
8. Ambient Temperature: 40 deg. C.
9. Power Supply: 220 Volts, 60 Hz.
2.7 COMPACT DISK (CD/DVD) PLAYER
A. Type: rack mounted, high quality, compact disk playback type with 6-disk cartridge
standard, single beam laser assembly and auto playback programme facilities.
CD/DVD player is to have pre-amplifier if necessary with the following
performance:
1. Playback system : compact disk

2. Frequency range : 2 Hz - 20 kHz
3. Signal-to-noise ratio : not less than
97
4. T.H.D. : not greater
than
5. Out-band rejection : not less than
6.
56 Max. audio line out : 2 V (rms)
7. Min. load impedance : 10 kohm
8. Power supply : 220 V, 60 Hz.
2.8 LOUDSPEAKERS
A. Ceiling Loudspeaker: Cone-ceiling loudspeaker, flush mounting type. The

loudspeaker is to have an off white circular metal grille and includes integral
spring – loaded ceiling locking clamps and 100 V, 70 V, 50 V matching
transformer. Loudspeaker shall have the following performance

1243
1. Rated Power: 6 Watts.

2. Sound Pressure Level: 92 dB 1 w/1m.
3. Frequency Response: 1000 Hz to 12000 Hz.
4. Opening Angle (at 1kHz - -6dB): 160 degrees.
2.9 VOLUME CONTROL
A. Volume Control: Flush mounting type leg ended black indicating OFF/ MAX
positions with stops fitted to the switch and auto transformer type for more than
5 watt. 100 watt rated unless the total wattage of the supported zone is more
than this, suitable rating shall provide. Volume control shall be at least five
volume steps plus OFF and MAX.
2.10 PUBLIC ADDRESS & VOICE ALARM SYSTEM CABLING
A. Conduits and Raceways: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceways and

Boxes" of the Specification.
B. Cables for Sound Distribution: Rated for 200 V (maximum) operating voltage,
finely stranded tinned copper, 1.5 mm diameter (minimum), polyethylene insulated,
twisted pair and aluminized polyester shield, stranded tinned drain wire, PVC over-
sheathed.
C. Microphone Cable: PE insulated, finely stranded tinned copper conductor, with

copper braid screen and PVC over-sheaths.
3.1 INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Equipment installation on site is to be limited to the layout and fixation,

and inter-wiring of various items of the ready-made equipment. Acceptance of
works is to be restricted to the equipment and installations complying with the
approved submittal, approved shop drawings, and the agreement of Engineer.
B. Co-ordination with other Works: Undertake the proper co-ordination between

the works and installations of all other associated systems. The layout shop-
drawings is to also reveal the measures taken therein, and every fixation
principle, and is to be subject to the approval of Engineer.

1243
C. Layout of Equipment: The central switching is to be laid out properly in a BMS

room so as to reserve relevant space for maintenance activities as is to as any
future expansion of the system. All other equipment is to be laid out as per the
approved shop drawings. After the proper layout of all equipment is
accomplished, all components are to be labeled, and marked according to an
approved labeling designations and materials.
D. Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and
counters. Conceal cable and raceway except in unfinished spaces.
F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on

numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets;
and equipment enclosures.
G. Match input and output impedance and signal levels at signal interfaces.
Provide matching networks where required.
H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire

and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables to identify media in
coordination with system wiring diagrams.
I. Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap

Settings indicated on Drawings.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to

minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and
other impairments.
3.3 TESTING

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment
installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page
material at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs.
Verify proper routing and volume levels and freedom from noise and distortion.
C. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of complete

system at normal gain settings, using the following procedure:

1243
1. Disconnect a microphone at the connector or jack closest to it and replace

it in the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Replace all
other microphones at corresponding connectors with dummy loads, each
equal in impedance to microphone it replaces. Measure the ratio of signal
to noise.
2. Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.
3. Minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.
D. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power.
Feed signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz
into each preamplifier channel. For each frequency, measure the distortion in
the paging and all-call amplifier outputs. Maximum acceptable distortion at any
frequency is 3 percent total harmonics.
E. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at
500 and4000 Hz. Use a sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure
level at five locations in each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maximum
permissible variation in level is plus or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels
between locations in the same zone and between locations in adjacent zones
must not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB.
F. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each power amplifier at
normal gain setting at 60, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. Maximum variation in power
output at these frequencies must not exceed plus or minus 1 dB.
G. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic address
equipment signal ground. Comply with testing requirements specified in Division
26 Section "Grounding."
H. Re-testing: Correct deficiencies, revising tap settings of speaker-line

matching transformers where necessary to optimize volume and uniformity of
sound levels, and retest. Prepare written record tests.
I. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap
settings of paging speaker-line matching transformers.
J. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide the services of a system engineer to assist the personnel provided by

the employer during the installation and commissioning period.

1243
B. Five (5) sets of instruction manuals shall be provided for the sound system. All
manuals shall be in the English language.
C. Obtain from the manufacturer of the equipment a warranty that all equipment
supplied will be free of defects in labor, materials and workmanship and will
perform satisfactorily in compliance with all pertinent specification for a period of
one (1) year after commissioning.
D. During the warranty period, the services of a factory representative qualified to

advice on the operation and maintenance of the equipment specified shall be
provided by the manufacturer.
3.5 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS
A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps,
and adjusting controls to meet occupancy conditions. Provide up to three on-site
assistance visits within one year of Substantial Completion.

1243
SECTION 28 13 00 - ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

E. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special
F. Turnstile specification (ref. to Arch specifications)

Work includes providing all materials, equipment, hardware, software,
accessories, services, tests and operation and maintenance documentation
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, Access Control & Alarm
Monitoring System in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of IP-
Access control System of types, ratings, and capacities required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
D. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,
DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, and NFPA Standards pertaining to the access
control and alarm monitoring system.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
F. Product Data: Submit Complete, Detailed, and Original Catalogue for the
manufacturer and marked up for all of the proposed equipment.
G. Detailed Bill of material indicating the model number and quantity for all of the
proposed equipment.
H. Riser Diagram: Submit detailed riser diagram to indicate the connection between all
of the system components and the interface with all other system.
I. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background
drawings indicating all of the proposed equipment, part numbers, cables, raceways,
Etc.
J. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with
this specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the
stated function or specification in a manner different from that described and
specified a full description of the deviation shall be provided.

1243

Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective
parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard
warranties for a period of not less than three year from date of initial startup and
consultant acceptance of the system and include labor and travel time for
necessary repairs at the job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.6 GENERAL
K. All equipment and materials used will be standard components, regularly
manufactured and regularly utilized in the manufacturer’s system.
L. All systems and components will have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual
use.
M. All systems and components will be provided with an explicit manufacturer
warranty.
N. Architecture:
10. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall conform to the TCP/IP
networking communications protocol between the application server(s), client
workstations, control panels, and database subsystems, using 10/100Mb
Ethernet connectivity over LAN/WAN network typologies.
11. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall be flexible and scalable in
architecture, permitting expansion of both capacity and functionality, to be
implemented progressively as needed, through software licensing and/or
software upgrades.
12. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide the ability to
perform network deployed software updates. Network deployed updates shall
have the option to be deployed manually or automatically.
13. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide a real-time display
of all system status and data at all operator workstations.
14. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall monitor status and record
activity transactions of all secured areas and alarm input/output points; visually

1243
and audibly annunciate alarms upon change of status, for assessment and
response at all operator workstations.
15. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall monitor and record card
access, alarm, and operator activity to an online history/archive database for
reporting.
16. Each control panel shall be able to continue access control and alarm-
monitoring operations autonomously, in the event of Access Control & Alarm
Monitoring System hosting failure or network segment outage.
17. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall manage and automatically
download in real-time, all database changes made at all operator workstations,
to the control panels that require notification of the specific database changes or
updates.
18. Also access control system will be stand alone in some location (as per noted in
drawings) otherwise it shall be centralized.
19. Access control system shall be integrated with barrier gate and turnstile gate
through one server.
O. System Redundancy & High Availability
3. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide multiple levels of
communications redundancy and failover for all hosted controllers, digital video
recorders, API service connections, and client workstations.
4. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall be capable of
automatically re-routing communications to alternate Access Control & Alarm
Monitoring System computers across the system without operator intervention.
P. Operator Interface:
5. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall use a single Windows
based client application interface for system configuration, administration,
management, and monitoring operations.
6. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide a mouse-driven,
Windows based, graphical user interface.
7. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide on-line context
sensitive help files to facilitate operators in the configuration and operation of the
Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System. Standard Windows help commands
for Contents, Search, Back, and Print shall be supported.
8. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall implement National
Language Support (NLS) in a manner that allows simultaneous multi-lingual
operation, based on individual operator language preference.
Q. Cardholder Management

1243
The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide an operator
interface for enrolment, modification, and deletion of cardholder’s personnel and
access control information. The Access Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall
allow enrolment of cardholder’s personnel and access control information in
advance, without requiring assignment of access control card(s). The Access
Control & Alarm Monitoring System shall provide the ability to select multiple
cardholders and badge records in applying mass changes. The
Cardholder’s personnel and access information shall include the following data:
• First Name.
• Middle Name 1.
• Middle Name 2.
• Last Name.
• Employee Number.
• Personnel Type
• Department (Selectable from a user defined list).
• Facility (Selectable from a user defined list of database partitioned
• Trace Activity (Enable/Disable).
• Telephone.
C. CONTROLLER OPERATION:
4. Distributed Access Control downloads all “local” access control parameters from
the Host PC to the access control panel, so that it may operate in a centralized
basis. This ensures rapid access processing and minimal dependence on a

1243
single point of failure. Support for a door monitor input, locking mechanism
output, secondary alarm bypass output, and a request to exit input is provided
for each door. Optionally, on each door a second reader may be used for door
exiting. When the door is controlled by two readers for entrance and exit, anti-
pass back operation is available. As a distributed intelligence network
controller, the access control panel allows centralized alarm monitoring,
historical data collection, and zoned anti-pass back.
5. First Entry Auto Unlock allows the door to automatically unlock during the day
based upon a time and day profile. However, this feature ensures that the door
is not unlocked until at least one “authorized” person has arrived, following
occupancy time.
D. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
• Memory: 64k EPROM, 128k ram.
• Buffer: 100 messages, nominal.
• Ram battery backup: on-board ni-cad, rechargeable. Maintains ram for 30

days.
• Clock/calendar: crystal controlled, real time.
• Power failure notification: standard, using internal detection logic.
• Controller battery backup – maintenance free, rechargeable.
• Battery capacity: four hours of normal operation.
• Operating temperature: 0°c to 50°c
• Operating humidity: 10% to 90% RH, non-condensing.
2.7 PROXIMITY CARD READERS

1243
C. PROXIMITY READER:
6. Reader will be sealed in a ragged, weatherproof poly-carbonated enclosure,
providing reliable performance and a high degree of vandal resistance.
7. Interface with all existing Wigand protocol access control systems.
8. Output data in Wigand or Clock and Data format, includes a tamper switch to
provide notification of reader tampering.
9. Recognize card formats up to 137 billion unique codes.
10. Optional integrated weatherproof keypad, which provides an additional level of
security by allowing the use of a personal identification number (PIN).
D. PROXIMITY CARDS:
6. The proximity cards will be a PVC credit card size, with a punched slot for a
strap, clip, or for attachment to a key ring.
7. The presence of small metal objects such as keys or coins near the card will not
alter the code read by the reader or prevent the code form being read by the
reader.
8. The individual card will be coded from a population of at least 134 million unique
codes. Cards will be sequentially numbered. The user may specify codes or
numbers. Exact replacements for cards which may be lost, damaged or stolen
will be available upon request. Cards having the same number will also be
available upon request.
9. Cards may be used interchangeably and will be compatible with all readers in
the system, regardless of the reader’s physical size or style, and without
any code matching or memory devices in the reader.
10. The card manufacturer will guarantee the availability of additional quantities of
cards having the same facility code, for a period of at least eight years.
2.8 DOOR LOCK

A. All locking devices are to be of the electric type fully coordinated with the doors
supplier and, to meet the following requirements as outlined below:
• Approved by the authority having jurisdiction, including local fire authorities.
• Where required, will meet with Special Locking Arrangements for Delayed
Egress under NFPA-101 Life Safety Code.

1243
• UL listed.
• Field adaptable for inswing / outswing doors.
• Provide a minimum holding force of 1600 pounds per door.
B. All locking devices utilized on passages providing a main means of egress out of a
protected space are to meet the following requirements as outlined below:
• Approved by the authority having jurisdiction, including local fire authorities.
• Will meet NFPA 101 Life Safety Code requirements.
• UL listed.
• Provided with an adjustable timer from 0-60 seconds.
• Provide a minimum of 1 No. Form “C” relay contact.
• Will receive power from the lock power supply.
• A wall mounted Break-To-Exit (BTE) mechanical rocker switch on the secure

side.
2.9 MAGNETIC DOOR SENSOR

• UL Listed.
• ¾” diameter recessed magnetic contacts with factory installed wire leads,
• Minimum 1 foot long, 22 AWG.

1243
• Self-lock mounting
• Where field conditions prohibit the use of a recessed magnetic contact,

surface mounted contacts will be used.
• Operation: normally open/normally closed (NO/NC) volt free magnetic

contacts.
2.10 EMERGENCY BREAK GLASS OR PUSH PUTTON TO EXIT UNIT

• UL Listed.
• 1 No. spare glass.
• Dual pole, NO/NC volt free contacts.
• Both positive and negative lock feeds to be broken when operated.
2.11 SOFTWARE
The system software will be compiled for faster execution speeds and will offer all
of the following features and capabilities:
Input/output Capabilities: From any local PC workstation or any remotely connected
PC workstation, the system operator will have the capabilities through the
keyboard/mouse to request dynamic displays of current values or status using a
tabular or graphic format. A global database sort utility will allow an expanded
tabular display of only the points on the current graphic display. This expanded
tabular display will list point name, hardware address, dynamic state or value,
alarm status, override status, and test mode status.
G. Obtain a summary of all access control doors with status (under access control,
access control disabled, or access control ignored) and allow issuing commands to
the access control doors to manually force the door to one of the above
states, or provide a momentary release (act as a valid key/card access), or return
to automatic control (remove manual state).
H. Add, delete, or change points within each panel/module or application routine while
on- line.

1243
I. Change point I/O descriptors, status, and alarm descriptors and engineering
unit descriptors while the system is on-line.
J. Add new panel/module to the system while the system is on-line
K. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays
providing dynamic, animated displays. All development, editing and display work
will be capable of being performed with the system fully on-line and in full
communications with the panels/modules.
L. To enhance system response the database will be distributed with up to 24,000 ID
records residing in each door processing unit. Each distributed control unit will
support a combination of up to 64 sub LAN controllers consisting of access control
panels, alarm input units and alarm input output units. Each access control panel
will be capable of providing full access control decision capabilities and monitoring
of assigned input/output alarm points whether on or off-line with host computer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.6 INSPECTION
The Contractor will provide timely written requirements for the areas and conditions
under which the access control system is to be installed. The Contractor will notify
in writing if the conditions are found to be detrimental to proper completion of the
work, prior to installation.
3.7 INSTALLATION
G. The contractor will install the access control system, including associated control
devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves the
intended function.
H. The contractor will coordinate with other works as necessary, to interface the
installation of the access control system work with other disciplines.
I. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
connectors. Where manufacturer’s torqueing requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
Standards 486A and B.
J. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures
are permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories
for proper mounting.
K. Provide equipment earthling connections for the access control system as required.

1243
L. Provide link between Fire alarm detection system, BMS, and Access control, in
case of fire, the related infection area with fire shall open access doors.

Upon completion of installation and after circuitry and equipment have been
energized, the contractor will demonstrate capability and compliance of the access
control system with all specified requirements. Where required, the contractor
will correct malfunctioning units at site, and then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest.

Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in
procedures for starting up, testing and operating the access control system,
intruder detection system and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three paper operator's
manuals and one digital copy, providing installation and operating instructions
for the access control and intruder detection system.
3.10 DOCUMENTATION
In addition to the training manuals, above, the security Contractor is required to
provide two copies, one paper and one electronic, of the handover and
commissioning documentation. This documentation will include, but is not limited
by, the following.
• O & M manuals for all products supplied.
• Trouble shooting guide.
• Log book for service, maintenance and repairs.
• As built specification, schematic and drawings.
• Drawings of any special installations, i.e. not off the shelf.
• Commissioning documentation to include schedules of cables and loop

resistance measurements; schedules of power supplies with on
load current and voltage measurements; and details of all back up

1243
batteries including capacity and voltage.

1243
– SECTION 283100 – FIRE ALARM AND VOICE EVACUATION

SYSTEM
1. PART 1 – GENERAL
work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
B. Coordinate work with that of all trades affecting, or affected by work of this
Section.
C. Cooperate with such trades to assure that steady progress of all work under the
Contract
A. This section covers the specifications of the Fire Alarm and voice evacuation
system required for the project.
B. The fire alarm system shall have the New master Fire Alarm Control Panel
MFACP located at the Public area as shown and indicated on drawings, plus slave
fire alarm control panels as shown and indicated in drawings .
C. The contractor shall have full responsibility to coordinate between all fire alarm
control panels.
D. The provided Fire Alarm System shall be suitable for type of occupancy as

1243
defined by the local building code and as required provided by the local fire
Authority and by the international codes.
E. The Fire Alarm System shall be used to detect early start of fire in any
location in the project and initiate the appropriate annunciation, alarm,
interlocking and counter measures commands as described hereinafter.
F. The Fire Alarm System shall supervise all the functions of the equipment and
devices including the connected safety related systems such as monitoring and
control equipment etc.
G. The fire alarm system shall be intelligent programmable using high

sensitivity addressable microprocessor controlled detectors for smoke, heat and
manual stations, etc.
H. Audible alarms and visual strobe lights shall be used for annunciation as
shown on drawings.
I. The fire alarm system shall be interfaced with Access control system, public
address, , emergency power systems, Firefighting, HVAC work, elevators and all
other related systems.
J. The system shall include all necessary hardware and software for integrated
complete and operable system in accordance with the requirements of this
specification
K. The contractor is requested to provide all the required equipment, component,

etc. which makes the system work as required without any extra cost, the contractor
is responsible For providing even those equipment which are not mentioned in
specifications, BOQ and drawings.
L. The system shall consist of, but not be limited to the following:-
1. Master Fire Alarm indication and Control Panel (MFACP).

1243
2. Slave Fire Alarm indication and Control Panel (SFACP).
3. System PC and event printer.
4. Addressable Smoke detectors.
5. Addressable Heat detectors.
6. Addressable Beam detectors.
7. Addressable Carbon monoxide detectors.
8. Addressable Dual sensor.
9. Addressable Multi sensor.
10. Addressable manual fire alarm stations.
11. Addressable duct photoelectric smoke detector with remote indicator.
12. Fire Speaker.
13. Fire Speaker with strobe light.
14. Control zone addressable modules.
15. Elevator recall control and relays.
16. Fire brigade interconnection.
17. Master paging microphone.

1243
18. Pre-recorded message unit.
19. Fire telephone system.
20. Voice evacuation system.
21. Fire pumps monitoring and alarm (Power failure, phase reversal, pump
running).
22. HVAC interface.
23. Access control interface.
24. Battery and battery/inverter back-up operation.
25. Conduit and wiring.
M. All system components of the Fire Alarm Life Safety system to be U.L. listed
and F.M. Approved by one manufacturer.
N. The contractor also responsible to re-install the old equipment if applicable.
O. After the completion of the installation of the Fire Alarm System, this
Contractor shall perform a complete demonstration test of all systems and devices
to the satisfaction of the Owner and their consulting engineer.
1.3 EXTENT OF WORK
A. The extent of work covers the Fire Alarm System as described by the
specifications and indicated on the Drawings, riser diagrams and Bill of Quantities
of the project.

1243
B. Work shall include but is not limited to all labor, equipment, cable networks,
connection, testing, training, etc. to furnish and install a complete system.
1.4 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Egyptian Fire Code Standards Organization.

B. The International System of Units (SI).
C. ANSI – America National Standards Institute:
ANSI/NEPA 2 E – 1978 Automatic Fire Detectors
ANSI/UL 827 – 1978 Safety Standards for Central Station for Watchman,
Fire Alarm, & Supervisory Services.
ANSI/UL 1481 – 1979 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling System.
ANSI/UI 268 – 1981 Safety Standards for Smoke Detectors for Fire
Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/UL 217 – 1979 Smoke Detectors, Safety Standard for Single & Multiple
Station.
UL 864/UOJZ, APOU Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.
UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 228 Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances.
UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances.
UL 38 Manually Activated Signaling Boxes.

1243
UL 1076 Proprietary Burglary / Grade AA.
UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems.
D. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association.

1. National Fire Code.
2. NFPA 70: The National Electric Code.
3. NFPA 72 E: Automatic Fire Detectors.
4. NFPA 74: Household Fire Warning Equipment.
5. NFPA 72A Local Protective Signaling Systems.
6. NFPA 72B Auxiliary Protective Signaling System.
7. NFPA 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling System.
8. NFPA 72F Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems.
9. NFPA 72H Testing Procedure for Protective Signaling Systems.
10. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
11. Local and State Building Codes.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation indicating type, size,

rating, style, catalog number, Manufacturers names, photographs and/or catalog
data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with Specifications. This
documentation shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and no
equipment shall be ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices,
which are shown on documents (drawings, BOQ ...etc.). Any document
submitted by the contractor during the tender stage shall not be considered as
technical submittal, it shall be used only to approve the manufacturer name.
During technical submittal stage, contractor shall submit all required technical
document for study and approval.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing equipment/device locations

and connecting wiring of entire fire alarm system including riser diagrams.
Shop drawings shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.

1243
2. Include battery-size calculations.
3. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector,

verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity,
temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
4. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air

conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct
smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate
to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote
status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's
written recommendations
B. Material Submittal: shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. Pin to pin connection diagram Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing

all equipment and the size, connection with the outdoor network, type and
number of all equipment
2. Large scale drawing of the Fire Alarm Control Panel
3. Provide calculations to support the size of stand-by batteries for the

emergency power supply
4. Provide calculation of the DC lines to indicate the no. of audible alarms

and visual strobe lights per each circuit
5. Include programming and installation manuals
6. Complete description data including UL/FM listing or any equivalent

standards for all system components
7. Complete sequence of operation sand functions of the system
8. A list of every system address provided for purposes of alarm initiation,

1243
status monitoring, supervised signal signaling auxiliary controls (cause

and action) list
9. Complete system wiring diagrams for components and interfaces to

equipment supplied by others
10. A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local representative

responsible for installation, coordination and service.
11. Compliance sheet item by item providing a comparison between

each item specifies herein and each item submitted.
C. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's technical product data, including

specifications and installations for each type of Fire Alarm System equipment.
Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, operation and
maintenance instructions for inclusion in maintenance manuals.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of
fire alarm equipment installed including furnished specialties and accessories.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual
E. Instruction Manuals: The Contractor shall provide with the assistance of the
equipment manufacturer and its authorized, local representative. In addition,
one approved copy of the fire alarm system submittal, complete operating
instructions; pertinent system orientation documents and system service,
testing, and alarm documentation in the fire control area (Fire Alarm Control
Panel) for the permanent use of the Employer and the Fire Department.
F. Proposed zone list with description of zones (alarm, monitor) as they would
appear on the FACP.
G. Amplifier sizes and point capacity.

1243
The system and all its components shall be according to the listed codes and
standards.
A. Manufacture Qualifications: Manufacturing firms should be regularly engaged

in manufacture of Fire Alarm Systems of type, size and electrical characteristics and
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5
years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a factory

authorized sale and service representative to perform the work of this section.
Installer shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience in projects
with Fire Alarm Systems similar to those required for this project. Installer shall have
factory training experience.
1.7 TRAINING:
A. Equipment's Manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall provide,

in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to selected Employer's
personnel for one week.
1.8 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall guarantee the equipment and workmanship for three (3)
years from damage and deterioration.
A. Handle fire alarm equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking and

scouring. Do not install damaged equipment or components, replace with new.

1243
B. Store the fire alarm equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage as per manufacture
recommendation.
A. During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in writing all his
remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested alterations from
the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or devices which arise
from coordination between the system and other activities.
B. No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving written approval

from the Engineer.
C. All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractor and extra copies
shall be submitted to the involved parties (Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.)
1.11 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
A. The Fire Alarm System supplier shall be responsible to coordinate and

exchange information with Suppliers of other systems and equipment which shall
communicate with, in order to achieve the required specified functions.
B. The coordination includes, but is not limited to methods of communications

(RS 232, protocols, Dry contacts, .etc.).
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS

1243
2.2 BASIC CONFIGURATION
A. All equipment and materials shall be designed to operate and provide maximum
continuous performance at temperature and humidity of the project location.
Provisions shall be inherently provided in the equipment to protect them from
reduced performance or damage at peak climatic and operating conditions.
B. The Fire Alarm (FA) System shall be intelligent addressable computer

controlled and software programmable.
C. The FA System basic architecture shall be based on network configuration

consisting of Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (M-FACP) located at the Main
building and connected with other panel in other building as indicated on
drawings which are interconnected together using supervised data
communication links and a Graphical user interface (GUI) connected to the M-
FACP.
D. The FA System shall be electrically supervised for all the system equipment,
wiring and devices including the connected systems and devices of the other life
safety systems (firefighting, HVAC...etc.) as described in the specifications and
shown on drawings.
E. The FA System shall include Emergency Power Supply Systems for each panel,
which allows it to function normally in case of total supply failure for periods
required by the codes.
2.3 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. The software shall be using the latest certified manufacturer standard software,

1243
compatible with any required third party subsystem software that may be used by the
FA System to provide the necessary function such as reports, database, etc.
B. The operating software shall manage functions and secure data control and
management, and any necessary real time alarm management applications.
C. The software shall include, but is not limited to the following:
1. The software can be configured over the network with the appropriate
authentication procedures. This includes programming, configuration, control
and operation of the FA System functions.
2. Display and presentation functions (status, alarms, etc.) of the FA

system and connected system.
D. The system shall provide standard and configured custom reports on periodic
or event basis.
2.4 THE FIRE ALARM (F.A) SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
A. The major functions of the FA system are to detect fire in its early stage,
give alarm, commands the connected systems and devices to execute
their quirked counter measure actions in cases of fire, supervise the
system equipment, devices and wiring networks for trouble and failure.
B. The system shall control and monitor intelligent addressable automatic

detectors (multi- sensor, heat, etc.), manual stations, sirens, strobe
lights, monitor and control modules, etc. The FA Systems shall perform
but is not limited to the following functions:
1. The system shall individually recognize all connected devices for

alarm and trouble identification.
2. Initiated alarms from individual alarm initiating circuit(s), device(s),

and software defined group of addressable devices reporting the

1243
alarm condition at the M-FACP and other panel ( such as: S-FACP in
other building and gas detection panel).
3. Monitor the detectors for sensitivity settings from the control panels and
log changes in sensitivity due to environmental changes, and indicate
the need for service due to accumulative dirt if approach eighty percent
(80%) of the alarm threshold (pre-alarm condition).
4. Adjust sensitivity setting of detectors automatically with pre-set limits

according to changes in environmental conditions.
5. Report system faults and indicating the location of the faulty device
6. The system shall include event logging and recording facility for saving
and printing all events in real time and capable of events (not less than
5000) for retrieval such as alarms, troubles, supervisory conditions,
etc.
7. The system shall include software self-diagnostic capability, which

scans all the constituents of the system periodically and reports any
malfunction Alarm shall be done using sirens together with strobe
light and voice evacuation speakers.
8. Automatic detector or group of detectors shall give alarm in

accordance with automatic alarm verification procedures according to
NFPA 72. This feature resets the device reporting an alarm
automatically then starts a verification time period and confirmed
Alarm triggered if the source of alarm still exists during the period of
verification.
9. Audible Alarm shall be done using Sirens together with prerecorded

audio evacuation messages which shall be broadcasted through the
public address system while visual alarms shall be done using strobe
lights, integrated units of both Sirens and strobes could be accepted
subject to the engineer approval.
10. The system shall initiate counter measure command signals to the

1243
connected fire safety related systems and devices through remote

control modules and interfaced communication links:
a. HVAC.
b. Fire Fighting System.
c. Public Address System.
d. Elevator System.
e. Access control system.
f. Turnstile control system.
g. All other related systems.
2.5 PERFORMANCE REOUIREMENT
A. The system shall be based on open architecture concept and expandable

control equipment that allow for extension in capacity, number of loops and sub-
panels and accept adding extra circuits and modifying the software to cope
with the required extension.
B. The control equipment of the system shall be based on decentralized

architectural concept and shall support all equipment covering the different parts
of the project.
C. The system shall include intelligent interfacing and signaling circuits for
communication for network operation and control of all the system devices and
equipment (detectors, control module, monitor modules, S-FACP, etc.).

1243
D. The Fire Alarm System shall be fully software driven and shall control all the
logical functions of the system and can be altered in case of required
modifications in the operation of the system which does not alter the basic
functions and performance in accordance with the code.
2.6 CONSTITUENTS OF THE SYSTEM
A. The Fire System shall consist of, but not limited to the following:
1. M-FACP is the system equipment which interconnects together all system

components.
2. S-FACP shall be installed as indicated on drawings and shall include

processing, interfacing and communication circuits required to communicate
with other parts of the system.
3. Event Dot Matrix Printer (EP): The (operating) status and all events taking
place of the fire alarm system shall be printed using EP at real time and as
required. Event logging shall cover the building.
2.7 COUNTER MEASURES
A. The system shall perform the counter measure command actions in cases of
confirmed fire alarm to the systems connected to M-FACP and S-FACP.
B. The Fire Alarm System shall relay the signals to the equipment of other systems
through control modules on digital bases, which work as interface devices
between the FA System and the connected systems and could be either
digital or include relays for two state operations (start-up and similar
functions).

1243
C. The system shall operate the counter measure actions of the system related to
the specific FACP where confirmed fire alarm was detected. These actions
shall be done through remote control modules, which take command from the
FACP on digital bases. The control modules shall work as interface devices
between the system and other systems, which give the necessary direct
commands to each of these systems.
D. Command signals of the fire alarm system shall control the operation of other
systems through their control panels, and return to normal as soon as the
fire conditions are cleared. These actions shall be included in the event
logging of the system.
E. The fire alarm system shall generate the necessary control function to stop
the Air handling units AHU's supply fans, start exhaust fans, control
dampers, pressurization fans of the HVAC system.
1. The signaling line circuit must be connected to a control device to interrupt

the motor control (MCC) by means of (stop-reset) commands.
2. The control device must be assigned a unique digital address on the

signaling line circuit.
3. The alarm system must control over the following:
a. Smoke evacuation fans,
b. Pressurization fans,
c. Fire smoke damper.
d. Mechanical rooms motorized louvers.
F. Also, the alarm initiated by duct-mounted smoke detector (installed by

HVAC subcontractor) must cause shutdown of the associated air handling
unit, the status of the duct smoke detectors shall be monitored by the fire

1243
alarm system, the number of the monitor modules shall be according to the
number of the duct smoke detectors in the HVAC system.
G. Elevator capture/recall must be initiated by control device connected to the

signaling line the system shall give command signals to the access control
system to release the doors in area of alarm to allow personnel to escape
without obstruction. A special message shall be displayed continuously during
the period this signal is active in order to give warning that the security doors
controlled by the access control system are released. Activation of
command signal(s) is initiated if two (2) or more confirmed detections take
place in the area of the door to be opened.
H. Command the Public address system to stop the broadcasted signal (i.e.
background music if found).
I. The fire alarm system shall monitor the flow and tamper switches of the fire
protection Sprinkler system and give alarm when detect flow of water.
J. The flow switch monitor module shall have a delay time to compensate for
water surged without sending an alarm.
K. The monitor module shall monitor the fire pumps (standby - fault - run)
2.8 SOURCES OF ALARM
A. Initiation of alarm shall be direct, as in the case of sensing fire by an automatic

detector, or indirect, as in the cases of operation of a fire protection devices (flow
switch, etc.) or fire protection system where the control panel of this system will
transmit alarm signals as follows:
1. Automatic detector (smoke, heat, linear heat detector, multi-sensor, etc.)
2. Manual fire alarm switches(manual stations)
3. Operation of any of the fire protection systems

1243
4. Sprinkler Fire Fighting System: The FA System shall monitor the water flow
in the main valves of the Sprinkler System in order to initiate alarm whenever
flow of water is detected. Alarm initiated from the Sprinkler System flow
switches shall be of the non-addressable type and shall be monitored by the
FA as passive devices for operation and fault by addressable monitoring
modules. Addressable monitoring modules connected to tamper switches
shall also monitor faults condition.
B. The fire protection pumps shall be supervised by the FA system through their
control panel for run, fail, phase reverse and fuel level for diesel pump conditions
using addressable monitoring modules.
1. The clean agent Fire Fighting Systems shall be supervised by the

Fire Alarm System through their control panels for alarm, trouble and
extinguishing.
2. Duct smoke detectors within the HVAC system (location and number of duct
smoke detectors shall be coordinated with HVAC).
2.9 FIRE ALARM
A. Activation of any fire alarm initiating source(s) shall cause the following
actions and indications:
B. Alarm Verification: The control equipment of the Fire Alarm System shall
make sure that the alarm signal received from the initiating circuit is correct and
shall ignore warning due to faults, drift, dirt, etc.
This shall be secured using software programming accordance with NFPA

101 verification time.
1. Retarded Period: Activation of all actions required in case of fire shall be

delayed for thirty (30) seconds, which is software adjustable, for receiving the
first signal from an alarm-initiating detector.
2. If an alarm signal from a second detector in same zone area or a second

1243
alarm signal from the same detector is received within this period, a
confirmation is assured and the programmed actions shall take place.
3. Reset Period: If no second alarm signal is received or a sustained detection

condition exists within the first thirty (30) seconds, the system shall reset to
normal.
4. Configuration Period: Any alarm signal to be received during the next sixty
(60) seconds (software adjustable), alarm condition is considered confirmed
and appropriate actions shall take place. The confirmation alarm signal could
be initiated from the same detector or another one in the same zone area.
C. Alarm Sounding: The M-FACP and S-FACP shall activate alarm sirens and
visual alarms in the area(s) where confirmed detection of fire took place.
Alarm acknowledgement shall stop the audio and visual alarm and shall be done
only from the M-FACP and S-FACP by authorized personnel.
D. Alarm Announcement in the Main and Sub Control Equipment: Confirmed fire
alarm conditions shall activate display messages on the MFACP and S-FACP,
together with local audio visual alarm signals. Displayed messages shall indicate
addresses and locations of circuits and devices causing the alarm. Alarm
acknowledgement shall also stop the local alarm but shall leave the message in
display continuously as long as the alarm condition exists. This procedure shall
be repeated for any subsequent alarm conditions.
E. Audible Alarm to Public: Audio a la rm shall o p e ra t e in cases the system

detects confirmed fire and shall continuously until the system is silenced manually,
which shall not prevent resounding if the cause of fire still exists.
F. Visual Alarm: Alarms strobe lights shall be located in accordance to the code
requirements and shall be operated together with the audible alarm and continue until
the system is reset and source of alarm does not exist.
G. Voice Evacuation and Alarm Messages: The voice messages shall follow
audio announcement signals. Audio evacuation messages shall have absolute
priority on any ongoing other messages. Voice evacuation messages shall cover

1243
all public areas, corridors and within rooms necessary to achieve audible levels.
H. Interface equipment shall be included in the public address system to

communicate with the FA system for receiving command of announcement, etc.
Supervisory signals shall be sent from the PA to the FA to either confirm healthy
situations for the power amplifiers, the prerecorded message unit or indicate fault
locations.
I. In case of fire, the stop signal generated by fire alarm system shall be sent to
the public address system to mute the broadcasted signals of public address system
and activate the appropriate evacuation alarm messages related to that zone
according to the fire strategy of the building.
J. The stop signal generated by fire alarm system shall have the absolute priority
over all the broadcasted signals by public address system.
K. The system shall be capable to store and broadcast Pre-recorded voice

evacuation messages in three (3) languages (Arabic, English & French) in cases
it necessary to evacuate people from an area or globally from the Building by the PA
system speakers.
2.10 TROUBLE IN THE SYSTEM
A. The following trouble signals in the Alarm System shall activate local audio
visual alarm together with visual display of the nature of the trouble in the M-FACP
and S-FACP
1. Power and battery failure or loss,
2. Open or grounded Cable network, which interconnects devices and system

components,
3. Communication failure,

1243
4. System software and hardware failure,
5. Cable and wiring network, which interconnects the system all together in order
to perform as an Integral System,
6. System devices and peripherals.
2.11 SUPERVISION OF CONNECTED SYSTEMS
A. The FA System shall supervise all the system equipment and devices for
trouble signals, which shall activate local audiovisual alarm together with visual
display of the nature of the trouble in the M-FACP and S-FACP, having trouble in its
supervision area
1. Fire Fighter's Telephone System
2. Automatic Telephone dialer
3. High Sensitivity Smoke Detector
4. Linear heat detector
5. Manual stations
6. Monitor modules
7. Addressable strobe lights
8. Addressable Alarm siren
9. Door Holder
10. Control modules

1243
11. Fault isolators
12. Cable network
13. Gas detection panel (GDP).
14. System PC and event printer.
15. Addressable Smoke detectors.
16. Addressable Heat detectors.
17. Addressable Beam detectors.
18. Addressable Carbon monoxide detectors.
19. Addressable Dual sensor.
20. Addressable Multi sensor.
21. Addressable manual fire alarm stations.
22. Addressable duct photoelectric smoke detector with remote indicator.
23. Fire Speaker.
24. Fire Speaker with strobe light.
25. Control zone addressable modules.
26. Elevator recall control and relays.

1243
2.12 CAUSE & EFFECT MATRIX
A. The contractor shall provide a detailed cause and effect matrix as a shop
drawing which shall reflect all details about the fire alarm conditions,
supervision conditions and trouble conditions for all fire alarm system
components and all related systems and equipment (HVAC, Public Address,
Elevators,…etc.).
B. Cause & Effect Matrix shall include the following:
1. Composite Drawings indicating the Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation

System and the HVAC & Smoke Control System.
2. Detailed table for the HVAC & Smoke Control Equipment

complete with the relevant Control / Monitor Modules.
3. Table for all other Control / Monitor Modules for Public Address,
Elevators, Generators, Fire Pump, etc.
2.13 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (M-FACP)
A. The M-FACP Panel shall include the necessary hardware and software
required to function as specified and according to the code requirements.
B. It will run the system software to monitor, supervise and control all devices
within its field of coverage.
C. M-FACP exchange data and commands with other Panels such as (Gas and slave
panel).
D. The M-FACP which interconnects all system equipment and devices in network
configuration and shall include processing, interfacing and communication
circuits required to communicate with other parts of the system.

1243
E. The M-FACP can operate independently if communication seizes with the S-

FACP.
F. The FACP includes, but is not limited to:
4. Central processing unit (CPU) and related parts
5. Display and control unit
6. Communication interfaces with the system.
7. Emergency power supply (P.S)
8. Automatic day and night sensitivity
9. Automatic drift compensation
10. Dirt detector reporting
11. Ground fault detection
12. Internal self-diagnosis
13. Minimum of 5000 history events
14. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: arranged for interface

between human operator at the FACP and addressable system
components, including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm,
supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.

1243
15. Display: Liquid-crystal type, 40 characters minimum
16. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming,

display, and control commands
2.14 SUB/SLAVE- FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. SUB/SLAVE-FA Control Panel which located at another building.
B. The Slave-panel shall operate in a network configuration with the M-FACP

and can operate independently if communication seizes between them.
C. Other exchange data and commands with the M-FACP. The S-FACP Panel
shall include the necessary hardware and software required to function as
specified and according to the code requirements.
D. The constituents of the Slave FA Control Panel (S-FACP) are as follows, but
are not limited to:
1. Central processing unit (CPU) as in the M-FACP
2. Communication interfaces
3. Display and control unit
4. Emergency power supply (PS) C/W batteries
5. Software Operating System including all necessary modules

(communications...etc.)
6. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: arranged for interface

between human operator at the FACP and addressable system
components, including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm,
supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and

1243
control menu.
7. Display: Liquid-crystal type, 40 characters minimum
8. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming,

display, and control commands

1243
2.15 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. The system shall be equipped with an Emergency Power Supply System

capable of supplying the necessary power to run the fire alarm system for 24 hours
on stand-by mode and for 30 minutes in case of alarm state. The Emergency power
supply shall include battery of sufficient capacity; battery charger and non-break
change over circuitry.
B. Battery Calculation Sheet must be submitted.
C. All power supplies shall be installed in conformity with the requirements of

NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, for such equipment and with the requirements
indicated in this subsection.
D. The Power Supply shall operate on 230V AC, 50 Hz, and shall provide all
necessary power for the control panel.
E. The function of the Control Module is to provide command signal to the non-
addressable connected devices and systems.
F. Control Module Commands shall be from Fire Alarm System through addressable
supervised communication. Interfacing circuits shall be included which generate the
required actions command signals in to the control program of the system.
G. Command signal shall be transformed to passive (i.e. open/close) contacts of

sufficient capacity and shall be electrically isolated from the system.
2.16 MONITOR MODULE (MM)
A. The MM devices are intended for receiving data from non-addressable

systems and/or devices. They shall be installed in remote locations of
devices to be supervised by the FA System on digital bases.

1243
B. Two (2) state alarm or supervisory signals shall be transformed by the MMs to
addressable digital form to be processed by the system.
C. MM's shall monitor the status of C02 & FM200 panel (status, fault and alarm),
Flow and tamper switches of the sprinkler system.
2.17 CONTROL MODULE (CM)
A. The CM devices are intended for controlling the other systems and/or devices.
They shall be installed in remote locations of devices to be supervised by the FA
System on digital bases.
B. Two (2) state alarm or supervisory signals shall be transformed by the CMs to
addressable digital form to be processed by the system.
C. CM's shall control of other systems (such as: access, HVAC, FF …etc.) as
shown and as indicated in drawings.
2.18 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL FIRE ALARM STATIONS
A. They shall be double action, manual stations with normally open, single
pole alarm contacts. Each station plate shall include operating instructions in
English and Arabic.
B. Manual fire alarm station shall be constructed of flame retardant plastic with
clearly visible operating instructions provided on the glass. The word FIRE
shall appear on the front of the station.
C. Manual fire alarm station shall be located throughout the protected area so that
they are conspicuous, unobstructed, and accessible.
D. The addressable manual station shall contain an addressable circuitry to

respond to signals from the M-FACP and S-FACP and shall report alarm or
trouble status changes.

1243
E. The station shall be furnished for semi-flush mounting or surface

mounting with matching back box, where shown on Drawings.
F. The operable part of each manual fire alarm station shall be installed in
accordance with NFPA72 requirements.
G. The outdoor manual stations shall be the same as indoor but with weather proof
housing with minimum IP55.
2.19 AUTOMATIC DETECTORS (MULTI, SMOKE, HEAT...ETC)
A. All detectors shall have built-in microprocessor and to have capability to store
predefined algorithms to be remotely controlled and selected. Each detector
shall have the following facilities:
1. Automatic day and night sensitivity
2. Automatic drift compensation
3. Dirt detector reporting
4. Ground fault detection
5. Internal self-diagnosis
6. Data line powered (No separate power line required)
B. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel
through the same supervised signaling detection loop.
C. To minimize nuisance alarms, voltage, EM and RF transient suppression

techniques shall be employed as well as an insect screen. All detector designs

1243
shall provide full solid- state construction and compatibility with other normally
open fire alarm detection loop devices, (heat, smoke, pull stations, etc.). The
detectors shall include automatic compensation of environmental conditions
and self-test capability.
D. Each detector base or head shall have two flashing status indicating LED
for visual supervision. When the detector is actuated, the flashing LED will
latch on steady and at full brilliance until it is reset by actuating, from the control
panel, the reset switch.
E. Detectors shall be connected with two wires.
F. Detectors shall be plug-in lockable with separate base, including all addressable
circuitry, connected with two (2) wires to the panels and shall be self-
adaptive to the system having the possibility of address setting from the
system.
G. Intelligent Addressable Microprocessor-based Multi-Sensor:
1. The Microprocessor-based Multi-Sensor shall use light scattering

photoelectric smoke sensor technology and fixed temperature heat
sensor.
2. The Multi-sensor shall employ algorithms to monitor parameters from both

sensors simultaneously and initiate an alarm based on that data.
3. The detector shall monitor continually any changes in sensitivity

due to the environmental effects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging
and humidity.
H. The detectors shall be sensitive to visible and invisible products of

combustion.
Mounting: surface or semi-recessed ceiling mounted type, or wall mounted
located as shown on the Drawings, and comprising mounting base and twist-
lock detector head. Removal of detector head is to interrupt supervisory circuit
and cause trouble signal at control panel. Normal flat surface coverage is to be
over 100 m2 at mounting height of 6

1243
m. Submit detector’s characteristic curves of coverage area against ceiling

height and air movement speed.
I. Sensitivity: detector is to have constant response sensitivity under all

conditions due to adaptive alarm threshold. The automatic sensitivity
adjustment is to compensate for soiling and climatic influences.
J. Regulation, Protection and Suppression: detector is to have automatic regulation
to varying supply voltage (18 V – 32 V d.c.), reverse voltage protection, spike
and surge suppression
K. Status Indication: detector is to have dual status indicating LED’s, flashing under
normal operation for 360 degree visual supervision. When detector is
actuated, LED is to latch- on `steady` and at full brilliance until reset from
control panel.
L. Performance: detector is to have at least the following
performance: Nominal operating voltage: 24 V d.c.
Alarm current : not greater than 5
mA Quiescent current : not greater than 0.2
mA Ambient temperature : 0 to 50 deg. C
Relative humidity : 10% to 90%
Ion sensor : Uni-polar – 0.135 C Americium 24
Photo sensor : Light scattering principle
Heat sensor : Alarm at 35OC above

ambient Protection category IEC529: IP – 43
Smoke entry characteristics: 360 degrees in all directions.
M. Intelligent Addressable Fixed Heat Fire Detectors

1. The detectors shall be classified as to the temperature of operation and
marked with a color code in accordance with NFPA72 requirements.

1243
2. The required detector shall be fixed temperature heat detector. The

detector shall be static with threshold at 57°C ± 5° C.
N. Intelligent Addressable carbon monoxide Gas Detectors

1. The detectors shall be classified as to the carbon gas of operation and
marked with a color code in accordance with NFPA72 requirements.
2. The required detector shall be carbon monoxide detector.
2.20 ADDRESSABLE ALARM SIREN WITH STROBE LIGHTS:
A. The sirens with strobe light shall be addressable and shall use the same
addressable detectors base which supplied in the project.
B. The siren shall be multi-tone, electronic with sound pressure level up to

100&120 dBA. The siren shall be wall mounted.
C. It shall be 15/75 candela Xenon strobe light. The sire with strobe light and lens
shall be mounted on a single-gang, red, metal plate with the word "Fire"
vertically imprinted in red, on the front and both sides of a rectangular, opaque
white lens. The alarm strobe light shall be furnished for flush or surface mounting
with matching back box.
D. The outdoor Alarm Siren with Strobe light shall be the same as indoor but with
weather proof housing with minimum IP-65.
2.21 SPEAKER AND STROBES AUDIO / VISIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE WITH

SPEAKER AND HIGH INTENSITY XENON STROBE.
Audible notification appliance (speaker):-
A. High quality voice and tone reproduction with taps for ¼, ½, 2 W or 4W at 70

VRMS.

1243
B. Capacitor input for connection to supervised notification appliance circuits.
C. UL listed and FM approved to Standard 1480.
D. Speakers are wired separately from addressable module.
E. In public areas the total sound pressure level produced by combining the
ambient sound pressure level with all audible notification appliances operating
must not exceed 120dBA and above ambient noise by 5dBA anywhere in the
occupied areas.
2.22 VISIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE (STROBE):
A. Xenon strobe with the following candela output:-
30 cd: For maximum room size 8.5 × 8.5 mt.
110 cd: For maximum room size 16.5 × 16.5 mt. and ballrooms, garage,
kitchens177 cd: For maximum room size 20.7 × 20.7 mt. and Guest rooms,
suites
B. UL listed and FM approved to standard 1971.
C. Supervision of each individual strobe’s wiring and connections with

activation at a synchronized 1 Hz flash rate.
D. Strobes must have a flash rate of 60 to 120 flashes in a minute per NFPA 72.
2.23 POWER AMPLIFIERS:

1243
A. One amplifier of at least 480 watt RMS rating is to be supplied per speaker zone.
Maximum initial loading 75% of output rating of amplifier.
B. Technical Performance
1. Power rating: 480W RMS continues duty measured with sine wave signal.
2. Frequency response: 3 dB 50 Hz to 18 kHz fully loaded.
3. No load to full load differentiation less than 3 dB.
4. Noise 85 dBA below rated output.
5. Distortion less than 0.3%.
6. Quiescent power consumption 42 ma.
7. Full load power consumption 6.0 mp.
8. Output voltage to be 25 volt constant voltage distribution configuration.
2.24 FAULT ISOLATION MODULE
A. Addressable fault isolation module shall be used in signal circuits to indicate

and isolate wiring faults.
B. Fault isolation modules shall be installed in order to help FACP to allocate

break in communication wiring.
C. Fault isolation shall be provided at riser and loop circuits at locations not
exceeding the maximum number of devices in between according to
Manufacture's requirements; the minimum number of isolators allowed is one

1243
(1) for every fifteen/twenty (15-20) device in the loop.
2.25 AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE DIALER (ATD)
A. Automatic Telephone Dialer ATD with at least 3 lines shall provide the
system with automatic ability to dial a remote firefighting location and deliver pre-
recorded emergency message through a dedicated line. Message length shall be
of (50) second at least. Telephone dialer shall provide message test speaker and a
message test switch. The dialer shall be provided with battery backup operation and
programming facility.
2.26 ADDRESSABLE LINEAR HEAT DETECTOR:
A. Linear heat detector is a fixed temperature digital sensor and is capable of initiating an
alarm once its rated activation temperature is reached. At the rated
temperature, the heat sensitive polymer insulation yields to the pressure
between conductors, permitting them to move into contact with each other,
thereby initiating an alarm signal. It is not required that a specific length be
heated in order to initiate an alarm, nor is system calibration necessary to
compensate for changes in the installed ambient temperature. Linear Heat
Detector provides the advantages of line coverage with point sensitivity.
B. The Detector must be installed in continuous runs without taps or branches in

accordance with locations and spacing prescribed by the approving authorities;
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code or as
determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. Except for zoning
requirements (alarm source indication) the length of each run is limited, and
controlled by the electrical characteristics of the control equipment to which the
Detector is connected.
C. Approvals/Maximum Listed Spacing for Linear Heat Detector is UL 7.6 m and FM also
7.6 m. The distance between detector runs shall not exceed the listed spacing.
Reduced spacing may be required based upon factors such as ceiling height
and construction, physical obstructions, air movement, or the authority having
jurisdiction.
D. The Linear Heat Detection Cable shall be a fixed temperature sensing element
comprised of two electrical current carrying wires separated by a heat sensitive
insulation material.
E. The detection cable shall detect the specified temperature anywhere along the
detector length, regardless of the source of the heat. Averaging, analog-

1243
integrating, or thermistor-type detection cables, and rate compensated, or rate-

of-rise detection devices, are not acceptable.
F. The detection cable shall be constructed by spiral wrapping the two conductors with a
protective layer tape and then wrapping them in protective outer coverings of
cotton braid, PVC, or weather resistant Nylon as required for the intended
environment. The detection cable shall be capable of withstanding severe
seasonal temperature variations and structural vibrations.
G. The temperature rating of the detection cable shall be clearly printed on the cable
jacket.
H. The detection cable temperature ranges shall be selected for the expected maximum
ambient temperature and the alarm activation temperature suitable for the
application in accordance with the Manufacturer's guidelines.
2.27 TEST CHART INSTRUCTIONS
A. Fire Alarm System test instructions chart shall be in two languages (Arabic and
English) mounted in an enclosed frame assembly on control cabinet hinged door
and on Manual stations.
2.28 WIRING
A. The installation of all wiring, cable, and equipment shall be in accordance with
NFPA 70.
B. All equipment, devices, and appliances and wiring connections shall be

monitored for the integrity of the interconnecting conductors or equivalent path so
that the occurrence of a single open or a single ground-fault condition in the
installation conductors or other signaling channels and their restoration to normal
shall be automatically indicated.
C. An open, ground, or short-circuit fault on the installation conductors of one alarm

notification appliance circuit shall not affect the operation of any other alarm
notification circuit.
D. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class A

1243
circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing
these conductors.
E. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing
agency for use with a Protective Signaling System.
F. All Embedded conduits shall be UPVC and all surface conduits including
over false ceiling shall be Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel (EMT) type. EMT conduits
shall be used for floor interconnection rises.
G. All fire alarm cables shall be fire resistant Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH).
A. The wiring which interconnects all addressable devices (detectors, etc.) with
control equipment shall be twisted and shielded according to the Manufacturers
requirements, 1.5mm2 minimum copper single core PVC insulated cables
constituting supervised Class A circuits of the appropriate style to meet the alarm
and trouble requirements in extreme fault condition.
B. Fire alarm wiring shall be UL approved, or equivalent, and shall be in full

compliance with the Codes and the requirements of the fire alarm equipment
Manufacturer.
C. The wiring of high current devices such as Sirens shall be with cross
section area according to Manufacturer requirements and shall not be less than
1.5mm2 and shall not cause more than five percent (5%) voltage drop.
D. All wiring shall be color coded and cabled. Junction boxes shall be red
colored and include wiring identification numbering.
E. Wires and cables shall provide sufficient resistance to the spread of fire
(according to NFPA) and generate no hazardous smoke to human life. Wiring
System shall include all indoor and outdoor wires and cables necessary for
complete Fire Alarm System. Including control and supervisory circuits,
interconnecting with other related system. (HVAC, etc.). Outgoing and returning
conductors are separately routed in each loop circuit.

1243
2.29 SPARE PARTS
C. The Contractor shall supply the following spare parts:
1. 10% of the all sensors.
2. No of (2) FACP power supply.
3. 3% of each type of the speakers, Horn and strobe speakers.
4. 3% of each type of the Monitor, control and isolation modules.
5. Each panel shall have additional spare loop card
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.11 EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which Fire Alarm System shall be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
3.12 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
H. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other Works of the Contract
shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trades.

1243
I. The equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to its

8. Supervise the installation of the complete fire alarm system

J. Install Fire Alarm System as indicated, in accordance with equipment

Manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable portions
of local standards of installation.
K. Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Color code

wiring and install per Manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram Provide extra
wiring or extra power supplies required to fulfill any requirement for extra power
such as in case of strobe lights. In addition, provide extra or larger size wiring
to alleviate voltage drops, which make device, operate beyond voltage limits for
which it was designed. Determine above with Manufacturer's representative
while equipment is being installed.
L. Connection and Supervision: Make connections to panel under

Manufacturer's supervision. Run wiring to main terminal cabinet located
adjacent to main fire alarm panel. Complete connections from this cabinet to
panel utilizing Manufacturer's technicians.
M. System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation
only, pre- approved by authority having local jurisdiction.

1243
N. Prior to final acceptance of system, Manufacturer of system shall, in

O. Submit copy of test results in duplicate after signed by Employer's

representative to the Engineer, Employer's insurance company and local fire
protection authority. Mount copy of inspection record in enclosed frame
assembly on control panel.
P. Before proceeding with any testing, all persons and facilities receiving alarm,
supervisory, or trouble signals and all building occupants shall be notified of the
testing to prevent unnecessary response.
Q. Tests of all circuits extending from the FACP shall be made at intervals of not
more than 24 hours.
C. Check for all other systems that must be coordinated and interfaced with fire
the alarm system:
1. Control panels of the air handling units of the HVAC System.
2. Electrical panels to shut down electricity in case of fire.
D. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the

following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1
m) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection
when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.
1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke

management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel.

1243
2. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
3. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.
4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas

and fuel supplies.
5. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
6. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe

sprinkler system.
7. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
8. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-

phase or phase-reversal condition.
9. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
3.15 TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct training classes for the Employer personnel on the
installation, maintenance, programming, and operation of the equipment. The
training shall be on site for five (5) persons for duration of 10 days.
3.16 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING (FAT):
Factory acceptance testing for this system are not requires the presence of the
Employer staff/Engineer at the factory; therefore we need Factory test certificate
only.

1243
________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 32 80 00 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 40 - GENERAL

this Section.
40.2 SUMMARY
1. Piping tubes, and fittings
2. Encasement for piping.
3. Manual valves.
4. Pressure-reducing valves.
5. Automatic control valves.
6. Automatic drain valves.
7. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
8. Sub surface
9. Quick couplers.
10. Drip irrigation specialties.
11. Controllers.
12. Valve Boxes.
B. COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS
Standards and local regulations shall be applicable for fabrication,

installation and testing of systems included in this contract:
If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipment other than

specified and conforming to different standards, then a written
approval from the supervision engineer will be necessary.
40.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Include one automatic controlled irrigation system to irrigate all the plant
areas including trees, palms, shrubs and groundcover and grass located on
ground floor.

________________________________________________________________________________
B. All piping, including mains, laterals, fittings, sleeves, connections, tees,

risers, clamps, and swing joints.
C. Piping: Downstream from control valves to bubblers and sprinklers,

specialties piping is under pressure during flow.
D. Drain Piping: Downstream from planters drain. Piping is not under

pressure.
E. Main Piping: Downstream from point of irrigation tank to water distribution

piping including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system
pressure.
F. The controller will be classified to 12 station based on solenoid valves

distributions as shown in drawings and BOQ.
G. All Irrigation controllers shall be interfaced with triple play system though
communication interface by centralized server.
H. All irrigation network shall include isolated cables inside dedicated conduits
at the same path of Water excavation routing.
I. The programmed software shall be unlimited license sufficient to additional

controller (+ 15%).
A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and

automatic control valves.
B. Delegated Design: Design 100 percent coverage irrigation system, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1. Available land records indicate the following soil conditions:
a. Type: Coarse.
b. Texture:
1) Sand as supervisor engineer instruments.
2) Silt as supervisor engineer instruments.
3) Clay as supervisor engineer instruments.
c. Particle Size:

________________________________________________________________________________
1) Sand: as supervisor engineer instruments.
2) Silt: as supervisor engineer instruments.
3) Clay: as supervisor engineer instruments.
4) Structure: Single grained
d. Density: as supervision engineer instruments.

e. Moisture Content: as supervision engineer instruments.
f. Infiltration Rate: as supervision engineer instruments.
C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure

requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated:
1. Irrigation Main Piping: 3.5 bar.

2. Lateral Piping: 3 bar.
40.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories.
B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For irrigation systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
D. Coordination Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which

components are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
Installers of the items involved. Also include adjustments necessary to avoid
plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve.
G. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic

controller zone.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For controllers and automatic control

valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

________________________________________________________________________________
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers that include a certified

irrigation designer qualified by The Irrigation Association.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent
entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent

sagging and bending.
PART 41 - PRODUCTS
41.1 CONTROLLER ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

• Drin Bird
• Motorola
• Or approved equal
41.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe,

tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services,
service locations, and pipe sizes.
B. PE Pipe with Controlled ID: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound; SIDR 11.5.
1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, nylon or propylene plastic

with barbed ends. Include bands or other fasteners.
C. PE Pipe with Controlled OD: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound, SDR 11.
1. PE Butt, Heat-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261.

2. PE Socket-Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683.
D. PE Pressure Pipe: AWWA C906, with DR of 7.3, 9, or 9.3 and PE

compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 1100 kPa.
________________________________________________________________________________
1. PE Butt, Heat-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261.

2. PE Socket-Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683.
E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedules 40 and 80.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedules 40 and 80.

2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80.
3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both
headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends.
F. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80.

2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both
headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends.
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick
unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus

alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable

flux according to ASTM B 813.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer
according to ASTM F 656.
F. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material

recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
41.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B. Form: Sheet.
C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.20-mm minimum thickness.
D. Color: Black.

________________________________________________________________________________
41.5 MANUAL VALVES
A. Curb Valves:

products by one of the following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one
of Mentioned in approved vendor list.
3. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C800.

b. DN 25 and Smaller Pressure Rating: 690 kPa minimum
c. DN 32 to DN 50 Pressure Rating: 550 kPa minimum
d. Body Material: Brass or bronze with ball or ground-key plug.
e. End Connections: Matching piping.
f. Stem: With wide-tee head.
B. Curb-Valve Casing:
1. Standard: Similar to AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings.

2. Top Section: Telescoping, of length required for depth of burial of curb
valve.
3. Barrel: Approximately 75-mm diameter.
4. Plug: With lettering "WATER."
5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve.
6. Base Support: Concrete collar.
C. Shutoff Rods for Curb-Valve Casings: Furnish one steel, tee-handle shutoff
rod(s) with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve,
and slotted end matching curb valve for Project.
D. Brass Ball Valves:

provide product indicated on Drawings comparable product by one of
Mentioned in approved vendor list.
3. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 1035 kPa.
c. CWP Rating: 4140 kPa.
d. Body Design: Two piece.
e. Body Material: Forged brass.
f. Ends: Threaded or solder joint if indicated.
g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
h. Stem: Brass.
________________________________________________________________________________
i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full
k. Valves in first paragraph below are available in NPS 1/4 to NPS 4
(DN 8 to DN 100).
E. Iron Ball Valves:

3. Description:

b. CWP Rating: 1380 kPa.
c. Body Design: Split body.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Ball: Stainless steel.
i. Port: Full.
F. Plastic Ball Valves:

products by one of Mentioned in approved vendor list.
2. Description:

b. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum.
c. Body Material: PVC.
d. Type: Union.
e. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
f. Port: Full.
G. Iron Gate Valves, Resilient Seated:

3. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C509.

b. Pressure Rating: 1380 kPa minimum.
c. Body Material: Ductile or gray iron with bronze trim.
________________________________________________________________________________
d. End Connections: Mechanical joint or push-on joint.

e. Interior Coating: Comply with AWWA C550.
f. Body Design: Nonrising stem.
g. Operator: Stem nut.
h. Disc: Solid wedge with resilient coating.
H. Iron Gate Valve Casings:
1. Standard: AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings.

2. Top Section: Adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial
of valve.
3. Barrel: Approximately 125-mm diameter.
4. Plug: With lettering "WATER."
5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve.
6. Base Support: Concrete collar.
I. Operating Wrenches for Iron Gate Valve Casings: Furnish one steel, tee-
handle operating wrench (es) with one pointed end, stem of length to
operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut for
Project.
J. Iron Gate Valves, NRS:

3. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.

c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: All bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.
g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
K. Iron Gate Valves, OS&Y:

3. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.

________________________________________________________________________________
c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: All bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.
g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
41.6 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Control Valves:

3. Description: Pilot-operation, diaphragm-type, single-seated main water
control valve. Include small pilot control valve, restrictor device,
specialty fittings, and sensor piping.
a. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or

FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.
b. Pattern: Angle-valve design.
c. Trim: Stainless steel.
d. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 1035 kPa minimum.
e. End Connections: Threaded for DN 50 and smaller; flanged for
DN 65 and larger.
4. Capacities and Characteristics:
a. Size: refer to current project.
b. Design Flow Rate: refer to current project.

c. Design Inlet Pressure: refer to current project.
d. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: refer to current project.
41.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

3. Description: self-cleaning type with pressure regulating feature and
200PSI resistance pressure. Molded-plastic body, normally closed,
diaphragm type with manual-flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac
solenoid.

________________________________________________________________________________
41.8 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES
A. Description: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and

designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig
(17 to 20 kPa).
41.9 SCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 115-mm diameter dial, dial range of
two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet.
41.10 QUICK COUPLERS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly.

Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded
or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-
11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key.
1. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include one

matching key(s).
41.11 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES
A. Freestanding Emitters/bubblers: Device to deliver water at approximately

100 kPa.
1. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control.

2. Riser to Emitter/bubbler: PE or PVC flexible tubing.
a. Mounting Height: aboveground to nozzle.
b. Dripline with built in emitter to be 16mm with 1.14 wall thickness
with pressure compensating/non-return feature
B. Manifold Emitter/bubbler Systems: Manifold with tubing and

emitters/bubbler.
1. Manifold: With multiple outlets to deliver water to emitters.
a. Body Material: Plastic.

b. Outlet Caps: Plastic, for outlets without installed tubing.
c. Operation: Automatic pressure compensating.
d. Dripline with built in emitter to be 16mm with 1.14 wall thickness
with pressure compensating/non-return feature
2. Emitter: Device to deliver water at approximately 100 kPa.
a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control.

________________________________________________________________________________
a. Manifold:
1) Design Flow: as approved catalogue.

2) Number of Outlets: Four.
b. Emitter No.:
1) Flow: 3.6 and 1.6 L/min at approximately 100 kPa.

2) Mounting Height: At ground.
C. Off-Ground Supports: Plastic stakes.
D. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, DN 20, with

corrosion-resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to
approximately 100 kPa
E. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal

parts.
F. Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant

internal parts.
Insert other irrigation specialties and devices here.
41.12 CONTROLLERS
A. Description:
1. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is

variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual
or automatic operation of each station.
2. Exterior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4, weatherproof, with
locking cover and two matching keys; include provision for grounding.
a. Body Material: Enameled-steel sheet metal or plastic.

b. Mounting: Freestanding type for concrete base.
3. Interior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, drip proof, with
locking cover and two matching keys.
a. Body Material: Enameled-steel sheet metal or plastic.

b. Mounting: Freestanding type for concrete base.
4. Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse.

________________________________________________________________________________
5. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic

operations to skip operation any day in timer period, to operate every
other day, or to operate two or more times daily.
a. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without

disturbing preset automatic operation.
b. Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically
powers timing device during power outages.
c. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and
primary power.
6. Moisture Sensor: Adjustable from one to seven days, to shut off water
flow during rain.
7. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors;
insulated cable; suitable for direct burial.
a. Feeder-Circuit Cables: SMFOC from centralized server to each

controllers.
b. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum,

between controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded
different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jackets of
different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench.
c. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of
insulating, spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin
moisture seal; suitable for direct burial.
8. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete not less than 900 by 600
by 100 mm thick, and 150 mm greater in each direction than overall
dimensions of controller. Include opening for wiring.
9. Controller shall include external communication cordage to Ethernet

interface through IP triple play system by centralized Server.
10. Controller shall include fiber converter and all accessories.
11. Controller station number as mentioned in irrigation control wiring

diagrams.
12. Controller can be programmed to be many level of security (at least

two level).
13. Have at least 2 languages (Arabic and English)
14. Each controller have at least 15% additional space and have at least
10% additional space in case of not specified in drawings or other
consultant documents.

________________________________________________________________________________
41.13 CENTRAL COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The central computer system shall be provided and installed as a complete

and operational system including, but not limited to the computer, printer,
display, system interface components, uninterruptable power source with
line surge and interference protection, voltage stabilization, software,
documentation.
B. The central computer control system manufacturer shall provide complete

operation and service training to the Owners responsible managing
employee.
C. The central computer shall be compatible with irrigation system and

Irrigation software, moreover internal specification shall be not limited and
not less than the following:-
• Internal storage not less than 500 G,
• Processor 4 core 30 MB cash 3.5 GHz,
• External memory 2x4 G and expandable to 16 G.
• Win 10 or 2015 server,
• 42” LED monitor screen.
D. Software license: shall be unlimited license sufficient to additional controller

within 15% spare.
41.14 BOXES VALVES
A. Plastic Boxes:
1. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping;
designed for installing flush with grade.
a. Size: As required for valves and service.

b. Shape: Round.
c. Sidewall Material: PE.
d. Cover Material: PE.
1) Lettering: VALVE BOX
B. Polymer-Concrete Boxes:
1. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping;
designed for installing flush with grade.
a. Size: As required for valves and service.

________________________________________________________________________________
b. Shape: Round.
c. Sidewall Material: Polymer concrete with lateral and vertical
sidewall design loading of 2268 kg minimum over 254 by 254 mm
square.
d. Cover Material: Polymer concrete with cover design loading of
2268 kg minimum over 254 by 254 mm square.
1) Lettering: VALVE BOX
C. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 19 mm

minimum to 75 mm maximum.
41.15 Irrigation control network
A. Control cables: shall be isolated with suitable cross section according to

contractor calculations to consultant approval, also not less that as indicated
in drawings.
B. COMMUNICATION WIRE
• Communication wire shall be Paige Electric fully jacketed, 2 conductor, type UF,
communication cable. All splices in the communication wire shall be made at
the field satellite or in an approved junction box marked "ELECTRICAL".
• All control equipment shall be fitted with maximum manufacturer recommended

surge, lightning, & grounding protection.
C. DIRECT BURIAL WIRE
• All direct burial wire shall be Type UF, 600 PVC insulated, solid copper, and
shall be sized and color coded as indicated on the plans.
• All wire splices and underground connections shall be made with an approved
waterproof connector, and shall be made within a junction box, valve box, or
controller pedestal.
• All high voltage power supply and control wiring shall be performed in
accordance with all codes and ordinances regulating this work.
• All control wire shall be fully jacketted, 1 conductor, type UF, #14 AWG running
from each valve-in-head sprinkler to the nearest controlling field satellite.
• All common wire shall be fully jacketted, 1 conductor, type UF, #12 AWG.
• Where possible, the contractor shall install all power and low voltage control
wires to the side of, and in the same trench as, the mainline pipe.
• Where more than one wire is installed in a trench, the wires shall be bundled
and taped together at 10' intervals.

________________________________________________________________________________
• All wires shall have a 36" expansion loop provided at all changes of direction
and at 300' intervals.
• All direct burial wire shall be Paige Electric.
D. WIRE CONNECTORS
• All low voltage wire connections shall be made with North Star Industries #SK
14-12G.
E. Conduits : shall be not less than 25 mm (if applicable)
PART 42 - EXECUTION
42.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31

"Earthwork."
B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 300 mm below finished
grades, except 150 mm below subgrade under pavement and slabs.
C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or

crushed stone, graded from 19 to 75 mm, to 300 mm below grade. Cover
gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill
remainder with excavated material.
D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the

following:
1. Irrigation Main Piping: 450 mm below average local frost depth,

whichever is deeper.
2. Circuit Piping: 300 mm.
3. Drain Piping: 300 mm.
4. Sleeves: 600 mm.
42.2 PREPARATION
A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain

Architect's approval before excavation.

________________________________________________________________________________
A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of

piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved
on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain
valves.
C. Install piping free of sags and bends.
D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve

servicing.
E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other

components with DN 50 or smaller pipe connection.
G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other

components with DN 65 or larger pipe connection.
H. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774 and

ASTM F 690.
I. Install expansion loops in control-valve boxes for plastic piping.
J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or

depressions.
K. Install ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600.
L. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 5 deg C. Allow
joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 5 deg C before
testing.
M. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure
gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground or in
control-valve boxes.
N. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and

circuit valves aboveground or in control-valve boxes.
O. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks.
P. Install sleeves made of Schedule 80 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
Q. Install transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the

following:
________________________________________________________________________________
1. Underground Piping:
a. DN 40 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings.

b. DN 50 and Larger: AWWA transition couplings.
2. Aboveground Piping:
a. DN 50 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition [fittings] [unions].

b. DN 50 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits with one plastic
flange.
R. Install dielectric fittings for dissimilar-metal pipe connections according to the

following:
1. Underground Piping:
a. DN 50 and Smaller: Dielectric coupling or dielectric nipple.

b. DN 65 and Larger: Prohibited except in control-valve box.
2. Aboveground Piping:
a. DN 50 and Smaller: Dielectric union.

b. DN 65 to DN 100: Dielectric flange.
c. DN 125 and Larger: Dielectric flange kit.
3. Piping in Control-Valve Boxes:
a. DN 50 and Smaller: Dielectric union.

b. DN 65 to DN 100: Dielectric flange.
c. DN 125 and Larger: Dielectric flange kit.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and
valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads

unless dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that
are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked
or open welds.
________________________________________________________________________________
D. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
E. Ductile-Iron Piping Gasketed Joints: Comply with AWWA C600 and

AWWA M41.
F. Copper-Tubing Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper

Tube Handbook," using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal.
G. Copper-Tubing Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux to

tube end unless otherwise indicated. Construct joints according to
ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder
alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
H. PE Piping Fastener Joints: Join with insert fittings and bands or fasteners
according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.
I. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with
clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
J. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join
pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners,

primers, and solvent cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC
pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-
than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to
ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
A. Underground Curb Valves: Install in curb-valve casings with tops flush with
grade.
B. Underground Iron Gate Valves, Resilient Seat: Comply with AWWA C600
and AWWA M44. Install in valve casing with top flush with grade.
1. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints.
C. Aboveground Valves: Install as components of connected piping system.

________________________________________________________________________________
D. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in boxes for automatic control valves or

aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full-size valved bypass.
E. Throttling Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic

control valves.
F. Drain Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control

valves.
42.6 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding emitters on pipe riser to mounting height indicated.
B. Install manifold emitter systems with tubing to emitters. Plug unused

manifold outlets. Install emitters on off-ground supports at height indicated.
C. Install multiple-outlet emitter systems with tubing to outlets. Plug unused

emitter outlets. Install outlets on off-ground supports at height indicated.
D. Install drip tubes with direct-attached emitters on ground.
E. Install drip tubes with remote-discharge on ground with outlets on off-ground

supports at height indicated.
F. Install off-ground supports of length required for indicated mounted height of

device.
G. Install application pressure regulators in piping near device being protected,

and aboveground in control-valve boxes.
H. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and aboveground
in control-valve boxes.
42.7 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install interior controllers on floor.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items
to be embedded.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install exterior freestanding controllers on precast

concrete bases.

________________________________________________________________________________
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items
to be embedded.
C. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 51 mm

below or beside piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than
recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve
under paved areas.
42.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 33 Section "Water

Distribution" for water supply from exterior water service piping, water
meters, protective enclosures, and backflow preventers. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service

and maintenance.
C. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves.
42.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate

equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller.
1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units,

inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and
emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground,

detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of
trenches. See Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for warning tapes.

representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.

________________________________________________________________________________
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate
controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system
operation.
D. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
42.11 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's

2. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the
Contract Documents.
3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's
submittal.
42.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust settings of controllers.
42.13 DEMONSTRATION

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control
valves and controllers].
A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system

operating pressure.

________________________________________________________________________________
B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges

or unions instead of joints indicated.
C. Aboveground irrigation main piping, DN 100 and smaller, shall be one of the
following:
1. Galvanized-steel pipe and galvanized-steel pipe nipples; galvanized,

gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Type L) hard copper tube, wrought- or cast-copper fittings, and brazed
joints.
3. Schedule 80, PVC pipe; socket-type PVC fittings; and solvent-
cemented joints.
4. Schedule 80, PVC pipe; Schedule 80, threaded PVC fittings; and
threaded joints.
D. Aboveground irrigation main piping, DN 125and larger, shall be one of the

following:
1. Galvanized-steel pipe and galvanized-steel pipe nipples; galvanized,

gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented
joints.
threaded joints.
E. Underground irrigation main piping, DN 100 and smaller , shall be one of the
following:
1. DN 80 and DN 100 ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron,

mechanical-joint fittings, glands, bolts, and nuts; and gasketed joints.
2. DN 80 and DN 100) ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-
on-joint fittings and gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. Type L soft copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
4. DN 100 PE pressure pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion or socket-type fittings;
and heat-fusion joints.
5. Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints.
threaded joints.
7. SDR 21, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 80, PVC socket fittings;
and solvent-cemented joints.
F. Underground irrigation main piping, DN 125, shall be one of the following:
1. DN 150 and larger ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron,

mechanical-joint fittings, glands, bolts, and nuts; and gasketed joints.
2. DN 150 and larger ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-
on-joint fittings and gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. PE pressure pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion fittings; and heat-fusion joints.
________________________________________________________________________________

joints.
G. Circuit piping, DN 50, shall be one of the following:
1. SIDR 7, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and fastener
joints.
2. DR 9, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE butt, heat-fusion, or PE socket-type
fittings; and heat-fusion joints.
joints.
H. Circuit piping, DN 65 to DN 100, shall be one of the following:
1. SIDR 7, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and banded
or fastener joints.
2. DR 9, PE, controlled OD pipe; PE socket or butt-fusion fittings; and
heat-fusion joints. DN 80 pipe and fittings if DN 65 pipe and fittings are
not available.
joints.
5. Option: Plastic swing-joint assemblies, with offsets for flexible joints,

manufactured for this application.
I. Drain piping shall be one of the following:
1. SIDR 9, 11.5, or 15, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe;
and banded or fastener joints.
joints.
3. SDR 21, 26, or 32.5, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
42.15 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Underground, Shut off-Duty Valves: Use the following:
1. DN 50 and Smaller: Curb valve, curb-valve casing, and shutoff rod.

2. DN 80 and Larger: Iron gate valve, resilient seated; iron gate valve
casing; and operating wrenches.

________________________________________________________________________________
B. Throttling-Duty Valves:
1. DN 50 and Smaller: Plastic automatic control valve.

2. DN 50 and Smaller: Plastic ball valve.
3. DN 65 and DN 80: Plastic automatic control valve.
4. DN 65 and DN 80: Iron ball valve.
3.16 Valve boxes shall be used as durable, rigid enclosures for

valves or other irrigation system
components requiring subsurface protection for installation or
maintenance. The valve box shall be made of structural foam HDPE
resin that is resistant to UV light, weather, moisture and chemical
action of soils. Valve box body shall be composed of 100% recycled
HDPE. The super jumbo rectangular body shall have knock‐outs
molded into the sides that can be readily removed. The knock‐outs
shall remain an integral part of the body unless removed to run pipes
or wires through the valve box. The valve box shall have corrugated
sides. The valve box shall have a grooved feature on one side, just
below the lid at the top of the box, for inserting a shovel blade or other
prying tool to provide easy lid removal. This is useful following
compaction of the surrounding soil or after the eventual accumulation
of thatch over the valve box. Boxes shall have a stepped feature on
the bottom that securely interlocks two boxes together when mated
bottom‐to‐bottom for use in a deep installation. Lids shall have
beveled edges to minimize potential damage from lawn equipment.
Lids shall be clearly marked with the words “Irrigation Control Valve”
molded onto the top. Lids shall have a marking area measuring at
least 6.0" by 2.0" that is suitable for branding or other means of
identification. The locking bolt, washer and clip shall be made of
stainless steel.
3.17 Warranty:
one year warranty for all plant categories and all irrigation items.
END OF SECTION

All Specs - P34 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

All Specs - P34 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

MIVIDA Development Office Park

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE- ARCH

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication,

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified

G. Material test reports.

H. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete,"

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: with power float.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

1. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I zinc coated

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II Type III Type V

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM

H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or admixture in concrete,

D. Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler

E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES